The 3rd ICETIA (2016)

Preface: The 3rd International Conference on Engineering, Technology and Industrial
Application (ICETIA)
Citation: AIP Conference Proceedings 1855, 010001 (2017); doi: 10.1063/1.4985445

View online: http://dx.doi.org/10.1063/1.4985445
View Table of Contents: http://aip.scitation.org/toc/apc/1855/1
Published by the American Institute of Physics
Articles you may be interested in

Optimizing cutting conditions on sustainable machining of aluminum alloy to minimize power consumption
AIP Conference Proceedings 1855, 020002 (2017); 10.1063/1.4985447
Performance of bulk oil circuit breaker (BOCB) influenced by its parameters (Case study at the substation of
Bogor Baru)
Analysis of loss of time value during road maintenance project

Effective production control in an automotive industry: MRP vs. demand-driven MRP

Holding time effect of pack carburizing on fatigue characteristic of v-notch shaft steel specimens
Replacement model of city bus: A dynamic programming approach

PREFACE: The 3rd International Conference on Engineering,
Technology and Industrial Application (ICETIA)
The 3rd International Conference on Engineering, Technology and Industrial Application (ICETIA) was
held on 7-8 December 2016 at Alila Hotel, Surakarta, Central Java, Indonesia. It was organized by the
Engineering Faculty of Universitas Muhammadiyah Surakarta which is known as the biggest private
university in Central Java, Indonesia.
The GREEN PROCESS, MATERIAL AND ENERGY: A SUSTAINABLE SOLUTION FOR
CLIMATE CHANGE is selected as the theme of the conference. This is driven by current situation
where the climate change has caused global warming on the globe leading to human life disruptions in
numerous aspects. The development of green technology is one of the solutions proposed to prevent
pollution that leads to climate change and to promote a sustainable environment. The green technology
discussed in this conference covered multiple aspects including buildings, transportation systems,
industrial process, information system, and water management, aiming to initiate multi-dimensional
solutions to address climate change.
The conference has attracted 250 papers to be presented in the conference with more than 350
participants from numerous affiliations including scientists, industries, universities and government
bodies. From these papers, 89 papers are then selected to be published in this proceeding. The papers
presented here are organized by grouping them into six sub-theme namely: (i) Sustainable Industrial
Process and System Optimisation, (ii) Product Design, Material and Building Engineering, (iii)
Sustainable Infrastructure and Built Environment, (iv) Preservation, Conservation and Water
Management, (v) Green Computing, and (vi) Green Energy.
Finally, the papers presented in this proceeding are expected to contribute in promoting new
perspectives in addressing the climate change from a broader perspective of technology.
Surakarta, Indonesia
7 March 2017
Editorial Board
Dr. Hari Prasetyo (Chief)
Dr. Munajat Tri Nugroho
Dr. Nurul Hidayati
Dr. Eko Setiawan
Dr. Tri Widayatno
Dr. Wisnu Setiawan
Dr. Fajar Suryawan
Green Process, Material, and Energy: A Sustainable Solution for Climate Change
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 010001-1–010001-1; doi: 10.1063/1.4985445
Published by AIP Publishing. 978-0-7354-1529-4/$30.00
010001-1
Preface: The 3rd International Conference on Engineering, Technology and Industrial
Application (ICETIA)


Bogor Baru)



PREFACE: The 3rd International Conference on Engineering,
Technology and Industrial Application (ICETIA)
The 3rd International Conference on Engineering, Technology and Industrial Application (ICETIA) was
held on 7-8 December 2016 at Alila Hotel, Surakarta, Central Java, Indonesia. It was organized by the
Engineering Faculty of Universitas Muhammadiyah Surakarta which is known as the biggest private
university in Central Java, Indonesia.
The GREEN PROCESS, MATERIAL AND ENERGY: A SUSTAINABLE SOLUTION FOR
CLIMATE CHANGE is selected as the theme of the conference. This is driven by current situation
where the climate change has caused global warming on the globe leading to human life disruptions in
numerous aspects. The development of green technology is one of the solutions proposed to prevent
pollution that leads to climate change and to promote a sustainable environment. The green technology
discussed in this conference covered multiple aspects including buildings, transportation systems,
industrial process, information system, and water management, aiming to initiate multi-dimensional
solutions to address climate change.
The conference has attracted 250 papers to be presented in the conference with more than 350
participants from numerous affiliations including scientists, industries, universities and government
bodies. From these papers, 89 papers are then selected to be published in this proceeding. The papers
presented here are organized by grouping them into six sub-theme namely: (i) Sustainable Industrial
Process and System Optimisation, (ii) Product Design, Material and Building Engineering, (iii)
Sustainable Infrastructure and Built Environment, (iv) Preservation, Conservation and Water
Management, (v) Green Computing, and (vi) Green Energy.
Finally, the papers presented in this proceeding are expected to contribute in promoting new
perspectives in addressing the climate change from a broader perspective of technology.
Surakarta, Indonesia
7 March 2017
Editorial Board
Dr. Hari Prasetyo (Chief)
Dr. Munajat Tri Nugroho
Dr. Nurul Hidayati
Dr. Eko Setiawan
Dr. Tri Widayatno
Dr. Wisnu Setiawan
Dr. Fajar Suryawan
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 010001-1–010001-1; doi: 10.1063/1.4985445
010001-1
Performance of bulk oil circuit breaker (BOCB) influenced by its parameters (Case
study at the substation of Bogor Baru)
Arief Goeritno and Syofyan Rasiman


Preface: The 3rd International Conference on Engineering, Technology and Industrial Application (ICETIA)


Performance of Bulk Oil Circuit Breaker (BOCB)
Influenced by Its Parameters (Case Study at the
Substation of Bogor Baru)
Arief Goeritno1, a), Syofyan Rasiman2
1Full-Time Lecturer at the Department of Electrical Engineering, Faculty
of Engineering, Bogor Ibn Khaldun University, Indonesia
Jl. K.H. Sholeh Iskandar km.2 Kedung Badak, Tanah Sareal, City of Bogor 16132
2
State
a)
Electricity Company, Training and Education Center, Cibogo, Indonesia
Corresponding author: arief.goeritno@ft.uika-bogor.ac.id
Abstract. Performance examination of the bulk oil circuit breaker that is influenced by its parameters at
the Substation of Bogor Baru (the State Electricity Company = PLN) has been done. It is found that (1)
dielectric strength of oil still qualifies as an insulating and cooling medium, because the average value of the
measurement result is still above the minimum value allowed, where the minimum limit of 80 kV/2.5 cm or
32 kV/cm; (2) the simultaneity RIWKH&%¶VFRQWDFts is still eligible, so that the BOCB can still be operated,
because the difference of time between the highest and lowest values ZKHQ WKH %2&%¶V FRQWDFWV are
opened/closed are less than ('t<) 10 milliseconds (if meeting the PLN standards as recommended by
Alsthom); and (3) the parameter of resistance according to the standards, where (i) the resistance of insulation
has a value far above the allowed threshold, while the minimum standards are DERYH0ȍLIPHHWing
the ANSI standards) or on the value oI0ȍLIPHHWing PLN standards), (ii) the resistance of contacts
has a value far above the allowed threshold, while the minimum standards are below 350 μȍ LI PHHWing
ANSI standards) or on the value of 200 μȍLIPHHWing PLN standards). The resistance of grounding is equal
to the maximum limit specified, while the maximum standard is RQ WKH YDOXH RI ȍ LI PHHWing PLN
standard).
INTRODUCTION
The electrical power systems is said to work reliably if the proficiency level systems are capable of
providing electrical power required on an ongoing basis with the quality of the voltage and frequency standards.
To support the ongoing provision, a reliable connector system between the networks is required [1]. The most
important part of the connector system is the circuit breaker [2]. The reliability of bulk oil circuit breaker
(BOCB) is an indicator of the reliability of the electric power system. So, the performance of BOCB plays an
important role. The performance of BOCB can be known if ongoing monitoring is done regularly [3].
The installation of BOCB continuously and for a long time will reduce the reliability of the BOCB [4]. The
reliability level of BOCB can be measured through the testing of its parts; among other is the distance of contact
points when not connected and its support system [3]. The distance of contact points when they are not
connected indicates the existence of two distinct poles voltage continuously. The existence of a standard
distance is a parameter that characterizes the BOCB characteristics [5]. BOCB with the voltage system of 170
kV equipped with a medium of bulk oil is the device of CB that has become part of the electrical power network
system [6] in the Substation of Bogor Baru. To ensure its reliable operation, the BOCB should be continnuously
tested and evaluated in terms of its performance after a long time operation based on its parameters [7].
The purpose of this study is to obtain the parameters that influence the performance of CB mediated by bulk
oil, which include: (a) dielectric strength of the oil from the measurement, (b) simultaneity for opening/closing
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020001-1–020001-11; doi: 10.1063/1.4985446
020001-1
of WKH &%¶V FRQWDFWV, and (c) the resistance of the insulation, contact, and grounding from the measurements
meeting ANSI (American National Standards Institute) and the standard of PLN.
MATERIALS AND METHOD OF RESEARCH
Material of Research
Bulk Oil Circuit Breaker (BOCB)
Circuit Breaker (CB) with a lot of oil is generally used in in systems with voltages up to 245 kV. The
functions of the oil in this type of CB are: (i) reducer of an electric spark for termination contacts and (ii) an
insulating material between the parts with the voltage and the body. There are two types of CB with a lot of oil,
namely (i) plain break type and (ii) arc control device type. The plain-break oil circuit breaker is the earliest
type from which all other circuit breakers have developed. The physical cross-section of CB with a lot of oil [8]
is shown by Fig. 1.
Explanation of (a) and (b)

1 Tank
2 Oil
3 Moving contact
4 Gas formed by the decomposition
of the oil dielectric (hydrogen
70%)
5 Limiting devices for an electric
arc
6 Fixed contact
7 Conductor from the copper
8 Rod holders (from fiberglass)
9 Bushing filled with oil or type of
capasitors
10 Conduktor (silver coated copper)
11 Core of an electric arc
12 Gas of ionization results (b) arc control device type
(a) plain break type 13 Bubbles of gas
FIGURE 1. Physical cross-section of CB with a lot of oil (bulk oil)
Physical forms of the high voltage bulk oil circuit breaker [9] at the Substation of Bogor Baru, as shown in Fig.
2.
FIGURE 2. The high voltage bulk oil circuit breaker at the Substation of Bogor Baru
Explanation:
(1) oil tank as a chamber for connecting/disconnecting; (2) bushing; (3) indication box for close-open
(4) control panel of BOCB; (5) compressor; (6) emergency handle to open the BOCB manually
020001-2
Based on the Fig. 2, the physical forms of the high voltage BOCB at the Substation of Bogor Baru
play an important role as an equipment that is connected or disconnected for the network load from its
source and its placement at the Substation of Bogor Baru in strategic locations. Besides that, necessary
information about the technical specifications that shows the ability of the electrical equipment [9,10]
includes:
Merk : General Electric (GE) Type of FKA 169-16000-3
Nominal voltage : 150 kV
Breaking capacity : 25 kA
Nominal current : 1,200 A
The drive system mechanically aiding the compressed air from the compressor.
Based on the technical specifications shown, the bulk oil circuit breaker is able to support the
existence and function of the Substation of Bogor and the effort to maintain the supply of power to the
consumers.
Criteria of the Period of Time for an Overhaul against the CB
The period of time for an overhaul against the CB is largely determined by criteria. The criteria of the
period of time for an overhaul against the CB [10] are presented in Table 1.
TABLE 1. Criteria of the period of time for an overhaul against the CB
Kind of the CB Periode of Time for an Overhaul
Air Blast Circuit no later than 9 (nine) years or when the total
Breaker number of termination (n) is 4,500
Low Oil Content no later than 6 (six) years or when the total
Circuit Breaker number of termination (n) is 1,500
Bulk Oil Content
DFFRUGLQJWRWKHPDQXIDFWXUHU¶VLQVWUXFWLRQV
Circuit Breaker
Mediated by Gas of SF6 DFFRUGLQJWRWKHPDQXIDFWXUHU¶VLQVWUXFWLRQV
The total number of termination (n) is the time required by the CB to break the flow of current. When
the termination of the load current has occurred or manipulated by the network, then the value of n-1.
When the opening of CB due to the fault current is greater than the nominal current of the CB, then n ,
but expressed by n¶ (n accents) and its value depends on the faulted current [10,1,11] and is calculated by
the following equation (1).
,
Q
ቀ, ቁ (1)

Where: I1 = breaking capacity current of BOCB and I2= faulted current.
The value of I1 can be obtained from the data of BOCB or calculated by equation (2).
6
, (2)
ξÂ9SK-SK
Where: I = current, [kV]; s = capacity, [MVA]; and ܸ௣௛ି௣௛ = phase to phase voltage, [kV].
The value of I2 or faulted current can be measured at the centers of power plant or substations that were
equipped with tools such as ³2VFLOORSHU±7XUERJUDSK³ In terms of testing the oil of BOCB, a reference or
standard was used. The comparison between the standard "ANSI" and "PLN" [10,9] is shown in Table 2.
TABLE 2. Comparison between the standard "ANSI" and "PLN"

Standards
Parameters in BOCB
ANSI PLN
Operation Frequency (hertz) 50 50
Dielectric Strength (kV) in 60 seconds 50 40
Velocity of Opening the CB (milliseconds) 60 100
Velocity of Closing the CB (miliseconds) 120 120
5HVLVWDQFHRI&RQWDFWȍ < 350 200
5HVLVWDQFHRI,QVXODWLRQ0ȍ > 2000 2000
020001-3
The characteristics of oil for the circuit breaker shall be arranged according to the standard. The limits
for the exploitation of the oil for the bulk oil circuit breaker [10, 9] are shown in Table 3.
TABLE 3. The limits to exploitation of the oil for the bulk oil circuit breaker
Steps to be taken,
Properties of the oil for Circuit Oil has been if the columns 3
No. New Oil Standards used
breaker used and 4
not fulfilled
1 Dielectric strength (breakdown
voltage):
(a) 0 to less than or equal to 60 kV 80 kV/cm IEC-156/1963
Greater than or
(b) 60 to150 kV 110 kV/cm filtered IEC-296/1969
equal to 200
(c) greater than or equal to 150 kV 140 kV/cm BS-148/1959
kV/cm
(d) 380 kV 180 kV/cm
2 Acidity (mg KOH/g) Maximum 1 0,02-0,04 i) 0,4-1 ASTM D877
ii) filtered, if > 1
iii) be replaced
3 Water content (ppm, part per Maximum 30 null - -
million)
0
4 Viscosity (cst) in 30 C 22 18 filtered BS-148 /1959
JISc-2320/78
5 Levels of sediment (%) 0,1 null filtered IEC-296/1969
6 Flash Point 146.1 0C - filtered BS-148/1959
(295 0F)
7 a) Color of oil mineral Maximum 3,5 Maximum 3.5 filtered ASTM D877
b) Color of ascarels Maximum 2,0 Maximum 2,0 filtered ASTM D877
The results of measurement against the resistance of insulation of the CB are also affected by the
cleanliness of the insulator surface of bushing, temperature, age, and humidity in the surrounding air. The
limitation for resistance of insulation is in accordance with the Books of Maintenance Equipment [10],
namely 3/1¶V VWDQGDUG that is According to VDE standard (catalogue 228/4), the minimum insulation
resistance at the RSHUDWLQJWHPSHUDWXUHFDOFXODWHGNLORYROWHTXDOWR0ȍMega ohm)", with a record
of 1 kilovolt equal to the phase to ground voltage. Leakage current is allowed per kilovolt equal to 1 mill
amperes.
Method of Research
For the determination of the its parameters that influenced the performance of the CB [10], the
following aspects are measured (i) dielectric strength of the oil, and (ii) velocity and simultaneity for
FORVLQJ RU RSHQLQJ WKH %2&%¶V FRQWDFWV, and (iii) values of resistance of insulation, contacts, and
grounding.
Parameters of Dielectric Strength for the Oil of CB¶V
Measuring against the value of dielectric strength of oil aided by a tool of breakdown voltage, brand
of Hipotonics model OC60D with a certain pressure of oil [10]. Flowchart to measure the value of
dielectric strength of oil, as shown in Fig. 3.
VWDUW
'HILQLQJ9DOXHRI0LQLPXP6WDQGDUG &RPSDULQJ9DOXH
RIWKH'LHOHFWULF6WUHQJWKRI2LO EHWZHHQ0LQLPXP6WDQGDUG
DW%2&% DQG0HDVXULQJRIWKH'LHOHFWULF6WUHQJWKRI2LO
0HDVXULQJ9DOXH 0HDVXULQJ9DOXH!
RIWKH'LHOHFWULF6WUHQJWKRI2LO 0LQLPXP6WDQGDUG9DOXH" QR
\HV
*RRG&RQGLWLRQ
HQG
FIGURE 3. Flowchart to measure the value of dielectric strength of oil
020001-4
Parameters of Velocity and Simultaneity for Opening/Closing of the Contacts
7RREWDLQWKHSDUDPHWHUVRIYHORFLW\DQGVLPXOWDQHLW\IRURSHQLQJFORVLQJRIWKH&%¶VFRQWDFWVHDFK
phase when closing or opening condition. The PLN standards [10] that adopted from the
Recommendation of Alsthom indicated, that the difference of time between the highest and lowest values
DWHDFKSKDVHZKHQWKH&%¶VFRQWDFWVRSHQRUFORVH't) less than 10 milliseconds ('t <10 milliseconds).
Flowchart to obtain the parameteUVRIYHORFLW\DQGVLPXOWDQHLW\IRURSHQLQJFORVLQJRIWKH&%¶VFRQWDFWV
[10], as shown in Fig. 4.
VWDUW
'HILQLQJ9DOXHRI0D[LPXP6WDQGDUG &RPSDULQJ9DOXHEHWZHHQ0D[LPXP6WDQGDUG
RIWKH9HORFLW\DQG6LPXOWDQHLW\IRU DQG0HDVXULQJRIWKH9HORFLW\DQG6LPXOWDQHLW\
2SHQLQJ&ORVLQJRIWKH&RQWDFWV IRU2SHQLQJFORVLQJRIWKH&RQWDFWV
0HDVXULQJ9DOXH
0HDVXULQJ9DOXH
RI9HORFLW\DQG6LPXOWDQHLW\
0D[LPXP6WDQGDUG9DOXH" QR
IRU2SHQLQJ&ORVLQJRIWKH&RQWDFWV
\HV
*RRG&RQGLWLRQ
HQG
FIGURE 4. )ORZFKDUWWRREWDLQWKHSDUDPHWHUVRIYHORFLW\DQGVLPXOWDQHLW\IRURSHQLQJFORVLQJRIWKH&%¶VFRQWDFWV
Schematic diagram to obtain the parameters of velocity and simultaneity for opening/closing of the
&%¶VFRQWDFWV [12], as shown in Fig. 5.
FIGURE 5. Schematic diagram WRREWDLQWKHSDUDPHWHUVRIYHORFLW\DQGVLPXOWDQHLW\IRURSHQLQJFORVLQJRIWKH&%¶V

contacts
020001-5
Based on Fig. 5 indicated, that the measurements such as operating simultaneity contacts opening/closing
of CB¶V, when each pole opening or closing which is the difference of time (first and last) using a circuit-
breaker analyzer[10,12].
Parameters of Resistance of Insulation, Contacts, and Grounding
Flowchart of determination of the parameters of resistance of insulation, contacts, and grounding [10],
as shown in Fig. 6.
start start start
Defining Value Defining Value Defining Value

of Minimum Standard of Maximum Standard of Maximum Standard
of the Resistance of Insulation of the Resistance of Contacts of the Resistance of Grounding
Measuring Value Measuring Value Measuring Value

of the Resistance of Insulation of the Resistance of Contacts of the Resistance of Grounding
Comparing Value Comparing Value Comparing Value

between Maximum Standard between Maximum Standard between Maximum Standard
and Measuring of the Resistance of Insulation and Measuring of the Resistance of Contacts and Measuring of the Resistance of Grounding
Measuring Value > QR Measuring Value < QR Measuring Value < QR

Minimum Standard Value? Maximum Standard Value? Maximum Standard Value?
\HV \HV \HV
Good Condition Good Condition Good Condition
end end end
Resistance of the Insulation Resistance of the Contacts Resistance of the Grounding
FIGURE 6. Flowchart of determination of the parameters of resistance of insulation, contacts, and grounding
(i) Measurement againts the value of resistance of insulation

Measuring the value of resistance of insulation is obtained through the rare-step, the CB are opened
and closed. Opened conditions: (i) the measurements were made between the upper terminals (Ra, Sa,
and Ta) and the casing (body or grounding), (ii) the measurements were made between the bottom
terminals (Rb, Sb, and Tb) and the casing (body or the grounding), and (iii) the measurements were made
between the upper and buttom terminal (Ra-Rb, Sa-Sb, and Ta-Tb). Closed conditions: (i) the
measurements were made between the phase-R terminal (red, Ra+Rb) and the grounding, (ii) the
measurements were made between the phase-S terminal (yellow, Sa+Sb) and the grounding, and (iii) the
measurements were made between phase-T terminal (blue, Ta + Tb) and the grounding.
Schematic diagram for measurement to obtain the value of resistance of insulation [10], as shown in
Fig. 7.
020001-6
FIGURE 7. Schematic diagram for measurement to obtain the value of resistance of insulation
(ii) Measurement againts the value of resistance of contacts

(DFKSKDVHPHDVXUHGXVLQJWKHWRRORIRKPPHWHUZKHQWKH&%¶VFRQWDFWVFORVHG0HDVXUHPHQWVZHUH
performed twice with delay time is about 5 minutes. Schematic diagram for measurement to obtain the
value of resistance of contacts [12, 10], as shown in Fig. 8.
FIGURE 8. Schematic diagram for measurement to obtain the value of resistance of contacts
Based on Fig. 8 indicated, that measuring the contact resistance is usually done by using the principles
RI2KP¶VODZ [12]. According to the IEC 694, article 6.4.1 [12], the current value to use should be the
closest to the nominal current the interrupting chamber is designed for. If it is impossible to do so lower
currents can be used but not less than 50A to eliminate the galvanic effect that might affect the readings.
Special precautions should be observed when measuring, namely (a) the measured points have to be clean
and free of oxidation; (b) the measurement points should always be the same each time; and (c) perform
several consecutive tests and calculate the average[12].
(iii) Measurement againts the value of resistance of grounding

Measuring against the value of resistance of grounding aided by the instrument of resistance of
insulation with brands Kyuritsu Model 4102, where coupling to cables made of red, yellow, and green on
the terminal C, P, and E contained in the device [10]. The end of the red cable coupled to an iron rod
which was coded C1, the end of yellow cable coupled to the iron rod which was coded P1, while the end
of green cable is connected to the foot of the tower, the three planted in a straight line. Schematic
diagram for measurement to obtained the value of resistance of grounding [10], as shown in Fig. 9.
020001-7
FIGURE 9. Schematic diagram for measurement to obtain the value of resistance of grounding
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Parameters of Dielectric Strength for the Oil of CB

Besides pressure of oil, also made a measurement to dielectric strength (breakdown voltage) on bulk
oil circuit breaker [10]. The values of dielectric strength of oil at bulk oil circuit breaker, as shown in
Table 4.
TABLE 4. The values of dielectric strength of oil at bulk oil circuit breaker
Dielectric Strength of Oil
No. Explanation
at Bulk Oil Circuit Breaker
1 Phase-R x Using a tool of breakdown voltage, brand
1st measurement = 24.4 kV/2.5 mm Hipotonics model OC60D
2nd measurement = 26.75 kV/2.5 mm x 5HVXOWVDV3/1VWDQGDUG 80 kV/2.5 cm)
3rd measurement = 25.6 kV/2.5 mm x Pressure of Oil 53.1 kg/cm
Average = 107 kV/cm
2 Phase-S x Using a tool of breakdown voltage, brand
2nd measurement = 26.3 kV/2.5 mm x Results as 3/1VWDQGDUGN9FP
Average = 109 kV/cm
3 Phase-R x Using a tool of breakdown voltage, brand
2nd measurement = 26.05 kV/2.5 mm x 5HVXOWVDV3/1VWDQGDUGN9FP
Average = 105 kV/cm
Based on Table 4 indicated, that the dielectric strength of oil at BOCB still qualifies as an insulating
and cooling medium. The average value of the measurement result is still well above the minimum value
allowed, where the value of measurement results ranging in 105 to 109 kV/cm, while the minimum 80
kV/2.5 cm or 32 kV/cm.
Parameter of Velocity and Simultaneity for Opening/Closing of the Contacts

Measuring against the parameters of the velocity and simultaneity for opening/closing of the contacts
of BOCB is form schematic diagram and table of condition and time. Schematic diagram of the
SKHQRPHQDIRUWLPHRIRSHQLQJFORVLQJRIWKH&%¶VFRQWDFWVDVVKRZQLQ)LJ. 10.
020001-8
FIGURE 10. 6FKHPDWLFGLDJUDPRISKHQRPHQDIRURSHQLQJFORVLQJRIWKH%2&%¶VFRQWDFWV
Based on Fig. 10 indicated, that the phenomena for time of opening/closing of the contact of the
BOCB such a lapse of time. Condition and time of the phenomena for opening/closinJ RI WKH &%¶V
contacts, as shown in Table 5.
TABLE 5. &RQGLWLRQDQGWLPHRIWKHSKHQRPHQDIRURSHQLQJFORVLQJRIWKH&%¶VFRQWDFWV
Time (milliseconds to)
Condition
at Phase-R at Phase-S at Phase-T
A (open) 47.5 43.3 42.7
B (close) 383.8 381.5 383.6
C (open) 446.1 443.5 447.8
020001-9
Based on Table 5 indicated, that the difference of time for simultaneity by measuring, is:
(i) 't1 WKHGLIIHUHQFHRIWLPHEHWZHHQWKHKLJKHVWYDOXHDQGORZHVW5DQG7SKDVHVZKHQWKH&%¶VFRQWDFWV
opened = 47.5 - 42.7 = 4.8 milliseconds.
(ii) 't2 WKHGLIIHUHQFHRIWLPHEHWZHHQWKHKLJKHVWDQGORZHVW5DQG6SKDVHVZKHQWKH&%¶VFRQWDFWVFORVHG
383.8 ± 381.5 = 2.3 milliseconds.
(iii) 't3 WKHGLIIHUHQFHRIWLPHEHWZHHQWKHKLJKHVWDQGORZHVW7DQG6SKDVHVZKHQWKH&%¶VFRQWDFWVRSHQHG
447.8 ± 446.1 = 1.7 milliseconds.
Based on the PLN standards that adopted by the recommendation of Alsthom, that 't must less than 10 milliseconds
('t PLOOLVHFRQGV 7KHUHIRUH VLPXOWDQHLW\ RI WKH &%¶V FRQWDFWV VWLOO HOLJLEOH VR WKDW WKH %2&% FDQ VWLOO EH
operated.
Parameters of Resistance
Parameters of resistance that influence its characteristics include: (i) resistance of insulation, (ii) resistance of
contacts, and (iii) resistance of grounding. Parameters of resistance have been measured at the BOCB, as shown in
Table 6.
TABLE 6. Parameters of resistance has been measured at the BOCB
Phase-R Phase-S Phase-T
No. Point of Measurement
Initial End Initial End Initial End
1 Resistance of Insulation
(when the CB opened):
(a) Upper-bottom (0 30,600 30,600 34,000 34,000 29,300 29,300
(b) Upper-grounding (M 16,900 16,900 18,400 18,400 16,300 16,300
(c) Bottom-grounding
(M 16,300 16,300 18,200 18,200 16,100 16,100
2 Resistance of Contacts 1,039 1,039 699 699 946 946
3 Resistance of Grounding 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Based on Table 6 indicated, that the values of parameter of resistance according to standard criteria. The values
of parameter resistance of insulation measured at values well above the minimum allowed. Values of resistance of
insulation measured ranging in 16,100 tR0ȍZKHQWKH&%¶VFRQWDFWVRSHQHGZKLOHWKHPLQLPXPVWDQGDUGV
DWYDOXHVDERYH0ȍLIPHHWWR$16,VWDQGDUGVRURQWKHYDOXHRI0ȍLIPHHWWR3/1VWDQGDUGV7KH
values of parameter of resistance of the contact measured ranging in 946 to 1,039 ZKHQ WKH &%¶V FRQWDFWV
closed, while the minimum standards at values below 350 μȍLIPHHWWR$16,VWDQGDUGVRURQWKHYDOXHRIμȍ
LI PHHW WR 3/1 VWDQGDUGV 7KH YDOXHV RI SDUDPHWHU RI UHVLVWDQFH RI JURXQGLQJ PHDVXUHG DW ȍ ZKLOH WKH
PD[LPXPVWDQGDUGRQWKHYDOXHRIȍLIPHHWWR3/1VWDQGDUG
CONCLUSION
The conclusions that can be drawn related to the research objectives are: (1) Dielectric strength of oil still
qualifies as an insulating and cooling medium, because the average value of the measurement result is still above the
minimum value allowed, where the minimum limit of 80 kV/2.5 cm or 32 kV/cm; (2) simultaneity RIWKH%2&%¶V
contacts is still eligible, so that the BOCB can still be operated, because the 't (the difference of time between the
highest value and lowest ZKHQWKH%2&%¶VFRQWDFWVRSHQHGFORVHG is less than ('t<) 10 milliseconds (if meeting
the PLN standards adopted by the recommendation of Alsthom; and (3) the parameter of resistance according to the
standards, where (i) the resistance of insulation has a value far above the allowed threshold, while the minimum
standards are DWYDOXHVDERYH0ȍLIPHHWing $16,VWDQGDUGVRURQWKHYDOXHRI0ȍLIPHHWing PLN
standards), (ii) the resistance of contacts has a value far above the allowed threshold, while the minimum standards
at values below 350 μȍ LI PHHWing ANSI standards) or on the value of 200 μȍ LI PHHWing PLN standards), the
UHVLVWDQFHRIJURXQGLQJHTXDOWRWKHPD[LPXPOLPLWVSHFLILHGZKLOHWKHPD[LPXPVWDQGDUGRQWKHYDOXHRIȍLI
meeting PLN standard).
020001-10
REFERENCES
1. P. Choonhapran, Applications of High Voltage Circuit-Breakers and Development of Aging Models (Doktor-
Ingenieurs genehmigte Dissertation), Elektrotechnik und Informationstechnik ± der Technischen Universität
Darmstadt, Darmstadt 2007.
2. Hydroelectric Research and Technical Services Group, Facilities Instructions, Standards and Techniques
Volume 3-16: Maintenance of Power Circuit Breakers (Bureau of Reclamation - United States Department of
The Interior, Denver-Colorado, 1999), pp. 5-9.
3. A. Janssen, D. Makareinis and C. 6|OYHU ³,QWHUQDWLRQDO 6XUYH\V RQ &LUFXLW-Breaker Reliability Data for
SubsWDWLRQ DQG 6\VWHP 6WXGLHV´ LQ ,((( 7UDQVDFWLRQV RQ 3RZHU 'HOLYHU\ Volume 29, Issue 2, pp. 808-814
(April 2014).
4. H. K. Hoidalen, M. Runde³&RQWLQXRXV0RQLWRULQJRI &LUFXLW%UHDNHUV8VLQJ9LEUDWLRQ $QDO\VLV´LQ IEEE
Transactions on Power Delivery, Volume 20, Issue 4, pp. 2458-2465 (Oct. 2005).
5. J. A. 'H'DG ³7KH %DVLFV RI ,QVXODWLRQ 5HVLVWDQFH 7HVWLQJ´ LQ Electrical Construction and Maintenance
Magazine, Aug 1, 2000.
6. BHEL (Bharat Heavy Electricals Limited), Handbook of Switchgears (McGraw-Hill, New York, 2007), pp.
1.13- 1.6.
7. W. Niu, G. Liang, H. Yuan and B. Li³$)DXOW'Lagnosis Method of High Voltage Circuit Breaker Based on
Moving Contact Motion Trajectory and ELM´ in Mathematical Problems in Engineering,
Volume 2016 (2016), Article ID 3271042, pp. 1-10.
8. K. Nakanishi, Switching Phenomena in High-Voltage Circuit Breakers (Marcel Dekker Inc., New York, 1991),
pp. 61-66.
9. GE Support Services, Circuit Breaker/Switchgear Renewal Parts Catalog (Low, Medium, and High Voltage),
pp. 129-139.
10. PT PLN Pusat, Pemeliharaan Berkala Pemutus Tenaga (PT PLN Pusat, Jakarta, 1976).
11. PJM Interconnection, Guide for Determination of Circuit Breaker Load Current Capability Ratings (Heritage
MAAC Group, Lexington, no year), pp. 6-22.
12. E. Nasrallah, F. Brikci and S. 3HUURQ³(OHFWULFDO&RQWDFWVLQ09DQG+93RZHU&LUFXLW%UHDNHUV´LQ(OHFWULF
Energy Magazine, Terrebonne (City in Canada), Januari/Februari 2007, pp.
020001-11
Optimizing cutting conditions on sustainable machining of aluminum alloy to minimize
power consumption
Rusdi Nur, Muhammad Arsyad Suyuti, and Tri Agus Susanto


Bogor Baru)


Optimizing Cutting Conditions on Sustainable Machining of
Aluminum Alloy to Minimize Power Consumption
Rusdi Nur1, 2, a), Muhammad Arsyad Suyuti1, b) and Tri Agus Susanto1, c)
1
Mechanical Engineering Department, Politeknik Negeri Ujung Pandang, Jl. Perintis Kemerdekaan Km. 10
Makassar, 90245, Indonesia
2
Centre for Materials and Manufacturing, Politeknik Negeri Ujung Pandang, Jl. Perintis Kemerdekaan Km. 10
Makassar, 90245, Indonesia
Corresponding authors: a)rusdinur@poliupg.ac.id

b)
muhammadarsyadsuyuti@poliupg.ac.id
c)
triagussusanto@poliupg.ac.id
Abstract. Aluminum is widely utilized in the industrial sector. There are several advantages of aluminum, i.e. good
flexibility and formability, high corrosion resistance and electrical conductivity, and high heat. Despite of these
characteristics, however, pure aluminum is rarely used because of its lacks of strength. Thus, most of the aluminum used
in the industrial sectors was in the form of alloy form. Sustainable machining can be considered to link with the
transformation of input materials and energy/power demand into finished goods. Machining processes are responsible for
environmental effects accepting to their power consumption. The cutting conditions have been optimized to minimize the
cutting power, which is the power consumed for cutting. This paper presents an experimental study of sustainable
machining of Al-11%Si base alloy that was operated without any cooling system to assess the capacity in reducing power
consumption. The cutting force was measured and the cutting power was calculated. Both of cutting force and cutting
power were analyzed and modeled by using the central composite design (CCD). The result of this study indicated that
the cutting speed has an effect on machining performance and that optimum cutting conditions have to be determined,
while sustainable machining can be followed in terms of minimizing power consumption and cutting force. The model
developed from this study can be used for evaluation process and optimization to determine optimal cutting conditions
for the performance of the whole process.
INTRODUCTION
Manufacturers as the owners of the machine production will save money and gain a healthier sustainability
achievement if their power demands are minimized. However, most of them do not perceive the power efficiency as
a major priority to gain higher profits. In fact, it is estimated that two-thirds of the electrical power used by the
machining process is utilized to operate motors and drives for cutting tools [1].
Developing power efficiency of production processes involves the information on the power demand as a means
of the machining and cutting process itself [2]. One of the processes generally required in the production is the
turning process. Despite of the attempt to maximize this process based on cost and productivity has been made, the
inclusion of the power consumption criterion has not perceived as a significant consideration.
Several researchers revealed that the efforts related to the estimation of cutting parameters to reduce power
consumption have been carried out. Nevertheless, the effort to investigate the estimation of cutting parameters in
order to reduce the power consumed in the turning process of aluminum has not been performed previously. Hanafi
et al., estimated the cutting parameters in turning of PEEK-CF30 using TiN tools under dry machining in order to
attain minimum power consumption and the best surface quality. Subsequently, Taguchi and gray relational method
were used for optimizing the cutting processes [3]. Bhushan also reported an experimental study on the effects of
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020002-1–020002-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985447
020002-1
cutting parameters and nose radius in turning of 7075 Al alloy-SiC composite [4]. The cutting parameters were
optimized by using Response Surface Methodology (RSM) and desirability analysis to obtain optimum values of
cutting parameters that minimize power consumption and maximize tool life.
This paper presents several approaches to determine the power consumption during machining. Turning
processes was used as experimental machining for aluminum alloy without any cooling system. Estimation of
cutting energy or power based on parameters process only captures the energy or power required for material
removal and disregards the energy consumption that ensures the readiness of the machine tool. Therefore, in this
paper, a comparison was prepared to reveal the correct substance in deciding the response of variables that were
analyzed that generated the optimum values of the factors that minimized cutting power or average power consumed
in the process. Furthermore, it will provide a recommendation for manufacturers to save energy in production
processes, so that sustainability manufacturing could be maintained and improved in the future. The material of this
study was aluminum silicon, which is a hard machining in dry cutting due to its high ductility as the material of
cutting tool. There have been several studies examining the machining of aluminum alloy, including Roy et al. [5]
and Sreejith [6]. The former study investigated the suitability of cutting materials in machining of aluminum and
Al±Si alloys without cooling [5]. The later declared on the influence of different cooling systems during machining
of 6061 aluminum alloy that used diamond-coated carbide tools [6].
Calculation of Power Consumption
During a machining process, the energy is used to drive components, e.g., CNC control unit, spindle, feed axis,
etc., of the CNC machine tool to run a series of operations such as setting up, loading, cutting, automatic tool
change, etc. The power profile during machine tool operation was investigated including several types of machining
processes [2]. The study showed that the power consumption was not static but rather dynamic during the machining
processes. The power curve can be subdivided into three categories: constant power, variable power, and peak
power. Peak power is usually short and contributes only a small portion to the cumulated energy consumption, thus,
it was not included when calculating the total energy consumption. With consideration of this state, the power
consumption can be generally differentiated into variable power and constant power [7].
Generally, in most of machining centers, the drive capacity of the spindle unit is oversized. It means that the
maximum torque is determined two to three times higher than it would have been necessary for the cutting process
to reduce the run-up times. Fig. 1 shows the power consumption of the electric drive during such machining cycle.
Gutowski et al. [7] reported that the energy required for the material removal processes could be quite small
compared with the total energy for machine tool operation. It was further suggested that the energy footprint for
primary processes involved in material fabrication is usually higher than that for secondary shaping processes [9].
Subsequently, Gutowski et al. [7] developed an equation where the electrical power requirement (P) for machining
can be calculated (1).
ܲ݉ൌܲ‫݋‬൅݇Ǥ‫ݒ‬ሶ (1)
Where, Pm is the power [W] consumed by machining process, Po is the power [W] consumed by all machine
modules for a machine operating without loading. The k is the specific energy requirement [Ws/mm3] in cutting
operations and k is based on Walsh [10], the value is 0.7 for aluminum alloy, and ‫ݒ‬ሶ is the material removal rate
(MRR) in [mm3/s]. The power drawn by a machine tool used a three-phase motor, Po, which is calculated using
equation (2).
ܲ‫݋‬ൌܸǤ‫ܫ‬Ǥξ͵ (2)
Where V, is the voltage, and I is the current [A]. Po can be estimated as 35% from total power capacity of lathe
machine.
020002-2
FIGURE 1. Profile of power for turning processes [8].
As shown in equation (1), the energy requirement for machining process is in accordance to the power consumed
and specific energy in cutting operations. Representative specific energy for different machining materials was
explicated by Kalpakjian and Schmid [11].
EXPERIMENTAL METHOD
Experimental Setup
This paper referred to a case study that was carried out by Barzani et.al. [12]. The scheme of the study is
demonstrated in Figure 2. Machining for the experimental study was performed using a CNC lathe machine 2-axes
with 8300 W for cutting conditions with specifications as follows:
TABLE 1. Cutting parameters
Parameters Range
Cutting speed (m/min) 70, 130, and 250
Feed rate (mm/rev) 0.05, 0.10, and 0.15
Depth of cut (mm) 0.5
Cooling Dry
FIGURE 2. The layout of the experimental scheme.
The cutting forces were measured by using three components of dynamometer (Figure 3.4), which were
connected to the charge amplifier using a highly insulated, low noise, and high impedance connecting cable (Kistler,
020002-3
Type 1689 B5). Meanwhile, the charge amplifier was connected to the PC using common cables where the analogue
output and the RS232C ports of the multi-charge amplifier (Figure 3.5) were connected to the A/D board and the
COM ports of the PC respectively.
Materials and Cutting Tool
Materials for the experimental trial was performed on Sb modified Al-11%Si alloy. Details of the material
composition are elaborated in Table 2. The cutting tool for the experiment was a PVD with composition of TiN for
coated cDUELGH WRRO .HQQDPHWDO¶V .8 JUDGH with specifications: 0.2 mm nose radius, 5o relief angle was
designated as SVJBL 1616H11, and standard ISO catalog number was VBGT110302F.
TABLE 2. Composition of Materials
Composition Range
Fe 0.67%
Mn 0.253%
Si 10.68%
Cr 0.036%
Ti 0.032%
Mg 0.253%
Cu 1.61%
Ni 0.049%
Al Balanced
Results
The results of the investigation on the cutting force and power consumption are demonstrated in Figure 3. It
indicated that the minimum power consumption was obtained at low cutting speed and low feed rate while the minimum
cutting force was obtained by high cutting speed and low feed rate.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 3. The contour plot of (a) power consumption and (b) cutting force.
020002-4
TABLE 3. ANOVA analysis for cutting force and power consumption
Source Sum of squares DOF Mean square F-value Prob<F
Cutting force
Model 4412.12 2 2206.06 160.57 <0.0001
Cutting Speed 312.84 1 312.84 22.77 0.0031
Feed rate 4099.27 1 4099.27 298.36 <0.0001
Power consumption
Model 24011/58 3 8003.86 779.05 <0.0001
Cutting Speed 10574.25 1 10574.25 1029.24 <0.0001
Feed rate 11149.05 1 11149.05 366.95 <0.0001
Cutting Speed*Feed rate 3769.97 1 3769.97 366.95 <0.0001
In Table 3, Prob.> F had a value of less than 0.05 which means that the desired model had a significant impact on the
response. The following equation was the final equation that generated an empirical model. In the form of actual factors, it
can be formulated as follows:
Cutting force = +13.098 ± 0.079*Cutting Speed + 522.768 *Feed Rate (3)
(Power consumption) 1.81 = +6.283 ± 0.212* Cutting Speed ± 202.093* Feed Rate
+ 6.699*Cutting Speed * Feed Rate (4)
The output response was influenced by the measurement of input factor. It could be done by modeling the input
factors to optimize the selection criteria that would obtain minimum power consumption and cutting force. These
criteria would yield the combination of cutting speed and feed rate as sketched in the gray area of the overlay plot
(Figure 4.b). As the solution was the intersection between the criteria for power consumption (contour area below
7.676 kW) and the criteria of cutting force (contour area below 30 N).
(a) (b)
FIGURE 4. The graph of (a) desirability for input factors and b) overlay plot.
Discussion
Investigation on the turning process of aluminum alloy indicated that the value of cutting force tended to
increase in accordance with the increase of feed rate. The reduction of cutting force (Figure 3.b) accompanied by the
increase of cutting speed resulted to the dropping shear strength in flow region as the tool temperature increased and
the decrease of the contact region in the shear plane caused a more intensive deformation [13]. The other response of
power consumption that could be observed clearly was that the power consumption increased in accordance with the
020002-5
increase of feed rate and cutting speed (Figure 3.a). These results confirmed Bhattacharya et al. in his experimental
study that concluded that the power consumption continuously increases in accordance with the increase of cutting
speed during the turning of AISI 1045 steel [14]. Similarly, the result of the machining of nickel based alloy
Hastelloy C-276 when dry turning represented that the minimum power consumption would be generated on the
lower cutting condition [15]. It was obvious that material removal rate would be higher when the cutting speed and
feed rate increased. Higher rate of material removal required a higher power to turn the spindle motor. The
innovation of this research is a reference for arranging the cutting conditions in accordance with the workpiece
material and cutting tools to gain the energy efficiency in the cutting process, in order to achieve a sustainable
machining.
CONCLUSION
In this paper, the power consumption of machining untreated Al-11%Si base alloy was evaluated based on
material removal rate when dry turning. It also presented that the approach to calculate power consumption during
machining was proven to be applicable for particular turning. It was estimated that the approach is also appropriate
for other turning processes as it provided a complete dataset of cutting conditions and machinability data. The result
of evaluation represented that the minimum power consumption would be obtained by the lower level of cutting
parameter.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The authors would like to express their deep gratitude to the Mechanical Engineering Department of Politeknik
Negeri Ujung Pandang for the submission of this paper.
REFERENCES
1. F. Pusavec, D. Kramar, P. Krajnik, and J. Kopac, Transitioning to sustainable production ± part II: evaluation
of sustainable machining technologies. Journal of Cleaner Production. 18(12) (2010), p. 1211-1221.
2. W. Li, A. Zein, S. Kara, and C. Herrmann, an Investigation into Fixed Energy Consumption of Machine
Tools.Glocalized Solutions for Sustainability in Manufacturing: Proceedings of the 18th CIRP International
Conference on Life Cycle Engineering, (2011), p. 268-273.
3. I. Hanafi, A. Khamlichi, F.M. Cabrera, E. Almansa, and A. Jabbouri, Optimization of cutting conditions for
sustainable machining of peek cf30 using tin tools. Journal of Cleaner Production, (2012), p. 28.
4. R. Bhushan, S. Kumar, and S. Das, Effect of machining parameters on surface roughness and tool wear for
7075 Al alloy SiC composite. The International Journal of Advanced Manufacturing Technology. 50(5-8)
(2010), p. 459-469.
5. P. Roy, S.K. Sarangi, A. Ghosh, and A.K. Chattopadhyay, Machinability study of pure aluminum and Al±12%
Si alloys against uncoated and coated carbide inserts, International Journal of Refractory Metals and Hard
Materials, 27/3 (2009), p. 535-544.
6. P.S. Sreejith, Machining of 6061 aluminum alloy with MQL, dry and flooded lubricant conditions, Materials
Letters, 62/2 (2008), p. 276-278.
7. T. Gutowski, J. Dahmus, and A. Thiriez, Electrical Energy Requirements for Manufacturing Processes. 13th
CIRP International Conference on Life Cycle Engineering, (2006).
8. E. Abele, T. Sielaff, A. Schiffler, and S. Rothenbücher, Analyzing Energy Consumption of Machine Tool
Spindle Units and Identification of Potential for Improvements of Efficiency, Globalized Solutions for
Sustainability in Manufacturing: Proceedings of the 18th CIRP International Conference on Life Cycle
Engineering (2011), p.280-285.
9. T.G. Gutowski, Design and Manufacturing for the Environment. Chapter in the Handbook of Mechanical
Engineering, (Springer-Verlag, in press) (2004).
10. R.A. Walsh, Handbook of Machining and Metalworking Calculations. 2001: McGraw-Hill Professional.
11. S. Kalpakjian and S.R. Schmid, Manufacturing Engineering and Technology. 5th ed. Prentice Hall, New
Jersey. (2006).
020002-6
12. M.M. Barzani, N.M. Yusof, S. Farahany, and A. Ourdjini, Effect of Machining Parameters on Cutting Force
when Turning Untreated and Sb-Treated Al-11% Si-1.8% Cu Alloys Using PVD Coated Tools. Applied
Mechanics and Materials. 234 (2012), p. 74-77.
13. E. M. Trent and Wright, P. K. Metal Cutting (4th Edition). Woburn: Butterworth Heinamann. (2000).
14. A. Bhattacharya, S. Das, P. Majumder, and A. Batish, Estimating the effect of cutting parameters on surface
finish and power demand during high speed machining of AISI 1045 steel using Taguchi design and ANOVA.
Production Engineering. 3(1) (2009), p. 31-40.
15. R. Nur, M. Noordin, S. Izman, and D. Kurniawan, The Effect of Cutting Parameters on Power Consumption
during Turning Nickel Based Alloy, sAdvanced Materials Research, 845 (2014), p. 799-80.
020002-7
Dewa Ketut Sudarsana and Putu Ari Sanjaya


Bogor Baru)

Premium cost optimization of operational and maintenance of green building in Indonesia using life cycle
assessment method
Analysis of Loss of Time Value during Road Maintenance
Project
Dewa Ketut Sudarsana1, a), Putu Ari Sanjaya1
1
Civil Engineering, Udayana University Bali,
Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: dksudarsana@unud.ac.id
Abstracts. Lane closure is frequently performed in the execution of the road maintenance project. It has a negative
impact on road users such as the loss of vehicle operating costs and the loss of time value. Nevertheless, analysis on loss
of time value in Indonesia has not been carried out. The parameter of time value for the road users was the minimum
wage city/region approach. Vehicle speed of pre-construction was obtained by observation, while the speed during the
road maintenance project was predicted by the speed of the pre-construction by multiplying it with the speed adjustment
factor. In the case of execution of the National road maintenance project in the two-lane two-way urban and interurban
road types in the fiscal year of 2015 in Bali province, the loss of time value was at the average of IDR
12,789,000/day/link road. The relationship of traffic volume and loss of time value of the road users was obtained by a
logarithm model.
INTRODUCTION
The goal of road reconstruction project is to increase the capacity of the road service and the economy
improvement. However, the road reconstruction projects frequently have a negative impact for the road users and
the surrounding environment [1,2]. This impact is due to the traffic management during the execution of
reconstruction, such as, the narrowed width of the road, lane closures, or lane part diversion of traffic flow. The
losses endured by the road users are in the forms of the vehicle operating cost (VOC) and the cost of the time value
[3-5].
Generally, the time value loss is incurred due to the travel delay. Trip delay is the consequence of the decrease in
vehicle speed as suggested from the pre-construction condition during the execution of road maintenance project.
Vehicle speed pre-construction conditions are generally already available in the Central National Road, but the
speed has not available yet during the construction. To determine the speed during the construction period, an
approach by using pre-construction speed adjustment factor multiplied by the speed of Fv was examined [5].
MATERIALS AND METHODS

Descriptive method was applied in this study. Phases of the analysis were presented in the analytical framework
as demonstrated in Fig. 1. The study area of this research was the seven National roads type 2 lane 2 way, urban and
interurban roads carried out in fiscal year 2015 in Bali Province. Table 1 presents the name of the roads as the
samples which are located in Bali Province.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020003-1–020003-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985448
020003-1
TABLE 1. Name of Link and Length of Sample Roads.
No. Cases Name of Link road Length (km)

S1 Cekik-Negara 1.80
S2 Cekik-Seririt 4.00
S3 Angentelu-Amlapura 2.30
S4 Jl. Wahidin- Jl.Setiabudi Denpasar 6.78
S5 Kuta- Banjar Taman 1.70
S6 Pesanggaran-Sesetan 5.32
S7 Cekik-Singaraja 3.80
The Data
Pre-Construction During Construction
Loss of Time Value of Road

Users (LTV)
Relationship of Traffic volume and Loss of Time

Value
FIGURE 1. Analysis Framework.
The traffic data of each link road was collected during the pre-construction including the data of traffic volume
(Qp) and speed (Vp). Subsequently, the traffic data during the construction maintenance of Qm and Vm were
calculated from Qp and Vp by multiplying the volume adjustment factor Fq and speed adjustment factor Fv [5]. The
analysis of the capacity (C) and the degree of saturation (DS) referred to the guidelines of the Indonesian Highway
Capacity Manual (IHCM) of 1997 [6].
The loss of time value of the road users is caused by the additional travel time (Tw) that leads to a decrease in the
speed of pre-construction conditions (Vp) into a speed during construction phase (Vm), then multiplied by the length
of link road. The formula for additional travel time (Tw) was presented in the equation as follows: (1) [5]:
ଵ ଵ
Tw =‫ ܮ‬൬ െ ൰ (1)
௏೘ ௏೛
The length of the work zone segment was assumed in average of 1 (one) km so that the segment length (L) was 1
(one) km. Thus, the loss of daily time value to the type of vehicle (i) for n = 24 hours can be formulated as in
equation (2) [5].
ଵ ଵ
LTV = ൤൬ െ ൰ ‫݅݉ܳݔܱ݅ܲܨݔܸܶܲݔ‬௡ ൨ (2)
௏೘ ௏೛
020003-2
Where,
LTV = loss of time value (IDR/day)
Vm = Speed on during construction (km/h)
Vp = Speed on pre-construction (km/h)
PTV = Passenger time value Factor (IDR/person/day),
FOPi = Factor of Occupancy Passenger all types of vehicle i (see Table 3)
Qmin = Traffic volume of vehicle i at hour to n during reconstruction
i = Type of vehicle: i = 1 for the sedan (SD), i = 2 for utilities (UT), i = 3 for a small bus (SB), i = 4 for a
large bus (LB), i = 5 for light trucks (LT), i = 6 for medium truck (MT), i = 7 for heavy trucks (HT)
and i = 8 for motorcycles (MC)
n = Hours in a day (24 hours), n = 1 is to 1st hour (6:00 AM to 07:00 AM) and so on up to n = 24 is the
hour to 24 (05.00 AM-06.00 AM)
For the purposes of predicting the relationship between the volume of vehicle (Qp) and the loss of the time value
(LTV), the analysis with regression statistic method was performed [7].
Daily traffic volume (Qp) and speed of vehicles on pre-construction (Vp) are presented in Table 2. Meanwhile, the
traffic volume (Qm) and speed (Vm) during construction were calculated by Qp and Vp by multiplying volume
adjustment factor (Fq) and speed adjustment factor (Fv). The factors of Fq and Fv were determined with the average
of Fq = 0.88 and Fv = 0.91 [5]. Traffic volume on the pre-construction (Qp) and the estimated volume during
construction (Qm) in Cekik-Negara link road (Case S1) are presented in Fig. 2. While the speed of Vp and Vm can
be seen in Fig. 3.
TABLE 2. Traffic volume on the Pre-construction (Qp) (Pcu/day) and Speed (Vp) (km/h).
Case/Study area Qp (pcu/day) Vp (km/h)

Cekik-Negara 18,980 43.1
Cekik-Seririt 11,400 42.0
Angentelu-Amlapura 14,850 44.8
Jl. Wahidin- Jl. Setiabudi Denpasar 66,827 15.9
Kuta- Banjar Taman 102,347 30.0
Pesanggaran-Sesetan 70,585 27.5
Cekik-Singaraja 19,710 45.6
FIGURE 2. Traffic Volume Qp and Qm in Case S1.
020003-3
FIGURE 3. Speed of Vp and Vm in Case S1.
The parameter of occupational passengers was required in the calculation of the loss of time value. Factors
occupational passengers (FOP) for each type of vehicle are presented in Table 3 [5].
TABLE 3. Factors Occupational Passengers (FOP) for each Vehicle.
Type of vehicles (i) Vehicle Occupancy (FOP)

1 Motor Cycles (MC) 1.35
2 Sedan (SD) 2.00
3 Utility (UT) 2.00
4 Small Bus (SB) 10.00
5 Large Bus (LB) 20.00
6 Light Truck (LT) 2.00
7 Medium Truck (MT) 2.00
8 Heavy Truck (HT) 2.00
Source: [5].
The result analysis of the Loss of Time Value (LTV) for the case S1 was equal to IDR 9,774,000/day. The
percentage of LTV distribution was dominated by motorcycle (MC) type of 41.64% and sedan (SD) type of 22.88%.
The LTV percentage of each type of vehicle for the case S1 is presented in Fig. 4.
FIGURE 4. Percentage of LTV Value of Each Type of Vehicles.
020003-4
The analysis results of the LTV in a day (IDR/day) for each link road project are presented in Table 4. The average
of LTV was IDR 12,789,000/day/link road.
TABLE 4. LTV value of each link roads.
No. Cases Link roads LTV (IDR/day)

S1 Cekik-Negara 9,774,000
S2 Cekik-Seririt 6,152,000
S3 Angentelu-Amlapura 7,770,000
S4 Jl Wahidin- Jl. Setiabudi Denpasar 15,965,000
S5 Kuta- banjar Taman 21,488,000
S6 Pesanggaran-Sesetan 18,257,000
S7 Cekik-Singaraja 10,121,000
Average 12,789,000
The loss of time value based on LTV prediction during the construction can be examined in the relationship between
the volumes of vehicles Qp and LTV. The relationship of Volume (Qp) and LTV is presented in Table 5.
TABLE 5. Traffic Volume on Pre Construction/Qp (pcu/day) and Loss of Time Value/LTV (IDR/day).
Case/Study area Qp (pcu/day) LTV (IDR/day)

Cekik-Negara 18,980 9,774,000
Cekik-Seririt 11,400 6,152,000
Angentelu-Amlapura 14,850 7,770,000
Jl Wahidin- Jl.Setiabudi Denpasar 66,827 15,965,000
Kuta- Banjar Taman 102,347 21,488,000
Pesanggaran-Sesetan 70,585 18,257,000
Cekik-Singaraja 19,710 10,121,000
The results of analysis of the relationship between the traffic volumes (Qp) and the loss of time value (LTV) was in
the form of a logarithmic model as demonstrated in Fig. 5. This model was accurate since the indicator of
determinant coefficient (R2) of this model was 97.8%.
FIGURE 5. The Relationship of Traffic Volume (pcu/day) and Loss of Time Value (IDR/day).
020003-5
CONCLUSIONS
The analysis of the loss of time value (LTV) of the road user were performed on 7 (seven) 2-way 2-lanes
national roads in Bali Province in the fiscal year of 2015. The finding found that the average loss was IDR
12,789,000/day/link road. The initial analysis on the relationship between Qp and LTV was in the form of a
logarithmic model. Further study with higher number of samples is required, in order to obtain a more accurate
result of LTV value that can be generated from the general models.
REFERENCES
1. DGH (Directorate General of Highways) & Sweroad, Indonesia Highways Capacity Manual IHCM (Manual
Kapsitas Jalan di Indonesia MKJI, 1997).
2. M. Nazir, Research Methods. Ghalia Indonesia, Jakarta (2003).
3. D.K. Sudarsana, H. Sulistio, A. Wicaksono and L. Djakfar, Losses of Road User Cost Analysis due Work Zone.
Proceedings of the Colloquium Road Bridge, 2013, ISBN: 978-602-264-032-5, III: 119-133, Ministry of Public
Works, Pusjatan, Bandung.
4. D. K. Sudarsana, H. Sulistio, A. Wicaksono and L. Djakfar, Study of Performance due Work Zone. Proceedings
of Transportation Studies Inter Universities Forum 16 th, ISBN 9786021855522, 716-725, Surakarta (2013).
5. D. K. Sudarsana, H. Sulistio, A. Wicaksono and L. Djakfar, The Analysis Of Work Zone Road User Costs Due
To The Delay Completion Of The Road Maintenance Project. Adv. in Nat. Appl. Sci., 8(3): 103-108 (2014).
6. D. K. Sudarsana, H. Sulistio, A. Wicaksono and L. Djakfar, Prediction of Performance Related Roads Estimated
Losses of Road Users Cost during the Road Reconstruction. Proceedings of Transportation Studies Inter
Universities Forum 17th, ISSN 2356-0509, 2 (1): 751-761. Jember, 2014.
7. D. K. Sudarsana, Losses Road Users Model on the Road Reconstruction Project. Dissertation, Doctoral Program
in Civil Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, University of Brawijaya, Malang, East Java, 2014.
020003-6
Mohamad Jihan Shofa and Wahyu Oktri Widyarto


Bogor Baru)

assessment method
Effective Production Control in an Automotive Industry:
MRP vs. Demand-Driven MRP
Mohamad Jihan Shofa1, a) and Wahyu Oktri Widyarto2
1, 2
Universitas Serang Raya, Jl. Serang-Cilegon, Banten, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: m.j.shofa@gmail.com
Abstract. Material Requirements Planning (MRP) has deficiencies when dealing with current business
environments, marked by a more complex network, a huge variety of products with longer lead time, and uncertain
demands. This drives Demand-Driven MRP (DDMRP) approach to deal with those challenges. DDMRP is
designed to connect the availability of materials and supplies directly from the actual condition using bills of
materials (BOMs). Nevertheless, only few studies have scientifically proved the performance of DDMRP over
MRP for controlling production and inventory control. Therefore, this research fills this gap by evaluating and
comparing the performance of DDMRP and MRP in terms of level of effective inventory in the system. The
evaluation was conducted through a simulation using data from an automotive company in Indonesia. The input
parameters of scenarios were given for running the simulation. Based on the simulation, for the observed critical
parts, DDMRP gave better results than MRP in terms of lead time and inventory level. DDMRP compressed the
lead time part from 52 to 3 days (94% reduced) and, overall, the inventory level was in an effective condition. This
suggests that DDMRP is more effective for controlling the production-inventory than MRP.
INTRODUCTION
The behaviour of business environment is very different from the previous years, shifting from deterministic to
stochastic environment. In addition, fluctuating demand, long lead time, inaccurate forecast, huge variety of product,
and complex network impact on many areas such as production planning and inventory control. Consequently, the
current production planning and inventory control method has deficiencies [1].
As indicated by the results of a survey conducted by the Aberdeen Group (Fig. 1), supply chain complexity is
rising due, in large part, to globalization. For the supply chain professionals, this means working with more global
suppliers, reaching out more global customers, and dealing with the truly global competitors [2]. Such conditions
become a challenge for companies especially with regard to production planning system. MRP as a production
control system is appropriate for the deterministic environment [3]. So that, in a stochastic condition, some research
proposed modified MRP to anticipate demands and lead time in a new normal environment to produce a good
service level [4] [5] [6].
To cover the shortfall, a demand-driven material requirements planning (DDMRP) is offered to fill the gap [2].
DDMRP is a method which is able to adapt to an uncertain environment and the variablity of demands and supplies.
Nevertheless, there are few studies on the benefit of DDMRP. It is indicated that there is an opportunity to compare
MRP and DDMRP. This study fills this gap by evaluating and comparing the performance of DDMRP and
MRP in terms lead time level and inventory level in the industrial world.
This study focuses on part SA-12 that became a top-demand product during February 2014 - January 2015,
which is in common with the SA-22 and SA-02 parts.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020004-1–020004-9; doi: 10.1063/1.4985449
020004-1
FIGURE 1 . Top Pressure Forcing Companies to Supply Chain Applications [3]
LITERATURE REVIEW
MRP was first popularized by Joe Orlicky's first edition book in 1975. Figure 2 depicts MRP that has undergone
various developments from MRP, closed-loop MRP, manufacturing resources planning (MRP II), advanced
planning and scheduling systems (APS), and the enterprise resources planning (ERP). There are 5 inputs in MRP:
Master Production Schedule (MPS), Bill of Material (BOM), item master, orders, requirements of items that are
needed, and MRP combine them [7][8]. MRP is based on the supposition that the demand and lead times are
deterministic. Unfortunately, most production systems are stochastic. Therefore, the deterministic assumptions of
MRP are often too restrictive [9].
MRP’s approach for uncertainties has been conducted. Under demand uncertainty, MRP combined with lot
sizing [10], safety stock and safety lead time [11], while under lead time uncertainty, MRP approached with markov
process and newboys model [12], brunch and cut algorithm [13], safety stock and safety lead time [11], periodic
order quantity [9]. Under Inaccurate forecast, MRP approached with properly forecasting models [14].
Finally, traditional MRP is not relevant with the current environment. Companies that have experienced in MRP
got chronic problems and the risk of high variation, overstock, and shortage in supply planning and customer
demand. Such conditions impact on three main factors: inventory performance, service level performance, and high
expedite related to expenses and waste [15].
FIGURE 2. Planning Tool Evaluation [2]
The solution is to become an agile company, which consists of four distinctive competencies: cost, quality,
dependability, and flexibility [1]. Companies are required to produce their products at low cost, high-quality
products and services, short lead time and varied volume, and also improve the value of customer through
customization.
Demand-Driven MRP (DDMRP) is an approach to deal with those challenges. DDMRP can adapt in a stochastic
environment and make an agile company. DDMRP was introduced by Carol Ptak and Chad Smith in 2011 in
Orlicky's Material Requirement Planning 3rd Edition book. DDMRP was developed from Orlicky's MRP that is still
relevant coupled with innovation in compressing lead time in the industrial world that refers to the demand-driven
world [16].
020004-2
Figure 3 indicates that DDMRP consists of a core of MRP, Distribution Requirements Planning (DRP) logic,
Theory of Constraint (TOC), lean principles and innovations. From those, DDMRP develops more realistic product
planning and inventory control method.
FIGURE 3. Demand-Driven MRP [3].
DDMRP represents a change from the conventional idea of MRP. In DDMRP, demand is not defined by the
statement "what we can and will build" but the statement "what we can and will sell [17]. As shown by figure 4,
there are five steps of DDMRP: strategic inventory positioning, buffer profiles and levels, dynamic adjustment,
demand-driven planning, visible and collaborative execution. These steps are devided into modelling or remodelling
environment, plan, and execution.
FIGURE 4. Five Components Demand-Driven MRP [3]
Strategic inventory positioning is the first step in DDMRP. It considers where inventory should be placed. The
six positioning factors are used to determine the initial positioning strategy, such as customer tolerance time, market
potential lead time, demand variability, supply variability, inventory leverage and flexibility, and the critical
operation protection. In strategic positioning, a realistic lead time called actively syncrhonized replenishment lead
time (ASR lead time) is introduced, which is the core concept behind DDMRP. It is defined by the longest
unprotected or unbuffered sequence in the BOM for a particular parent.
In DDMRP, buffer profiles and levels provide an appropriate buffer position and strategic replenishment to
reduce variability from both demand and supply. It is revised from the conventional inventory management in terms
of the seasonal level inventory into three color-coded zones that comprise the total buffer. These zones are green,
yellow, and red zone. Green represents an inventory position that requires no action; yellow represents a part which
has entered its rebuild or replenishment; and red represents a part that is in jeopardy, which requires special attention
[1].
Figure 5a shows the zone stratification in buffer stock, which is segmented in green (G), yellow (Y) and red (R)
zones, and Fig. 5b shows the inventory effective-ineffective curve with overlaid color-coded zones and displays the
meaning of each colored zone. This color coding system will be used in both planning and execution of priority
management.
020004-3
(a) (b)
FIGURE 5. (a) Moving to zone stratification in a stock buffer (b) Effective/Ineffective with buffer zone [3]
To calculate each buffer profiles (G, Y, and R), the average daily usage/ADU over the percentage of lead time is
taken. The calculation follows some formulations, wherein:
Green zone = ADU (Average daily usage) * Lead time * GZ Lead time factor
Yellow zone = ADU * Lead time
Red zone base = ADU * Lead time * RZ Lead time (1)
Red zone safety = Variablity factor * Red zone base
And, buffer zone is calculated:

Top of red = Red zone
Top of yellow = Top of red + Yellow zone (2)
Top of green (TOG) = red zone base + red zone safety + yellow green + green zone.
Dynamic adjusment is to adjust buffer profile to adapt company production planning to a dynamic environment.
There are three types of adjusment: recalculated adjusment, planned adjustment, and manual adjustment.
Demand driven planning is supply generation. It is based on what the available stock equation places the part.
Open order is needed when parts stocked are available in the yellow zone (rebuild zone), wherein:
Available stock = on hand + on order – demand (pas due, due today, qualified spike) (3)
To be able to define threat of spike to the inventory, order quantity spike threshold (OST) should be defined.
OST is measured from the percentage of red zone. For this percentage, Ptak and Chad provide guidance with 50
percent of the red zone and OST is used for all stocked items [3]. As for the time, horizon becomes the criterion of
order; spike is time where the environment can react rationally to changes that occur. Horizon spike order is usually
defined in the lead time of the relevant part.
The last is visible and collaborative execution. It is a challenge priority by due date. Priority by due date gives
the real day-to-day inventory and materials priorities. Priorities are dynamic. They change as varibility and volatility
occur within the time when they are opened until they are closed.
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
Figure 6 displays the steps of the research. In order to compare the effectiveness of MRP and DDMRP, this research
simulation was conducted for 4 weeks. There are 2 indicators observed in terms of effective inventory: lead time and
level of inventory. An automotive company in Indonesia was taken as the context of the case study. This study
focuses on part SA-12 that becomes a top-demand product during February 2014 - January 2015, which is in
common with the component parts of SA-22 and SA-02. Input data were analyzed in the period March-April 2015.
020004-4
FIGURE 6. The step by steps of the research
Input Parameters
We simulated two systems, MRP and DDMRP, for 4 weeks. Some input scenarios were given, as shown in
Table 1, that consist of forecasts and variations. The forecasts were given by the company and variations were
applied to make a stochastic environment.
This research investigated 3 parent parts: SA-12, SA-22, and SA-02. Fig. 7 shows the bill of materials and lead
time of the 3 parent parts. Differentiation between parent part SA-12 and the 2 other parts is just on the component
part BTW. Symbol I is for inhouse process and P is for purchased part.
TABLE 1. Input Parameters
FIGURE 7. Bill of Material and Lead Time (day) of Part SA22, SA-12, SA-02
Production Planning: MRP Vs DDMRP

From the forecasts, BOMs and lead time data, MRP is generated. The lead time for 3 parts using MRP method is
the longest leg of the BOM (SA – IPC – RC – PT – PB); it is 52 days. That means that safety stock for position SA-
12 will need to account for forecast variability over 52 day time frame.
020004-5
In MRP implementation, we investigated the demand and inventory on hand condition. Figure 8 shows that the
on-hand conditions were stockout for part SA-12 and SA-02 in several period.
(a) (b)
(c)
FIGURE 8. On-Hand Condition of Parent (a) Part SA-12, (b) SA-22, and (c) SA-02 Using MRP Method
After that, DDMRP method is simulated. Firstly, remodelling of strategic inventory positioning, buffer profiles and
levels and dynamic adjusment was done before generating the production planning system. Using strategic replenish
position, the lead time for parent part SA-12 was decoupled from the supplier lead time since all purchased parts
were replenished. So, ASR lead time for parent part SA-12 is 4 days. Additionally, the component rod took a
replenished position because it is worth the inventory investment. Finally, ASR lead time of parent SA-12 could be
reduced to 3 days.
TABLE 2. DDMRP Parameter
Table 2 shows that DDMRP Parameter was based on the remodelling of DDMRP method. ADU was calculated
from the forcastst. Green Zone (GZ) lead time and Red Zone (RZ) lead time were stated based on data converted in
percentage. Variability factor and initial state inventory were based on actual data. From the ADU and ASR lead
time, buffer profile can now be investigated as displayed (Table 3).
020004-6
TABLE 3. Buffer Profile and Levels of DDMRP
Then, simulation using DDMRP was applicated. Fig. 9 shows DDMRP result of on hand, which is no stock-out for
on-hand inventory.
(a) (b)
(c)
FIGURE 9. On-Hand Condition of Parent (a) Part SA-12, (b) SA-22, and (c) SA-02 Using DDMRP Method
FINDINGS
Based on the simulation, DDMRP gives a better effect than MRP. DDMRP can compress lead time, no stock-out
condition and improve the inventory level. DDMRP compresses the lead time part from 52 to 3 days (94% reduced).
Figure 10a displays the inventory level of part SA-22 using MRP 25 percent on the red zone (little), 22 percent on
the yellow zone (effective), 13 percent on the green zone (effective), and 41 percent on the blue zone
(overstock).Meanwhile, no inventory using DDMRP is on the red zone, but it shifted to 78 percent on the yellow
zone and 22 percent on the green zone. Figure 10b displays the inventory level of part SA-12 using MRP, which is
100 percent on the red zone. However, the inventory level using DDMRP is 16 percent on the red zone, 63 percent
on the yellow zone, and 22 percent on the green zone. Figure 10c displays the inventory level of part SA-02 using
MRP, which is 97 percent on the red zone and 3 percent on the yellow zone, while using DDMRP method, it is 13
percent on the red zone, 78 percent on the yellow zone, and 9 percent on the green zone
020004-7
(a)
(b)
(c)
FIGURE 10. Comparison MRP-DDMRP in daily available stock (a) part SA-22, (b) part SA-12, and (c) part SA-02
CONCLUSION
This study aims to evalute the performance of DDMRP and MRP in terms of the level of effective
inventory. DDMRP compresses lead time and improves the inventory level. DDMRP compresses the lead time part
from 52 to 3 days (94% reduced) and shifted the inventory level for the three parts to the effective stock. So,
DDMRP is a more effective production-inventory control than MRP.
This research has proposed a model of how to realize the production planning with DDMRP, which still uses
Microsoft Office Excel software, so that they can be developed into a program that is able to be used properly and
user friendly.
The results of this study need to be followed by various studies, such as measurement of effectiveness in the
aspect of the benefit cost of inventories, and analyses of the problems faced and what strategies are needed while
implementing DDMRP.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
We are most grateful to anonymous reviewers for their constructive and insightful suggestions and comments at
various stages of this manuscript that helped us improve the presentation of the paper considerably. We appreciate
the contributions of the company whose participation made this research possible.
REFERENCES
1. C. A. Ptak and C. J. Smith, Orlicky's material requirements planning 3rd edition. (Mc Graw Hill, New York,
2011) p. 32
2. Nari Viswanathan, Enabling supply chain visibility and collaboration in the cloud (Aberdeen Publication,
2010) p. 4
3. V. Suresh, R. Sivasubramanium, “The implementation of material requirement planning techniques in crane
hook assembly”, International Journal of Applied Engineering Research, Volume 5, Number 8, pp. 1371–1379
(2010)
020004-8
4. J. Xie, X, Zhao, T. Lee, “Freezing the master production schedule under single resource constraint and demand
uncertainty”, International Journal Production Economics, Vol 83, pp. 65-84 (2003)
5. S. Koh, S. Saad, “MRP-controlled manufacturing environment disturbed by uncertaint”, Robotics and
Computer Integrated Manufacturing, Vol 19 , pp.157–171 (2003)
6. A. Dolgui, C. Prodhon, “supply planning under uncertainties in MRP environment: a state of the art”. Annual
Reviews in Control, vol.31, pp. 269-279 (2007)
7. V. Gaspersz, “Production planning and inventory control; berdasarkan pendekatan sistem terintegrasi MRP II
dan JIT menuju manufacturing 21”(PT Gramedia Pustaka Utama, Jakarta, 2004)
8. F. Jacobs, R. Chase, Operations and supply chain management third edition (McGraw-Hill, China, 2011)
9. M.A. Louly, Dolgui, A.A. Al-Ahmari, “Optimal MRP offsetting for assembly systems with stochastic lead
times: POQ policy and service level constraint”, J Intell Manuf. Vol. 23, pp. 2485–2495 (2008)
10. T.E. Callarman, R.S. Hamrin, “A comparison of dynamic lot sizing rules for use in a single stage MRP system
with demand uncertainty”, International Journal of Operations and Production Management, vol. 4, pp. 39-48
(1983)
11. T.M. Van Kampen, D.P. Van Donk, D.J. Van der Zee, “Safety stock or safety lead time: coping with
unrealibility in demand and supply”, International Journal of Production Research, pp. 15 -24 (2011)
12. M.S. Ould-Louly, A. Dolgui, 2004, “The MPS parameterization under lead time uncertainty”. International
Journal of Production Economics, Vol. 90, pp. 369–376 (2004)
13. A. Dolgui, M.A. Ould-Loudy, “An approach for the MRP parameterization under lead time uncertainty: brunch
and cut algorithm”. in Proceedings of the 17th World Congress The International Federation of Automatic
Control (2008) (IFAC, 2008), Vol. 17, pp. 12849-12854
14. P. Yenradee, A. Pinnoi, A. Charoenthavornying, “Demand forecasting and production planning for highly
seasonal demand situations: case study of a pressure container factory”, Science Asia, Vol. 27, pp. 271-278
(2001)
15. C. Ptak, C. Smith, Demand Driven Institute White Paper Agustus 2011 (2011).
16. C. Ptak, C. Smith, Demand Driven Institute White Paper September 2011 (2011).
17. C. Ptak, C. Smith, Demand Driven Institute White Paper September 2013 (2013).
020004-9
Holding time effect of pack carburizing on fatigue characteristic of v-notch shaft steel
specimens
Supriyono and Jamasri



assessment method

Holding Time Effect of Pack Carburizing on Fatigue
Characteristic of V-Notch Shaft Steel Specimens
Supriyono1,a), Jamasri2
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering Universitas Muhammadiyah Surakarta, Jl. A.Yani
Pabelan Tromol Pos 1 Kartasura Surakarta, Jawa Tengah, Indonesia
2
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering Universitas Gajah Mada Yogyakarta,
Jl. Grafika, Yogyakarta, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: supriyono@ums.ac.id
Phone: +62271717417; Fax: +62271715448
Abstract. The objective of this research is to study the effect of the holding times of pack carburizing process on fatigue
characteristic of v-notch shaft steel specimens. The carbon source was taken from charcoal of unused mahogany. The holding
times were 2, 3 and 4 hours. The fatigue tests were conducted on rotary bending machine. The specimens were made of low
carbon steel of 0.17% carbon content. Pack carburizing was conducted to the specimens at 930oC. V-notch was made to present
the stress concentration on the specimens. To see the effects of the carburizing in changing the material properties, the micro-
structures and hardness tests along the cross sectional area of the specimens were carried out. The results showed that the holding
time of the carburizing process influences the fatigue strength of the material. The longer the holding time will be the higher the
fatigue strength. The increase of the fatigue strength is due to the carbon content on the surface. It was confirmed by the micro-
structures and the hardness tests results.The cross sectional area of carburized material is divided into two zones i.e. surface zone
and core zone. The surface zone consists of hypereutectoid, eutectoid, and hypo eutectoid sub-zone. The core zone is the same as
raw material. The longer the holding time will be the deeper the surface zone.
INTRODUCTION
Fatigue strength of mechanical components can be determined by multiplying the fatigue strength of the material
with the reduction factors [1]. There are a number of reduction factors, for example surface factor, geometry factor,
temperature factor, etc. Among the factors, surface factor is the most common one. It is due to the fact that by
fatigue loading, earlier damage will occur on the surface or near the surface and propagate across the volume of the
component. That is why; a lot of researches have been conducted in surface improvement in order to have a better
fatigue strength.
Examples of research on surface treatment for fatigue strength improvement can be found in the works by
Kvedaras et al. [2], Puntambekar et al. [3], Fragoudakis et al. [4], Takahashi and Sato [5]. Kvedaras et al. [2]
studied fatigue strength of pyrolytic chromium-plated steel. It was determined, that chromium coatings having three
different microstructures had different resistant to cyclic load. The chromium coatings with homogeneous or
horizontal-layered structures are suitable for increasing of fatigue strength of investigated material. In the work by
Puntambekar et al. [3], plasma nitriding had been carried-out to enhance surface properties of steel components. The
experiments were conducted on steel rod samples which were plasma nitrided with formation of varying amount of
thickness of compound layer and maintaining the same of diffusion layer depth. The data indicate that the fatigue
life of samples increases up to a certain thickness of compound layer and then decreases.
Fragoudakis et al. [4], showed significant hardness increase on the surface of steel heat- treatment and shot-
peening. Experimental and analytically calculated S-N curves at 4-point cyclic bending quantify the individual
effects resulting from the applied heat treatment and shot peening on fatigue life. For surface hardening, it is well
known that oxygen and nitrogen treatments can be used because they are easily available and inexpensive elements.
However, these treatments cause the fatigue strength to decrease which is a problem. According Takahashi and Sato,
the reason for the fatigue strength decrease due to oxygen diffusion treatment is residual tensile stress on the surface.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020005-1–020005-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985450
020005-1
Shot peening is an effective technique to improve the fatigue strength of oxygen diffusion treated titanium. This
report details the effects on fatigue strength due to surface treatments such as notch and shot peening.
Another popular method of surface treatment beside mentioned in the above paragraph is case hardening which
is the process of hardening the surface of a metal object while allowing the metal deeper underneath to remain soft.
By having hard surface with compressive residual stress, it increases the fatigue life of a component. One of the
common methods of case hardening is carburizing. Examples of research on carburizing can be found in the work by
Aramide et al.[6], Oyetunji and Adeosun [7], Ihom [8], Swapnil [9], Fragoudakis et al [4], Priyadarshini et al. [10],
Ahmad [11].
Carburizing is the process of saturating the surface layerof steel with carbon. In accordance with carbon source,
carburization is classified as pack carburizing, gas carburizing and liquid carburizing. The main purpose of the
carburizing process is to havehard and wear resistance surface on mechanical components by enrichment of the
surface layer with carbon to a concentration from 0.75 to 1.2 % [11]. Low carbon steels, containing from 0.1 to 0.18
% carbon, may be subjected to carburizing.
Pack carburization uses solid carburizing material as the carbon source. The common carbon sources used in
pack carburizing are BaCO3, Na2CO3, and CaCO3. Over the years, the efficacy of different carbon sources has been
tested. Okongwu and Paranthaman [12] carried out a research to assess the efficacy of some naturally occurring
mineral carbonates in pack carburizing. In this work, he concluded that it was possible to substitute the commercial
carbonates with the naturally occurring mineral carbonates.
Ihom et al. [13] conducted a research to investigate the potential of some organic waste materials for surface
hardness improvement of mild steel. The waste materials are sugar cane, rice husks, egg shell, melon shell,
arecaceae flower droppings, plastics, polyethylene, and charcoal. The results have established the potentials of waste
organic materials for surface hardness improvement of mild steel. The waste organic materials used in the
casehardening media all showed improvement in the hardness values of the mild steel specimens over the 30 HRC
hardness value of the untreated mild steel specimen.
In 2013, Ihom [8] set out another research in case hardening. In this work various carburizing compounds were
used to pack carburised mild steel. Various weight percentages of cow bone were used as energizer in the
carburizing compounds. He found that 60 wt% charcoal / 40 wt% cowbone had the best result with an effective case
depth of 2.32 mm produced on the case of the carburized steel.
This research is to study the effect of holding time of pack carburizing process on fatigue characteristic of v-
notch shaft steel specimens. The carbon source for carburizing was taken from charcoal of unused mahogany. In
Solo Raya Region of Central Java Indonesia, mahogany is the most commonmaterial to produce many kinds of
export quality furniture. This production process leaves alots of unused mahogany that can be made charcoal. One of
the benefits of the charcoal is to be used as carbon souce in pack carburizing[13]. However, the affectivity needs to
be studied.
MATERIAL AND METHOD
Material
The materials used for this work included, steel rods of 16 mm diameter and carburizing compound of 80% of
mahogany charcoal and 20% of natrium carbonate (Na2CO3) mixture. The composition of the steel used is shown in
Table 1.
Table 1. Composition of the steel rod
Fe C Si Mn Cr Mo Ni Al Cu S
98.8 0.17 0.033 0.551 0.077 0.004 0.129 0.001 0.115 0.033
Equipment
The equipments used are heat resisting steel pack carburization boxes, a large muffle electric furnace, rotary
bending machine, optical microscope, grinders and polishing disc, and Vickers Micro hardness testing Machine.
020005-2
Methods
Material Preparation
The steel rods were cut and shaped into rotary bending specimen according to DIN34 Standard as shown in Fig.
1. The roughing process was done by conventional lathe machine, whereas the finishing process was carried out
using CNC lathe machine. At the end of the machining, the v-notch was made.
FIGURE 1. Dimension and carburized rotary bending specimen

For carburization, a ±20 mm thick layer of carburizing compound was first poured into the box, and the
specimens were placed in position inside the box and the box filled up with the compound. The lid was then sealed
with clay in order to make the box air tight and eliminate possibility of air infiltration during pack carburization
process
Pack Carburization Process
A large muffle electric furnace with a temperature sensitivity of ±5°C was employed. The pack boxes were
placed into the muffle furnace. The pack boxes and the furnace were heated to reach carburizing temperature of
930°C. At the carburizing temperature, the process was held for 2, 3 and4 hours. Then, the pack boxes was taken out
and placed in the room temperature.
Microstructure
Micro structure was carried out on both the uncarburized material or raw material and the carburized material.
The carburized material was taken from the broken fatigue specimen on its cross sectional area.
Hardness Test
The hardness test was conducted on carburized material to determine the effective case depth. Microhardness
measurements were carried out along the cross sectional area on the distances of 50, 100, 200, 500, 700, 1000, 1250
and 2000 μm from the surface at three different places. The hardness number of every distance is the average of the
three values.
Fatigue Test
The fatigue test was conducted on rotary bending machine for both raw and carburized material. The test is
started with relatively high load and decreased step by step. The result is determined by load and the number of
cycle when the specimen is broken. The test is stopped when the specimen is not broken for certain load.

Based on the Table 1, the carbon content of the steel rod is 0.17%. It indicates that the raw material is in the
family of low carbon steel[14]. Low carbon steel is often used as the material of gear, chamshaft, bushing and
020005-3
madrel after case hardening. The microstructure of low carbon steel consists of ferrite and pearlite. Figure 2 shows
the micro structure of the raw material.
FIGURE 2. Micro structure of the raw material (the dark areas are pearlite where as the bright areas are ferrite)
The micro structures after carburizing process can be seen in the Fig. 3 and Fig. 4. From Fig. 3, it can be seen
that the micro structure is devided into 2 zones e.g. case and core zone. The core zone has the same micro structure
as the raw material, whereas the case zone can be devided into three sub-zones [15]. The three sub zones are
hypereutectoid, eutectoid and hypoeutectoid. Hypereutectoid sub-zone (see Fig. 4.c) has micro structures of pearlite
and proeutectoid cementite. Eutectoid sub-zone has micro structure of pearlite (see Fig. 4.b). And hypoeutectoid sub
zone has micro structure of ferrite and pearlite (see Fig. 4.a).
FIGURE 3. Micro structure of carburized material

pearlite
ferrite pearlite Proeutectoid

a b c
FIGURE 4. Micro structures of case zone: a. hypoeutectoid sub-zone, b. Eutectoid sub-zone, c. hypereutectoid sub-zone
020005-4
Figure 5 shows the hardness profile of carburized material of each holding time (4, 3 and 2 hours). The
hardness profile has the shape rising on the left and descending on the right indicating that the hardness of the
carburized steel specimen decreases as it move towards the core of the steel. This is typical of all carburized steels; a
hard case and a soft core[8], [15]. It can be seen that the longer the holding time the harder the surface zone. It
indicates that more carbon in the surface zone for the longer holding time.
FIGURE 5.Hardness profile of carburized material.

Figure 6 shows the S-N diagram of fatigue test conducted to the raw material and all carburized materials of 2,
3 and 4 hours holding time. As expected, a difference fatigue curve between raw and all carburized materials can be
observed. The carburized material curves are above the raw material curve, it means that there is improvement of
fatigue life after carburizing process. This improvement is due to the properties change on the surface of carburized
material. The increasing carbon content on the surface (it can be seen on the change of surface micro structure as in
Figure 4) results harder (see fig. 5) and better strength whereas on the core the material is soft and ductile [4], [2],
[3], [5].
180
160 Raw material

4 hoursl
3 hours
140
2 hours
Stress (N/mm2)
120
100
80
20000 200000 2000000
Cycle number
FIGURE 6. S-N diagram of fatigue test
020005-5
It is also showed in fig. 6 that the holding time during the carburizing process also influences the fatigue strength
of the material. The longer the holding time will have the higher fatigue strength. This result confirms the hardness
test result that more carbon in the surface zone for the longer holding time. However, in this research the carburizing
process still maintains the ductility of the core zone. If the carburizing process does not maintain the ductility of the
core zone, the result will be different.
CONCLUSIONS
In this paper, it can be concluded that the carburizing process using charcoal of unused mahogany can improve
fatigue characteristic of the V-notched shaft steel specimen. The improvement is due to better surface properties
caused by higher carbon content as the effect of carburizing process. The longer the holding time will improve the
fatigue strength of the carburized material as long as the ductility of the core zone is still maintained.
REFERENCES
1. H. Darmawan, “Fatigue Criteria for Design of Machine Components,” in Prosiding Seminar Fatigue &
Fracture Mechanics, 1997, pp. 1–18.
2. V. Kvedaras, J. Vilys, V. Č. Iuplys, and A. Č. Iuplys, “Fatigue Strength of Chromium-Plated Steel,” Mater.
Sci., vol. 12, no. 1, pp. 16–18, 2006.
3. U. N. Puntambekar, G. S. Grewal, P. B. Joshi, and P. Sampathkumaran, “Effect of Plasma Nitriding Treatment
on Fatigue Life of En-24 steel,” Int. J. Innov. Res. Sci., vol. 2, no. 8, pp. 4069–4079, 2013.
4. R. Fragoudakis, S. Karditsas, G. Savaidis, and N. Michailidis, “The effect of heat and surface treatment on the
fatigue behaviour of 56SiCr7 spring steel,” Procedia Eng., vol. 74, pp. 309–312, 2014.
5. K. Takahashi and E. Sato, “Influence of Surface Treatments on Fatigue Strength of Ti6Al4V Alloy,” Mater.
Trans., vol. 51, no. 4, SI, pp. 694–698, 2010.
6. F. O. Aramide, S. A. Ibitoye, I. O. Oladele, and J. O. Borode, “Pack carburization of mild steel, using
pulverized bone as carburizer: Optimizing process parameters,” Leonardo Electron. J. Pract. Technol., vol. 9,
no. 16, pp. 1–12, 2010.
7. A. Oyetunji and S. O. Adeosun, “Effects of Carburizing Process Variables on Mechanical and Chemical
Properties of Carburized Mild Steel,” J. Basic Appl. Sci., vol. 8, pp. 319–324, 2012.
8. P. A. Ihom, “Case hardening of mild steel using cowbone as Energiser,” African J. Eng. Res., vol. 1, no.
October, pp. 97–101, 2013.
9. P. B. D. D. Swapnil R. Nimbhorkar, “Effect of Case Hardening Treatment on the Structure and Properties of
Automobile Gears,” Int. J. Mod. Eng. Res., vol. 3, no. 2, pp. 637–641, 2013.
10. S. Priyadarshini, T. Sharma, and G. Arora, “Effect of Post Carburizing Treatment on Hardness of Low Carbon
Steel,” Int. J. Adv. Mech. Eng., vol. 4, no. 7, pp. 763–766, 2014.
11. J. K. Ahmad, “Carburizing of steel,” Int. J. Mater. Sci. Appl., vol. 4, pp. 11–14, 2015.
12. D. A. Okongwu and V. Paranthaman, “Assesment of The Efficacy of Some Carbonate Minerals as Energizers
in Pack Carburisation of Mild Steel,” Niger. J. Technol., vol. 11, no. 1, 1987.
13. A. P. Ihom, G. B. Nyior, O. O. Alabi, S. Segun, J. Nor Iv, and J. Ogbodo, “The Potentials of Waste Organic
Materials for Surface Hardness Improvement of Mild,” Int. J. Sci. Eng. Res., vol. 3, no. 11, pp. 1–10, 2012.
14. H. C. ASM, Metals Handbook, 8th ed. Ohio, 1972.
15. Y. Lakhtin, Engineering Physical Metallurgy. Moscow: Foriegn LanguagePublishing House, 1965.
020005-6
Dadang Arifin and Edhi Yusuf


assessment method

Replacement Model of City Bus: A Dynamic
Programming Approach
Dadang Arifin1, a), Edhi Yusuf2
1
Industrial Engineering Department, Engineering Faculty, Universitas Jenderal Achmad Yani, Indonesia.
2
Industrial Engineering Department, Engineering Faculty, Universitas Jenderal Achmad Yani, Indonesia.
a)
Corresponding author: dadangarifin@yahoo.co.id)
Abstract. This paper aims to develop a replacement model of city bus vehicles operated in Bandung City. This study
is driven from real cases encountered by the Damri Company in the efforts to improve services to the public. The
replacement model propounds two policy alternatives: First, to maintain or keep the vehicles, and second is to
replace them with new ones taking into account operating costs, revenue, salvage value, and acquisition cost of a
new vehicle. A deterministic dynamic programming approach is used to solve the model. The optimization process
was heuristically executed using empirical data of Perum Damri. The output of the model is to determine the
replacement schedule and the best policy if the vehicle has passed the economic life. Based on the results, the
technical life of the bus is approximately 20 years old, while the economic life is an average of 9 (nine) years. It
means that after the bus is operated for 9 (nine) years, managers should consider the policy of rejuvenation.
INTRODUCTION
The existence of safe and comfort transportation mode is expected by the public. However, in reality, many
transportation business owners do not pay attention seriously to the customers¶ needs. Along with the increased
demand for transport, the transportation service provider is required to provide good service to customers. When
the public transportation serves appropriately, it might motivate the users of private vehicles to switch using
public transport services that will promote the reduction of congestion. One of the most important aspects of
transportation service that must be maintained by the provider is related with the safety and comfort of the
vehicle. However, there is a barrier in the fulfillment of this aspect. It is also determined by the company¶V
profitability, while the public interest to utilize public transport still seems to be low.
The longer the operational duration of a vehicle, the lower the YHKLFOHV¶ performance, productivity, and
efficiency. Moreover, maintenance costs and operational costs will increase. Even at a time, there will be
imbalance between profitability and maintenance costs. There are two important aspects that must be considered
in the vehicle maintenance, namely the economic life and technical life or lifespan. Age is related to the
economical feasibility in the financial aspect, while the technical life is associated with the feasibility in the
technical aspects. The basic information of the economic life and lifespan is crucial. If the company does not
pay attention to the transportation service provider, it is possible the company will continually suffer losses and
even bring risk to the safety of users.
On this basis, the calculation of the economic life was carried out to formulate an alternative model for
replacement. This study also departed from actual issue encountered by the Damri Company in efforts to
improve WKHFRPSDQ\¶Vservices to the public. One of such efforts is to improve the operational capability of the
fleet by rejuvenating the vehicle. From a number of existing vehicles, some of them categorized as old so that
their performance declined even broken-down during their operational shift. Based on discussions with the
management, it is assumed that one way to improve the public service is to rejuvenate the old fleets that are not
economically feasible. Regarding with this problem, this paper presents a replacement model that is considered
to address the problem appropriately.
Several rejuvenation models have been developed and propounded in scientific journals, both international
and national journals. Some of them refer to the method developed in the book written by HA Taha, entitled
Operations research: An Introduction, (8th edition). In this study, a journal was selected as a comparison, which
was composed by Ernest Oseghale Amiens, titled A Dynamic Programming Approach to Replacement of
Vehicles in Benin City, Nigeria and published by 'British Journal of Mathematics & Computer Science', in 2015.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020006-1–020006-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985451
020006-1
In this study, the model that includes new variable cost, namely the cost of maintenance, was designed.
Hopefully, this attempt will obtain a good result in pertaining with the public transportation service.
REVIEW OF LITERATURE
Revitalization is considered necessary if the performance, productivity, efficiency and effectiveness of the
vehicle decrease, while the operating costs and maintenance costs increase. In engineering economic terms, the
condition is perceives as the vehicle has reached or passed the economic lives. In this condition, the
management must determine an option, whether to perform minor repairs or replace the old vehicles with new
ones. All the options were included in the domain of replacement analysis.
Numbers of replacement models have been developed based on the basic model as explained in a book
written by HA Taha, entitled Operations Research 8th editions. Some articles regarding with replacement model
have been widely published in international journals, among of them can be seen in the references. Here are
models that have been developed by HA Taha in his book and other authors in several journals.
HA Taha [1] explained machine replacement problem over n years. At the beginning of each year, it is
important to decide whether to keep the machine in workshop with an extra year or to replace it with a new one.
For generating model, r(t), c(t), and s(t) are defined respectively to represent the annual revenue, operating cost,
and salvage value of a t-years old machine. The initial cost for acquiring a new machine in any year is I.
The elements of the dynamic programming model are:
Stage is represented by year i, i=1, 2, ..., n.
The alternative policy at stage (year) i, is either keeping or replacing the machine at the beginning of year i.
The state at each stage i, is the age of the machine at the beginning of year i.
Subsequently, fi(t) = maximum net income for year i, i + 1 and n given that the machine is t years old at the
start of the year i.
The recursive equation is derived as:
°r t ct f i1 t 1, if KEEP (1)

f i t max ®
°̄r 0 st I c0 f i1 1, if REPLACE (2)
f n1 . { 0 (3)
Ernest Oseghale [2] has adopted the dynamic programming algorithm developed by Rasid A [3] as
H[SOLFDWHGLQ³Dynamic programming based on bus replacement policy for Metro-Mass Transit Limited-Kumasi
Depot´. The decision of interest in this study is whether to keep the machine or replace it with a new one at each
stage. The equation is given as follows;
Vk (i) Min(C (i) Vk 1 (i 1)) ...... ....... KEEP ....... (4)
Vk (i) Min(C (0) I S (T ) Vk 1 (i 1)) ...... ....... REPLACE ....... (5)
Where:
C(i) = Operation cost of a bus that is i years old
C(0) = Operation cost of a new bus
I = Acquisition cost of a new bus
S(i) = Salvage value of an i year old bus
Vk(i) = Total cost for a bus of age (i) at stage (k)
Vk(i+1) = Total cost for a bus of age (i+1) at stage (k+1)
i = The state variable, (bus age at stage k)
Dk = Decision at stage k
K = Stage, (year of operation).
Reference [4] discussed the application of dynamic programming to equipment replacement. He reviewed a
maximization model which included revenue, acquisition cost and maintenance cost as its basic variables.
020006-2
f t (i) MaxRt (i) U t (i) f t 1 (i 1) ...... ....... KEEP ....... (6)
f t (i) Max( Rt (0) U t (0) Gt (0) f i1 (i 1)) ...... ....... REPLACE ....... (7)
Where:
ft(i) = Maximum overall return from a machine of i years at the beginning of the year t, t+1, ..., T.
Rt(i) = Revenue obtained from a machine at age i at the beginning of year t.
Ut(i) = Maintenance cost of machine of age i at the beginning of year t.
Gt(i) = Replacement cost of machine of age i by a new machine at the beginning of year t.
METHODOLOGY
In determining the most appropriate policy of vehicle replacement, some criteria were defined previously.
The criteria depended upon the real condition of the vehicle and or management policies in the form of
requirements that must be met. Vehicle condition depended on the age, whereas management requirements can
be a limitation that must be met. Based on these considerations, the researcher set the stage for this research.
The study was commenced by a tally of the economic life, the identification of variables related to the
advantages, and the identification of variables related to costs. Both development models with regard to the
criteria of net profit which is the difference between the profit and costs incurred.
In this study, modeling adopted the basic model developed by HA Taha [1] and added several variables
related to costs. Models and algorithms generated by the modeling are shown in the next discussion.
MODEL SPECIFICATION USED

The dynamic programming algorithm given in [1] was developed by adding maintenance cost, so the
generated algorithm was as follow:
°r t ct mt f i 1 t 1,
if KEEP (8)
f i t max ®
°̄r 0 st I c0 m0 f i 1 1, if REPLACE (9)
f n 1 . { 0
Where:
m(t) = maintenance cost for a bus with t years old, and the other symbols are exactly the same with previous
definition [1].
RESULT AND DISCUSSION

Based on the last observation, it can be determined that the technical life of big bus is 20 years, which is in
accordance with Regional Regulation of Bandung No. 16 of 2012 on the Implementation of Transportation and
Retribution as contained in Paragraph 5 about Rejuvenation, Replacement and Removal Vehicles on Article 89
paragraph 3 point c which is stated ³big bus vehicle age limit is a maximum of 20 years since its publication
registration, if vehicle is eligible and roadworthy´. While based on the executed calculation of economic life, the
economic life of a city bus vehicles is 9 years old, so at the age of 10 years, it must be decided whether it is
necessary for replacement or improvement. The figure below illustrates the life of vehicle at present, and the
two alternatives that should be determined in the following years.
The results of the revenue, costs and salvage value estimation of the vehicles are presented in Table 1. Based
on the data, the value of each cost and revenue with a time series approach can be estimated, while depreciation
of vehicle was performed with Sum of Year digits (SOYD) approach. Operational cost on included tires
procurement, vulcanization, fuels, and lubrications. Maintenance cost included spare parts procurement, air
conditioning maintenance, and other maintenance costs.
Based on interviews, the price or acquisition cost for a new city bus was approximately 910.000.000 IDR and
the estimated salvage value after the vehicle reached 15 years was 200.000.000 IDR.
020006-3
Determination of the most appropriate policy in each year RI YHKLFOH¶V XVDJH ZDV LQ DFFRUGDQFH ZLWK WKH
developed model at the equation 8 and 9. Optimization process was conducted by backward dynamic
programming approach.
In this study, a trial was performed for determining the policy for a vehicle in the next 4 years, so the process
was begun from stage 4 to stage 1. At the start of 4th year, city bus aged of 1; 2; 3; and 13 years, were examined.
The start of 3th year, city bus aged 1; 2; and 12 years, were examined. The stage 2 and 1 were examined based
on previous method. In addition, there were merely two kind of decisions, namely to keep or to replace.
Complete dynamic programming process is shown in Table 2.
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13 13
K
12 12
K
R
11 11
K
R
Start 10
Technical life
9 R
4 4
K
S
3 3 3 S
R K
K End
S
2 2 R 2 R 2 S
K K K
R R R
1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5
Decision Year
FIGURE 1. Decision-Making Network.
020006-4
TABLE 1. Predicted Replacement Costs.
Age. t Maintenance. Salvage value.
Revenue. r(t) Operating. c(t)
(year) m(t) s(t)
0 583.239.000 110.109.489 18.382.275 -
1 530.217.273 141.484.063 20.802.595 821.250.000
2 482.015.702 152.521.764 21.277.555 738.416.667
3 438.196.093 158.632.900 22.961.745 661.500.000
4 398.360.085 164.630.285 28.896.080 590.500.000
5 362.145.532 173.637.343 31.156.070 525.416.667
6 329.223.210 182.010.751 36.384.685 466.250.000
7 299.293.828 190.202.258 41.052.350 413.000.000
8 272.085.298 203.543.452 46.682.469 365.666.667
9 247.350.271 217.848.160 56.989.875 324.250.000
10 224.863.883 235.151.368 78.036.675 288.750.000
11 173.324.664 235.630.655 69.270.477 259.166.667
12 139.679.127 245.387.822 74.878.925 235.500.000
13 106.033.590 255.144.989 80.487.374 217.750.000
14 72.388.053 264.902.156 86.095.822 205.916.667
15 38.742.516 274.659.324 91.704.271 200.000.000
Based on the backward recursive equation, the dynamic process can be demonstrated in the table below.
TABLE 2. Optimization process by dynamic programming (stage 4 to stage 1).
Stage 4
KEEP REPLACE Optimum Solution
t
r(t)+s(t+1)-c(t)-m(t) r(0)+s(t)+s(1)-c(0)-m(0)-I f4(t) Decision
1 1.106.347.281 1.104.413.903 1.106.347.281 K
2 969.716.383 1.021.580.569 1.021.580.569 R
3 847.101.448 944.663.903 944.663.903 R
13 (23.682.106) 500.913.903 500.913.903 R
Stage 3
t
r(t)-c(t)-m(t)+f2(t+1) r(0)+s(t)-c(0)-m(0)-I+f4(1) f3(t) Decision
1 1.389.511.184 1.472.344.517 1.472.344.517 R
2 1.252.880.286 1.389.511.184 1.389.511.184 R
12 320.326.283 886.594.517 886.594.517 R
Stage 2
t
1 1.757.441.799 1.838.341.753 1.838.341.753 R
11 755.018.050 1.276.258.420 1.276.258.420 R
Stage 1
t
10 1.187.934.260 1.671.838.989 1.671.838.989 R
020006-5
Based on the analysis, the best decision at the beginning of the first year is to replace, so at the beginning of
the second year, the vehicle is aged one year and the best decision for the second year is to replace. It results the
vehicle in the third year is aged one year, in which the best decision of stage 3 is to replace so that at the
beginning of the fourth year, the vehicle is aged 2 years with the best decision at stage 4 (year 4) is to replace.
The illustration of this decision is presented in Fig. 2.
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4
(t=10) R (t=1) R (t=1) R (t=2) R etc.
FIGURE 2. Illustration of the decision
CONCLUSIONS AND SUGGESTION
Conclusions
Based on the research, some conclusions are drawn as follows:
1. The calculation of the economic life does not appear in this article. However, referring to the model
developed by Newman and a study of Park, the generated result is similar for the economic life of 10 years.
It shows that after reaching 10-years lifetime, the vehicle is not economically feasible and 'policy of
rejuvenation' should be performed, whether to replace or to maintain.
2. By using a dynamic programming approach to execute the cost model of rejuvenation that was developed
above, obtained a decision for the next four years respectively is Replace in each years. The advantage to be
gained by the decision model estimated IDR 1.671.838.989.
Suggestion
On the determination of bus rejuvenation policy, the author recognizes the data used in the model is less
accountable due to the difficulty in predicting the costs or benefits of each year. Factors that affect the costs and
benefits in some period ahead are not explored accurately. Predictions are only based on time series approach
method.
REFERENCES
1. Taha HA., Operations Research: An Introduction, (8th edition), New Delhi, PHI Learning Privet Limited;
2008.
2. Oseghale Amiens, A Dynamic Programming Approach to Replacement of Transport Vehicles in Benin
City, Nigeria.
3. Rashid A. Dynamic programming based bus replacement policy for Metro-Mass Transit Limited-Kumasi
Depot, (MSc. Thesis); 2011.
4. Van der Wat S. Developing a framework for determining the optimal replacement strategy for a vehicle
fleet of a 3rd Party Logistics Service Provider (LSP), imperial distribution (Bachelor project); 2011.
020006-6
Premium cost optimization of operational and maintenance of green building in
Indonesia using life cycle assessment method
Yusuf Latief, Mohammed Ali Berawi, Van Basten, Rachmat Budiman, and Riswanto





Premium Cost Optimization of Operational and
Maintenance of Green Building in Indonesia Using Life
Cycle Assessment Method
Yusuf Latief1, a), Mohammed Ali Berawi1, b), Van Basten1, c), Rachmat
Budiman1, d), and Riswanto1, e)
1
Department of Civil Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Kampus Baru UI, Depok,
16424, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: latief73@eng.ui.ac.id
b)
ale.berawi@gmail.com
c)
basten2704@gmail.com
d)
rachmat.budiman@ui.ac.id
e)
aygish@gmail.com
Abstract. Building has a big impact on the environmental developments. There are three general motives in
building, namely the economy, society, and environment. Total completed building construction in Indonesia
increased by 116% during 2009 to 2011. It made the energy consumption increased by 11% within the last three
years. In fact, 70% of energy consumption is used for electricity needs on commercial buildings which leads to an
increase of greenhouse gas emissions by 25%. Green Building cycle costs is known as highly building upfront cost
in Indonesia. The purpose of optimization in this research improves building performance with some of green
concept alternatives. Research methodology is mixed method of qualitative and quantitative approaches through
questionnaire surveys and case study. Assessing the successful of optimization functions in the existing green
building is based on the operational and maintenance phase with the Life Cycle Assessment Method. Choosing
optimization results were based on the largest efficiency of building life cycle and the most effective cost to refund.
INTRODUCTION
Buildings life cycle is the most significant factors in which it is responsible for approximately 38% of total
CO2 emissions in the world [1]. In Indonesia, building activities have a significant impact, which is 85% of total
CO2 emission derived from 5.9 billion GJ energy process activities and deforestation or land conversion of
approximately 2 million hectare per year [2]. Therefore, it is required to develop new concepts to manage the
building activities, one of them is the Green Building Concept. In fact, Green Building Concept is perceived as a
complex application in building life cycle in Indonesia. Not only on the construction phase, the operational and
maintenance phase of the concept are considered as complicated [3]. The main problem of the concept in the
operational and maintenance are based on five aspects, namely: technical, managerial, legal and political,
environmental and biological, and social and culture. The implementation of the concept in different region
requires an evaluation to examine its effect on the building long life, especially in its cycle cost [4]. Previous
researches on the implementation of green building design showed that the green building construction required
higher initial cost in compared to those of conventional building construction. However, this research
investigated the green building life cycle assessment to obtain more efficient and effective operational and
maintenance. Subsequently, effective and efficient value would be used to obtain the most economic operational
and maintenance of Green Building. Optimization can be done by using the resources effectively and efficiently.
Based on Union International des Architect 2009 [5], Sustainable design is identified as a combination of
building design or function optimization, renewable energy, and friendly environment technology by integrating
the knowledge development. Before 2009, the development of building construction in Indonesia was not
performed based on the Green Building Concept. In fact, Green Building Council Indonesia (GBCI) was
established in 2009. Rating tools is referred as GREENSHIP by GBCI, which is supported by the World Green
Building Council (WGBC) with some adaptations to the condition in Indonesia [6]. Green buildings which have
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020007-1–020007-9; doi: 10.1063/1.4985452
020007-1
obtained Greenship certification are six existing buildings and twelve new buildings. With a few number of
green buildings in Indonesia, building developers in Indonesia have to evaluate why Green Building Concept is
not attractive
This paper aimed to evaluate and to optimize in the operational and maintenance factors in green building by
applying the fourth version of Leadership Energy and Environmental Design (LEED). The impact of the
optimization was subsequently evaluated based on the efficiency and effectively by using Life Cycle
Assessment (LCA) Method. LCA is a process to measure the initial, operational, and environmental impact of
the building material or service life cycle. LCA analysis was used to evaluate the real condition of green
building in Indonesia in compared with other rating tools in the world. Since Greenship was established based
on WGBC, the benchmarking was done in accordance to the rating tools of LEED (Leadership Energy and
Environmental Design). LCCA consists of initial cost, operational cost, maintenance cost, and salvage value that
depend on the building life time [7]. Finally, this research provided recommendations to determine the most
efficient, effective, and economic operational and maintenance green building in Indonesia based on the green
building optimization aspects.
Optimization
Building optimization is a process that is carried out to influence the building environmental performance
factors. According to Baker and Steemers [8], the factors consist of building design, service systems design,
and occupant behavior. Three main factors on the energy performance is illustrated in Fig. 1 below where the
numbers in the figure showed that the preference of the low-quality building design can reduce less energy over
two and a half times than the high-quality building design. This condition can be extended up to five times
when several adjustments on care system parameters such as efficiency in lighting and heating devices are
performed. Meanwhile, when the optimization factors are coupled with the RFFXSDQW¶V character, the building
efficiency would save the energy up to ten times.
FIGURE 1. Building Performance Factors
Basically, the objective of optimization process is to find the best solution after some choices are determined
as the performance criterion. Optimization is different with options or determination of a knowledge-based
system that regulates many forms of simulation as an input to assess the process. In this method, the exploration
process is used to determine the optimal value of the life cycle variable. Thus, optimization can be simply
identified as the process of combining three steps of elaboration process, manufacturing the simulation, and
process evaluation [9]. On this research, optimization was assessed based on building life cycle. Life Cycle
Assessment is identified as an assessment process by evaluating the inputs, outputs, and the overall
environmental impact of the goods or services product life cycle as demonstrated in Fig. 2 [7]. This cycle is a
way to identify, measure, and evaluate energy and selected materials as well as residual waste discharge that
brings impact on the implementation of the manufacturing activity of product or service to the environment. The
results of life cycle evaluation will be used to find opportunities for the environmental improvements [10]. The
scope of the LCA depends on the purpose of the assessment.
020007-2
FIGURE 2. Diagram of Life Cycle Assessment
There are four main processes in LCA [11]. The first is Cradle-to-Grave that is an assessment of the full life
cycle starting from the stage of manufacture, usage, to the disposal of the remaining materials. The second is
Cradle-to-Gate that is an assessment of the partial product life cycle from the manufacture stage to the storage in
the factory/warehouse or building site in prior to the distribution stage. The third is Cradle-to-Cradle that is an
assessment of the life cycle of a product, similar to the process of the Cradle-to-Grave but the discharge stage in
the end of the product life is converted into the recycle stage. The last is Gate-to-Gate that is the division of
LCA process by assessing only on the overall process of the production chain of materials or products.
Calculating the cost of building life cycle or Life Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA) is the earn value that
covering entire project cost including the initial investment costs, operating costs, maintenance costs, and the
final value of the project at the specified life design. Based on the studies that was conducted by Trixy Firsani
[12], LCCA categorization can be described as in Fig. 3. However, this study was conducted specifically to
examine the operational and maintenance costs optimization of green building which was adjusted to the actual
conditions of green building case study.
FIGURE 3. Cost Breakdown Structure
020007-3
Green Building
Based on the United State Environmental Protection Agency [13], green building is an activity to build a
structure by using the system that must be environmentally friendly and efficient resources at the entire life
cycle building services which consist of design, construction, operation, maintenance, renovation, and
deconstruction. Green Building Council Indonesia (GBCI) states that green buildings, both the new or existing
building, should be planned, constructed, and operated in accordance to the environmental sustainability factors.
Green building is a part of sustainable building that aims to increase the value of a building that serves both
occupants and the environment. The objective of green building is to reduce or eliminate the negative impacts of
buildings to the environment and occupants by using the efficient and effective energy, water, and building
materials [14]. In addition, the benefit of green building includes the reduction of climate damage as a result of
building developments in the environment [15]. Furthermore, it provides the necessities of life to future
generation as a sustainable building [16]. Essentially, appropriate green building operational and maintenance
management can save the building cost that can be done by minimizing the energy and water use in the building.
The six categories in GREENSHIP assessment are Appropriate Site Development (ASD), Energy Efficiency
& Refrigerant (EER), Water Conservation (WAC), Material Resources & Cycle (MRC), Indoor Air Health &
Comfort (IHC), and Building & Environment Management (BEM). Number and average growth of green
building in some countries in the world can be seen in Table 1. Moreover, there are eight categories assessment
in LEED, namely: Sustainable Sites, Water Efficiency, Energy and Atmosphere, Material and Resources, Indoor
Environmental Quality, Location and Transportation, Integrated Process, Introduction, and Regional Priority.
TABLE 1. Number and Average Growth of Green Building in Some Countries
Number of Average Growth
Country Name Year
Green Building (Per Year)
US 1998-2012 13.000 867
Hongkong 2005-2014 1.500 150
Singapore 2005-2015 1.101 100
Germany 2009-2016 490 61
Malaysia 2009-2015 335 48
South Korea 2008-2012 53 11
Israel 2005-2013 45 5
Indonesia 2009-2015 18 3
The building functions based on LEED that divide building life cycle can see on Fig. 4. The objective of
LEED is to actualize and develop the construction industrial guidance for sustainable building design,
particularly on commercial building [17]. Based on Leonardo Academy in BOMA Expert Exchange Report
2007 [18], the LEED for Existing Building certified buildings that can attain superior operational cost savings
up to 63% of surveyed buildings or in the range of $4,94 to $15,59 per feet square floor area, with an average
value of $6,68 and median of $6,07. The benefits of using GB Concept in existing buildings can save the
opeartional and maintenance costs. In addition, it becomes a government program on buildings as well as
private and public sectors to build environmentally friendly building construction [19].
FIGURE 4. LEED and LEED-EB Period (Operational and Maintenance)
020007-4
Methodology
In order to achieve the research objectives, this
research was conducted by using quantitative
approach through questionnaire and qualitative
approach through case study. Initially, Greenship
rating tools as well as rating tools in the world were
evaluated. Subsequently, it was used to identify the
issues of green building assessment from new
building to existing building. Rating tools was re-
evaluated with premium cost evaluation. Premium
cost evaluation was based on assessment
achievement and percentage premium cost per
aspects with Percentage of Average Score (PAS).
The next step was questionnaire survey that
involved stakeholders and construction operators,
including Green Building Council Indonesia,
Indonesian Ministry of Public Works, and green
building management team who have certified by
Greenship Professional. Questioner data analysis
was conducted by using frequency statistics [20].
Based on the results of questionnaire data, the
most optimal operational and maintenance of GB
was identified. The most optimal results that was
evaluated by Life Cycle Assessment (LCA)
Method would be the most efficient and effective
innovation and life cycle costs investment of
existing GB. The Life Cycle Assessment Phase was
done similarly to Sam Wyly Hall (SWH) in Life
Cycle Inventory (LCI) as shown in Fig. 5. Based on
Trixy Firsani [12], this research divided the Life
Cycle Cost Analysis into four categories, namely:
FIGURE 5. Diagram of Life Cycle Phase
initial cost, energy and resources cost, replacement
cost, and operational and maintenance cost.
However, this study aimed to determine the optimization of the operational and maintenance cost in existing
GB. Thus, LCCA calculation was divided into three categories of initial cost, resources cost, and operational
and maintenance cost. In the final stage of this research, recommendations for the optimization were provided as
a product of this research based on case study results.
Results and Discussion

Benchmarking was done to eleven rating tools in the world. From this study, there were thirteen aspects of
rating tools for green building assessment that six of them are included in Greenship and the others are not
specified (transportation, pollution, waste, innovation, regional priority, and economic). Comparison result and
weighting aspects can see in Table 2. Subsequently, this research was continued by an assessment and premium
cost evaluation as presented in Fig. 6. The figure demonstrates that new green buildings which were certified by
Greenship had focused on energy conservation, appropriate site development, and indoor and health quality.
Additionally, the existing buildings focused on water conservation, energy conservation, and indoor health and
comfort. The buildings type achievement was lingered with increased premium cost except appropriate site
development because it was affected by the building location.
020007-5
TABLE 2. Result of Green Building Rating Tools Comparison
Green
BREEAM HK-BEAM Green Mark IS Standard Greenship Kemen.
Rating Tools LEED 2009 CASBEE Green Star Building DGNB 2011
2013 4/ 04 4.1 5281 Ver. 1.2 PUPR
Index 2009
Found Year 1990 1993 2001 2002 2003 2005 2005 2009 2009 2009 2015
Country UK USA Japan Hongkong Australia Singapore Israel Malaysia Germany Indonesia Indonesia
Site Development 4.5% 23.6% 16.7% 13.9% 7.0% 22.1% 9.8% 0.0% 22.5% 16.8% 21.3%
Transport 8.1% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 9.0% 0.0% 1.7% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
Energy Conservation 27.0% 31.8% 16.7% 41.7% 25.0% 61.1% 32.1% 35.0% 0.0% 25.7% 18.0%
Water Efficiency 8.1% 9.1% 8.3% 6.7% 14.0% 8.9% 15.7% 10.0% 0.0% 20.8% 14.8%
Material Resources 10.8% 12.7% 8.3% 12.8% 13.0% 0.0% 7.5% 11.0% 0.0% 13.9% 15.6%
Indoor Health & Comfort 9.0% 13.6% 16.7% 25.0% 15.0% 4.2% 15.3% 21.0% 22.5% 9.9% 7.8%
Building Management 19.8% 0.0% 16.7% 0.0% 9.0% 0.0% 7.8% 16.0% 10.0% 12.9% 11.5%
Pollution 4.5% 0.0% 16.7% 0.0% 8.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 7.0%
Waste 6.3% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 1.4% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 4.1%
Innovation/ Green Features 1.8% 5.5% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 3.7% 8.6% 7.0% 22.5% 0.0% 0.0%
Regional Priority 0.0% 3.6% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%
Economic 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 22.5% 0.0% 0.0%
Max Point 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
(a) (b)
FIGURE 6. Percentage of Rating Tools Achievement and Premium Cost Percentage for (a) New Building and (b) Existing
Building
This research was continued with indicator evaluation. From this evaluation, there were six indicators that
they did not attain the minimum score criteria of new green building achievement, including: ventilation, on site
renewable energy, water recycle, building and material recycle, and proper commissioning. For the existing
building, there were four aspects including storm water management, on site renewable energy, clean energy,
and recycle water. In the last survey, data collection was done by questionnaire which was established
structurally so as it was easily understood and filled. The result of the questionnaire consisted of three parts,
namely: UHVSRQGHQW¶V background, new green building indicators that affect to the existing conditions. In
addition, this research investigated the efficiency and effectiveness of green building optimization from existing
green building in Indonesia as the case study.
Based on the analysis of data frequency, 16% of respondents were developers, 33% were consultants, 26%
were contractors, 5% were lecturers, 2% were government employees, and 17% were building owners. In
addition, 74% of respondents were undergraduate, 20% were postgraduate, and 2% were others. Based on the
respondents¶ position, 23% were managers, 12% were mechanical and electrical engineers, 12%were civil
engineers, 21% were architects, 17% were staffs, and 11%were others. In addition, the work experience of 67%
of respondents was 1-10 years, 29% was 11-20 years, and 4% was 21-30 years.
In ASD aspects, there were six indicators that had significant effect on the performance of operational and
maintenance building. They were storm water management, pedestrian facility, railway or bus station, public
facility, landscape area, and vegetation. In EEC, they were ventilation system, natural lighting, energy record,
thermal transmission, and electricity calculation. In WAC, they were water recycle and water treatment system.
020007-6
In IHC aspects, they were acoustic level, thermal comfort, chemical pollutants, and environmental tobacco
control. In BEM, they were waste management, water flood control, ozone depletion control, commissioning,
facade integration, and building reviewing meeting. In Innovation, they were utilization environment and
improved building function. In economic aspects, they were life cycle cost review process, room space
efficiency, and building strategy access.
In ASD aspects, there were five indicators that had insignificant effect to the performance of building
operational and maintenance. They were type of fertilizer plants, parking area system, bicycle facilities, green
roof, and CO2 sensor. In EEC, they were worksheet calculation, facade system, glare control, and controlling
excess energy. In WAC, they were alternative water and worksheet calculation. In IHC aspect, they were
smoking area, air pollution monitoring, tenant restriction, and feet stepping. In BEM, they were renovation of
waste management, building book guide, rain water management, and green culture. In Innovation, they were
carbon reduction record and concrete index calculation. In economical aspect, they were funding review and
parking area quality.
At the operational and maintenance aspects of GB, optimization can be done through energy conservation
and water conservation. In addition, it was affected by indoor health and convenience/comfort. Comparison of
Green building is presented in Table 3. In overall, LEED rating tools had lower cost than Greenship in achieving
the green indicators except on silver. The result of energy saving and water reduction is presented in Table 4 and
Table 5. In average, energy saving and water reduction were achieved by all green building in Indonesia toward
Indonesian standard and Greenship.
TABLE 3. Comparison of Green Building Premium Cost
Average Green Cost Premium (%)

Level of Green Standard
Greenship (INA) LEED (USA)
Certified/ Bronze N/A 0.66
Silver 1.23 2.11
Gold 7.24 1.82
Platinum 10.86 6.50
Average 8 of 12 New Green Buildings 7.85
Average of 33 Green Buildings (Y. Liu et al., 2014) 1.84
TABLE 4. Energy Saving Achievement
Average Energy Saving (%)

Min. Baseline Design
Certified/ Bronze 10.00 N/A
Silver 10.00 15.38
Gold 10.00 31.43
Platinum 10.00 37.33
TABLE 5. Water Reduction Achievement
Average Water Saving (%)

80% INA Standar Design
Certified/ Bronze 20.00 N/A
Silver 20.00 15.04
Gold 20.00 43.18
Platinum 20.00 57.00
020007-7
CONCLUSIONS
The results of comparison of green building rating tools indicated there were six aspects that can be added to
the green building assessment tools. They were transportation system, pollution, water, innovation, regional
priority, and economic. The most significant concern of green building rating tools was the energy conservation.
In new green buildings, there were three major aspects that had significant impact on premium cost. They were
energy efficiency and conservation, appropriate site development, and material resource and cycle. In existing
buildings, there were three major aspects that had significant effect on premium cost. They were energy
efficiency and conservation, appropriate site development, and water conservation.
Based on the survey, new green building in Indonesia should be improved pertaining to energy and
efficiency conservation, water conservation, material resource and cycle, and building environmental
management. Furthermore, for existing buildings, the appropriate site development, energy and efficiency
conservation, and water conservation are required. The improvement can be done by the development of storm
water management system, pedestrian, railway/ bus station, public facility, landscape area, and vegetation. In
EEC, they are ventilation system, natural lighting system, recorded energy use, thermal transmission, and
electricity calculation plan. In water conservation, they are recycle water and water treatment system. In MRC,
they are material with green certificate and prefabrication material. In BEM, they are renovation of waste
management, building book guide, rain water management, and green culture. In Innovation, they are carbon
reduction record and concrete index calculation. In economic, they are funding review and parking area quality.
In ASD, they are storm water management, pedestrian facility, railway or bus station, public facility, landscape
area, and vegetation.
Platinum level and gold level have insignificant difference in saving energy and water, than silver level to
gold level. Moreover, life cycle cost of silver level has higher value with the highest benefit cost ratio and
investment return. In addition, it would be the fastest payback period. Higher number of investor or owner of
green building prefer gold level green building because it required medium premium cost with moderate to high
energy saving and water reduction.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The authors would like to thank to the International Indexed Publication Grants for Final Project Students in
Universitas Indonesia (Hibah PITTA UI) for the financial support of this research. In addition, we thank to all
the organizations and individuals who kindly participated in the research. Their time and inputs in the
questionnaire survey was highly appreciated. The authors would also like to thank and acknowledge the Project
Management Study Program, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Indonesia, for the generous support
and encouragement on this research.
REFERENCES
1. M.S.K. Al-Zubaidy. A Literature Evaluation of the Energy Efficiency of Leadership in Energy and
Environmental Design (LEED)-Certified Buildings. American Journal of Civil Engineering and
Architecture, 2015. 3(1): p. 1-7.
2. P. Bansal and K. Roth, Why companies go green: A model of ecological responsiveness. Academy
of management journal, 2000. 43(4): p. 717-736.
3. C. Bayer, G. Michael, R. Gentry and J. Surabhi. AIA guide to building life cycle assessment in
practice. The American Institute of Architects, Washington DC, 2010.
4. N. Darabi. Life cycle assessment: Existing building retrofit versus replacement . University of
Southern California. 2013.
5. E. W. East. Construction operations building information exchange (COBie) , 2007, DTIC
Document.
6. M. Finkbeiner, A. Inaba, R. Tan, K. Christiansen and H. Kluppel. The new international standards
for life cycle assessment: ISO 14040 and ISO 14044. The international journal of life cycle
assessment, 2006. 11(2): p. 80-85.
7. T. Firsani and C. Utomo, Analisa life cycle cost pada green building diamond building Malaysia.
Jurnal Teknik ITS, 2012. 1(1): p. D34-D39.
8. J. Foster, A. Lowe and S. Winkelman, The value of green infrastructure for urban climate
adaptation. Center for Clean Air Policy, 2011. 750.
9. A. J. Hoffman and R. Henn, Overcoming the social and psychological barriers to green building.
Organization & Environment, 2008. 21(4): p. 390-419.
020007-8
10. Indonesia, G.B.C., GREENSHIP Versi 1.0, 2010, Jakarta.
11. D. H. MacDonald, N. D. Crossman, P. Mahmoudi, L. O. Taylor, D. M. Summers and P. C. Boxall.
The value of public and private green spaces under water restrictions. Landscape and Urban
Planning, 2010. 95(4): p. 192-200.
12. N. N Zainol, I. S. Mohammad, M. Baba, N. B. Woon, N. A. Ramli, A Q. Nazri, M A. A. Lokman .
Critical factors that lead to green building operations and maintenance problems in Malaysia : A
Preliminary Study. Theoretical and Empirical Researches in Urban Management, 2014. 9(2): p. 68.
13. K. Parrish and M. Chester. Life-Cycle assessment for construction of sustainable infrastructure.
Practice Periodical on Structural Design and Construction, 2013. 19(1): p. 89 -94.
14. A. D. Radford and J. S. Gero. Design by optimization in architecture, building, and construction .
1987: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
15. C. Ratti, D. Robinson, Nick Baker and K. Steemers. LT Urban: the energy modelling of urban
form. in Proceedings of PLEA. 2000.
16. M. Roldán and M. Hernández-Mariné. Exploring the secrets of the three-dimensional architecture
of phototrophic biofilms in caves. International Journal of Speleology, 2009. 38(1): p. 5.
17. I. Sukarno, H. Matsumoto, L. Susanti and R. Kimura. Urban energy consumption in a city of
Indonesia: general overview. International Journal of Energy Economics and Policy, 2015. 5(1): p.
360.
18. O. Tatari and M. Kucukvar. Cost premium prediction of certified green buildings: A neural network
approach. Building and Environment, 2011. 46(5): p. 1081-1086.
19. Trochim, W.M., Qualitative measures. 2006.
20. N. D. VanWoert, D. B. Rowe, J. A. Andresen, C. L. Rugh, R. T. Fernandez and L. Xiao. Green roof
stormwater retention. Journal of environmental quality, 2005. 34(3): p. 1036 -1044.
020007-9
Use of a double condenser in a dehumidifier with a spray dryer for vitamin A extraction
in tomato as a heat-sensitive material
E. A. Kosasih, Warjito, Imansyah I. H., and N. Ruhyat

Use of a Double Condenser in a Dehumidifier with a Spray
Dryer for Vitamin A Extraction in Tomato as a Heat-
Sensitive Material
E. A. Kosasih1a, Warjito1b, Imansyah IH1c, N. Ruhyat1d

1
Applied Heat Transfer Laboratory, Department of Mechanical Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, 16424,
Depok, West Java, Indonesia
Corresponding emails: akosri@gmail.com; bwarjito@eng.ui.ac.id; cImansyah@eng.ui.ac.id;
dnanangruhyat@yahoo.com
Abstract. Spray dryers are commonly operated at a high temperature (>100 °C), which becomes an obstacle for
heat-sensitive materials. In this study, a refrigeration system that uses evaporator as dehumidifier and that recovers
the heat released from the first condenser to preheat the drying air was utilised to reduce the drying temperature.
Results showed that the degradation of vitamin A (measured with the high performance liquid chromatography
method) in tomato increased significantly when the drying air temperature increased from 90 °C to 120 °C, and it
cannot be controlled at a temperature higher than 120 oC. At an air flow rate of 450 lpm, the drying capacity at a
drying air temperature of 60 °C (with refrigeration, humidity ratio of 0.005 [kg H2O / kg dry air]) is equal to the
drying capacity at a drying air temperature of 120 °C (without refrigeration, humidity ratio of 0.021 [kg H2O / kg
dry air]). The drying capacity at a drying air temperature of 90 °C (with refrigeration) even becomes 1.5 times the
drying capacity at a drying air temperature of 120 °C (without refrigeration). The combination of a spray dryer
system with a refrigeration system (double condenser) is therefore beneficial for drying heat-sensitive materials,
such as vitamin A.
INTRODUCTION
(DFK \HDU WKH ZRUOG¶V SRSXODWLRQ FRQWLQXHV WR JURZ DQG WKH QHHG IRU IRRGVWXII LQFUHDVHV
correspondingly. Consumers demand reductions in the use of synthetic additives to preserve food because of the
potential short- and long-term health risks that these additives pose [1]. Since their introduction in 1870, spray
dryers [2] are one of the tools used to dry foodstuff for various processed products [3], medicines for
pharmaceutical purposes [4] or other non-food materials in the form of small-sized particles [5]. Spray dryers
could also provide benefits in terms of storage, production or distribution because their light weight enables
them to be used for various types of packaging. Spray dryers have helped catapult food drying technology as an
alternative in food processing technology.
The temperatures and conditions of drying imposed on a product have an important influence on it [5]. The
more heat is exposed to the material, the faster does the material dry [6]. Spray drying occurs at high entrance
temperatures & [5,7] and in a continuous process; in the drying process, wet materials enter
continuously, and dry materials are continuously expelled, as well [8]. In the drying process of heat-sensitive
materials, such as those in food, the water content of the foodstuff is decreased (less than 5%) so that the
microorganisms or enzymes contained in the food materials cannot reproduce [8]; the cells of the
microorganisms in the food materials will be damaged if the drying air has a temperature of 60 °C to 80 °C [9].
The ideal drying condition for some foodstuff, including fruits, vegetables, beef, fish and other biologic
substances, is an air temperature of the drying system outlet under 60 °C or the lowest temperature at 10 °C to
45 °C and R+[9].
Vitamins (vital amine) are groups of organic compounds that play important functions in the metabolism of
every organism, including humans, to help them grow and develop well and to provide health benefits. Vitamin
A is fat-soluble; it plays a role in the arrangement of retina pigments and in the maintenance of healthy skin and
immunity. In 1909, vitamin A was discovered to be contained in carrots, but it can also be found in milk (28 mg
3%); fish (Kakap (30 IU), kembung (30 IU)); vegetables (especially green and yellow-colored vegetables), such
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020008-1–020008-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985453
020008-1
as carrot (835 ug 93%), broccoli leaves (800 mg 89%), sweet potato (709 mg 79%), kale (681 ug 76%), spinach
(469 ug 52%), pumpkin (400 mg 41%), collard greens (333 mg 37%), beans (38 mg 4%) and broccoli (31 mg
3%); fruits (especially red and yellow fruits, such as red pepper (952 IU 32%), carrot (16706 IU, 557%), banana
(300 IU), papaya (365 SI) and tomato (1800 IU,1500 SI, 3%); and liver (beef, pork, chicken, turkey, fish) (6500
mg 722%) [10,11]. The vitamin A content in tomatoes is quite important because of its health benefits. Tomato
juice is an example of a heat-sensitive material that is difficult to dry because of its low glass transition
temperature (Tg) resulting from the low-molecular-weight-sugar that it contains [12]. The sugar found in
tomatoes is mostly in the forms of dextrose and levulose with glass temperatures of 31 °C and 5 °C, respectively
[13]. Tomatoes are also highly hygroscopic and tend to stick when the drying temperature has a relatively high
moisture or high temperature [12]. The recommended drying air temperature for tomatoes is approximately 140
°C to 150 °C [14]. However, the important nutrients of tomatoes, such as vitamin A, are degraded in this
temperature. Vitamin A is prone to damage by heat, sunlight and air exposure. The storage temperatures should
be kept at under 39 °C (102.2 °F) or at a temperature range of 15 °C to 30 °C (59 °F to 86 °F), a boiling point of
122.5 °C (252.5 °F) and a melting point of 63 °C (145.4 °F). Examining the vitamin A content of tomatoes is
therefore interesting because determining it when a spray dryer is used is difficult.
In this study, the refrigeration system or dehumidifier used a double condenser installed in the spray dryer
for the tomato liquid material so that the levels of vitamin A can be determined. The experiment in this study
aimed to assess the optimal temperature (heat balance) of drying air and the performance of the spray dryer with
the influencing parameters: airflow rate, material flow rate, humidity and degradation of vitamin A as a result of
the increase in drying temperature.
Materials
The material was prepared in liquid condition by considering the pure material and its mixture. The material
in this study was tomato juice liquefied with the use of a blender. The solids were discarded, and the fluid was
weighed. Maltodextrin was added at an amount of 1/3 of the weight of the tomato juice. The preparation of the
tomato juice was performed sequentially per 0.5 kg of tomato to prevent it from spoiling.
Methods
The air from the environment was sucked by the blower by measuring the airflow debit from the readings on
a Hitachi SJ200 rotameter and through the orifice Dwyer Pressure (SCFM-lpm). The pressure difference was
measured in the orifice and then converted to height difference with a manometer, with the following blower
variations: 150 lpm or 0.0029 kg/s, 300 lp or 0.0058 kg/s and 450 lp or 0.0087 kg/s. The air was flowed to the
evaporator in the dehumidifier system. In the evaporator, the dehumidified air (with subtracted specific
moisture), or the condensed air, was KHDWHGE\WKHKHDWRIWKHFRQGHQVHU¶VRXWOHWDQGDGGHGE\WKHKHDWHULQWKH
spray drying system before being inserted to the drying chamber as the drying air.
The dehumidifier system here used an air refrigerating system that includes a hermetic compressor (Kulthorn
AEA 2415Y), condenser, expansion valve, evaporator and blower. An evaporator is a calorie exchange tool that
functions to cool the incoming air from the environment; therefore, the air compressed by the compressor
already has a lower temperature and humidity compared with the environment temperature or is extracted to its
specific humidity or dehumidified by setting the pressure through rotation of the needle valve to determine the
evaporator outlet temperature from the condenser (evaporator temperature variations: 10 °C, 15 °C and 20 °C).
In addition, the value of RH in the air duct exiting the evaporator was also measured with the RH meter.
Then, the air compression was continued at the condenser. The condenser was the calorie exchange tool that
functions as the refrigerant condenser. Our study used R134a refrigerant. Calorie is released because of the high
pressure and the temperature refrigerant vapour at the end of the condensation process. In this study, the two
condensers performed the cooling methods differently. The first condenser performed cooling through the air
that flowed to the heater chamber and, the second was through the hot air that would be heated further by a
heater and flowed to the drying chamber in the spray dryer system.
The expelled heat in the condensation process definitely helps the heater reach the air heating control
temperature in the spray dryer system so that the work of the heater could be minimised. However, if excess
heat on the air exists, then the second condenser with a cooling fan will displace the heat into the environment.
In the drying room, the materials that have been atomised by a pneumatics nozzle will mix with the air coming
out of the heater. The expansion valve will expand the high-pressure and high-temperature refrigerant fluid
adiabatically to reach the temperature and low pressure in the evaporator. This cycle will continue. Meanwhile,
the material pump would be activated (peristaltic longer pump BT 100-2J and booster pump; Kemflo booster
pump NF 1800) to set the material rate in which the fluid is transformed into droplets by spraying them with the
atomiser. The pressure regulator is used to set the air pressure from the compressor in the pneumatic nozzle for
020008-2
1 bar. The water droplets from the materials that have formed these droplets will be in contact with the high-
temperature hot air expelled from the heater with the following temperature variations: 60 °C, 90 °C and 120 °C.
In the drying chamber, the materials are atomised by the pressure nozzle with the aid of the compressor spray
and mixed with the air from the heater. This contact causes the water droplets to dry and change their form into
solid powder. The caloric and mass transfer processes occur in the drying chamber. The water in the material
will evaporate, the dried material will fall into the collection basin under the drying chamber and some will be
carried by air. Because of the influence of the cyclone on centrifugal force, some the materials will affect the
wall and fall into the collection basin in the cyclone. The rest will be released to the environment with the air.
TABLE 1. Experimental Set-up Parameters.
Experimental Set-up Parameters
Airflow mass flow (ma) 0.0029, 0.0058 and 0.0087 kg/s
Temperature of evaporated air (T2a) 10 °C, 15 °C and 20 °C
Temperature of environmental air (T1a) 30 °C
Temperature of refrigerant R 134 a í&LQWKHSUHVVXUHRI03DRUEDU

Condensation saturation temperature
40 °C, 50 °C and 60 °C
(Tcondensation)
Compressor efficiency 90%
Temperature of the air exiting the

condenser that would enter the spray 50 °C, 60 °C, 70 °C, 80 °C and 90 °C
drying heater chamber (T exit condenser)
Temperature of the heater in the spray
60 °C, 90 °C and 120 °C
dryer
After the variations mentioned above were performed, the peristaltic pump was arranged to dry the drying
chamber. For each variation, the peristaltic pump was started from a low flow, with the dry drying chamber,
then it was increased slowly until tomato juice was accumulated, which was the wet condition; the material flow
before the accumulation occurs was the flow of the materials harvested. Data processing was performed by
calculating the dry airflow rate, vapour flow rate and vapour flow rate in the dryer. The scheme of
dehumidification is shown in Fig. 1.
FIGURE 1. Dehumidification Scheme with a Spray Drying Using a Double Condenser, Department of Engineering,
University of Indonesia, Depok 2015 [14].
An assessment was then performed. The vitamin A concentration in tomatoes with temperature variation
generated from each drying temperature results was measured. The measurement of vitamin A concentration
was performed in SIG (Saraswati Indogenetech) Laboratory in Bogor with the high-performance liquid
chromatography method. A vitamin A concentration in μg /100 g unit was determined.
020008-3
The experiment aimed to measure the effects of drying air temperature on the concentration of vitamin A in
tomato products.
TABLE 2. Vitamin A Concentration in Tomato Products at Different Drying Temperatures.

o
Temperature [ C] 90 120 150
Concentration [μg/100 g] 360.53 26.73 16.59
Vitamin A Concentration inside The Product

400
Vit A Concentration [μg/100
300
200
g]
100
0
80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
'U\LQJ$LU7HPSHUDWXUH>Û&@
FIGURE 2. Degradation of Vitamin A as a Result of the Drying Temperature.
The concentration of vitamin A in tomatoes (U.S. Department of Agriculture) ranges from 1800 IU or
approximately 540 [μg/100g]. In this study, however, the initial vitamin A content of tomato juice was not
measured, so the vitamin A degradation could not be calculated. Nevertheless, Fig. 2 shows that at the
temperatures of 120 oC and 150 oC, the concentration of vitamin A decreases substantially compared with that at
90 °C. At a drying temperature of 90 °C, the concentration of vitamin A is abundant, which is 360 [μg/100g].
However, when the drying temperature is increased to 120 °C, the concentration of vitamin A decreases
substantially to 26 [μg / 100g], as shown in Fig. 2. This result means that the critical drying temperature of
vitamin A in tomato juice is around 120 °C. This temperature corresponds to the boiling point of vitamin A,
which is 122.5 °C (252.5 °F).
This finding implies that vitamin A can be produced more effectively in spray drying at the drying
temperature of 90 °C. However, this result can be explored further in an experiment involving a temperature
between 90 °C and 120 °C.
FIGURE 3. Influence of Specific Humidity and Air Flow Rate on the Feed Flow Rate at a Drying Air Temperature of
60 °C.
Zdrying air = humidity ratio of drying air [kg of vapor/kg of dry air]
020008-4
FIGURE 4. Influence of Specific Humidity and Air Flow Rate on the Feed Flow Rate at a Drying Air Temperature of 90
°C.
FIGURE 5. Influence of Specific Humidity and Air Flow Rate on the Feed Flow Rate at a Drying Air Temperature of 120
°C.
Figure 3 to Figure 5 above show that the higher is the air flow rate (150, 300 and 450 lpm), the higher is the
drying air temperature (60 °C, 90 °C and 120 °C), and that the lower is the humidity ratio, the higher is the feed
flow rate.
Without the refrigeration system at a drying temperature of 120 °C, the highest air flow rate of 450 [lpm] has
resulted in a feed flow rate of 0.2 [lph]. This condition cannot be achieved (without a refrigeration system) for
heat-sensitive materials, such as vitamin A, because their drying temperature is 120 °C, as explained previously.
However, with the use of a refrigeration system, the feed flow rate of 0.2 [lph] can be achieved at a drying
temperature of 60 °C by dehumidifying the drying air until its humidity ratio is 0.005 [kg H2O / kg dry air] (see
Fig. 4). Even at a drying temperature of 90 °C (safe temperature for vitamin A) and a humidity ratio of 0.005
[kg H2O / kg dry air] (see Fig. 3), a feed flow rate up to 0.3 can be achieved [lph] (1.5 times of 0, 2 [lph]).
Clearly, with this system, a spray dryer can be used for heat-sensitive materials without degrading their drying
capacity; in fact, it can even increase their drying capacity.
CONCLUSIONS
From the data presented, the following conclusions are drawn:
1. Spray drying, combined with a dehumidifier and a double condenser to test vitamin A concentrations in a
mixture of tomato juice and maltodextrin, can be operated up to a temperature of 90 ° C.
2. The higher is the air flow rate (150, 300 and 450 lpm), the higher is the drying air temperature (60 °C, 90
°C and 120 °C), and the lower is the humidity ratio, the higher is the feed flow rate.
020008-5
3. At an air flow rate of 450 lpm, the drying capacity at a drying air temperature of 60 °C (with refrigeration,
humidity ratio of 0.005 [kg H2O / kg dry air]) is equal to the drying capacity at a drying air temperature of
120 °C (without refrigeration, humidity ratio of 0.021 [kg H2O / kg dry air]), which is 0.2 [lph].
4. At an air flow rate of 450 lpm, the drying capacity at a drying air temperature of 90 °C (with refrigeration, a
humidity ratio of 0.005 [kg H2O / kg dry air]) is 0.3 [lph]. This value is 1.5 times the drying capacity at a
drying air temperature of 120 °C (without refrigeration, humidity ratio of 0.021 [kg H2O / kg dry air]).
5. The combination of a spray dryer system with a refrigeration system (double condenser) is very useful in
drying heat-sensitive materials, such as Vitamin A, without degrading their drying capacity; in fact, it can
even increase their drying capacity.
REFERENCES
1. C. Osorio, Diana P. Forero, José G. Carriazo. Characterisation and performance assessment of guava
(Psidium guajava L.) microencapsulates obtained by spray-drying. Departamento de Química, Universidad
Nacional de Colombia, AA 14490, Bogotá, Colombia (2010), P. 1174.
2. K. Sollohub, K. Cal, Spray drying technique: II. Current applications in pharmaceutical technology,
Journal of Pharmaceutical Sciences 99 (2010), (2), p. 587±597.
3. D.L. Madhavi, and D.K Salunkhe. Tomato. Handbook of vegetable science and technology. In: Salunkhe,
D.K. And Kadam, S.S., Editors, 1998, pp. 171±201.
4. J. Broadhead, S.K.E. Rouan, & C.T. Rhodes. The spray drying of pharmaceuticals. Drug Dev. Ind. Pharm,
(1992), 18(11&12), 1169±1206.
5. K. Masters, pray Drying Handbook, 5th ed. London, Longman Scientific and Technical. (1991).
6. T.A.G. Langrish, and D.F. Fletcher³6SUD\GU\LQJRIIRRGLQJUHGLHQWVDQGDSSOLFDWLRQV RI&)'LQVSUD\
GU\LQJ´$XVWUDOLD7KH8QLYHUVLW\RI6\GQH\
7. W.S. Cheow, M.L.L. Ng, K. Kho, K. Hadinoto, Spray-freeze-drying production of thermally sensitive
polymeric nanoparticle aggregates for inhaled drug delivery: Effect of freeze-drying adjuvants,
International Journal of Pharmaceutics 404 (2011) 289±300.p.290.
8. Geenkoplish, Transport Processes and Unit Operations, Prectice-hall International,(1993). Goula, A. M., &
Adamopoulos, K. G. Influence of spray drying conditions on tomato powder moisture. In Proceedings of
the third international symposium of food rheology and structure, Zurich, Switzerland. (2003).
9. Conrad O. Perera .et al., (1997) Vol. 8. 76-77.p.78
10. U.S. Department of Agriculture
11. Direktorat Gizi Departemen Kesehatan RI
12. Goula Athanasia M, Adamopoulos. Konstantinos G. Spray drying of tomato pulp in dehumidified air: I.
The effect on product recovery. Department of Chemical Engineering, School of Engineering, Laboratory
of Food Process Engineering, Aristotle University of Thessaloniki, 541 24 University Campus,
Thessaloniki, Greece. (2004).
13. B.R. Bhandari, N. Datta, & T. Howes. Problems associated with spray drying of sugar-rich food. Drying
Technology, (1997), 15(2), 671±684.
14. Banat. Effect of Operating Parameters on the Spray Drying of Tomato Paste. Engineering in Life
Sciences, 2 (2002) 403-407.
020008-6
Process quality planning of quality function deployment for carrot syrup
Yurida Ekawati, Sunday Noya, and Filemon Widjaja

Process Quality Planning of Quality Function Deployment
for Carrot Syrup
Yurida Ekawati1, a), Sunday Noya2), Filemon Widjaja 3)

1,2,3
Department of Industrial Engineering, Universitas Ma Chung, Malang, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: yurida.ekawati@machung.ac.id
Abstract. Carrot products are rarely available in the market. Based on previous research that had been done using QFD
to generate product design of carrots products, the research to produce the process quality planning had been carried out.
The carrot product studied was carrot syrup. The research resulted in a process planning matrix for carrot syrup. The
matrix gives information about critical process plan and the priority of the critical process plan. The critical process plan
on the production process of carrot syrup consists of carrots sorting, carrots peeling, carrots washing, blanching process,
carrots cutting, the making of pureed carrots, filtering carrot juice, the addition of sugar in carrot juice, the addition of
food additives in carrot juice, syrup boiling, syrup filtering, syrup filling into the bottle, the bottle closure and cooling.
The information will help the design of the production process of carrot syrup.
INTRODUCTION
Carrots are healthy vegetables but they are rarely processed into food products that add values to the carrots. A
research had been conducted to find some food products based on carrots valued by customers [1]. The research
used the product planning phase of QFD. The research had found two carrots products, namely candied carrot and
carrot syrup. Based on House of Quality resulted from the product planning phase, a research used product design
phase of QFD had been carried out to result in product design matrix [2].
In order to get more information about how to produce the carrot products a research using the process planning
phase of QFD had been done. The carrot product that was continued to develop in the third phase of QFD, namely
process quality planning for this research was the carrot syrup.
Quality Function Deployment (QFD) is a method to plan and develop a product that is able to translate the needs
and wants of the customer [3]. The method is able to translate the needs and wants or customer requirements to be a
functional design [4]. QFD can also be applied to the development of food products [5]. Application of QFD in the
food industry have been done a long time, which is generally it is used as a tool of product development to meet the
requirements of the food industry but there are not many published application of QFD in the improvement of
product development processes especially on an industrial level [6]. Although the literature about application of
QFD in the food industry is limited, a positive feature of QFD method is that the matrices can provide a link
between the quality characteristics as demanded by the consumers and the actors in the production chain [7].
Carrots are known as healthy vegetables. They are known to have a high content of nutrients such as sugar, fiber,
and antioxidant substances such as vitamin C, vitamin E, carotenoids and beta-carotene [8]. They are also well
known as a source of vitamin A because they have higher levels of carotene (provitamin A) and processed carrots
such as carrot juice is good for health [9]. Since carrots based products are rarely available in the market, the
development of carrots into food products needs to consider the preference of the consumer. Developing newer,
healthier foods that are accessible, affordable and satisfying to the consumer makes individuals easier to choose
healthier food products [10]. QFD that includes customers in the process method is considered appropriate to
develop carrots based products.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020009-1–020009-5; doi: 10.1063/1.4985454
020009-1
METHODOLOGY
There were several steps in process quality planning carried out to produce the process planning matrix. The first
step that needed to be done on the use of QFD method was to determine the selected critical parts obtained from the
second phase of QFD matrix. In this stage, it was conducted the process of finding the relation between selected
critical parts to the plan defined processes.
The next step was to determine the process plan. An analysis of the flow of critical processes in the production
process of the products was conducted. The determination of the process plan was done by conducting interviews
and discussions with practitioners who were experts in the production process of syrup. After the process plan had
been established, the next step was determining the importance for each of the critical parts. The critical part that
had a high priority will have a value of high importance as well.
In addition to determining the value of interest, it also needed to find the relative weights of selected critical
parts. The relative weight was used in the calculation of the importance weight of critical process plan.
Then, the matrix correlation between critical parts and critical process plan was built. The correlation was done
by giving the appropriate value in the column of critical parts corresponding to the critical process plan being
assessed. Each critical part can affect more than one critical process plan and vice versa.
The next step was determining the importance weight. At this stage the importance weight was calculated by
multiplying the value of the relative weights of critical parts to the value of the relationship between critical parts
with critical process plan.
After doing all of the calculations and data processing related to process planning, the final step in data
processing activities that need to be done was to put the calculation results along with results of data processing that
has been done on the process planning matrix.
RESULTS
The first step that needed to be done in process quality planning was to determine the selected critical parts
obtained from the product design phase of QFD for syrup carrots. Based on the product design matrix for carrot
syrup [2], the critical parts and their importance weights were given on the Table 1.
The process plan for the production process of carrot syrup was obtained from the discussion with some experts
who understand well in syrup production. In general, the process plan can be divided into two parts, namely the
primary process plan and the secondary process plan. The primary process plan is a plan for a process that tends to
be more common, while the secondary process plan is a plan that is more specific and is a derivative of the primary
process plan. The primary process plan of carrot syrup production process consisted of the raw materials
preparation, the making of syrup and filling.
Secondary process plan which was derived from raw material preparation consisted of the carrots selection
process (sorting), carrots peeling, carrots washing, blanching process and carrots cutting. The secondary process
plan which was derived from the process of making the syrup consisted of the making of pureed carrots, carrot juice
filtering, the addition of sugar in carrot juice, the addition of food additives in carrot juice, syrup boiling and syrup
filtering. Finally, the secondary process plan which was derived from the filling process consisted of the process of
filling the syrup into the bottle, bottle closure and cooling. The primary and secondary process plan for the
production process of carrot syrup were given on Table 2.
TABLE 1. Critical Parts for Carrot Syrup

Critical Parts Importance Weights Priority
The type of food additives 628.8462 1
The amount of food additives 628.8462 1
The process method 544.6679 2
The type of tool materials 201.0222 3
Processing time 170.3603 4
Processing temperature 143.4879 5
.
The production process of carrot syrup began with the process of selecting (sorting) raw materials, in this case
the main raw material was carrots. The process of sorting carrots required high observational skills to pick the
carrots that were considered appropriate for use in the production process. The quality of the carrots used will
020009-2
greatly affect the quality of carrot syrup produced. After the process of carrots selection, the process of peeling the
surface of the carrot was done and followed by the washing process. The next process was the process of blanching
and it can be done in two ways: steaming or boiling. The purpose of the blanching process was to make the process
of mashing carrots easier. In the process of blanching, the steaming method had advantages over the boiling method
because vitamins in carrots can be dissolved in water when boiled. Blanching process was usually done at a
temperature range of 60oC to 100oC within 5 to 10 minutes.
The next process was making pureed carrot that began with carrots are cut into smaller pieces so the process of
mashing was easier. Making pureed carrot can be done by using a blender or other crushers designed according to
the needs (small or large). When the carrot had become pureed carrot that was smooth enough, then do a filtering
process for separating the carrot juice from the pulp. Then adding sugar to the carrot juice. The amount of sugar
added to the carrot juice was approximately 70% of the total volume of the carrot juice. The process of adding sugar,
then, was followed by the addition of food additives, such as stabilizers, colorants, sweeteners and preservatives. For
stabilizing syrup, commonly used Na-CMC with a rate of 1.5% of the total volume of carrot juice, while the dose for
coloring, sweeteners and preservatives usually customized according to the needs.
TABLE 2. Primary and Secondary Process Plan

Primary Process Plan Secondary Process Plan
Carrots selection process
Carrots peeling
Raw materials preparation Carrots washing
Blanching process
Carrots cutting
The making of pureed carrot
Carrot juice filtering
The addition of sugar in carrot juice
The making of syrup
The addition of food additives in carrot juice
Syrup boiling
Syrup filtering
Filling the syrup into the bottle
Filling Bottle closure
Cooling
The next process was the boiling process of carrot juice that had been mixed with sugar and food additives. The
boiling process was done at 100°C in less than 30 minutes. The purpose of boiling process was to kill microbes
contained in the syrup being made. Thus, the storability of carrot syrup can be increased (more durable). After carrot
syrup had been boiled, then the second filtering process on the carrot syrup was done. The filtering process served to
ensure no deposits/dirt from food additives and sugar remaining in the syrup. The filtering process was followed by
the process of filling the syrup in bottles that have been sterilized at 100°C for 30 minutes. After the filling process
of the syrup into the bottle, then the process of closing the bottle and bottle cooling at room temperature. Due to
carrot syrup product to be manufactured was a new product, then the all plans of the existing secondary process
were used as a critical process plan.
After establishing the process plan, the next step was to determine the importance of critical parts. The function
of the value of the importance was to describe the interests of each selected critical parts to produce the products
according to the expected critical process plan.
In addition to determining the importance, it also required to determine the relative weights of selected critical
parts that will be used in the calculation at a later stage. The value of the relative weights of selected critical parts
can be obtained from the comparison of each importance weight to the total weight of the importance of the selected
critical parts. The calculation of the importance and the relative weights of selected critical parts made on all critical
parts selected.
Then, the process of determining the value of the correlation or relationship between the critical parts with
critical process plan that had been determined was conducted. The correlation was determined by giving the
appropriate values in the column of critical parts that correspond with the critical process plan wanted. Each critical
parts can affect more than one critical process plan and vice versa. The value used in the determination of this
correlation was 0 (no relation), 1 (weak), 3 (moderate), and 9 (strong).
020009-3
After determining the value of correlation, the calculation of the importance weight of each critical process plan
was carried out. The importance weight for each critical process plan was sorted from the greatest importance
weight (the highest priority). Based on the calculation the importance weight of critical process plan, it was found
five critical process plans that become the priorities, namely the addition of food additives in carrot juice, the
process of blanching, syrup boiling, syrup filtering, the addition of sugars in carrot juice, the making of pureed
carrot and filtering of carrot juice.
After conducting all calculations and data processing related to planning process, the final step in data processing
activities that needed to be done was to put the calculation results along with results of data processing that has been
done on the process planning matrix.
DISCUSSION
Based on the calculations and data processing that had been done, it was found that the critical process plan for
carrot syrup that had the highest priority was the addition of food additives in carrot juice with the importance
weight of 488.52. The high value of the importance weight showed that the critical process plan played an important
role in the production process of syrup carrots. In the carrot syrup production process, the addition of food additives
should be done precisely and adapted to the existing standards. Shortage or excessive amount of food additives in
the production process of syrup can cause a negative impact on the quality of the syrup.
FIGURE 1. Process Planning Matrix of Carrot Syrup
The next critical process plan which took the second priority was the process of blanching and boiling the syrup
with a value of importance weight of 411.48. Blanching process was also a process that was important to note. The
temperature and length of time of the blanching process will greatly affect the subsequent processes. Too high
020009-4
temperature or too long in the blanching process can damage the nutritional contents in carrots. Temperatures that
are too low or too quick in the blanching process will make carrot difficult to be processed at a later stage. The
process of boiling syrup also no less importance to the process of blanching. The temperature and the length of time
of the boiling process will determine the quality of the syrup.
Critical process plan which ranked third was the filtering process of the syrup with a value of importance weight
of 189.24. The filtering process of the syrup was also worth noting because this process was to separate the filtrate
syrup with impurities that may still be contained in the syrup. The next critical process plan was the process of
adding sugar in carrot juice which ranked fourth. To get good quality syrup, the sugar used must be of good quality.
It would be much better if the syrup using real sugar compared with artificial sweeteners although the real sugar
prices were relatively more expensive. Critical process plan placing fifth priority order was the process of making
pureed carrots and the filtering of pureed carrot. Both of these processes were closely related because the filtering of
pureed carrot process was done after the process of making pureed carrots. Both of these processes must be done
properly to obtain carrot extract filtrate with good quality while retaining the vitamins in it.
CONCLUSION
The critical process plan on the production process of carrot syrup consisted of carrots sorting, carrots peeling,
carrots washing, blanching process, carrots cutting, the making of pureed carrots, filtering carrot juice, the addition
of sugar in carrot juice, the addition of food additives in carrot juice, syrup boiling, syrup filtering, syrup filling into
the bottle, the bottle closure and cooling. The priority of critical process plans in the production process were the
addition of food additives in carrot juice, the process of blanching, syrup boiling, syrup filtering, the addition of
sugars in carrot juice, the making of pureed carrot and filtering of carrot juice. The information will help the design
of the production process of carrot syrup.
REFERENCES
1. 9 +DOLP DQG < (NDZDWL ³3HUHQFDQDDQ 3URGXN 2ODKDQ :RUWHO 0HQJJXQDNDQ 0HWRGH 4XDOLW\ )XQFWLRQ
'HSOR\PHQW´ Symbol, vol. 1, no. 1, pp 57-67, 2014.
2. <(NDZDWLDQG0%D]DUDGR³'HVLJQLQJ)RRG3URGXFWV%DVHGRQ&DUURWV8VLQJWKH3URGXFW'HVLJQ3KDVHRI
4XDOLW\)XQFWLRQ'HSOR\PHQWÁRPN Journal of Engineering and Applied Sciences, vol. 11, no. 5, pp. 3109-
3116, March 2016
3. L. Cohen, Quality Function Deployment: How to Make QFD Work for You, Massachussetts: Prentice Hall,
1995.
4. S. T. Foster, Managing Quality. Integrating the Supply Chain, New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, 2007.
5. A. R. Linnemann, and M.A.J.S. Boekel, Food Product Design. An Integrated Approach, Wageningen
Academic. 2007.
6. A. I. A. Costa, M. Dekker, and W. M. ) -RQJHQ ³4XDOLW\ )XQFWLRQ 'HSOR\PHQW LQ WKH )RRG ,QGXVWU\ $
5HYLHZ´Trends in Food Science and Technology, vol. 11, pp. 306-314, 2001.
7. M. SimionH DQG * 0DURWWD ³7RZDUGV DQ ,QWHJUDWLRQ RI 6HQVRU\ 5HVHDUFK DQG 0DUNHWLQJ LQ 1HZ 3URGXFW
'HYHORSPHQW$7KHRUHWLFDODQG0HWKRGRORJLFDO5HYLHZ´ African Journal of Business Management, vol. 4,
no. 19, pp.4207-4216, December 2010.
8. C. Alasalvar, J. M. Grigor, D. Zhang, P. & 4XDQWLF DQG ) 6KDKLGL ³&RPSDULVRQ RI 9RODWLOHV 3KHQROLFV
6XJDU$QWLR[LGDQW9LWDPLQVDQG6HQVRU\4XDOLW\RI'LIIHUHQW&RORUHG&DUURW9DULHWHV´J Agric Food Chem.
Vo. 49, pp. 1410-1416, 2001.
9. A. S. Potter, S. Foroudi, A. StamatikoV %6 3DWLO DQG ) 'H\KLP ³'ULQNLQJ &DUURW -XLFH ,QFUHDVHV 7RWDO
$QWLR[LGDQW 6WDWXV DQG 'HFUHDVHV /LSLG 3HUR[LGDWLRQ LQ $GXOWV´ Nutrition Journal, vol. 10, no. 96, 2011,
retrieved from http://www.nutritionj.com/content/10/1/96 on 16 October 2014.
10. 3%RUGL./HHDQG0&RQNOLQ³6HQVRU\(YDOXDWLRQRI9HJHWDEOHV-Infused Fruit-Flavored Applesauce, and
WKH&RPSDULVRQEHWZHHQ$GXOWVDQG&KLOGUHQ´Food and Nutrition Sciences, vol. 4, pp. 559-565, 2013.
020009-5
Field oriented control design of inset rotor PMSM drive
Ersalina Werda Mukti, Sulistyo Wijanarko, Anwar Muqorobin, and Latif Rozaqi

Field Oriented Control Design of Inset Rotor PMSM Drive
Ersalina Werda Mukti1,a), Sulistyo Wijanarko1,b), Anwar Muqorobin1,c),
Latif Rozaqi2,d)
1
Indonesian Institute of Sciences, Department of Power Electronics and Electric Machine, Bandung, Indonesia
2
Indonesian Institute of Sciences, Department of Transportation Devices, Bandung, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: ersalinawm@gmail.com
b)
sulis.wijanarko@gmail.com
c)
anwa006@gmail.com
d)
latiefrozaqie@gmail.com
Abstract. The main challenge of PMSM implementation in the adjustable-speed drives especially in automotive
industry is to attain the optimal PMSM drive performance. Vector control is proved to be the best method in
controlling synchronous machine such as PMSM. This paper objective is to design a speed control system for the
manufactured inset rotor PMSM, which integrates the interleaved DC-DC boost converter, inverter, and sinusoidal
pulse width modulation and fed by the battery bank DC source. The proposed speed control in this paper employs
FOC vector control technique with PI controller which control both converter and inverter independently. This
paper investigates the effectiveness of the proposed speed control method for driving the manufactured inset rotor
PMSM. To verify the effectiveness of the designed speed control system, computer simulation is conducted. The
motor performances are observed in operating condition with disturbance in form of sudden change of load torque .
The simulation results show that the control method is stable but the rotor speed still affected by the given
disturbance.
INTRODUCTION
The quality of permanent magnet (PM) material has improved and attracted considerably contribution in the
development of permanent magnet AC (PMAC) motors [1]. PMAC motor with sinusoidal back emf known as
permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM) is commonly applied in industrial application. It can be further
categorized into surface mounted rotor magnet (SPMSM), inset rotor magnet, and interior PMSM (IPMSM). Due to
its simple structures, high efficiency, low inertia, and high power density, PMSM is implemented as adjustable-
speed drives in automotive industry and several application such as robotics and aircrafts. But, to attain the optimal
drive performance, the design of PMSM requires matched drive that leads to become attractive topic to the
researchers [2]. The nonlinearity coupling among its winding current and rotor speed [3] complicates the design of
motor drive.
Generally, control techniques for PMSM especially in adjustable-speed drives of the automotive application can
be divided into scalar control which adjusts only magnitude and vector control which adjusts both magnitude and
instantaneous position. The differential quadrature dq-axis current control are the important parameters in vector
control technique [4]. Field oriented control (FOC) is the vector control technique that employs the coordinate
transformation of motor equation in dq-axis frame which synchronously rotates with PM flux [5]. It controls motor
stator currents in the form of space vector [6]. Due to its fast dynamic response, simple control structure, and energy
efficient operation FOC is one of the best vector control technique for PMSM [7].
Speed control system for the manufactured and measured inset rotor PMSM parameters in [8,9] integrates DC-
DC boost converter, inverter, and sinusoidal pulse width modulation (SPWM). Since the battery voltage in DC
source of the speed control system is below the operating voltage of inset rotor PMSM, the converter boosts the
battery output voltage feeding the inverter with rated DC bus voltage. The interleaved DC-DC boost converter
topology avoids the system suffering from heat and large inductor size [10]. Precise rotor position information
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020010-1–020010-9; doi: 10.1063/1.4985455
020010-1
provided by sensors and sine wave generated by SPWM determine the switching of the inverter for driving the
motor [11]. Both converter and inverter are controlled by proportional integral (PI) controller due to its simplicity,
functional structure, and robust performance [12]. The controller is designed by defining the constant gain which
performs correction to parameter error and disturbance of large load. However, tuning the PI constant needs high
accuracy since the motor performance will be degraded due to time varying parameters [13].
This paper investigates the effectiveness of the proposed speed control method for driving inset rotor PMSM
using FOC and PI controller. Computer simulation is conducted to simulate the designed speed control. The motor
control performances are observed in operating condition with disturbance in the form of sudden change of
load torque.
MODEL OF INSET ROTOR PMSM AND DRIVES TOPOLOGY
Mathematical Model of Inset Rotor PMSM

The two axis d-q model are used for modeling the inset rotor PMSM in the synchronously rotating rotor
reference frames. The stator voltage equation in dq-axis frame are given in equation (1) and (2). The electromagnetic
torque is expressed in equation (3) while the mechanical torque is expressed in equation (4).
did
Ud Rs id Ld Ze Lq iq (1)
dt
Lq Ze \ p Ld id
diq
Uq Rs iq (2)
dt
Tem
3
2
>
p \ p iq Ld Lq id iq @ (3)
dZm
Tem TL J (4)
dt
Ze pZm (5)
where
U d ,U q : d-axis and q-axis stator voltage
Rs : stator resistance
id , iq : d-axis and q-axis stator current
Ld , Lq : d-axis and q-axis inductance
Tem : electromagnetic torque
TL : load torque
J : inertia moment
\p : permanent magnet flux
Ze : rotor electrical speed
Zm : rotor mechanical speed
B : friction coefficient
p : number of pole pairs
By modeling dq-axis motor stator voltage equations, the equivalent circuit of motor in dq-axis frame can be
replaced by equivalent circuit as shown in Fig 1.
020010-2
(a) (b)
Figure 1. (a) d-axis equivalent circuit of inset rotor PMSM, (b) q-axis equivalent circuit of inset rotor PMSM
Drives Topology
The field oriented controller (FOC) structure of inset rotor PMSM drives in this paper can be divided into three
parts, first is the control part, second is the power electronics and third is the plant of PMSM itself. Fig 2 shows the
block diagram of the FOC used to drive the PMSM.
Figure 2. The block diagram of FOC structure of inset rotor PMSM
The first part, control part mainly designed to control the speed of inset rotor PMSM. The field oriented control
(FOC) structure with combination of proportional-integral (PI) controller was utilized in this paper. By utilizing the
FOC, the three phase system coordinates x >xa xb xc @T can be transformed into the two phase synchronously
rotating coordinates x >x x @ through the clarke and park transformation by using following equation (6)-(7).
d q
T
ª 1 1 º
1 » ª xa º
ª xD º 2« 2 2 «x »
«x » « » (6)
¬ E¼ 3« 3 3 »« b »
0 «x »
¬« 2 2 ¼» ¬ c ¼
ª xd º ª cos T sin T º ª xD º
«x » « »« » (7)
¬ q ¼ ¬ sin T cos T ¼ ¬ xE ¼
It then simplifies the control design process, because the transformed coordinates enable the decoupling control
of direct-quadrature axis. Several control strategies are available after coordinates transformation such as constant
020010-3
torque angle (CTA), maximum torque per ampere (MTPA), unity power factor (UPF) and constant stator flux (CSF)
[14]. In this paper CTA is used, the principle of CTA is to keep the constant angle between the stator current vector
and the permanent magnet flux at an angle T 900 (Fig 3). Therefore the d-axis stator current needs to be regulated
at zero value id0 . By utilizing the FOC and CTA strategies the PMSM machine can be controlled like a DC
machine, the torque thus depends on iq because id 0 (equation (3)). Hence control problem is reduced by
controlling the q-axis and regulating the d-axis to zero. PI controller is proposed to control the speed of inset rotor
PMSM using FOC structure. There are three PI controllers in this part, the two controllers are used to control and
regulate q-axis and d-axis respectively, while the other one is used to regulate the rotor speed in order to comply the

desired speed Z ref . Furthermore, a compensator is added to eliminate the cross coupling in dq-axes (equation (1)-
(2)). The voltage references resulted from PI current controller in dq-axes are then transformed back to three phase
coordinates by using inverse clarke and inverse park transformation. Then these voltage references will be used to
synthesize the input signals through sinusoidal pulse width modulation (SPWM) strategy.
Figure 3. Constant torque angle strategy
The second part is the power electronic converters (PEC). The PEC is implemented to drive the inset rotor
PMSM which can be seen in Fig 4. In this paper, the bidirectional PEC which consists of the interleaved boost
converter connected with three phase voltage source inverter (VSI) via DC-Link is used. The interleaved boost
converter steps up the battery pack voltage in order to comply the inset rotor PMSM voltage rating. The three stages
interleaved boost converter method is chosen with the following reason: reducing the inductor size, reducing the
stresses and losses of switching devices, and more compact due to the same switching device capacity.
Figure 4. The used power electronic converter topology

The third part is the inset rotor PMSM that acts as the plant to be controlled. The mathematical model of PMSM
in synchronous rotating dq coordinates has been descibed before and can be seen in equation (1)-(5). The motor
020010-4
parameters in table 1 which is used in the simulation was gained from the previous research [(8)]. Fig 5 shows the
picture of the manufactured inset rotor PMSM.
TABLE 1. Inset rotor PMSM parameters
Parameters Value Units
Armature resistances 11.150e-03 Ohm
d-axis inductances 0.123e-03 Henry
q-axis inductances 0.142e-03 Henry
Permanent magnet flux 63.9e-03 Weber
Rotor inertia 4.177e-03 kg.m2
Number of poles 6 -
Figure 5. The manufactured inset rotor PMSM
PI CONTROL DESIGN
Basic PID Controller

The proportional-integral-derivative (PID) is the well known controller for most engineer and practitioners. The
simple yet robust structure make it to be the most popular controller among others. The block diagram of PID
controller can be seen in Fig 6. This controller works by processing the error resulted from desired value and
substracted by the actual value. The PID controller can be represented by the following equation:
U s
K p Ki K d (8)
E s
where
Kp
Ki (9)
Ti s
Kd K pTd s (10)
Figure 6. Block diagram of PID controller
020010-5
By adjusting the defined three gains K p , K i , K d , the error can be used to synthesize the controller output for
correcting the system error. Adjusting the aforementioned gains are frequently called controller tuning procedure.
There are several developed methods to tune these gains. It can be classified by the analytical and practical method.
The simplest practical method is by trial and error, this requires a little knowledge but it is a laborious effort.
Another popular practical method is the Ziegler-Nichols (ZN) tuning which is used in this paper and will be briefly
explained in the next.
Ziegler-Nichols Tuning
The Ziegler-Nichols (ZN) controller tuning is a simple but efficient method developed in the mid 19th by
J.G.Ziegler and N.B Nichols. It provides a quick and structured gain adjustment. The ZN tuning rule is based on
experimental step responses and the transient responses characteristics from the plant. Therefore, it is suitable for
engineers to determine the parameters on site by experimenting on the plant. The procedure is to apply the

proportional gain K p until the plant exhibits oscillation. The critical gain K cr can then be gained from the
proportional gain that exhibits oscillation. From the plant oscillation, the critical period Pcr can be measured and
used to calculate the integral and derivative time Ti ,Td . The controller parameters can be tuned by using the
formula shown in TABLE 2.
TABLE 2. Ziegler-Nichols tuning rule based on critical gain and critical period
Type of Controller Kp Ti Td
P 0.5 K cr f 0
1
PI 0.45 K cr Pcr 0
1.2
PID 0.6 K cr 0.5 Pcr 0.125 Pcr
SIMULATION RESULTS
The simulation of inset rotor PMSM drive employing FOC and PI controller is conducted by using PSIM. The
inset rotor PMSM motor parameter is given in TABLE 1. The PEC converter which consist of 3 stages interleaved
boost converter along with the VSI switch are modeled as ideal switch for the sake of simplicity and evaluating only
the performance of the controller. The interleaved boost converter, the speed and current control in the FOC
structure are controlled independently. Therefore, there are 4 PI controllers here that are designed based on the ZN
tuning procedure. In order to evaluate the controllers, the sudden change in the load torque TL of the inset PMSM
is applied. The load torque is initially at TL 5 Nm , then it is changed at t 0.5s to TL 35Nm as can be seen
in Fig 7. It can be seen that the electromagnetic torque can follow the load torque even there are oscillation at the
motor starting phase and at the sudden load torque change. The interleaved DC boost converter output is desired to
be 170V to comply the inset rotor PMSM motor voltage. Fig 8 shows the performance of boost converter, the
reference voltage Vref _ boost 170V need to be kept constant at all time. However, because of high power
consumption, an oscillation occured at the motor starting phase. Also when the load torque change suddenly at
t 0.5s , the boost converter output voltage experiences a second oscillation. On the other hand, the performance
of speed controller behaves different. At the starting phase, the response to a step response is very good since there
is no overshoot and oscillation. But, when the sudden load torque change as the disturbance is given, there is an
oscillation and the steady state error still remains till the end as can be seen in Fig 9.
020010-6
Figure 7. Load and electromagnetic torque
Figure 8. Boost converter voltage output
Figure 9. Performance of speed controller
020010-7
CONCLUSION
The inset rotor PMSM speed controller and the interleaved boost converter works satisfactorily. The speed
controller can follow the reference step input without oscillation at starting phase. But when the load torque changed
abruptly, the speed response become oscillate and leaving a steady state error. The interleaved boost converter that
controlled by independent PI controller also works well, the reference voltage can be followed with a slight
oscillation at the starting phase and the sudden load torque change. Moreover, this PI controller on this drive can be
refined either by using analytical tuning or by using adaptive gain, this will also be the future work plan.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors are grateful to Unggulan-LIPI activity and to all team members of power electronics and electric
machines research group also transportation devices research group in Research Center for Electrical Power and
Mechatronics ± Indonesian Institute of Sciences for all assistance that has been given.
REFERENCES
1. F.F.M. El-Sousy, ³5REXVW ZDYHOHW-neural-network sliding-mode control system for permanent magnet
V\QFKURQRXV PRWRU GULYH´ LQ IET Electric Power Application-2011, IET Journals Vol. 5, Iss. 1. (The
Institution of Engineering and Technology, United Kingdom, 2011), pp. 113-132.
2. 6.1D\DNDQG3'XWWD ³$ FRPSDUDWLYH VWXG\RI VSHHGFRQWURORI'&EUXVKOHVV PRWRUXVLQJ3,DQGIX]]\
FRQWUROOHU´LQInternational Conference on Electrical, Electronics, Signals, Communication and Optimization
EESCO-2015, IEEE Conference Publications. (The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, India,
2015), pp. 1-6.
3. 0 0DUXIX]]DPDQ 0%, 5HD] DQG 0$0 $OL ³)3*$ ,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ RI DQ LQWHOOLJHQW FXUUHQW GT 3,
controller for FOC PMSM drivH´ LQ International Conference on Computer Applications and Industrial
Electronics ICCAIE-2010, IEEE Conference Publications. (The Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers, Malaysia, 2010), pp. 602-605.
4. 0.RQJKLUXQDQG/;X³$GT-axis current control technique for fast transient response in vector controlled
drive of permanent magnet synchronous motor´ in The 4th International Power Electronics and Motion
Control Conference IPEMC-2004, IEEE Conference Publications Vol. 3. (The Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers, China, 2004), pp. 1316-1320.
5. 6.'ZLYHGL0/DXUVHQDQG6+DQVHQ³9ROWDJHYHFWRUEDVHGFRQWUROIRU3060LQLQGXVWU\DSSOLFDWLRQV´
in International Symposium on Industrial Electronics ISIE-2010, IEEE Conference Publications. (The Institute
of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Italy, 2010), pp. 3845-3850.
6. M. Marufuzzaman, M.B.I. Reaz, 06 5DKPDQ DQG 0$0 $OL ³+DUGZDUH SURWRW\SLQJ RI DQ LQWHOOLJHQW
current dq 3, FRQWUROOHU IRU )2& 3060 GULYH´ LQ International Conference on Electrical and Computer
Engineering ICECE-2010, IEEE Conference Publications. (The Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers, Bangladesh, 2010), pp. 86-88.
7. J. Espina, A. Arias, J. Balcells, and C. Ortega ³6SHHG DQWL-windup PI strategies review for field oriented
FRQWURO RI SHUPDQHQW PDJQHW V\QFKURQRXV PDFKLQHV´ LQ Compatibility and Power Electronics CPE-2009,
IEEE Conference Publications. (The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Spain, 2009), pp. 279-
285.
8. A. Muqorobin and P. Irasari ³$QDOLVLV UHVSRQ PRWRU PDJQHW SHUPDQHQ SDGD VDDW SHQJXNXUDQ SDUDPHWHU
HOHNWULN´ LQ Jurnal Telaah-2013, Jurnal Ilmu Pengetahuan dan Teknologi, Vol. 31. (Pusat Penelitian Fisika
LIPI, Indonesia, 2013), pp. 123-131.
9. A. Muqorobin, P. Irasari, and Taufik ³&RPSDULVRQ RI XQPRGXODWHG FXUUHQW FRQWURO FKDUDFWHULVWLFV RI
SHUPDQHQWPDJQHWV\QFKURQRXVPRWRU´LQ Mechatronics, Electrical Power, and Vehicular Technology-2014,
MEV Journal Vol. 5. (Research Center for Electrical Power and Mechatronics LIPI, Indonesia, 2014), pp. 115-
122.
10. A. Kumar and P. Gaur ³%LGLUHFWLRQDO '&'& FRQYHUWHU IRU K\EULG HOHFWULF YHKLFOH´ LQ International
Conference on Advances in Computing, Communications and Informatics ICACCI-2014, IEEE Conference
Publications. (The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, India, 2014), pp. 839-843.
020010-8
11. H. Mehta, V. Joshi, U. Thakar, M. Kuber, and P. Kurulkar³6SHHGFRQWURORI3060ZLWK+DOOVHQVRUVXVLQJ
'63706)´LQThe 11th International Conference on Power Electronics and Drive Systems PEDS-
2015, IEEE Conference Publications. (The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Australia, 2015),
pp. 295-300.
12. E. Celik, A. Dalcali, N. Ozturk, and R. Canbaz ³An adaptive PI controller schema based on fuzzy logic
controller for speed control of permanent magnet synchronous motors´ in The 4th International Conference on
Power Engineering, Energy and Electrical Drives POWERENG-2013, IEEE Conference Publications. (The
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Turkey, 2013), pp. 715-720.
13. N. Noroozi-Varcheshme, A. Ranjbar-Noiey, and H. Karimi-Davijani ³6HQVRUOHVV LQGLUHFW ILHOG-oriented
FRQWURORILQGXFWLRQ PRWRU XVLQJ3,FRQWUROOHU´LQ Universities Power Engineering Conference UPEC-2008,
IEEE Conference Publications. (The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Italy, 2008), pp. 1-5.
14. D. Swierczynski³'LUHFWWRUTXHFRQWUROZLWKVSDFHYHFWRUPRGXODWLRQ'7&-SVM) of inverter-fed permanent
PDJQHWV\QFKURQRXVPRWRUGULYH´Ph.D. thesis, Warsaw University of Technology, 2005.
020010-9
Optimization of multi response in end milling process of ASSAB XW-42 tool steel with
liquid nitrogen cooling using Taguchi-grey relational analysis
Rachmadi Norcahyo and Bobby O. P. Soepangkat

Optimization of Multi Response in End Milling Process of
ASSAB XW-42 Tool Steel with Liquid Nitrogen Cooling
Using Taguchi-Grey Relational Analysis
Rachmadi Norcahyo1, a), Bobby O.P Soepangkat 1, b)
1
Manufacturing Process Lab., Mech. Eng. Dept., Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember (ITS), Surabaya
60111,Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: rachmadinorcahyo@gmail.com
b)
bops_1994@me.its.ac.id
Abstract. A research was conducted for the optimization of the end milling process of ASSAB XW-42 tool steel with
multiple performance characteristics based on the orthogonal array with Taguchi-grey relational analysis method. Liquid
nitrogen was applied as a coolant. The experimental studies were conducted under varying the liquid nitrogen cooling
flow rates (FL), and the end milling process variables, i.e., cutting speed (Vc), feeding speed (Vf), and axial depth of cut
(Aa). The optimized multiple performance characteristics were surface roughness (SR), flank wear (VB), and material
removal rate (MRR). An orthogonal array, signal-to-noise (S/N) ratio, grey relational analysis, grey relational grade, and
analysis of variance were employed to study the multiple performance characteristics. Experimental results showed that
flow rate gave the highest contribution for reducing the total variation of the multiple responses, followed by cutting
speed, feeding speed, and axial depth of cut. The minimum surface roughness, flank wear, and maximum material
removal rate could be obtained by using the values of flow rate, cutting speed, feeding speed, and axial depth of cut of
0.5 l/minute, 109.9 m/minute, 440 mm/minute, and 0.9 mm, respectively.
INTRODUCTION
End milling process is one type of the milling processes and generally used in manufacturing industries, such as
plastic molding, aircraft, automotive, and tool steel. The ASSAB XW-42 tool steel is widely used as a chisel or
cutting tools, punches and dies in the metal forming like blanking, shearing, bending, and deep-drawing. Some of
the most essential performance characteristics in end milling process are material removal rate, surface roughness,
and flank wear. Choosing the right cutting fluid and end milling parameters will result in high material removal rate
along with low surface roughness and flank wear. The adoption of cryogenic cooling can reduce both surface
roughness and tool wear, while still increase material removal rate [1-3]. Based on the review literatures [1,5] and
preliminary research, the crucial machining parameters of end milling process are cutting speed (Vc), feeding speed
(Vf), and axial depth of cut (Aa). Hence, those machining parameters should be chosen properly in order to
maximize material removal rate (MRR) and minimize surface roughness (SR) and flank wear (VB) simultaneously.
Optimizing multiple performance characteristics at the same time in the end milling process requires a proper
technique. The grey relational analysis method developed by Deng [6] provides techniques for determining a good
solution for the unknown information. The relation between machining parameters and machining performances can
be identified with this method. Multiple objective optimization problem in grey relational analysis can be solved by
transforming multiple quality characteristics into single quality characteristic.
The aim of this study was to determine the precise parameter setting of end milling ASSAB XW-42 tool steel,
using liquid nitrogen cooling to maximize MRR and minimize SR and VB. The performance characteristic of MRR
is the larger the better while SR and VB is the smaller the better.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020011-1–020011-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985456
020011-1
EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN
Equipments and Material

This study was conducted in cryogenic conditions using liquid nitrogen on CNC milling YCM MV 66A with a
maximum of 8000 rpm spindle rotation. End milling parameters are shown in Table 1. The end mill solid carbide
cutting tool of 10 mm in diameter and 4 flute was used in this study. Work piece material used in this study was
ASSABXW-42 (45 HRC) tool steel with a length of 80 mm, a width of 30 mm, and a thickness of 30 mm. The
chemical composition of ASSABXW-42 tool steel consisted of 1.55% C, 11.6% Cr, 0.80% Mo, 0.80% V, 0.30%
Mn and 0.3% Si. Surface roughness measurements were conducted by using Mitutoyo Surftest SJ 301 with a cut-off
length of 0.8 mm while flank wear was measured with Nikon measure scope. Material removal rate was defined as
volume of the workpiece removed per machining time and formulated as follows [9]:
Volume of workpiece removed (1)

MRR (mm3 / min)
Machining time
Design of Experiments
L18 orthogonal array was used in this study to investigate the effect of end milling parameters on surface
roughness, flank wear, and material removal rate. Selection of orthogonal array was conducted based on the total
degrees of freedom of end milling parameters.
Based on Table 1, the total degree of freedom was 9. Therefore, L18 orthogonal array was used in this study as
shown in Table 2.
Optimization of Multiple Response with Taguchi-Grey Relational Analysis

The optimization steps using the Taguchi-grey relational analysis method is shown in Fig. 1.
Calculation of S/N ratio of SR, VB and S/N ratio normalization of SR, VB and Calculation of the grey relational
MRR MRR coefficient (GRC)
Analysis of the experimental results

Determination the level of parameters Calculation of the grey relational grade
using grey relational grade and analysis
that produce optimum response (GRG) by averaging the GRC
of variance
Verification of the optimal parameters through the confirmation experiments
FIGURE 1. The optimization steps using Taguchi-grey relational analysis method.
TABLE 1. End milling parameters and their levels.

End Milling Parameters Unit 1 2 3
Flow rate (FL) (l/min) 0.2 0.5 -
Cutting speed (Vc) (m/min) 78.5 94.2 109.9
Feeding speed (Vf) (mm/min) 390 440 490
Axial depth of cut (Aa) (mm) 0.3 0.6 0.9
020011-2
TABLE 2. Experimental layout using an L18 orthogonal array.
End milling parameters End milling parameters
Comb. FL Vc Vf Aa FL Vc Vf Aa
Comb.
(l/min) (m/min) (mm/min) (mm) (l/min) (m/min) (mm/min) (mm)
1 1 1 1 1 10 2 1 1 3
2 1 1 2 2 11 2 1 2 1
3 1 1 3 3 12 2 1 3 2
4 1 2 1 1 13 2 2 1 2
5 1 2 2 2 14 2 2 2 3
6 1 2 3 3 15 2 2 3 1
7 1 3 1 2 16 2 3 1 3
8 1 3 2 3 17 2 3 2 1
9 1 3 3 1 18 2 3 3 2
EXPERIMENTAL RESULT AND ANALYSIS

The results of the experiment and S/N ratio for the surface roughness (SR), flank wear (VB), and material
removal rate (MRR) are shown in Table 3. The performance characteristics of surface roughness (SR) and flank
wear (VB) are the larger the better, while material removal rate (MRR) is the smaller the better. The S/N ratios for
each type of characteristic can be calculated as follows [7]:
ª n y 2º
log «¦ i »
The smaller the better: S/N = -10 ¬ i 1 n ¼ (2)
ª n (1 / y i 2 ) º
log «¦ »
¬i 1 n ¼
The larger the better: S/N= -10 (3)
TABLE 3. Experimental results and their S/N ratios.
End milling parameters S/N ratio S/N ratio S/N ratio
Surface Flank Material
Comb. FL Vc Vf Aa Roughness Wear Removal
(l/min) (m/min) (mm3/min) (mm) (SR) (VB) Rate (MRR)
1 0.2 78.5 390 0.3 1.2135 33.4845 61.2751
2 0.2 78.5 440 0.6 0.4913 33.0200 67.8509
3 0.2 78.5 490 0.9 -3.0844 32.4864 71.7616
4 0.2 94.2 390 0.3 3.6133 34.0493 61.3926
5 0.2 94.2 440 0.6 4.8827 33.7646 67.2261
6 0.2 94.2 490 0.9 1.2780 33.2831 71.4142
7 0.2 109.9 390 0.6 3.0991 35.1357 66.1550
8 0.2 109.9 440 0.9 3.0983 34.4984 71.7074
9 0.2 109.9 490 0.3 2.0233 34.2276 62.4986
10 0.5 78.5 390 0.9 4.8999 33.9643 69.8246
11 0.5 78.5 440 0.3 4.2204 35.2961 61.1310
12 0.5 78.5 490 0.6 2.8132 33.4019 68.0850
13 0.5 94.2 390 0.6 5.7132 34.5731 67.3741
14 0.5 94.2 440 0.9 5.4170 34.1055 70.6618
15 0.5 94.2 490 0.3 3.9973 33.9794 61.7662
16 0.5 109.9 390 0.9 5.6379 35.4592 69.7414
17 0.5 109.9 440 0.3 5.3835 35.8503 60.3149
18 0.5 109.9 490 0.6 4.0616 34.8054 68.0657
020011-3
DETERMINATION OF OPTIMAL END MILLING PARAMETERS
Based on Table 3, normalization of S/N ratio of each response can be calculated as follows [8]:
(4)
where min is the smallest value of for the response and max is the largest value of
for the response. The result of normalized S/N ratio was then converted into grey relational coefficient (GRC)
by using the following equation [11]:
(5)
where is the absolute difference between maximum value of the normalized and the value of
normalized . was calculated using the following equation:
(6)
is the smallest value of ȗ LV GLVWLQJXLVKLQJ FRHIILFLHQW DQG
is the largest value of . The value of distinguishing coefficient
used in this study was 0.5 [9,10].
The GRC for each response was converted into one multi-response output which is called GRG (Grey Relational
Grade) by using principal component analysis. In this study, weighted proportion was assigned in the GRC of the
surface roughness, flank wear, and material removal rate. The GRC and GRG are shown in Table 4. The mean GRG
for each level of the end milling parameters is shown in Table 5.
TABLE 4. GRC and GRG
GRC GRC
Comb. Ɍ݅ ሺ݇ሻ GRG Comb. Ɍ݅ ሺ݇ሻ GRG
SR VB MRR SR VB MRR
1 0.4943 0.4155 0.3531 0.4542 10 0.8440 0.4714 0.7471 0.7248
2 0.4572 0.3728 0.5941 0.4497 11 0.7466 0.7522 0.3500 0.6994
3 0.3333 0.3333 1.0000 0.4153 12 0.6027 0.4072 0.6089 0.5472
4 0.6769 0.4829 0.3557 0.5815 13 1.0000 0.5684 0.5661 0.8223
5 0.8412 0.4464 0.5579 0.6927 14 0.9369 0.4908 0.8388 0.7964
6 0.4979 0.3958 0.9428 0.5232 15 0.7194 0.4734 0.3641 0.6049
7 0.6272 0.7018 0.5052 0.6337 16 0.9832 0.8113 0.7391 0.9037
8 0.6272 0.5544 0.9906 0.6509 17 0.9303 1.0000 0.3333 0.8769
9 0.5438 0.5090 0.3819 0.5139 18 0.7270 0.6168 0.6076 0.6806
020011-4
TABLE 5. Response table for the mean GRG.
1 2 3
Flow rate (FL) 0.5461 0.7396 -
Cutting speed (Vc) 0.5484 0.6702 0.7099
Feeding speed (Vf) 0.6867 0.6943 0.5475
Axial depth of cut (Aa) 0.6218 0.6377 0.6690
Average 0.6428
The optimum condition of the parameter level can be clearly selected by using average analysis on Table 5. The
procedure of response table was by grouping GRG based on parameter level and calculating the average. The
average GRG value for each factor levels then was plotted in Fig. 3 to attain the optimum parameter setting that
would reduce the total variance of the response simultaneously.
FIGURE 2. Graph of GRG.
Based on Fig. 2, to minimize the surface roughness and flank wear and to maximize MRR for end milling
process of ASSAB XW-42 tool steel with liquid nitrogen cooling, the combination of end milling parameters
FL2Vc3Vf2Aa3 should be done. Specifically, the mean for flow rate, cutting speed, feeding speed, and axial depth
of cut was set at level 2 (0.5 l/min), level 3 (109.9 m/minute), level 2 (94.2 mm/minute), and level 3 (0.9 mm),
respectively.
ANALYSIS OF EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS AND CONFIRMATION TEST

Analysis of variance (ANOVA) was used to evaluate the significance of process variables on the observed
response. The result of ANOVA for grey relational grade (GRG) is shown in Table 6. Table-6 shows that the p-
value for all process variables are greater than the Į (Į =0.05), so that process variables of flow rate, cutting speed,
feeding speed, and axial depth of cut have significant influence on the multi response. The largest contributor in
decreasing the total variance was the variable of flow rate of 42.03% followed by cutting speed of 20.44%, feeding
speed of 19.69%, and axial depth of cut of 0.73%.
020011-5
TABLE 6. ANOVA for the GRG.
Source DF SS MS F P (%)
Flow rate 1 0.168383 0.168383 83.17 0.009 42.03%
Cutting speed 2 0.084963 0.042481 20.98 0.018 20.44%
Feeding speed 2 0.082001 0.041 20.25 0.052 19.69%
Axial depth cut 2 0.006933 0.003466 1.71 0.194 0.73%
Error 10 0.020247 0.002025
Total 17 0.362526
Therefore, based on the graph of GRG (Fig. 2) and the results of ANOVA (Table 6), the optimal machining
condition for face milling process of ASSAB XW42 steel was flow rate at level 2, cutting speed at level 3, feeding
speed at level 2, and axial depth of cut at level 3. After the levels of the combination of machining parameters that
generated optimum performance were obtained, the next step was to predict and verify the improved performance
characteristics by using the optimal levels of face milling parameters. The predicted GRG ( ) can be obtained by
using the following equation [14]:
(7)
where ߛ݉ is the total mean of GRG, i is the mean of GRG taken at the optimum performance and q is the
number of machining parameters that significantly affect the multiple machining performances.
The validation of experimental results was carried out by confirmation experiment. Table 7 shows the results of
confirmation experiments. The confirmation experiments were replicated three times and the average of this
experiments was used to validate the prediction.
TABLE 7 Results of confirmation experiments.

SR VB MRR
Parameters
No (μm) (μm) (mm3/min)
Fl Vc Vf Aa
1 2 3 2 3 0.512 0.016 4919.255
2 2 3 2 3 0.503 0.017 4858.896
3 2 3 2 3 0.505 0.016 4937.656
Average 0.507 0.016 4898.276
The GRG which is calculated from confirmation experiments was 0.9310. The interval plots of GRG prediction
and confirmation experiments using 95% confidence of interval are shown in Fig. 3. Based on the interval plots of
GRG prediction and GRG confirmation, the value of GRG confirmation was in the range of GRG prediction. It can
be concluded that the setting parameters for optimum condition is valid.
The comparison of the results of the confirmation experiment using the optimal end milling parameters and the
result of the experiment using initial machining parameters is shown in Table 8. As shown in Table 8, surface
URXJKQHVVGHFUHDVHGIURPWRȝPIODQNZHDUGHFUHDVHGIURPWRPP, and material removal
rate increased from 2812.509 to 4898.276 mm3/minute. The GRG value which represents the multiple-performance
characteristics increased up to 34.40%. It clearly showed the GRG in the end milling process of ASSAB XW-42 tool
steel with liquid nitrogen cooling are greatly enhanced in this study.
020011-6
FIGURE 3. Interval plots of GRG of prediction and confirmation experiments.
TABLE 8. Results of confirmation test.

Initial combination Optimum combination
Variable response Description
FL1Vc2Vf2 Aa2 FL2Vc3Vf2 Aa3
SurfDFHURXJKQHVVȝP 0.569 0.507 10.90 % Decrease
Flank wear (mm) 0.021 0.016 23.81 % Decrease
Material removal rate (mm3/minute) 2812.509 4898.276 74.16 % Increase
GRG 0.5801 0.8844 34.40% Increase
CONCLUSIONS
Based on the analysis, it can be concluded that the end milling process variables of flow rate, cutting speed,
feeding speed and axial depth of cut significantly influence the total variance of the multi-response (surface
roughness, flank wear, and material removal rate). The minimum surface roughness and flank wear as well as the
maximum material removal rate could be obtained by using the values of flow rate, cutting speed, feeding speed,
and axial depth of cut of 0.5 l/minute, 109.9 m/minute, 94.2 mm/minute, and 0.9 mm, respectively.
REFERENCES
1. A. Shokrani, V. Dhokia, S.T Newman, R. Imani-Asrai. An Initial Study of the Effect of Using Liquid Nitrogen
Coolant on the Surface Roughness of Inconel 718 Nickel-Based Alloy in CNC Milling. Procedia CIRP,
volume 3, pp: 121-125, 2012.
2. M. Ibrahim Sadik, Simon Isakson, Amir Malakizadi, Lars Nyborg, Influence of Coolant Flow Rate on Tool
Life and Wear Development in Cryogenic and Wet Milling of Ti-6Al-4V. Procedia CIRP, volume 46, pp: 91-
94, 2016.
3. Alborz Shokrani, Vimal Dhokia, Stephen T. Newman, Investigation of the effects of cryogenic machining on
surface integrity in CNC end milling of Ti±6Al±4V titanium alloy. Journal of Manufacturing Process, volume
21, pp: 172-179, 2016.
4. S.Ravi, M. Pradeep Kumar, Experimental Investigation of Cryogenic Cooling in Milling of AISI D3 Tool
Steel.Materials and Manufacturing Process. Volume 27, Issue 10, pp: 1017-1021, 2012.
5. Shokrani, V. Dhokia, S.T. Newman, R. Imani-Asrai, An Initial Study of the Effect of Using Liquid Nitrogen
Coolant on the Surface Roughness of Inconel 718 Nickel-Based Alloy in CNC Milling.Prodecia cirp. Volume
3, pp: 121-125, 2012.
6. J. Deng. Introduction to Grey System. 1989.
7. S. H. Park. 2010. Robust Design and Analysis for Quality Engineering, 1st edition. Chapman &Hall, London.
020011-7
8. B.O.P. Soepangkat, A. Soesanti and B. Pramujati. 2013. The Use of Taguchi-Grey-Fuzzy to Optimize
Performance Characteristics in Turning of AISI D2. Applied Mechanics and Materials. 315: 211-215.
9. H.S. Lu, J.Y. Chen and Ch.T. Chung. 2008. The Optimal Cutting Parameter Design of Rough Cutting Process
in Side Milling. Journal of Achievements in Material and Manufacturing Engineering. 29: 183-186.
10. H.S. Lu, C.K. Chang, N.C. Hwang and C.T. Chung. 2008. Grey relational analysis coupled with principal
component analysis for optimization design of the cutting parameters in high-speed end milling. Journal of
Materials Processing Technology 209: 3808±3817.
020011-8
Towards an integration of affiliated companies energy audit process system at P.T
Astra International
Abdi Suryadinata Telaga, Indra Dwi Hartanto, Debby Rizky Audina, and Fransiscus Dimas Prabowo

Towards an Integration of Affiliated Companies Energy
Audit Process System at P.T Astra International
Abdi Suryadinata Telaga1, a), Indra Dwi Hartanto2, b), Debby Rizky Audina1,c)and
Fransiscus Dimas Prabowo1,d)
1
Informatics Management, Politeknik ManufakturAstra, Jl Gaya Motor Raya No.8 Sunter II, Jakarta, 14330,
Indonesia
2
Environment & Social Responsibility Division, Astra International, Jl Gaya Motor Raya No.8 Sunter II, Jakarta,
14330, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: abdi.telaga@polman.astra.ac.id
b)
indra.dwihartanto@ai.astra.co.id
c)
debbyrizky.2@gmail.com
d)
dimasprabowo100@gmail.com
Abstract. Environmental awareness, stringent regulation and soaring energy costs, together make energy efficiency as an
important pillar for every company. Particularly, in 2020, the ministry of energy and mineral resources of Indonesia has
set a target to reduce carbon emission by 26%. For that reason, companies in Indonesia have to comply with the emission
target. However, there is trade-RII EHWZHHQ FRPSDQ\¶V SURGXFWLYLW\ DQG FDUERQ HPLVVLRQ 7KHUHIRUH WKH FRPSDQLHV¶
productivity must be weighed against the environmental effect such as carbon emission. Nowadays, distinguish excessive
energy in a company is still challenging. The company rarely has skilled person that capable to audit energy consumed in
the company. Auditing energy consumption in a company is a lengthy and time consuming process. As PT Astra
International (AI) have 220 affiliated companies (AFFCOs). Occasionally, direct visit to audit energy consumption in
AFFCOs is inevitable. However, capability to conduct on-site energy audit was limited by the availability of PT AI
energy auditors. For that reason, PT AI has developed a set of audit energy tools or Astra green energy (AGEn) tools to
aid the AFFCOs auditor to be able to audit energy in their own company. Fishbone chart was developed as an analysis
tool to gather root cause of audit energy problem. Following the analysis results, PT AI made an improvement by
developing an AGEn web-based system. The system has capability to help AFFCOs to conduct energy audit on-site. The
system was developed using prototyping methodology, object-oriented system analysis and design (OOSAD), and three-
tier architecture. The implementation of system used ASP.NET, Microsoft SQL Server 2012 database, and web server IIS
8.
INTRODUCTION
Industrial sector contributes to 21% global CO2 emission and 28% energy consumption [1]. Population growth
causes demand increase resulting higher production. Higher production eventually raises carbon emission produced
by companies. Indonesia as a developing country still needs production growth to support its economic. Therefore,
environmental effect limitation such as carbon reduction must take economic impact into account. In order to
comply with environmental regulation, companies must have energy efficiency in mind. The situation becomes
more challenging because many employees are not aware about environmental issue such as carbon emission and
energy conservation.
In 2030, the ministry of energy and mineral resources of Indonesia has set a target to reduce carbon emission by
29% [2]. Excessive use of energy in the company is not only raises carbon emission but also increases production
cost. Therefore, the wasted energy creates double losses for a company. However, distinguish the excessive energy
from optimal energy in a company is still a big challenge. Therefore, to understand energy efficiency in the
company, firstly the company must conduct energy audit to measure current energy consumption. Current energy
consumption then becomes a starting point for the company to adopt energy management system. The companies
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020012-1–020012-5; doi: 10.1063/1.4985457
020012-1
that adopt energy management system have been found to have positive effect on carbon reduction and economic
performance [3].
PT Astra International (AI) Tbk as a parent company of more than 190 affiliated companies (AFFCO) has
developed policies and guidelines to reduce emission and conserve energy to all of the AFFCOs. However, such
many companies, scattered location, and diverse industrial sector together create a big challenge for PT AI to ensure
the total energy reduction in all AFFCOs achieves energy efficiency target. Therefore, PT AI conducted energy
audit to review whether energy reduction processes in the AFFCOs have been implemented properly. Auditing
energy consumption in AFFCOs is time consuming. As many AFFCOs do not have internal certified energy auditor,
direct visitation to audit energy consumption in AFFCOs was required. The situation created another challenge as
direct visitation was limited by the availability of PT AI energy auditors.
With energy audit process acceleration in mind, PT AI decentralized the audit energy process to internal auditors
to remedy the problem. Therefore, PT AI developed a set of audit energy tools or Astra green energy (AGEn) tools
to help the AFFCOs auditor in conducting the audit process. The AGEn tools then were distributed to AFFCOs so
that the internal auditors were able to use the tools to audit energy. Although PT AI has created the tools but the
audit process was still slow. Consequently, site visitation was still required to accelerate the energy audit process.
Because the number of energy auditors was limited, PT AI had to hire external auditors to conduct audit in AFFCOs.
For that reason, the integration of energy audit process system in PT. AI is a necessity.
PT AI is one of the largest holding companies in Indonesia. Many of PT AI AFFCOs are the leader in their
respective industrial sectors. Therefore, studying energy efficiency practices in the AFFCOs reflects current
practices of energy conservation in Indonesia. Furthermore, the study contributes to the state of energy audit process
practices in the company in Indonesia.
METHODOLOGY
Information from program reports, presentation and visitation to the companies are summarized and analyzed.
Fishbone chart was developed based on the information gathered. Following the fishbone chart analysis result the
AGEn web-based system was developed. The system development followed prototyping methodology and object-
oriented system analysis and design (OOSAD). Three-tier architecture was selected for the system. The
implementation of system used ASP.NET, Microsoft SQL Server 2012 database, and web server IIS 8.
ANALYSIS
With self-audit ability in the mind, PT AI tried to make an improvement. Fishbone chart was developed to gather
root cause of problem as depicted in Figure 1. The root cause categories were divided into method, man power, and
technology.
Socialization of Method Limited number of Man Power

AGEn tools is energy auditors in
slow AFFCOs
PT.AI has to hire
Socialization of
external auditors to
AGEn tools to
conduct audit in
AFFCOs is slow
AFFCOs.
There is a need to create
regular training workshop
to explain AGEn tools
AGEn Problems
PT.AI does not have

reporting and
verification system
PT. AI does not have

Technology application for AFFCOs
energy audit system
FIGURE 1. Fishbone chart of audit process in AFFCOs.
Based on the fishbone chart, several problems are found and described below:
1. Method:
R Copy AGEn tools to AFFCOs manually.
020012-2
R Socialization of AGEn tools is slow.
R There is a need to create workshop to explain AGEn tools.
2. Man Power:
R Energy auditors in AFFCOs are limited.
R PT. AI has to hire external auditors to audit energy in AFFCOs.
3. Technology:
R PT. AI does not have reporting and verification system.
R PT. AI does not have application for AFFCOs energy audit system.
SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT
Following the analysis results, PT AI has made an improvement by developing an AGEn web-based system to
help AFFCOs to conduct energy audit by their own. The system has capability to provide resources needed by the
AFFCOS. Firstly, the system provides downloadable AGEn tools and user guide to accelerate socialization of
energy audit tools. Secondly, the system provides audit energy training and testing material available online to
accelerate the number of energy auditors in each AFFCOs. Finally, the system enables AFFCOs auditor to upload
audit report and receive verification from PT AI auditor. Figure 2 depicts rich picture of web-based AGEn tools.
Manages articles comments

Uploads AGEn tools
Manages users data
View users data
Verify energy audit report
Create revision note
Administrator Manage categories
Views categories Views user profiles
Manages articles Download AGEn tools and user guide

Views articles Views user profiles
View comments
Upload energy audit report
Upload energy audit report revision
Manages articles comments
Views comments
Coordinator
FIGURE 2.Rich picture of AGEn tools.
The AGEn application is a web application that can be accessed by AFFCOs through the Internet. Users from
AFFCOs is registered by the administrator, as the users are not allowed to create their own account. Therefore, user
from AFFCOs must send an email to AGEn system administrator to request account. On the upload function of the
energy audit report, uploaded files must be in Word or pdf documents. Figure 3 describes the pages of AGEn
system, while Figure 4 shows the screenshot of uploaded audit report page.
020012-3
Login form
Home
AGEn reporting
User AGEn tools Category Article
and verification
Upload AGEn
Create user form Create category
tools form (pop AGEn verification Manage article
(pop up) form (pop up)
up)
Audit report form View detail

Create user detail
verification (pop category form (pop Create article form
(pop up)
up) up)
AGEn report
Edit user form Edit category form
revision Edit article form
(pop up) (pop up)
verification
Audit report form

verification (pop AGEn article
up)
Approved AGEn
report
FIGURE 3. Pages structure of web-based AGEn system.
FIGURE 4. Upload audit report page
CONCLUSION
Current practice of energy audit in PT. AI AFFCOs was still costly and time consuming. AGEn application make
AFFCOs energy audit reports can be directly sent to AI for verification. Further, all information regarding AGEn
and all energy-related can be shared through the AGEn articles facilities. As a conclusion, the system can accelerate
the ability of AFFCOs to audit energy consumption in their company. The practice, eventually reduce the site
visitation cost. Current practice of energy audit integration in PT. AI can be a model for other Indonesian companies
to integrate the energy audit process.
REFERENCES
1. IEA, 2015, Energy and Climate Change. In: World Energy Outlook Special Report, (Paris: IEA), p. 196.
020012-4
2. BALITEK-KSDA, 2015, Target Baru Penurunan Emisi Karbon: 29% pada tahun 2030.
3. C. Böttcher and M. Müller, 2016, Insights on the impact of energy management systems on carbon and
corporate performance. An empirical analysis with data from German automotive suppliers Journal of Cleaner
Production, 137, 1449-57.
020012-5
Method to increase ultimate bearing capacity of skirted circular footing
Renaningsih, Isvan Fajar Satria, Agus Susanto, and Anto Budi Listyawan

Method to Increase Ultimate Bearing Capacity of Skirted
Circular Footing
Renaningsih1, a), Isvan Fajar Satria1, b), Agus Susanto1, c), Anto Budi Listyawan1, d)
1
Civil Engineering Department, Universitas Muhammadiyah Surakarta
Jl. Ahmad Yani Tromol Pos 1 Pabelan Kartasura, Surakarta, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: renaningsih@ums.ac.id
b)
isvanfajarsatria@yahoo.com
c)
as240@ums.ac.id
d)
anto.budi@ums.ac.id
Abstract. Bearing capacity is the most important factor in designing foundation. It is necessary to find a method to
improve the bearing capacity. Skirts that are attached on the below of footing can be used as an alternative of the
improvement. The method is implemented to improve the bearing capacity of shallow footing on sand soil. The aim of
this study was to find the effect of additional skirt on the circular footing towards the bearing capacity of soil and towards
the settlement. This study performed twelve laboratory experiments on steel circular footing with various diameters and
skirt lengths. In addition, the type of soil used in this study was sand soil in which the formation of water content and
compaction method was maintained. The laboratory tests indicated that skirts are very effective to improve the ultimate
bearing capacity, as they can increase the length hence the ultimate bearing capacity can be enhanced by 4.70 times in
certain study condition. Skirts are also capable to reduce the settlement. In general, the analysis on the same value of load
of 2.00 kN indicated the decrease of the settlement is in accordance with the increase of the skirt length attached on the
circular footing.
INTRODUCTION
Foundation is the lowest part of the building that continues the load of building to the soil below. The design of
foundation should consider the bearing capacity of the soil below the foundation. This bearing capacity is described
as the strength of soil in supporting the foundation load from the structures above. Bearing capacity expresses the
shear strength of soil against the settlement that caused by the loading. The higher the bearing capacity of soil, the
lowest the settlement due to the loading.
In fact, the rate of bearing capacity is the most important factor in designing the foundation. Therefore, it is
necessary to investigate and to improve both of the soil and the foundation. In this research, the investigation and
improvement effort was conducted on the footing by adding the skirts (vertical plates) below the surface of circular
footing. This kind of footing is called the skirted footing.
Similar research was previously conducted by [1] by using 18 laboratory tests of skirted circular footing made of
steel with sand as the media of testing. In addition, the study concluded that the skirted footing is very effective in
increasing the value of footing bearing capacity. It is indicated by the higher ratio between skirt length (L) and
footing diameter (D), the lower the settlement occurs (Fig. 1).
The same result was also suggested by [2], that the increase of skirt length (L) will lead to the higher value of
Bearing Capacity Ratio (BCR). BCR expresses the ratio between the bearing capacity of skirted circular footing and
those of non-skirted circular footing. In the other words, the higher the skirt length (L), the higher value the bearing
capacity of skirt footing.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020013-1–020013-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985458
020013-1
RESEARCH EQUIPMENT
The research aimed to determine the relationship between the settlement and the load in relation with the
conditions in skirted footing and non-skirted footing. Hence, the research was conducted by comparing nine models
of skirted circular footing and three models of non-skirted circular footing. In addition, sand was in the same
formation for each experiment. All laboratory test was conducted on a small scale model (Fig. 2). The equipments
used for the research consisted of:
1. Nine models of skirted circular footing. The skirts had a thickness (Ts) of 2 mm for the 75, 100, 150 mm of
external diameter, and 75, 100, 150 mm length for each diameter. The footings were 10 mm in thickness
(Tf), and they had similar diameter with the external diameter of the skirt. Thus, the ratio of skirt length (L)
and the footing diameter (D), L/D consisted of 0.50, 0.67, 0.75, 1.00 (75/75), 1.00 (100/100), 1.00
(150/150), 1.33, 1.5, and 2.00.
2. Three models of non-skirted circular footing, with 75, 100, 150 mm in diameter and 10 mm in thickness.
The L/D was 0.00.
FIGURE 1. Skirted circular footing model.
FIGURE 2. Scheme of testing procedure preparation.
020013-2
3. All footing models were made of steel plates. Skirts were welded firmly and subsequently, attached
precisely to the periphery of footings. Each model of footings had a notch at the center of the top face for
mounting the piston. Two holes were drilled at the top surface of each footing model to observe the top
surface of sand inside the skirt.
4. Hydraulic loading machine. Frame Load Testing machine with maximum load of 250 kN and two-dial
gauges was used to measure the footing vertical displacement. The piston was placed right above the notch
of footing.
5. Soil bin. It was made from a cylinder of 500 mm in height and 600 mm in diameter.
6. A set of water content laboratory test and hammer of 2.5 kg in weight and the drop height of 305 mm.
RESEARCH PROCEDURE
Generally, the research procedure can be described in the flowchart below (Fig. 3).
FIGURE 3. The research flowchart.
020013-3
RESULTS AND ANALYSIS
The result of the investigation showed the relationship between the load and the settlement that occurred on each
footings. The results are illustrated in Fig. 4-6.
FIGURE 4. Load-settlement relationship for footing diameter of 75 mm.
020013-4
Ultimate Bearing Capacity

Based on the test and investigation of nine models of skirted footing and three models of non-skirted footing, the
results showed in the same diameter of circular footing, the increase of the skirt length would also be accompanied
by the increase of maximum load. It indicated that the ultimate bearing capacity also increased, see Table 1
TABLE 1. Ultimate bearing capacity on diverse skirt lengths.

Diameter, Area, A Skirt Length, Maximum Load, Ult. Bearing Capacity,
L/D
D (mm) (mm2) L (mm) Pmax (kN) qu (kN/m2)
75 4419.64 0 0.00 3.30 746.67
75 4419.64 75 1.00 7.40 1674.34
75 4419.64 100 1.33 10.60 2398.38
75 4419.64 150 2.00 13.90 3145.05
100 7857.14 0 0.00 8.40 1069.09
100 7857.14 75 0.75 13.30 1692.73
100 7857.14 100 1.00 22.80 2901.82
100 7857.14 150 1.50 33.00 4200.00
150 17678.57 0 0.00 14.90 842.83
150 17678.57 75 0.50 51.60 2918.79
150 17678.57 100 0.67 67.20 3801.21
150 17678.57 150 1.00 70.10 3965.25
It occurred since the ultimate bearing capacity is directly proportional to the maximum load. It is expressed in
the equation as follows:
Pmax
qu (1)
A
where,
qu : Ultimate bearing capacity (kN/m2)
Pmax : Maximum load (kN)
A : Area of footing (m2)
020013-5
Essentially, the circular footing with longer skirt has wider shaft friction area, in which this shaft friction
contributed to enhance the strength of the sand soil in supporting the load. It also confirmed the L/D ratio that was
observed in the same diameter but with diverse skirt lengths. The increase of L/D ratio was in accordance to the
increase of the ultimate bearing capacity as demonstrated in Fig. 7.
FIGURE 7. Relationship of Ultimate bearing capacity and L/D ratio relationship, with diverse L.
The non-skirted circular footing of 75 mm in diameter obtained an increase of ultimate bearing capacity by 224
% when the skirt of 75 mm in length was added and by 321 % when it was replaced by the skirt of 100 mm in
length. It continuously increased by 421 % when the skirt of 150 mm in length was attached below the footing. The
ultimate bearing capacity increment of non-skirted circular footing is demonstrated in Table 2.
TABLE 2. Ultimate bearing capacity increment.

Diameter, Skirt Length, Maximum Load, Ult. Bearing Capacity, Increment,
D (mm) L (mm) Pmax (kN) qu (kN/m2) > (%)
75 0 3.30 746.67 -
75 75 7.40 1674.34 224
75 100 10.60 2398.38 321
75 150 13.90 3145.05 421
100 0 8.40 1069.09 -
100 75 13.30 1692.73 158
100 100 22.80 2901.82 271
100 150 33.00 4200.00 393
150 0 14.90 842.83 -
150 75 51.60 2918.79 346
150 100 67.20 3801.21 451
150 150 70.10 3965.25 470
Settlement
To discern the alteration of settlement which becomes the influence of the skirt on the circular footing, the
investigation was carried out regarding with the same value of load (P, kN). It required 2 kN and there was no
special requirements to determine the value of load since the loads of twelve circular footing types were 2 kN as
presented in Fig. 4-6. The analysis of settlement on the same value of load (2 kN) is shown in Fig. 8-10.
020013-6
FIGURE 8. Settlement analysis on footing diameter of 75 mm.
The alteration of settlement which is caused by the alteration of the skirt length indicated that in general, the
attachment of longer skirt on the circular footing leads to the decrease of the settlement. Nevertheless, the trend did
not occur on the circular footing of 100 mm in diameter, precisely on the non-skirted circular footing that was
attached by the skirts of 75 mm and 100 mm in length. It was allegedly caused by the density of sand soil which had
extreme different formation between those two footing sample tests. It could be different on the value of water
content or on the method of compaction.
020013-7
CONCLUSIONS
From the accomplished laboratory tests, the following statements are concluded:
1. The additional of skirt on the circular footing is very effective to improve the ultimate bearing capacity on
the sand soil. With the same diameter of circular footing, the increase of the length of skirt will increase the
ultimate bearing capacity.
2. There are two different results for the influence of skirt length to footing diameter ratio, L/D. On the same
footing diameter and diverse skirt lengths, the result indicated the L/D ratio and the ultimate bearing
capacity are directly proportional. On the contrary, on the same skirt length and diverse footing diameters, it
is obvious that the L/D ratio and the ultimate bearing capacity are inversely proportional.
3. The skirt on the circular footing is so effective to reduce settlement. An investigation on the same value of
load of 2.00 kN indicated that the decrease of the settlement is in accordance with the increase of the skirt
length attached on the circular footing.
REFERENCES
1. E. Wakil and Z. Amr. (2013). Bearing Capacity of Skirt Circular Footing on Sand. Alexandria, Egypt:
Alexandria Engineering Journal.
2. S. Chandrawanshi, et al. (2014). Effect of Skirt on Pressure Settlement Behaviour of Model Circular Footing in
Medium Dense Sand. Bhopal, India: International Journal of Advanced Engineering Technology.
020013-8
An investigation of force, surface roughness and chip in surface grinding of SKD 11
tool steel using minimum quantity lubrication-MQL technique
Bobby O. P. Soepangkat, H. C. Kis Agustin, and H. Subiyanto

An Investigation of Force, Surface Roughness and Chip in
Surface Grinding of SKD 11 Tool Steel using Minimum
Quantity Lubrication-MQL Technique
Bobby O. P. Soepangkat 1, a), H. C. Kis Agustin2, b), H. Subiyanto2, c)
1
Manufacturing Process Laboratory, Mech. Eng. Dept., Institut Teknologi Sepuluh
Nopember (ITS), Surabaya 60111, Indonesia.
2
Metallurgical Laboratory, Mech. Eng. Dept., Institut Teknologi Sepuluh
a)
Corresponding author: bops_1994@me.its.ac.id
b)
kisagust@me.its.ac.id
c)
robin@me.its.ac.id
Abstract. This research aimed to analyze the viability of the minimum quantity of lubricant (MQL) technique towards
normal force, tangential force, surface roughness and chip formation in surface grinding of SKD 11 tool steel. The three
surface grinding parameters were varied including the type of cooling method (MQL and dry), table speed, and depth of
cut. Based on statistical analysis, depth of cut is the most influential factor which affects the four responses in both dry
and MQL grinding. MQL could reduce normal force and tangential force considerably, but produce higher surface
roughness. In MQL grinding, the chips removal took place mostly by shearing and fracturing.
INTRODUCTION
The use of cutting fluids is fundamental in machining processes, mainly when it comes to high heat generation,
which is the case of grinding. Thus, lubrication and cooling provided by cutting fluids improve the final quality of
the workpiece. However, cutting fluid usage has some drawbacks concerning with environmental, costs, and health
issues. In order to alleviate the economic and environmental impacts, minimum quantity lubrication (MQL) was
addressed as an alternative in the traditional flood cooling application approximately a decade ago [1, 2]. MQL
refers to the use of a small amount of cutting fluid, typically in the order of 50 ml/hr or less, which is about ten-
thousandth of the amount of cutting fluid used in flood–cooled machining [3, 4]. The concept of MQL is based on
the principle of loss lubrication with dry surface after the machining process. This is the minimum quantity
lubrication required in the machining process. Grinding is an abrasive machining process in which material removal
occurs through the interaction of abrasive grains and workpiece. Differently from other processes using tools with
defined geometry (such as turning and milling), abrasive grains have irregular and randomly distributed cutting
edges in a macroscopic view [5]. The excessive wear of cutting edges increases substantially the contact area, thus it
increases heat generation. The higher amount of heat will cause thermal distortions on both machine tool and
workpiece, limiting the attainable workpiece accuracy. These thermal damages are one of the most limiting factors
in grinding. The occurrence of thermal damages can be minimized by lubricant application, for instance cutting
fluids, which removes the heat generated in the cutting zone. Heat generated from friction between workpiece and
tool also decreases, since cutting fluids act as both lubricants and coolants, contributing to reduce grinding forces
and residual stress [5, 6 and 7]. The purpose of this study was to investigate the effect of the type of coolant and
machining parameters, namely table speed and depth of cut, on the grinding forces (normal force and tangential
force), surface roughness and morphological characteristics of the chips in grinding process of SKD11 tool steel.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020014-1–020014-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985459
020014-1
EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE
The experiments were conducted in a surface grinder using plunge surface grinding mode. The experimental
conditions are given in Table 1.
TABLE 1. Experimental Conditions
Work piece material SKD 11 Cooling method (Cm) Dry, MQL
Grinding mode Plunge surface grinding, Depth of cut (a) a = 0.01 mm, 0.03 mm, 0.06
up cut mm
Grinding wheel Al2O3(A46K) Dresser One point diamond dresser
Grinding machine KRISBOW, KGS818AH Dressing depth Total depth of dressing (ad) =
0.03 mm
Wheel speed (Vs) Vs = 27.5 m/s
Table speed (Vf) Vf = 150 mm/s, 200
mm/s, 250 mm/s
In this study, three-parameters experiment design was employed with three levels of full factorial design
experiment. The three surface grinding parameters which were varied including the type of cooling method (MQL
and dry), table speed or Vf (150, 200, and 250 mm/s), and depth of cut or doc (0.01, 0.03, and 0.06 mm). The total
number of required experiments (combinations) was 9 (3 x 3). A random order was also determined for running the
tests. Measurement of grinding forces, i.e., normal force (Fn) and tangential force (Ft), and surface roughness were
replicated twice. The hardness of SKD 11 tool steel was 32 HRC. The workpiece material dimensions were 40 mm
(length) x 10 mm (width) x 5 mm (thickness). The experiment was conducted on Krisbow surface grinding type
KGS818AH. The MQL unit was SMC mist spray unit LMU 100-15. The two components of grinding forces were
measured by using KISTLER dynamometer type 9272. Mitutoyo surftest SJ-310 was used to measure the surface
roughness (SR) resulted from drilling process. The observations of the chips using scanning electron microscope
(SEM) were used to study the morphological characteristics of the chips.

Table 2 shows the experimental results for normal force, tangential force, and surface roughness.
TABLE 2. Experimental Results
Process Variables Responses
Cooling Table Speed Depth of Cut Normal Force (N) Tangential Force (N) Surface Roughness (μm)
Method (mm/s) (mm) Rep.1 Rep.2 Rep.1 Rep.2 Rep. 1 Rep. 2
0.01 75.06 70.04 34.43 35.45 0.57 0.55
150 0.03 139.60 147.70 59.88 67.47 0.65 0.67
0.06 235.50 236.50 99.52 106.67 0.70 0.72
0.01 80.50 73.50 41.68 34.89 0.60 0.67
Dry 200 0.03 142.27 144.60 63.15 62.70 0.66 0.70
0.06 246.40 244.90 107.40 107.19 0.73 0.75
0.01 81.95 80.59 42.04 37.29 0.66 0.74
250 0.03 149.20 153.90 68.96 69.57 0.80 0.82
0.06 249.90 251.90 111.74 108.85 0.97 0.90
0.01 53.12 48.33 17.21 15.24 0.64 0.61
150 0.03 125.50 121.70 53.36 51.51 0.69 0.73
0.06 201.20 197.40 90.99 93.50 0.95 0.95
0.01 59.89 56.85 20.93 19.09 0.72 0.75
MQL 200 0.03 132.80 126.30 59.67 58.40 0.85 0.67
0.06 209.20 204.70 96.45 98.06 1.14 1.01
0.01 62.99 66.47 22.54 26.17 0.78 0.84
250 0.03 137.60 139.10 65.34 65.64 0.94 1.02
0.06 216.70 219.90 103.62 106.68 1.40 1.52
020014-2
Grinding Forces
Normal Force
TABLE 3. ANOVA Results on Normal Force

Source DF SS MS F P-value
Cooling Method 1 5000 5000 150.84 0.000
Table Speed 2 1052 526 15.87 0.000
Depth of Cut 2 151767 75884 2289.30 0.000
Error 30 994 33
Total 35 158813
(a) (b) (c)

FIGURE 1. Effect of depth of cut on normal force: (a) Vf = 150 mm/s, (b) Vf = 200 mm/s, (c) Vf = 250 mm/s.
Table 3 shows that depth of cut is the most influential factor on normal force, followed by the cooling method.
Fig. 1 compares the normal force in grinding SKD 11 using MQL and dry grinding. The values were obtained with
difference depth of cut and table speed. Fig. 1 shows that grinding process using MQL yields lower normal force.
Increasing table speed and depth of cut would increase normal force.
Increasing table speed would slightly increase normal force. The most significant increase in grinding force
would be obtained by increasing the depth of cut. With the results concerning the normal force shown in Table 2, it
is possible to apply a power model and find an equation which correlates normal force to cooling method, table
speed and depth of cut. The equation is depicted by equation (1), which R-squared (R2) = 98.90%.
(1)
The equation shows that depth of cut is the most influential factor that affects normal force.
Tangential force
TABLE 4 ANOVA Result on Tangential Force

Cooling Method 1 1050.6 1050.6 77.83 0.000
Table Speed 2 446.7 223.4 16.55 0.000
Depth of Cut 2 32642.8 16321.4 1209.07 0.000
Error 30 405.0 13.5
Total 35 34545.2
020014-3
(a) (b) (c)
FIGURE 2. Effect of depth of cut on tangential force: (a) Vf = 150 mm/s, (b) Vf = 200 mm/s, (c) Vf = 250 mm/s.
Table 4 shows that depth of cut is the most influential factor on tangential force, followed by the cooling method.
Fig. 2 compares the tangential force in grinding SKD 11 using MQL and dry grinding. The values were obtained
with different depth of cut and table speed. Fig. 2 shows that grinding process using MQL yields lower tangential
force. Increasing table speed and depth of cut would increase tangential force. In MQL grinding, the lubrication was
expected to be higher than for dry grinding, which made the tangential cutting force values decreased as the
experiment progressed, improving the slipping of the grains between the tool and the piece [8]. During dry grinding
process, grinding forces were higher than those in MQL grinding process. It is pointed that with the rising contact
zone temperatures, the grain cutting depth increases, since the material becomes more ductile because of the higher
temperature [8], and consequently increases friction forces [10].
Increasing table speed would slightly increase tangential force. The most significant increase in tangential force
would be obtained by increasing the depth of cut. By increasing the depth of cut, the average values of tangential
force would tend to increase as well. This phenomenon could be considered as a consistent presumption, since an
increase in the depth of cut would produce a larger contact area between the grinding wheel and the workpiece. In
this case, although the number of grains in contact was also higher, the strength to remove more volume of material
increased, and consequently produced higher cutting forces.
With the results concerning the tangential force shown in Table 2, it is possible to apply a power model and find
an equation which correlates tangential force to cooling method, table speed and depth of cut. The equation is
depicted by equation (2) which R-squared (R2) = 93.51%.
(2)
The equation shows that depth of cut is the most dominating factor that influences tangential force.
Surface Roughness
TABLE 5. ANOVA Result on Surface Roughness
Cooling Method 1 0.31091 0.310909 30.32 0.000
Table Speed 2 0.39145 0.195723 19.08 0.000
Depth of Cut 2 0.56964 0.284822 27.77 0.000
Error 30 0.30767 0.010256
Total 35 1.57967
020014-4
(a) (b) (c)
FIGURE 3 Effect of depth of cut on surface roughness: (a) Vf = 150 mm/s, (b) Vf = 200 mm/s, (c) Vf = 250 mm/s.
Table 4 shows that cooling method is the most influential factor on tangential force, followed by depth of cut.
Figure 3 shows that grinding process using MQL yields higher surface roughness. Increasing table speed and depth
of cut would also increase surface roughness considerably. The MQL technique produced higher surface roughness
because of the effective lubrication of the tool’s abrasive grains in the cutting region. The application of cutting fluid
by using MQL allowed the cutting edges of the grinding wheel to remain sharp for longer period before they were
renewed. By using MQL grinding, the surface roughness obtained was higher than in dry grinding due to the
retained sharpness of grits and less temperature. In this case, the metal removal took place mostly shearing and
fracturing, producing more ridges which consequently increased surface roughness [8, 9].
Using the data presented in Table 2, a power model can also be employed in order to correlate surface roughness
to cooling method, table speed and depth of cut. Equation (3) shows the obtained model which R2 =79.90%.
(3)
It can be seen from equation (3) that the most influential factor that affects surface roughness is depth of cut.
Chip Formation
The study of grinding chip is required to understand the mechanism of chip formation and those of metal
removal. SEM observations were conducted by using magnification of 500 x. The chips were collected from both
dry and MQL grinding process using table speed of 250 mm/s. In addition, the lowest and the largest depth of cut
were 0.03 mm and 0.06 mm, respectively.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 4. SEM of chips obtained from dry grinding Vf = 250 mm/s: (a) a = 0.03 mm, (b) a = 0.06 mm.
Figure 4 shows the SEM photographs of the chips produced by dry grinding. Fig. 4 (a) shows the result of
grinding process using depth of cut of 0.03 mm. The dominant types of chips were leafy, lamellar, irregular and
spherical. The lamellar structure of the chip indicated shearing to be one of mechanisms of chip formation, while
leafy structure of the chips was produced by ploughing mechanism. The spherical shapes were produced by
excessive heating and exothermic oxidation [10]. Figure 4(b) shows the result of grinding process using depth of cut
020014-5
of 0.06 mm. The chips produced were similar to the grinding process using depth of cut of 0.03 mm, except that
there were more irregular and spherical types of chips. The increased of the spherical type of chip indicated that the
temperature also increased at higher depth of cut.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 5. SEM of chips obtained from MQL grinding Vf = 250 mm/s: (a) a = 0.03 mm, (b) a = 0.06 mm.
Figure 5 shows the SEM photographs of the chips produced by MQL grinding. Fig. 5(a) shows that MQL
technique could lower the temperature during grinding process since the types of chip were dominated by lamellar,
leafy, and irregular. The absence of spherical type of chip indicated that there was no excessive temperature increase
during grinding process. Fig. 5(b) shows that chips produced at depth of cut of 0.06 mm were dominated by
lamellar, leafy, irregular and spherical. Spherical type of chip showed that there was an excessive temperature
increase during grinding process. The lamellar chips of dry grinding were wider than the MQL grinding because
they were produced by ploughing process. MQL grinding provided small fragment crushed chips which indicated
fracturing as one of mechanisms of chip formation [10].
By studying the chip characteristics, it is evident that in dry grinding the mechanisms of chip formation were
primarily rubbing, ploughing, and shearing. The mechanisms of chip formation under MQL grinding were
predominantly shearing and fracturing due to the retention of the sharpness of grits, the absence of the wheel loading
and lesser ductility of the steels under lower temperature.
SUMMARY
Based on the experimental results, the following conclusions for MQL grinding can be drawn:
x MQL could reduce normal force and tangential force considerably. The presence of lubricant around the
grinding wheel which provides better slipping of the grain at the workpiece-tool interface during MQL
grinding would possibly decrease the tangential force.
x The effective lubrication of the tool’s abrasive grains in the cutting region is possibly the reason that MQL
grinding produced higher surface roughness.
x The mechanisms of chip formation under MQL grinding were predominantly shearing and fracturing due to
the retention of the sharpness of grits, the absence of the wheel loading and lesser ductility of the steels
under lower temperature.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors acknowledge the PNBP Grant Provided by Mechanical Engineering Department, Institut Teknologi
Sepuluh Nopember Surabaya, No: 034653/IT2.11/PN.08/2016.
REFERENCES
1. A. R. Machado and J. Wallbank, "Effect of Extremely Low Lubricant Volumes in Machining," Wear,
210(1-2), pp. 76-82, (1997).
020014-6
2. F. Klocke, and G. Eisenblaetter, "Dry Cutting," CIRP Annals-Manufacturing Technology, 46(2), pp. 519-
526, (1997).
3. K. Weinert, I. Inasaki, J.W. Sutherland, T. Wakabayashi, “Dry Machining and Minimum Quantity
Lubrication,” Annals of the CIRP, 53(2): pp. 511-537, (2004).
4. M. Rahman, A. Senthil Kumar, and M. U. Salam, "Experimental Evaluation on the Effect of Minimal
Quantities of Lubricant in Milling," International Journal of Machine Tools and Manufacture, 42(5), pp.
539-547, (2002).
5. M. H. Sadeghi, M. J. Haddad, T. Tawakoli and M. Emami, “Minimal quantity lubrication-MQL in
Grinding of Ti-6Al-4V Titanium Alloy,” International Journal of Advanced Manufacturing Technology,
44(4-5): pp. 487-500, (2009).
6. N. R. Dhar, M. Hossin and M. Kamruzamman, “MQL Applications in Grinding of 16MnCr5 Steel: A
Comparison with Wet and Dry Grinding,” Proceedings of the Int. Conf. on Mech. Eng. (ICME), (2005).
7. S. Malkin, Grinding Technology: theory and application of machining with abrasives, 1 st edition, Ellis
Horwood Limited, Chicester, (1989).
8. T. Tawakoli, M. J. Hadad, M. H. Sadeghi, A. Daneshi, S. Stöckert, A. Rasifard, An experimental
investigation of the effects of workpiece and grinding parameters on minimum quantity lubrication—MQL
grinding, International Journal of Machine Tools & Manufacture, 49: pp. 924–932 (2009.)
9. U. Heisel, M. Lutz, D. Spath, and R. Wassmer, "Application of Minimum Quantity Cooling Lubrication
Technology in Cutting Process," Production Engineering, II/1, pp. 49-54, (1994).
10. W. B. Rowe, Principles of Modern Grinding Technology, William Andrew Publication, (2009).
020014-7
Application of Taguchi-grey method to optimize drilling of EMS 45 steel using minimum
quantity lubrication (MQL) with multiple performance characteristics
Bobby O. P. Soepangkat, Suhardjono, and Bambang Pramujati

Application of Taguchi-Grey Method to Optimize Drilling of
EMS 45 Steel using Minimum Quantity Lubrication (MQL)
with Multiple Performance Characteristics
Bobby O. P. Soepangkat1, a), Suhardjono2, b), Bambang Pramujati3, c)
1,2
Manufacturing Process Laboratory, Mech. Eng. Dept., Institut Teknologi Sepuluh
3
Industrial Automation, Mech. Eng. Dept., Institut Teknologi Sepuluh
a)
Corresponding author: bops_1994@me.its.ac.id
b)
suhardjono@gmail.com
c)
pramujati@me.its.ac.id
Abstract. Machining under minimum quantity lubrication (MQL) has drawn the attention of researchers as an alternative to the
traditionally used wet and dry machining conditions with the purpose to minimize the cooling and lubricating cost, as well as to
reduce cutting zone temperature, tool wear, and hole surface roughness. Drilling is one of the important operations to assemble
machine components. The objective of this study was to optimize drilling parameters such as cutting feed and cutting speed, drill
type and drill point angle on the thrust force, torque, hole surface roughness and tool flank wear in drilling EMS 45 tool steel
using MQL. In this study, experiments were carried out as per Taguchi design of experiments while an L18 orthogonal array was
used to study the influence of various combinations of drilling parameters and tool geometries on the thrust force, torque, hole
surface roughness and tool flank wear. The optimum drilling parameters was determined by using grey relational grade obtained
from grey relational analysis for multiple-performance characteristics. The drilling experiments were carried out by using twist
drill and CNC machining center. This work is useful for optimum values selection of various drilling parameters and tool
geometries that would not only minimize the thrust force and torque, but also reduce hole surface roughness and tool flank wear.
INTRODUCTION
Drilling is known as the most common and fundamental machining process. It is most frequently performed in material
removal as a preliminary step for many operations, such as reaming, tapping, and boring. Several performance
characteristics which are commonly used for evaluating drilling operation such as thrust force, torque, hole surface
roughness and tool wear, are strongly correlated with the cutting parameters such as cutting speed, feed speed, drill and
workpiece material, drill size, drill point angle and coolant conditions [1-2]. Minimum quantity cooling and lubrication
(MQL) cutting or minimum quasi-dry cutting can be characterized by a small quantity of cooling and lubricating fluid
supplied to the cutting zone in which the amount usually does not exceed 50 ml/h [3,4]. MQL has many advantages
compared with traditional wet machining and dry machining. It helps to decrease production costs by 10±50% as well as to
minimize the environmental and health hazards. Many researchers have suggested that MQL shows potential
competitiveness in terms of tool life, surface finish and cutting forces in turning, milling, drilling, reaming and taping [5-
7]. Orthogonal array from design of experiment theory in Taguchi method is used to study a large number of variables with
a small number of experiments [8]. The orthogonal arrays reduce the number of experimental configurations to be studied.
Furthermore, the conclusions drawn from small number of experiments are valid over the entire experimental region
spanned by the control factors and their settings [9]. The results of experiment are then transformed into a signal to noise
(S/N) ratio to measure the quality characteristic deviating from or near to the desired values. There are three quality
characteristics in Taguchi method, they are smaller is better, nominal is the best and larger is better. Taguchi method is
only used for individual performance. However, usually the most common problem is multiple-performance; hence many
researchers combined Taguchi method and grey relational analysis (GRA). In the grey system theory, the grey relational
analysis is used to analyze the relationship between sequences by using less data and multifactor [10]. This is considered as
more advantageous than the statistical regression analysis.
There were two intentions of this study in MQL drilling of EMS 45 steel. The first one was to demonstrate an
application of Taguchi method and grey relational analysis to find the significance of the type of drill bit, point angle and
cutting parameters in reducing the total variance of the multiple-performance characteristics simultaneously. The second
one was to find the proper setting of the type of drill bit, point angle and cutting parameters to minimize thrust force,
torque, hole surface roughness and tool wear simultaneously.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020015-1–020015-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985460
020015-1
EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN
Material and Equipment

The experimental studies were conducted under varying the type of drill bit (HSS M2 and HSS M35, each having 10 mm
diameter), drill geometry, i.e., point angle (102, 118 and 134 degree) and drilling parameters, i.e., cutting speed (25.37 and
50 m/min), feed speed (0.04, 0.07 and 0.1 mm/rev). The optimized multiple performance characteristics were thrust force
(Fz), torque (T), hole surface roughness (SR) and tool flank wear (VB). The quality characteristic of thrust force, torque,
hole surface roughness and tool flank wear were smaller-is-better. Since all process variables had three levels and the type
of drill bit had 2 (two) levels, the experiment design used L18 orthogonal array with 2 (two) replications. The optimization
was conducted by using the Taguchi-grey relational analysis (TGR) method. The hardness of EMS 45 steel was 29 HRC.
The dimensions of the material were 250 mm (length) x 25 (width) mm x 20 (thickness) mm. The drilling tests were
conducted using CNC Milling EMCO VMC-20 that has a maximum spindle speed of 4000 rpm. Thrust force and torque
were measured by using KISTLER dynamometer type 9272. Tool flank wear was measured by using Nikon measure scope
and hole surface roughness measurement was performed by using Mitutoyo Surftest 401.
TABLE 1. Parameters and their levels.
Parameters Unit Level
1 2 3
Drill type (DT) - HSS-M2 HSS-M35 -
Drill point angle (PA) (°) 102 118 134
Feed speed (F) mm/rev 0.04 0.07 0.1
Cutting speed (VC) m/min 25 37 50
Design of Experiments
The drilling operations were FDUULHG RXW DV SHU 7DJXFKL¶V GHVLJQ RI H[SHULPHQW 7KH RUWKRJRQDO DUUD\ XVHG IRU WKH
experiment was L18, which can handle 4 factors and 3 levels. L 18 orthogonal array required a minimum of 18 runs and had
7 degrees of freedom (DOF). In the Taguchi experimental design, the total DOF of selected orthogonal array should be
higher than or equal to the total DOF required for the experiment and hence L 18 orthogonal array has been selected. Table 2
shows the experimental design.
TABLE 2. Experimental design used for experiment.
Parameters Parameters
Drill Cutting Drill Cutting

No Feed No Drill Feed
Drill type point speed point speed
speed type speed
(DT) angle (VC) angle (VC)
(F) (DT) (F)
(PA) (PA)
1 1 1 1 1 10 2 1 1 3
2 1 1 2 2 11 2 1 2 1
3 1 1 3 3 12 2 1 3 2
4 1 2 1 1 13 2 2 1 2
5 1 2 2 2 14 2 2 2 3
6 1 2 3 3 15 2 2 3 1
7 1 3 1 2 16 2 3 1 3
8 1 3 2 3 17 2 3 2 1
9 1 3 3 1 18 2 3 3 2
Calculation of S/N ratio of thrust force, Normalization of the S/N ratio of thrust Calculation of the grey relational
torque, hole surface roughness and flank force, torque, hole surface roughness and coefficient (GRC)
wear flank wear
Analysis of the experimental results

Determination the level of parameters Calculation of the grey relational grade
using grey relational grade and analysis
that produce optimum response (GRG) by averaging the GRC
of variance
Verification of the optimal parameters through the confirmation experiments
FIGURE 1. Steps for optimization using Taguchi-GRA.
020015-2
TABLE 3. Results of experiment and S/N ratio of the responses.
NO DT PA F VC FZ T SR VB SNR-FZ SNR-T SNR-SR SNR-VB
1 1 1 1 1 712.15 3.315 4.36 41.1 -57.0514 -10.4097 -12.7798 -32.2821
2 1 1 2 2 1228 3.681 3.38 46.5 -61.784 -11.3181 -10.5848 -33.3491
3 1 1 3 3 1464 4.818 4.25 59.8 -63.3108 -13.6564 -12.5576 -35.5268
4 1 2 1 1 1012.5 2.438 3.97 39.0 -60.1079 -7.73889 -11.9703 -31.8213
5 1 2 2 2 1099 3.347 2.93 42.3 -60.8200 -10.4918 -9.32252 -32.5165
6 1 2 3 3 1304 4.338 3.68 49.6 -62.3056 -12.7448 -11.3170 -33.9067
7 1 3 1 2 1123 1.812 2.48 36.6 -61.0076 -5.16316 -7.89779 -31.2657
8 1 3 2 3 1462.5 2.810 3.58 39.3 -63.3019 -8.97413 -11.0716 -31.8952
9 1 3 3 1 1870 3.666 4.51 25.1 -65.4368 -11.2827 -13.0835 -27.9877
10 2 1 1 3 575.8 2.760 4.00 61.5 -55.2054 -8.81661 -12.0412 -35.7775
11 2 1 2 1 864.05 3.326 4.60 35.3 -58.7308 -10.4384 -13.2552 -30.9637
12 2 1 3 2 1299 4.565 4.76 39.3 -62.2722 -13.1888 -13.5521 -31.8768
13 2 2 1 2 897 2.300 4.04 46.1 -59.0558 -7.23267 -12.1330 -33.2709
14 2 2 2 3 1333 3.054 3.61 50.1 -62.4966 -9.69738 -11.1562 -33.9939
15 2 2 3 1 1404.5 4.052 6.01 37.7 -62.9504 -12.1534 -15.5703 -31.5191
16 2 3 1 3 999.5 1.676 3.24 38.4 -59.9957 -4.48548 -10.2109 -31.6904
17 2 3 2 1 1431 2.606 4.34 27.3 -63.1128 -8.31782 -12.7448 -28.7073
18 2 3 3 2 1607 3.591 4.24 27.4 -64.1203 -11.1043 -12.5422 -28.7550
TABLE 4 Normalization of S/N ratio, Grey relational coefficient (GRC) and Grey relational grade (GRG).
No xi_FZ xi_T xi_SR xi_VB GRC_FZ GRC_T GRC_SR GRC_VB GRG
1 0.18042 0.64597 0.63630 0.55129 0.3789 0.5855 0.5789 0.5270 0.48979
2 0.64298 0.74503 0.35021 0.68825 0.5834 0.6623 0.4349 0.6160 0.57901
3 0.79221 1.00000 0.60734 0.96781 0.7064 1.0000 0.5601 0.9395 0.77763
4 0.47916 0.35475 0.53080 0.49213 0.4898 0.4366 0.5159 0.4961 0.47899
5 0.54875 0.65493 0.18569 0.58138 0.5256 0.5917 0.3804 0.5443 0.51733
6 0.69395 0.90059 0.44564 0.75984 0.6203 0.8342 0.4742 0.6755 0.65901
7 0.56709 0.07389 0.00000 0.42080 0.5360 0.3506 0.3333 0.4633 0.43447
8 0.79134 0.48944 0.41366 0.50162 0.7056 0.4948 0.4603 0.5008 0.58163
9 1.00000 0.74116 0.67589 0.00000 1.0000 0.6589 0.6067 0.3333 0.78511
10 0.00000 0.47227 0.54004 1.00000 0.3333 0.4865 0.5209 1.0000 0.44858
11 0.34456 0.64911 0.69826 0.38204 0.4327 0.5876 0.6236 0.4472 0.51985
12 0.69069 0.94901 0.73697 0.49925 0.6178 0.9075 0.6553 0.4996 0.70931
13 0.37633 0.29955 0.55200 0.67822 0.4450 0.4165 0.5274 0.6084 0.46030
14 0.71263 0.56831 0.42468 0.77103 0.6350 0.5367 0.4650 0.6859 0.57250
15 0.75698 0.83611 1.00000 0.45334 0.6729 0.7531 1.0000 0.4777 0.75524
16 0.46819 0.00000 0.30148 0.47533 0.4846 0.3333 0.4172 0.4880 0.42447
17 0.77285 0.41788 0.63174 0.09238 0.6876 0.4621 0.5759 0.3552 0.58050
18 0.87113 0.72172 0.60533 0.09850 0.7953 0.6424 0.5589 0.3568 0.68050
TABLE 5. ANOVA of GRG and percentage of contribution.

Source DF Adj SS Adj MS F P % contribution
DT 1 0.001279 0.001279 0.82 0.386 -0.11% (0%)
PA 2 0.000545 0.000273 0.18 0.842 -1.04% (0%)
F 2 0.225949 0.112974 72.55 0.000 89.92%
VC 2 0.004463 0.002231 1.43 0.284 0.54%
Error 10 0.015572 0.001557 10.68%
Total 17 0.247807 100%
MULTIPLE-PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZATION USING TAGUCHI-GRA

7DJXFKL¶VWHFKQLTXHIURP7DJXFKLPHWKRGwas carried out for analyzing the experimental results. Taguchi method used
the design of orthogonal arrays to study the variables and its interactions using small number of experiments. The steps
used to perform an optimization using Taguchi-GRA are shown on Fig 1.
020015-3
S/N Ratio Calculation
Signal to noise ratio (S/N) in the Taguchi method is the measure of quality characteristics and deviation from the
desirable value. There are three types of quality characteristics in the S/N ratio analysis. The S/N ratio of all responses in
this experiment was calculated using the smaller is the better characteristic and tabulated in Table 3. Equation 1 shows the
formula for smaller is better [11].
(1)
Where n is the number of measurements and ‫ݕ‬௜ is the characteristic value which is measured.
Normalization of S/N Ratio

In the Grey relational analysis, data preprocessing is used to normalize the initial data. The experimental results of
thrust force, torque, hole surface roughness and flank wear were performed in the range between 0 and 1 by using linear
normalization. The normalization of S/N ratio of the responses was calculated using equation 2 [11] and shown in Table 4.
(2)
Where ܺ௜‫ כ‬ሺ݇ሻ is the normalization value, min ܺ௜ ሺ݇ሻ is the smallest value of ܺ௜ ሺ݇ሻfor the ݇ ௧௛ response and max ܺ௜ ሺ݇ሻis
the largest value of ܺ௜ ሺ݇ሻ for the ݇ ௧௛ response.
Grey Relational Coefficient and Grey Relational Grade

The Grey relational analysis is used for measuring the two systems relevancy. The sequences used in the grey relational
analysis are called grey relational coefficient (GRC). The calculation of GRC used equation 3 [11].
(3)
Where ο଴ǡ௜ ሺ݇ሻ LVWKHGHYLDWLRQVHTXHQFHRIWKHUHIHUHQFHVHTXHQFHȗWKHGLVWLQJXLVKLQJFRHIILFLHQWο௠௜௡ is the smallest

value of ο଴ǡ௜ and ο௠௔௫ is the largest value ofο଴ǡ௜ . After the calculation of GRC, the average value of the GRC was taken as
the grey relational grade (GRG). The GRC which was calculated from all responses and GRG are shown in the Table 4.
Experimental Results
The results of the thrust force, torque, hole surface roughness and flank wear are shown in the Table 3.
ANOVA and Percentage Contribution

The influence of drilling parameters and tool geometries can be evaluated by the value of GRG. However, the relative
importance analysis among the drilling parameters and tool geometries for multiple-performance characteristics was still
needed so that the optimum condition of the parameter levels can be determined clearly. The purpose of ANOVA was to
analyze which parameters significantly affected the performance characteristics. The results of the ANOVA of GRG of
four responses (thrust force, torque, hole surface roughness and flank wear), are shown in Table 5. For analyzing the
significant parameters and their contribution to the drilling process, percentage of contribution was also calculated. The
percentage of contribution of each response and the error are shown in Table 5. The result indicated that the most
significant parameters which had influence to reduce the total variance of thrust force, torque, hole surface roughness and
flank wear simultaneously were the feed speed followed by cutting speed. The results of the ANOVA of thrust force,
torque, hole surface roughness and flank wear are shown in the Tables 6, 7, 8, and 9.
TABLE 6. ANOVA of thrust force.
Source DF SS MS % contribution
DT 1 83002 83002 1.91%
PA 2 936378 468189 25.08%
F 2 2212234 1106117 60.30%
VC 2 4321 2160 0%
Error 10 386869 13817 13.35%
Total 17 3622804 100%
020015-4
TABLE 7. ANOVA of torque.
DT 1 0.5845 0.5845 1.37%
PA 2 6.6326 3.3163 22.82%
F 2 19.3426 9.6713 72.38%
VC 2 0.0044 0.0022 0.16%
Error 10 0.9443 0.0337 3.27%
Total 17 27.5085 100%
TABLE 8. ANOVA of hole surface roughness

DT 1 3.6195 3.6195 15.85%
PA 2 1.4858 0.7429 7.77%
F 2 5.9774 2.9887 28.99%
VC 2 7.2244 3.6122 32.49%
Error 10 2.6016 0.0929 14.90%
Total 17 20.9087 100%
TABLE 9. ANOVA of tool flank wear

DT 1 29.25 29.25 0.57%
PA 2 1480.93 740.46 42.98%
F 2 117.89 58.95 2.88%
VC 2 1491.5 745.75 43.29%
Error 10 279.21 9.97 10.27%
Based on Table 6, feed speed is the most influential parameter which affects thrust force followed by drill point
angle. From Table 7, it is known that feed speed is the most influential parameter which affects torque followed by drill
point angle. Cutting speed is the most influential parameter which affects the hole surface roughness followed by feed
speed and drill type as shown on Table 8. Table 9 shows that tool flank wear is affected the most by cutting speed,
followed by drill point and feed speed.
Optimum Level of Drilling Parameters

The optimum condition of the parameter levels can be clearly determined by using average analysis from response
table. The procedure of response table was to group GRG based on parameter levels and then to calculate the average. The
response table is shown in Table 10. The average GRG for each factor levels was then plotted in Fig.2 to attain the
optimum parameter setting that would reduce the total variance of the responses simultaneously.
FIGURE 2. Average GRG for each factor levels.
Based on Fig. 2, to minimize the thrust force, torque, hole surface roughness and flank wear in drilling EMS 45 steel,
the drill type, drill point angle, feed speed and cutting speed were set at level 1 (HSS-M2), level 1 (102°), level 3 (0.1
020015-5
mm/min) and level 1 (25 m/min) respectively. This setting was selected from the drilling parameters which obtained the
highest GRG.
TABLE 10. Response table.
Parameters level 1 level 2 level 3
Drill type 0.5892 0.5724
Drill point angle 0.5874 0.5739 0.5585
Feed speed 0.4561 0.5585 0.7278
Cutting speed 0.6016 0.5635 0.5773
Average 0.5808
Prediction of Optimal Multiple-performance

The prediction of multiple-performance is aimed for calculating the predicted GRG which is resulted from optimum
condition of drilling process. Equation 4 is used for the calculation of predicted grey relational grade [12].
(4)
Where ɀ୫ is the total mean of GRG, ɀഥన is the mean of the GRG at the optimum level, and i is the number of the
machining parameters that significantly affect the multiple-performance characteristics.
ɀොൌͲǤͷͺͲͺ൅ሺͲǤͷͺͻʹǦͲǤͷͺͲͺሻ൅ሺͲǤͷͺ͹ͶǦͲǤͷͺͲͺሻ൅ሺͲǤ͹ʹ͹ͺǦͲǤͷͺͲͺሻ൅ሺͲǤ͸Ͳͳ͸ǦͲǤͷͺͲͺሻ
ɀො ൌ 0.7636
Hence, the predicted grey relational grade for optimum parameter was 0.7636.
Confirmation Experiment
The validation of experimental results was carried out by confirmation experiment. Table 11 shows the results of
confirmation experiments. The confirmation experiments were replicated three times and the average of this experiment
was used to validate the prediction.
TABLE 11. Results of confirmation experiments.
No Parameters FZ MT SR VB
(N) (Nm) (μm) (μm)
DT PA F VC
1 1 1 3 1 1441 3.432 5.45 50.96
2 1 1 3 1 1458 3.683 5.82 51.54
3 1 1 3 1 1448 3.539 5.66 51.25
Average 1449 3.551 5.64 51.25
The GRG calculated from confirmation experiments was 0.7691. The interval plots of GRG prediction and
confirmation experiments using 95% confidence of interval are shown in Figure-3.
0,8010
0,8066
0,7636
0,7298
0,7206
0,6585
FIGURE 3. Interval plots of GRG of prediction and confirmation experiments.
Based on the interval plots of GRG prediction and GRG confirmation, the value of GRG confirmation was in the
interval of GRG prediction. It can be concluded that the setting parameters for optimum condition was valid.
020015-6
The comparison between optimum combination and initial combination experiment is used to obtain the improvement
of quality resulted from optimization process. Initial combination experiment is an experiment which is conducted by using
level 2 for all parameters which has 3 levels. For experiment which has 2 levels, the level is selected from the optimum
condition. The results of the initial combination experiments are shown in Table 12.
TABLE 12. Results of the initial combination experiments.

No Parameters FZ T SR VB
(N) (Nm) (μm) (μm)
DT PA F VC
1 2 2 2 2 1568 3.522 6.21 55.42
2 2 2 2 2 1559 3.643 5.87 52.78
3 2 2 2 2 1575 3.621 5.98 54.93
Average 1567.33 3.60 6.02 54.38
The comparison of individual responses of initial combination experiments and optimum combination experiments was
calculated and tabulated in Table 13. The comparison between multiple-performance characteristics which were
represented by GRG for both experiments also shown in Table 12.
TABLE 13. Result of the initial combination experiments and optimum combination experiments.
Initial Optimum Improvement
FZ 1567.33 1449 7.54% decrease

T 3.60 3.55 1.39% decrease
SR 6.02 5.64 6.31% decrease
VB 54.38 51.25 5.67% decrease
GRG 0.6116 0.7636 24.85% increase
From Table 13, the GRG which represents the multiple-performance characteristics increased up to 24.85% from
0.6116 to 0.7636. Thrust force decreased up to 7.54% from 1567.33 N to 1449 N, torque decreases up to 1.39% from 3.6
Nm to 3.55 Nm, hole surface roughness decreases up to 6.31% from 6.02 μm to 5.64 μm, and tool flank wear decreases up
to 5.67% from 54.38 μm to 51.25 μm. It is suitable with the smaller is the better characteristic which is used as the target
for measuring the hole quality resulted from drilling process in this experiment.
SUMMARY
The experimentally observed performance of MQL in drilling EMS 45 steel by using HSS drill can be summarized as
follows:
x The result of ANOVA showed that feed speed possessed the highest percent contribution followed by cutting
speed, while point angle and the type of drill bit did not give any contribution for reducing the total variance of
multiple-performance characteristics.
x The result of optimization using TGR method recommended the usage of HSS-M2 type of tool with 102° point
angle, 25 m/min of cutting speed, and 0.1 mm/rev of feed speed for minimizing the thrust force, torque, hole
surface roughness and tool flank wear simultaneously in MQL drilling EMS 45 steel.
x Experimental results have shown that machining performance characteristics in drilling process of MQL EMS 45
steel can be improved effectively through the combination of Taguchi method and grey relational analysis (TGR).
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors acknowledge the PNBP Grant Provided by Mechanical Engineering Department, Institut Teknologi
Sepuluh Nopember Surabaya, No: 034653/IT2.11/PN.08/2016.
REFERENCES
1. S. S. Panda, A. K. Singh, D. Chakraborty DQG 6 . 3DO ³'ULOO :HDU 0RQLWRULQJ 8VLQJ %DFN 3URSDJDWLRQ 1HXUDO
1HWZRUN´-RI0DWHULDOV3URFHVVLQJ7HFKQRORJ\SS-290, (2006).
2. &6DQMD\0/1HHPDEDQG&:&KLQ³0RGHOLQJRI7RRO:HDULQ'ULOOLQJE\6WDWLVWLFDO$QDO\VLVDQG$UWLILFLDl
1HXUDO1HWZRUN´-RXUQDORI3URFHVVLQJ7HFKQRORJ\SS-500, (2005).
3. ).ORFNHDQG*(LVHQEODWWHU³'U\&XWWLQJ´$QQDOVRIWKH&,53SS-526, (1997).
4. .:HLQDUW,,QDVDNL-:6XWKHUODQGDQG7:DNDED\DVKL³'U\0DFKLQLQJDQG0LQLPXP4XDQWLW\/XEULFDWLRQ´
Annals of the CIRP, 53 (2): pp. 511-537, (2004).
5. 67KDPL]KPDQLL5RVOLDQG6+DVDQ³$6WXG\RI0LQLPXP4XDQWLW\/XEULFDWLRQRQ,QFRQHO6WHHO´$UFKLYHV
of Materials Science and Engineering, 39 (1): pp. 38-44, (2009).
020015-7
6. Y .DPDWD DQG 7 2ELNDZD ³+LJK 6SHHG 04/ )LQLVK 7XUQLQJ RI ,QFRQHO ZLWK &RDWHG 7RROV´ -RXUQDO RI
Materials Processing Technology, 192-193: 281-286, (2007).
7. <6/LDRD+0/LQDDQG<&&KHQ³)HDVLELOLW\6WXG\RIWKH0LQLPXP4XDQWLW\/XEULFDWLRQin High-Speed End
0LOOLQJRI1DN+DUGHQHG6WHHOE\&RDWHG&DUELGH7RRO´,QWHU-RXUQDORI0DFKLQH7RROV 0DQXIDFWXUHSS
1667-1676, (2007).
8. G. Taguchi, Introduction to Quality Engineering, Asian Productivity Organization, Dearborn, MI: Distributed by
American Supplier Institute Inc, (1986).
9. S.M. Phadke, Quality Engineering Using Robust Design, Englewood Cliffs, N.J: Prentice Hall, (1989).
10. J. L. Deng, The Essential Method of Grey Systems, Huazhong University of Science and Technology, Wuhan China,
(1992).
11. B.O.P. Soepangkat, A. Soesanti, and B. Pramujati, The Use of Taguchi-Grey-Fuzzy to Optimize Performance
Characteristics in Turning of AISI D2, Applied Mechanics and Materials. 315: 211-215, (2013).
12. B. O. P. Soepangkat, B. Pramujati, N. Lusi, Optimization of Multiple Performance Characteristics in the Wire EDM
Process of AISI D2 Tool Steel using Taguchi and Fuzzy Logic. Advanced Materials Research. 789: 320-323, (2013).
020015-8
Fouling reduction by ozone-enhanced backwashing process in ultrafiltration of
petroleum-based oil in water emulsion
Nita Aryanti, Indah Prihatiningtyas, and Tutuk Djoko Kusworo

Fouling Reduction by Ozone-Enhanced Backwashing
Process in Ultrafiltration of Petroleum-Based Oil in Water
Emulsion
Nita Aryanti1,2 a), Indah Prihatiningtyas1 and Tutuk Djoko Kusworo1

1
Department of Chemical Engineering, Diponegoro University, Semarang, Indonesia
2
Membrane Research Centre (MeR-C), Department of Chemical Engineering, Diponegoro University, Semarang,
Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: nita.aryanti@che.undip.ac.id
Abstract. Ultrafiltration membrane has been successfully applied for oily waste water treatment. However, one
significant drawback of membrane technology is fouling which is responsible for permeate flux decline as well as
reducing membrane performance. One method commonly used to reduce fouling is a backwashing process. The
backwashing is carried out by a push of reversed flow from permeate side to the feed side of a membrane to remove
fouling on the membrane pore and release fouling release fouling layer on the external side. However, for adsorptive
fouling, the backwashing process was not effective. On the other hand, Ozone demonstrated great performance for
reducing organics fouling. Hence this research was focused on backwashing process with ozone for removing fouling due
to ultrafiltration of petroleum based oil emulsion. Gasoline and diesel oil were selected as dispersed phase, while as
continuous phase was water added with Tween 80 as a surfactant. This research found that the Ozone backwashing was
effective to improve flux recovery. In ultrafiltration of gasoline emulsion, the flux recovery after Ozone backwashing was
in the range of 42-74%. For ultrafiltration of diesel oil emulsion, the permeate flux recovery was about 35-84%. In
addition, foulant deposition was proposed and predicting that foulant deposition for ultrafiltration of gasoline-in-water
emulsion was surfactant as the top layer and the oil was underneath the surfactant. On the other hand, for ultrafiltration of
diesel oil-in-water emulsion, the oil was predicted as a top layer above the surfactant foulant.
INTRODUCTION
Oily wastewater is usually generated as a waste product in the metal processing industry, petroleum
refinery, and offshore oil exploration. The wastewater can be found in the form of free-floating oil, unstable
oil in water emulsion and stable oil in water emulsion [1]. The oil component of emulsion is a mixture of
hydrocarbons comprising benzene, toluene, ethylbenzene and xylene (BTEX), naphthalene, phenanthrene,
dibenzothiophene (NPD), polyaromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs) and phenol. Those substances are
characterized as lethal (deadly) and sublethal (inhibit the growth, reproduction, and other physiological
processes) on aquatic ecosystems. [2-4]. In the petroleum refinery, about 0,4-1,6 oily wastewater was
generated for every oil production [5]. Oily wastewater from petroleum refinery having Chemical Oxygen
Demand (COD) value of 850-1020 mg/L, the oil content of 100-300 mg/L on water desalter and up to 5000
mg/L in the bottom of the tank [4]. Those COD value and oil content of oil wastewater do not meet with the
Government Regulation in Indonesia, where the maximum oil content and COD value for oily wastewater
from petroleum refinery were 20 mg/L and 160 mg/L, respectively. Several methods to remove oil impurities
were applied including treatment by electrochemical, membrane filtration, biological treatment, adsorption,
flotation and chemical coagulation [6].
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020016-1–020016-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985461
020016-1
In membrane filtration, ultrafiltration has been applied for treatment of oil in water emulsion wastewater,
for example, refinery wastewater [7], industrial oily wastewater [8] and oily waste effluent from copper cable
factory [9]. Furthermore, the ultrafiltration membranes have successfully been applied for separation of oil in water
[6]. However, the main drawback in ultrafiltration application is fouling which is related to reducing of membrane
performance.
Some methods of fouling control and membrane cleaning in ultrafiltration membrane have been applied
[10-13]. In general, fouling control is classified as physical method such as backwashing, backflushing, rotating and
ultrasonic and chemical method (by acid washing, caustic washing, enzymatic washing and dispersant use) [14].
Backwashing is carried out by a push of reversed flow from permeate side to the feed side of a membrane. The
reversed flow removes the foulant on membrane pores and releases fouling layer on the external side [14].
Nevertheless, the physical method is not able to eliminate fouling caused by adsorption. On the other hand, the
chemical method is capable of removing adsorptive fouling, but it has a negative effect on the environment due to
by-product formation. On the other hand, Ozone has been examined for reducing membrane fouling caused by
ibuprofen, Bezafibrate, Amoxicillin and Sulfamethoxazole [15], accumulation of organic particles on water
treatment [16], trihalomethanes [17] and phenol/tannic [18]. In oil waste water treatment, ozone has been applied for
reducing the concentration of Benzene, Toluene, Xylene in oil waste [19]. As a matter of fact, Ozone was able to
reduce membrane fouling, this research was aimed to investigate a combined Ozone and backwashing process for
fouling reduction. Special emphasis is focused on reducing fouling in ultrafiltration of petroleum-based oil in water
emulsion.
Materials
Oil in water emulsions were prepared at oil concentration of 200 mg/L. The oil or dispersed phase was
gasoline and diesel oil obtained from a local petrol station. A mixture of Tween 80 (Sigma) at concentration of 0,1%
(v/v) and water was the continuous phase. Oil in water emulsion obtained by using IKA Homogenizer at a rotation
speed of 21,200 rpm for 2 minutes. Ultrafiltration membrane was a Polyethersulphone (PES) membrane (NADIR
Filtration, Germany) having MWCO of 10 kDa. Membrane surface morphology was examined by using Scanning
Electron Microscope (FEI type Inspek-550) at a specific magnification.
Ultrafiltration
Ultrafiltration experiments were conducted in a laboratory scale test cell. The ultrafiltration apparatus
comprises a feed tank, a pump, a pressure indicator and stainless steel cell. Schematic diagram of ultrafiltration is
shown in Fig.1.
FIGURE 1. Schematic illustration of Ultrafiltration Apparatus
020016-2
All ultrafiltration runs were conducted at room temperature (28 ± 2oC). Before starting the experiments, membranes
were first compacted by filtering water through the membrane at pressure of 3 bars for 0.5 hr. For each experimental
runs, a new circular membranes sheet having membrane area of 13.85 cm2 was used. After the compaction process,
distilled water was filtered through the membrane and initial water flux (J0) was then measured. The initial water
fluxes (J0) were obtained by measuring the weight of permeate water collected at specific recorded time.
Subsequently, the apparatus was operated for ultrafiltration of oil in water emulsion. The permeate fluxes (J) were
determined by analytically weighing the permeate collected at every 5 minutes intervals for 120 minutes. The
membrane fluxes or permeate fluxes (J) were then calculated by dividing the volume of permeate (Q) by effective
membrane area (A) and the sampling time (t) as defined in equation (1):
Q (1)
J
Axt
Where: J: flux (L/ m2.hr), Q: volume (L), A: membrane area (m2) and t: time interval (hr).
In order to maintain same concentration, the filtrations were carried out using total recycle mode where both
permeate and retentate were recycled to the feed tank. Hence, after each flux determination, the collected permeate
was returned back to feed tank. Further, normalized fluxes are obtained by dividing fluxes (J) with initial water
fluxes (J0).
Ozone Backwashing
In backwashing operation, Ozone was generated by Ozonizer (Krisbow) was injected. The ozone generator was
equipped with a flowmeter for determining Ozone flow rate. Ozone concentration was tested by using HI38054
Ozone Test Kit.
Flux Profiles
The variation of permeate flux as a function of operational time for ultrafiltration of Gasoline and Diesel oil
emulsions were shown in Fig. 2. Ozone backwashing was applied at filtration time of 60 minutes for specific Ozone
flow rate and backwashing time.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 2. Permeate flux profile of Ultrafiltration of Gasoline emulsion (a) and Diesel oil emulsion (b) at various Ozone flow
rate and backwashing time.
020016-3
Figure 2 illustrates the permeate fluxes of gasoline and diesel oil ultrafiltration decline during filtration. The flux
declines were generally found in membrane filtration due to the accumulation of foulant on the membrane surface or
membrane pore blocking. Based on Fig. 2, it was displayed that the permeate flux of gasoline ultrafiltration was
dropped about 40-50% from its initial fluxes in the first 20 minutes. A similar result was found for diesel oil
ultrafiltration, there was a decline of permeate fluxes about 50-70% from its initial flux in the first 20 minutes. After
the ozone backwashing was applied, there was an increase of permeate fluxes. Ozone backwashing effects were
shown at fluxes after 60 minutes as backwashing point. In general, the ozone backwashing improved the permeate
flux for all ozone flow rate and backwashing time. However, the result was more pronounced at higher Ozone flow
rate and backwashing time (6L/min for 5 minutes). In more detail, the normalized fluxes as well as flux increases
after backwashing process were listed in Table 1 and Table 2 for ultrafiltration of Gasoline and Diesel oil emulsion,
respectively.
TABLE 1. Normalized Flux (J/J0) and effect of Ozone backwash on flux increase in ultrafiltration of gasoline
emulsion.
Normalized Flux (J/J0) % Flux

Backwash Ozone After Ozone Increase before
Ozone Flowrate Before Ozone
Time Concentration Backwash and after
(L/min) Backwash
(minutes) (mg/L) (t=120 minute) Ozone
(t=60 minute) backwash
2 1 0,1 0,47 0,63 32
2 5 0,2 0,33 0,36 28
6 1 0,15 0,37 0,48 50
6 5 0,3 0,43 0,84 75
TABLE 2. Normalized Flux (J/J0) and effect of Ozone backwash on flux increase in ultrafiltration of diesel oil
emulsion.
Normalized Flux (J/J0) % Flux

Backwash Ozone After Ozone Increase before
Ozone Flowrate Before Ozone
Time Concentration Backwash and after
(L/min) Backwash
(minutes) (mg/L) (t=120 minute) Ozone
(t=60 minute) backwash
2 1 0,1 0,30 0,30 19
2 5 0,2 0,32 0,33 12
6 1 0,15 0,31 0,38 22
6 5 0,3 0,51 0,79 64
Table 1 and Table 2 support the finding as presented in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2, respectively. After the Ozone
backwashing (at times of 65 minutes) there was permeate flux increase approximately 28 ± 75% and 12-64% of their
previous fluxes (at the time of 60 minutes) for gasoline and diesel oil ultrafiltration, respectively. Comparing the
flux after backwashing time (at the time of 65 minutes) with the initial flux (J0) resulted in flux recovery of 42-74%
and 35-84% for ultrafiltration of gasoline emulsion and diesel oil emulsion, respectively. The higher permeate fluxes
after ozone backwashing indicating a reduction of membrane fouling as a result of ozone reaction with the organic
compound (oil and surfactant) deposited on the membrane surface. Ozone reaction not only removed deposited layer
on the membrane surface but also broke down large molecules and particles [17]. Oxidation by ozone was
influenced by several factors such as ozone concentration, reaction time, reaction temperature and pH [20]. Table 1
and Table 2 confirmed that the highest flux recovery was found at Ozone flowrate of 6 L/minutes at backwashing
time of 5 minutes. Ozone is an oxidation agent having the ability to change the structure and composition of
petroleum and decomposed some organic compounds into CO2 and H2O [20]. Ozone reacts with alkene contained
compound and break up its double bond of a carbonic atom into new stable molecules such as ketone and aldehydes
as well as unstable molecules such as hydrogen peroxide and OH radical [21]. Moreover, it was confirmed that
ozone was able to lower concentration of organic petroleum compound [19].
020016-4
Membrane Characteristic after Ultrafiltration
Scanning Electron Microscopy images of fouled membranes after ultrafiltration of gasoline and diesel oil is
displayed in Fig. 3 and Fig. 4, respectively.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 3. Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) images of membrane surface at a magnification of 10,000x: (a) After
ultrafiltration of gasoline emulsion without Ozone backwashing (b) After ultrafiltration of gasoline emulsion with ozone
backwash Ozone flow rate was 6L/min, backwashing time was 5 minutes.
Figure 3 (a) shows that the fouled membrane due to gasoline emulsion feed without ozone backwashing representing
µVHDOHG¶ and dense foulant on the membrane surface. On the other hand, as displayed in Fig. 3 (b), after Ozone
backwashing the deposited foulant on the membrane surface, was diminished and deposited particles and gel-like
foulant previously covered by dense foulant became visible.
Figure 4 presents the images of fouled membrane after ultrafiltration of diesel oil emulsion without Ozone
backwashing (Fig. 4a) and with Ozone backwashing (Fig. 4b).
(a) (b)
FIGURE 4. Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) images of membrane surface at a magnification of 10,000x: (a) After
ultrafiltration of diesel oil emulsion without ozone backwashing (b) After ultrafiltration of diesel oil emulsion with ozone
backwash Ozone flow rate was 6L/min, backwashing time was 5 minutes.
020016-5
Figure 5a illustrates the fouled membrane without Ozone backwash indicating some large particles deposited on the
membrane surface. When the Ozone backwashing was employed, there was a break up of those large particles into
smaller particles. By reducing the particle-deposited size, a gel-like structure was noticeable. Both Fig. 3 and Fig. 4
clearly confirmed that the Ozone backwash has the ability to reduce membrane fouling.
Foulant Deposition
According to SEM images in Fig. 3 and Fig. 4, foulant deposition on the membrane surface was proposed.
In this research, the feed was gasoline or diesel emulsion stabilized with a surfactant. Ultrafiltration of emulsion
(consisting of oil droplets in their continuous phase) has different characteristic compared to ultrafiltration of general
solution. Firstly, fouling by oil droplets take place by deposition of droplets on the membrane surface or pore
blocking by droplets deformation inside the membrane pores [22]. Secondly, the surfactant also having a
contribution for flux reduction due to polarization concentration [23-25], or adsorption of surfactant molecules on
the membrane pores [24,26-27]. Hence, the foulant in ultrafiltration of gasoline and diesel oil emulsion comprise oil
and surfactant. In ultrafiltration of gasoline emulsion, oil was probably blocking the membrane pores or deposited
on the membrane surface followed by gel formation of surfactant deposited on the membrane surface as illustrated
in Fig. 5 (a). On the contrary, for ultrafiltration of diesel oil emulsion, deposition of surfactant on the membrane
surface was first contributed, then followed by the oil deposition on the membrane surface (see Fig. 5 (b) for
illustration).
(a) (b)
FIGURE 5. Illustration of foulant deposition (a) Ultrafiltration of gasoline emulsion (b) Ultrafiltration of diesel oil emulsion
Consequently, when the Ozone backwashing was applied, it has a function to diminish gel layer due to surfactant
foulant in ultrafiltration of gasoline emulsion. Conversely, in ultrafiltration of diesel oil emulsion, the Ozone
backwashing resulted in a reduction of oil deposition foulant.
CONCLUSION
Ozone backwashing process has been investigated in ultrafiltration of petroleum based oil in water emulsion.
Permeate flux profiles confirmed that there was a decrease of permeate flux to about 40-50% and 50-70% from its
initial flux for gasoline-in-water emulsion and diesel oil-in-water emulsion, respectively. When the Ozone
backwashing was applied, permeate flux recovery in ultrafiltration of gasoline emulsion was in the range of 42-74%.
For ultrafiltration of diesel oil emulsion, permeate flux recovery was about 35-84%. Scanning electron microscopy
images verified that Ozone was able to remove the first layer of foulant on the membrane surface. In addition,
foulant deposition was proposed, illustrating that the foulant deposition for ultrafiltration of gasoline emulsion was
surfactant foulant in the top layer while for ultrafiltration of diesel oil foulant, the oil foulant was predicted exist on
the top layer.
REFERENCES
1. M. J. Um, S. H. Yoon, C. H. Lee, K. Y. Chung, K.Y. Kim, J. Water Res. 35(17)í
2. P. Ekins, R. Vanner and J. Firebrace, J. Clean. Prod. 15, 1302 ± 1315 (2007).
020016-6
3. B. H. 'L\D¶XGGHHQW. M. A. Wan Daud and A. R. Aziz, Process Saf. Environ. 89, 95-105 (2011).
4. F. Ahmadun, A. Pendashteh, L. C. Abdullah, D. R. A. Biak, S. S. Madaeni, and Z. Z., J. Hazard. Mater. 170
(2), 530-551 (2009).
5. A. Coelho, A.V. Castro, M. Dezotti, G. L. 6DQW¶$QQD-U-+D]DUG. Mater. 137, 178-184 (2006).
6. S. Jamaly, A. Giwa and S. W. Hasan, J. Env. Sci. 37, 15-30 (2015).
7. E. Yuliwati, A. F. Ismail, W. J. Lau, B. C. Ng, A. Mataram, and M. A. Kassim, Desalination 287, 350-361
(2012).
8. A. Salahi, A. Gheshlaghi, T. Mohammadi and S. S. Madaeni, Desalination 262 (1-3), 235±242.(2010).
9. K. Karakulski, and A. W. Morawski, J. Hazard. Mater. 186 (2-3), 1667±1671 (2011).
10. H. Chang, H. Liang, F. Qu, J. Ma, N. Ren and G. Li, J. Env. Sci. 43, 177-186 (2016).
11. A. Massé, O. Arab, V. Séchet, P. Jaouen, M. Pontié, N-E. Sabiri and S. Plantier, Sep. Purif. Technol. 156, 512-
521 (2015).
12. G. Zhang, and Z. Liu, J. Memb. Sci. 211, 235-249 (2003).
13. S. Muthukumaran, K. Yang, A. Seuren, S. Kentish, M. Ashokkumar, G.W. Stevens and F. Grieser, Sep. Purif.
Technol. 39(1-2), 99-107 (2004).
14. X. Shi, G. Tal, N. P. Hankins and V. Gitis, J. Water Process Eng. 1, 121±138 (2014).
15. B. S. Oh, H. Y. Jang, T. M. Hwang and J.-W Kang, J. Memb. Sci. 289, 178±186 (2007).
16. J-T. T. Kim, Y. Ick-Tae and A. Gyung-Hae, Desalination 202, 361±368 (2007).
17. K-C. Chen and S. J. Masten, J. the Chinese Inst. Env. Eng. 15(4), 263-268 (2005).
18. M. Minhalma, J. R. Dominguez and M. N. De Pinho, Desalination 191, 148-152 (2006).
19. K. Silharova, J. Derco, T. Peter, V. Maria and M. Michal ³Reducing of Organic Petroleum Compounds in
water by Ozonation/UV Processes´LQ45th International Petroleum Conference 2011.
20. M. Zhu, H. Wang, H., S. Yu, X. You and W. Jin, Mod. App. Sci. 4(1), 6-11 (2010).
21. A. S. Guinesi, C. Andolfatto, I. B. Filho, A. A. Cardoso, J. P. Filho, and R. V. Farac, Braz. Dent. J. 22(1), 37-
40 (2011).
22. I. W. Cumming, R. G. Holdich and I. D. Smith, J. Memb. Sci. 169, 147-155 (2000).
23. A-S. Jönsson, B. Jönsson and H. Byhlin, J. Colloid Interface. Sci. 304, 191±199 (2006).
24. H. Byhlin and A.-S. Jönsson, Desalination 151(1), 21-31 (2003).
25. A-S. Jönsson and B. Jönsson, J. Memb. Sci. 56, 49-76, (1991).
26. L.A.T. Nguyen, M. Schwarze and R. Schomäcker, J. Memb. Sci. 493, 120±133 (2015).
27. A. G. Fane, C.J.D. Fell, K.J. Kim, Desalination 53, 37-55 (1985).
020016-7
Process improvement of knives production in a small scale industry
Gamawan Ananto and Irfan Muktasim

Process Improvement of Knives Production in a Small
Scale Industry
Gamawan Ananto1, a) and Irfan Muktasim2, b)
1,2
Bandung State Polytechnic for Manufacturing, Jl. Kanayakan 21, Bandung 40135, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding authors: gamawan@polman-bandung.ac.id
b)
irfanmuktasim@gmail.com.
Abstract. Small scale industry that produces several kinds of knive should increase its capacity due to the demand
from the market. Qualitatively, this case study consisted of formulating the problems, collecting and analyzing the
necessary data, and determining the possible recommendations for the improvement. While the current capacity is
only 9 (nine), it is expected that 20 units of knife will produced per month. The processes sequence are: profiling
(a), truing (b), beveling (c), heat treatment (d), polishing (e), assembly (f), sharpening (g) and finishing (h) . The
first process (a) is held by out-house vendor company while other steps from (b) to (g) are executed by in-house
vendor. However, there is a high dependency upon the high skilled operator who executes the in-house processes
that are mostly held manually with several unbalance successive tasks, where the processing time of one or two
tasks require longer duration than others since the operation is merely relied on the operator¶V skill. The idea is the
improvement or change of the profiling and beveling process. Due to the poor surface quality and suboptimal
hardness resulted from the laser cut machine for profiling, it is considered to substitute this kind of process with
wire cut that is capable to obtain good surface quality with certain range levels of roughness. Through simple
cutting experiments on the samples, it is expected that the generated surface quality is adequate to omit the truing
process (b). In addition, the cutting experiments on one, two, and four test samples resulted the shortest time that
was obtained through four pieces in one cut. The technical parameters were set according to the recommendation
of machine standard as referred to samples condition such as thickness and path length that affect ed the rate of
wear. Meanwhile, in order to guarantee the uniformity of knife angles that are formed through beveling process (c),
a grinding fixture was created. This kind of tool diminishes the dependency upon the operator¶V skill as well. The
main conclusions are: the substitution of laser cut with wire cut machine for the first task (a) could reduce the
operation time from 60 to 39.26 minutes with good result of surface quality and the truing process (b) could be
omitted; the additional grinding fixture in beveling process (c) is required and two workstations have to be
assigned instead of one as in previous condition. They lead to improvements including the guarantee of the
uniformity of knifeV¶ angle, the reduction on the operatorV¶ skills dependency, the shortening of cycle time from
855 to 420 minutes, and the higher number of productivity from 9 units/month into 20units/month.
INTRODUCTION
Small scale industry that produces several kinds of knive must increase its capacity to respond the market
opportunity. The objective of this work was to find possibility for improving the capacity of such company, in
which to increase the capability in producing knives without ignoring the general productivity requirement and
other principal aspects. Since the current capacity is merely 9 (nine) units per month, it is expected that 20
units of knife will be produced per month. By highlighting one sub-variant of the products, this study
examined the results of proposed and executed.
After analysis was carried out, several points were drawn. It is recommended that in the first process
executed by the vendor, the existing machine should be substituted with another machine to obtain good
quality surface and hardness to simplify the process afterwards. In addition, there is a nedd to develop and hire
several high skilled operators to diminish the dependency upon a particular operator. Furthermore, supporting
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020017-1–020017-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985462
020017-1
tool or tools should be created in order to guarantee the performance of the whole procesess instead of relying
on the operator¶V skill.
METHODS AND LITERATURE REVIEW

Qualitatively, this case study consisted of formulating the problems, collecting and analyzing the necessary
data, and determining the possible recommendations for the industrial improvement [1]. The steps were
illustratedin Fig.1. In the first step, in this case, the issue was formulated in which there is a need to icrease the
capacity of the industry, followed by the data collection including the existing operation data such as the
resources in the line, cycle time of each operation, and other related things. From this point, recommendations
and possible solutions are proposed and after they were approved, it was executed and implemented.
FIGURE 1. Steps of actions.
According to the observation on the existing processes, an approach based onwork cell line balancing theory
where the list of the task that define HDFKWDVN¶RSHUDWLRQWLPHLVDPDQGDWRU\ [2] in order to obtain total operation
time and to create a precedence diagram since there are predecessor tasks in such list content. Referred to this task
OLVW DQG SUHFHGHQFH GLDJUDP PD[LPXP FDSDFLW\ . FRXOG EH FDOFXODWHG ZLWK FRPSDQ\¶V RSHUDWLRQ WLPH OT),
whereas the cycle time (CT) is determined from the longest task time [2], using following general equation:
K = OT / CT (1)
Subsequently, the CT will be used for each work cell that could be calculated by equation (1) where K might be
assumed as the demand level conditionally:
CT = OT / K (2)
Moreover, the minimum number of Work Cell then could be defined as one of necessary factors in the line
balancing principle by using equation as follows:
1 7RWDOµW¶&7 (3)
ZKHUH7RWDOµW¶LV the sum of the whole tasks in the system.

Generally, the task assignment in work cells successively is included in heuristic method by using the
combination by prioritizing few criteria, which is to selectthe task that does not have any predecessor or the
predecessor is already assigned, the task that has the highest number of task or has WKHORQJHVWRSHUDWLRQWLPHµW¶ [2].
Moreover, regarding with the number of workstation or operator that might be possibly changed, is apparently
related with theoretical labor productivity improvement as well, as mentioned with the generated quantity of unit
devided by the required hours [3].
Existing Operation
The sequence of required processes for product manufacture are: profiling (a), truing (b), beveling (c), heat
treatment (d), polishing (e), assembling (f), sharpening (g), and finishing (h), where the profiling is the only
020017-2
process carried out by out-house vendor company using laser cut machine. Regarding with those processes,
the truing process (b) is required particularly due to poor surface quality and imprecise surface hardness
resulted by the characteristics of laser cut machine process. Furthermore, the beveling process (c) would be
more difficult or longer. Fig. 2 shows the workpiece that is already profiled by laser cut and will be processed in
truing process that uses emery equipment with a sandpaper band.
FIGURE 2. A laser cut profiled workpiece ready for truing process.
The next process is beveling process since a certain angle on certain section has to be made as
demosntrated in Fig. 3 part (A), whereas part (B) shows the product that is already processed in beveling step.
Beveling process is a process that relies solely on the operator¶V skill, using manual hand grinding machine.
(A) (B)
FIGURE 3. Sliced certain section of product (A) with angles that have to be processed by beveling, and (B) a product that is
already processed in beveling.
Subsequently, the next processes are heat treatment (d), polishing (e), assembly (f), sharpening (g), and
finishing (g), where these entire tasks are executed by the same operator. Fig. 4 illustrates the precedence
diagram, both the in-house and out-house processes, that are mentioned above with operation time of:60 min, 45
min, 240 min, 90 min, 300 min, 30 min, 30 min, 120 min, respectively. The analysis and calculation for line
balancing were only performed on tasks that are executed in-house, carried out in workstation-1 (WS-1), and on the
operator that is assigned for the respective processess.
FIGURE 4. Existing precedence diagram with one in-house workstation.
Figure 4 demonstrates thecycle time (CT) of the processes with total time of in-house tasks of 855 min per
unit. As the operation time (OT) of company is 35 hours per week with 4 weeks per month, total OT pe mont is
8400 min. Since the performance of capacity is confined by number of workstation, using equation (1) the
020017-3
capacity (K) then could be calculated as K = OT/CT that is 8400/ 855 = 9.8 and rounded down to 9 units per
month.
Ideas for Improvement

From such analysis, this study attemped to improve or change the processes of profiling (a) and beveling
(c) in order to enhance productivity. It was initiated in profiling as the first process by employing wire cut
instead of laser cut. As known previously, the wire cut process is capable to obtain good quality surface with
certain range level of roughness. Table 1 shows an experiment in a wire cut machine, where path length (L) of
450 mm was calculated from the product drawing and technical parameters such as Vc (velocity of cutting)
that wer set according to the machine standard; referred to test samples¶ condition such as thickness and path
length that affected its rate of wear.
TABLE 1. Wire Cut exeperiments of cutting upon samples.
Sample quantity L Vc Setup time Processing
µW¶SHU unit [min/pce]
in pile [pieces] [mm] [mm/min] [min] WLPHµW¶>PLQ@
(e/a)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e = (b/c)+d)
1 450 13.33 10 43.76 43.76
2 450 6.47 10 79.55 39.77
4 450 3.06 10 157.06 39.26
Table 1 indicates that such cutting experiments on one, two and four test samples resulted the shortest time
required for four pieces was 39.26 min per piece. Through these experiments, the surface cut results of wire
should be adequate so that truing (b) process could be omitted. Therefore new precedence diagram was
determined by using equation (3), the minimum number of workstation should be calculated. After omitting (b)
process, the remains were the total operation (µW¶) of 810 min. Referred to company target K = 20 units per
month, with operation time that was still 8400 min per month, the new cycle time (CT) through equation (2)
then would be CT = OT/K of 8400/20 = 420 min per unit. Furthermore, its minimum workstation number by
equation (3) was 1 WRWDOµW¶&7of 810/420 = 1.92 and rounded up to 2 workstation.
The task assignment into work cells successively in heuristic method was by using the combination that
prioritized few criteria, namely, to choose the task that does not have any predecessor or the predecessor is already
assigned, the task with higher number of subsequent processesRUWKHORQJHVWRSHUDWLRQWLPHµW¶. Table 2 shows the
DVVLJQPHQW VWHSV ZKHUH WKH WRWDO RI WDVN µW¶ SHU ZRUNVWDWLRQ VKRXOG QRW exceed than CT 420 min per
workstation.
TABLE 2. Assignment to workstations with new number of tasks.
Subsequent
Workstation Task µW¶ 5HPDLQµW¶ Remain task(s) Longest duration
proceses
1 C 240 180 D, F, G, H D H
D 90 90 F, G F F, G
F 30 60 G - -
G 30 30 - - -
2 E 300 10 H - -
H 120 10 - - -
Figure 5 shows the new precedence diagram referred to ³7DEOH ´ DVVLJQPHQW :LWK PLQLPXP RI WZR
workstations, the company should hire other technicians in order to diminish its dependency upon one high
skilled operator. In addition, in order to guarantee the uniformity of knife angles that are formed through
beveling (c) process, an equipment or support fixture should be developed. This kind of tool should diminish
the dependency upon the operator skill as well, in case the turnover of technicians is unpredictable, and the
new technicians should be trained with uncomplicated methods.
020017-4
FIGURE 5. New precedence diagram with two in-house workstations.
The concept of beveling fixture that substitutes the previous manual work is easily clamp the knife product
as it has to be processed by grinding machine. It consists of two clamps for the left and right side of the
product. Figure 6 (A) demonstrates the product is clamped, (B) shows it has a certain angle for each surface, and
(C) shows the function of such fixture to carry out the process. The operator should push the clamped product that
are held by a moveable slider into the grinding work area, back and forth.
(A) (B) (C)

FIGURE 6. The Beveling Fixture: (A) sub unit of clamping system, (B) the clamps provide the necessary product angles, and
(C) the total unit that consists of two sub unit of sliders.
Impacts and Benefits

The substitution in the out-house process of the first task (a) from using laser cut with wire cut machine
could reduce the operation time from 60 to 39.26 minutes. Though it does not influence in-house operation
system, it could reduce the process cost for process (a). In addition, the substitution of the machine could omit
the truing process (b) , that will reduce the cost as well. Furthermore, using additional grinding fixture for
beveling (c) process could guarantee the uniformity of knife angles that also diminish the operator¶V skills, and
the cycle time of in-house process system could be shortened from 855 into 420 minutes. Moreover, the
productivity could also be seenfrom the production of 9 (nine) units/operator/month into 20 units per two
operators in a month or approximately 10 units/operator/month.
CONCLUSIONS
This study examined a small scale industry that produces several kinds of knife that intends to increase its
capacity due to the challenge of the market demand, by observing the idea of profiling (a) and beveling (c) as
two processes that could be improved or changed. The main conclusions are: the substitution of the first
process (a) from using laser cut with wire cut machine could reduce the operation time from 60 min to 39.26
min, since the poor surface quality and insufficient surface hardness resulted from the characteristic of laser
cut machine process could be eliminated. Therefore, the beveling process (b) is not required due to previous
process could generate adequate quality surface and hardness resulted from wire cut machine. It also affected
the cycle time of process system that could be shortened from 855 to 420 min. In addition, the additional
grinding fixture in beveling process (c) could guarantee the uniformity of product angles and diminish the
dependency upon the operatorV¶ skill. Moreover, the productivity could also be seen by comparing 9 (nine)
units/operator/month into 20 units per two operators in a month or approximately 10 units/operator/month.
020017-5
REFERENCES
1. Kuntjojo, Metodologi Penelitian, 2009, https://ebekunt.files.wordpress.com/2009/04/metodologi-
penelitian.pdf, Accessed in July 2016, pp. 16.
2. E. Heryanto, Manajemen Produksi & Operasi (Grasindo, 1999), pp. 290-294.
3. J. Heizer & B. Render, Operations Management (Prentice Hall, 2006), pp. 350-353.
020017-6
Revenue management for foodstuff production to secure domestic supply in Indonesia
Ibnu Hisyam

Revenue Management for Foodstuff Production to Secure
Domestic Supply in Indonesia
Ibnu Hisyam
Industrial Engineering Department, Industrial Technology Faculty, Sepuluh Nopember Institute of

Technology, Indonesia
Corresponding author: ibnuhisyam@gmail.com
Abstract. This paper describes the application of revenue management in government services to ensure sufficient
domestic supply of food in Indonesia. The use of this approach means that the government runs a specific effort to
radically be able to solve the core problem. The resources for domestic food production are owned by more than 26
million families of farmers and more than 4 thousands agricultural companies. To achieve the expected quantity of
foodstuff supplies, a special effort needs to take into account the profit for producers in allocating the resources at
an appropriate level. With revenue management, the price of foodstuff to ensure adequate domestic supply to a
certain level of productivity can be known. In this context, the price may be reduced if there is an increase in
productivity. For this purpose, the supply curve and the demand-supply equilibrium of foodstuff have been
modeled and specific government programs to increase productivity were formulated. One important finding here
is that the macroeconomic policy of the government can be integrated to a microeconomic policy of foodstuff
producers for one or more certain objectives.
INTRODUCTION
In Indonesia, the government subsidizes the cost of inputs for foodstuff production. The real reason of
subsidizing is difficult to ascertain. Economically, it shows their fiscal policy incentives to increase domestic
food supply from its normal quantity. Imports volume of foodstuff, such as corn and rice, continued to rise
until 2016. Input subsidies that have been granted have not been able to secure sufficient domestic supplies.
From 2012 until now, the amount of subsidy decreases as the government's fiscal burden becomes heavier on
foreign debt payment. In addition, the low cost as an incentive to use more resource is not always enough.
Profitability of production per unit of input definitely affects the increase in quantity of product supply [1].
Therefore, efforts to ensure a sufficient domestic supply require a more effective approach. Revenue
management is more promising as a holistic approach to optimize revenue and profit generation [2].
Revenue management is interpreted as a form of capacity management where demand and supply are
managed by manipulation of the duration of use and price. For the production of foodstuff, duration of use
associated with large production capacity and duration of use of production factors, particularly land, to reach
a production volume or supply quantity are pursued. In Indonesia, the complexity of the problem is due to the
existence of multiple authorities involved. The owner authorizes the use of capacity, large and ever, there are
26 million households of farmers and more than 4 thousands agricultural companies, which are legal (Report
of the Agricultural Census by Central Bureau of Statistic, 2013). In a perfect market competition structure,
actual price depends on the level of equilibrium of supply and demand in existing markets. The government
becomes the owner of the pricing authority because of its market intervention power and decision on import-
export license.
Dealing with food, the demand is definitely relative to the amount and socio-economic condition of the
population. The adequacy of supply quantity is adjusted to the demand quantity. The authority controls price
and fiscal policy of the government can be used to manage foodstuff to ensure the adequacy of domestic
supply. This situation provides an opportunity for applying revenue management on non-traditional service
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020018-1–020018-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985463
020018-1
industry (other than airlines, hotels, and travel), which includes the government services. If the government
succeeds in creating conditions for foodstuff production businesses at the level of expected return, the
producers will use the production capacity as needed. The objective of this paper is to formulate programs for
the government to achieve foodstuff production business conditions that ensure adequate domestic supply in
Indonesia in accordance with climate change. To achieve this goal, several issues need to be solved. The first
is the determination of the adequacy of domestic supply corresponding to request using revenue management
approach for the next five years. The second is determination of the selling price of foodstuff s. The third is
determination of the foodstuff supply curve to represent the willingness of Indonesian foodstuff producers. The
fourth is preparation of programs to improve the productivity of existing production facilities in order to
ensure sufficient domestic supply. The last is an economic evaluation of the proposed programs. To get the
focus of discussion, foodstuff referred to in this article is limited only to paddy.
Following this introduction, a literature review mainly related to revenue management problem-solving
framework used in this paper is presented. The next section presents the data and methodology employed. The
results of data analysis are used as a basis for withdrawing conclusions and suggesting the possibilities for
conducting future research. The proposed methodology is described in the next section. To close this paper,
some conclusions of this study have been presented.
LITERATURE REVIEW AND RESEARCH FRAMEWORK
In operation management, study on revenue management has been growing and developing at a mature
rate. The scope of research field and problem solving cases increasingly spreads and study variables also
deepen. The results of a literature review that will be shown in this paper cover the field of travel and
hospitality agency. The depth of the variables also shows consumer behavior and upfront demand. Review of
research scope and utilization of revenue management for solving problems are shown here.
Inspired by [2], this paper will use revenue management in non-traditional field, in addition to airline and
hotel services, that is government services. These government services are aimed at providing public services
to the foodstuff producers to earn a decent income and provide foodstuffs with secure supply and acceptable
prices. Therefore, the framework of problem solving will be discussed as a revenue management for foodstuff
production enterprises to ensure sufficient domestic supply in Indonesia.
Current Revenue Management
Reference [2] evaluated major developments in revenue management (RM) in the past decade and
discussed the challenges and prospects for research. They noted that there are nine themes emerging:
management of hotels revenue in total, analysis of major data, tariff integrity, distribution, relationship
between marketing strategies and RM, the impact of social media on RM, RM system, application of RM in
non-traditional service sector, and education and training on RM. This development has had extensive
practical implications of RM and creates anticipation for continued studies on topics related to hospitality and
tourism.
Chan & Guillet [3] implemented revenue management (RM) for a travel agency. This study explored the
relevancy of RM in business management of a travel agency. Travel agency sector shares it with traditional
RM users such as airline and hospitality industry. Travel agents have the potential to enhance revenue by
applying various RM techniques. There are Limitations to effort to implement RM in travel agents such as lack
of knowledge. Only large travel agents who are able to apply RM can boost their business profits.
References [4,5] have applied RM in the manufacturing sector. The first author group directed efforts to
develop strategies to improve operational innovative RM and profit level. The second group of authors applied
RM on the type of manufacturing industry-specific make-to-order. The production facilities produce a wide
variety of products offered in an environment with high fluctuations in demand and profit.
Framework for Problem Solving
In Revenue management approaches to foodstuff production to secure sufficient domestic supply in

Indonesia and increase production, there is no need to own a new land. Forest conversion for the sake of new
020018-2
land acquisition as planned by the Ministry of Agriculture of the Republic of Indonesia (Ministry of
Agriculture in 2015-2019 Strategic Plan) can be avoided. Expansion to ensure adequate supplies could be
driven by increasing profitability of land allocation for production of foodstuff. When the balance in land use
between food crops has been formed, increasing supply quantity or offer can be done without additional land
allocation. Increased productivity can be achieved through intense research and continuous development of
varieties breeding and special efforts in socialization, for example, to more than 80% of farm era.
Let P be the profit of foodstuff production per hectare (IDR / ha). Respectively, R, p, c, q, and FC are
revenue (IDR), selling price (IDR / kg), production cost (IDR / kg), minimum amount of sales for the price p
(kg / ha) and FC (IDR) is fixed production cost. Those Variables are shown in the following formula:
P = R-FC-TF«
Or
P = qp-qc-FC
P = q (p-c) ±FC................................................... (2)
In the matter of basic foodstuff, the value of p- should be maintained at prices that are the equilibrium
between FRQVXPHUV¶ acceptance and producers. Agricultural Department puts special efforts to improve
foodstuff marketing network and give hope to achieve p-value. So there is a surge in the quantity of deals since
harvest does not drop the product price.
Equation 2 shows that the expected benefits can be achieved when q wanted by producers is implemented.
Small producers of staple foods in Indonesia voiced out their concerns in facing climate change. This is not the
crop failure insurance is important, but the government support on effective production through superiority of
plant varieties and sophisticated production technology is applied extensively. Moreover, this effort can
increase the value of q, which will also increase the value of P.
Maximum value of P can be reached at dP / dq = 0 for each value of q. it means that the value of the
highest profit can be obtained by the foodstuff producers at p = c, where selling price is equal to production
cost or normal profit, which is also called as zero profit. Because the costs that are covered in the equation are
the economic costs or opportunity costs, investment profits have been taken into account. So if the sales price
(p) = cost of production (c), allocating resources to produce as much as q will achieve maximum profit. This
situation is similar to marginal cost (MC) = marginal revenue (MR).
Problem solving framework for government services using revenue management to support the production
of staple food to secure sufficient domestic supply in Indonesia can be structured as follows:
1. Align the quantity of foodstuff demand with the responsible party planning institutionally.
2. Create supply curve that describes the behavior of food producers in Indonesia in relation to the
quantity of supply at the expected price.
3. Develop special efforts required from the government services to ensure the availability of domestic
foodstuff supply as part of fiscal policy without the need to own new land.
METHODOLOGY
Constrains to efforts in ensuring adequate domestic supply of staple foods, such as rice and corn in
Indonesia, include: quantity of domestic consumer demand, consumer acceptable price, and normal profit on
the quantity offered by producers to meet consumer demand. Government power in changing the price by
controlling the quantity of total supply puts the government in the position as both, owner and ruler of food
supply system. Producers as the owner, allocation of production factors to produce certain foodstuff only
follows signals from the existing system in the form of allocation of profit forecast. Foodstuff that provide
greater benefits will get a larger allocation of resources as well.
020018-3
To ensure steps to achieve the goal, Figure 1 shows relationship between variables relevant to the adequacy
of domestic supply in Indonesia. Meanwhile, Figure 2 shows in more detail the process and relevant variables
that affect foodstuff production.
Revenue management in government services is focused on the use of the state budget to ensure the selling
or purchasing price of foodstuffs to stay attractive for producers and accepted by consumers. revenue
management system needs to be built and maintained in line with sustainability of food needs and availability
of important sources for farmers livelihood .
FIGURE 1. Influence Diagram of Resources Allocation Change for a Foodstuff
FIGURE 2 Influence Diagram of Productivity increasing process in foodstuff production business
In Revenue Management for government services, demand for foodstuff D (Fi) (i: 1, 2, .... n; for example
i= 1 is rice) is an external variable. The agreed sales quantity of foodstuff S (Fi) is an internal variable for the
government, which can be controlled by foodstuff production. Productivity determines the quantity of
production and production costs, which leads to an increased income for producers. So, the success of the
government in increasing the productivity of foodstuff production can improve the capacity to ensure
sufficient supply in the country. When productivity exceed as increase in demand, it will open up the
possibility of a price decrease to provide more of basic foodstuff for the society.
Technical and management aspects to increase productivity of food crops that can influence the production
of foodstuff obviously still require follow-up. Follow-up is needed, such as socialization of findings from
research and development center and ease of access to production facilities for more than 26 million producers
that are spread all over Indonesia, which consists of thousands of islands. Therefore, Figure 2 shows special
020018-4
programs to increase productivity, the results of each program, and the relationship of the program and the
variables that lead to increased productivity.
Implementation of special efforts to increase productivity in a sustainable manner can be arranged in a
revenue management system. Any related activity can be determined by its budget size and results and by
reduction of production costs or increased revenue without increasing selling prices. The success of the
program continues to be able to lower prices without reducing producer revenue due to productivity that
exceeded the growth in demand.
Fiscal policy for government services such as these can be measured for their economic value. The use of
budget productively will ensure the adequacy of domestic supply. The volume of rice production in 2019 is
projected to be 82 million tons (Development Plan of Ministry of Agriculture 2015-2019), for example, an
unusually large volume. Special efforts have been held to increase productivity with cost reduction target of
IDR 100 / kg, so it can lower the cost of basic foodstuff of IDR 8.2 trillion.
For problem-solving framework in Step 1, harmonized demand of foodstuff is made with reference to what
is already planned by the authorities, namely the Ministry of Agriculture of the Republic of Indonesia in
Strategic Plan 2015-2019. For basic foodstuff such as paddy, corn, peanuts, soybeans, and sugarcane, target
has been projected following the domestic demand. For harmonization, this paper will use the results of those
projections.
To get a supply curve, secondary data published by the Central Bureau of Statistics of the Republic of
Indonesia, which is specified according to the province's productivity per hectare of land, land area, and index
of farmers payment. The index value paid by farmers is used to estimate the unit cost of production per
foodstuff. The survey of production costs on the author only in East Java province. Setting the adjustment fee
for index in eastern Java to be equal to 100, then the cost of production in each province can be estimated from
the survey results, which is multiplied by the index value adjustment costs.
The total production of each province for all crops can be calculated from land productivity multiplied by
land area. If within one year there are two planting seasons, total production will be multiplied by 2 assuming
no reduction in productivity and no increase in costs.
Total cost and total production in each province can be calculated as the total cost per unit. They are sorted
from the total cost per unit in order from the smallest to the largest. Next, total production is needed.
Production costs recorded normal profit has included the production of foodstuff; the amount of the total cost
per unit can be equated to the selling price equilibrium. At that price, quantity of deals wanted by the producer
can be estimated. For example, if the total cost per unit (kg) is equal to IDR 5000, it corresponds to the total
production of 70 million tons of paddy, and the price can be expected to supply the domestic as well by 70
million tons. If it is the quantity of domestic consumer demand, means that the situation existing on sufficient
supply of domestic conditions.
Economic evaluation for special efforts to increase productivity through fiscal policy can be determined by
a cost benefit analysis. The budget for the overall implementation of the program includes cost. The decline in
food costs and the added benefit for society benefit producers. The ratio of costs and benefits can be used as
the basis to assess economy program.
In resolving the public issue, the deal is very important to achieve and be adhered. In relation to the needs
of food, this paper refers to the Ministry of Agriculture¶V Strategic Plan 2015 to 2019. Data processing and
presentation of the results is limited only to paddy. Prediction Results of the need of paddy production is
shown in Table 1.
Table 1. Estimated Demand for Rice Production 2015-2019
Year 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Demand for Production (tons) 73,445,034 76,226,000 78,132,000 80,085,000 82,078,000
Source: Ministry of Agriculture Strategic Plan 2015-2019
020018-5
From data available, both primary and secondary, paddy supply curve in Indonesia can be obtained. The
curve is a marginal cost curve that depends on cost variables [6]. The quantity that will be produced by the
producers corresponds to the sale price. The supply curve obtained is shown in Fig. 3.
FIGURE 3 Supply Curve of Paddy Production in Indonesia -actual and predicted
The regression equation between the price per unit (p) and the quantity of deals (q) in accordance with the
data is shown in Equation 3:
p = 2784.39 + 3.43 x 10-5 q .................................. (3)
8VLQJDFRQILGHQFHOHYHOĮ WKHFDOFXODWLRQUHVXOWV in t_= 17.07 for a constant or a cut-off point

to the axis p or q = 0 and 11.48 for the coefficient q. At 32 degrees of freedom, the value of the t test is 1.96.
So, the constant value and q coefficient are significantly different from zero with 95% confidence level.
Using Equation 3, adequacy of domestic supply in 2017 should be78.132 million tons of paddy or milled
rice at selling price of IDR 5440.89 / kg (Fig. 4). When efforts to increase productivity succeed in reducing
10% production costs, sufficient domestic supply can be reached at producers¶ selling price of IDR 4896.80 /
kg. Decrease costs can reach IDR 540 / kg. At national demand-supply quantity in2017, direct economic
values of the success of efforts to increase productivity can reach more than IDR 42 trillion in 1 year.
Researchers in [7] have indicated a positive effect on government spending outside of subsidizing the cost
of inputs to the availability of domestic rice. Specific allocation of government spending to increase
productivity of rice production will have a positive influence to increase certain domestic foodstuff supply.
The big difference in productivity that reaches 35.91 quintals per hectare between West Java (the highest)
and Bangka Belitung Islands (the lowest) shows the magnitude of the opportunities difference.in productivity
improvement With the eligibility criteria for allocation of fiscal Benefit Cost Ratio (BCR) 3, a special effort
for productivity improvement can be budgeted at IDR 14 trillion (IDR 42/3) every year. Comprehensive and
integrated special programs need to be formulated. A break of the chain will negate the expected results. For
programs that have been shown in the diagram to be able to influence productivity (Figure 2), increased
foodstuff production needs to be programmed and executed thoroughly in balance. Microclimate as a
determinant of productivity will be faced with sufficient adaptability.
020018-6
FIGURE 4 Producer Price to Adequate Domestic Supply Indonesia 2017.
CONCLUSION
Application of revenue management on foodstuff production business to ensure sufficient domestic
supply in Indonesia can work effectively through government services. Government services in the form of
special efforts to maintain food prices at levels acceptable to consumers and provide normal profits for
producers through increased productivity of production factors. In situations of compelling advantages,
millions of small-scale producers and thousands of companies will allocate resources to meet the needs of
domestic supply. Domestic supply can even be greater if specialized efforts succeed in achieving valuable
productivity. The success of the special efforts depends on the implementation of a comprehensive and
integrated program needed for continuous budget allocations to respond to climate change. In addition, this
study also demonstrated the possibility of integrating macroeconomic policy in the hands of the government
and the microeconomics of the owners of production factors in a wider national interest (e.g. food security).
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The authors are grateful to the Department of Industrial Engineering and Industrial Technology, Sepuluh
November Institute of Technology Surabaya for their help.
REFERENCES
1. R. G. Lipsey, P. O. Steiner, D. D. Purvis, and P. N. Courant, in Economics, Edited by D. Conte (Harper

Collin Publishers, Singapore, 1990) p. 231.
2. X. L. Wang, C.Y. Heo, Z. Schwartz, P. Legoherel & F. Specklin, Frédéric Specklin, J. Travel & Tourism
Marketing 1-15, (2015).
3. G. S. H. Chan, & B. D. Guillet. "Implementing Revenue Management for Travel Agencies." Journal of
Management and Sustainability 5.4 (2015): 17.
4. S. H. Cheraghi, M. Dadashzadeh, and P. Venkitachalam, J. B &Ec. Research 63-72,268(2010).
5. A. Hintsches, T. S. Spengler, T. Volling, K. Wittek, and G. Priegnitz, Business Research Official Open
Access Journal of VHB 173-190, Volum 3 Issue 2 Nov. (2010).
020018-7
6. R.Lipsey and A.Chrystal, Economics (Oxford Univ. Press Inc., New York, 2011), p.215.
7. Zakiah, R.Masbar, M.N. Syechalat, and S.Syahnur, Int. J. Cont. Appl. Sci. 170-182, Vol. 3
N.2,www.ijcas.net, (2016).
020018-8
Synthesis of silica gel from waste glass bottles and its application for the reduction of
free fatty acid (FFA) on waste cooking oil
Wisnu Arfian A. Sudjarwo and Mei Magdayanti F. Bee


Synthesis of Silica Gel from Waste Glass Bottles and Its
Application for the Reduction of Free Fatty Acid (FFA) on
Waste Cooking Oil
Wisnu Arfian A. Sudjarwo1, a) and Mei Magdayanti F. Bee1
1
Engineering Faculty of Universitas Setia Budi, Jl. Letjen Sutoyo Mojosongo Surakarta 57127, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: wisnuarfian@gmail.com
Abstract. Synthesis of silica gel from waste glass bottles was conducted with aims to characterize the product and to
analyze its application forthe reduction of free fatty acid (FFA) on waste cooking oil. Silica source taken from waste
glass bottles was synthesized into silica gel by using the sol-gel method. Several types of silica gel were produced with
three different weight ratios of waste glass and sodium hydroxide as an extractor. They were: 1:1, 1:2, and 1:3. The
results indicated that synthesized silica possessed morphology innano-sizedranging from 85 nm to 459 nm. Adsorption
performance was investigated by a batch system atthe temperature between 70oC and 110oC by a range of 10oC in an
hour. Analysis of the adsorption characteristic showed that the highest efficiency value of FFA reduction of 91% was
obtained by silica gel with ratiosof 1:1 (SG 1) and 1:3 (SG 3). Their performances were also followed by the decline of
the refractive index and the density of waste cooking oil.
INTRODUCTION
The mostabundant element of waste glass was silicon dioxide with an amount of more than 70% from the total
mass [1]. In fact, this waste can be recycledinto silica gel that is well-known as a good adsorbent. Initiated by silica
extraction and followed by hydrolysis and condensation, the formation of silica gel can be conducted at all
temperatures. However, hydrolysis and condensation arethe driving forces that determine the characteristic of
colloidal system of silica gel, either on polar solvent or non-polar solvent. Subsequently, polymerization will be
affected by pH and its solvent that related to the rate of hydrolysis and condensation reaction. Both of them will be
corresponded to the stability. There are three types of stability for colloidal systems,namelyphase stability, stability
of disperse composition, and aggregative stability [2].
Silica can be found on the synthesized compound,and also from waste product and natural resources such as
paddy husk, with an abundance of more than 94% [3], quartz by 55% to 99% [4], olivine by 93 to 99% [5] and
volcanic ash with approximately 52% until 60% [6].In addition, sodium or potassium hydroxide is frequently an
extractor of silica before it is transformed into silica gel.
The repeated use of cooking oil tends to oxidize unsaturated fatty acid andleads to the occurrenceof hydrolysis
reaction that produces either free fatty acid or peroxide. Free Fatty Acid (FFA) is formed due to the oil
hydrolysis,normally, at an increase from <0.1% to 0.8%. Fatty acid is more volatile than glycerides, and hence;
smoke, flash, and fire points of oil decrease and the FFA content in oil increases. As aconsequence,free fatty acid
(FFA) can be one of the parameters to measure the quality of cooking oil [7]. The FFA is among undesirable
constituent to be removed and thus its low percentage enhances the efficiency of the refining process [8].
Silica gel is a good and safe adsorbent so that it is widely used to refine and purify edible oil as an alternative
ofcausticadding. It also possesses a porous structure with nano-scale particles that can be produced by using several
methods such as sol-gel [9], precipitation [10], plasma [11], combustion [12], CVD [13], and so on. Silicate
produced from natural or waste product is potential to be used in a variety application, i.e., purification of oil
treatment. Some researches regarding with the reduction of FFA indicated thatthe studies of the adsorption
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020019-1–020019-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985464
020019-1
performance of waste cooking oil is a very critical and it is necessary to develop the refinement and purificationof
waste cooking oil for other relevant projects [14].
The purposes of this study were to (a) synthesizethe silica gel based on waste glass, (b) demonstrate the
performance of silica gel produced from waste glass in reducing the FFA of waste cooking oil.
EXPERIMENTAL SECTION
Materials
Waste glass bottles were collected from a mini shop near the campus are of Universitas Setia Budi Surakarta and
waste cooking oil was also purchased from nearby. Reagents of NaOH, KOH, HCl, and Ethanol were purchased
from Merck in analytical grade.
Instruments
Instrumental devices which were used for the preparation or characterization of silica gel including pH meter
(Lovibond), Magnetic Heater (Yellow Line), FTIR spectrometer (Shimadzu Prestidge-21), XRF (Thermo Fisher),
and SEM-EDX (JED-2300/JEOL).
Procedure
Synthesis of Silica Gel. Silica was extracted from waste glass bottles by using sodium hydroxide. The process
was performed byusing several ratios (w/w) between waste glass and sodium hydroxide, whichwere: 1:1 (SG 1), 1:2
(SG 2), and 1:3 (SG 3), respectively. The mixtureswere heated at 900oC in the furnace for 3 (three) hours.
Afterward, the mixture was dissolved in water. The addition of hydrochloride acid 2 M was done to obtain gel with
stirring condition. Agitation was used for a day. This solution was filtered until neutral condition.
Characterization of Silica Gel. Silica gels produced from sol-gel method were characterized by FT-IR to
evaluate the functional groups, XRF to determine the elements content of silica gel, and SEM was used to
investigate the morphology of silica surface
Adsorption Performance. Waste cooking oil (25 g) was absorbed by produced silica gel (250 mg) in several
temperatures, namely: 70oC, 80oC, 90oC, 100oC, and 110oC for 60 minutes. Oil samples were collected for the
analysis of FFA, density, and refractive index measurement.
FFA value, density and refractive index.The FFA content of waste cooking oil pre-adsorption oil and post-
adsorption product were testedby using SNI methods. It was also used to determinethe density and refractive index.
The value of FFA was calculated as oleic acid by a formula as follows [15]:
9.2+[1.2+[
))$ (1)
0
Where V. KOH represents the volume of KOH required for titration, N. KOH is a concentration of KOH, and M is
the mass of the sample.

Silica Gel Contents. The characteristics of silica gel were analyzed by employing XRF instrument and FTIR.
Structural features of silica surface weredemonstrated in the FTIR spectra (Fig. 1). All silica gels showed identical
structural features. The major absorbance peak was between 1100 cm-1 and 1400 cm-1 due to the siloxane bonds in
silica gels [1, 2]. The ±OH stretching and bending vibrations resulted from the moisture of silica gel appeared as
broad bands of >3000cm-1 and 1750cm-1 to 2100 cm-1, respectively [7]. Wavenumber below 900 cm-1 was skeletal
network vibration of silica gel.
020019-2
FIGURE 1. FT-IR spectra of silica gel with several weight ratios.
The XRF instrument was also used to determine the level of the content of silica gel compound. The content of
silica gel is shown in Table 1. The entire produced silica gels containedmore than 90% of silica (SiO2) as the main
compound which was extracted from waste glass. Other compounds mixed in silica could be acquired from either
extraction or polymerization process. Nevertheless, the highest proportion of silica was more dominant in binding
with FFA inadsorption process.The treatment of hydrochloride acid also had an effect in increasing the impurity of
silica gel. It can be seen from the appearance of Cl element in silica gel compoundsas shown in Table 1.
TABLE 1.The contents ofthe surface of silica gelcompound

Compound SG 1 (%) SG 2 (%) SG 3 (%)
SiO2 92.23 93.18 93.05
P2O5 1.92 1.97 1.96
SO3 1.42 1.44 1.33
Al2O3 1.40 1.26 1.58
Cl 1.32 1.36 1.26
CaO 0.82 0.5 0.61
Fe2O3 0.7 0.2 0.08
Silica morphology. Silica surface was investigated by using SEM as it can be seen in Fig. 2. According to the
figure, there were clear boundaries among the particles as they showed amorphous form. SEM-data confirmed that
the size of particles of the synthesizedsilica gel was in nano-range of 85 ± 459 nm.Most of the agglomerated
particles had similar form even though they were amorphous.
FFA Reduction. The values of FFA in the pre- and post-adsorption were calculated. Deviation value was the
adsorption efficiency resulted from the adsorption performance of silica gel. As it can be seen in Fig. 3, the
fluctuated trend of FFA reduction was indicated in the post-adsorption in waste cooking oil. Most of adsorption
performances presented their high efficiency as shown by their percentages, which were higher than 70%, with the
initial FFA content in the pre-adsorption of 1.4592. The optimum condition was achieved at a temperature of 100oC.
The highest percentage of FFA adsorption reached by SG 1 and SG 3 with a percentage of 91%. However, the
adsorption of FFA at the temperatures of 80 oC and 110oC declined significantly. At a temperature of 110 oC, the
adsorption percentage declined insignificantly after it was reduced into 87% due to the enhanced mass production of
FFA in relation with the increase of temperature.
020019-3
FIGURE 2. The morphology of produced silica gel.
100
95
Adsorption percentage (%)
90
85
80
75 SG 1
70 SG 2
65 SG 3
60
55
50
60 70 80 90 100 110 120
Temperature (centigrade)
FIGURE 3. Adsorption performance of various produced silica gels in reducing FFA content.
Density. According to Table 2, several density properties increased in accordance to the increaseof temperature
except for oil adsorbed by silica gel with a ratio of 1:2 which indicatedaoxidative deterioration in the sample [16].
Oxidation of unsaturated fatty acid produced saturated fatty acid that ledto higher density of cooking oil.
Nevertheless, the results of this study showed fluctuated trends.Changing patterns occurred after the adsorption. The
trends illustrated that at a temperature of 100oC, the density of waste cooking oil decreased in compared with the
density of the temperatures of 90oC and 110oC. It indicated the adsorption of FFA is associated with the changing
patterns of density.
Refractive Index. Refractive index is the ratio between the light velocity on free air and the medium. The higher
the value of refractive index, the lower the value of density of medium because the light easily flows in low density
of material. Refractive index should have a correlation with the density of the medium. Trends of refractive index
can be seen in Table 3. The results presented different trends and had an insignificant correlation with the density of
the medium because in addition to the density, they were also affected the content of the compound in cooking oil to
form refractive index.
020019-4
TABLE 2. Density of waste cooking oil after adsorption by silica gel
Temperatures SG 1 (g/mL) SG 2 (g/mL SG 3 (g/mL)
70oC 0.799 0.823 0.855
80oC 0.861 0.832 0.857
90oC 0.875 0.840 0.840
100oC 0.839 0.849 0.856
110oC 0.866 0.853 0.859
TABLE 3. Refractive index of waste cooking oil after the adsorption by silica
gel
Temperature SG 1 SG 2 SG 3
70oC 1.4689 1.4691 1.4691
80oC 1.4689 1.4691 1.4690
90oC 1.4687 1.4691 1.4690
100oC 1.4683 1.4689 1.4689
110oC 1.4683 1.4688 1.4689
Oil spectra. Characterization of oilin the pre-adsorption and post-adsorption were analyzed by FTIR test. FTIR
spectra illustratedthe functional groups of oils in general. As shown in Fig. 4, some of ±OH contents on wavenumber
of 3500cm-1 - 4000cm-1 were successfully reduced. Consequently, other functional groups indicated that they
hadhigher intensity in the post-adsorption than in the pre-adsorption, for examples, ±CO at 1600 cm-1and ±CH2- at
2900cm-1.
FIGURE 4. The spectra of pre-adsorption and post-adsorption oil
CONCLUSIONS
Inthisstudy, synthesis silica gel was successfully produced. Subsequently, it can be prepared and used to purify or to
refine waste cooking oil, both for its characteristic and its performance. The highest performance of FFA reduction
was achieved at an hour adsorption ata temperature of 100oC by the ratios of 1:1 and 1:3, which was 91%. It was
also related to the changing patterns of the density and refractive index properties.
020019-5
REFERENCES
1. A. Abdul-Aziz, Proceeding of the National Seminar on Palm Oil Milling, Refining Technology, Quality and
Environment, Malaysia, 79 ± 88 (2000).
2. A. Lazaro, G. Quercia, and H. J. H. Brouwers, Proceeding of International Conference on Non-Traditional
Cement and Concrete, pp. 143 ± 146 (2014).
3. E. L. Foletto, G. Ederson, H. Leonardo,and J. Sergio, Material Research, 9 (3), pp. 335 ± 338 (2006).
4. F. Fairus, Haryono, M. H. Sugito, and A. Sudrajat, JurnalTeknik Kimia Indonesia, 8 (2), pp. 56 ± 62 (2009).
5. H. D. Jang, Powder Technol., 119, pp. 102 ± 108 (2001).
6. J. T. Nwabanne and F. C. Ekwu, IJSME, 4(1), 20 ± 25 (2013).
7. N. Awaji, S. Ohkubo, T. Nakanishi, T. Aoyama, Y. Sugita, K. Takasaki, and S. Komiya, Appl. Phys. Lett., 71,
pp. 1954 ± 1956 (1997).
8. N.J. Coleman, Q. Li, and A. Raza, Physicochemical Problems of Mineral Processing, 50, pp. 5-16 (2013).
9. P. K. Jal, M. Sudarshan, A. Saha, S. Patel, and B. K. Mishra, Colloids Surf. A., 240, pp. 173 ± 178 (2004).
10. P. R. Pinto, L. C. Mendes, M. L. Dias, C. Azuma, Colloid Polym. Sci., 284, pp. 529 ± 535 (2006).
11. P. S. Vankar and R. S. Sahu, EJEAFChe, 10(4), 2065-2074 (2011).
12. R. M. Bheemreddy, M. S. Chinnan, K. S. Pannu and A. E. Reynolds, J. Food Sci., 67(4), 1478-1484 (2002).
13. U. Kalapathy and A. Proctor, JAOCS, 77 (6), pp. 593-598 (2000).
14. V. Jafari and A. Allahverdi, Int. J. Nanosci. Nanotechnol. 10 (3), pp. 145 ± 152 (2014).
15. W. A. A. Sudjarwo, I. Y. M. Wibowo, and D. Kresnadipayana, Prosiding Seminar Nasional Teknologi Kimia,
Industri dan Informasi, Universitas Setia Budi Surakarta, pp. 148 ± 158 (2015).
16. X. L. Wu, S. Tong, X. N. Liu, X. M. Bao, S. S. Jiang, D. Feng, and G. G. Siu, Appl. Phys. Lett., 70, pp. 838 ±
840 (1997).
020019-6
Manufacturing process design for multi commodities in agriculture
Yudha Prasetyawan and Andrian Henry Santosa

Manufacturing Process Design for Multi Commodities in
Agriculture
Yudha Prasetyawan1, a) and Andrian Henry Santosa1, b)
1
Industrial Engineering Department, Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember Surabaya, Indonesia. Kampus ITS
Keputih Sukolilo Surabaya, Indonesia 60111.
a)
Corresponding authors: yudhaprase@gmail.com
b)
andrian_henry@ymail.com.
Abstract. High-potential commodities within particular agricultural sectors should be accompanied by maximum benefit
value that can be attained by both local farmers and business players. In several cases, the business players are small-
medium enterprises (SMEs) which have limited resources to perform added value process of the local commodities into
the potential products. The weaknesses of SMEs such as the manual production process with low productivity, limited
capacity to maintain prices, and unattractive packaging due to conventional production. Agricultural commodity is
commonly created into several products such as flour, chips, crackers, oil, juice, and other products. This research was
initiated by collecting data by interview method particularly to obtain the perspectives of SMEs as the business players.
Subsequently, the information was processed based on the Quality Function Deployment (QFD) to determine House of
Quality from the first to fourth level. A proposed design as the result of QFD was produced and evaluated with
Technology Assessment Model (TAM) and continued with a revised design. Finally, the revised design was analyzed
with financial perspective to obtain the cost structure of investment, operational, maintenance, and workers. The machine
that performs manufacturing process, as the result of revised design, was prototyped and tested to determined initial
production process. The designed manufacturing process offers IDR 337,897, 651 of Net Present Value (NPV) in
comparison with the existing process value of IDR 9,491,522 based on similar production input.
INTRODUCTION
Nowadays, the agricultural commodities are processed with automation system to obtain their derivative
products. The objective is to increase the production capacity and to shorten the lead time from the initial process
into the customers. Furthermore, the hygienee of the processes of harvesting, handling, processing, and packaging
becomes a compulsory as expected by the customers. Thus, an efficient and clean production process of agriculture-
based products must be the ultimate goal of manufacturing process design.
The conversion of large scale and mass production into flexible multi-product manufacturing has become
common as the business competition is getting tighter. The condition will lead to the uncertainty of product demand
so that in many occasions, an industry should change their products to meet the customers’ expectation. Multi
commodities manufacturing process (MCMP) design should consider the nature of the process itself which can be
considered similar to a general purpose of machine design. In this design, classification of workpieces and choice of
machines [1] are the basic analysis to step into the further design. A survey was involved to show the expected
properties for MCMP regarding with individualization of business, increased variety, price competition, enhanced
quality requirements, and increased demands on delivery [2]. In order to produce MCMP, Additive Manufacturing
concept was adapted to extend the capabilities and to reduce manufacturing cost. The basic product can be modified
into a complex product by employing additional process and/or some additional functions into an existing product.
This change can be stated as manufacturing-driven design strategy or function-driven design strategy [3]. An
axiomatic design approach can also be used to enhance the flexibility by seeking the possibility of producing
different products by using the existing manufacturing process, integrating diverse technologies, employing the
workers in different workstations, and reducing changeover in product changes [4]. In the end, an assessment of
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020020-1–020020-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985465
020020-1
material flow should be conducted to ensure that the cycle time of each product with different process combination
can be determined based on setup time, processing time and handling time [5].
The proposed MCMP design was arranged in the area of Mountain Kelud – Ngancar, Kediri, East Java Province,
Indonesia. This area is well-known as a center for the commodities of pineapple, rice, sweet potatoes, corn,
tomatoes, Morinda citrifolia or called noni, coffee, and a small amount of ginger with the total output approximately
145,686,300 kg per year or 399,140 kg per day. If a local SME can gain approximately 10 kg per day, thus this area
requires 39,914 SMEs. However, in a normal business activity, those commodities are directly distributed to local
markets or other regions with high number customers or industries. Local SMEs obtain only less than 1% of total
amount to convert the commodities into higher value of products. The issues such as the uncertainty of price,
environmental problem of transportation, and need of local economy improvement are essential so that a new
manufacturing process design has to be developed to respond the multi commodities manufacturing process as the
expectation of flexible processed commodity to cope with its newest economic value.
The purpose of this research was to design an automated manufacturing process that can improve the
productivity in a better commodities processing in terms of hygiene and waste reduction. Furthermore, multi
commodities mean that the manufacturing process should be relatively flexible to process the different commodities
without having significant set-up. It will ensure that it is not necessary to have several manufacturing processes for
the number of commodities, instead of using a single manufacturing process that can also reduce the set-up time.
LITERATURE REVIEW
The process design of MCMP was similar with common steps in other product designs, as the process also
requires a prototype to test before being produced in real production. The steps of product design and development
are mission statement, customers’ need identification, target specification, product concept design and selection,
final specification, and product development [6]. Following those steps, it is important to have economic analysis,
benchmarking, product testing and prototyping. Accompanying those steps, HOQ approach was selected as the most
appropriate method in the process of data collection to product development. This approach consisted of 4 (four)
levels as illustrated in Figure 1. An exceptional application of QFD has been detailed in the study of user analysis of
restaurant point of sales and accounting application [7], and the rank of solar energy project [8]. Subsequently, TAM
can be used to test the prototype and to obtain the customers’ perception about certain parameters such as
compatibility (COM), trust (TRU), perceived usefulness (PUS), perceived ease of use (PEU), attitude toward using
(ATU), behavioral intention to use (BIU), and actual system use (ACS) [9]. TAM has been extensively used to
evaluate products, such as e-commerce [10], sport consumption [11], business intelligence system [12], health
product [13], and digital society services [14].
FIGURE 1. The four levels of HOQ [15].
Machine design is a mature process within engineering, as the industrial revolution happens to boost the
production capacity of the previous mechanism. Within the current technology, it is important to have adaptive
control method in order to optimize machining variables during the process [16]. Optimization can have the meaning
of minimizing deflection from the targeted material such as crunching the raw material [17]. Quality inspection is
another issue, in which a human operator is likely to have a limitation in accuracy. Automatic grading using
computer vision techniques can be the answer to overcome the limitation [18]. The machine design should also
include the process of technical drawing, modeling, calculation and technical description [19]. In terms of process, a
020020-2
careful action should be performed to generate the alternatives of tools, fixtures, support tools, and experiment
towards the different type of materials [20]. The purpose of machine design should be the optimum combination of
process variables [21] and perform a faster process to finish the expected function [22].
METHODOLOGY
This research was a process of MCMP design to produce a complete stage of manufacturing process. An
observation towards the related business players as the target of the establishment of MCMP was performed
particularly to obtain the existing condition of the manufacturing process. Subsequently, in order to compile a
complete 4-level of HOQ, the business players were interviewed to identify the customers’ needs for the attributes
of the designed MCMP. The entire information regarding with the components and process transformed into the
design and prototype of MCMP and a machine to perform the manufacturing process was constructed. Furthermore,
the business players were involved to evaluate the machine prototype within the variables of TAM. The re-design
process was executed to have the better design based on the aspects in TAM and HOQ. Finally, an economic-based
analysis was carried out to obtain the accurate value of the benefit.

The expected setup activities were cleaning, modifying granular size valve intake and changing the container for
the output. The commodities were chosen carefully by the process similarity, thus rice was disregarded as the
process mostly in the hand of the end customer. Based on the process similarity and additional criteria of business
value, the commodities that have been selected for the purpose of manufacturing process design are pineapple, noni
and red ginger. These commodities have the same process of crushing, squeezing, boiling, crystallization and
grinding raw grain. The first 3 production stages are for pineapple and noni, while the overall 5 stages are for red
ginger. The initial design of MCMP is shown in Fig. 2. This is the modification of the existing system so that
different machine can be joined to perform the sequential process. In the next step, this design is evaluated
throughout the overall steps of design.
FIGURE 2. The first prototype.
QFD process was employed to acquire the customers’ perception related with their expectation for MCMP
attributes and to convert those expectation into the performance of process, tools, and supporting tools. Therefore,
the list of components was formed to ensure that the machine design covered all aspects and functions. In the
beginning, HOQ level 1 (Fig. 3) covered the expected attributes such as performance, feature, safety, etc., and their
correlation with technical requirements such as crushing speed, workload of squeezing process, etc.
020020-3
++ Legend
Θ Strong Rel a ti ons hi p - 9
++ --
Ο Modera te Rel a ti ons hi p - 3
++ -- ++ ▲ Wea k Rel a ti ons hi p - 1
++ Strong Pos i ti ve Correl a ti on
- -- - ++
+ Pos i ti ve Correl a ti on
- ++ -- - Nega ti ve Correl a ti on
-- Strong Nega ti ve Correl a ti on
++ ++ ++ -
▼ Objecti ve i s To Mi ni mi ze
- ++ ▲ Objecti ve i s To Ma xi mi ze
X Objecti ve i s To Hi t Ta rget
--
++ - - -- -- ++ -
++ ++ ++ ++ ++
-- ++ ++ -- ++ ++ ++
Column # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Direction of improvement :
Minimize (▼),Maximize (▲), or Target (X)
x ▲ x x x ▲ x x x x x x
Quality Characteristics →
020020-4
Demanded Quality ↓
Row #
Max Relationship Value in Row
Relative to weight
Weight / Importance
crushing system accuracy
crushing system components
workload
crushing system structure
squeezing system accuracy
squeezing system components
workload
squeezing system structure
boiling system accuracy
boiling system components
workload
boiling system structure
voltage controler
electric current controler
integration of function
Existing system
Machine A
Machine B
Machine C
Machine D
Machine E
1 9 19.0 4.0 4 Performance Θ Θ Θ ▲ ▲ Ο 3 1 2 0 4 5
FIGURE 3. HOQ level 1 of MCMP

2 3 19.0 4.0 4 Feature Ο Ο 3 1 2 0 4 5
3 9 19.0 4.0 4 Target specification Θ Θ Ο ▲ Ο ▲ Θ Θ Θ 2 1 3 0 4 5
4 9 9.5 2.0 2 Safety ▲ Θ Θ Θ 4 0 5 1 2 4
5 9 19.0 4.0 4 Maintenance Θ Ο Θ ▲ ▲ Ο 2 0 4 1 5 3
6 9 4.8 1.0 1 Robustness Ο Θ Θ ▲ Θ Θ Ο ▲ 3 0 2 1 4 5
7 9 9.5 2.0 2 Cost Θ Θ Θ Θ Θ Ο Θ Θ Θ 2 1 3 0 4 5
Target or limit value

crushing system
accuracy
crushing system
components
workload
Crushing system
structure
Squeeezingsystem
accuracy
squeezing system
components
workload
squeezing system
structure
Boiling system
accuracy
Boiling system
components
workload
Boiling system
structure
voltage controler
electric current
controleer
integration of
function
Difficulty 3 7 9 8 2 3 3 6 8 4 2 1
(0 = Easy to Accomplish, 10 =Extremely Difficult
max relationship value in column 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 3 9 9 9 9
weight / importance 509.5 214.3 385.7 376.2 61.9 271.4 314.3 33.3 290.5 295.2 259.2 371.4
Relative weight 14.9 6.3 11.3 11 1.8 7.9 9.2 1 8.5 8.6 8.6 10.9
In this level, factor with the highest importance rank–crushing process speed–should be noticed for the MCMP
design process. Further detail information can be seen in Figure 3. In QFD level 2, the speed, workload, and
structure were related to components’ characteristics such as electric squeezer, bolt set, distribution board, water
pipe, etc. The results showed the significance of the components: electric squeezer for crushing process, the
pneumatic cylinder for crystallization, the heating element for boiling, and the microcontroller for controlling
system. In QFD level 3, the components were related to process requirement of cutting, drilling, grinding, etc.
Finally, in level 4, process requirements were related to the quality procedures such as the compliment with
sequence, the standard flow rate, and compliment with the expected cycle time.
TAM was used to identify and evaluate factors for the acceptance of the designed MCMP within the perspective
of the customers. From the questionnaires that involved by the local business players as illustrated in Table 1, it can
be derived that compatibility will affect to trust, perceived of usefulness, and perceived ease of use. Furthermore,
trust will influence perceived of usefulness and behavioral intention of use. The relations among variables are
clearly described in Fig. 4.
TABLE 1. Result of TAM response – variables correlation.
Independent Dependent Independent Dependent

No. Variables Variables Score No. Variables Variables Score
(x) (y) (x) (y)
1 COM TRU 8 13 PUS PEU -11
2 COM PUS 12 14 PUS ATU 15
3 COM PEU 13 15 PUS BIU 18
4 COM ATU 0 16 PUS ACS 7
5 COM BIU -8 17 PEU PEU 13
6 COM ACS -1 18 PEU ATU 2
7 TRU COM -1 19 PEU BIU -7
8 TRU PUS 3 20 PEU ACS -9
9 TRU PEU 0 21 ATU BIU 16
10 TRU ATU -4 22 ATU ACS 8
11 TRU BIU 5 23 BIU ACS 11
12 TRU ACS -7
FIGURE 4. TAM Model of MCMP Design.
Financial analysis was performed based on the concept of defender-challenger in a case of a replacement of the
current system with MCMP design. First, the total investment of both systems was identified based on the value of
the machine. Subsequently, the benefit was calculated from the expected profit deducted by operational cost.
Salvage value was identified to the price of the system in the respective year. The final result of financial analysis is
demonstrated in Table 2.
020020-5
TABLE 2. Results of financial analysis – Net Present Value (NPV) in IDR.
Designed MCMP Current System
Salvage Net N Salvage Net N
Benefit Benefit
Year Investment Value Cash Flow P Investment Value Cash Flow P
(A) (A)
(B) (A+B) V (B) (A+B) V
0 (10.305.106) - - - (4.111.500) -
1 61.591.573 9.274.595 70.866.168 - 3.700.350 3.700.350
356.098.586
9.491.522
2 67.750.730 8.347.136 76.097.866 - 3.330.315 3.330.315
3 74.525.803 7.512.422 82.038.225 - 2.997.284 2.997.284
4 81.978.383 6.761.180 88.739.563 - 2.697.555 2.697.555
5 90.176.221 6.085.062 96.261.283 - 2.427.800 2.427.800
FIGURE 5. The Final Design of MCMP.
In the end, the final proposed MCMP is demonstrated in Fig. 5 where the entire aspects have been carefully
evaluated and improved. The machine cover and other features for safety improvement are included to complete
MCMP design. The further step is to produce MCMP in certain quantity, either for commercial intention or as the
government or other institutions’ projects to empower the local business players.
CONCLUSIONS
An MCMP design has been described through the stage of QFD and TAM with the higher positive Net Present
Value in compared with the existing process. The starting point of seeking the commodities has similar with or close
to the manufacturing process which is to simplify the design. Furthermore, the process selection can be done in
order to define the required components. QFD is performed to determine the relation between product values from
the potential user with the list of the required component of the MCMP machine. The involvement of potential user
through TAM plays very important role to ensure the appropriateness of the design with the user’s characteristic.
The NPV was 35.6, which indicated MCMP design has good performance in compared with the existing models.
REFERENCES
1. A. Kapitanov, Special Characteristics of the Multi-product Manufacturing, (Procedia Engineering, 150, 2016)
pp. 832-836.
2. P. R. Spena, P. Holzner, E. Rauch, R. Vidoni and D. T. Matt, Requirements for The Design of Flexible and
Changeable Manufacturing and Assembly Systems: a SME-survey, (Procedia CIRP, 41, 2016) pp. 207-212.
3. C. Klahn, B. Leutenecker and M. Meboldt, Design Strategies for The Process of Additive Manufacturing,
(Procedia CIRP,36, 2015) pp. 230-235.
4. P. Holzner, E. Rauch, P. R. Spena and D. T.Matt, Systematic Design of SME Manufacturing and Assembly
Systems based on Axiomatic Design, (Procedia CIRP, 34, 2015) pp. 81-86.
020020-6
5. O. Gould, A. Simeone, R. W. James Colwill and S. Rahimifard, A Material Flow Modelling Tool for Resource
Efficient Production Planning in Multi-Product Manufacturing Systems, (Procedia CIRP, 41, 2016) pp. 21-26.
6. K. T. Ulrich and S. D. Eppinger, Product Design and Development, Mc Graw Hill, 2001.
7. L. Sularto, Wardoyo and T. Yunitasari, User Requirements Analysis for Restaurant POS and Accounting
Application Using Quality Function Deployment, (Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, 169, 2015) pp.
266-280.
8. J. Servert, A.Labanda, E. Fuentealba, M. Cortes and R. Perez, Quality Function Deployment Analysis for The
Selection of Four Utility-Scale Solar Energy Project in Northern Chile, (Energy Procedia, 49, 2014) pp. 1896-
1905.
9. M. Ghazizadeh, J. D. Lee and L. N. Boyle, Extending the Technology Acceptance Model to assess automation,
(Cognition, Technology & Work, 14, 2012) pp. 39-49.
10. R. Fayad and D. Paper, The Technology Acceptance Model E-Commerce Extension: A Conceptual Framework,
(Procedia Economics and Finance, 26, 2015) pp. 1000-1006.
11. H. Ibrahim, Technology Acceptance Model: Extension to Sport Consumption, (Procedia Engineering, 69, 2014)
pp. 1534-1540.
12. M. P. Bach, A. Celjo and J. Zoroja, Technology Acceptance Model for Business Intelligence Systems:
Preliminary Research, (Procedia Computer Science, 100, 2016) pp. 995-1001.
13. S. Nasir and Y. Yurder, Consumer's and Physicians' Perceptions about High Tech Wearable Health Products,
(Procedia-Social and Behavioral Science, 195, 2015) pp. 1261-1267.
14. A. Salman and A. Abd.Aziz, Evaluating user Readiness Towards Digital Society: A Rasch Measurement Model
Analysis, (Procedia Computer Science, 65, 2015) pp. 1154-1159.
15. M. P. Groover, Automation, Production System and Computer Integrated Manufacturing, Prentice Hall, 2000.
16. P. Stavropoulus, D. Chantziz, C. Doukas, A. Papacharalampopoulus and G. Chryssolouris, Monitoring and
Control of Manufacturing Processes: A Review, (Procedia CIRP, 8, 2013) pp. 421-425.
17. M. Donofrio, Topology Optimization and Advanced Manufacturing as a Means for The Design of Sustainable
Building Components, (Procedia Engineering, 145, 2016) pp. 638-645.
18. M. P. Arakeri and Lakshmana, Computer Vision Based Fruit Grading System for Quality Evaluation of Tomato
in Agriculture Industry, (Procedia Computer Science, 79, 2016) pp. 426-433.
19. T. Keckstein and P. V. Martin Hynek, Electronics Study Materials for Design of Universal Center Lathes,
(Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, 176, 2015) pp. 1097-1104.
20. T. Tamura, H. Kobayashi and Y. Umeda, Requirements for Design Methodology for Local Oriented
Manufacturing in Developing Countries, (Procedia CIRP, 40, 2016) pp. 431-436.
21. D. Gunathilake, W. Wasala and K. Palipane, Design, Development and Evaluation of a Size Grading Machine
for Onion, (Procedia Food Science, 6, 2016) pp. 103-107.
22. G. Polder, G. W.A.M, V. d. Heijden, J. v. Doorn and T. A. Baltissen, "Advances in Automatic Detection of
Tulip Breaking Virus (TBV) Using Machine Vision," Horticultural and Post Harvest Industry, pp. 58-63,
2013.
020020-7
Lagrange multiplier for perishable inventory model considering warehouse capacity
planning
Tiena Gustina Amran and Zenny Fatima

Lagrange Multiplier for Perishable Inventory Model
Considering Warehouse Capacity Planning
Tiena Gustina Amran1, a), Zenny Fatima2
1
Industrial Engineering Department, Trisakti University, 1440 Kyai Tapa, Jakarta, Indonesia
2
Department of Engineering Mechanics, Universiti Tun Hussein Onn Malaysia.
a)
Corresponding author: amran.tiena@gmail.com
ABSTRACT. This paper presented Lagrange Muktiplier approach for solving perishable raw material inventory
planning considering warehouse capacity. A food company faced an issue of managing perishable raw materials and
marinades which have limited shelf life. Another constraint to be considered was the capacity of the warehouse.
Therefore, an inventory model considering shelf life and raw material warehouse capacity are needed in order to
minimize the company’s inventory cost. The inventory model implemented in this study was the adapted economic order
quantity (EOQ) model which is optimized using Lagrange multiplier. The model and solution approach were applied to
solve a case industry in a food manufacturer. The result showed that the total inventory cost decreased 2.42% after
applying the proposed approach.
INTRODUCTION
The rapidly developing science and technology world resulted in the tight competition in the industrial world as
well as the rapid changes in it. As a consequence, there is a tense competition among companies in order to win the
competition, hence, the local products should also be able to compete with imported products. To build the
continuous competitiveness, every potential should be explored to its maximum level. Every company should own a
process to convert input into output with high value added. In order to do so, every resource owned by the company
including its human resources and production facilities should be optimized.
Considering the tightness of the competition, each company should own a strong commitment to continuously
meet their customers’ demands and expectations. To be able to meet them, a well-designed production planning is
surely a necessity. The planning system should consider the products’ quality and the production target as well as
should produce the correct product items. Those conditions triggered customers to highly demand the product’s
quality and delivery time. The right delivery time is one of the most important factors that determine the customer’s
satisfaction. Delivery time accomplishment is closely related to the factor of product availability that is also related
to the factor of raw material availability. Therefore, in this matter, inventory has an important role in providing the
best service for the customers.
Both in the manufacture and non-manufacture system, the availability of inventory is a cost adding factor.
However, inventory is still essential since in the real condition, the customers’ demands are frequently uncertain.
However, large inventory would result in an extremely high inventory cost and a waste of money. On the contrary,
inadequate inventory would result in the company’s loss since it could not meet the demands that is expected by the
customers.
Inventory is a company’s wealth that has an important role in the business operation. Therefore, the company
should conduct a proactive inventory management which means that the company should be able to anticipate
conditions and challenges in the inventory management in order to reach its final inventory management goal of
minimum total inventory cost [1]. This research assessed a processed food manufacturing company whose products
are instant sausage, nugget, meatball, sausage, and other products like karage, katsu, and spicy wing. Most raw
materials of the products had limited shelf life including meat, flour, and spices. The company produces the products
based on the marketing’s Purchase Order (PO). From the PO, the production planning and inventory control (PPIC)
department analyzes and calculates the required raw materials. The company, like other companies, has to face
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020021-1–020021-9; doi: 10.1063/1.4985466
020021-1
issues related to the inventory of raw material. It is due to the volatile demands from the marketing department. To
anticipate this issue, raw material inventory arrangement is required since all raw materials and spices are
perishable. Therefore, decay is a factor that affects the estimation of inventory excluded the usage.
In fact, the inventory control rarely considers the expiry date of the raw materials that leads to a number of
expired raw materials. It can cause a great loss for the company. In most process industries, especially food
processing industries, it is difficult to avoid this expired problem. For the food processing companies, expiry date is
an important issue that should be addressed in relation with their raw material planning. Furthermore, it has a
correlation to the food safety when the food is consumed. Considering that most raw materials in the food industry
have a limited/short shelf life (expiry date), an optimum inventory planning model that pays attention on the expiry
date issue has become an urgent necessity [2]. The inventory model with perishable factor has been a focus for a
number of researchers. Indrianti et al. [2] developed a material inventory model that took the perishable factor into
consideration, while Prasetyo et al. [3] developed an inventory model that considered the factors of perishable and
incremental discount.
The observed company also supplied raw materials to the company branches in Surabaya, Lampung, and
Boyolali, thus, the limited warehouse capacity becomes one of the issues in raw material order and storage.
Therefore, this research was intended to develop a model of raw material inventory by considering the perishable
factor. The Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) model has several basic assumptions that are perceived as unequal to
the real conditions. This model development includes the expiry date and warehouse capacity parameters into the
Developed Economic Order Quantity (EOQp) model to obtain the optimum result.
THEORETICAL BACKGROUND
Inventory System
Inventory control has a very important managerial role since most companies allocate high number of
investments in their inventory aspects (20% to 60%). In addition, it puts the company as a dilemma. The addition of
extra inventory means will enhance the cost and capital. Extra inventory will create extra cost in inventory and
maintenance. Extra inventory will also put some of the company’s capital into a stagnant state and cause a loss in the
opportunity cost. On the contrary, fewer inventories might lead to a stock out and urgent purchases will cost higher
than the normal order. Another thing that might happen is the final product stock out that might lead to the
customers’ disappointment and trigger them to turn into another brand [4].
ABC Inventory Control Method

There are various methods of inventory control system. One of them is the ABC Inventory System, which is able
in classifying a large number of materials, products, or components. The ABC classification or ABC Analysis is a
classification of a group of materials or components based on the decreasing order of the material usage cost per
time period (material price per unit x material’s usage volume per certain period). The common time period was one
year. The ABC analysis can also be implemented by using other criteria than cost, but based on the important factors
that affect the materials. The ABC classification is commonly implemented in the inventory control of raw
materials, inventory control of finished goods in warehouse, medicine inventory in a pharmacy, spare parts
inventory in a workshop or spare part store, product inventory in a department store or convenient store, etc.
The implementation of ABC classification as a part of the strategic planning process could expand the system
horizon. For example, the ABC could show that complicated products with a lot of separated parts require a higher
design and production costs in compared to the simpler ones. Products with low volume have a lower price per unit
in compared to those with high volume. Products with more complicated preparation or technique also have a
higher unit cost in compared to other products and perishable product with high unit cost.
One of the goals of inventory management is to control inventory at the lowest cost. In addition, an inventory
management can also determine which item is classified as a waste of cost by monitoring whether the storage cost is
higher than the cost of item. By identifying the item inventory, the management can effectively allocate the
resources to control the materials with high cost that relatively require higher attention.
The ABC classification is based on the 80-20 principles or Pareto law where about 80% of the total material
inventory is represented by 20% of the material inventory. The functions of this classification is to determine the
parameters of Cycle counting frequency, Engineering priority, Purchasing priority in which purchasing activities
020021-2
should be focused on the high cost materials and high usage materials, Focused, Safety, Replenishment system, and
Investment decision.
In addition, there are a number of procedures to classify the inventory materials into A, B, and C class, namely:
1. Determine the usage volume per time period (usually annually) of the classified inventory materials.
2. Multiply the usage volume per time period (annually) of every inventory material with the cost per unit to earn
the total usage cost per time period (annually) for each inventory material.
3. Add the total usage cost of all inventory materials to earn the total aggregate of the usage cost.
4. Divide the total usage cost of each inventory material to total cost.
5. List the materials in total usage cost percentage and rank them in a descending order, from the largest to the
smallest.
6. Classify the inventory materials into A, B, and C class under the criteria: 20% of the materials is classified A
class, 30 % is classified B class, and 50% is classified C class.
Developed Economic Order Quantity (EOQp) for Perishable Item
Notation
r = reorder point (kg)

Ck = stock out cost per unit/year (IDR)
Cp = ordering cost/order (IDR)
Cs = storage cost per kg/year (IDR)
Dj = material demand during the time period (kg)
Lt = lead time (days)
J = perished material’s selling price (IDR)
Pj = material price/kg (IDR)
Q = mmount of materials ordered (kg)
Q* = material’s optimum quantity ordered based on ordering lot size (kg)
Q** = materials ordered in case of no stock out allowed
Qpack = ordering quantity in inventory measurement (pack)
Qkn = amount of perished materials (kg)
t = current ordering period (days)
t* = optimum ordering period (days)
T = planning period (year)
t1 = storage length before expiry date (days)
tkn = real condition expiry date (days)
tk = optimum expiry date based on calculation (days)
m = material shelf life (days)
n = ordering frequency (times)
W = maximum available storage area (m2)
Kappall = storage capacity per pallet (pack)
Kapsilo = flour storage capacity in silo (kg)
P’ = pallet length included tolerance (m)
L’ = pallet width included tolerance (m)
Ppall = pallet length (m)
Lpall = pallet width (m)
Kpall = pallet’s tolerance (m)
wi = placement area for one pallet (m2)
L = material storage area needed (m2)
Q* silo = number of silos needed for storage (unit)
Q*pall = number of pallets needed to store the optimum economic ordering lot (pallet)
Q j ( F ) * = economic ordering quantity with Lagrange Multiplier (kg)
Q j ( O ) * pall = Number of pallets needed to store the optimum economic ordering lot with Lagrange Multiplier
(pallet)
020021-3
EOQ = general EOQ inventory model
EOQp = developed EOQ inventory model
EOQp* = optimum inventory model for material in consideration of its shelf life and storage capacity
N = assumed number of work days in 0.5 years (days)
λ = Lagrange constant number
TC = Total Inventory Cost (IDR)
In determining the raw material inventory model for perishable materials, a detailed observation was required in
order to obtain the optimum solution. It is assumed that the shelf life of the material is deterministic and the demand
rate is constant. To determine the amount of required inventory, calculations in consideration of the shelf life of the
materials were conducted using the developed Economic Order Quantity (EOQp) model. This model was expected
to be able to provide a solution for the optimum order and optimum inventory level in regards of their shelf lives.
There were two main criteria that should be determined to earn the optimum calculation result. They were shelf life
(m) ≤ ordering period (t) or shelf life (m) > ordering period (t). In this system, the inventory level must always be
monitored in each transaction, and when it reached a certain position, a fixed order quantity was conducted.
Therefore, the two parameters in this model were reorder point (r) and order quantity lot size (Q) [2].
Inventory level
Q*
Qkn
r Reorder point
LT t1 t2 Time
t*
tk
tkn
FIGURE 1. Inventory profile of Developed Economic Order Quantity (EOQp)
Figure 1 showed an inventory profile with economic order quantity of Q* and perished/expired raw material Qkn
started at the end of t1. Based on this figure, equations (1)-(3) apply.
T .Q (1)
t
D
Q Qkn (2)
t1 t
Q
Qkn (3)
t2 t
Q
The inventory cost for the developed model included several cost elements consisting of:
1. Storage cost, including costs for warehouse management and technology used for handling inventory. The
storage cost per unit was expressed in equation (4).
Cs h.P (4)
020021-4
Assuming that the perished/expired goods were immediately excluded, there was no storage cost for the
perished/expired items. The amount of storage cost was in equation (5).
1 (5)
Cst (Q Qkn).Cs .t1
2
2. Ordering cost, the expenses to order the raw material was Cp

3. Material shortage cost, the cost expensed because there were material shortages due to perished/expired raw
materials which was formulated as in equation (6).
1
Ckn Qkn.Ck .t2 (6)
2
4. Perished material cost, the cost expensed due to perished/expired material was:
Ckd Qkn.( P J ) (7)
5. Therefore, the total costy (TC) for the time period (T) was expressed in equation (8).
TC ^C st C p Ckn Ckd ` D / Q (8)
The general equation earned by substituting the equation (5)-(8) to obtain equation (9).
1 1 ½
TC ® (Q Qkn).Cs .t1 C p Qkn.Ck .t2 Qkn.( P J ) ¾ D / Q (9)
¯2 2 ¿
By substituting the equation (1, 2, and 3) into equation (9), the total cost for a certain planning period was:
Q 2 Qkn 2 CsT D Q 2 D
TC C p kn Ck T Qkn ( P J ) (10)
Q 2 Q 2Q Q
Minimum TC could be earned by finding the first derivative of equation (10) with respect to Q and and Qkn set
the results to zero or wTC 0 , to obtain equation (11).
wQ
P J
2
2.D.C p D2
Q (11)
T .Cs (Cs Ck )CsT 2
The first step in determining the calculation model was by determining the material’s shelf life (the length of
storage time before the material perished) ( t In ) by using equation (12).
m tkn LT (12)
After determining the value of m and t, then a suitable inventory model was chosen based on two different cases,
case 1 when m > t and case 2 when m ≤ t.
Calculation of Raw Material Need Planning Model for m > t

In determining the perishable raw material inventory model for m > t, an inventory control calculation with
regards on material’s shelf life by using the basic Economic Order Quantity model. It was expected that the model
could provide a solution on the raw material inventory planning by providing the optimum ordering quantity and
optimum inventory level regarding with the perishable nature of the materials.
In this inventory model, stock out was prevented, the total inventory cost was calculated by using the formula as
follows:
Q * C sT D
TC Cp (13)
2 Q*
020021-5
Calculation of Raw Material Need Planning Model for m ≤ t
In determining the perishable raw material inventory model for m ≤ t, an inventory control calculation with
regards on material shelf life by using the developed Economic Order Quantity (EOQp) model was conducted. It
was expected that the model could provide a solution on the raw material inventory planning by providing the
optimum ordering quantity and optimum inventory level regarding with the perishable nature of the materials.
Determining the ordering lot size (Q):
P J
2
2.D.C p D2
Q (14)
T .Cs (Cs Ck )CsT 2
Inventory Model with Limited Raw Material Storage Area

Generally, in the previous methods, it had been discussed that the available resources were unlimited. However,
in the real condition, there were several constraints such as limited capital, limited production capacity, limited
storage area, etc.
The inventory model with constraints basically has two functions: the goal function and the constraint function.
The goal function is used to minimize the total inventory cost while the constraint function is the limited raw
material storage area. In this research, the constraint was the storage area and the solution was investigated by using
the Lagrange Multiplier
Raw Material Storage Area Constraint

The value of ordering lot size was an important thing for a company since it held the control of the warehouse
inventory. Based on the calculation using the inventory control model, an economic ordering lot size should be
obtained. However, in the real condition, the obtained lot size might not be able to provide the optimum inventory
system in the warehouse. Storage area constraint was on the constraints that should be addressed, hence, a
calculation of the economic ordering lot size in regards of the warehouse capacity was conducted by using the
Lagrange Multiplier. To find the required storage area, calculation was conducted by using the steps as follows:
x Determining the number of required pallets ( Q * pall )
Q*
Q * pall (15)
Kap pall
x Calculating the area of the required pallet group to store the raw material ( wij )
P' = ª¬ Ppall +(K pall x 2) º¼ (16)
L' = ª¬lpall +(K pall x 2) º¼ (17)

wij P' x L' (18)
x Calculating the required raw material storage area (L):
L Q j * pall xwij (19)
Lagrange Multiplier for Raw Material Storage Area Constraint [5]

There are two functions of the Lagrange Multiplier. They are the goal function and the constraint function.
Goal function = Total Inventory Cost
= Storage Cost + Ordering Cost + Stock Out Cost + Perished Material Cost
In this stage, a calculation to find out whether the inventory storage area constraint was active or not was conducted.
This constraint was active if the total area of the ordered raw material exceeded the available raw material
warehouse area. Lagrange Multiplier as a constraint function was the method used to help this calculation.
n
g ¦wQ dW
i 1
i i
(20)
020021-6
Equation of Lagrange Multiplier function:
ª n º
O « ¦ wi Qi W » (21)
¬i 1 ¼
For m > t, equation (22) was used for determining the ordering lot size (Q).
2C p D
Q j (O ) (kg) (22)
CsT 2 F wi
For m ≤ t, equation (23) was used for determining the ordering lot size (Q):
2C p D ( P J )2 D 2
Qj(F ) (23)
CsT 2F wi
Cs Ck CsT 2 2F wi
IMPLEMENTATION RESULTS AND ANALYSIS
Inventory Model Calculation

The model discussed previously was implemented to solve problem in a real case industry, i.e. company
producing sausage. Most of raw materials used for producing sausage were deteriorated over time. An ABC analysis
was conducted to select raw materials having the highest cost resulting in 7 types selected raw material as can be
seen from Table 1. The proposed model was then used to solve the EOQ for each raw material with a planning
period of 0.5 year. Table 1 summarizes the results.
TABLE 1. Result for Raw Material Inventory Model Considering the Material’s Shelf Life
Material
NO Notes Unit Q* n r t1 TC (IDR)
Code
1 35113083 MINCED CHICKEN-DMP Kg 547,386 20 296,754 9 267,548,620

2 35113005 Chicken -BS Leg (SSC) Kg 118,037 20 63,941 9 31,051,447
3 35115075 Tapioca Modified Starch Kg 24,850 75 20,511 2 15,028,334
Hela Frankfurt Forte
4 35112129 Kg 5,540 34 4,127 5 6,780,179
Premix
5 35115078 Solcon S (SPC) Kg 7,760 56 4,757 3 11,166,025
6 35115099 ISP Vegepro CFI A-80 Kg 3,960 77 3,343 2 15,332,125
7 35112085 Vege 860 Kg 6,600 62 4,881 3 13,462,005
TOTAL 360,368,744
Modelling Analysis
Raw Material Need
In complying with the consumer’s demands, the company should prepare its raw material demand per period.
The raw material needs data were obtained as a conversion result from the finished goods needs to raw material
needs using the bill of material (BOM) as a basic to determine how much raw material would be needed in the
future.
Based on the conversion result, the need for raw material MINCED CHICKEN-DMP was 2,571,869.68 kg and
Tapioca Modified Starch marinade was 1,866,538.01 kg. Based on the raw material classification using the ABC
method, the raw materials that were classified as A Class were MINCED CHICKEN-DMP, Chicken-BS Leg (SSC),
Tapioca Modified Starch, Hela Frankfurt Forte Premix, Solcon S (SPC), ISP Vegepro CFI A-80, and Vege 860. The
result was illustrated in Figure 2.
020021-7
FIGURE 2. Combined Ordering Period Graph for All Raw Materials in Consideration of Shelf Life
Inventory Model Analysis
To obtain an optimum inventory system, an inventory model that suits well to the real condition and to the
company’s standards is required. An optimum model could be earned by closely observing the company’s data
pattern (deterministic, probabilistic, or stochastic). The company has a deterministic demand pattern due to its lead
time and demand per period. Lead time is certainly constant while the demand derived from the marketing
department is obvious even though it is not always constant. Thus, the suitable model for company is the dynamic
deterministic model.
Analysis of Required Raw Material Warehouse Area
Generally, there are two perishable raw material warehouses, namely the raw material warehouse and the spice
warehouse. Before the implementation of Lagrange Multiplier, the warehouse capacity was smaller than the required
area. However, after implementing the Lagrange Multiplier, the required area could fit the warehouse capacity.
TABLE 2. Comparison between Raw Material Warehouse Areas Required Before and After Optimized
Capacity Needed
No Warehouse
Before After
Pallet 1,248 962
Raw Material
1 Area
Warehouse 2,446 1,885
(m2)
Pallet 212 160
2 Marinade Warehouse Area
415 313
(m2)
020021-8
Inventory Cost Analysis
One of the main purposes of forming the inventory control model is to find out the total inventory cost (TC) of each
raw material. Total cost is one of the variables that must be minimized. The total inventory cost in prior to the
implementation of the Lagrange Multiplier Method was IDR 606,632,822 and it declined to IDR 591,964,104 after the
implementation.
TABLE 3. Total Cost Comparison Before and After Lagrange Multiplier Method Implementation
TC (IDR)
No. Warehouse
Before After
1 Raw 413,876,769 388,972,432
Material
Warehouse
2 Spice 192,756,053 202,991,672
Warehouse
TOTAL 606,632,822 591,964,104
CONCLUSIONS
Based on the system modeling and analysis, it could be concluded that:
1. Raw materials with shelf life ≤ ordering period (m ≤ t) would be calculated by using the Developed Economic Order
Quantity (EOQp) inventory model.
2. Raw materials with shelf life > ordering period (m < t) would be calculated by using the Economic Order Quantity
(EOQ) inventory model.
3. Total Inventory cost was IDR 606,632,822 and after the implementation of Lagrange multiplier method, it declined
into IDR 591,964,104.
The company is suggested to implement the Developed EOQ (Economic Order Quantity) inventory control model with
Lagrange multiplier that would create an optimum system in regards of the perishable factor and raw material warehouse
capacity and to pay attention to the available warehouse area while calculating their inventory planning. In addition, the
raw materials storage based on each material’s characteristic to avoid expiry due to the perishable factor of the material is
essential.
REFERENCES
1. Z. Yamit. 2002. Manajemen Produksi dan Operasi, Yogyakarta: Ekonisia FE UII.
2. N. Indrianti, T. Ming, and I. S. Toha. 2001. Model Perencanaan Kebutuhan Bahan Dengan Mempertimbangkan
Waktu Kadaluwarsa Bahan. Yogyakarta: Media Teknik.
3. H. Prasetyo, H. Munawir, and N. Mustofiyah. 2005. Pengembangan Model Persediaan dengan
mempertimbangkan waktu kadaluarsa dan Incremental Discount. Jurnal Ilmiah Teknik Industri, Vol. 4, No. 2,
Des 2005, hal. 49 – 56.
4. T. Baroto. 2002. Perencanaan dan Pengendalian produksi. Ghalia Indonesia, Jakarta.
5. R. J. Tersine. 1994. Principle of Inventory and Materials Management, New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
020021-9
Effect of initial treatment in the preparation of natural indigo dye from Indigofera
tinctoria
Herry Purnama, Nur Hidayati, Dyah S. Safitri, and Sofia Rahmawati

Effect of Initial Treatment in the Preparation of Natural
Indigo Dye from Indigofera Tinctoria
Herry Purnama1*, Nur Hidayati1, Dyah S. Safitri1, Sofia Rahmawati1
1
Department of Chemical Engineering, Universitas Muhammadiyah Surakarta
Jl. A. Yani Tromol Pos 1 Pabelan, Kartasura, Surakarta, Indonesia 57102
*Corresponding author: hp269@ums.ac.id
Abstract. The current tinting industries return to the use of natural dyes because of their characteristics including safe and
environmentally friendly. Indonesia can widely promote the potential of natural colours due to the availability of abundant
natural dye plants. One of the potential plants that generates blue colour is Indigofera tinctoria. This research was conducted to
improve the quality and quantity of natural indigo dye for batik production that supports the environment sustainability. The
indigo dark blue paste was produced by initial treatment of soaking in cold water for 48 hours. The 48 hours fermentation
anaerobic conditions reached optimum temperature, due to time and pH were also met by nutrients. Aeration was done in ten
minutes using an aquarium air pump to increase mixing in water immersion with solution of calcium oxide. Indoxyl in the
fermented leaves of Indigofera tinctoria is easily oxidized by air in alkali solution that will form pigment indigo. In that
condition, lime (CaO) can be used in the manufacture of indigo paste. In this study, the higher concentrated of blue colour was
achieved by lesser amount of lime. The soaking treatment in cold water produced high amount of dyes rather than the initial
treatment by both hot water and grounding the indigo leaves. Analysis were done by using UV-Vis Spectrophotometry which
showed the value of absorbance. The sample that was soaked in 5 liters of water added by a kilogram of Indigofera tinctoria
leaves and 15 grams of lime for 48 hours, obtained the highest absorbance or concentration level. The application of the indigo
dyes with or without mordanting agent was also tested for colour fastness.
BACKGROUND
The use of plants as natural dye in textile industries has been extensively explored recently. There is a high
opportunity to reinvent natural dyes in Indonesia due to its abundant natural resources. One of them is the indigo
plant (Indigofera sp.), which is one of the oldest natural dye in the world and has been used since the ancient
periods. This plant has many species, but the most commonly species are I. arrecta and I. tinctoria [1]. I. tinctoria is
widespread across tropical regions around the world. The plant has been cultivated and highly valued for centuries
as a main source of indigo dye. Commonly called as µWUXH LQGLJR¶ RU µFRmPRQ LQGLJR¶ I. tinctoria is a primary
source of natural dye among the indigo plants.
The natural dye from this plant is defined as indigo. Indigo blue colour comes from indican substances contained
in the leaves of Indigofera. After soaking the leaves in water, hydrolysis reaction will bring indoxyl (white colour)
and glucose. The indoxyl is transformed into blue colour after aeration is performed. If the fabric is dipped in a
mixture of fermentation solution containing indoxyl and dried in the fresh air, it will generate insoluble indigo and
change into blue colour. Indigo precipitates in the form of cis isomerization and turns into trans isomer that will
change into blue color [2].
There are about 150 species of plants that can produce intense natural dyes. They yieldboth basic colours (red,
blue, yellow) and combinations such as brown, orange, and indigo. However, not the entire species of plant used as
natural dye were identified, particularly their colour resistance. Lee [3] suggested the natural dyes have some
disadvantages in compared with synthetic dyes in terms of stability, species, brightness, homogeneity, availability,
and price. Nevertheless, the market of natural dyes incesatntly increases and has linear relationship with the modern
people who pay more attention on the environmental sustainability.
Indigofera plant (Fig. 1) is a small herbaceous plant with upright or radiating branching that has alternate leaves,
finned odd, and sometimes three or single leaf litter. The flowers are arranged in a long stalk in the armpit leaves
with flowers of 5 mm in length, bell shaped serrated leaves five petals, leaves butterfly-shaped crown. Fruit type is
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020022-1–020022-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985467
020022-1
pods, ribbon-shaped, straight or crooked, containing 1-20 seeds and have a taproot [4]. I. tinctoria plant contains
glucoside indican. Once the plant is soaked in water, in hydrolysis process, indican will be changed into indoxyl
(white indigo) and glucose by the enzime. Indoxyl can be oxidized to indigo blue. Indigofera tinctoria leaf content
consists of: N 5.11%, 0.78% P2O5, K2O 1.67% CaO 5.35% by dry weight [4].
FIGURE 1. Indigofera tinctoria plant.

Based on plant taxonomy, according to USDA Plants [5] the I. tinctoria plant is classified as follows: Domain:
Eukaryota, Kingdom: Plantae (Plants), Subkingdom: Tracheobionta (Vascular plants), Phylum: Spermatophyta
(Seed plants), Subphylum: Angiospermae, Class: Magniliopsida (Dicotyledons), Subclass: Rosidae, Order: Fabales,
Family: Fabaceae/Leguminosae (Pea family), Subfamily: Faboideae, Genus: Indigofera L. (indigo), Species:
Indigofera tinctoria L. (true indigo).
Natural dyes can be obtained in various ways according to the nature of each carrier colour. However, there is no
colour carrier materials that can be used directly, hence extraction or fermentation before usage is required [6].
Indigo is a group of carbonyl compound and one of the oldest known dyes in terms of natural dyes. According to a
derivative of a group of organic compounds that are colourless glucoside from a form of "enol" from an indoxyl, for
example indican. Indigo is formed from indican because the fermentation process of Indigofera species plant is
followed by oxidation by free air of indoxyl [4]. The reaction below illustrates the extraction of indigo colour:
FIGURE 2. Reaction to produce natural dye indigo [7]
Indigo is a dye for dyestuff that is important for the typical blue colour. The dye is a natural dye obtained from
the fermentation of Isatis tinctoria in Western Europe or Indigofera species in tropical countries. Both of these
plants contain the glucoside indican, which can be hydrolyzed to glucose and indoxyl, a precursor (precursor
substances) colourless of indigo. If the fabric is immersed in a mixture containing fermentation solution indoxyl,
then allowed to dry in the air, indoxyl oxidation by air will occur and generate insoluble indigo and blue. Indigo
precipitates in the form of cis isomerization experiencing and necessarily be the trans isomer, causing a blue colour.
Indigofera leaves is a natural blue colour and further research is required to support the learning of arts and culture,
especially art environmentally friendly textile craft [8].
The isolation process of indigo blue colour must be taken from the fresh plant materials. Low yield will be
produced if the semi-dried and dried plant materials are used [9]. According to Minami [10], the activities of
enzyme ß-glucosidase in the indigo leaves are more active in the fresh plants. It was also stated that the activity of
the enzyme ß-glucosidase decreased when it is exposed to heat and dryness [11]. However, there may be other
020022-2
factors that affect the lower yield from non-fresh materials, such as the dye molecules aggregate that do not come
out into the solution or the dye pigments that are trapped within the dried plant tissues [9].
METHODOLOGY
The equipments for the experiments were already available in the laboratory, particularly the UV-Vis 1240
spectrophotometer from Shimadzu. The chemicals were pro analyzed, but only in small amount. In the experiment
of indigo production, the variables were the treatments of indigo leaves, i.e., soaking in cold water, in hot water, in
water after grounded, and soaking duration (12, 24, 36, and 48 hours). The aeration was fixed at 10 minutes and the
ratio of indigo leaves and the water was 1:5 (w/v). The experimental steps were done and the natural dyes were used
in the application: cut and take the leaves of I. tinctoria (better before sunrise); take one kilogram of I. tinctoria
leaves and put them in the container; perform the different treatments by soaking the leaves into: the cold water, hot
water, cold water after grounding; add water up to 5 liters to the container to soak the leaves, make sure all the
leaves are soaked; soaking in various time: 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours; take the solution of 1 liter in each time
variation; weigh 10g of CaO and dissolve in 100mL of water; mix the solution of soaked water with the lime;
perform an oxidation by using an aerator put in the solution for 10 minutes; precipitate the solution for ±24 hours,
perform a filtration to get an indigo paste as a second layer; drain the precipitate until the indigo paste is ready to
use; weigh and record the quantity of indigo paste; analyse the quality of indigo produced by using UV-Vis
spectrophotometer.

In the manufacture of indigo paste from the leaves of I. tinctoria, the generated would be a net weight of dye.
The longer the soaking duration, the more severe the result net weight of indigo. In this study, it demonstrated that
early treatment affects the net weight of the produced paste. Treatment of early immersion in cold water with
soaking duration of 48 hours to produce a net weight of which is higher than the treatment by hot water or grounded
before soaking the leaves. This is consistent with previous research by [12]. Fermentation time with an interval of 48
hours shows the aerobic condition of bacteria achieves its optimum because of the temperature, time, and pH were
met by nutrients. Bacteria in the solution becomes higher. However at temperatures above 48°C, the bacteria were
reduced in which there were some bacteria died so that the fermentation process was not perfect, the result of
produced blue indigo solution was less dense. As for when the fermentation time is less, the fermentation process is
not perfect and the bacteria in solution is less, so that the numbers of the decaying leaves is reduced. If the
fermentation time is lengthened, the solution will change the colour from the original greenish to yellow-brown and
smelt bad.
The yield of natural indigo dye is shown in Fig. 3.
FIGURE 3. Effect of soaking duration and initial treatment to the yield (%).
From the Fig. 3, it can be observed that the soaking duration affects the yield, in which the longer the duration
the higher the generated yield. In this study, the optimal variable appears on soaking treatment with regular water
with a soaking duration of 48 hours. It is possibly due to the constant temperature (room temperature about 30°C)
of cold water that does not damage the structure of the dye molecules on the leaves and keep the bacteria alive and
020022-3
grow in numbers. While the initial treatment of the fresh leaves that are crushed and soaked in hot water will
damage the structure of the leaves so that the bacteria in the fermentation process of decay was decreased. The
optimum soaking duration is 48 hours because bacteria have reached an aerobic condition and the amount of
bacteria in the solution is high so that the fermentation process is maximum and it produces perfect blue dark indigo
paste.
Based on the results of the manufacturing process, the high yield was obtained at no more than 48 hours of
immersion pre-treatment using cold water. To determine the effect of lime on the results, comparison of generated
paste with detemined ratio was done. The application of 15, 20 and 25 gram of lime generated the yield of 8.8%,
9.3%, and 10.1%, respectively. It shows that the quantity of lime affects the yield. The higher the lime content, the
higher the generated yield. According to research conducted by [13], indigo paste can be made through a process of
oxidation of indoxyl in alkaline solution. Lime can be used in alkalis atmosphere and is very easily obtained. The
reaction of lime with water is expressed as follows:
CaO (s) + H2O (l) ÅÆ Ca(OH)2 (aq) ǻ+U íN-PRORI&D2 (1)

The combination of lime and water will generate heat and produce calcium hydroxide which is a strong base of
an alkali metal. Indoxyl in the fermentation of I. tinctoria leaves is readily oxidized by air in an atmosphere that will
make the alkali indigo pigment is not soluble in water [13]. Therefore, lime can be used in the manufacture of indigo
solution into indigo paste.
A quality tests were performed using an UV-Vis 1240 spectrophotometry from Shimadzu that will show the
absorbance values. The calibration curve indicates the higher indigo dye concentration, the higher the absorbance
value. The value are influenced by a high concentration of soaking [12]. Figure 4 demonstrates the relationship
between the soaking duration and dye concentration.
FIGURE 4. Effect of soaking duration on the dye concentration.
Figure 4 shows that the longer the soaking duration, the higher the dye concentrations. It is possibly due to the
fermentation time with an interval of 48 hours shows the condition of bacteria (an aerobic) that achieve optimum
condition because of the temperature, time and pH were met by nutrients. Therefore, the bacteria in the solution
becomes higher in number [12]. The optimum conditions is obtained by soaking duration of 48 hours, subsequently,
the influence of the mass quantity of lime can be seen in the following figure.
Figure 5 shows the highest absorbance value of 1.698 at 48 hours of soaking duration variation, one kilogram of
fresh leaves and stems of Indigofera tinctoria is put into 5 liters of water and added by 15 grams of lime. The high
absorbance value indicates that the solution is coloured. It is because when the absorbance indicates a value of 0,
then the solution is colourless, and if the value is 1 then the solution is coloured. The higher the absorbance value,
the thicker the generated colour [12].
020022-4
FIGURE 5. Effect of lime to the absorbance value.
In the application of indigo dye to the fabric, there were some tests to measure the quality of dyes. The tools for
the test included crock meter, grey scale, laundry meter and staining scale. Testing for colour fastness was done by
examining the colour changing in compared with the standard, for example the standard created by The Society of
Dyes and Colourists (SDC) in US by the form of grey scale for colour change and staining scale due to smearing
colour scale. Standard of grey scale and staining scale were used to access the colour change on the fastness test to
washing, perspiration, rubbing, ironing, etc. During the application, there is a material to fix the dye to the fiber
which called fixator. In the experiment, some kind fixators were used, i.e. aluminum sulphate or alum, lime, and
palm (Javanese) sugar. The results of application tests are summarized in the Table 1.
TABLE 1. Result of the application tests

Test and the average scores
Mordant Fixator
A B C D
Without Alum 3 4 1-2 2
Lime 3 4-5 2 3-4
Palm sugar 2 4 1 1-2
With Alum 3 4-5 1-2 1-2
Lime 4 4 2 2
Palm sugar 2 3-4 1-2 2-3
Description:
A: Colour fastness to washing; B: Staining test to washing; C: Staining test for wet rubbing;
D: Staining test for dry rubbing.
Scoring: 1) bad, 2) less, 3) average, 4) good, 5) very good.
The use of mordant tends to increase colour fastness to washing. Mordant is able to increase the absorption
process of fiber to the dye. The colour fastness to washing also affected by the bond between the fiber and the dye.
From Table 1, it is also known that lime has a positive effect since the calcium ion of Ca2+ can perform to have a
bond with tannin in the fiber and make the dye molecules in the fiber are higher. This enlargement of dye molecules
cause difficulties to come out from the form of fiber pores and then improve the colour fastness [17]. In addition, the
indigo dye actually has a good colour fastness in compared with the acid or basic dyes [13].
CONCLUSIONS
In the preparation of natural indigo dye by an initial treatment (in cold water, grounded, and hot water) of indigo
leaves, it can be concluded that:
1) Pre-treatment of immersion in cold water for 48 hours resulted in higher net weight and yield in compared with in
the hot water or grounded (before soaking).
020022-5
2) The less the added lime content, the more concentrated the generated blue colour .
3) The value of the highest absorbance of 1.698 was obtained by soaking duration of 48 hours, a kilogram of fresh
leaves and stems of Indigofera tinctoria in 5 liters of water, and the addition of 15 grams of lime.
4) The use of mordant agent will not significantly increase the colour fastness to washing.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The research has been funded by LPPM Universitas Muhammadiyah Surakarta under the scheme of Doctoral
Research Grant 2016. Further research is needed to produce high-quality indigo dye paste. A lot of works needs to
be developed further for potential natural blue colour produced from I. tinctoria plant.
REFERENCES
1. S. Nurmavianti. 2014. Analisis Nilai Tambah Pemanfaatan Indigofera sebagai Bahan Pewarna Alami Batik
Tulis di Kecamatan Imogiri Kabupaten Bantul. Laporan Skipsi Program Studi Agribisnis Jurusan Sosial
Ekonomi Pertanian Fakultas Pertanian Universitas Gadjah Mada. Yogyakarta.
2. P. A. Handayani and A. A. Mualimin. 2009. Pewarna Alami Batik dari Tanaman Nila (Indigofera) dengan
Katalis Asam. Jurnal Bahan Alam Terbarukan ISSN 2303-0623. Prodi Teknik Kimia Fakultas Teknik
Universitas Negeri Semarang. Semarang.
3. T. A. Lee, B. H. Sci, Counsel. 2005. The Food from Hell Food Colouring. The Internet Journal of Toxicology.
Vol 2 No 2. China: Queers Network Research.
4. Y. Adalina., et al. 2010. Sumber Bahan Pewarna Alami sebagai Tinta Sidik Jari Pemilu. Bogor: Pusat
Penelitian dan Pengembangan Hutan dan Konservasi Alam. Badan Penelitian dan Pengembangan Kehutanan
Departemen Kehutanan.
5. USDA Gov, 2016. https://plants.usda.gov/core/profile?symbol=INTI, accessed on 27 August 2016.
6. P. Titiek., 2014. Pengaruh Ekstraksi Zat Warna Alam dan Fiksasi terhadap Ketahanan Luntur Warna pada
Kain Batik Katun. Yogyakarta: Balai Besar Kerajinan dan Batik.
7. J. Y. Kim., et al. 2009. Mining and Identification of a Glucosidase Family Enzyme with High Activity toward
the Plant Extract Indican. Journal of Molecular Catalysis B: Enzymatic. 57: 284-291.
8. S. Herlina., 2007. Daun Indigofera sebagai Zat Warna Alam untuk Tekstil. Laporan Penelitian Instansi
PPPPTK Seni dan Budaya Yogyakarta. Yogyakarta.
9. N. Chanayath, S. Lhieochaiphant, & S. Phutrakul, 2002, Pigment Extraction Techniques from the Leaves of
Indigofera tinctoria Linn. and Baphicacanthus cusia Brem. and Chemical Structure Analysis of Their Major
Components, CMU Journal, Vol. 1(2): 149-160.
10. Y. Minami., T. Kanafuji, and K. Miura., 1996. Purification and Characterization of a ß-glucosidase from
Polygonum tinctorium which Catalyzes Preferentially the Hydrolysis of Indican. Biosci.Biotech.Biochem.
60:147-149.
11. W. F. K. Lestari. 1998. Dyeing Process with Natural Indigo: The Tradition and Technology. Revival Natural
Indigo dye. Sept. 20-29
12. D. Suheryanto., 2012. Optimalisasi Waktu Fermentasi Pembuatan Zat Alam Indigo (Indigofera tinctoria).
6XUDED\D7HNQLN.LPLD831³9HWHUDQ´-DZD7LPXU
13. W. F. K. Lestari & Riyanto. 2002. Pencelupan Zat Warna Nila untuk Batik dengan Proses Ekstraksi Dingin.
Laporan Rutin Balai Besar Penelitian dan Pengembangan Industri Kerajinan dan Batik, Yogyakarta.
14. Sulaiman, et al. 2000. Peningkatan Ketahanan Luntur Zat Warna Alam dengan cara Pengerjaan Iring.
Yogyakarta: Balai Besar Penelitian dan Pengembangan Industri Kerajinan dan Batik.
020022-6
Protection capacity of mosquito repellent ink from citronella (Cymbopogon nardus L.)
and clove leaf oils (Syzygium aromaticum) againts Aedes aegypti
Kun Harismah, Denny Vitasari, Mahmoud Mirzaei, Ahmad Muhammad Fuadi, and Yanur Hendra Aryanto

Protection Capacity of Mosquito Repellent Ink from
Citronella (Cymbopogon nardus L.) and Clove Leaf Oils
(Syzygium aromaticum) Againts Aedes Aegypti
Kun Harismah1,a), Denny Vitasari1,b), Mahmoud Mirzaei2,c), Ahmad Muhammad
Fuadi1,d) and Yanur Hendra Aryanto1,e)
1
Department of Chemical Engineering, Universitas Muhammadiyah Surakarta, Jl. A. Yani Pabelan Kartasura,
Surakarta, Indonesia.
2
Bioinformatics Research Center, Isfahan University of Medical Sciences, Isfahan, Iran.
a)
Corresponding author: kun.harismah@ums.ac.id
b)
denny.vitasari@ums.ac.id, mdmirzaei@pharm.mui.ac.ir, d)ahmad.fuadi@ums.ac.id, e)djanoer.hendra@gmail.com
c)
Abstract. The study of combination citronella and clove oils in mosquito repellent newspaper ink has been done. The
background of this study was there prevalences of diseases such as malaria, zikka, and dengue fever that are carried by
mosquitoes which hunt in the morning, at time while people usually read newspaper. Tests were undertaken in 3 (three)
repetitions to determine the effectiveness of ink (as a control) and two types of mosquito repellent inks that consisted of
ink and citronella-clove leaf oil with ratio of 4:1 and 1:1 of substances that were presumed to have insect repellent
qualities. The results of this study indicated that the mixture of newspaper ink and citronella-clove oil with ratio of 1:4
and 1:1 offer limited protection against mosquitoes bite in the range of 1-5 hours. The efficacy of the citronella-clove leaf
oi mixture as mosquito repellent was between 75.85 to 91.10%. Hece, a blend of citronella and clove leaf oil could be
added to printing ink and could be commercial potential as a short-period mosquito repellent. However, it is important in
disseminating public health messages to emphasize the greater effectiveness of citronella and clove oils-based repellents
ink in areas with risks of mosquito-borne disease.
INTRODUCTION
There are many literatures that demonstrated the therapeutic use of citronella oil and also analyzed the
constituents of the oil simultaneously. The advanced therapeutic studies enabled the systematic and controlled use of
citronella oil as an antifungal agent, anti-parasitic agent, potent mosquito repellent, and antibacterial agent. In
addition, the recent developed expertise and techniques lead to the discovery of several possible varieties of
citronella that consistently provide oils with different compositions either of ceylon type or Java type. According to
[1-3], the industrial interest on essential oils is particularly on their application as fragrances in perfumes, flavor in
food products, additives in pharmaceutical products, and desirable repellent characteristics against mosquitoes.
Tjahjani [4] reported that clove oil is the most effective oil against Aedes species. The protection time can be
considerably prolonged by reducing the release rate of the volatile oil by the addition of clove leaf
(Syzygiumaromaticum) oil that contains of large molecules.
Barnard and Xue [5] determined the responses of three mosquito species which were Aedes albopictus Skuse,
Culex nigripalpus Theobald, and Ochlerotatus triseriatus (Say) to 12 commercial repellent products consisting of
eight natural (primarily plant extracts and/or essential oils) product-based repellents (Bite Blocker [2% soybean oil],
ByGone, GonE!, Natrapel [10% citronella], Neem Aura, Sunswat, MosquitoSafe [25% geraniol], and Repel [26% p-
menthane-3,8-diol]) and four synthetic mosquito repellents (Autan [10% KBR3023], IR3535 [7.5%], Off! [15%
DEET], Skinsations [7% DEET]).
Basically, essential oils are volatile mixtures of hydrocarbons and their repellent activity has been linked to the
presence of monoterpenes and sesquiterpenes. The essential oils commonly used as repellents are derived from
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020023-1–020023-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985468
020023-1
Cymbopogon spp., Ocimum spp. and Eucalyptus spp. [6]. The chemical composition of essential oils from clove
leaves (Eugenia caryophylata) provided from Amboina Island Indonesia was investigated. Essential oil from clove
leaf oil was generated from steam distillation method and its chemical composition was determined by Gas
Chromatography (GC) and Gas Chromatography Mass Spectrometry (GC-MS). The result indicated that the
essential oils mainly contain of 81.06 - 86.04% of eugenol, 11.95-16.16% of ȕ-caryophyllene, and 2.02- 3.05% of
eugenyl acetate [7].
Citronella, which contains citronellal, citronellol, a pinene, citral, geraniol, and limonene, has similar effective
dose with N, N-diethyl-3-methylbenzamide (DEET), but the oils evaporate rapidly that causes efficacy shortage and
short-termed protection [8]. However, the protection duration can be considerably prolonged by reducing the release
rate of the volatile oil by the addition of clove leaf (Syzygium aromaticum) oil which contains large molecules.
Mawbima, a national newspaper, worked with Leo Burnett in Sri Lanka on a campaign to raise awareness and to
stop the spread around National Dengue Week. They discovered that by adding citronella essence that has capacity
to repel mosquitos to the ink, the paper itself would stop mosquitoes biting [9]. The repellent activities of essential
oils and synergistic effects among their components are the main reason to prevent mosquitoes bite. The purpose of
this study was to investigate the addition of citronella and clove leaf oils combination on newspaper ink as mosquito
repellent.
METHODS
Laboratory Tests of Mosquito Repellents

Tests were undertaken in 3 (three) repetitions to determine the effectiveness of ink (as a control) and two types
of mosquito repellent inks that consisted of ink and the mixture of citronella and clove leaf oil with ratio of 4:1 and
1:1. The repellent tests were based on KFDA guidelines modified from World Health Organization Pesticide
Evaluation Scheme [10] and [11]. Twenty five mosquitoes (age 5 days), which had never received a blood meal,
were placed into each test cage. The arms of each volunteer were washed with unscented soap, rinsed with water,
and dried for 5 min. Subsequently, a 1.0 mL of each mosquito repellent ink ((printing ink (Pi) as a control; Pi +
(citronella: clove leaf oils = 1:4), and Pi + (citronella: clove leaf oils = 1:1)) was applied evenly on the right forearm
between the wrist and elbow using a pipette and allowed to dry for approximately 5 min. The untreated left arm was
placed into a test cage for 5 min and the number of mosquitoes landing on that arm was counted. In the case fewer
mosquitoes landed on the untreated arm, the volunteer was excluded from further testing. Repellent-treated right
arms were placed into the test cage for 5 min at intevals of 1 h to 5 h. The number of mosquitoes that landed on or
bit the right arm was recorded every hour.

Researchers in different parts of world have studied plants as material for mosquito repellent. Previous studies
revealed that different plant compounds were included in repellentV¶FRPSRVLWLRQ and they proved effective and eco-
friendly characteristics. Many researchers investigated the compounds in plants that have a variety of properties
including insecticidal activity, repellence to pests, and antibacterial properties against pathogens. Prajapati et al. [12]
investigated the efficacy of essential oils extracted from 10 medicinal plants that were evaluated against Anopheles
stephensi, Aedes aegypti, and Culex quinquefasciatus. It was found that the essential oils of Juniperus macropoda
and Pimpinella anisum significantly intoxicate eggs and larvaes. The essential oil of P. anisum was toxic to 4th instar
larvae of A. stephensi and A. aegypti with equivalent LD95 values of 115.7 μg/ml. The results revealed that essential
oil of Cinnamomum zeylanicum has the highest repellency LD95i.e. 49.6, 53.9 and 44.2 mg/mat against A. stephensi,
A. aegypti and C. quinquefasciatus respectively apart from oviposition-deterrent potential.
In addition, Phasomkusolsil and Soonwera [13] in their experiment tested the efficacy of essential oils of
Cananga odorata, Citrus sinensis, Cymbopogon citratus, Cymbopogon nardus, Eucalyptus citriodora, Ocimum
basilicum and Syzygium aromaticum against Aedes aegypti, Culex quinquefasciatus and Anopheles dirus. The
concentrations of essential oils were prepared in soybean oil at 1%, 5% and 10% (w/v). By using knockdown LC50
and KT50 values against Ae. aegypti, C. quinquefasciatus and An. dirus were calculated. It was found that C. citratus
oil was highly significant to control all tested mosquito species with LC50 <0.1, 2.22 and <0.1%, respectively. At
10% concentration, C. citratus resulted the 100% after 24 hours of application. The results also revealed that C.
citratus is the most efficient compound to control A. aegypti among rest of the essential oils tested.
020023-2
The number of blood sucking mosquitoes that landed on the experimental animals at 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 hours for
various treatment groups is shown in Table 1. The percentage of repellency (R) was calculated by the following
formula [14].
% Repellency = (C-T)/C x 100 (1)
Where C = number of blood fed mosquitoes at a given time in control group, and T = number of blood fed
mosquitoes at a given time in treated group.
TABLE 1. The Protection Capacity of A. aegypti Treatment.

Protection Capacity (%), Duration (hour)
No Ae. aegypti Treatment
1 2 3 4 5 Average
1 Printing ink (Pi) (control) - 13.68 2.01 24.62 25.32 16.41
2 Pi + (Citronella : Clove leaf oils = 1:1) 89.83 91.10 85.42 76.50 68.62 82.29
3 Pi + (Citronella : Clove leaf oils = 1:4) 79.42 75.85 78.72 82.24 81.94 79.63
FIGURE 1. The Protection Capacity of Citronella: Clove Leaf Oil (1:1) Against A. aegypti.
Table 1 shows the numbers of mosquitoes landing on untreated (control) and treated forearms over 5 min. Figure
1 shows the average mosquitoes landing on the untreated forearms over 5 min was 16.41%. Testing of the
repellency of treated forearms by printing ink + (Citronella: Clove leaf oils = 1:1) every hour for 5 h showed
decreased trend over time, from 89.83% at 1 h to 91.10% at 2 h, 85.42% at 3 h, 76.50 % at 4 h, and 68.62% at 5 h,
respectively. In addition, Fig. 1 also shows protection capacity of mosquito ink for 5 hours on average gave 82.29%
of protection against A. aegypti.
Figure 2 shows the average mosquitoe landing on the treated forearms over 5 min was 82.29%. Testing of the
repellency of treated forearms by printing ink + (Citronella: Clove leaf oil = 1:4) every hour for 5 h showed
decreased trend from 79.42% at 1 h to 75.85% at 2 h, after that the increases 78.72% at 3 h, 82.24% at 4 h, and
81.94% occurred at 5 h respectively. The average of repellency was 79.63 %. It can be seen that the main
component of clove leaf oil is eugenol whose boiling points is 254°C [15] so that the protection capacity in this
formula increased as seen in Fig. 2. According to Keziah et al. [16], the combination of the two plants of hexane
fraction and hexane (L. camara) + ethyl acetate (O. gratissimum) showed assumed synergistic actions.
020023-3
FIGURE 2. Protection Capacity of Citronella: Clove Leaf Oil (1:4) Against A. aegypti.
The results of this research showed that maximum repellency against A. Aegypti was obtained by formulation of
printing ink + (Citronella: Clove leaf oils = 1:1) after 5 hours of 68.62% (Table 1 and Fig. 1). The results indicated
that the least effective repellency was observed in this formula because it contained of lower clove leaf oil than
another formula.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 3. ȕ-Caryophyllene (a) and N, N-Diethyl-3-methylbenzamide (DEET) (b).
The phytochemical constituent of clove and citronella oil are appreciable such as eugenol, citronellal, citronellol,
JHUDQLROFLWUDOĮSLQHQH, ȕ-caryophyllene (Fig. 3 and Fig. 4) and limonene. These constituents have properties as
repellent. In addition, Nakahara et al. [17] suggested that linalool (Fig. 5) and citronellal (Fig. 6) contributed
significantly to the total antifungal activity of citronella oil. Furthermore, C. nardus, a plant growing wild in
Thailand and other Asian countries, could become a renewable source for natural fungicides. Its essential oil,
especially the active constituents (citronellal and linalool), is a potent inhibitor (via vapour phase) of various fungi
(Aspergillus candidus, A. flavus, A. versicolor, Eurotium amstelodami, E. chevalieri, Penicillium adametzii, P.
citrinum, P. griseofulvum, P. islandicum) at ambient temperatures. The compounds with lower minimum inhibitory
dose (MID) values against different fungal genera and species could be used as natural alternatives for synthetic
fumigants to protect stored food products.
(a) (b) (c)
FIGURE 4. Citral (a), Limonene (b), and Pinene (c).
020023-4
Kim et al. [18] reported that the combination of lemongrass oil, xanthoxylum oil and vanillin (1:3:1, v: vo: w)
provided 270 min of complete protection duration in compared with 15% DEET (247.5 min of complete protection
duration). The results indicate that mosquito repellent ink combined with citronella and clove leaf oil has better
protection than DEET (Fig. 3).
These results suggest that citronella and clove leaf oil may be used as an alternative to DEET in areas where
mosquitoes are nuisance pests and mosquito repellents are needed solely to promote comfort. However, the use of
any product less effective than DEET should be avoided in areas where mosquito-transmitted disease results in
significant morbidity or mortality.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 5. Structure of Geraniol (a) and Citronellal (b).
(a) (b)
FIGURE 6. Structure of Linalool (a) and Eugenol (b).
In an experiment, Hsu et al. [19] tested the repellency of Cymbopogon essential oils against A. aegypti by using
Y-tube olfactometer. It was found that Citronella grass (Cymbopogon nardus), lemon grass (Cymbopogon citratus),
citral and myrcene produced a low active response towards repellents @400 μL concentration. Similarly, a
combined mixture of citral, myrcene, and citronellal oil in (6:4:1) significantly inhibited host-seeking behavior (76%
active response; 26% treatment response with 40 μL; 42.5%, 18% with 400 μL; and 19%, 23% with 1000 μL).
When the same experiment was performed with DEET, active response was 44%, and treatment response 22% @
400 μL concentration. The results revealed that citronella oil is effective repellent against A. aegyptiin compared to
DEET.
From an economical viewpoint, synthetic chemicals are still more frequently used but these natural products are
more efficient and safer to our environment. Further studies and field trials are required to develop mosquitocidal
formulations. Field trials will evaluate operational feasibility to their use and dermal toxicity.
CONCLUSIONS
1. Preliminary data on repellency against A. aegypti indicated that the mixture of newspaper ink and citronella-
clove oils with ratio of 1:4 and 1:1 offer limited protection against mosquitoes bite with a range of duration of 1-
5 hours.
2. The efficacy of the mixture of citronella-clove leaf oil as mosquito repellent ranges between 75.85% to 91.10%.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The authors would like to express gratitude to SOLOPOS for providing the printing ink and also for Tunjung
Setyawan and Esti Rahayu for their technical assistances.
REFERENCES
1. T.M. Katz, Miller, J.H., Hebert, A.A. Insect repellents: Historical perspectives and new developments. J. Am.
Acad. Dermatol., 58: 865-871 (2008).
020023-5
2. A. Simic, A. Rancic, M.D. Sokovic, M. Ristic, S. Grujic-Jovanovic, J. Vukojevic, P.D. Marin, Pharmaceutical
Biology. 46: 437- 441 (2008).
3. C. F. Silva, F.C. Moura, M.P. Mendes, F.L.P. Pessoa, Brazilian J. of Chem. Eng. 28: 343-350 (2011).
4. S. Tjahjani. Proc ASEAN Congr Trop Med Parasitol; 3:33±37 (2008).
5. D. R. Barnard., and R-D Xue. Journal of Medical Entomolog 41(1), 726-730 (2004).
6. S. Bushra and M. Tariq, International Journal of Advances in Biology 1(1): 29-41. (2014).
7. H. J. Sohilait, Science Journal of Chemistry, 3(6): 95-99 (2015).
8. M. F. Maia, and S. J. Moore, Malaria Journal, 10(Suppl 1): S11 (2011).
9. L. Dearden, 2014. The newspaper that saves lives-Sri Lankan paper fights dengue with mosquito-repellent ink.
http://www.independent.co.uk/news/world/asia/the-newspaper-that-saves-lives-sri-lankan-paper-fights-
dengue-with-mosquito-repellent-ink-9576020.html. Accessed at 24 October (2016).
10. World Health Organization Pesticide Evaluation Scheme (WHOPES), Geneva,Switzerland, (2006).
11. J. K. Yoon, K.C. Kim, Y. Cho, Y.D. Gwon, H. S. Cho, Y. Heo, K. Park, Y. W. Lee, M. Kim, Y.K. Oh, Y. B.
Kim, Journal of Parasitology Research, 2015: 1-6 (2015).
12. V. Prajapati, A.K, Tripathi, and K.K. Aggarwal, and S.P.S. Khanuja, Bioresource Technol. 96: 1749-1757
(2005).
13. S. Phasomkusolsil and M. Soonwera, Southeast Asian J Trop Med Public Health. 42(5): 1083-1092 (2011).
14. C. O. Esimone, A. A. Attama, G, Ngwu, C. A. ILoabanafo, M. A. Momoh and L. O. Onaku, Journal of
Pharmacy Research, 4(10): 3442-3444 (2011).
15. Giuliani, F. "The Composition, Structure, Sources, and Applications of Eugenol," Essay: Vol. 12, Article 19.
Available at: http://dc.cod.edu/essai/vol12/iss1/19 (2014).
16. E. A. Keziah, E.N. Nukenine, S.P.Y. Danga, and C.O. Esimone, Journal of Mosquito Research, 6(23): 1-10
(2016).
17. K. Nakahara, N. S. Alzoreky, T. Yoshihashi, H. T. T. Nguyen, G. Trakoontivakorn, Japan Agricultural
Research Quaterly, 37(4): 249-252 (2003).
18. S. Kim, J.S. Yoon, S.J. Baeck, S.H. Lee, Y.J. Ahn, and H.W. Kwon, J Med Entomol; 49(4): 876-885 (2012).
19. W. S. Hsu, J.H. Yen, and Y.S., J Environ Sci Health [B]. 48: 1014-1019 (2013).
020023-6
Cradle-to-grave analysis on batik cabut product to reduce environmental impact
Much. Djunaidi, Ida Nursanti, and Viditwo Ashari Suryadarmawan

Cradle-to-Grave Analysis on Batik Cabut Product to Reduce
Environmental Impact
Much. Djunaidi1, a), Ida Nursanti1, b), Viditwo Ashari Suryadarmawan1, c)
1
Industrial Engineering Department, Universitas Muhammadiyah Surakarta, Jalan Ahmad Yani, Pabelan,
Sukoharjo, Central Java, Indonesia 57162
a)
Corresponding author: much.djunaidi@ums.ac.id
b)
ida.nursanti@ums.ac.id
c)
viditwosuryadarmawan@gmail.com
Abstract. Nowadays, the development of batik industry is growing rapidly. Efforts to protect the environment are
increasing fast as well. This makes both of them go in line. In one of batik producers residing in Kampung Batik
Laweyan, the process of making batik needs raw and supporting materials, both of which contain chemicals potentially
dangerous to the environment. Assessment methods, such as life cycle assessment (LCA) and life cycle cost (LCC), to
determine the value of the environmental impact are, therefore, needed. LCA and LCC are used to assess the level of
product eco-efficiency. The eco-efficiency combines concepts of economic efficiency and efficiency of environmental
resources. Based on assessment of 3,120 pieces of batik cabut product, it is found that scores of life cycle assessment
(SLCA) and of life cycle cost (SLCC) are 4,049.15 points and IDR 146,437,138.29, respectively. Improvements
proposed in this research are by replacing synthetic dyes with natural ones and by substituting wood with LPG. The
proposal can reduce the environmental impact as much as 6.65%.
INTRODUCTION
Life cycle assessment (LCA) has been introduced in the early 1970s. At the time, various types of LCA studies
were applied in some countries, such as Sweden, the UK, Switzerland, and the United States with the use of energy
and waste treatment as major methods. Products that received great attention in the early days of the LCA
application were containers of food and diapers. Topics related to the two products dominated discussions on LCA
at that time being. In the 1970s and 1980s, numerous studies on the life cycle using different methods were carried
out yet without common theoretical framework [1].
According to Westkamper et al. [2], life cycle assessment is a methodology for assessing the environmental
impact and resource consumption associated with the presence of products throughout their life cycle from cradle to
grave and from resources to production, distribution, disposal and recycling. Guinée et al. [3] divided a life cycle
assessment (LCA) into four stages, namely, goal and scope definition, life cycle inventory (LCI), life cycle impact
assessment (LCIA) and interpretation.
Life cycle cost is an economic method for evaluating assets that takes into account all the costs arising from the
ownership, operation, maintenance, and disposal of the assets. It comprises a total discount acquisition costs,
operation and maintenance and disposal of the assets during a certain time period. The estimated value may be very
different from the actual value and prediction with too long time frame can lead to forecasting errors. According to
Turner et al. [4], life cycle cost is an analysis composed of a whole set of costs that are connected to an asset or
project, in order to evaluate the total cost of ownership of the asset. The life cycle cost includes the cost of raw
materials (basic raw materials, chemicals and supporting materials), energy costs, production costs and
transportation costs.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020024-1–020024-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985469
020024-1
METHODOLOGY
The research was conducted on SMEs in the area of Kampung Batik Laweyan. Kampung Batik Laweyan has
been established by the Government of Surakarta as a cultural heritage and has been known as the center of batik
production since the Dutch colonial era. The SMEs in Laweyan produce various types of batik, including batik,
printed batik and batik cabut.
Observations were carried out at CV. Gress Tenan - one of the SMEs in batik in Laweyan ± focusing on the
process of making batik cabut, one of the products featured in Laweyan region. Observations were made with the
approach of cradle-to-grave, where the process starts from the selection of raw materials and finishes at the end use
of the batik product.
In the process of selecting raw materials, data collected covers the types of raw materials, the amount of raw
material usage, the origin of the raw materials, the types of mode of transport used, the distance from the origin of
the raw materials to industrial location and types of energy used. At the stage of the production process, data
collection covers the types of production process, the types of energy used, the amount of energy use and the types
of waste produced. As for the stages of end-use products, data collected include the types of end-use options and the
types of energy.
Data processing were conducted by using SimaPro software version 8.03 for the reasons that the software has
been widely used for the processing of data related to environmental impact, is accurate and science-based and
provides the highest level of transparency among all LCA packages currently available.

This article will discuss the proposed improvements to the production process of batik cabut in reducing the
environmental impact of products from batik cabut. The analysis is conducted from raw materials to product¶V end
of life. The scope of the research can be seen in Fig. 1.
FIGURE 1. Research scope
Raw materials for making batik cabut are divided into three materials, namely, the main raw materials such as
cloth fabric, chemicals used to dye batik and water. The fabric transport distance is 198 kilometres, while the
chemical dye transport distance is 6.8 kilometres. Everyday, the CV. Gress Tenan produces 300 m2 of clothes or
120 pieces with 2.5 m2-size for each piece. In one month, the CV. Gress Tenan produces 3,120 pieces of clothes.
The transportation distance of batik cabut to the consumer is 6.8 kilometres.
Life cycle inventory data are translated into life cycle impact assessment with endpoint recipe method using
software SimaPro version 8.03. The life cycle impact assessment covered the form of impact of climate change to
020024-2
human health, ozone depletion, human toxicity, photochemical oxidant formation, particulate matter formation,
ionising radiation, climate change ecosystems, terrestrial acidification, freshwater eutrophication, terrestrial
ecotoxicity, freshwater ecotoxicity, marine ecotoxicity, agricultural land occupation, urban land occupation, natural
land transformation, metal depletion and fossil depletion.

&OLPDWHFK 2]RQHGH +XPDQ 3KRWRFKH 3DUWLFXODW ,RQLVLQJ &OLPDWHFK 7HUUHVWULDO )UHVKZDW 7HUUHVWULDO )UHVKZDW 0DULQHHF $JULFXOWXU 8UEDQODQ 1DWXUDOOD 0HWDOGHSO )RVVLOGHSO
DQJH+XP SOHWLRQ WR[LFLW\ PLFDOR[LG HPDWWHU UDGLDWLRQ DQJH(FRV DFLGLILFDWL HUHXWURS HFRWR[LFLW HUHFRWR[L RWR[LFLW\ DOODQGRF GRFFXSDWL QGWUDQVI HWLRQ HWLRQ
%DWLN&DEXW 8VDJH 'LVSRVDO6NHQDULR
$QDO\VLQJS
/LIH&\FOH%DWLN

0HWKRG5H&L3H(QGSRLQW+9(XURSH5H&L3H+$&KDUDFWHULVDWLRQ([FOXGLQJLQIUDVWUXFWXUHSURFHVVHV([FOXGLQJORQJWHUPHPLVVLRQV
FIGURE 2. Characterization of the environmental impact assessment
Results on the characterization of the environmental impact output can be seen in Fig. 2. In the figure, the red
diagram shows the cradle-to-gate (material to product), the green color indicates usage, and the yellow color
represents disposal scenario for batik cabut products. The value of the characterization of the environmental impact
is provided in Table 1.
TABLE 1. Assessment result on characteristics of environmental effect
Impact category Unit Total Batik cabut Usage Disposal Scenario
Total Pt 4,049.15 5,191.71 0.49353 -1,143.1
Climate change Human Health Pt 1,181.44 1,469.99 0.13657 -288.69
Ozone depletion Pt 8.64048 11.5163 0.00034 -2.8762
Human toxicity Pt 40.3556 52.5942 0.00792 -12.246
Photochemical oxidant formation Pt 0.08263 0.10812 5.25E-05 -0.0255
Particulate matter formation Pt 442.981 584.088 0.07979 -141.19
Ionising radiation Pt 0.68481 0.91281 2.98E-05 -0.228
Climate change Ecosystems Pt 747.662 930.298 0.08642 -182.72
Terrestrial acidification Pt 2.95972 3.92523 0.00046 -0.966
Freshwater eutrophication Pt 0.33235 0.41278 1.04E-06 -0.0804
Terrestrial ecotoxicity Pt 117.753 156.995 0.00014 -39.242
Freshwater ecotoxicity Pt 0.86238 0.25015 4.06E-06 0.61223
Marine ecotoxicity Pt 0.01404 0.01662 1.75E-06 -0.0026
Agricultural land occupation Pt 574.129 761.152 0 -187.02
Urban land occupation Pt 15.3003 20.1038 0 -4.8035
Natural land transformation Pt -29.011 -38.876 0 9.86508
Metal depletion Pt 90.4516 118.848 0.00759 -28.404
Fossil depletion Pt 854.518 1119.38 0.1742 -265.03
From the Table 1, it can be seen that score of life cycle assessment (SLCA) for environmental impact in cradle-
to-gate scope (i.e. from material to finished product) of batik cabut is 5,191.71 points. In the meantime, score for
usage is 0.49353 points and score for disposal scenario is -1,143.1 points. The life cycle assessment model for batik
cabut can be seen in Fig. 3.
020024-3
S
/LIH&\FOH%DWLN
(3W
S WNP S

%DWLN&DEXW 8VDJH ' LVSRVDO
6NHQDULR
(3W 3W (3W
(NJ P P P 0- P (0- WNP WNP Q Q P (NJ NJ
7 H[WLOHZRYHQ * URXQGLQJ 3ULQWLQJ : DWHUJODVV 3HPEDWLNDQ 3 HZDUQDDQ 3HORURWDQ 7UDQVSRUWDVLNDLQ 7UDQVSRUWDVL 5 HF\FOH/LPEDK 3DUDIILQ /LPEDK ODQGILOO7H[WLOHV 5HF\FOLQJ
FRWWRQ^*/2`_ 2EDW%DWLN 3DUDIILQ/LOLQ 7HUEXDQJ 3HPEXDQJDQ$LU
PDUNHWIRU_
(3W 3W 3W 3W 3W 3W 3W 3W 3W 3W 3W 3W 3W (3W
NJ NJ NJ NJ (0- WNP NJ NJ NJ (NJ NJ
&,$FLG2UDQJH 'LVRGLXP6DOW 3DUDIILQ^*/2`_ /LTXHILHG :RRG0-SHU 7 UXFNW 1DSKWKRO 1D&O :DWHU*ODVV /DQGILOORIWH[WLOHV 5HF\FOLQJ7H[WLOH
PDUNHWIRU_ 3HWUROHXPJDV NJ (8
&RQVHT6 /3*.*
3W 3W 3W 3W 3W 3W 3W 3W 3W 3W (3W
NJ NJ
6RGLXPFKORULGH 6RGLXPVLOLFDWH
SRZGHU^*/2`_ VROLG^*/2`_
PDUNHWIRU_ PDUNHWIRU_
3W 3W
FIGURE 3. Life cycle assessment model for batik cabut
The results of the life cycle impact assessment give comparative life cycle assessment and subsequently resulted
in cradle-to-gate environmental impacts. This is provided in Fig. 4. The same results for cradle-to-grave, meanwhile,
can be seen in Fig. 5.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 4. Score of life cycle assessment of cradle-to-gate case
It can be read from Fig. 4 that cradle-to-gate life cycle assessment score for the material and the production
process is 4,931.355 points and 259.056 points, respectively. Each of these constitutes 95.01% and 4.99%,
correspondingly.
020024-4
(a) (b)
FIGURE 5. Score of life cycle assessment of cradle-to-grave case
Likewise, Fig. 5 shows that the cradle-to-grave life cycle assessment scores for the material, the production
process, the usage and the end of life are 4,931.355 points, 259.055 points, 0.493 points and -1,142.672 points. The
percentage of each of them in the same order, is 121.82%, 6.40%, 0.01% and -28.23%.
Figure 6, on the other hand, provides hot spot analysis for the problem under concern and gives detail of the life
cycle stages that contribute to environmental degradation. Signs in the figure indicate hot spot cycle steps with great
impact on the environment. From the signs in the figure, it is apparent that stages with major influence on the
environment are a cotton cloth, material naphthol, disodium salt, sodium chloride, waterglass, wax/paraffin,
transport of fabrics, the use of wood in the pelorotan process and the burial cloth products.
FIGURE 6. Hot spot analysis
At this stage of life cycle cost, the data on life cycle inventory unit are converted into unit cost. The unit costs are
calculated in IDR. Calculation of the life cycle cost aims to determine the costs incurred to produce 3,120 pieces or
7,800 m2 unplug batik clothes made at CV. Gress Tenan. The costs include the cost of procurement of raw
materials, the cost of production process, the cost of usage and the cost for disposal of products, each of which
amount is IDR 142,727,449.34, IDR 3,237,188.96, IDR 2,550.00 and IDR 469,950.00, respectively. Thus, score for
the life cycle cost equals IDR 146,437,138.29.
020024-5
After processing data on the life cycle stages of batik cabut aided by the Simapro version 8.03, some
improvement alternatives for reducing environmental impact of batik cabut are proposed. The proposal of the
improvements is available in Table 2.
By using the software Simapro version 8.03 with endpoint recipe method, life cycle inventory data are translated
into the life cycle impact assessment. Output of the assessment gives comparison among the conditions of the batik
cabut¶Vlife cycle before the proposed improvements, after the implementation of the improvement alternative #1,
after the implementation of the improvement alternative #2 and after the implementation of the improvement
alternative #3. The comparison can be seen in Fig. 7 and Table 3.
TABLE 2. Improvement alternatives for production process of batik cabut
Improvement
Scenario description
Alternatives
Alternative #1 Replace synthetic dyes with natural dyes with wood remains as energy resources.
Alternative #2 Replace wood with LPG as energy resources with synthetic dyes remain unchanged.
Alternative #3 Replace synthetic dyes with natural dyes and the wood with LPG gas

3W

&OLPDWHFK 2]RQHGH +XPDQ 3KRWRFKH 3DUWLFXODW ,RQLVLQJ &OLPDWHFK 7HUUHVWULDO )UHVKZDW 7HUUHVWULDO )UHVKZDW 0DULQHHF $JULFXOWXU 8UEDQODQ 1DWXUDOOD 0HWDOGHSO )RVVLOGHSO
DQJH+XP SOHWLRQ WR[LFLW\ PLFDOR[LG HPDWWHU UDGLDWLRQ DQJH(FRV DFLGLILFDWL HUHXWURS HFRWR[LFLW HUHFRWR[L RWR[LFLW\ DOODQGRF GRFFXSDWL QGWUDQVI HWLRQ HWLRQ
/LIH&\FOH%DWLN /LIH&\FOH%DWLN$OWHUQDWLI /LIH&\FOH%DWLN$OWHUQDWLI /LIH&\FOH%DWLN$OWHUQDWLI
&RPSDULQJS
/LIH&\FOH%DWLN
S
/LIH&\FOH%DWLN$OWHUQDWLI
S
DQGS

0HWKRG5H&L3H(QGSRLQW+9(XURSH5H&L3H+$:HLJKWLQJ([FOXGLQJLQIUDVWUXFWXUHSURFHVVHV([FOXGLQJORQJWHUPHPLVVLRQV
FIGURE 7. Comparison of life cycle impact assessments among the initial batik and three improvement alternatives
TABLE 3. Comparison of life cycle impact assessment among the initial production process of batik cabut and three alternative processes
Actual life Life cycle of Life cycle of Life cycle of
Impact category Unit
cycle alternative #1 alternative #2 alternative #3
Total Pts 4,049.15 4,038.94 3,786.29 3,779.88
Climate change Human Health Pts 1,181.44 1,180.1 1,022.15 1,021.4
Ozone depletion Pts 8.64048 8.64043 8.64042 8.64043
Human toxicity Pts 40.3556 40.0297 41.1404 40.0297
Photochemical oxidant formation Pts 0.08263 0.08247 0.08256 0.08247
Particulate matter formation Pts 442.981 442.496 442.779 442.496
Ionising radiation Pts 0.68481 0.68582 0.68538 0.68582
Climate change Ecosystems Pts 747.662 746.816 646.864 646.389
Terrestrial acidification Pts 2.95972 2.95522 2.95768 2.95522
Freshwater eutrophication Pts 0.33235 0.33094 0.33175 0.33094
Terrestrial ecotoxicity Pts 117.753 117.748 117.751 117.748
Freshwater ecotoxicity Pts 0.86238 0.24105 0.49396 0.24105
Marine ecotoxicity Pts 0.01404 0.01261 0.01321 0.01261
Agricultural land occupation Pts 574.129 570.534 572.391 570.534
Urban land occupation Pts 15.3003 15.0451 15.1797 15.0451
Natural land transformation Pts -29.011 -29.166 -29.085 -29.166
Metal depletion Pts 90.4516 89.2657 89.9381 89.2657
Fossil depletion Pts 854.518 853.119 853.976 853.194
020024-6
From Table 3, it is clear that LCA of batik cabut has a total score of 4,049.15 points. Replacing production
process of batik cabut with alternative #1 results in a total score of 4,038.94 points. The use of alternative #2 leads
to a total score of 3,786.29 points. Finally, the implementation of alternative #3 gives total score of 3,779.88 points.
FIGURE 8. Comparison on improvement scenarios score
Figure 8 provides comparison among the life cycle of batik cabut with the three options for improvement (that is,
alternative #1, alternative #2 and alternative #3). The figure shows that alternative #1 decreases the environmental
impact by 0.25% compared to 0.00% of the previous batik cabut life cycle. It indicates that the replacement of
synthetic dyes (ZPS) into natural dyes (ZPA) lessens the environmental impact by 0.25%. The implementation of
alternative #2, in the meantime, lowers the environmental impact by 6.49% in comparison with the previous batik
cabut life cycle, showing that the replacement of wood with Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) reduces the
environmental impact by 6.49%. The application of alternative #3, on the other hand, reduces the environmental
impact by 6.65% over the life cycle of initial batik cabut, providing a solid indication that the replacement of
synthetic coloring substance (ZPS) with natural dyes (ZPA) and the substitution of wood with LPG decreases the
environmental impact by 6.65%.
CONCLUSION
Development of batik cabut, a traditionally produced batik in Kampung Laweyan requires attention, especially
that related to environmental protection. Analysis of the production process of batik cabut using LCA approach
provides opportunities for improvement towards a more environmentally friendly batik cabut production. In
particular, it is proposed to use natural dyes instead of synthetic ones and to substitute firewood as an energy source
LPG. Assessment of the three improvement alternatives also indicate a reduction in environmental impact.
REFERENCES
1. Institute of Environmental Sciences, Life Cycle Assessment: A product-oriented method for sustainability
analysis. Introduction aQG5HVRXUFHV7UDLQHU¶V0DQXDO, (2007).
2. E. Westkämper, L. Alting and G. Arndt, Life Cycle Management and Assessment: Approaches and Visions
towards Sustainable Manufacturing, Institut fur lndustrielle Fertigung und Fabrikbetrieb, Universitat Stuttgart,
Germany, (2007).
3. J. B. Guinée, M. Gorrée, R. Heijungs, G. Huppes, R. Kleijn, A. de Koning, L. van Oers, A. S. Wegener, S. Suh,
H. A. Udo de Haes, H. Bruijn, R. de Duin and M. A. J. van Huijbregts. (2002). Handbook on life cycle
020024-7
assessment. Operational guide to the ISO standards. Part III: Scientific background. Kluwer Academic
Publishers, ISBN 1-4020-0228-9, Dordrecht, 692, pp. 2001-2008.
4. L. Turner, P. Way and N. +DVWLQJV³Life Cycle Cost Analysis (LCCA´$$0&R*(2008).
020024-8
Biased random key genetic algorithm with insertion and gender selection for
capacitated vehicle routing problem with time windows
Auliya Noor Rochman, Hari Prasetyo, and Munajat Tri Nugroho

Biased Random Key Genetic Algorithm with Insertion and
Gender Selection for Capacitated Vehicle Routing Problem
with Time Windows
Auliya Noor Rochman1, a), Hari Prasetyo2, b) and Munajat Tri Nugroho2, c)
1
Undergraduate Student at Industrial Engineering Department, Universitas Muhammadiyah Surakarta, Indonesia
2
PUSLOGIN (Center for Logistics and Industrial Optimization Studies), Universitas Muhammadiyah Surakarta
Jl. Ahmad Yani Tromol Pos 1 Pabelan Kartasura, Sukoharjo, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding Author: auliyanoorrochman@gmail.com
b)
hari.prasetyo@ums.ac.id
c)
munajat3n@ums.ac.id
Abstract. Vehicle Routing Problem (VRP) often occurs when the manufacturers need to distribute their product to some
customers/outlets. The distribution process is typically restricted by the capacity of the vehicle and the working hours at
the distributor. This type of VRP is also known as Capacitated Vehicle Routing Problem with Time Windows
(CVRPTW). A Biased Random Key Genetic Algorithm (BRKGA) was designed and coded in MATLAB to solve the
CVRPTW case of soft drink distribution. The standard BRKGA was then modified by applying chromosome insertion
into the initial population and defining chromosome gender for parent undergoing crossover operation. The performance
of the established algorithms was then compared to a heuristic procedure for solving a soft drink distribution. Some
findings are revealed (1) the total distribution cost of BRKGA with insertion (BRKGA-I) results in a cost saving of 39%
compared to the total cost of heuristic method, (2) BRKGA with the gender selection (BRKGA-GS) could further
improve the performance of the heuristic method. However, the BRKGA-GS tends to yield worse results compared to
that obtained from the standard BRKGA.
INTRODUCTION
In industry, many companies such as soft drinks companies, state-owned postal companies, companies of
mineral water, and liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) distribution companies have to ship their products to a number of
consumers. Determination of the most efficient route is one of the problems faced by these companies. The vehicle
must deliver and pick up product/people to/ from a number of places provided each place may only be visited once.
These problems are often referred to as Vehicle Routing Problem (VRP). VRP become an important issue because it
is concerned to obtain minimum distribution costs using the optimum routes.
Some variants of VRP often studied are Capacitated Vehicle Routing Problem (CVRP) and Vehicle Routing
Problem with Time Windows (VRPTW). The main characteristic of CVRP is that the commodity transported must
not exceed the DYDLODEOHYHKLFOH¶Vcapacity and the vehicles could only operate at a specific time. Furthermore, some
methods have been used by the researchers to solve the VRP, such as Genetic Algorithm method [1,2] Simulated
Annealing [3], Harmony Search [4] and Saving Matrix method [5]. Cahyaningsih [6] solved a CVRP in a newspaper
firm using Sweep Algorithm that consists of two phases, clustering and formation of the Nearest Neighbor method.
Furthermore, Hutasoit [7] examined a CVRP route of the distribution of ice beam using the method of Nearest
Neighbor with improvements of the Local Search algorithm. The Nearest Neighbor method is a heuristic method
with a fast capability to solve the problem, but the solution is not necessarily the best solution. In Mukhsinin [8], the
method of Nearest Neighbor and Local Search were also used to resolve a VRPTW problem. In addition to
Heuristic methods, Branch and Bound is still used to resolve cases of CVRP. Exact methods can produce the
solutions but have drawbacks i.e. lengthy computational time. Arunanto & Hintono [9] used Parallel Branch and
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 020025-1–020025-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985470
020025-1
Bound to complete CVPR problem. However, the study of [9] is not efficient because it uses multiple computers to
run simultaneously.
Sembiring [10] examined the VRP at a soft drinks company in Medan. The problem was a VRP with two
constraints i.e. the capacity of the vehicle and the working hours at the distributor or referred to as Capacitated
Vehicle Routing Problem with Time Windows (CVRPTW). In the study, the CVRPTW problem was resolved using
Heuristic Algorithms method. In addition, the VRP and CVRPTW problems could be solved using Metaheuristic
method to obtain a better solution alternative with a faster time. For example, Ant Colony Optimization (ACO)
algorithm has been used in the research of Maryati & Wibowo [11], whereas Artificial Bee Colony (ABC) algorithm
was used in the study of Alam[12]. Both of these methods were implemented to CVRPTW problems and showed
better results.
This study implemented a Metaheuristic method, namely, Biased Random Key Genetic Algorithm (BRKGA) to
solve the problem of CVRPTW present in Sembiring [10]. The implementation of BRKGA method was conducted
by Grasas et al. [13] to solve a Capacitated Open Vehicle Routing Problem (COVRP) related to blood collection
routes, where a vehicle started from a depot and ended at a point of destination other than the depot. In contrast, this
research has designed the BRKGA method with the individual insertion (BRKGA-I) and modification of gender
selection (BRKGA-GS).
METHOD
Problem
In [10], the soft drinks company has to distribute the product to 45 geographically scattered outlets. The delivery
was carried out by a truck with capacity of 130 crates per delivery, and the delivery time must not exceed 480
minutes/day (working hours restriction). The issue arising from the distribution was how to make a set of optimum
routes to minimize the total distribution costs. The problem can be seen more in Fig. 1.
Notations
The notations used are based on the characteristics of the problem on soft drink distribution, as follows:
N : number of points/nodes
S : the number of routes that form the sub
rl : sub route l; l = 1, 2, 3, ..., S
nl : number of outlets in the sub route l; l = 1, 2, 3, ..., S
i : location index for node of origin; where i = 1, 2, 3, ..., nl + 1 or N+ 1 is the outlet; nl+ 1 or N+ 1 is the
depot
j : location index for node of destination; where i = 1, 2, 3, ..., nl + 1 or N+ 1 is the outlet; nl+ 1 or N+ 1 is the
depot; j j Թ
D : Depot
Xij : 1 when a vehicle traveling from node of origin i towards the destination node j, 0 otherwise
Cij : cost for route ij
W : vehicle capacity k
di : demand at point i
p : setup time of vehicle
Yij : 1 when i = nl+ 1, 0 when i Ql+ 1
qi : time of service and time of loading/unloading
tij : time from the outlet i to j
a : allowance distribution
T : total maximum of delivery time
020025-2

FIGURE 1. VRP output visualization
Data required for solving the CVRPTW of the soft drinks company are: (1) the location of each outlet and depot,
(2) the distance and travel time between all outlets and depots and were obtained by using Google Maps, (3) set up
time of the vehicle, the loading time and time of unloading in the depot, (4) average time of service at all outlets for
unloading and loading the product (including administration tasks) (5) the capacity of the vehicle used (6) data of
the demand for each outlet, and (7) total delivery time constraints.
The problem can be formulated as the minimization of the total distribution cost based on a selected route, and
can be seen in Equation 1. Equation 2 is the number of sub route that should be established based on the number of
outlets on the overall demand and capacity of used vehicles.
N 1 N 1
MinZ ¦¦ C
i 1 j zi
ij X ij (1)
¦
N
i 1
d
s (2)
W
The constraints of the problem are working hours and vehicle capacity, and are formulated in Equation 3.
nl 1
§ nl 1
·
¦ ¨¨ d ¦ X i ij
¸ d W ; rl
¸ (3)
i 1 © j zi ¹
Delivery time constraints are represented as Equation 4 where the total delivery time is the addition of set up
time of the vehicle, service time and transportation time from and to the outlets in the route. The total delivery time
must be less than or equal to the time window constraints of 480 minutes/day.
§ nl 1 nl 1 ·
¨ ¦¦ ( X ij (qi tij )) ( pX ijYij ) ¸(1 a) d T ; rl (4)
¨ ¸
© i 1 j zi ¹
Assumptions
Several assumptions were used in this study: (1) Demand from each outlet is already known and its nature is a
constant. (2) The vehicle only visits the outlet once in a route. (3) The average speed of a vehicle used in the soft
020025-3
drink distribution is 35 km/hour. (4) The working hour for each day is 480 minutes. (5) Time to set up a vehicle to
all shippings is 15 minutes and average service time for each outlet is 19 minutes.
Solution Approach
BRKGA is a variant of Random Key Genetic Algorithm (RKGA) that was introduced by Bean[14], followed by
Ericsson & Pardalos [15] and Goncalves & Almeida [16]. One of the advantages of the BRKGA is its flexibility
representing a variety of problems with the use of random numbers (0-1) which ultimately directs the algorithm to
become a problem independent [17,18]
The BRKGA involves a population that consists of P which is the number of the random keys that will develop
from generation to the next generation [18]. In this study, the random numbers represent the order of the outlet. The
process of decoding is the process of translating random numbers into the order of the outlet, which is the random
number sorted from the smallest to the largest, then the sequence of random numbers (1 ± 2 ± 3 ± 4 ± 5) is converted
into initial sequence of random numbers (5 ± 3 ± 1 ± 2 ± 4), based on the outlet from the smallest to the largest.
After the initial population number of P was resurrected and translated into a sequence of the outlet of BRKGA, the
next step is to calculate the value of fitness of each chromosome. The order of the existing outlet is subsequently
split into several sub route based on capacity constraints and the time of delivery. Furthermore, the distribution cost
is calculated from the cost of the first sub route to nth sub route.
Chromosomes are categorized as elite solutions (pe) and the non-elite solutions (p-pe), where the elite solution is
a chromosome with the best fitness value or the lowest distribution costs. The population of the next generation of
(k+ 1) is the result of a copy of the elite solution (pe), the result of a random mutation (pm) and the rest (p-pe± pa m) is
the result of a crossover of two chromosomes randomly selected from the elite and non-elite. The BRKGA mutation
was done to avoid the emergence of solutions that are too fast while the resulting solution is not the most optimal
solution. In the crossover, U is the magnitude of the probability which is used to produce offspring from parents of
the elite [18]. Mechanism of crossover in BRKGA where the value U of 0.7 can be interpreted as the offspring will
inherit the gene of elite parents with the opportunity of 0.7 and 0.3 is an opportunity to produce offspring from
parents of non-elite. This allows the next generation produces an elite solution that is better than the previous elite
solution. In the mechanism of crossover, two parent chromosomes are selected from elite and non-elite randomly.
Random numbers with a length of the chromosome (x) were resurrected as the number code to choose the genes of
the parents of elite and non-elite. When the value of the random numbers generated is less than the value of the
probability of crossover (U) of 0.4, then genes are taken from the parents of the elite and vice versa.
A process of individual insertion has been used to improve existing BRKGA where relatively large numbers of
populations are raised, and two of the best chromosomes of the population were then selected to be part of the first
generation of a population of BRKGA. Population sizes of individual chromosome 10,000 were generated for
individual insertion processes. The insertion was only done at the beginning of the formation of the first generation
at BRKGA, followed with the next procedure of standard BRKGA.
Gender modification on BRKGA (Gender Selection Biased Random Key Genetic Algorithm or BRKGA-GS in
short) was conducted, where the value of the chromosome was defined as a gender. The same modifications have
also been carried out by the previous researcher [19]. Phase crossover on the modification of the gender selection
was done with a slight difference, where the two chromosomes of different gender (gender 1 and gender 2) were
selected from elite and non-elite chromosomes and then the next procedure follows the same steps of the standard
BRKGA. Gender classification in this study was conducted by K-Means Clustering, K-Means Clustering with
mutations and gender groupings based on the order of even and odd numbers. In the modification of K-means
Clustering with a mutation, mutation process was done by inserting P- pe mutants at 200th iteration and its multiples
in order for the process of clustering not hampered, due to the fact that increasing iterations tend to result in
uniformity on population, causing the process of clustering fail to run. On the determination of gender based on odd
and even number, odd chromosome was considered as gender chromosome 1 and a chromosome with an even
number was considered as gender chromosome 2. After programming code for the BRKGA is designed, the code
was sequentially applied to the problem present in [10] and then compared to the Heuristic method already
implemented in the research of [10] to find out the performance of the BRKGA with individual insertion (BRKGA-
I) and the gender selection BRKGA (BRKGA-GS).
020025-4
Parameter settings of BRKGA

The BRKGA method has been solved with software MATLAB version 7.11.0.584 (R2010b), 64-bit (win64) run
RQ D QRWHERRN ZLWK VSHFV ,QWHO &RUH L-2450M @ 2.50 GHz and capacity of 4 GB of RAM. Gonçalves &
Resende [17] recommended parameter settings for BRKGA as they are available in Table 1. Column (a) in Table 1
provides parameters that need to be regulated in the BRKGA, consisting of the size of the population (P), the size of
elite population (pe), the size of mutant population (pm), and elite allele inheritance probability (Ue). The population
size in the recommendation is P = ax, where a is a real number that is greater than or equal to 1 and x is the length of
the chromosome.

TABLE 1. Recommendation of the parameters in the BRKGA [17]
Parameter (a) Description (b) Recommended value (c)
P size of population p = ax, where 1 d a Թ is a constant and x is the
length of the chromosome
pe size of elite population 0.10p d pe d 0.25p
pm size of mutant population 0.10p d pm d 0.30p
Ue elite allele inheritance probability 0.5 d Ue d 0.8

Determination of the parameters was done by testing some combinations of parameters. The total combination of
parameters used is 48 combinations as shown in Table 2. The 48 combinations were made based on the
recommendation of the parameter. The size of the population in this research was made constant in any combination
at 45 outlets. Setting the parameters was carried out by taking a sample of as much as 50 times from any
combination with 700 iterations. The results of testing against the parameter combinations resulted in parameter
settings as follows: P =45; pe= 0.1; pm= 0.3; and Ue= 0.5 with the average distribution cost of Rp 159,053 and
standard deviation of Rp 3,839.
Meanwhile, the BRKGA with the parameter setting 39 only produced a small reduction of distribution cost, and
it takes about 800 iterations to reach a total distribution cost of Rp 165,000. BRKGA without the best parameters
settings required more iteration to obtain solution compared to the BRKGA using the best parameters.
Performance of BRKGA
Modification of the gender selection on the BRKGA carried out by K-means Clustering on MATLAB produces
an average distribution cost of Rp 167,550, whereas the implementation of K-means Clustering with a mutation
produces Rp 167,868. The BRKGA-GS with gender groupings based on the order of even and odd numbers gives an
average distribution cost of Rp 157,967. Clearly, the BRKGA-GS with gender grouping based on the order of even
and odd numbers shows a better result than those of grouping gender based on K-Means Clustering or K-Means
Clustering with a mutation. The results of the three gender modifications are obtained from the average of
computational experiments with a sample of 50 and 1000 iterations.
The results show that the use of a modification of the gender selection does not produce a better solution than the
standard BRKGA. It is in line with the research of Lucena [19] which found that the modification using gender
selection was no better than the standard BRKGA. It is most likely due to the fact that the standard BRKGA already
applied the process of clustering or grouping to chromosomes into elite and non-elite. Gender grouping thus makes
the process of clustering based on elite and non-elite being corrupted and has impacted the results of a crossover.

020025-5
TABLE 2. The combination of setting parameters and average results
Parameter Standard Parameter Standard

Combin Average Kombi- Average
Deviation Deviation
ation P pe pm UH (Rp)
(Rp)
nasi P pe pm UH (Rp)
(Rp)
1 45 0.1 0.1 0.5 161947 3768 25 45 0.2 0.1 0.5 159647 3777
2 45 0.1 0.2 0.5 160387 4044 26 45 0.2 0.2 0.5 159939 3500
3 45 0.1 0.3 0.5 162563 4888 27 45 0.2 0.3 0.5 163467 4517
4 45 0.1 0.1 0.6 161226 4274 28 45 0.2 0.1 0.6 161055 4710
5 45 0.1 0.2 0.6 159793 4385 29 45 0.2 0.2 0.6 159124 4158
6 45 0.1 0.3 0.6 160653 3823 30 45 0.2 0.3 0.6 161810 3340
7 45 0.1 0.1 0.7 161343 3863 31 45 0.2 0.1 0.7 161729 4250
8 45 0.1 0.2 0.7 160843 4873 32 45 0.2 0.2 0.7 159933 4314
9 45 0.1 0.3 0.7 160280 5012 33 45 0.2 0.3 0.7 160221 3410
10 45 0.1 0.1 0.8 161546 4200 34 45 0.2 0.1 0.8 162222 3700
11 45 0.1 0.2 0.8 160491 3772 35 45 0.2 0.2 0.8 160238 5096
12 45 0.1 0.3 0.8 159053 3839 36 45 0.2 0.3 0.8 160342 4366
13 45 0.15 0.1 0.5 160636 3995 37 45 0.25 0.1 0.5 160017 3836
14 45 0.15 0.2 0.5 160958 3858 38 45 0.25 0.2 0.5 159893 4566
15 45 0.15 0.3 0.5 162266 3745 39 45 0.25 0.3 0.5 165584 4827
16 45 0.15 0.1 0.6 161203 3189 40 45 0.25 0.1 0.6 160452 3897
17 45 0.15 0.2 0.6 159727 4578 41 45 0.25 0.2 0.6 160575 3776
18 45 0.15 0.3 0.6 161210 3394 42 45 0.25 0.3 0.6 161939 3822
19 45 0.15 0.1 0.7 160326 3961 43 45 0.25 0.1 0.7 161220 4257
20 45 0.15 0.2 0.7 159246 3358 44 45 0.25 0.2 0.7 160724 3756
21 45 0.15 0.3 0.7 160510 4070 45 45 0.25 0.3 0.7 160786 4553
22 45 0.15 0.1 0.8 160962 4187 46 45 0.25 0.1 0.8 161427 4074
23 45 0.15 0.2 0.8 160252 4743 47 45 0.25 0.2 0.8 159792 4138
24 45 0.15 0.3 0.8 159912 4668 48 45 0.25 0.3 0.8 160593 3492
TABLE 3. The results of the experiment with regards to standard and modified BRKGA
Average cost of Minimum Cost Convergent
Method Gap (Rp)
distribution (50 sample, (7000 iterations) point
(a) (e)
1000 iterations) (Rp) (b) (Rp) (c) (iterations) (d)
Standard BRKGA 155,767 151,177,00 3465 (0)
BRKGA-I 154,671 143,481,00 4906 7696
BRKGA-GS (K-mean Clustering) 167,550 160,834,00 4320 (9657)
BRKGA-GS (K-mean Clustering +
mutation) 167,868 157,633,00 3640 (6456)
BRKGA-GS (odd-even order) 157,967 152,338,00 5274 (1161)
( ) : the cost of distribution does not indicate efficiency
From Table 3 column (b), the method of BRKGA-I generated the lowest average distribution cost compared to
four other methods including the standard BRKGA method. The average cost of BRKGA-GS with K-Means
Clustering and BRGKA-GS using K-Means Clustering with a mutation are only slightly different. Meanwhile, the
BRKGA-GS with a grouping of even and odd numbers produces a better average cost than the other two gender
modifications. The minimum distribution costs obtained after 7000 iterations can be seen in column (c).
Solutions resulted from the implementation of BRKGA-I using data set from [10] to solve the CVRPTW
problem under study is available in Table 4 alongside solutions from [10]. The heuristic method used by [10]
generated a sequence of sub route as seen in columns (a) in Table 4. The sub-route was generated based on the
capacity constraints and the time of delivery. In column (c) of Table 4, some sub-routes generated by the heuristic
method did not meet the delivery time constraint, thus the solution was not feasible to be applied. In contrast, the
sub-routes generated from the implementation of the BRKGA-I can meet the capacity constraint and the delivery
time constraints.
The application of the heuristic in [10] resulted in a distribution cost of Rp 236,500. Compared to this, the
BRKGA-I produced a better solution, as the latest produced Rp 143,600 distribution cost. This means that the
implementation of the BRKGA-I resulted in Rp 92,000 (or 39%) financial saving.
020025-6
TABLE 4. The results of the heuristic method and the BRKGA-I
Total
Total time
Demand time Sub Demand
Heuristic method BRKGA-I Sub route
(Crates) route (Crates)
(a) (d) (minute)
(b) (minute) (e)
(d)
(c)
D-8-3-2-4-5-1-D 125 317,5 D-5-35-26-29-15-17-20-28-D 128 328,5
D-6-12-11-9-7-10-D 126 303,0 D-6-3-24-22-23-25-21-38-D 125 325,7
D-14-16-15-17-18-13-19-21-D 128 540,9 D-14-41-19-42-33-40-D 114 297,7
D-39-20-22-23-25-38-26-28-D 129 614,0 D-36-31-10-16-18-9-30-D 122 295,8
D-32-33-35-34-30-31-29-D 129 555,4 D-4-8-7-27-32-37-34-D 129 319,3
D-41-42-40-37-36-44-24-D 130 634 D-11-39-1-2-12-43-D 130 286,9
D-27-43-45-D 41 148,2 D-44-45-13-D 60 175,1
CONCLUSION
This research has implemented standard BRKGA, BRKGA-I, and BRKGA-GS to solve a CVRPTW problem
using a data set available in [10]. Based on the best parameter settings, the BRKGA-I results improved the standard
BRKGA. Gender modification has been done with 3 ways of grouping i.e. K-Means Clustering, K-Means Clustering
with mutations and gender groupings based on the order of even and odd numbers. The gender grouping mechanism
based on even and odd numbers generates a better solution than a modification of the gender with other
mechanisms. Gender modification with K-means Clustering and K-means Clustering with mutation do not show
optimum results. Furthermore, the BRKGA-GS produces higher average distribution cost compared to the standard
BRKGA. The BRKGA-I produced a better solution compared to the heuristic method using the same data set. Seen
from the viewpoint of the cost of distribution, the BRKGA-I saves the cost of distribution by 39% in comparison to
the results of the heuristic method used in the study of [10].
REFERENCES
1. Luthfi M, Isa M, Matematika F, Alam P, Teknologi I, Nopember S, et al. Algoritma Genetika Ganda untuk
Capacitated Vehicle Routing Problem. J SAINS DAN SENI ITS. 2015;4(2):2±7.
2. Putri FB, Mahmudy WF, Ratnawati DE, Informatika T, Teknologi P, Komputer I, et al. Penerapan
Algoritma Genetika Untuk Vehicle Routing Problem with Time Window (VRPTW) Pada Kasus Optimasi
Distribusi Beras Bersubsidi. DORO Repos J Mhs PTIIK Univ Brawijaya. 2015;5(1):1±9.
3. Lukitasary W, Suyanto, Dayawati RN. Capacitated vehicle routing problem time windows (cvrptw) dengan
menggunakan algoritma improved ant colony system (iacs) dan algoritma simulated annealing(sa).
Universitas Telkom; 2011.
4. Lydia PR, Suyanto, Dayawati RN. Capacitated vehicle routing problem time windows (cvrptw)
menggunakan algoritma harmony search. Universitas Telkom; 2011.
5. Faiz E, El F. Studi Komparasi Penyelesaian Capacitated Vehicle Routing Problem ( Cvrp ) Dengan Metode
Saving Matrix Dan Generalized Assignment. J Mhs Mat. 2013;1(4):276±9.
6. Cahyaningsih WK. Penyelesaian Capacitatedvehicle Routing Problem (Cvrp) Menggunakan Algoritma
Sweep Untuk Optimasi Rute Distribusi Surat Kabar Kedaulatan Rakyat. In: Seminar Nasional Matematika
dan Pendidikan Matematika UNY. 2015. p. 1±8.
7. Hutasoit CS, Susanty S, Imran A. Penentuan Rute Distribusi Es Balok Menggunakan Algoritma Nearest
Neighbour dan Local Search. Reka Integr. 2014;2(2):268±76.
8. Mukhsinin ALI, Imran A, Susanty S. Penentuan Rute Distribusi CV . IFFA Menggunakan Metode Nearest
Neighbour dan Local Search. Reka Integr. 2013;1(2):129±38.
9. Arunanto FX, Hintono A. Aplikasi Paralel Branch and Bound Untuk Menyelesaikan Vehicle Routing
Problem Menggunakan Pustaka Mpich Dan Glpk. JUTI J Ilm Teknol Inf [Internet]. 2011;9(1):1. Available
from: http://juti.if.its.ac.id/index.php/juti/article/view/61
10. Sembiring AC. Penentuan rute distribusi produk yang optimal dengan menggunakan algoritma heuristik
020025-7
pada pt. coca-cola bottling indonesia medan. Tugas Akhir. Universitas Sumatera Utara; 2008.
11. Maryati I, Wibowo HK. Optimasi penentuan rute kendaraan pada sistem distribusi barang dengan ant colony
optimization 1. In: Seminar Nasional Teknologi Informasi & Komunikasi Terapan 2012 (Semantik). 2012.
p. 163±8.
12. Alam MZ. Menggunakan Modifikasi Algoritma Artificial Bee Colony. Skripsi. Universitas Syarif
Hidayatullah Jakarta.; 2013.
13. Grasas A, Ramalhinho H, Pessoa LS, Resende MGC, Caballé I, Barba N. On the improvement of blood
sample collection at clinical laboratories. BMC Health Serv Res [Internet]. 2014;14(1):12. Available from:
http://www.biomedcentral.com/1472-6963/14/12%5Cnhttp://www.scopus.com/inward/record.url?eid=2-
s2.0-84892187241&partnerID=tZOtx3y1
14. Bean JC. Genetic Algorithms and Random Keys for Sequencing and Optimization. ORSA J Comput
[Internet]. 1994 May 1;6(2):154±60. Available from: http://dx.doi.org/10.1287/ijoc.6.2.154
15. Ericsson M, Pardalos PM. A Genetic Algorithm for the Weight Setting Problem in OSPF Routing. J Comb
Optim. 2002;6(3):299±333.
16. Gonçalves JF, de Almeida JR. A Hybrid Genetic Algorithm for Assembly Line Balancing. J Heuristics
[Internet]. 2002;8(6):629±42. Available from: http://dx.doi.org/10.1023/A:1020377910258
17. Gonçalves JF, Resende MGC. Biased random-key genetic algorithms for combinatorial optimization. J
Heuristics [Internet]. 2011;17(5):487±525. Available from: http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s10732-010-9143-1
18. Prasetyo H, Fauza G, Amer Y, Lee SH. Survey on applications of biased-random key genetic algorithms for
solving optimization problems. 2015 IEEE International Conference on Industrial Engineering and
Engineering Management (IEEM). 2015. p. 863±70.
19. Lucena ML, Andrade CE, Resende MGC, Miyazawa FK. Some extensions of biased random-key genetic
algorithms. XLVI Simpósio Bras Pesqui Operacional [Internet]. 2014;28(3):2469±80. Available from:
http://web2-
clone.research.att.com/export/sites/att_labs/people/De_Andrade_Carlos_Eduardo/library/publications/Lucen
a2014_Extensions_BRKGA.pdf
020025-8
Performance evaluation of court in construction claims settlement of litigation
Kemala Hayati, Yusuf Latief, Ayomi Dita Rarasati, and Arief Siddik

Performance Evaluation of Court in Construction Claims
Settlement of Litigation
Kemala Hayati1, a), Yusuf Latief1, b), Ayomi Dita Rarasati1, c), Arief Siddik1, d)
1
Civil Engineering Department, University of Indonesia, Depok, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: k.hayati@yahoo.com
b)
Latief73@eng.ui.ac.id
c)
ayomi@eng.ui.ac.id
d)
an_siddik@yahoo.com
Abstract. Claim construction has a major influence on the implementation of projects, such as the cost and time. The
success of the construction project is highly dependent on the effective resolution of claims. Although it has been
recognized that litigation or court is not the best way because it may reduce or eliminate profits and damage the
relationship, it is a method of resolving claims and disputes that is common in the world of construction. The method of
resolving claims and disputes through litigation or court may solve the problem in an alternative method, namely the
implementation of the judgment which can be enforced effectively against the losing party and the ruling which has the
force of law of the country where the claims and disputes are examined. However, litigation or court may take longer
time and require high cost. Thus, it is necessary to identify factors affecting the performance of the court and to develop a
system capable of improving an existing system in order to run more effectively and efficiently. Resolution in the claims
management of construction projects with the method of litigation is a procedure that can be used by the courts in order
to shorten the time in order to reduce the cost. The scope of this research is directed to all parties involved in the
construction, both the owners and the contractors as implementers and practitioners, as well as experts who are
experienced in construction law.
INTRODUCTION
Construction work is a series of planning, implementation, and supervision activities including civil,
architectural, mechanical and electrical, and environmental arrangements along with the accessories respectively for
the realization of a building or other physical forms. The development of infrastructure or construction is normally
done by a service provider through a process of procurement of goods and services performed by the service user,
which is then followed by the signing of a construction work contract between service users and service providers
[1]. Based on data from the Central Statistics Agency (BPS), the contribution of the construction industry sector to
Gross Domestic Product is sizable, 8.79% from 2004 to 2013 with an average growth of 7.35%. The number of
companies engaged in the construction industry increased rapidly with an average growth rate of 17% per year. By
2014, the number has reached 108,583 companies. This shows the strategic role of the construction industry as a
driver of the national economy [2].
Construction projects become increasingly complex with new standards, advanced technology, and the addition
desired changes by project owners. Although the successful completion of a project is highly dependent on the
cooperation between contractors, consultants, and project owners, problems and disputes always arise because of
their disagreements on various aspects of the design and construction [3]. The construction industry is very
competitive. The parties, such as contractors, consultants and project owners, often find themselves in a mess of
litigation, with each side blaming the other party. Therefore, the issue of claims and construction law is an important
issue [4].
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030001-1–030001-5; doi: 10.1063/1.4985471
030001-1
Construction Claim
In the construction world, claim is an action requesting compensations for rights that have not been fulfilled by
presenting evidence and arguments of the parties which believe that their rights have not been accepted. A claim in
the construction world will emerge when one party believes that the other party does not fulfill its obligations [5].
The construction industry is complex and competitive; the parties involved in the industry have different views,
capabilities, and levels of knowledge in construction processes. Within the scope of this complex work, each party
from various professions has a goal and hope. The different perceptions of the parties, if not managed properly, will
turn into disputes. Dispute is one of the main factors that prevents successful completion of a construction project
that requires a claim [6].
Claim construction has a major influence in the implementation of projects such as the cost and time [7]. So, the
success of a construction project is highly dependent on the effective resolution of claims [8].
Method of Resolving Construction Claims

Although it has been generally recognized that litigation or court is not the best way to resolve claims because it
may reduce or eliminate profits and damage relationship, this method of resolving claims and disputes is common in
the construction world [9]. The method of resolving claims and disputes through litigation or court may solve the
problem in an alternative method, namely the implementation of the judgment which can be enforced effectively
against the losing party and the ruling which has the force of law of the country where the claims and disputes are
examined. However, litigation or court may take longer time and require high cost [10].
Alternative methods for resolving claims and other disputes without going through the courts in general are
arbitration, mediation, third-party neutral, mini-trials, mediation, partnerships, Early Neutral Evaluation (ENE) and
the Dispute Review Boards (DRB) [11]. In Indonesia, the alternative methods for resolving claims and disputes
without litigation or trial have been set in the Law of the Republic of Indonesia Number 30 of 1999 on Arbitration
and Alternative Dispute Resolution, which consist of:
a. Negotiation, which is a direct meeting between the parties and the results are set forth in a written agreement;
b. Mediation, which is an alternative method for settling disputes or differences of opinions with the help of one
or more advisory experts or mediators;
c. Arbitration, which is how the settlement of civil disputes outside the courts of general jurisdiction based on
the arbitration agreement is made in writing by the parties to the dispute.
The method of resolving claims and disputes without litigation or court has an advantage in terms of shorter time
required. So, it does not require high cost; it is not published or closed so that the information or business data
confidential are not known publicly and aspects of the win-win solution are prioritized. However, this method also
has a drawback in the implementation of decisions because they do not have an effective forced power; they are
highly dependent on the good faith of both parties to carry out the decision voluntarily [10].
Court Performance
Performance is something that is achieved, related to demonstrated achievement and employability (KBBI
Online Edition III). Gandasubrata [12], in Professional Ethics of Judges Indonesia, further expands the term into
productivity, efficiency and quality. Productivity is output, or the efficient use of resources (labor, material and
information) in producing services. With regard to the court, the court must produce a fair decision and generate a
fair decision supported by all citizens, in accordance with the duties and position, and the whole community,
especially people seeking justice [13].
Performance can be defined as the ability of the court to run its function or achievement, shown by the court to
meet the needs of the public and the implementation of the provisions of the legislation. Ideally, an efficient court
performance will be achieved if the service bureaucracy can provide input services, such as cost and service time.
Similarly, in terms of the output of service, the bureaucracy should ideally be able to provide quality service
products, especially from the aspect of cost and service time [14].
In accordance with the guidelines for the reporting of performance accountability of government agencies as
stipulated in the decree the Head of State Administration Institution No. 239 / IX / 6/8/2003, the court performance
is evaluated through the performance indicators of inputs (input), exit (output) and results (outcomes). The
evaluation is conducted by comparing the target and the realization of each performance indicator targets and
030001-2
activities during the year. Performance measurement is a systematic and continuous process to assess the success or
failure of the implementation of program activities in accordance with the policy, to achieve the goals and objectives
set in realizing the vision and mission of the organization. Performance measurement is a method to assess the
progress that has been achieved compared with the goals and objectives that have been set. Performance
measurement is not intended as a mechanism to reward or punish but as a means of communication and
management to improve organizational performance.
In order to improve performance in the resolution of civil cases in state courts, Tampubolon [13] suggested that:
a. Civil procedural law should be improved by considering the condition of Indonesian people who still do not
understand the law;
b. The use of technology in the process of administrative cases should be increased.
Resolution in the Claims Management of Construction Project with Litigation Method

Resolution in the claims management of construction projects with the method of litigation is a procedure that
can be used by the courts to shorten the time required, so that the cost can be reduced. The aim of this research is to
develop the resolution in the management of construction project claims with the method of litigation to obtain more
optimal results of litigation claims or demands through the courts.
OBJECTIVE AND METHODOLOGY

The objectives of this research are to identify the factors affecting the performance of the court and as the need to
develop a system capable of improving an existing system in order to perform more effectively and efficiently, and
to define the types, causes and frequency that cause litigation or court taking longer time and higher cost, and to
develop a resolution in the claims management of construction projects with the method of litigation to improve the
performance of court litigation.
To achieve the research objectives, questionnaire surveys were used to gather all data. The questionnaires were
distributed to 40 respondents who had a great contribution in the field of law and construction. The analytical
method used is the analysis of Frequency Index (FI).
There are two sections in the questionnaire:
i. The first section consists of questions related to current issues in court performance related to construction
claims, the problems encountered, and resolution methods and factors that affect the performance of the court in
the implementation of the resolution of claims.
ii. The second section consists of questions related to issues surrounding the reasons for the claims.

Based on the calculation of Frequency Index (FI) and the ranks of factors that affect the performance of the court
in the implementation of the resolution of the claims, the main factors considered were described in Table 1. Table 1
shows the factors that affect the performance of the court in the implementation of the resolution of the claims.
$FFRUGLQJ WR WKH FDOFXODWLRQ RI )UHTXHQF\ ,QGH[ ), ³$SSRLQWPHQW RI WKH MXGJHs, clerks and bailiffs in the
SUHSDUDWLRQVWDJHVIRUWKHWULDOE\WKH3UHVLGHQWRIWKH&RXUW´LVWKHPDLQIDFWRUWhat affects the performance of the
court. The sHFRQGLVWKH ³'HWHUPLQDWLRQRIWKHGDWH RIWKH WULDOE\WKHMXGJH´ and WKHWKLUGLV´ the absence of an
REOLJDWLRQRIWKHGLVSXWHSDUWLHVXVLQJWKHVHUYLFHVRIDODZ\HU´
The common causes of dispute / claim construction, based on the calculation of Frequency Index (FI), are shown
by TDEOH$FFRUGLQJWRWKHFDOFXODWLRQRI)UHTXHQF\,QGH[),³&KDQJHVLQVSHFLILFDWLRQVDQGSURMHFWFRVWVWKDW
GRQRWILWLQWKHFRQWUDFW´LVWKHPDLQIDFWRUWKDWFDXVHs the dispute / claim construction. The second factor is ³the
LQFUHDVLQJ QXPEHU RI FODLPV SHU FRQWUDFW FODXVHV´ and the third factor LV ´ many problems occur that affect the
SURMHFWFRPSOHWLRQ´
This research is motivated by the increasing number of claims incurred in the construction industry. The
construction industry is a complex and competitive; the parties involved have views, capabilities, and different
levels of knowledge in the process of construction. Within the scope of this complex work, parties from various
professions had a goal and hope to get benefits. Due to different perceptions of the the parties, conflicts often arises.
If they are not managed properly, they will turn into disputes. Dispute is one of the main factors that prevents the
successful completion of a construction project that requires a claim.
030001-3
TABLE 1. Frequency Index for factors that affect the performance of the court in the implementation of the resolution of claims
Factors that affect the performance of the court in The Frequency Percent Rank
Construction Claims Settlement of Litigation (FI) (%)
Appointment of the judges, clerks and bailiffs in the preparation 0.9 90 1
stages for the trial by the President of the Court.
Determination of the date of the trial by the judge 0.89 89 2
The absence of an obligation of the dispute parties using the 0.85 85 3
services of a lawyer
Integrated mediation procedure in courts 0.83 83 4
Preparation of the legal considerations by the assembly by calling 0.82 82 5
expert witnesses
The use of technology is still lacking 0.81 81 6
Differences procedure in respect of an appeal, and judicial review 0.78 78 7
The Making of Minutes of Hearing is often too late 0.69 69 8
Execution of decisions are often delayed 0.66 66 9
The Making of Minutes of the trial decision g is often too late 0.66 66 9
Judicial mafia 0.65 65 10
Repeated calls to the parties, due to the absence of one party, 0.6 60 11
without a clear deadline
The exercise period of the trial indefinitely 0.58 58 12
The division of the burden of proof that is only found in the 0.54 54 13
plaintiff
The judge is passive, just check the extent of the scope of the 0.51 51 14
lawsuit
An appeal and reconsideration 0.49 49 15
TABLE 2. Results of Frequency Index (FI) common cause of dispute / claim construction
Common Cause of Dispute / Claim Construction Fequency Percent Rank

(FI) (%)
Changes in specifications and project costs that do not fit in the
contract 0.88 88 1
The increasing number of claims per contract clauses 0.87 87 2
Many problems occur that affect the project completion 0.86 86 3
Misunderstandings and conflicts of interest among stakeholders 0.83 83 4
Damage caused due to negligence of the owner of the project. 0.72 72 5
Contract clause allows the project owner to make changes at any 0.72 72 6
time without the approval of the project contractors
Contractor waive his right to the conditions of the contract to 0.59 59 7
receive compensation for their extra work
Owner give false testimony and not in accordance with the 0.50 50 8
contract
Although it has been recognized that litigation or court is not the best way because it may reduce or eliminate
profits and damage the relationship, this method for resolving claims and disputes is common in the construction
world. Resolving claims and disputes through litigation or court may solve the problem, which could be an
alternative method, namely the implementation of the judgment which can be enforced effectively against the losing
party and the ruling which has the force of law of the country where the claims and disputes are examined. However,
litigation or court may take longer time and require high cost.
030001-4
Based on this study, the main factors that affect the performance of the court causing it to take longer time and
UHTXLUH KLJK FRVW DUH ³aSSRLQWPHQW RI WKH MXGJH¶V FOHUNV DQG EDLOLIIV LQ WKH SUHSDUDWLRQ VWDJHV IRU WKH WULDO E\ WKH
3UHVLGHQWRIWKH&RXUW´; WKH³dHWHUPLQDWLRQRIWKHGDWHRIWKHWULDOE\WKHMXGJH´; and´the absence of an obligation of
the dispute parties using the services of DODZ\HU´7KHPDLQIDFWRUVWKDWFDXVHWKHGLVSXWHFODLPFRQVWUXFWLRQDUH
³cKDQJHV LQ VSHFLILFDWLRQV DQG SURMHFW FRVWV WKDW GR QRW ILW LQ WKH FRQWUDFW´; ³the increasing number of claims per
FRQWUDFWFODXVHV´ andthe ´many problems occur that affect the SURMHFWFRPSOHWLRQ´
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The authors would like to acknowledge the IXQGLQJVXSSRUWIURPWKH8QLYHUVLW\RI,QGRQHVLD¶V3,77$JUDQW. We
also thank the revieweres of this paper for their invaluable comments on this paper.
REFERENCES
1. Law No. 18 of 1999 on Construction, Article 1 Paragraph (2), (3), (4) and (5).
2. http://www.republika.co.id/berita/koran/opini-koran/14/11/07/nenq4728-konstruksi-jadi-penggerak. Accessed
on November 07, 2014.
3. M. A. U. Abdul-Malak, M. M. H. El-Saadi and M. G. Abou-Zeid. (2002). Process model for administrating
construction claims. Journal of Management in Engineering, 18, 84-94.
4. A. Singh and I. Sakamoto. (2001). Multiple claims in construction law: educational case study. Journal of
Professional Issues in Engineering Education and Practice, 127(3), 122-129.
5. G. K. Kululanga, W. Kuotcha, R. McCaffer and F. Edum-)RWZH &RQVWUXFWLRQ FRQWUDFWRUV¶ FODLP
process framework. Journal of Construction Engineering and Management, 127, 309-314.
6. E. Cakmak and P. I. Cakmak. (2014). An analysis of causes of disputes in the construction industry using
analytical network process. Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, 109, 183-187.
7. V. Chovichien and K. Tochaiwat. (2006, January). ,QIRUPDWLRQV\VWHPIRUPDQDJLQJHPSOR\HU¶VFRQVWUXFWLRQ
claims. Paper presented at the Technology and Innovation for Sustainable Development Conference, Bangkok,
Thailand.
8. M. A. Sgarlata and C. J. Brasco. (2004). Successful claims resolution through an understanding of the law
governing allocation of risk for delay and disruption. Construction Management Association of America.
9. S. Pinnell. (1999). Partnering and the management of construction disputes. Disputes Resolution Journal, 54, 1,
16-22.
10. N. Yasin, (2008). Know the construction claims and dispute settlement construction (2nd edition). Jakarta: PT.
Gramedia Pustaka Utama.
11. K. M. J. Harmon. (2003). Resolution of construction disputes: a review of current methodologies. Journal of
Leadership and Management in Engineering, 3(4), 187-201.
12. P. S. Gandasubrata. (1998). Professional ethics of Indonesia judges. Puslitbang MA-RI: Etika, 21.
13. M. B. K. Tampubolon, (2008). Factors that influence the performance of the courts in the resolution of civil
cases in the District Court. Thesis, University of Diponegoro, Semarang, Indonesia.
14. H. Monoarfa (n.d.). The effectiveness and efficiency of public service delivery: a review of the performance of
government agencies.
030001-5
Utilization of wheel dop based on ergonomic aspects
Wiwin Widiasih, Hery Murnawan, and Danny Setiawan

Utilization of Wheel Dop Based on Ergonomic Aspects
Wiwin Widiasih1,a), Hery Murnawan1 and Danny Setiawan1
1
Industrial Engineering Department, Faculty of Engineering, University of 17 Agustus 1945 Surabaya, 60118,
Surabaya Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: wiwin_w@untag-sby.ac.id
Abstract. Time is an important thing in life. People need a tool or equipment to measure time which is divided into two
types, namely clock and watch. Everyone needs those kinds of tool. It becomes an opportunity for manufacturer to build
a business. However, establishing a business by depending on the demand is not enough, it is necessary to take a
consideration of making innovation. Innovation is a difficult thing to find out, but it is not impossible to do it. By creating
an innovative product, it can be a strategy to win the competitive market. This study aimed to create an innovative
product based on the ergonomic aspects, which was by utilizing wheel dop. This methodology consisted of pre-study,
planning and product development, and product analysis. This product utilized wheel dop and was made based on the
ergonomic aspects.
RESEARCH BACKGROUND
According to [1], the physical form or design of a product is an unquestioned determinant of its marketplace
success. A good design attracts consumers to a product, communicates to them, and adds value to the product by
increasing the quality of the usage experiences associated with it. However, product¶V design is rarely discussed [1].
In a survey participated by senior marketing managers, 60% respondents mentioned design as the most important
determinant of new product¶V performance and only 17% respondents considered price as the most important
determinant [1].
In modern society, aesthetic sensibilities are relevant to all products, regardless of their function. When there is a
choice between two products with similar price and function, target consumers prefer the one which is more
attractive. Based on [1], there are two important things: product form/design as a way to gain consumerV¶ attention
and SURGXFW¶Vform or exterior appearance as a means of communicating information to consumers.
,Q WRGD\¶V KLJKO\ FRPSHWLWLYH DQG XQFHUWDLQ PDUNHW HQYLURQPHQW ZLWK VKRUW SURGXFW OLIH F\FOHV SURGXFW
development must not only satisfy the quality and speed of production, but it must ensure the innovative values in
the products [2]. Based on [2], creativity plays an important role in the new product development (NPD). NPD is a
complex area of ideas and innovations that involves strategy, management, research and development, production,
marketing, and decision-making as well as requires a link between science and technology/invention or innovation
and the marketplace.
The success of new products mostly depends on the process and management of new product development [3]
and includes effective attainment of knowledge that is used as a part of the product design process [4]. Reference [5]
also indicated that new product development is a vital element for modern industries. Here, companies must learn
how to innovate effectively, overhaul their new product processes ranging from the initial idea to the launching, and
incorporate winning ideas for successful new products.
This study aimed to create new and innovative product which was made based on the ergonomic aspects by
utilizing the non-useful thing. The term of ergonomics was derived from Greek, ³ergo´ and ³nomos´. ³Ergo´ refers
to work and ³nomos´ refers to rules. Hence, the definition of ergonomics is a study of comfort and effective tools
with humans as the user [6]. Ergonomics aims to obtain a whole knowledge about the problems of human interaction
with technology and products that make possible the optimal existence of human system design-technology [7].
In fact, a lot of types of clock are available in the market. Each type of clock has its own function and
uniqueness. Fig. 1 illustrates various types of produced clock. First, clock made from recycled bike wheel. Second,
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030002-1–030002-5; doi: 10.1063/1.4985472
030002-1
common clock produced by current producer. Third, clock made by utilizing wheel dop. The third is the newest and
innovative product as the development of current product.
(a) (b) (c)

FIGURE 1. Various types of clock
The first clock was made from an old bicycle velg constructed from aluminum material. The specific dimension
of this clock is approximately 22 x 34 inch. This clock has similar function with common clock, but it is lacked of
accuracy and clearness on the numbers. The clock is a creative one because it recycles the things, in this case bike
wheel that is not used anymore. The clock has several weaknesses including its shortage from the ergonomics
aspects due to its weight since the material is metal. Subsequently, the appearance of the clock is less interesting
since it is dominated by velg. In addition, it does not have another function except as a clock. The second product is
common clock function is to measure the time. The weakness of this product is it cannot to be seen in the dark.
Basically, this research aimed to create an innovative and creative product, which was represented by the third
clock in Fig. 1. Wheel dop clock was established to fulfill the need of people to see the time more clearly even in the
dark and light room or condition. The product can be an innovative product since it uses phosphor sticker to
complete the product. Phosphor sticker is utilized in the product as it can glow in the dark. Wheel dop clock is also a
creative product because it uses a part of car (wheel) that is not use anymore.
Before creating wheel dop clock, several studies were performed to attain the ergonomics aspects of the product.
Thus, this research analyzed the product based on several aspects, namely the function, price, quality, aesthetic, and
design. Furthermore, it is expected that wheel dop clock can enter the market as merchandise for the buyers in car
showroom. Hopefully, the increase of the buyers will also increase the demand for the wheel dop clock.
FIGURE 2. Research methodology
The research methodology followed the flowchart that can be seen in Fig. 2. This research was conducted in
three phases, namely pre-study, planning and product development, and product analysis. Each phase also consisted
of several steps to perform this research systematically.
030002-2
In this research, questionnaire was distributed to 40 respondents. The result indicated that the wheel dop clock
can measure the time like the common ones. In addition, it can glow in the dark. The model is futuristic since the
materials are original wheel dop from Daihatsu and acrylic. Wheel dop clock has beautiful appearance due to the
suitable combination of color. Wheel dop clock also has good quality because of its material quality. From the
ergonomics aspects, the respondents perceived that the cost was relatively expensive.
SWOT analysis was also conducted. The strength of this product comes from the composed materials. The
material has good quality since the wheel dop is originated from Daihatsu. This product also uses Quartz machine.
The weaknesses is related to the price, which was perceived as expensive because the materials. This product was
composed from wheel dop, acrylic, Quartz machine, nut and bolt, sticker, and hose. Wheel dop clock is potential as
attractive clock in the future.
FIGURE 3. Product design
Figure 3 is the product design of wheel dop clock. The raw material of wheel dop clock consisted of:
x Wheel dop car with a diameter of 37 cm.
x Acrylic of 39 x 39 cm in size and 2 mm in thickness.
x 0DFKLQH³4XDUW]´.
x Etc.
Table-1. Bill of Material (BOM).
Number Component Part Quantity Bought or Made
1 Wheel dop 1 Bought
2 Acrylic 1 Bought
3 Machine 1 Bought
4 Bolt 4 Bought
5 Nuts 4 Bought
6 Acrylic sticker 1 set Bought
7 Wheel dop sticker 1 set Bought
8 Sticker 1 set Bought
9 Hose 4 Bought
10 Hook 1 Made
Table-1 is a list of material and Fig. 4 below is a picture of product structure. List of materials provides
information in detail about the product¶V materials. The important information on the list of material is about how
the material was obtained. The structure of product has function to give information about the construction of the
product from the preparation to the final.
030002-3
FIGURE 4. Product structure
Figure 5 is a diagram that demonstrates the assessment of the product from the respondents by using
questionnaire. The questionnaire was concerned with the ergonomics aspects such as the design, quality, price,
function, and aesthetics.
FIGURE 5. Respondent analysis
From the questionnaire, the function is the most important aspect of 46%. Subsequently, the design and
aesthetics obtained 17%. The quality aspect was 12%. The price was perceived as less necessary represented by 8%.
From the function aspect, the product fulfills its basic function to show off the time even in the light and the dark.
Design and aesthetic aspects were related to the material of the clock that was wheel dop and can glow in the dark
because it is covered by phosphorus sticker. The design of the product was also more attractive because the mixture
of wheel dop and acrylic. The product quality was perceived good because it was originated from Daihatsu wheel
dop. The price of the product of IDR 181.350 had covered profit and cost of materials.
Based on the market analysis, the product already has many competitors. However, this kind of wheel dop clock
has uniqueness since it can glow in the dark. The design is also attractive. The material is also high quality since it is
made from original Daihatsu wheel dop. Despite of the strengths of this product, nothing is perfect. The weakness of
this product is related with the price, which is higher than other products. Other aspects can be fulfilled by this
product include the design, the benefit, and the concept of utilizing wheel dop. The opportunity of the product is the
030002-4
potential as the merchandise in Daihatsu showroom. Later, it might be able to attract the customers of Daihatsu and
hopefully, it can increase the demand for wheel dop clock.
CONCLUSION
This research investigated the design of innovated product namely the wheel dop clock. The product aims to
recycle non-useful wheel dop into another product that has higher value than before. The product has several
strengths, but also has some weaknesses. The product has been assessed from the ergonomics aspects including the
design, price, quality, aesthetics, and quality.
In the future, this sort of product can be developed by utilizing other raw materials that is cheaper than this one.
In addition to the price of materials, it must consider the quality. Furthermore, this product can be introduced to
small-medium group enterprises in Indonesia for further mass production.
REFERENCES
1. P. H. Bloch, Seeking the Ideal Form: Product Design and Consumer Response (Journal of Marketing, 1996),
pp 16-29.
2. S. W. Hsiao and J. R. Chao, A creativity-based design process for innovative product design (International
Journal of Industrial Ergonomics, 2004), pp 421-443.
3. K. J. Chaturvedi and Y. S. Rajan, New product development: challenges of globalization (International Journal
of Technology Management, 2000), pp 788-805.
4. J. Poolton, H. S. Ismail, and M. Shahidipour, The new products process: effective knowledge capture and
utilization (Concurrent Engineering: Research and Application, 2000), pp 133-143.
5. R. G. Cooper, Overhauling the new product process (Industrial Marketing Management, 1996), pp 465-482.
6. E. Achiraenawati and Y. S. Rejeki, Perbaikan Fasilitas Kerja dengan Pendekatan Ergonomi Studi Kasus
Industri Rumah Tangga Sepatu Cibaduyut (Prosiding SNaPP Edisi Eksata, 2010).
7. S. Wignjosoebroto, Ergonomi Studi Gerak dan Waktu, 1995. Surabaya: Penerbit Guna Widya.
030002-5
Effect of gold dopant on structural and optical properties of molybdenum disulfide
single crystals
Mula Sigiro

Effect of Gold Dopant on Structural and Optical Properties
of Molybdenum Disulfide Single Crystals
Mula Sigiro
Center of Semiconductor Physics Studies (CSPS) Department of Physics Education

Faculty of Teacher Training and Education, Universitas HKBP Nommensen, Medan 20234, Indonesia
Corresponding author: mulasigiro@gmail.com
Abstract. Single crystals of MoS2 doped with gold (MoS2: Au) have been grown by the chemical vapor transport method
using iodine as a transporting agent. The transmission electron microscopy (TEM) images showed that doping sites and
migration behaviors of Au atoms moved around the MoS2 and jumped with different positions. The doping effects of the
materials were characterized by temperature-dependent piezoreflectance (PzR) spectroscopy measurements at
temperature of 25 to 300 K. The temperature dependence of the spectral features in the vicinity of direct band-edge
excitonic transition of the Au-doped and undoped one was figured out. The energies and broadening parameters of the A
and B excitons have been determined accurately via a detailed line shape fit of the PzR spectra. The parameters that
describe the temperature variation of the energies and broadening functions of the excitonic transitions are analysed. In
addition, the origin of these excitonic transitions is evaluated and discussed. A plausible suggestion will be put forth to
explain the role of gold in affecting the variation of the excitonic transitions.
INTRODUCTION
Molybdenum disulfide (MoS2) is an important member of layered type transition metal dichalcogenides that has
a VI- group-layer-type structure [1] MX2 where M = Mo or W and X = S or Se7KHµµOD\HUHG¶¶VWUXFWXUHRI0R62 is
formed by a graphene-like hexagonal arrangement of Mo and S atoms stacked together to give S±Mo±S sandwiches
coordinated in a triangular prismatic fashion. The S±Mo±S sandwiches are bonded together by weak Van-der-Waals
forces [2]. The material is of interest as a potential candidate in a variety of important technologies such as solid
lubricants [3], photovoltaic and polymer solar cells [4, 5], hydrosulphurization catalysts [6]. Recently, the possibility
of obtaining MoS2 by exfoliation of multi-layered MoS2 into single-layered MoS2 nanosheets, followed by a Li-
intercalation and exfoliation method [7, 8] has allowed the solution-based production and thin-film fabrication of
MoS2 sheets that are applicable in high-performance electronics. Due to these versatile properties, many researchers
have been intensely investigating the utilization of MoS2 as a semiconducting channel material for high performance
unipolar or ambipolar field-effect transistors [9, 10]. Topics investigated commonly deal with the strong anisotropy
of physical properties [1] , the role of the d orbitals of the transition metal atom in the electronic band scheme [11]
and the sharp excitonic structures in the visible region [12, 13]. These structures are generally attributed to the
existence of the excitonic transitions A and B characterized by fundamental levels still evident at room temperature.
Various assignments for these structures have been proposed both from theoretical band structure calculations [11,
14±16] and experimental measurements [17±19]. Moreover, previous works [20] found several results that X-ray
photoelectron spectroscopy showed a slight down shift of the Mo 3d and S 2p binding energies, field-emission
scanning electron microscopy showed foliate morphology and single crystalline structure, room temperature Hall
effect measurement indicated p-type semiconducting character for the sample, and the optical transmittance
measurements revealed that Au-doped MoS2 is an indirect semiconductor. In this context, the knowledge of how
dopant atoms interact with the host TMD lattices is highly important both in fundamental science and future device
technology. However, conclusive results concerning origins of these structures have not been obtained. Besides,
only few works concerning the effect of the dopants on the temperature dependence study of the excitonic
transitions have been reported [21].
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030003-1–030003-9; doi: 10.1063/1.4985473
030003-1
In this article, we report the transmission electron microscopy (TEM) images of Au-doped and a detailed study
of the temperature dependence of the piezoreflectance (PzR) measurements in the spectral range of the A, B
excitonic structures of undoped and Au-doped MoS2 single crystals from 25 to 300 K, which were grown by
chemical vapour transport method with I2 as the transport agent. Piezoreflectance has been proven to be useful in the
characterization of semiconductors [22, 23]. The derivative nature of modulation spectra suppresses uninteresting
background effects and greatly enhances the precision in the determination of interband excitonic transition
energies. The sharper lineshape as compared to the conventional optical techniques has enabled us to achieve a
greater resolution and hence to detect weaker features. The PzR spectra are fitted with a form of the Aspnes equation
of the fist derivative Lorenzian lineshape [22, 24]. From a detailed lineshape fit, we are able to determine accurately
the energies and broadening parameters of the excitonic transitions. The parameters which describe the temperature
behaviour of excitonic transitions indicate that A-B, caused by interlayer interaction and spin-orbit splitting,
correspond to excitonic transitions with different origin. The origin of A, B excitons and the effects of dopant are
discussed. The temperature variation of the transition energies has been analyzed by the Varshni equation [25] and
an expression containing the Bose-Einstein occupation factor for phonons [26, 27]. The temperature dependence of
the broadening function also has been studied in term of a Bose-Einstein equation that contains the electron
(exciton)-longitudinal optical (LO) phonon coupling constant [26, 27].
EXPERIMENTAL METHODS
Gold-doped MoS2 single crystals have been grown by the chemical vapour transport method with Br 2 as the
transport agent. The total charge used in each growth experiment was about 10 g. The stoichiometrically determined
weight of the doping material was added in the hope that it would be transported at a rate similar to that of Mo. The
quartz ampoule containing Br 2 (~5 mg cm-3) and uniformly mixed elements (99.99% pure Mo, Au and S) was sealed
at 10-6 Torr. The ampoule was then placed in a three-zone furnace and the charge prereacted for 24 h at 800 0C with
the growth zone at 950 0C, preventing the transport of the product. The temperature of the furnace was increased
slowly to avoid any possibility of explosion due to the exothermic reaction between the elements. The furnace was
then equilibrated to give a constant temperature across the reaction tube, and programmed over 24 hours to produce
the temperature gradient at which single-crystal growth took place. Optimal result was obtained with a temperature
gradient of approximately 960 930 0C. Single crystalline platelets of 10 x 10 mm2 surface area and 2 mm in
thickness were obtained. We do not expect the two solid solutions to be miscible. It was found that a 5% nominal
doping of MoS2 prevented the growth of single crystals.
The high magnification of morphologies of the Au-doped MoS2 was investigated by scanning the transmission
electron microscope (STEM). A JEM-2100F equipped with a delta corrector and cold field emission gun was
operated at 60 kV in these experiments. Image structures were obtained by density functional theory (DFT)
calculation and the corresponding STEM image in fig. 2 of (a) Au adatom on Mo site, (b) Au substitute S atom and
Au adatom on hollow center (HC) site, and (c) Au adatom on S site, the annular dark field (ADF) images of each
possible positions were occupied by Au atom. The ADF images are processed by Gaussian blur filter to increase the
S/N ratio. The simulated atomic structure has been tilted -20° in x-axis and 3° in y-axis.
The PzR measurements were achieved by gluing the thin single crystal specimens on a 0.15 cm thick lead-
zirconate-titanate (PZT) piezoelectric transducer driven by a 200 Vrms sinusoidal wave at 200 Hz. The alternating
expansion and contraction of the transducer subjects the sample to an alternating strain with a W\SLFDOUPVǻl/l value
of ~ 10-5. A 150 W tungsten-halogen lamp filtered by a model 270 McPherson 0.35 m monochromator provided the
monochromatic light. The reflected light was detected by EG&G type HUV-2000B silicon photodiode. The DC
output of the silicon photodiode was maintained constant by a servo mechanism of a variable neutral density filter.
A dual-phase lock-in amplifier was used to measure the detected signal. Modulated spectra were normalized to the
UHIOHFWDQFH WR REWDLQ ǻR/R. An RMC model 22 close-cycle cryogenic refrigerator equipped with a model 4075
digital thermometer controller was used to control the measurement temperature between 25 and 300 K with a
temperature stability of 0.5 K or better.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS

Displayed by the dashed curve in Figs. 1(a) and 1(b) are the PzR spectra near the direct band edge over the range
1.65±2.35 eV for the undoped and 1.7±2.25 eV for the Au-doped MoS2 single crystals. The spectra are
030003-2
characterized by two prominent excitonic transitions, A and B excitons. In the case of undoped MoS 2, a higher series
of A exciton, denoted as A2, is also detected. In order to determine the position of the transitions accurately, we
performed a theoretical line shape fitting. The energies of both excitonic transitions showed the general trend of up-
shifting as the temperature was lowered. The linewidths also became narrower in the process. The functional form
used in the fitting procedure corresponded to a first derivative Lorenzian line shape function of the form [22, 24].
'R ªn ni º

Re«¦ Aiex e jMi E Eiex j*iex »
ex
(1)
R ¬i 1 ¼
and M i are the amplitude and phase of the line shape, Ei and *i are the energy and broadening
ex ex ex ex
where Ai
parameters of the interband excitonic transitions and the value of ni depends on the origin of the transition. For the
first derivative functional form, n = 2.0 was appropriate for the bounded states, such as excitons or impurity
transition, while n = 0.5 was applicable for three dimensional critical point interband transitions [24]. The least-
squares fits using equation (1) with n = 2 can be achieved and the fits are shown as solid curve in fig. 1. The fits
yielded the parameters Ai, Ei and *i . The obtained values of Ei were indicated as arrows and denoted as A1, A2 and
B. The nomenclature used here followed closely that of Wilson and Yoffe [1] and Beal et al [28]. The value of Ei
obtained here showed a general agreement with slight deviation from the corresponding low temperature
transmission data of Beal et al [28]. We believed the derivative nature of the PzR spectra should offer better
accuracy. The fitted values of Ei are displayed in table 1 together with the relevant works of [13, 21, 28±30] for
comparison. The prominent A and B excitons were observed to be red-shifted. The energy position of A and B
excitons were measured accurately with the PzR experiment. The splittings of excitons A and B ( ' BA EB E A )
were determined to be 0.16 ± 0.013 eV for Au-doped MoS2 and 0.216 ± 0.013 for undoped MoS2. These number
agreed well with the corresponding previous works [21, 29], transmission data of Beal et al. [28], Reflectance [30],
and wave length modulated reflectance (WMR) spectra of Fortin and Raga and Photoconductivity [13]. In the case
of the WMR data of Fortin and Raga, their observed signature, B * is almost certain to be due to the presence of 3R-
MoS2 in their 2H-MoS2 sample. For undoped MoS2, the excitons A and B Rydberg series can be described by three-
dimensional Mott-Wannier excitons [28, 30, 31] which followed closely the relations, En Ef Rn 2 , where n =
« Ef and R were the exciton-series limit and binding energy, the calculated values for exciton A were
Ef = 1.981 ± 0.02 eV and R = 0.051 ± 0.005 eV. For Au-doped MoS2, only n = 1 Rydberg series for both excitonic
transitions were observed. It has been shown that excitons for the three-layer rhombohedral MoS2 are more
appropriately described by the two-dimensional Mott-Wannier excitons [28, 30, 31]. The non-detection of higher
series is an inherent nature of the two-dimensional Mott-Wannier excitons [30]. The physical origin of the
measured difference in the energy splitting of A and B excitons ' BA for the Au-doped and undoped MoS2 may be
understood as follows. From the more recent theoretical and experimental studies [15, 16, 32], the A and B excitons
were attributed to the smallest direct transitions at the K point of the Brillouin zone split by interlayer interaction and
spin-orbit splitting [15, 16]. The exciton belongs to K4 to K5 while the B exciton corresponds to K1 to K5 optical
transitions. The K states have been shown by Coehoorn et al [15, 16] to be predominantly metal d states with a small
contribution from the non-metal p states. Then according to the fig. 2, during growth of Au-doped MoS2, once the
Au atom jumps into the S vacancy as a substitutional dopant, it stays much more stable than the other adatom cases,
also Au atoms tend to weakly couple to the MoS2 layers as adatoms, while doping with Au atoms may give rise to
interesting magnetic properties. On the contrary, the Au adatoms on MoS2 surface give rise to similar mid-gap states
at all the three sites (Au-S, Au-Mo and Au-HC). Au dopants in two other positions (as adatoms on HC (Au-HC)
sites and in substitutional position at S sites (Au@S)) can also be found, but they are quite rare. Very interestingly,
our results suggest that Au adatoms can possess magnetic moments on MoS2 surfaces, so that the introduction of Au
impurities may lead to new functionalities of MoS2 and likely other TMDs. One Au-S atom in the single layer
region is continuously moving and has a different position in each frame. Another Au atom is found to suddenly
jump into the imaging area. The first Au atom continues to migrate in the two-layer region. Although it is not
possible for us to say whether the Au atom can be on the top or bottom surface of two layers, the migration behavior
of the Au atom can be interpreted without any ambiguity as it is migrating at the inter-layer positions [33, 34].
Moreover, gold nanoparticles on MoS2 were reported to dramatically enhance the photocurrent [35]. In a stark
contrast, substituting Mo with Au is highly unfavorable, and the Au atoms are expected to be located predominantly
at the adatom sites. Indeed, no Au substitution was found in the experiments. The resulting splitting should open up
030003-3
slightly if no other mechanisms were involved. This plausible deduction is inferred from other experimental work on
mixed crystals of MoS2 with either WS2, WSe2 or MoSe2 where larger anion or cation masses will result in a
widening of ' BA . However, the measured shrinkage of ' BA showed the opposite trend. Other mechanisms such the
well known process of intercalation which usually involves a distortion of a crystal structure and a variation of the
electronic states of the synthesized compounds [36] may be responsible. It is very likely that Au ions stabilize the
3R polytype of MoS2. The resulting van der Waals forces of 3R-MoS2 should be weaker than the 2H polytype and
this is reflected by the measured reduction in ' BA .

D8QGRSHG0R6 E0R6$X
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
'55$UE8QLWV
'55$UE8QLWV
. .
. .

. .

. .
. .
. .
. .
([SW ([SW
)LW )LW %

$ % % %
$ $

3KRWRQ(QHUJ\H9 3KRWRQ(QHUJ\H9
(a) (b)
FIGURE 1. Piezoreflectance spectra of (a) undoped and (b) Au-doped MoS2 at several temperatures between 25 and 300K. The
dashed curves were the experimental results and the solid curves were least squares fits of Eq. (1).
FIGURE 2. Image structures obtained by density functional theory (DFT) calculation and the corresponding STEM image of (a)-
(c) the ADF images of each possible positions occupied by Au atom.
The temperature variations of the energies of A and B excitons for the doped MoS2 are displayed in fig. 3. The
dashed curves in fig. 3 are the least-squares fits to the Varshni empirical relationship [25].
030003-4
D iT 2
Ei (T ) , Ei (0) (2)
(Ei T )
Where i = 1 or 2, Ei (0) is the transition energy at 0 K, and D i and E i are Varshni coefficients. The constant
D i is related to the electron (exciton)-phonon interaction and E i is closely related to the Debye temperature. For
the Au-doped MoS2, the fitted values for exciton A were E(0) = 1.934 ± 0.005 eV, D = 0.39 ± 0.05 meV K-1 and
E = 136 ± 45 K, and for exciton B E(0) = 2.096 ± 0.005 eV, D = 0.43 ± 0.05 meV K-1 and E = 157 ± 45 K.
These numbers are quite similar to other layered structure transition metal dichalcogenide compound [21, 29]. The
Debye temperature can be estimated from the Lindemann formula 4 D | 120Tm A U 1/ 3 [37], where Tm is the 1/ 2 5 / 6
melting temperature, A the atomic weight, and U is the density of the material. We have computed 4 D = 253 K for
MoS2 with Tm = 1185 0C [37], A=53.357 g mol-1, U = 4.8 g cm-3 [37]. These number for 4 D are in reasonable
agreement with the fitted values of E as given by equation (2). The temperature dependence of the excitonic
transition energies EA(T) and EB(T) of the doped and undoped MoS2 can also be fitted (solid curves in fig. 3) by the
expression containing the Bose-Einstein occupation factor for phonon [26, 27].
2 ½
Ei (T ) EiB aiB ®1 ¾, (3)
¯ [exp(4iB T ) 1] ¿
Where i = 1 or 2, aiB represents the strength of the electron (exciton)-phonon interaction, and 4 iB corresponds
to the average phonon temperature. For the Au-doped samples, the fitted values for exciton A were EAB = 1.931 ±
0.01 eV, a AB = 30 ± 15 meV and 4 AB = 175 ± 65 K, and for exciton B EBB = 2.092 ± 0.01 eV, a BB = 35 ± 15
meV and 4 BB = 188 ± 65 K. Again, these values are typical of all layered structure transition metal dichalcogenides
[21, 29].

($0R6$X
(QHUJ\H9
($8QGRSHG0R6
(%0R6$X

(%8QGRSHG0R6
)LWWRHTXDWLRQ
)LWWRHTXDWLRQ

7HPSHUDWXUH.
FIGURE 3. Temperature variations of the energies of the A-B excitonic pair for undoped and Au-doped MoS2. Representative
error bar are shown. The dashed and solid curve are least squares fits to Eq. (2) and (3), respectively.
030003-5

$0R6$X
$8QGRSHG0R6

%0R6$X
%8QGSHG0R6

/LQHZLGWKPH9

)LWWRHTXDWLRQ

7HPSHUDWXUH.
FIGURE 4. Temperature variations of the broadening parameters of A and B excitonic transitions for undoped and A-doped
MoS2. Representative error bar are shown. The solid cures are least squares fits to Eq (4).
The experimental values of the linewidth *i (T ) of A and B excitons at several temperatures between 25 and
300 K as obtained from the line shape fit with equation (1) are displayed in fig. 4. Linewidth broadening nearly
independent of temperature below 100 K characterizes both excitonic transitions. The temperature independent
broadening characteristics of the excitonic transitions for the layered structure transition metal dichalcogenides at
temperature below 100 K has been observed previously [13, 21, 29]. The relatively high value of this temperature
was attributed to the high value of the exciton reduced mass for the MoS2 crystals [13]. The temperature dependence
of the line-width can be expressed as [26, 27]:
*iLO
*i (T ) *i 0 , (4)
[exp(4iLO T ) 1]
Where i = 1 or 2. The first term represents the broadening invoked from temperature-independent mechanisms,
such as impurity, dislocation, electron interaction, and Auger processes, while the second term was caused by the
Fröhlich interaction. The quantity *iLO represents the strength of the electron (exciton)-LO phonon coupling while
4 iLO is the LO phonon temperature. The solid curves in fig. 4 represent least-squires fits of the experimental data
which enable the evaluation of *i 0 , *iLO and 4 iLO for the excitonic transitions of undoped and Au-doped MoS2.
The obtained values of these quantities are listed in table 2 together with the numbers for [21, 29, 38±41] for
comparison.
The parameter D i of equation (2) is related to aiB and 4iB of equation (3) by taking the high-temperature limit
of both expressions. This yields D i | 2aiB / 4iB . According to the existing theory [26, 27], this leads to a value of
4iB that is significantly smaller than 4iLO . Our results agreed favorably with the theory [26, 27]. From table 2, the
values of *i 0 for Au-doped MoS2 for An excitons are slightly smaller than that of the undoped sample, but for B
excitons are slightly higher. This means that probably once the Au atom jumped into the S vacancy as a
substitutional dopant, it stayed much more stable than the other adatom cases. On the contrary, as has been said
earlier, the Au dopant atoms showed extremely high mobility during the observation and easily migrated under the
electron beam. Our experimental showed that Au ions stabilized the rhombohedral 3R phase of the MoS 2 crystal
instead of forming the ternary Mo1-xAuxS2 system. Our experimental observations thus far supported this assertion.
However, from the close similarity of the experimental line shapes and of the fitted parameters, the observed
030003-6
difference may not be significant enough to account for the effect of gold induced impurity scattering. The apparent
ambiguous reasoning is not unreasonable considering the relatively small quantity of dopant. The value of *i 0 for
the A1 and B excitonic transitions of MoS2 were about 20 and 40, respectively. These values were much larger than
those of most semiconductors. The results agreed well the previous reports on GaAs ( 20 meV) [41], ZnSe ( 24
meV) [40], and MoS2 [13] that reported a detailed study on the excitons in molybdenum disulfide: the results
showed that a very large natural broadening nearly independent of temperature below 100 K characterized all the
excitonic peaks and a high characteristic temperature T c was deduced from the half width of the A1 and B
structures as function of the temperature and was attributed to a high value of the exciton reduced mass. The value
of 4iLO were quite close to the previous report of the longitudinal optical phonon temperature for MoS 2 (557K)
obtained from Raman measurements [42]. The close match between the fitted values of 4iLO and the LO phonon
temperatures obtained from Raman scattering indicated that the temperature variation of *i was indeed mainly due
to the interaction of the electron with optical phonons. These observations confirmed the existing theory [26, 27],
however, a more systematic experimentation should be carried out to verify this property.
TABLE 1. Energies of the excitons A, B and their splitting in MoS2, MoS2: Au using equation (1). Relevant values for previous
works are included for comparison.
Material A B EA-B Temperature
(eV) (eV) (eV) (K)
MoS2:Au a 1.931 ± 0.005 2.091 ± 0.008 0.16 ± 0.013 25
1.926 ± 0.005 2.088 ± 0.008 0.162 ± 0.005 77
1.854 ± 0.008 2.014 ± 0.01 0.16 ± 0.018 300
Undoped MoS2 a 1.932 ± 0.005 2.148 ± 0.008 0.216 ± 0.013 25
1.927 ± 0.005 2.144 ± 0.008 0.217 ± 0.013 77
1.853 ± 0.008 2.070 ± 0.01 0.217 ± 0.018 300
MoS2:Re b 1.915 2.066 0.151 15
Undoped MoS2 b 1.928 2.136 0.208 15
MoS2 c 1.88 2.06 0.18 300
MoS2 d 1.9255 2.137 0.2115 4.2
MoS2 e 1.92 2.124 0.204 4.2
MoS2 f 1.929 ± 0.005 2.136 ± 0.008 0.207 ± 0.013 25
1.845 ± 0.008 2.053 ± 0.01 0.208 ± 0.018 300
2H-MoS2 g 1.910 2.112 0.202 5
3R-MoS2 g 1.908 2.057 0.149 5

a e
Present work. Photoconductivity [13].
b f
PzR [21]. PzR [29].
c g
Reflectance [30]. Transmission [28].
d
WMR [13].
030003-7
TABLE 2. The values of the parameters which describe the temperature dependence of the broadening function of the band-edge
excitonic transitions of MoS2: Au and undoped MoS2. Relevant value for previous works and direct band-edge transitions of
GaAs and ZnSe are included for comparison.
Materials Feature *0 *LO 4 LO
(meV) (meV) (K)
Undoped MoS2a A1 18.3 ± 1.0 77 ± 20 562 ± 50
B 37.6 ± 2.0 76 ± 30 562 ± 50
MoS2:Au a A1 11.2 ± 1.0 55 ± 20 450 ± 50
B 37.8 ± 2.0 85 ± 30 572 ± 50
MoS2:Re b A1 16.4 ± 1.0 85 ± 16 510 ± 50
B 34.0 ± 1.0 90 ± 17 520 ± 50
Undoped MoS2c A1 18.0 ± 1.0 75 ± 20 560 ± 50
B 37.4 ± 2.0 75 ± 35 560 ± 50
ReS2 : Aud E1ex 5.9 ± 0.5 75 ± 15 315 ± 100
E2ex 6.8 ± 0.5 60 ± 15 360 ± 100
WS2 : Aue A 21 ± 1 80 ± 20 520 ± 50
B 41 ± 2 120 ± 30 520 ±50
GaAsf Edg 2 20 ± 1 417
ZnSeg Edg 6.5 ± 2.5 24 ± 8 360

a e
This work. Reference [39].
b f
Reference [21]. Reference [41].
c g
Reference [29]. Reference [40].
d
Reference [38].
CONCLUSION
Single crystals of gold-doped and undoped MoS2 have been grown by chemical vapor transport method using
iodine as the transporting agent. We have studied the temperature dependence of the energies and broadening
parameters of the direct band-edge excitonic transitions of these samples using PzR in the temperature range of 25 to
300 K. From the experimental observations and detailed analysis of the broadening parameters and energies of the
excitonic features A and B, we can infer that once the Au atom jumps into the S vacancy as a substitutional dopant,
it stays much more stable than the other adatom cases. The TEM results of Au-doped MoS2 propose that the
introduction of Au impurities may lead to new functionalities of MoS 2 and likely other TMDs. Furthermore, we can
infer that Au ions stabilize the formation of 3R-MoS2. As a result, the electronic states of the MoS2 crystals are
modified with a reduction of energy splitting of A and B excitons. In addition, the parameters that describe the
temperature variation of the energies and broadening function of the interband excitonic transitions were evaluated.
The values of *i 0 for Au-doped MoS2 for B excitons were slightly higher than that of the undoped sample.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The author would like to acknowledge Professor Ying-Sheng Huang and Professor Ching-Hwa Ho for advising
and providing materials and experimental equipment at Semiconductor Characterization Laboratory, National
Taiwan University of Science and Technology (NTUST). The author also thanks Prof. Kazu Suenaga and AIST-
Japan for providing the STEM image.
030003-8
REFERENCES
1. J. A. Wilson and A. D. Yoffe, Adv. Phys. 18, 193 (1969).
2. E. S. Eugene and P. Hawrylak, Solid State Commun. 152, 909 (2012).
3. J. M. Martin, C. Donnet, and J. L. Mogne, Phys. Rev. B 48, 10583 (1993).
4. Tributsch H, Z. Naturf. a 32, 972 (1977).
5. J. M. Yun, Y. J. Noh, J. S. Yeo, et al., J. Mater. Chem. C 1, 3777 (2013).
6. P. Grange and B. Delmon, J. Less-Common Met. 36, 353 (1974).
7. W. M. R. Divigalpitiya, S. R. Morrison, and R. F. Frindt, Thin Solid Films 186, 177 (1990).
8. Z. Zeng, Z. Yin, X. Huang, H. Li, et al., Angew. Chem., Int. Ed. 50, 11093 (2011).
9. B. Radisavljevic, A. Radenovic, J. Brivio, et al., Nat. Nanotechnol. 6, 147 (2011).
10. H. Li, Z. Yin, Q. He, et al., Small 8, 63 (2012).
11. L. F. Mattheis, Phys. Rev. B 8, 3719, (1973).
12. M. R. Khan and G. J. Goldsmith, Nuovo Cimento 2D, 665 (1983).
13. E. Fortin and F. Raga, Phys. Rev. B 11, 905 (1975).
14. R. V. Kasowski, Phys. Rev. Lett. 30, 1175 (1973).
15. R. Coehoorn, C. Haas, J. Dickstra , et al., Phys. Rev. B 35, 6195 (1987).
16. R. Coehoorn, C. Haas, and R. A. de Groot, Phys. Rev. B 35, 6203 (1987).
17. H. Meinhold and G. Weiser, Phys. Status Solidi b 73, 105 (1976).
18. M. Tanaka, H. Fukutani and G. Kuwabara, Solid State Commun. 26, 911 (1978).
19. M. Tanaka, G. Kuwabara and H. Fukutani, J. Phys. Soc. Japan 45, (1899).
20. C. H. Liang, S. Y. Hu, et al., ECS Trans. 25, 183 (2009).
21. K. K. Tiong, T. S. Shou, and C. H. Ho, J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 12, 3441 (2000).
22. F. H. Pollak and H. Shen, Mater. Sci. Eng. R 10, 275 (1993).
23. H. Mathieu, J. Allegre, and B. Gil, Phys. Rev. B 43, 2218 (1991).
24. D. E. Aspnes, Handbook on Semiconductors: Optical Properties of Semiconductors, ed. by M. Balkanski
(Amsterdam: North-Holland, 1980), Vol. 2, p. 109.
25. Y. P. Varnish, Physica 34, 149 (1967).
26. P. Lantenschlager, M. Garriga, S. Logothetidis, et al., Phys. Rev. B 35, 9178 (1987).
27. P. Lantenschlager, M. Garriga, L. Vina, et al., Phys. Rev. B 36, 4821 (1987).
28. A. R. Beal, J. C. Knights, and W. J. Liang, J. Phys. C: Solid State Phys. 5, 3540 (1972).
29. C. H. Ho, C. S. Wu, Y S Huang, et al., J. Phys.: Condens. Matter 10, 9317 (1998).
30. A. R. Beal, W. Y. Liang, and H. P. Huges, J. Phys. C: Solid State Phys. 9, 2449 (1976).
31. S. L. Chuang, Physics of Optoelectronic Devices (Wiley Series in Pure and Applied Optics) ed. by J. W.
Goodman (Wiley-Interscience, New York, 1995).
32. T. Straub, K. Fauth, T. Finteis, et al., Phys. Rev. B 53, 16152 (1996).
33. M. Remskar, Z. Skraba, P. Stadelmann, et al., Adv. Mater. 12, 814 (2000).
34. M. Remskar, Z. Skraba, R. Sanjines, et al., Surf. Rev. Lett. 6, 1283 (1999).
35. J. Lin, H. Li, H. Zhang, et al., Appl. Phys. Lett. 102, 203109 (2013).
36. T. Gandke, Ley, and M. Cardona, Phys. Rev. let. 38, 872 (1977); T. Gandke, Ley, and M. Cardona, Phys. Rev.
let. 38, 1033 (1977).
37. J. Ziman, Electrons and Phonons: The Theory of Transport Phenomena in Solids (Oxford University Press,
Clarendon, 1960).
38. D. O. Dumcenco, Y. S Huang, C. H. liang, et al., J. Appl. Phys. 104, 63501 (2008).
39. D.O. Dumcenco, H.P. Hsu, Y.S. Huang, et al., Materials Chemistry and Physics 111, 475 (2008).
40. L. Malikova, W. Krystek, F. H Pollak, et al., Phys. Rev. B 54, 1819 (1996).
41. H. Qiang, F. H. Pollak, C. M. S. Torres, et al., Appl. Phys. Lett. 61, 1411 (1992).
42. S. I. Uchida and S. Tanaka, J. Phys. Soc. Japan 45, 153 (1978).
030003-9
Characteristics of permanent deformation rate of warm mix asphalt with additives
variation (BNA-R and zeolite)
Nurul Wahjuningsih, Sigit Pranowo Hadiwardoyo, and R. Jachrizal Sumabrata

Characteristics of Permanent Deformation Rate of Warm
Mix Asphalt with Additives Variation (BNA-R and
Zeolite)
Nurul Wahjuningsih1,b), Sigit Pranowo Hadiwardoyo2,a), R. Jachrizal
Sumabrata3,c)
1,2,3
Department of Civil Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: sigit@eng.ui.ac.id
b)
nwahjuningsih@gmail.com, c)jachrizal@gmail.com
Abstract. Permanent deformation is one of the criteria of failure on asphalt concrete mixture. The nature of the
bitumen melt at high temperatures, this condition causes the asphalt concrete mixture tends to soften due to an
increase in temperature of the road surface. The increase in surface temperature and the load wheel that has repeated
itself on the same trajectory causes deformation groove has formed. Conditions rutting due to permanent
deformation has resulted in inconvenience to the passengers and can lead to high costs of road maintenance. On the
road planning process required a prediction of the rate of the permanent deformation of asphalt concrete mixtures. It
is important to know early on the road surface damage due to vehicle load and surface temperature during service
life. Asphalt has been mixed with the additive BNA-R and Zeolite intended to make variations in the characteristics
of bitumen in this study. This variation is further combined with variations in the composition of aggregate in order
to obtain a combination of asphalt-aggregate mixture. This mixture using warm mix, and to determine the permanent
deformation of asphalt mix with material combinations was performed through the wheel tracking test machine with
3,780 cycles or 7,560 tracks for 3 hours. Another analysis to determine the characteristics of asphalt concrete
mixtures have also been carried out changes in the surface temperature at the time of the test track. From the results
of the test track to nearly 8 thousand passes has seen permanent deformation characteristics of asphalt concrete
mixture with a variation of the characteristics of bitumen and aggregate variation. Groove of deformation due to a
wheel load from the initial until the last passes shows that there are influence of compaction temperature on the
variation of bitumen and aggregate composition to the relationship of permanent deformation of the wheel groove,
especially on the road surface temperature changes.
INTRODUCTION
Parameters related to the failure criteria in asphalt mixtures are permanent deformation and fatigue crack [1].
Asphalt pavements are often sensitive to groove deformation damage when heavy load vehicles at high ambient
temperatures. This rutting has occurred due to accumulation of irrecoverable strain on asphalt pavement layers.
This type of damage can be permanent deformation of the road surface. This condition is one of the major
damage that cause inconvenience user roads and causing high costs road maintenance [2, 3]. Maintenance
programs of early detection are very important in the maintenance, prevention programs and strategies
improvement plan. Rutting is also defined as the accumulation of permanent deformation after passed wheel
load [4]. There are several causes of rutting. The variation of material characteristics has been identified as the
main factors influencing the resistance to rutting in the road surface [5].
Damage groove (rutting) is the permanent deformation of the surface layer of pavement that can be increase
with an increase in vehicle traffic. Generally, three factors led to create rutting in the asphalt pavement include
permanent deformation accumulation in the surface of asphalt layer, permanent deformation of the subgrade,
and erosion or wear of asphalt at the wheels place due to the passing of vehicles [6]. Road surface layer made of
a mixture of asphalt with aggregate and filler, called asphalt concrete. Several types of additive mixtures have
been added to make the modification of asphalt with the aim to improve the rheological properties of pure
bitumen basis. Asphalt is a material sensitive to temperature changes, at high temperatures, bitumen tends to
flow more easily due to the declining value of its viscosity. These conditions create an asphalt mixture that is
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030004-1–030004-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985474
030004-1
"softer" which tend to rutting [7]. Some attempts to address the occurrence of rutting on the kind of warm mix
asphalt (WMA), the use of additives intended to increase their susceptibility to rutting indispensable.
The use of warm mix asphalt has become popular in terms of environmental technology issues. Warm mix
asphalt has been able to reduce energy fuel for the process of mixing/compaction temperature is lower than hot
mix asphalt (HMA). The occurrence of a drop in temperature can cause an increase in viscosity of the asphalt
pavement. The process of compaction of asphalt concrete will have difficulties at low temperatures, this can
result in failure of asphalt concrete performance and can result in cracking or deformation. This condition is
complicating the process of the covering aggregates by bitumen, so that for the process of the covering
aggregates can be done with additives to lower the viscosity [8]. The WMA was referring to technology that
allows significant reduction in the temperature of mixing and compacting asphalt aggregate by a decrease in
viscosity of bitumen using organic additives, chemical additives, or the foaming process [9].
Researchers have carried out a simulation of the deformation the groove wheel using a wheel tracking test in
the laboratory because these tests could model the stress states of pavement in the field [10]. Limitations of
testing equipment to test until 1,260 trajectory are often a bottleneck for deeper analysis. Several studies have
been conducted and it is known that the result of a short cycle of wheel tracking machine (WTM) at some tools
with short cycles (1,260 cycles) has not reached the secondary zone. The condition indicates that the
accumulation of permanent deformation has not occurred. It can be concluded that increasing the number of
cycles at very short cycle is required [7].
The purpose of this study was to evaluate the effect of additives types BNA-R and zeolite on the deformation
of warm mix asphalt using a wheel tracking test (cycle length).

The sample of test prepared was asphalt concrete wearing course (AC-WC) type based on Indonesian
specification 2010 with the addition of BNA-R to the asphalt pen 60/70. The characteristics of base asphalt
binder shown in Table 1.
TABLE 1. Properties of base asphalt binder (Pen.60/70)
No Laboratory Test Method Unit Indonesian Bitumen Pen

Specification 60/70
1 Penetration at 25˚C ASTM-D5 0.1 mm 60-70 64.2
2 Softening Point ASTM-D36 ˚C ≥48 51.5
3 Flash Point (Cleveland) ASTM-D92 ˚C ≥232 338
4 Ductility at 25˚C ASTM-D113 cm ≥100 >100
5 Specific Gravity at 25˚C ASTM-D70 kg/m3 ≥1.0 1.037
6 Loss on Heating (TFOT) ASTM-D1754 % ≤0.8 0.1
7 Penetration after TFOT ASTM-D5 0.1 mm ≥54 61.3
8 Kinematic Viscosity at 135˚C ASTM-D2170-67 cSt ≥300 460
The material aggregate consisted of coarse medium and fine aggregate with the largest size of 19 mm and
the composition of aggregate gradation shown in Figure 1. The physical characteristics of each type of aggregate
can be observed in Table 2.
Buton Natural Asphalt-Rubber (BNA-R)

BNA-R was produced from rock asphalt in Buton Island (Indonesia) called Asbuton. Rock asphalt is
composed of bitumen and minerals are used as an additive material. The rock asphalt is extracted to separate
the minerals from the bitumen. Buton Natural Asphalt (BNA) from the extraction of rock asphalt mixed with
rubber became BNA-R. The rubber bitumen mixture is used as an additive material to improve the performance
of virgin asphalt. BNA-R consists of 60% bitumen semi extraction and 40% crumb rubber. BNA-R has several
advantages such as high adhesiveness, high softening point, high stiffness modulus, high fracture resistance,
long life and economical.
The BNA-R was used as an additive or modifier to modify the properties of base bitumen. The content of
BNA-R 5%, 10% and 15% of weight of bitumen was choosen to modify the asphalt Pen 60/70. BNA-R
pulverized until a particle size smaller then mixed with asphalt Pen 60/70 at 140 while stir at a speed of
030004-2
approximately 2000 rpm. The addition of BNA-R has reduced penetration and also has increased the softening
point and viscosity.
FIGURE 1. Aggregate gradation used for asphalt concrete mixes
TABLE 2. Coarse, medium and fine aggregate

Specification
No Laboratory test Method Result
Min Max
Coarse Aggregate
1 Bulk specific gravity (Gsb) 2.5 − 2.67
Surface Saturated Dry gravity
2 2.5 − 2.69
(SSD) AASHTO T84/T85
3 Apparent specific gravity (SG) 2.5 − 2.73
4 Absorption − 3 0.89
5 Flakiness Index SNI 03-4137-1996 − 25% 13.15%
6 Los Angeles Abration AASHTO T96 − 40% 38%
Medium Aggregate
2 2.5 − 2.69
5 Flakiness Index SNI 03-4137-1996 − 25% 22.25%
Fine Aggregate
2 2.5 − 2.69
5 Clay lumps SNI 03-4428-1997 − 8% 3%
Natural Zeolite
There are various ways that have been done to implement the technology WMA. Temperature reduction
process of mixing asphalt aggregate and compacting has been done with the use of additives. The use of
additives can be classified based on the utilization of additives (additional organic or chemical) as well as on the
use of water. Utilization of water for WMA can be classified into two major groups; mainly the direct injection
of water to the bitumen and the utilization of hydro-thermally crystallized minerals such as zeolites [11]. This
study has used natural zeolite of West Java province in Indonesia. Zeolites virgin crushed into very small sizes
or pass through a sieve no. 200. Furthermore, for the activation process takes water to this material can be used
as an additive in warm mix asphalt. Activation method affects the absorption of the zeolite water content.
Chemical activation without heating has a high water content of about 13.77% [12].
030004-3
Bitumen Content
The Marshall method (ASTM D'1559) has been used to determine the optimum bitumen content (OBC) of a
AC-WC mixture that containing virgin asphalt or modified bitumen. OBC is obtained from a mixture of AC-
WC and BNA-R with the added material composition of 0%, 5%, 10% and 15% of the weight of the mixture.
The test results have known that OBC respectively 6.4%, 6.85%, 6.95% and 6.95%. The addition of BNA-R
tend to increase the content of bitumen in the asphalt concrete caused by the inside BNA-R contained a number
of bitumen.
Experimental design and test procedures

Samples for testing wheel tracking (WTM) has been designed from the density of asphalt concrete based on
the OBC from the AC-WC Marshall test for each content BNA-R. The WTM sample had a size of 300 x 300 x
50 mm and was compacted to have a density corresponding to the analysis requirements of the Marshall test on
each the optimum bitumen content with the tolerance of ± 2%. WTM test use wheel load 4.4 kg / cm2 which are
equivalent to the load of a load equivalent to a standard single-axle double wheel load weighing 8.16 tons. The
test object was traversed by 3,780 cycles for three hours at a speed of 21 cycles (42 tracks) per minute at 27°C,
40 °C and 60°C.
The Marshall test is performed at the standard and immersion condition. The Marshall test is performed on
cylindrical specimens, 102 mm in diameter and 64 mm in height, at a temperature of 60°C and a rate of loading
of 51 mm per minute. Two values are measured : the stability, which is the required load to fail the specimen,
and the flow index, which is the vertical distortion at the time of failure . The result of both condition shown in
Fig. 2.
Water Sensitivity
From the data shown in Fig. 2a the addition of BNA-R can improve the stability of asphalt mixtures. The
addition of additive BNA-R tends to rise up in the addition of 11% and then decline of Marshall stability. Figure
2a shows that the addition of BNA-R reaches the optimum value. Overall that the addition of BNA-R meets the
requirements of a minimum of 1,000 kg for modified asphalt concrete strength by Indonesia specifications.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 2. Influence of BNA-R on the Marshall Stability
Figures 2b shows the results of the sensitivity of the specimen to water. Asphalt mixture with the addition of
BNA-R seen an increase in the stability of the difference in value between the Marshall standard and Marshall
immersion. As can be observed, the incorporation of additives tested in this study (the addition of BNA-R)
induces a decrease in Remaining Strength Index (RSI) mix asphalt.
Performance of Rutting
Two types asphalt concrete mixes was conducted for this research. The hot mix aspaht (HMA) and warm
mix asphalt (WMA). The mixing and compacting temperature can be reduced by addition 2% of natural zeolite
030004-4
about 20˚C. This temperature have been determined from experimental temperatures of several previous testing
of WMA.
The wheel tracking machine (WTM) test was performed to know the influence of addition of BNA-R to the
rutting performance. Normally, the WTM test was conducted for one hour or 1,260 cycles or 2,520 passages.
Rutting prediction based on wheel tracking testing result, which in determined in the first hour is not reliable
[13]. The first hour or short cycle of WTM test not reached the secondary zone where the permanent
deformation will occur. So the extending of the test cycles is needed [7].
The result of WTM at different test temperature of 27˚C, 40˚C and 60˚C for HMA is shown in Figure 3.
Ruth depth is reduced by the addition of BNA-R at a temperature testing of 270C and 40 0C.
(a) (b)
(c)
FIGURE 3. Rutting development of various BNA-R at 27˚C, 40˚C and 60˚C
This condition is relevant to the decline in asphalt penetration index for the addition of BNA-R. The
asphalt mixture concrete with a low penetration index asphalt will tend to be stiff, so the rut depth will be
reduced. However, this is not formed at the test temperature of 60 ° C, in which the addition of BNA-R does not
show a decrease rut depth. The content of crumb rubber in the BNA-R tends to soften the asphalt mixture so that
the resistance to deformation is also reduced at high temperatures (Fig. 3-c).
Figure 4 shows the change in deformation with the increase number of cycle tracks on the WMA sample of
the composition that containing 2% of zeolite at a temperature of 40˚C WTM testing. WMA also show the same
trend in deformation resistance shown by rut depth, the addition of BNA-R on this warm mixture reduces the rut
depth (Fig. 5). The rutting development based on the result of extended wheel tracking machine test shows that
the rut depth of warm mix asphalt tends to higher than the conventional asphalt mixture (HMA). The test on
HMA was conducted as a comparison. At addition BNA-R up to 10% of WMA tend to be more susceptible to
deformation compared to the HMA. However, at the content of 15% BNA-R deformation WMA smaller than a
conventional asphalt mixture (HMA).
030004-5
FIGURE 4. Rutting development of WMA with 2% Zeolite
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
FIGURE 5. Rutting development at test temperature of 40˚C of WMA and HMA
The rate of deformation (di/Ni) versus the cycle Ni for four different samples types and different test
temperatures is shown in Figure 6 for HMA and Figure 7 for WMA. At the beginning of the loading time, the
value di/Ni is high, and the value decreases rapidly to near zero. One of model to predict the rut depth is VESYS
method is based on the assumption that the permanent strain is proportional to the resilient strain by
εp(N) = μ . εr N-α (1)
where εp(N) is the permanent or plastic strain due to a single load application, i.e., at the Nth application; εr is
the elastic or resilient strain, generally assumed to be independent of the load repetition (N); and μ is the
permanent deformation parameter, which represents the constant of proportionality between the permanent
strain and the elastic strain (i.e., permanent strain at N= 1) and α is a permanent deformation parameter
indicating the rate of decrease in permanent deformation as the number of load applications increases [1,7].
Figure 6 and Figure 7 show that the relationship between di/Ni and Ni is a power function that can be written
as:
di/Ni = a.(Ni)-b (2)

or di = Ni . a . (Ni)-b (3)
030004-6
The curves illustrated in Figure 6 and 7 show that the value of (Ni. a) and b for each additional additive is
different. The value of the coefficients “a” and “b” are the parameters of the HMA and WMA characteristics
that can be identified through a series of WTM tests. At the same temperature test, the value of b could be
concluded to have almost the same value. The value of b is about 0.703, 0.753 and 0.536 for the 27˚C, 40˚C and
60 ˚C respectively.
Figure 6 and 7 show that the value of (Ni. a) and b for each additional additive is different. The value of
the coefficients “a” and “b” are the parameters of the HMA and WMA characteristics that can be identified
through a series of WTM tests. At the same temperature test, the value of b could be concluded to have almost
the same value. The value of b is about 0.703, 0.753 and 0.536 for the 27˚C, 40˚C and 60 ˚C respectively.
(a) (b)
(c)
FIGURE 6. Rate of Deformation of HMA at different temperature test
FIGURE 7. Rate of Deformation at 40˚C of WMA with 2% of Zeolite
030004-7
CONCLUSION
The use of additives to improve the performance of bitumen Pen 60/70 greatly affect the resistance of
deformation of asphalt mixture both hot mix asphalt (HMA) and warm mix asphalt (WMA). BNA-R made from
Asbuton semi extraction and crumb rubber, can be used as a modifier of bitumen base of asphalt mixture. In
general, the ability of WMA with bitumen modification (BNA-R 5% and 10%) to withstand repeated load worse
than HMA except at the WMA with bitumen modification BNA-R 15% indicate better. The mixing and
compaction temperature of WMA lower than HMA influence the rate of deformation of the asphalt mixture.
Further research is needed so that the performance criteria of WMA in permanent deformation as well as or
even better than HMA.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The financial support of Directorate for Research and Community Services through Hibah PITTA 2016 at
the Universitas Indonesia is greatly appreciated. The experimental work was completed in the Material and
Structure Laboratory of Universitas Indonesia and the Research Centre and Development for Road and Bridge
Laboratory-Ministry of Public Works Republic of Indonesia.
REFERENCES
1. H. Y. Huang, Pavement Analysis and Design. (Pearson Education, Inc, New Jersey, 2004), pp. 279-331.
2. T. Xu, H. Wang, Z. Li, Y. Zhao, "Evaluation of permanent deformation of asphalt mixtures using different."
Construction nand Building Materials , 2014, pp. 561-567.
3. J. Zhang, A. E. Alvarez, S. I. Lee, A. Torres, L. F. Walubita, "Comparison of flow number, dynamic
modulus, and repeated load tests." Construction Building and Materials , 2013, pp. 391-398.
4. R. L. E. de Carvalho, “Prediction of Permanent Deformation in Asphalt Concrete”, PhD Thesis, University
of Maryland, 2012.
5. A. Vaitkus, M. Paliukaite, "Evaluation of Time Loading Influence on Asphalt Pavement Rutting." Procedia
Engineering , 2013, pp.1205-1212.
6. G. H. Shafabakhsh, M. Sadeghnejad, Y. Sajed, "Case study of rutting performance of HMA modified with
waste rubber powder." Construction Building and Materials, 2014, pp.69-76.
7. Hadiwardoyo, S. Pranowo, "Evaluation of the Rutting Deformation Data of Asphalt Mixtures during
Continuous Cycle Testing based on Short-Cycle Wheel Tracking Testing." Advanced Materials Research,
2013, pp.85-91.
8. C. Wang, P. Hao, F. Ruan, X. Zhang, S. Adhikari, "Determination of the production temperature of warm
mix asphalt by workability test." Contruction and Building Materials , 2013, pp.1165-1170.
9. H. Wang, Z. Dang, Z. You, D. Cao, "Effect of warm mix asphalt (WMA) additives on high failure
temperature properties for crumb rubber modified (CRM) binders." Construction and Building Materials ,
2012, pp.281-288.
10. X. Huang, Y. Zhang, "A New Creep Test Method for Asphalt Mixtures." Roads Material and Pavement
Design , 2010, pp. 969-991.
11. B. Sengoz, A. Topal, C. Gorkem, "Evaluation of natural zeolite as warm mix asphalt additive and its
comparison with otherr warm mix additives." Construction and Building Materials , 2013, pp. 242-252.
12. F. Affandi, H. Hadisi, "Pengaruh metode aktivasi zeolit alam sebagai bahan penurun temperatur campuran
beraspal hangat." Jurnal Jalan dan Jembatan 28, 2011
13. L. Moa, X. Li, X. Fang, M. Huurman, S. Wu, "Laboratory investigation of compaction characteristics and
performance of warm mix asphalt containing chemical additives." Construction and Building Materials ,
2012, pp. 239-247.
030004-8
Contributions crumb rubber in hot mix asphalt to the resilient modulus
Raden Hendra Ariyapijati, Sigit Pranowo Hadiwardoyo, and R. Jachrizal Sumabrata

Contributions Crumb Rubber in Hot Mix Asphalt to the
Resilient Modulus
Raden Hendra Ariyapijati1, a), Sigit Pranowo Hadiwardoyo1,b), and R Jachrizal
Sumabrata1,c)
1
Department of Civil Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: pijati@yahoo.com
b)
sigit@eng.ui.ac.id, c)rjs@eng.ui.ac.id
Abstract. Pavement on the structure of the surface layer receives direct load from the vehicles. Road surfaces are
designed to withstand the wear from vehicle loads. Therefore, we need a way to improve the durability of the pavement.
Road damage may reduce the life of roads and increase the maintenance costs. The retention rate of road surface material
is affected by the environmental conditions, one of them is temperature. To overcome the issues related to temperature,
material additives are added to the asphalt mixture. These additive materials would change the binding properties of
bitumen and the characteristics of strain and stress before the damage due to repeated traffic loading. Crumb rubber (CR)
is a type of polymer additives and thermoplastic elastomers are obtained from scrap tires and rubber waste that is utilized
in order to preserve the environment. This study investigated the contribution of the crumb rubber in terms of the value of
resilient modulus and resistance to deformation. Hot mix asphalt used was asphalt Pen 60/70, coarse aggregate, fine
aggregate and filler. Crumb rubber was made from scrap tire rubber, in the form of fine powder with sieve no. 30 (0.6
mm). CR additive was added to the base asphalt at several rates of 5%, 10%, 15%, and 20% at a temperature of 177o C.
The test data used the indirect tensile test with a tool UMATTA at temperatures of 25o, 35o, and 45o C. The test results
showed that the levels of crumb rubber on the asphalt decreased the penetration rate, increased the bitumen softening
point, and improved the resistance to permanent deformation. The addition of additive materials was evidenced to
improve the penetration index, reduce the temperature sensitivity, and increase the viscosity. Subsequently, it can extend
the temperature range of viscoelasticity. The contributions of crumb rubber in hot mix asphalt included the increase of
the recoverable deformation and the decrease of the value of resilient modulus. This study indicated that by the addition
of crumb rubber, the pavement material becomes more elastic, so it can reduce the level of damage in the form of cracks
on roads, but it also declines the ability of the pavement to withstand the loads.
INTRODUCTION
A variety of causes can lead to the road damage including over loading and low quality materials. To improve
the ability of pavement materials, additive material added to the bitumen, one of them is crumb rubber. The mixture
can increase the performance by enhancing the rigidity as well as the resistance to permanent deformation and
fatigue.
Resilient modulus is one the important properties in the mechanistic analysis of pavement response under
dynamic traffic loads. Resilient modulus is also used in the evaluation of the materials quality. In addition, indirect
tensile strength is also an important parameter to assess the characterization of resistance to the failure of asphalt
concrete due to the tensile stresses.
The physical interaction between the crumb rubber (CR) and bitumen physically occurs when through diffusion,
CR absorbs a portion of the aromatic fraction of bitumen that leads to the swelling of CR particles. Effective size of
particles will depend on the temperature. The elastomer interface of CR is clear and the holes are widely spread
before the mixture, whereas, after the mixture, the interface is not clear and the holes will disappear [1]. Crumb
rubber can be used for a variety of civil engineering projects including in rubberized asphalt pavements, flooring for
playgrounds, and sport stadiums in the form of shock absorbing mats, paving blocks, and roofing materials [2].
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030005-1–030005-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985475
030005-1
Wang [3] explicated the reason of the addition of crumb rubber can improve the anti-fatigue properties of asphalt
mixtures, which is the elements of crumb rubber powder such as carbon black that can improve the asphalt binder or
the mixture of asphalt against the aging. Subsequently, it would increase the film thickness of asphalt on the surface
of the aggregate and then improve the aging resistance of asphalt mixtures.
Rubber powder waste has a significant impact in reducing the depth of asphalt rutting at a particular temperature,
in which a mixture of asphalt that contains 10% of rubber powder waste was evidenced to have a better performance
at high temperatures. In addition, the addition of rubber powder additive reduces the thermal sensitivity of asphalt
mixtures that will increase the resistance to permanent deformation [4].
The addition of crumb rubber on high modulus asphalt mixtures also increases the stiffness, which brings a
positive effect in terms of bearing and stress distribution capacities. Nevertheless, when these materials are subjected
to high strain, this characteristic can exert a negative effect in terms of fatigue resistance that can induce a premature
failure of this type of mixtures when the deflections in the pavement layers are high [5].
Kim [6] claimed that CRM mix wet processed is more powerful than the dry mixture in SD and ITS, which
indicates that the process of wet manufacturing method is better than the dry process in terms of resistance to
deformation at high temperatures and tensile strength at ambient temperature.
Furthermore, Cong [7] reported an increase in the viscosity as the result of an increase in particle size as well as
the flow behavior which is more likely to turn into a non-Newtonian fluid. In addition, the increase of temperature
results in a significant reduction of viscosity, in which a larger particle size seems to hamper the viscosity. Liang [9]
suggested the addition of CR asphalt produced a tremendous increase in the viscoelastic and viscosity characteristics
in compared to those of base asphalt. As a result, it is expected that an increase of resistance to permanent
deformation occurs on the road with CR modified bitumen.
Previous researches showed that the asphalt surfaces with and without the addition of low content of rubber in
binder were evidenced to have insignificant difference in term of sound. Acoustic monitoring by a semi-anechoic
chamber (CPX -method) showed a significant reduction in noise (about 2.5 dB (A) to 80 km / h), which is associated
with high levels of incorporation CR to mix gradation gap. Acoustic perform during service life, a higher content of
CR significantly reduced noise pollution in urban areas, while variation of 2.5 dB (A), similar in terms of traffic,
approximately halved the volume of traffic [8].
This study investigated the performance of hot mix asphalt against repeated load wheels of the vehicle, where the
hot mix asphalt was added by crumb rubber additives. It inquired the contribution of the hot mix asphalt and
additives regarding with the effect on the resilient modulus of pavement materials. The use of additives is also
intended to provide the asphalt mixture that is environmentally friendly, especially for the temperature change. A
series of laboratory tests was conducted in sequences to determine the characteristics of hot mix asphalt.
Aggregates
The material aggregate consisted of the course, medium, and fine aggregate with the largest size of 19 mm and
the dense grading for AC-WC (asphalt concrete-wearing course).
Binder
The samples of asphalt mixture were prepared by using two different types of binder. The base binder with the
penetration grade of 60/70 from Shell and Crumb rubber modified bitumen were selected for this study. To prepare
the CR modified bitumen, the asphalt binder was heated at 177 o C in temperature and the CR powders (5%, 10%,
15%, and 20% by weight of 60/70 bitumen) were added gradually into the bitumen in a high shear mixer at the
speed of 700 rpm until reaching a homogeneous blend[10], with the characteristics as shown in Table-1 and Table-2.
Crumb Rubber (CR)

The increasing number of vehicles has increased the number of waste tires of vehicles. The utilization of waste
tires included a process to form them into new materials, e.g., rubber powder. The utilization of scrap tires on roads
was initiated by Charles MacDonald in the 1960s when he used waste tires for maintenance works in urban areas.
030005-2
Tire rubber has an advantage as an additive in asphalt cement for repairing potholes [11]. In this study, crumb rubber
was made from scrap tire rubber, in the form of fine powder by using sieve no. 30 (0.6 mm).
TABLE 1. Properties of base asphalt binder (Pen 60/70)

Bitumen property Standard Unit Value
Penetration at 25oC ASTM-D5 0.1 mm 69.3
o
Softening point ASTM-D36 C 49.7
o
Flash point ASTM-D92 C 254
Ductility at 25oC ASTM-D113 cm >140
Specific Gravity ASTM-D70 g/cm3 1.023
Loss on heating (TFOT) % 0.03
Penetration after TFOT ASTM-D5 % 63.3
Penetration Index -0.295
TABLE 2. Properties of base asphalt modified (CR additive)
Unit Percentage of CR
Binder property Standard
5% 10% 15% 20%
Penetration at 25oC ASTM-D5 0.1mm 66.1 63.7 61.7 58.2
Softening point ASTM-D36 o C 52.25 53.25 54 55
Flash point ASTM-D92 o C 256 282 246 246
Ductility at 25oC ASTM-D113 cm 74.4 54.5 49.6 42.3
Specific Gravity ASTM-D70 g/cm3 1.033 1.04 1.046 1.052
Loss on heating % 0.17 0.2 0.22 0.33
Viscosity at 135o C AASHTO cST 525 750 875 1383
Penetration after TFOT ASTM-D5 0.1mm 59.6 57.4 53.6 51.7
Penetration Index -0.295 -0.239 -0.198 -0.183
Resilient Modulus
Resilient modulus is the elastic modulus that is used based on the elastic theory. It is well known that most of
paving materials are not elastic, hence, they will endure some permanent deformations after each load applications.
However, if the load is insignificant in compared to the material strength and is repeated for a large number of time,
the deformation under each load repetition is nearly completely recoverable and proportional to the load and can be
considered as elastic [12]. The elastic modulus based on the recoverable strain under repeated load is called the
resilient modulus (MR) that is formulated as follows:
(1)
Resilient modulus test is non-destructive test and the same sample can be used for a variety of tests under
different load and environmental conditions. Specimens for asphalt mix used for the compression test are usually 4
inches (102 mm) in diameter and 8 inches (203 mm) in height, while the indirect tensile test requires 4 inches (102
mm) in diameter and 2.5 inches (64 mm) in thickness.
In this research, the method to test the resilient modulus was the indirect tensile test (ASTM D7369 - 11). The
above asphalt mixture was subjected to the test. Cylindrical specimens of 4 inches (102 mm) in diameter and of 63
mm in height were used in this indirect tensile test. Indirect tensile test on resilient modulus was subjected to
haversine loading shape. The test had 250 ms time of loading with rest period of 900 ms, and three different
temperatures (i.e., 25o, 35o, and 45o C).
030005-3
Effect of crumb rubber additive in asphalt characteristics

The test results showed that the level of crumb rubber on the asphalt had caused a decrease of penetration rate,
an increase of bitumen softening point (Table 1 & 2), and an improvement of resistance to permanent deformation.
The addition of the additive materials improved the penetration index and reduced the sensitivity to temperature and
significantly increased the viscosity of the binder that extended the temperature range of viscoelasticity (Fig. 1).
FIGURE 1. Viscosity of the binder.
Effect of temperature on the recoverable deformation

The addition of crumb rubber additive improved the ability of the pavement mixture that was imposed by
repeated load and the horizontal deformation returned to normal. It showed the mixed material becomes more
elastic, so as to prevent the occurrence of cracks in the pavement. Fig. 2 demonstrated the increased temperature
from 25oC to 45o C led to the increased number of recoverable horizontal deformation that was allegedly due to
thermoplastic properties of the asphalt material. With the addition of crumb rubber additive, the number of
recoverable horizontal deformation increased significantly with the highest value with CR level of 10%.
FIGURE 2. Recoverable Horizontal Deformation.
The addition of crumb rubber from the amount of 5% to 20% resulted in an increased number of recoverable
horizontal deformation. Fig. 2 figured out a temperature of 45o C had a higher influence on the addition of crumb
030005-4
rubber additive. Subsequently, the figure also demonstrated that the addition of crumb rubber on pavement material
was more effective at low temperature, which was 35° C and below.
Effect of crumb rubber content on the resilient modulus

The results of the indirect tensile test with UMATTA tool showed that the value of resilient modulus decreased
significantly in linear to the increased level of crumb rubber at a fixed binder content. This was due to the reduced
amount of bitumen content that was replaced by the increase amount of crumb rubber. Resilient modulus value
declined by 50% from 3000 MPa to 1500 Mpa in the addition of crumb rubber of 10% in content. As illustrated in
Fig. 3, the diverse binder contents of 5.5%, 6.0%, and 6.5% generated a slight increase in the value of resilient
modulus.
FIGURE 3. Influence of CR additive on Resilient Modulus.
Based on the analysis, the values of resilient modulus between the low and high temperature were significantly
different, which indicated that the hot mix asphalt without any additives was not resistant to the changes of
temperature. Meanwhile, the mixture contained additives was more resistant to the effects of temperature changes.
FIGURE 4. Influence of Temperature on Resilient Modulus.
Figure 4 demonstrated the increased percentage of additive concentration resulted on the declined value of
resilient modulus. It can be seen the increased temperature of the specimens from 25o C to 45o C resulted in the
precipitous decrease of resilient modulus value of the specimen without additive (steep graph slope), while the
030005-5
values of resilient modulus of specimen with the addition of crumb rubber had moderate slope. It suggests that the
mixture of pavement with the addition of crumb rubber additive is more resistant to the temperature changes.
CONCLUSIONS
The use of crumb rubber as an additive material in hot mix asphalt was generated from scrap materials from tire
rubber as an effort of environmental preservation. It was expected that this additive would improve the
characteristics of mixed materials pavement.
Based on the results obtained from this study, several conclusions can be drawn:
1. The addition of crumb rubber improved the penetration index, thus, reduced the sensitivity to temperature and
significantly increased the viscosity of the binder that could extend the temperature range of viscoelasticity.
2. The values of resilient modulus between the low and high temperature were significantly different, which
indicated that the hot mix asphalt without any additives was not resistant to the changes of temperature, while the
mixture contained additives was more resistant to the effects of temperature changes.
3. Contributions of crumb rubber in hot mix asphalt is to increase the number of recoverable horizontal
deformation, which means the hot mix asphalt will be more elastic in enduring repeated loads, thereby it will
reduce the number of cracks. However, the values of resilient modulus decrease. Contributions of crumb rubber
in asphalt hot mix obtain an effective value in the combination of 10% of CR and an air temperature of 35° C and
below.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors would like to express gratitude to The Directorate for Research and Community Service at The
Universitas Indonesia, which provided funding through the 2016 Research Grant (Hibah PITTA UI) for this study.
REFERENCES
1. ) 0RJKDGDV 3 $JKDMDQL $ 0RGDUUHV DQG + )LURR]LIDU ³,QYHVWLJDWLQJ WKH SURSHUWLHV RI FUXPE UXEEHU
modified bitumen usinJFODVVLFDQG6+53WHVWLQJPHWKRGVĆonstr. Build. Mater., vol. 26, no. 1, pp. 481±489,
2012.
2. ' /R 3UHVWL ³5HF\FOHG 7\UH 5XEEHU 0RGLILHG %LWXPHQV IRU URDG DVSKDOW PL[WXUHVௗ $ OLWHUDWXUH UHYLHZ T´
Constr. Build. Mater., vol. 49, pp. 863±881, 2013.
3. +:DQJ='DQJ//LDQG=<RX³$QDO\VLVRQIDWLJXHFUDFNJURZWKOaws for crumb rubber modified (CRM)
DVSKDOWPL[WXUHĆonstr. Build. Mater., vol. 47, pp. 1342±1349, 2013.
4. *+6KDIDEDNKVK06DGHJKQHMDGDQG<6DMHG³&DVH6WXGLHVLQ&RQVWUXFWLRQ0DWHULDOV&DVHVWXG\RIUXWWLQJ
SHUIRUPDQFHRI+0$PRGLILHGZLWKZDVWHUXEEHUSRZGHUĆase Stud. Constr. Mater., vol. 1, pp. 69±76, 2014.
5. F. Moreno-navarro, M. Sol-sánchez, M. C. Rubio-gámez, and M. Segarra-PDUWtQH]³7KHXVHRIDGGLWLYHVIRUWKH
LPSURYHPHQWRIWKHPHFKDQLFDOEHKDYLRURIKLJKPRGXOXVDVSKDOWPL[HVĆonstr. Build. Mater., vol. 70, pp. 65±
70, 2014.
6. S. Kim, S. Lee, Y. Yun, and .:.LP³7KHXVHRI&50-PRGLILHGDVSKDOWPL[WXUHVLQ.RUHDௗ(YDOXDWLRQRI
KLJKDQGDPELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHSHUIRUPDQFHĆonstr. Build. Mater., vol. 67, pp. 244±248, 2014.
7. 3&RQJ3;XQ0;LQJDQG6&KHQ³,QYHVWLJDWLRQRIDVSKDOWELQGHUFRQWDLQLQJYarious crumb rubbers and
DVSKDOWVĆonstr. Build. Mater., vol. 40, pp. 632±641, 2013.
8. 6(3DMH-/XRQJ9)9i]TXH]0%XHQRDQG50LUy³5RDGSDYHPHQWUHKDELOLWDWLRQXVLQJDELQGHUZLWK
a high contHQWRIFUXPEUXEEHUௗ,QIOXHQFHRQQRLVHUHGXFWLRQĆonstr. Build. Mater., vol. 47, no. 2013, pp. 789±
798, 2015.
9. 0 /LDQJ ; ;LQ : )DQ + 6XQ < <DR DQG % ;LQJ ³9LVFRXV SURSHUWLHV VWRUDJH VWDELOLW\ DQG WKHLU
relationships with microstructure of WLUHVFUDSUXEEHUPRGLILHGDVSKDOWĆonstr. Build. Mater., vol. 74, pp. 124±
131, 2015.
10. + .LP . -HRQJ 0 6XS DQG 6 /HH ³3HUIRUPDQFH SURSHUWLHV RI &50 ELQGHUV ZLWK ZD[ ZDUP DGGLWLYHV´
Constr. Build. Mater., vol. 66, pp. 356±360, 2014.
11. B. Celauro, C. &HODXUR ' /R DQG $ %HYLODFTXD ³'HILQLWLRQ RI D ODERUDWRU\ RSWLPL]DWLRQ SURWRFRO IRU URDG
ELWXPHQLPSURYHGZLWKUHF\FOHGWLUHUXEEHUĆonstr. Build. Mater., vol. 37, pp. 562±572, 2012.
<++XDQJ³3DYHPHQW$QDO\VLVDQG'HVLJQ´S
030005-6
Resilient modulus characteristics of soil subgrade with geopolymer additive in peat
Nasuhi Zain, Sigit Pranowo Hadiwardoyo, and Wiwik Rahayu

Resilient Modulus Characteristics of Soil Subgrade with
Geopolymer Additive in Peat
Nasuhi Zain1, Sigit Pranowo Hadiwardoyo2,a) , Wiwik Rahayu3
1,2,3
a)
Abstract. Resilient modulus characteristics of peat soil are generally very low with high potential of deformation
and low bearing capacity. The efforts to improve the peat subgrade resilient modulus characteristics is required,
one among them is by adding the geopolymer additive. Geopolymer was made as an alternative to replace
portland cement binder in the concrete mix in order to promote environmentally friendly, low shrinkage value,
low creep value, and fire resistant material. The use of geopolymer to improve the mechanical properties of peat
as a road construction subgrade, hence it becomes important to identify the effect of geopolymer addition on the
resilient modulus characteristics of peat soil. This study investigated the addition of 0% - 20% geopolymer
content on peat soil derived from Ogan Komering Ilir, South Sumatera Province. Resilient modulus measurement
was performed by using cyclic triaxial test to determine the resilience modulus model as a function of deviator
stresses and radial stresses. The test results showed that an increase in radial stresses did not necessarily lead to
an increase in modulus resilient, and on the contrary, an increase in deviator stresses led to a decrease in modulus
resilient. The addition of geopolymer in peat soil provided an insignificant effect on the increase of resilient
modulus value.
INTRODUCTION
Laboratory research has shown that the combination of alkaline activator and industrial waste or mining
waste can create binder material in the form of inexpensive and environmentally friendly cement [1].
Aluminium silicate binder from industrial or mining waste is called as inorganic geopolymeric compound
because geopolymeric binder is a result of inorganic polycondensation reaction known as geopolymerisation.
To balance negative alumino ion, positive ion like alkaline ion is required [2].
Fly ash from the combustion of coal has been used as a stabilizing agent of soil embankment because it
could increase the shear strength of soil and decrease the cost [3-4]. In fact, the usage of 20% geopolymer in
soil embankment stabilization showed optimal result based on the assessment of CBR (California Bearing
Ratio) test [5]. In addition, the usage of 20% geopolymer in peat soil showed optimal result based on the
assessment of UCS (Unconfined Compression Stress) test [6]. Nevertheless, the increased addition of lime or
cement in peat soil (10%, 30%, and 50%) constantly increased the soil bearing capacity [7].
MR (Resilient Modulus) is used to determine the strength of the subgrade on the pavement design. The
soil resilient modulus is determined by deviator stress and radial stress, both in a fine-grained and coarse
grained soil. One of the existing soil modulus resilient models is proposed by [8-10] with a formula as
follows:
‫ܯ‬ோ ൌ ‫ܭ‬ଵ ߪௗ ௄మ ߠ௄య (1)
where, ߪௗ is Deviator Stress, ߠ is Total Radial Stress, and K1, K2 and K3 are Coefficient.
It is expected the addition of fly ash with alkaline activators in peat soil can improve the value of resilient
modulus as a subgrade. Therefore, a study to investigate the effect of the addition of fly ash and alkaline
activator on the peat soil related to the resilient modulus characteristics.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030006-1–030006-5; doi: 10.1063/1.4985476
030006-1
METHODS
Peat soil samples used in this study were taken from Kayu Agung Sub-district, OKI (Ogan Ogan Ilir)
District, South Sumatra Province. Furthermore compaction testing was performed on the samples (Pradipta,
2015) where the dry bulk density was very low at 0:41 gr/cm3 with optimum moisture content ranging
between 100% to 120%, a specific gravity of 1.39 g/cm3, and acidity (pH) of 4.43 as presented in Fig. 1.
Ϭ͘ϴ
<ĞƌĂƉĂƚĂŶŬĞƌŝŶŐ
Ϭ͘ϲ
;ŐͬĐŵϯͿ
Ϭ͘ϰ
Ϭ͘Ϯ
Ϭ <ƵƌǀĂWĞŵĂĚĂƚĂŶ s>ŝŶĞ
ϲϬ ϴϬ ϭϬϬ ϭϮϬ ϭϰϬ ϭϲϬ
<ĂĚĂƌĂŝƌ;йͿ
FIGURE 1. Peat OKI Compacting Test

Source: Pradipta [11]
The polymer used as the binder was a mixture of fly ash with the activator solution consisting of sodium
silicate (water glass), caustic soda (NaOH), and water. Fly ash was derived from the combustion of coal,
including F class in according to ASTM C618 with the silicon content of 59% and aluminum of 12%. Fly ash
test and more information data was obtained from PT. Adhimix as a provider of the fly ash (shown in Table -
1). Water Glass consisted of sodium oxide (Na2O) of 16.13% and silicon oxide (SiO2) of 10.7% as tested in
the Laboratory of Universitas Indonesia). The composition used in the preparation of geopolymer mixture
was based on the percentage by weight, which were: 70% Fly Ash, 10% Water Glass, 10% Soda Fire, and
10% Water.
Resilient modulus testing was performed on the specimens with three different compositions as follows:
1. Peat without Geopolymer
2. Peat mixed with 10% Geopolymer
3. Peat mixed with 20% Geopolymer
The standard loading was based on AASHTO T307 - 99 (2003) by using the repeated haversine shaped
load in a period of 0.1 second and followed by of 0.9 second. Before starting the resilient modulus testing,
specimens were loaded to 6 psi radial stress and 4 psi deviator stress and then given repeated deviator stress
as 500 times. When the specimen suffered permanent strain of higher than 5% after receiving repeated
loading, the additional 500 times repeated loading was performed. In case after the additional repeated
loading the permanent strain was still higher than 5%, then the test could not be performed.
Various deviator stress and radial stress conditions were loaded to the specimen in modulus resilient test
where 100 times loadings were repeated in each condition. In the last five cycles of loading, specimen stress
and specimen strain were observed to calculate the resilient modulus of the specimen. When the permanent
strain was higher than 5%, the resilient modulus could not be specified. The deviator stress and radial stress
variations were used in AASHTO T 307, which can be seen in the following Table 2.

Based on the results of resilient modulus test, the axial strain increased in accordance with the increased
load of the repetitive loading. However, the increased rate of the axial strain was higher than the rate of
increased loading. It led to declined modulus resilient when the load of repetitive loading load was increased.
This phenomenon was probably related to the effects of repetitive loading on peat soil. Nevertheless, the
increase of radial stress had insignificant effect on the increase of resilient modulus because the radial stress
direction was perpendicular to the axial strain that did not directly influence the axial strain.The addition of
polymer on peat soil had insignificant effect on the increase of the resilient modulus value. It was probably
caused by geopolymer spread on the peat soil dis not form a compact structure. Additional research is
030006-2
required to provide higher geopolymer content to identify how far the geopolymer can improve the resilient
modulus of peat soil and to measure the efficiency of the addition of geopolymer.
TABLE 1. Fly Ash Test Data.

Parameter Unit Results
Moisture Content %, ar 0,47
Carbon © %, ar 1,81
Relative Density % 2,60
/RVV2Q,JQLWLRQ/2,DWÛ& % 1,04
Chemical Analysis of Ash
Silicon Dioxide SiO2 59,95
Aluminium Trioxide Al2O3 12,30
Iron Trioxide Fe2O3 11,97
Titanium Dioxide TiO2 0,58
Calcium Oxide CaO 9,15
Magnesium Oxide MgO 1,81
Potassium Oxide K2O 0,73
Sodium Oxide Na2O 2,58
Phosphorus Pentaoxide P2O5 0,11
Sulphur Trioxide SO3 0,46
Manganese Dioxide MnO2 007
Sieve Analysis
Retained on mesh 4 % 0,00
Passing by mesh 325 % 80,70
Fineness Modulus - 0,06

Source: PT Adhimix, 2014 [12]
TABLE 2. Loading and Repetition as Parameter Test for Modulus Resilient.

Deviator Stress (psi)
2 4 6 8 10
2
Stress (psi)
Radial
4 100 Load Repetitions
6
Source: AASHTO T 307-99 (Standard method of test for determining the resilient modulus of soils and aggregate
materials (AASHTO), 2003) [13-14]
030006-3
FIGURE - 2. Modulus Resilient of Peat Soil.
FIGURE -3. Modulus Resilient of Peat Soil with 10% Geopolymer.
FIGURE -4. Modulus Resilient of Peat Soil with 10% Geopolymer.
030006-4
CONCLUSION
The preliminary conclusion that can be derived from this study is that an increase in radial stresses does
not necessarily lead to an increase in modulus resilient. However, an increase in deviator stresses leads to a
decrease in modulus resilient. The addition of geopolymer content in peat soil provides an increasing trend of
resilient modulus value.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The financial support of Directorate for Research and Community Services at the Universitas Indonesia is
greatly appreciated. The experimental work was completed in the Material and Structure Laboratory of
Universitas Indonesia and the Water Resources Research Centre Laboratory-Ministry of Public Works
Republic of Indonesia.
REFERENCES
1. M. G. Palomo, (1999). Alkali-activated fly ashes A cement for the future. Cement and Concrete
Research, 1323-1329.
2. 6 * 1XQR &ULVWHOR 6RLO VWDELOLVDWLRQ XVLQJ DONDOLQH DFWLYDWLRQ RI À\ DVK IRU VHOI-
compacting rammed earth construction. Construction Building and Materials, 727-735.
3. 0 $KPDUX]]DPDQ $ UHYLHZ RQ WKH XWLOL]DWLRQ RI À\ DVK 3URJUHVV LQ (QHUJ\ DQG
Combustion Science, 327-363.
4. P. N. P. Sargent, (2013). The use of alkali activated waste binders in enhancing the mechanical
properties and durability of soft alluvial soils. Engineering Geology, 96-108.
5. J. S. Trivedi, S. Nair, C. Iyyunni, (2013). Optimum Utilization of Fly Ash for Stabilization of
Subgrade Soil using Genetic Algorithm. Procedia Engineering, 250-258.
6. P. M. Kolay, M.P. Pui, (2010). Peat Stabilization using Gypsum and Fly Ash. UNIMAS E-Journal
of Civil Engineering, 1-5.
7. S. Boobathiraja, P. Balamurugan , M. Dhansheer, & A. Adhikari, (2014). Study on Strength of Peat
Soil Stabilised with Cement and Other Pozzolanic Materials. International Journal of Civil
Engineering Research, 431-438.
8. R. B. Malla & S. Joshi, (2007). Resilient Modulus Prediction Models Based on nalysis of LTPP
'DWDIRU6XEJUDGH6RLOVDQG([SHULPHQWDO9HUL¿FDWLRQ-RXUQDORI7Uansportation Engineering, 491-
504.
9. R. F. Pezo, (1993). A general method of reporting resilient modulus tests of soils±A pavement
HQJLQHHU¶V SRLQW RI YLHZ :DVKLQJWRQ '& QG $QQXDO 0HHWLQJ RI WKH 7UDQVSRUWDWLRQ 5HVHDUFK
Board.
10. R. P. Long, (1999). Resilient Modulus of Subgrade. Connecticut: University of Connecticut.
11. M. Pradipta, (2015). Effect of Mixing Results Selulotik Potential Microorganisms on Strength of
Material Land Peat As stockpile. Depok: Universitas Indonesia.
12. PT Adhimix. (2014). Jakarta
13. AASHTO. (1993). Design of Pavement Structures. Washington DC: American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials.
14. AASHTO. (2003). Standard method of test for determining the resilient modulus of soils and
aggregate materials. In A. T307-99, Design of Pavement Structures. Washington DC.
030006-5
Mechanical properties of Cr-Cu coatings produced by electroplating
Tri Widodo Besar Riyadi, Sarjito, Masyrukan, and Ricky Ary Riswan

Mechanical Properties of Cr-Cu Coatings Produced by
Electroplating
Tri Widodo Besar Riyadi1, a), Sarjito1, b), Masyrukan1, Ricky Ary Riswan1
1
Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Muhammadiyah Surakarta
Jl. A. Yani Tromol Pos 1 Pabelan Kartasura, Surakarta, Indonesia 57102
a)
Corresponding author: Tri.Riyadi@ums.ac.id
b)
sarjito@ums.ac.id
Abstract. Hard chromium coatings has long been considered as the most used electrodeposited coating in several
industrial applications such as in petrochemistry, oil and gas industries. When hard coatings used in fastener components,
the sliding contact during fastening operation produces high tensile stresses on the surface which can generate
microcracks. For component used in high oxidation and corrosion environment, deep cracks cannot be tolerated. In this
work, a laminated structure of Cr-Cu coating was prepared using electroplating on carbon steel substrates. Two baths of
chrome and copper electrolyte solutions were prepared to deposit Cr as the first layer and Cu as the second layer. The
effect of current voltages on the thickness, hardness and specific wear rate of the Cu layer was investigated. The results
show that an increase of the current voltages increased the thickness and hardness of the Cu layer, but reduced the
specific wear rate. This study showed that the use of Cu can be a potential candidate as a laminated structure Cr-Cu for
chromium plating.
INTRODUCTION
Hard chromium coatings have advantageous properties such as high hardness, low coefficient of friction, high
wear and corrosion resistance [1-2]. Electroplating is still widely found used to deposit chromium coating because
this technique is simple and inexpensive. Varied thicknesses in the range of micro to nanometer sizes with modified
physical, chemical and mechanical properties can be produced by this method by adjusting its deposition parameters
such as current density, immersion time, deposition potential, bath temperature, bath composition and electrolyte pH
[3-5]. These properties have been related to the high tensile residual stresses generated during the deposition
process. The high tensile stress gets increased as the thickness of the coating increases. In the case of hard coatings
used in fastener components, it was reported by several researchers that the sliding contact during fastening
operation produces high tensile stresses on the surface which can generate microcracks. Under a maximum shearing
stress, the crack can develop into void or deep crack which subsequently cause a spalling of the coating parts. A
void or spalling are unacceptable for component used in high oxidation and corrosion environment since it can lead
to the degradation of the mechanical properties of the base metal [6].
Different techniques and methods have been studied and proposed in reducing the tensile stress in the hard
chromium coatings as one way to eliminate the generation of micro-cracks. Cu is a cheap and soft metal which has
attracted many attentions for use as the upper layer of the hard chromium coatings. Laminated structures of coating
materials have attracted many attentions because such structures can be used to modify the surface properties [2].
Besides to reduce the tensile stress, the existence of soft metal may be used a sacrificial in the fasteners to fulfill the
void in order to block the gas/oil leakage.
The objective of this work was to investigate the laminated structure of Cr-Cu layer on a carbon steel substrate
produced by electroplating. The effect of current voltages of the power supply on the thickness, hardness and
specific wear rate of the product were observed. The result of this study is expected to be taken into consideration in
the design of improved chromed fasteners.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030007-1–030007-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985477
030007-1
EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE
The substrate used in the present work was a commercial carbon steel ST 40. The specimens used for coating
were obtained by cutting a long bar into a sample with diameter 16 mm and 3 mm thickness. Preparation stages were
carried out prior to electroplating process such as using grinding by silica papers, polishing and cleaning in an
ultrasonic cleaner. Two baths of chrome and copper electrolyte solutions were prepared to deposit Cr and Cu layers
on a steel surface. The electrolyte solution used for plating chrome contains chromic acid 250 g/l, sulphuric acid 2.5
g/l, and kalium cyanide KC-15 10 g/l, whereas the electrolyte solution used for chrome plating was copper sulphate
(20 g/l CuSO4) and aquadest. Figure 1 shows the plastic box that contains the plating solution, and copper rod as the
cathode. The anode was attached to the rectifier, while copper rod was used to hang the steel substrate. The chrome
layer was firstly plated on the steel whereas copper was subsequently plated as the second or upper layer. The
processing parameters of Cr were kept constant using a DC current with 0.09 A and 6 Volt, and a plating time of 60
minutes. The copper was plated by different voltages with 1.6, 1.8, 2.0, 2.2 and 2.4 Volt, a constant ampere at 0.14
A, and a fixed plating time of 30 minutes. The formation of phase on the surface of the electroplated products was
conducted using XRD. The measurement of the thickness of each layer was carried out after the samples were
polished using standard metallographic techniques. The cross sectional appearance of the products was recorded
using an optical microscope. The hardness of the surface plating, in this case is Cu, was measured using a Vickers
microhardness tester (type TTS unlimited HWMMT-X7) with diamond pyramid (136°) using a load of 50 gf and
penetration time of 10 second. The mean hardness, its standard deviation and standard error were recorded to the 5
times measurements conducted at the surface of the Cu plating in arbitrary positions. The wear test was conducted
using Ogoshi high speed universal wear testing machine with a gear ratio of 70/40, a load of 3.18 kg, revolving disc
thickness of 3 mm and revolving time of 30 seconds.
Anode
Cathode
Plating
bath
Anode
Cathode
Plating
bath
FIGURE 1. Electrolyte bath for (a) chrome plating, and (b) copper plating

Figure 2 shows the XRD pattern scanned on the top surface of the sample. The XRD pattern observed on the
surface indicates that only Cu phase was formed on the surface of the sample. This suggests that the electroplating
030007-2
produced a laminated structure instead of an alloy. Two distinct peaks detected on the surface should indicate that
the Cu coating has crystalline structure.
FIGURE 2. XRD pattern observed on the Cu surface
Figure 3 shows the relationship between the deposit thickness of Cu layer and the current voltages. The
result indicates that the thickness of Cu deposit linearly increased with increasing the current voltages. The use of
current voltage from 1.6 to 2.4 increased the thickness of Cu layers from 17.4 to 70.0 μm. A little discrepancy of the
linearity of the thickness, such as found in the use of 2 Volt, might be caused by uncertainty of the measurement due
to the uniformity thickness produced by electroplating.
80
70.00
59.50
60
Thickness (μm)
36.90
40 38.00
20
17.40
0
1.4 1.6 1.8 2 2.2 2.4 2.6
Voltage (Volt)
FIGURE 3. Thickness of Cu layer in the laminated Cr-Cu plated using different current voltages
Figure 4 shows the microhardness of the Cu deposit with respect to the current voltages. The figure shows that
the mean hardness of the plated Cu increased significantly from 42.7 to 83.87 HV as the increase of the current
voltages from 1.2 to 2.4 V. The increase of the Cu hardness shows that the internal stress in the Cu layers gets
higher. However, in average the hardness of Cu layer was much lower than that of the chrome layer. This indicates
that the internal stress in the Cu plating is much lower than that of the Cr layer, where the chrome hardness obtained
by previous study is 181.1 HV.
030007-3
90
ϴϯ͘ϴϳ
80
Hardness (HV)
ϳϱ͘ϭϯ
70
ϲϲ͘ϳϬ
60 ϱϳ͘ϳϬ
50
ϰϮ͘ϳϬ
40
30
1.4 1.6 1.8 2 2.2 2.4 2.6
Voltage (V)
FIGURE 4. Hardness of Cu layer in the laminated Cr- Cu plated using different current volategs
Figure 5 shows the specific wear rate of Cu layer deposited using current voltages of 1.6, 1.8, 2.0, 2.2 and
2.4 Volt. The wear test shows that the specific wear rate decreased nearly linearly as the increase of the current
voltages. The result of this study indicates that the wear resistance of the Cu surface is greatly improved with the
increase of the current voltage.
9
ϳ͘Ϯ
Specific wear rate
(x10-6 mm3/kg.m)
ϳ͘Ϭ
7
ϱ͘ϲ
ϰ͘ϳ
5
Ϯ͘ϴ
3
1
1.4 1.6 1.8 2 2.2 2.4 2.6
Voltage (V)
FIGURE 5. Specific wear rate of Cu layer in the laminated Cr-Cu plated using different current voltages
Figure 6 shows the defect observed on the surface of Cu layers deposited using current voltages of 1.6, 1.8,
2.0, 2.2 and 2.4 Volt. The photomicrograph of worn surfaces from 6(a) to 6(e) shows that all surfaces got surface
damages in the form of longitudinal groove due to the bulk material removal. In fig. 6(a), 6(b) and 6(c) the shape of
the worn surfaces are rough. This indicates that the wear tracks on the surface are still deep. In figure 6(d) and 6(e)
the shape of the worn surface is smooth indicating that the wear track gets shallower. The effect of current voltages
on the worn surface morphology of the Cu surface is clearly shown. The area of the groove seems to get smaller
when the current voltage gets higher. The longitudinal direction of the groove indicates that the surface was
composed of homogeneous Cu metal. The smaller area of the wear track might be attributed to the increase of the
hardness showing the improvement of the wear resistance. This shows that an increase of the current voltages
increased the wear resistance of the surface, as given in Fig. 5.
030007-4
(a) (b) (c)
(d) (e)
FIGURE 6. Defect on the worn surface of Cu layer in the laminated Cr-Cu plated using different current voltages
CONCLUSIONS
A laminated structure of Cr-Cu was successfully deposited using electroplating process with different current
voltages. The formation of Cu deposit as the upper layer above chrome layer was confirmed by XRD test. The
micrograph measured from the cross sectional area of the samples showed that an increase in the current voltages
increased the layer thickness of Cu layer. The thickness increase of Cu layer produced an increase in the hardness
which was attributed to the increase of internal stress in the coating. The increase of thickness was accompanied by
a reduction of the wear rate. The worn surface showed a longitudinal groove for all samples, where an increase of
the current voltage reduced the depth of the worn surface. The wear test indicated that the wear resistance got higher
with an increase of the current voltages.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
7KHDXWKRUVZRXOGOLNHWRWKDQNWKHµDirektorat Riset dan Pengabdian Masyarakat '530¶WKHPLQLVWU\
of research and technology for higher education (Kemenristekdikti), the Government of Indonesia for supporting the
research funding.
REFERENCES
1. C. A. Huang, C. Y. Che. Hardness variation and annealing behavior of a Cr±Ni multilayer electroplated in a
trivalent chromium-based bath., Surface & Coatings Technology, pp. 203, 3320±3324, 2009.
2. C. A. Huang, C. Y. Chen, Chun Ching Hsua and Chao Sung Lin. Characterization of Cr±Ni multilayers
electroplated from a chromium(III)±nickel(II) bath using pulse current., Scripta Materialia, pp. 57, 61±64,
2007.
3. J.A. Picas, A. Forn, G. Matthaus. HVOF coatings as an alternative to hard chrome for pistons and valves.
Wear, pp. 261, 477±484, 2006.
4. E. Menthe, K. T. Rie. Surface and Coatings Technology. Plasma nitriding and plasma nitrocarburizing of
electroplated hard chromium to increase the wear and the corrosion properties. , pp. 112, 217±220, 1999.
5. M. Soltanieh, H. Aghajani, F. Mahboubi, Kh.A. Nekouee. Surface characterization of multiple coated H11 hot
work tool steel by plasma nitriding and hard chromium electroplating processes., Vacuum, pp. 86, 1470±1476,
2012.
030007-5
6. H. Zhang, L. Liu, J. Bai, X. Liu. Corrosion behavior and microstructure of electrodeposited nano-layered Ni±
Cr coatings Thin Solid Films , pp. 595, 36±40, 2015.
030007-6
Performance of skid resistance of warm-mix asphalt with buton natural asphalt-rubber
(BNA-R) and zeolite additives as a result of road surface temperature changes
Natasha Anagi, Sigit Pranowo Hadiwardoyo, R. Jachrizal Sumabrata, and Nurul Wahjuningsih

Performance of Skid Resistance of Warm-Mix Asphalt with
Buton Natural Asphalt-Rubber (BNA-R) and Zeolite
Additives as a Result of Road Surface
Temperature Changes
Natasha Anagi1,b), Sigit Pranowo Hadiwardoyo2,a), R. Jachrizal Sumabrata3,c),
Nurul Wahjuningsih4,d)
1,2,3,4
a)
b)
nateanagi@gmail.com c)jachrizal@gmail.com d)nwahjuningsih@gmail.com
Abstract. Roughness of the road surface acts as an obstacle for the vehicle wheel slip on the road surface especially
in wet conditions. Road surface roughness can be generated from the properties of the aggregate or bitumen as a
characteristic of asphalt mixture. Various types of added material have been used to improve the performance of hot
mix asphalt mixture as well as the warm mix asphalt. The addition of BNA-R and zeolite on the warm asphalt
mixtures has been investigated, particularly related with its effect on the value of the skid surface due to the wheels
track of the vehicle. The study was conducted in an asphalt mixture before and after the traversed wheel condition.
In this study, 7.560 trajectory path using the Wheel Tracking Machine and skid resistance test using a modified
British Pendulum Tester, were conducted. Skid resistance test involved various temperatures on the surface of the
specimen. The results showed that the addition of BNA-R can increase the value of the skid at the beginning of the
track, but at the last track, skid resistance performance was stagnant. Zeolite additive material in warm mix asphalt
has improved skid resistance, especially the resistance of asphalt concrete mixture to temperature changes.
INTRODUCTION
The authorities responsible for highway operations and road safety, such as civil engineering offices and the
police, often express concerns related with road safety on highways that is substantially affected by pavement
surface characteristics, particularly on the shortage of skid resistance of pavement [1].
Roughness of asphalt mixture or asphalt concrete will be higher with a rough surface texture in compared
with the smooth one. Skid resistance is an important factor in designing the pavement because it has a fairly
high percentage as one of the causes of accidents on roads. Skid resistance is the force developed in a tire that is
prevented it from rotating slides along the pavement surface. Skid resistance is an important parameter of
pavement evaluation because:
x Inadequate skid resistance will lead to higher incidences of skid related accidents.
x Most agencies have an obligation to provide roadways that are µµUHDVRQDEO\¶¶VDIH for the users.
x Skid resistance measurements can be used to evaluate various types of materials and construction
practices [2].
The friction contribution to skid resistance is governed by the actual contact area and the skid number at zero
speed, SN0 at the tire-pavement zone. When the wheel sliding speed is increased, part of the tire-pavement
contact zone in the original tire footprint area is replaced by the so-called water-¿OP]RQH,WFDQEHREVHUYHG
that as the sliding wheel speed increases, the tire-pavement contact zone gradually retreats to the rear of the tire
until the point of hydroplaning, where there is a complete loss of the tire pavement contact zone and the tire is
VOLGLQJRQDWKLQ¿OPRIZDWHU [3]. As vehicle speeds increase, skid resistance decreases. The extent to which this
occurs depends on the texture depth [4].
However, it is relatively difficult to estimate skid resistance parameter. Many factors can affect the tire-
pavement friction such as the tire type, tread pattern and depth, pressure and condition of tires, the vehicle
suspension and braking system, speed, type, load and load distribution, temperature, existence of water and
ZDWHU¿OPWKLFNQHVVH[LVWHQFHRIVRLOGHWULWXVRURWKHUVXEVWDQFHVRQWKHSDYHPHQWVXUIDFHGULYHUH[SHULHQFH
highway geometries, pavement age, traffic LQWHQVLW\VXUIDFHFRQGLWLRQVVWUXFWXUDOGH¿FLHQFLHVPL[GHVLJQW\SH
of surface and aggregate petrography, angularity, hardness, density, gradation and size. The skid resistance
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030008-1–030008-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985478
030008-1
value is affected by aggregate and bitumen characteristics, including aggregate composition and bitumen
content in asphalt mixtures, as well as physical properties such as asphalt penetration index, softening point,
ductility and other factors that determine the performance of the mixture [5].
The temperature is the most significant factor among the environmental factors which influences skid
resistance. The friction adjustment factor is influenced by air temperature. The influence of temperature on the
pavement-surface texture and, consequently, on the friction level is a topic that still needs investigation [6].
One of the most popular procedures which is used to evaluate the friction resistance of the road surfaces is
the Portable British Pendulum Tester. This test procedure is standardized in ASTM E303 test method. The
British Pendulum Tester is a dynamic pendulum impact type tester which is based on the energy loss occurring
when a rubber slider edge is propelled across a test surface. The apparatus may be used for both laboratory and
¿HOG WHVWV RQ ÀDW surfaces, and also for polished stone value (PSV) measurements on curved laboratory
specimens from accelerated polishing wheel tests. The values measured are referred to as British Pendulum
WHVWHUQXPEHUV%31IRUÀDWVXUIDFHVDQG369VIRUVSHFLPHQVVXbjected to accelerated polishing [2].
For more than two decades, the warm mix asphalt (WMA) has been the major research challenge for the
production of environmentally sustainable asphalt pavements. The primary objective of its implementation is to
reduce fuel consumption and pollutant emissions in order to improve environmental quality and decrease
production costs. This reduction is obtained due to lowering mixing and compaction temperatures on the WMA.
Reduction of mixing and compaction temperatures is approximately 30ȗC [7]. WMA technology is classified by
the type of selected additives. One of them is foaming technology using additives containing water like zeolite.
Theoretically, the zeolite releases water that creates foam and this foam will reduce the viscosity and increase
the workability. It facilitates better coatings of the bitumen on aggregates. Furthermore, natural zeolite can be
used as an additive for WMA beside of synthetic zeolite [8].
The objective of this research was to observe the influence of natural zeolite from Indonesia to the skid
resistance characteristics at the temperature changes of warm mix asphalt with the modified bitumen using
BNA-R.
EXPERIMENTS
Materials
Warm mix asphalt (WMA) consists of aggregate (coarse, medium and fine) and bitumen like other
conventional asphalt concretes. The composition of aggregate and asphalt should be determined based on the
performance needs. One performance factor measured in this study was the skid resistance value.
This study used asphalt concrete wearing course mix (AC-WC) based on Indonesian specification in which
the largest aggregate size was 19 mm. The test results on the characteristics of the coarse aggregate, medium
DQG¿QHDUHGLVplayed in Table 1. The aggregate gradation selected was shown in Fig. 1.
BNA-R was used as a modifier to modify the basic properties of base bitumen (Pen 60/70). The properties of
base bitumen are presented in Table 2. BNA-R is a product from semi extraction process of Buton Asphalt
(Asbuton) which is blend with crumb rubber. Asbuton is the natural rock asphalt from Buton Island, South East
Sulawesi Province. Penetration value decreased in accordance with the BNA-R addition. It means that BNA-R
made the bitumen stiffer at the same temperature. The softening point increased as the result of BNA-R addition
and it required higher energy to melt bitumen so that it can cover the aggregate properly [9]. In terms of WMA
technology, in which the consumption of energy should be lower than conventional hot mix asphalt, the additive
to increase the workability is required. Natural zeolite was used in this research because this local material is
one of natural resources of Indonesia. Natural zeolites are microporous, hydrated aluminosilicate minerals
commonly used as commercial adsorbents (8). Rich deposit of natural zeolite is found in West Java, Central
Java and West Sulawesi. This research used natural zeolite from West Java region and has been activated
previously before its application as an additive. The chemical activation without any heating was selected as a
method for activation because it produces higher water absorption in compared with other methods. Zeolite is in
the form of powder, thus, it must be added to aggregate mixture as a substitute part of filler because it is difficult
to blend with bitumen [10].
030008-2
TABLE 1. Characteristics of coarse, medium and fine aggregate.
Specification
No Laboratory test Method Result
Min Max
Coarse Aggregate
1 Bulk specific gravity (Gsb) 2.5 í 2.67
2 Surface Saturated Dry gravity (SSD) 2.5 í 2.69
AASHTO T84/T85
3 Apparent specific gravity (SG) 2.5 í 2.73
4 Absorption í 3 0.89
5 Flakiness Index SNI 03-4137-1996 í 25% 13.15%
6 Los Angeles Abrasion AASHTO T96 í 40% 38%
Medium Aggregate
AASHTO T84/T85
5 Flakiness Index SNI 03-4137-1996 í 25% 22.25%
Fine Aggregate
AASHTO T84/T85
5 Clay lumps SNI 03-4428-1997 í 8% 3%
ϭϬϬ
ϵϬ
ϴϬ
ϳϬ
WƉĞƌĐĞŶƚ
ϲϬ
ϱϬ
ϰϬ
ϯϬ
ϮϬ
ϭϬ
Ϭ
Ϭ͘Ϭϭ Ϭ͘ϭ ϭ ϭϬ ϭϬϬ
ƐŝĞǀĞƐŝǌĞ;ŵŵͿ
FIGURE 1. Gradation of aggregate used for AC-WC mixes.
TABLE 2. Properties of base bitumen (Pen.60/70).

No Laboratory Test Method Unit Indonesian Bitumen Pen
Specification 60/70
min max
1 Penetration at 25ȗC ASTM-D5 0.1 mm 60 70 64.2
2 Softening Point ASTM-D36 ȗC 48 56 51.5
3 Flash Point (Cleveland) ASTM-D92 ȗC 232 - 338
4 Ductility at 25ȗC ASTM-D113 cm 100 - >100
5 Specific Gravity at 25ȗC ASTM-D70 kg/m3 1.01 1.06 1.037
6 Loss on Heating (TFOT) ASTM-D1754 % - 0.2 0.1
7 Penetration after TFOT ASTM-D5 0.1 mm 50 80 61.3
8 Kinematic Viscosity at 135ȗC ASTM-D2170-67 cSt 300 - 460
030008-3
Test Methods
To observe the influence of natural zeolite to the skid resistance characteristics at diverse temperatures of
warm mix asphalt with the modified bitumen using BNA-R, the Skid Resistance Tester and British Pendulum
Tester were used. The equipment of these tests is shown in Fig. 2.
This study tested four samples of warm mix asphalt with specific gradation aggregates and different contents
of BNA-R, i.e., 0%, 5%, 10% and 15%. These samples was compacted using a mold of wheel tracking machine
in the size of 300 x 300 x 50 mm (Figure 3.a) and cut into several sections corresponding to the size of the skid
resistance test (120 x 50 x50 mm) (Figure 4). The study was conducted in an asphalt mixture which traversed by
wheel and performed before and after the transverse. The skid resistance test samples were cut from the edge
and middle of wheel tracking machine samples (Fig. 3.b). The wheel tracking test was conducted for 3 hours or
7.560 trajectories.
FIGURE 2. Modified British pendulum tester.
(a) ( b)
FIGURE 3. Compacting and testing at wheel tracking machine.
FIGURE 4. The skid resistance samples.
The British Pendulum Tester (BPT) produces a low speed sliding contact between a standard rubber slider
and the pavement surface as well as measures frictional properties by determining the loss in kinetic energy of
the slider when in contact with the pavement surface. The loss of kinetic energy is converted into a frictional
force and thus into pavement friction (i.e., BPN value). The BPT has the advantage of being easy to handle and
provides friction and microtexture indicators at a low speed (i.e., 10 km/h) for any pavement, whether in the
030008-4
field or in laboratory analysis of cored or prepared samples [11]. In this research, the skid resistance test was
performed at different test temperatures of 25ȗC, 30ȗC, 35ȗC, 40ȗC, 45ȗC, 50ȗC and 55ȗC.
To correlate the BPN value to Skid Number (SN) vDOXHWKHOLQHDUUHODWLRQVKLSZLWK.LVVRI¶VHTXDWLRQ[12]
was performed:
SN = 0.862 (BPN) ± 9.69 (1)

The results of skid resistance test at different test temperatures and BNA-R contents in the condition of
before and after traversed wheel are shown in Fig. 5. From all test results, the SN values at the samples before
traversed wheel were higher than after traversed wheel. With the addition of BNA-R, at the same test
temperature, the SN tends to increase. However, the SN decreased when test temperature was increased. The
increase of SN value is in linear with the increase of the roughness of pavement surface.
ÊǀƐdĞŵƉĞƌĂƚƵƌĞ
ϴϱ͘ϬϬ
ϯϱ͘ϬϬ
^ŬŝĚEƵŵďĞƌ;ÊͿ
ϮϬ Ϯϱ ϯϬ ϯϱ ϰϬ ϰϱ ϱϬ ϱϱ ϲϬ
dĞŵƉĞƌĂƚƵƌĞ;ΣͿ
EͲZϬйďĞĨŽƌĞ EͲZϱйďĞĨŽƌĞ
FIGURE 5. The SN value at different temperatures and BNA-R contents, before and after traversed wheel.
The natural zeolite used in this research was evidenced to have good influence to the asphalt mixture
which mixed and compacted at the lower conventional temperature. It can be seen in the results presented in
Fig. 6 where the Skid Number of warm mix asphalt with and without zeolite is compared. The warm mix
asphalt with zeolite as an additive obtained higher SN value than those without zeolite. It is possibly due to
natural zeolite as an additive contains water that gives better lubrication when bitumen starts to coat the
aggregate in the mixing process.
ϳϬ
ϲϬ
^ŬŝĚEƵŵďĞƌ
ϱϬ
ϰϬ
ϯϬ
ϮϬ
ϭϬ
Ϭ
ϮϬ Ϯϱ ϯϬ ϯϱ ϰϬ ϰϱ ϱϬ ϱϱ ϲϬ
dĞŵƉĞƌĂƚƵƌĞ;ΣͿ
tDнĞŽůŝƚ tD
FIGURE 6. The SN value at different temperatures and BNA-R contents for WMA with and without Zeolite.
CONCLUSIONS
The addition of zeolite on WMA using BNA-R as bitumen modifier is evidenced to provide better
performance in the skid resistance. BNA-R content in the WMA can raise the value of skid resistance and the
030008-5
mean of roughness of pavement surface. At a higher temperature, the value of skid resistance will decrease and
its shows that the changes of road surface temperature will affect the roughness of pavement surface. At the
7.560 trajectory path of WTM tests, the SN tends to gain lower value at any test temperature. It indicates that
pavement surface of WMA has better skid resistance in relation with the duration of wheel cycles.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The author would like to acknowledge the support of Directorate for Research and Community Services
Universitas Indonesia for providing financial support for this research through Research Grant (Hibah PITTA
2016). The experimental work was completed in the Material and Structure Laboratory of Universitas Indonesia
and the Research Centre and Development for Road and Bridge Laboratory-Ministry of Public Works Republic
of Indonesia.
REFERENCES
1. H. P. Lindenmann. New findings regarding the significance of pavement skid resistance for road safety on
Swiss freeways. J Safety Res. 2006;37(4):395±400.
2. I. M Asi. Evaluating skid resistance of different asphalt concrete mixes. Build Environ. 2007;42(1):325±9.
3. G. P. Ong, T. F. Fwa. Wet-Pavement Hydroplaning Risk and Skid Resistance: Modeling. J Transp Eng
[Internet]. 2007;133(10):590±8. Available from: http://ascelibrary.org/doi/10.1061/(ASCE)0733-
947X(2007)133:10(590)
4. J. M. Pardillo Mayora, R. J. Piña. An assessment of the skid resistance effect on traffic safety under wet-
pavement conditions. Accid Anal Prev. 2009;41(4):881±6.
5. S. P. Hadiwardoyo, E. S. Sinaga, H. Fikri. The influence of Buton asphalt additive on skid resistance based
on penetration index and temperature. Constr Build Mater [Internet]. 2013;42:5±10. Available from:
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.conbuildmat.2012.12.018
6. A. Bianchini, M. Heitzman, S. Maghsoodloo. Evaluation of Temperature Influence on Friction
Measurements. J Transp Eng. 2011;137(9):640±7.
7. S. D. Capit, L. G. Picado-Santos, F. Martinho. Pavement engineering materials: Review on the use of
warm-mix asphalt. Constr Build Mater. 2012;36:1016±24.
8. B. Sengoz, A. Topal, C. Gorkem. Evaluation of natural zeolite as warm mix asphalt additive and its
comparison with other warm mix additives. Constr Build Mater [Internet]. 2013;43:242±52. Available
from: http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.conbuildmat.2013.02.026
9. E.A. Wicaksono. Pengaruh BNA-Rubber dalam Campuran Aspal Terhadap Daya Tahan Akibat Suhu dan
Perendaman. Universitas Indonesia; 2014.
10. Jalan PL, Jl J, No N. Furqon Affandi 1) , Hendri Hadisi 2). 2011;(264).
11. P. Georgiou, A. Loizos. A laboratory compaction approach to characterize asphalt pavement surface
friction performance. Wear [Internet]. 2014;311(1±2):114±22. Available from:
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.wear.2013.12.028
12. S. M. Bazlamit, F. Reza. Changes in Asphalt Pavement Friction Components and Adjustment of Skid
Number for Temperature. J Transp Eng. 2005;131(6):470±6.
030008-6
Effect of mixing geopolymer and peat on bearing capacity in Ogan Komering Ilir (OKI)
by California bearing ratio (CBR) test
Danang S. Raharja, Sigit P. Hadiwardoyo, Wiwik Rahayu, and Nasuhi Zain

Effect of Mixing Geopolymer and Peat on Bearing Capacity
in Ogan Komering Ilir (OKI) by California Bearing Ratio
(CBR) Test
Raharja, Danang S.1,a), Hadiwardoyo, Sigit P.1,b), Rahayu, Wiwik1,c), Zain, Nasuhi1,d)
1
Civil Engineering Department, University of Indonesia, New Campus Depok, West Java, 16424, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: danang.setiya@ui.ac.id
b)
sigit@eng.ui,ac,id
c)
wrahayu@eng.ui.ac.id
d)
nasuhi.zain@ui.ac.id
Abstract. Geopolymer is binder material that consists of solid material and the activator solution. Geopolymer
material has successfully replaced cement in the manufacture of concrete with aluminosilicate bonding
system. Geopolymer concrete has properties similar to cement concrete with high compressive strength, low
shrinkage value, relatively low creep value, as well as acid-resistant. Based on these, the addition of
polymers in peat soils is expected to improve the bearing capacity of peat soils. A study on the influence of
geopolymer addition in peat soils was done by comparing before and after the peat soil was mixed with
geopolymer using CBR (California Bearing Ratio) test in unsoaked and soaked conditions. 10% mixture
content of the peat dry was used, weighted with a variety of curing time 4 hours, 5 days, and 10 days. There
were two methods of mixing: first, peat was mixed with fly ash geopolymer activators and mixed solution
(waterglass, NaOH, water), and second, peat was mixed with fly ash and mixed geopolymer (waterglass,
NaOH, water, fly ash). Changes were observed in specific gravity, dry density, acidity (pH), and the
microscopic structure with Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM). Curing time did not significantly affect the
CBR value. It even shows a tendency to decline with longer curing time. The first type mixture obtained
CBR value of: 5.4% for 4 hours curing, 4.6% for 5 days curing and 3.6% for 10 days curing. The second type
mixture obtained CBR value of: 6.1% for 4 hours curing, 5.2% for 5 days curing and 5.2% for 10 days
curing. Furthermore, the specific gravity value, dry density, pH near neutral and swelling percentage
increased. From both variants, the second type mixture shows better results than the first type mixture. The
results of SEM (Scanning Electron Microscopy) show the structure of the peat which became denser with the
fly ash particles filling the peat microporous. Also, the reaction of fly ash with geopolymer is indicated by
the solid agglomerates that are larger than normal fly ash particle size.
INTRODUCTION
Peat soil is a top soil layer which is formed from the precipitation of food residual that decays. Therefore, peat
has some characteristics, such as high water content, high permeability, high compressibility low shear strange, and
acidity. Those characteristics make peat soil have low bearing capacity. So, it needs improvement or stabilization.
Certain addictives need to be added to change the physical and mechanical behaviors. Some experiments on peat
stabilization had be done using addictive, such as supercement [1], peatsolid [2], geosynthetics [3], cement type V
[4], lime + pozzolan [5], and potential cellulolytic microorganism [6-7]. Almost all of these have not shown good
results in stabilizing peat soil especially in bearing capacity. In the other study, geopolymer cement that is
environmentally friendly had succesfully substituted Portland cement with better pressure strength.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030009-1–030009-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985479
030009-1
THEORETICAL CONSIDERATION
Based on ASTM D 4772-92 [8], peat is a natural layer of soil with a high organic matter content which is mainly
derived from plant materials. Soepandji et al. [9] in his research report on the stabilization of peat with a clean set
cement mentioned that peat is a soil that has a high organic content, formed from a mixture of organic materials
from plants that have fossilized.
Peatlands in Indonesia are the largest in the tropics; the width is about 20.6 million hectares, or approximately
10.8% of Indonesia's land area [10]. There are many variations of peat soil classifications. This study will use the
classification of ASTM D 4772-92, where peat is classified based on the fiber content, ash content, acidity, the
ability to absorb water, and biological composition.
Based on research on peat land in Indonesia, particularly Sumatra, Borneo, and Java during the last 20 years, it is
known that Indonesian peat soil has a natural water content ranging between 190-770%. The dry weight and water
content were dominant in the range of 500 -800%. Based on the classification of ASTM, peatlands of Indonesia are
regarded as moderately absorbent. The value specific gravity in the range of 1.4 to 1.8 indicates that the density of
peat is quite small or not dense than the mineral soil which usually ranges from 2.5 to 2.8. The value of the liquid
limit ranges from 80% to 440% and the plastic limit value ranges from 110% to 380%. The acidity level is high with
the range of pH values from 3 to 6.5. Ashes content varies from low to high depending on the location of these peat
soils.
In general, there are two methods of soil improvement, mechanically and stabilization. An example of
mechanical repair is done by mixing the native soil that has certain technical characteristics with soil from other
locations that has good technical properties so that the resulting mixture of soil could qualify the desired strength.
Meanwhile, stabilization is solidification, the addition of additives (either in fact or just contained of a material) into
a mass of soil to improve the mechanical properties [4]. Soil stabilization materials commonly used are lime,
cement, and asphalt. For the application on mineral soils, it generally produces good results if the use of a stabilizing
agent in accordance with the provisions of the soil property to be stabilized. However, when applied to the special
soil such as peat, it produces unsatisfactory results.
One of the studies used as a reference in this study is Ilyas, et al. [4] who studied the stabilization of Bereng
Bengkel peat, Central Kalimantan by mixing Portland cement type-V (PC-V) which has the property of being more
resistant to acids, showed by the increase of shear strength and CBR values, although it is not significant. The more
levels of PC-V were added and the longer the period, the more ripened ride the CBR value, while the value of soil
expansion (swelling) gets down. Viewed microscopically using Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM), it shows that
more and more levels of PC-V is given, the closer the gap between the particles of soil porosity due to compaction.
It is caused by clot formation of particles (flocculation) due to cement hydration reaction that causes the substitution
of positive ions on the soil surface grain by ion Ca++. This shows the cementing process on the ground stabilized.
This study has successfully developed geopolymer cement which can replace Portland cement with almost the
same quality that the early strength is high, shrinkage is low, freeze thatresistance, resistance to sulfates, corrosion
resistant, resistant to acids, resistant to fire, and alkali aggregate reaction that occurs harmless [11]. In general,
inorganic geopolymer is a two-component system consisting of solid components and activator components which
are formed through a process of polycondensation. Solid component is a natural material containing enough SiO2
and Al2O3 so that it can form compounds. The examples of materials containing silica and alumina are fly ash,
pozzolan, copper slag, and iron blast furnace. Activator component is a liquid alkali chemical that contains alkali
hydroxides, silica alumina, carbon and sulfate or a combination of both.
Peat soil samples used in this study obtained from Ogan Kemiring Ilir (OKI), South Sumatra. There were three
things observed in this study, namely:
x Physical changes, which include specific gravity, dry density, and acidity (pH)
x Mechanical changes which are CBR value in an unsoaked condition and the CBR value in a soaked condition for
96 hours for the native peat soil and once stabilized with geopolymer
x Microscopic changes, which were observed with photos Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM)
030009-2
It only used one type of geopolymer cement mix levels, namely 10% of the dry weight of peat. There are two
types of data used in this study, secondary data from previous research and primary data directly from the
laboratory.
a) magnification 500x b) magnification 1000X c) magnification 2000x

Peat 10% PC-V compacted
Micro Crack
a) magnification 500x b) magnification 1000X c) magnification 2000x
Peat 30% PC-V compacted
FIGURE 1. SEM Photo of stabilization peat with PC-V [4]
SAMPLE PREPARATION
The samples of peat used were peat with moisture content in the range of 80% to 150%. So, we need to dry the
original peat soil in the sun to obtain the desired moisture content. The geopolymer cement used consists of material
fly ash, waterglass, NaOH, and water with certain compositions according to Table 1. The fly ash used is classified
as Type F according to ASTM.
There are two kinds mixing process. First, peat was mixed with a correct amount of fly ash and mixed with a
solution of geopolymer activators (waterglass, NaOH, and water). Second, peat was mixed with a correct amount of
fly ash and then mixed with geopolymer cement (fly ash, waterglass, NaOH, and water). Mixing was done manually
using a container.
There are two steps of mixing stabilization measures, namely:
x Type X: fly ash material and peat were mixed and stirred evenly using a container, then ripened for 24 hours.
Meanwhile, other geopolymer materials (waterglass, NaOH, and water) were mixed with different containers and
left in an open-air condition at room temperature for 24 hours. After that, both were mixed in one container and
stirried until they were evenly distributed. In short, it can be called (G + Fa) + Activator Solution.
030009-3
x Type Y: geopolymer cement activator in the form of waterglass, NaOH, and water were mixed until
homogeneous, and then left in an open condition at a room temperature for 24 hours. Meanwhile, peat was
mixed with fly ash with a composition according to the calculation and left in a closed bag for 24 hours. After
that, the solution (waterglass, NaOH, and water) was mixed with fly ash, then mixed with peat soil mixed with
fly ash. In short, it can be called (G + Fa) + Geopolymer.
Curing was applied to the sample results for 4 hours, 5 days, and 10 days. Curing was done in a closed condition
and at a room temperature. After the curing period, the samples were tested in accordance with the plan. Compaction
was done following the ASTM D 689-78 standard proctor [12]. The compaction of the mold 6 "to CBR test was
done in unsoaked and soaked conditions and swelling test. Most of the remaining samples were tested in the oven
for SG and acidity level (pH).
RESULT AND ANALYSIS
Secondary Data for Peat without Stabilization

Peat Soil compaction test data without stabilization OKI were taken from research conducted by [7]. Compaction
was carried out using a mold of 4" with hammer standard proctor. Testing was done in the water content which
ranged from 75% to 150% and dry density values obtained which ranged between 0.37 to 0.41 g/cm3. Optimum
moisture content of peat was in the range of 100% to 120%. Specific Gravity value of OKI peat without stabilization
was 1.39 and the value of the level of acidity (pH) was 4.43. CBR value in penetration 0.2" tend to be bigger than
penetration 0.1" for the third variation of moisture content. The highest CBR value was at 114.89% moisture
content, which is in accordance with the maximum dry density value of compaction results.
TABLE 1. CBR value of peat without stabilization [7]
Moisture CBR US (%) CBR S (%)
(%) ´ ´ ´ ´
97.26 4.30 5.48 4.85 6.16
114.89 4.85 6.26 5.87 6.52
134.88 2.50 4.07 1.72 3.24
Peat soil does have a unique property because the value of CBR soaked conditions tends to be larger than the
unsoaked condition. Whereas, mineral soils, such as clay, silt, sand, and others, have a CBR unsoaked value greater
than the condition of CBR soaked condition due to moisture conditions which are bigger after a soaking. The
uniqueness of this is possible because the structure of the peat comprised of organic fibers which were not yet
completely decomposed and the presence of micro pores and macro pores thereby making inter-particle holding
capacity which has been compacted; peat is getting stronger with the inclusion of water which filled pores in an
unsoaked condition.
Primary Data from Laboratory Testing of Stabilized Peat

CBR value generated for stabilization with a mixture of type X was still not good enough. CBR value for the
penetration of 0.1" in unsoaked conditions ranged from 2.7% to 4.3%. For the soaked condition, the average
increased to a value ranging from 2.9% to 5.4% except on the type X- 5 days-100 that declined. CBR value for the
penetration of 0.2 " in unsoaked conditions ranged from 4% to 5.3%. The average soaked condition increased with
values ranging from 4.5% to 6.15%, except on the type X-5days-100 that declined. The difference value is far below
the water content of the sample for X-5 days-100 which is too dry (96.08%). Dry density value of all samples
variations tends to be equal to the average value of 0.44 g/cm3. Thus, an increase of 11.5% was compared to the dry
density value of the original peat. For the specific gravity, the value increase to 1.98, which increased as much as
42.4% of the original peat. The value of the level of acidity (pH) was in the range of 5.6 to 6.12 with an average
value of 5.85.
030009-4
TABLE 2. Data of Stabilized Peat Sample with X Mixed Method
WUS ´ ´ ܶdry WS ´ ´ ܶdry Swelling

Type pH
(%) US US (g/cm3) (%) S S (g/cm3) (%)
X-4hr-110 111.43 3.2 4.6 0.449 145.26 5.4 6.15 0.455 5.63 0.95
X-4hr-100 102.7 3.7 5.3 0.438 141.2 3.9 5.2 0.467 5.98 1.79
X-4hr-104 104.5 3.5 4.7 0.45 136.9 4.3 5.7 0.47 6.12 1.3
X-5dy-100 96.08 3.3 4.7 0.429 143.02 2.9 3.6 0.454 5.91 1.8
X-5dy-110 114.3 4.3 5.3 0.437 132.86 4.6 5.16 0.456 5.75 1.28
X-5dy-120 119.4 4.3 4.95 0.445 136 4.3 5.4 0.469 5.86 0.92
X-10dy-100 104.15 3.36 4.75 0.447 150.29 3.75 4.59 0.441 5.87 0.55
X-10dy-110 113.8 2.7 4.07 0.437 153.1 3.6 4.69 0.435 5.83 1.09
X-10dy-120 121.96 2.97 4.07 0.458 143.59 4.3 5.32 0.455 5.75 0.55
CBR value results in stabilization with Y mixed type were already quite well with the largest value of the
unsoaked conditions 5.8 for 0.´SHQHWUDWLRQLQWKHVDPSOH<-5dy-120 and soaked conditions greatest value was 7.2
IRU ´ SHQHWUDWLRQ LQ WKH VDPSOHV <-4hr-110. CBR value average for unsoaked 0.1" was 4.4 and 0.2" was 5.3,
while for soaked 0.1" is 5.2 and 0.2" is 6.1. CBR value for the penetration 0.1" of unsoaked conditions ranged from
3.05% to 4.9%, for the soaked condition of the average has increased in value ranged from 3.9% to 6.1% except for
samples of type Y-5dy-100 which showed a decline. CBR value for the penetration 0.2" of unsoaked conditions
ranged from 4.3% to 5.8%, for an average soaked condition increases with a value ranged from 5% to 7.4%, except
on the type Y-5dy-100 which showed decline. The difference value is far enough for sample X-5dy-100 is caused by
soil moisture too dry (99%). Dry density value of all the variations is 0.49 g/cm3, higher than the result of mixtures
of type X are only 0.44 g/cm3. When compared with peat soils without stabilization, dry density value of Y-type
mixture is increased 23.3%. For specific gravity value rise to 2, an increase of 43.8% from the original peat. The
value of the level of acidity (pH) is sufficient to rise to near neutral. The average pH value of all the variations of the
sample is 5.86.
CBR value peat with geopolymer stabilization for X and Y mixing method, both showed a trend CBR value in
soaked conditions greater than unsoaked conditions corresponding to that of the original peat. Increased curing time
tends not affect in changes the CBR value, the chart actually shows a decline as increasing of curing time. The water
content near optimum moisture (110%) result CBR value relatively largest for any variations sample. Y mixing
method gives better results than the X mixing method.
TABLE 3. Data of Stabilized Peat Sample with Y Mixed Method
WUS ´ ´ ܶdry WS ´ ´ ܶdry Swelling
Type pH
(%) US US (g/cm3) (%) S S (g/cm3) (%)
Y-4hr-100 100.63 4.5 5.2 0.483 135.4 5.5 6.4 0.498 0.64 5.86
Y-4hr-110 111.64 4.69 5.53 0.502 125.3 6.1 7.4 0.511 0.45 5.88
Y-4hr-112 112.89 3.9 5.2 0.492 120.1 5.7 6.8 0.5 0.44 5.98
Y-5dy-100 99.43 4.5 5 0.474 136 3.9 4.7 0.48 0.73 5.78
Y-5dy-110 111.43 4.9 5.6 0.493 124.1 5.2 6.4 0.498 0.86 5.8
Y-5dy-120 112.14 4.8 5.8 0.497 123.3 5.5 6.7 0.492 0.59 5.8
Y-10dy-100 99.04 3.05 4.3 0.463 134 4.7 5.06 0.47 0.83 5.86
Y-10dy-110 110.15 4.5 5.6 0.492 123 5.2 6.1 0.497 0.39 6.01
Y-10dy-120 113.6 4.5 5.5 0.487 119.1 4.8 6.1 0.5 0.71 5.8
030009-5
(a) (b)
FIGURE 2. D&%5YDOXHIRUHDFKYDULDWLRQVVDPSOHRQ´SHQHWUDWLRQE&%5YDOXHIRUHDFKYDULDWLRQVVDPSOHRQ´
penetration
Pure peat
Peat X
Peat Y
FIGURE 3. SEM Photo for Pure peat and stabilized peat
030009-6
The structure of pure peat still has pores between fibers, which were very clear with the size of 20-60 μm. In the
picture with a magnification of 1000x, visible folds around the fiber surface peat soil that indicates the zone is still
relatively undisturbed or conserved. In the peat with X-type mixing, it was seen that the soil may be compacted well,
observed by only one point of particle shape, which is not compacted well. Peat micro pore fraction has been filled
by fly ash, which is shown from their spherical particles at 2500x magnification. However, there are still macro
cracks due to the sample used for SEM must be in dried conditions so that the pores initially filled with water
became empty and then cracked due to temperatures that were too hot during the drying.
Peat with Y-type mixing is much more compacted well with fewer pores macro as seen at a magnification of
1000x. Cracked macro is also much less, shown by the number of pores which are filled with fly ash, thereby
reducing process water infiltration excessively and lost during the drying process. At 2500x magnification, it was
also found particle greater than normal fly ash particles as the result of SEM mixture of type X, where the clot is
possible a fly ash which has reacted with a geopolymer and clots with peat soil in the vicinity. Micro fibers that look
solid in magnification of 2500X and 5000X is more massive and dense.
CONCLUSION
1. Long curing time did not significantly affect the value of CBR. The values would show a tendency to decline as
curing time gets longer.
2. The water content during solidification has a very big influence on the value of CBR, the largest value obtained
in water levels approaching the optimum moisture content. In the near optimum moisture content, for a X type
mixture, the obtained CBR value by cured 4 hours is 5.4%, 5 days is 4.6%, and 10 days is 3.6%. For a Y type
mixture, the obtained CBR value by cured 4 hours is 6.1% 5 days is 5.2%, and 10 days is 5.2%.
3. An increase in the value of specific gravity and density dry (ܶdry), as well as a decrease in the percentage of
expansion (swell) in the samples of peat with a Y type mixture stabilization compared with samples of peat with
the stabilization X type mixture. But for the level of acidity (pH) is not likely or same.
TABLE 4. Conclusion
Criteria Type X Type Y

Spesific grafity 1.98 2
Increasing ܶkering 11.5 % 23.3 %
swelling 1.13 % 0.62 %
Average pH 5.85 5.86
Condition US S US S
CBR Pure peat 485% 5.87 4.85 5.87%
% %
CBR curing 4 hours 3.2 % 5.4 % 4.7 % 6.1 %
CBR curing 5 days 4.3 % 4.6% 4.9 % 5.2 %
CBR curing 10 days 2.7 % 3.6 % 4.5 % 5.2 %
4. In accordance, Flexible Road Pavement Planning Guidelines book, the CBR value submerged stabilization
results can be used as pavement subgrade, but the value is still not good enough.
5. There structure microscopic changes to be more solid or dense in the peat sample by Y type mixture stabilization
compared with peat samples with X type mixture stabilization and there are fly ash particles that fill the
microporous peat. It is estimated that there is also a reaction of fly ash with geopolymer solution that happened
shown by the solid agglomerates that are larger than normal fly ash particle size.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Thanks to Allah so this paper can be finished. Special thanks to Wiwik Rahayu who gives guidance, Nasuhi Zain
who gives suggestion and critic, Sigit P. Hadiwardoyo who gives guidance and suggestion for all of process in this
research. All of staff of Soil Mechanics Laboratory Civil Engineering Department who give so much support and
time.
030009-7
REFERENCES
1. V. S. Endah. (1997). Stabilisasi Tanah Gambut Karang Agung ± Sumatera Selatan dengan Bahan Supercement
dan Analisa Kimia Campuran Stabilisasinya. Skripsi. Depok: Universitas Indonesia.
2. Irwandi. (2002). Tes Triaksial Stress Path pada Stabilisasi Tanah Gambut Dengan Peat Solid pada Kondisi
Compacted Sonsolidated Undrained. Skripsi. Depok: Universitas Indonesia.
3. I. Afrianto. (2008). Penggunaan Bahan Geosynthetics untuk Perkuatan Tanah Gambut. Skripsi. Depok:
Universitas Indonesia.
4. T. Ilyas, W. Rahayu and D. S. Arifin. (2008, Maret). Studi Perilaku Kekuatan Tanah Gambut Kalimantan yang
Distabilisasi dengan Semen Portland. Jurnal Teknologi, Edisi No. 1, 1-8.
5. N. E. Mochtar, F. E. Yulianto and T. Rendi S. (2014, April). Pengaruh Usia Stabilisasi pada Tanah Gambut
Berserat yang Distabilisasi dengan Campuran CaCO3 dan Pozzolan. Jurnal Teoritis dan Terapan bidag
Rekayasa Sipil, Vol. 21. 57-64.
6. F. F. Astianto. (2014). Analisis Pencampuran Tanah Gambut dengan Mikroorganisme Selulotik Potensial
Terhadap Nilai CBR (California Bearing Ratio) dan Nilai DCP (Dynamic Cone Penetration Test). Skripsi.
Depok: Universitas Indonesia.
7. M. P. Pradipta. (2015). Pengaruh Hasil Pencampuran Mikroorganisme Selulotik Potensial pada Kekuatan
Tanah Gambut Sebagai Material Tanah Timbunan. Skripsi. Depok: Universitas Indonesia.
8. ASTM, D 4772-92. Standard Classification of Peat Samples by Laborating Testing, Annual Book of ASTM
Standard, Section 4, Volume 04.08, Easton, MD, USA.
9. B. S. Soepandji. (1995). Pengaruh Kekuatan Tanah Gambut Akibat Penambahan Semen Clean Set (CS-10).
Depok: Fakultas Teknik Universitas Indonesia.
10. R. S. Wahyunto and H. Subagjo. (2003). Peta Luas Sebaran Lahan Gambut dan Kandungan Karbon di Pulau
Sumatera, 1990 ± 2002. Wetlands International - Indonesia Programme & Wildlife Habitat Canada (WHC).
11. D. Hardjito, S. E. Wallah, DMJ. Sumajouw and B. V. Rangan. (2004). On the Development of Fly Ash-Based
Geopolymer Concrete. ACI Material Journal, V. 101, No. 6, 467-472.
12. ASTM, D 1883-87. Standard Test Methods for CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Laboratori-Compacted Soil,
Annual Book of ASTM Standard, Section 4, Volume 04.08, Easton, MD, USA.
030009-8
Effect of raw materials and hardening process on hardness of manually forged knife
Balkhaya and Suwarno

Effect of Raw Materials and Hardening Process on
Hardness of Manually Forged Knife
Balkhaya1,a), Suwarno1,b)
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember Surabaya (ITS), Surabaya
60111, Indonesia,
a)
Corresponding author: balwakdrag@gmail.com
b)
warnoise@gmail.com
Abstract. Knives are normally made by forging process either using a machine or traditional method by means of
hammering process. This present work was conducted to study the effects of steel raw materials and hardening
process on the hardness of manually forged knives. The knife samples were made by traditional hammering
(forging) process done by local blacksmith. Afterward, the samples were heat treated with two different hardening
procedures, the first was based on the blacksmith procedure and the second was systematically done at the
laboratory. The forging was done in the temperature ranged between 900-950°C, while the final temperature ranged
between 650-675oC. The results showed that knives made of spring steel and heat treated in simulated condition at
the laboratory obtained higher level of hardness, i.e. 62 HRC. In general, knives heat treated by local blacksmith had
lower level of hardness that those obtained from simulated condition. Therefore, we concluded that the traditional
knife quality in term of hardness can be improved by optimizing the heat treatment schedule.
INTRODUCTION
There are many kinds of cutting devices in machinery and food processing equipment. The quality of the
cutting component depends on the material characteristics and its production method. A cutting device has a
same function with a knife. They must be sharp on the cutting side and tough in the core. The manufacturing
process of blades from steel bar, ingot, or plate is typically done by forging [1]. Traditionally, a blacksmith uses
manual forging to make a knife. Commonly, knives produced by traditional blacksmiths have poor quality, i.e.
soft and blunt. There are two common methods to make the traditional blade, i.e. pattern welding and damascus
method [2-3]. The pattern welding process is by forging two dissimilar steels to have combined properties of the
blade. While the damascus method forges a single bar of steel with an engineered composition [4]. On the
hardness level, a damascus blade has a better sharpness than that made of alloy steel of AISI 52100 or AISI
1086 [5]. Theoretically, quality of a knife produced by blacksmith can be improved by selecting a right material,
good manufacturing process, and perfect finishing process. In the present work, we studied the traditional
forging method done by a local blacksmith to make a knife from various kinds of waste steels. Our goal was to
study the parameters of forging process to control hardness of the blades.
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND MATERIALS

Materials used in this study were steels with different chemical compositions, i.e. spring steel, SKT 4, AISI,
1050, and AISI 4340. The chemical compositions of the steels were listed in Table 1.
The geometries of raw materials before the forging process were in the form of a thick plate or cylinder.
Subsequently, they were cut as shown in Fig. 1. For the plate, the dimensions were 70 mm in length, 30 mm in
width, and 10 mm in thickness. While for the bar, the dimensions were 20 mm in diameter and 6.8 mm in
length.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030010-1–030010-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985480
030010-1
TABEL 1. Chemical composition of observed materials.
element Chemical composition % (wt)
AISI 1050 AISI 4340 JIS SKT4 Spring Steel
Fe 98.6 95.8 94.5 97.27
C 0.46 0.35 0.47 0.62
Si 0.22 0.23 0.40 0.27
Mn 050 0.73 0.83 0.84
P 0.023 0.11 0.02 0.01
S < 0.01 0.13 < 0.01 < 0.01
Cr 0.026 0.80 1.13 0.82
Mo < 0.01 0.18 0.41 0.01
Ni 0.019 1.57 1.73 0.04
Al < 0.01 0.018 0.023 < 0.01
Co < 0.01 0.01 0.021 < 0.01
Cu 0.035 0.11 0.12 < 0.01
Nb < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01
Ti < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01
Sn 0.01 < 0.01 0.01 0.01
FIGURE 1. Dimensions of workpieces in the preparation stage.
Traditional Knife Forging Process

'XULQJWKHIRUJLQJSURFHVVDZRUNSLHFHZDVKHDWHGLQDWUDGLWLRQDOEODFNVPLWK¶VIXUQDFHIt was heated at a
temperature of 950oC based on an infrared thermocouple. The sample was forged until the temperature dropped
to 650oC. Each heating process was followed by repeated hammering process ranged between 32 to 39 times for
each 5 cm in length of the sample in which one hammering cycle was approximately 28-35 seconds. Cycles of
heating and forging process demonstrated in Fig. 2 was repeated to shape a knife. It was followed by a grinding
SURFHVVWRIODWWHQWKHNQLIH¶VVXUIDFHDQGWRIRUPWKHNQLIH¶VFXWWLQJHGJH.
FIGURE 2. Schematic of a traditional knife forging cycle.
The hardening process was done using two schedules, i.e. traditional way in accordance to the blacksmith
method and simulated method at the laboratory. The traditional heat treatment method was done by heating the
sample in a homemade furnace as shown in Fig. 3a at a temperature of 850oC for 10 minutes and quenching it in
water. Meanwhile, simulated heat treatment was done by heating the sample in laboratory furnace at a
temperature of 850oC for 60 minutes and keeping it at the temperature for 30 minutes and subsequently,
quenching it in water.
030010-2
(a) (b)
FIGURE 3. Type of furnaces used in the experiment: (a) traditional furnace. (b) Electric muffle
furnace
Hardness Measurement
Hardness measurement was done on the surface and on the cross-section of the samples. In prior to the test,
the knife was cut into a 10 mm-width as shown in Fig. 4a. The length and the thickness was kept intact similar
to the dimension of the knife.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 4. The specimen from a sample: (a) hardness test performed in a cross-section of the sample, (b) Mounted
specimen.
The sample was mounted in a resin as shown in Fig. 4b to simplify the measurement process. Subsequently,
the specimen was grinded with 80, 120, and 220 grid paper. The hardness test was performed by using a
Rockwell C hardness test machine. This test machine used a diamond indenter with the 120o angle and 150 Kp
load.
Microstructure Observation
Microstructure observation was performed in a mounted sample. The specimen was prepared by grinding the
sample with SiC papers and polishing it with alumina powder. The SiC papers used for grinding the sample
ranged from grid 80 to grid 2000. The etching process was done in a nital solution. The microstructure
investigation was done on the surface, and on the sharp edge of the sample.
RESULT AND DISCUSSIONS
Hardness Test Results

The hardness of knife sample after various treatments is presented in Fig.5. The figure shows the hardness of a
knife made of AISI 1050 steel in which the forging and heat treatment increased the hardness of the knives.
030010-3
FIGURE 5. Hardness of knives made of AISI 1050 before and after different heat treatment schedule.
Comparing the raw material and specimen after forging, it can be seen that the hardness on the sample
surface is 27 HRC, and after the forging, the hardness slightly increased to 30 HRC. The hardness level
increased significantly after the hardening process. The hardness increased to 56 HRC for a surface section and
55 HRC for the inner section for the traditional heat treatment (HT). While the hardening process in laboratory
furnace (HF), the hardness point increased to 58 HRC in surface section and 57 HRC in inner section. However
the difference between the hardness level in the surface and cross-section was insignificant that was allegedly
caused by the very thin of the sample so the hardening process was in fact a through hardening.
FIGURE 6. Hardness of knives made of AISI 4340 before and after different heat treatment schedule.
Fig. 6 shows the results of the hardness test for knife sample made of AISI 4340 steel that indicated a similar
trend. The raw material hardness in both the inner section and the surface hardness was 39 HRC. After forging,
the hardness increased to 50 HRC on the surface. Moreover, the hardness increased after the traditional heat
treatment process (HT) to 60-61 HRC. Similar result was also obtained for the sample heat treated in furnace
hardening process (HF), i.e. 60-61 HRC.
030010-4
FIGURE 7. Hardness of knives made of JIS SKT 4 before and after different heat treatment schedule.
Figure 7 shows the hardness test results for JIS SKT 4 steel. The initial sample of a raw JIS SKT 4 had
different hardness levels between the inner section and the surface hardness which were 52 and 48 HRC,
respectively. After forging, the hardness numbers were of the surface section and the inner section were 53 HRC
and 54 HRC, respectively. The hardness increased after the hardening treatment, i.e. 60-62 HRC both on the
surface and in the inner section.
FIGURE 8. Hardness of knives made of spring steel before and after different heat treatment schedule.
Figure 8 shows hardness number of knife specimen made of spring steel. The hardness of raw material was
44 HRC in surface section, and 45 HRC in inner section. Post-forging-hardness was 46 HRC in both surface and
inner section. After hardening, knife hardness yielded almost similar values for both the surface and inner
section, which were 60 HRC for HT method, and 62 HRC for HF method.
The overall test results show that forging process at high-temperature regime led to an increased hardness for
the knives. The increased hardness can also be observed at the inner section of the knife due to grain
deformation inflicted by forging force which caused by alteration of the grain and by the dislocation increased
dislocation density. HF process produce better hardness point compared to HT thanks to the even heating in HF
process. The hardness results in both hardening process HT and HF show that there is significant hardness
escalation. This is due to austenite transformation to martensite during the cooling process. Austenite
transformation to martensite is a diffusionless transformation so that leaves the austenite and martensite
composition equal. The formation of martensite is due to entrapped carbon in the grain boundary of austenite
structure as the result of quenching process. It leads to diffusionless transformation so that the austenite is
unable to transform into pearlite due to lack of time. These whole phenomena lead to an increased hardness
SRLQWIRUHDFKNQLIH¶VPDWHULDO
030010-5
The test results for the sample after heat-treatment in all four materials are different for different materials
and treatments. Spring steeOKDVWKHKLJKHVWKDUGQHVVZKLFKLV+5&:KLOH-,66.7¶VKDUGQHVVSRLQWLV
HRC. Those values are higher than those of both AISI 4340 steel and AISI 1050 steel. The differences in the
level of hardness is caused by the differences in carbon content in each material (Table 1). The higher the
carbon content, the better the hardenability for each material. In addition, alloying element such as Cr, Mo, Mn
and Mo contribute to the material hardenability.
The hardness of martensite structure depends on the carbon content of the steel. The atom carbons are
presumed to transform the crystal structure from FCC austenite to BCT martensite. The C solubility in BCC
increases if martensite is formed, which is one characteristic causing the formation of BCT structure. The higher
the carbon composition in the material, the more interstitial position excluded so that the probability for the
formation of BCT structure is higher.
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
FIGURE 9. Microstructure of knives after heat treatment: (a) AISI 1050 steel, (b) AISI 4340 steel, (c) JIS SKT4 steel, (d)
Spring Steel.
Figure 9 shows the microstructure of sample after the hardening process. Martensitic structure has needles form
and fine plate (dark) which is more dominant compared to retained austenite structure (bright). It leads to the
increased hardness after hardening process. In a specific steel, the amount of martensite fraction in the
microstructure solely depends on quenching temperature. Therefore, the continuous cooling transformation
(CCT) diagram is important tool or analysis. From CCT, the martensite start (Ms) and martensite finish (Mf) for
each kind of material can be identified. In AISI 1050 for example, the martensite is formed at 320oC and
completed at 260oC. While the martensite is formed at 290oC and completed at 150oC for AISI 4340 steel. The
martensite in both JIS SKT 4 and spring steel are formed at 280 oC and completed at 100oC. The Ms and Mf are
affected by the change in chemical composition of the material itself, and the austenitizing technique. The
030010-6
martensite formation for a steel with 0.2-0.4% C will likely to complete under the room temperature while the
martensite formation of an above 0.4% C steel will complete above the room temperature [5]. Due to the
phenomena, it can be concluded that higher carbon composition leads to lower Mf temperature that is caused by
higher number of unchanged austenite instead of transformed into martensite.
CONCLUSIONS
The high-temperature manual forging process increases the hardness of knives of each material. In fact, the
hardness level increased after different treatments. The highest hardness level of 62 HRC was obtained by
spring steel with hardening furnace (HF) method while the lowest hardness level of 55 HRC was obtained by
AISI 1050 steel with traditional hardening (HT). Hardening process was evidenced to produce optimum
hardness of all knives. Therefore, hardening process employed by blacksmith can be optimized to increase the
quality of knives.
REFERENCES
[1]. F. Fatollahi, Fard, S. Damascus, MSE, Vol. 121, p. 1-10 (2011).
[2]. F. zkan, H. Kirdan, I. H. Kara, F. H sem, Y. Akinay, Ug, H. C., Sun, Y., Ahlatic, H, Mechanical
Propertis of pattern welding 1075-15N20 Steel. Mater test. Vol. 56, p. 897-900 (2014).
[3]. J. D. Verhoeven, A. H. Pendra, H. F. Clark, Wear tests of steel knife blades. Wear. Vol. 265, p. 1093-1099
(2008).
[4]. J. D. 9HUKRHYHQ7KH0\VWHU\RI'DPDVFXV%ODGHV6FLHQWL¿F$PHULFDQ9RO1Rp. 74-79 (2001).
[5]. M. Yoso, T. Takaiwa, T. Minagi, T. Kanaizumi, K. Kubota, T. Hayashi, S. Morito, T. Ohba, Study of
Javanes Sword from a Viewpoint of steel strength. Alloys Compd. Vol. 557, p. 690-694 (2013).
030010-7
Comparative study on diagonal equivalent methods of masonry infill panel
Aniendhita Rizki Amalia and Data Iranata

Comparative Study on Diagonal Equivalent Methods of
Masonry Infill Panel
Aniendhita Rizki Amalia1, a) and Data Iranata1, b)
1
Lecture of Civil Engineering Department, Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember, Faculty of Civil Engineering and
Planning, Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: aniendhita.ra@gmail.com
b)
iranata80@gmail.com
Abstract. Infrastructure construction in earthquake prone area needs good design process, including modeling a structure
in a correct way to reduce damages caused by an earthquake. Earthquakes cause many damages e.g. collapsed buildings
that are dangerous. An incorrect modeling in design process certainly affeFWVWKHVWUXFWXUH¶VDELOLW\LQUHVSRQGLQJWRORDG
i.e. an earthquake load, and it needs to be paid attention to in order to reduce damages and fatalities. A correct modeling
considers every aspect that affects the strength of a building, including stiffness of resisting lateral loads caused by an
earthquake. Most of structural analyses still use open frame method that does not consider the effect of stiffness of
masonry panel to the stiffness and strength of the whole structure. Effect of masonry panel is usually not included in
design process, but the presence of this panel greatly affects behavior of the building in responding to an earthquake. In
worst case scenario, it can even cause the building to collapse as what has been reported after great earthquakes
worldwide. Modeling a structure with masonry panel as consideration can be performed by designing the panel as
compression brace or shell element. In designing masonry panel as a compression brace, there are fourteen methods
popular to be used by structure designers formulated by Saneinejad-Hobbs, Holmes, Stafford-Smith, Mainstones,
Mainstones-Weeks, Bazan-Meli, Liauw Kwan, Paulay and Priestley, FEMA 356, Durani Luo, Hendry, Al-Chaar, Papia
and Chen-Iranata. Every method has its own equation and parameters to use, therefore the model of every method was
compared to results of experimental test to see which one gives closer values. Moreover, those methods also need to be
compared to the open frame to see if they can result values within limits. Experimental test that was used in comparing
DOOPHWKRGVZDVWDNHQIURP0HKUDEL¶VUHVHDUFK)LJZKLFKZDVDSURWRW\SHRIDIUDPHLQDVWUXFWXUHZLWKVFDOH
and the ratio of height to width of 1 to 1.5. Load used in the experiment was based on Uniform Building Code (UBC)
1991. Every method compared was calculated first to get equivalent diagonal strut width. The second step was modelling
method using structure analysis software as a frame with a diagonal in a linear mode. The linear mode was chosen based
on structure analysis commonly used by structure designers. The frame was loaded and for every model, its load and
deformation values were identified. The values of load - deformation of every method were compared to those of
experimental test specimen by Mehrabi and open frame. From comparative study performed, +ROPHV¶DQG%D]DQ-0HOL¶V
equations gave results the closest to the experimental test specimen by Mehrabi. Other equations that gave close values
within the limit (by comparing it to the open frame) are Saneinejad-Hobbs, Stafford-Smith, Bazan-Meli, Liauw Kwan,
Paulay and Priestley, FEMA 356, Durani Luo, Hendry, Papia and Chen-Iranata.
INTRODUCTION
General Background
Construction of buildings in earthquake-prone area needs good design. The process includes modeling a
structure in a correct way to reduce damages caused by earthquakes. Earthquakes cause many damages, even
collapsed buildings. An incorrect modeling in design process certainly afIHFWVWKHVWUXFWXUH¶VUHVSRQGWRORDGHJ
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030011-1–030011-11; doi: 10.1063/1.4985481
030011-1
earthquake load, and it needs to be monitored to reduce casualties. A correct modeling considers every aspect that
affects the strength of a building, including stiffness of resisting lateral loads caused by an earthquake.
Most structure analyses still use open frame method that does not consider the effect of stiffness of masonry
panel to the stiffness and strength of the whole structure. Although effect of masonry panel is usually not included in
design process, but the presence of this panel greatly affects behavior of a building in responding to an earthquake,
and it can even cause a building to collapse as has been reported after great earthquakes worldwide [1].
Designing a structure that considers masonry panel can be done by modeling that masonry panel as compression
brace or shell element. In terms of designing masonry panel as compression brace, there are fourteen methods
popular to be used by structure designers Abdelkareem [2]. Those fourteen methods were researched by Saneinejad-
Hobbs, Holmes, Stafford-Smith, Mainstones, Mainstones-Weeks, Bazan-Meli, Liauw Kwan, Paulay and Priestley,
FEMA 356, Durani Luo, Hendry, Al-Chaar, Papia and Chen-Iranata. Every method has a different equation and
parameters to use; therefore, the model of every method was compared to the experimental data to see which one is
closer to. Moreover, those methods also need to be compared to the open frame to see if they can results in values
within safety limits.
Basic Theory
Masonry panel as an infill is commonly used for architectural reasons. Masonry panel itself has a significant
effect to the strength and stiffness that certainly cannot be ignored in design and analysis of a structure [3]. A
structure supported with an infill frame generally supplies efficient brace function for the building [4] since the
presence of this infill panel significantly affects energy dissipation capacity [5-6].
In many earthquake-prone countries, a concrete panel infill is reinforced with a masonry panel [7] Although the
infill panel significantly increases the stiffness and strength of the frame, its contribution is often overlooked due to
lack of knowledge in composite behavior of the frame and its infill panel. However, continuous research on this
topic has shown the existence of a strong interaction between an infill panel and its surrounding frame, leading to
the following conclusions:
x Behavior of a composite frame does not only depend on relative stiffness of the frame and its infill panel and
their geometry, but also on the strength of the masonry [1].
x Increase in total stiffness and inertia of a composite panel is equivalent to the increase in dissipation energy.
x Presence of redistribution of action and effect forces as well as the occasional unfortunate unplanned
damages of the frame.
x The current standards overestimate shear force by not considering the effect of the infill panel.
x Reduction that has an effect to failure possibilities, although in infill frame cases do not efficient, after have
been designed properly.
EQUIVALENT DIAGONAL STRUT METHODS
Equivalent Diagonal Strut ± Saneinejad ± Hobbs Method

Equivalent Diagonal Strut is a method for inelastic analysis that is suggested by Saneinejad ± Hobbs [8]; it is a
method commonly used to define an infill panel in a frame in a simple way. The Basic principle of the method as
explained by Saneinejad ± Hobbs is that an infill frame can be assumed as brace frame and it functions equivalent to
the compression brace (equivalent diagonal strut). An equivalent diagonal strut can only handle compression force,
therefore the effect of continuous lateral load due to an earthquake can be overcome by formation of two-ways
diagonal strut. If the mechanic properties (Ad and Ed) from an equivalent diagonal strut can be identified, the infill
IUDPHFDQEHDQDO\]HGDVDQRSHQIUDPHZLWK³HTXLYDOHQWGLDJRQDOVWUXW´
To verify equivalent diagonal strut suggested by Saneinejad ± Hobbs [8], these steps can be followed:
Defining parameters include:
1. 9DOXHRIȝFDQEHseen in standard / code of concrete)
2. Value of r = h (frame height) / l (frame width)
3. 9DOXHRIș WDQ-1 r
4. Value of effective stress of an infill panel:
fc 0,6If m (1)
030011-2
With value of Ø = 0.6
5. Calculation of strength with estimate in failure in CC, DC and Shear conditions:
x CC failure (Corner Crushing), in this type of failure, there are crushes in an infill panel, especially at corners
where the lateral load occurs.
R = RCC =
1 D c D cthV c D btlW b (2)
cos T
DC failure (Diagonal Crushing), in this type of failure, there are crushes in an infill panel at the middle of the
panel.
0,5htf a
R = RDC = (3)
cos T
Shear failure (Shear mode), in this type of failure, there are horizontal shear failures at the edge of the bottom of
an infill panel.
JXtl 0,85Jtl
R = RS = (4)
1 0,45 tanT tanT cos T
6. Calculation of horizontal strength of an infill frame and of horizontal force that causes cracks in an infill panel:
§ H ·
Ht ¨¨ ¸¸2 2.thf t cos 2 T (5)
© Cc f b ¹
7. Calculation of deformation and secant stiffness of an infill frame using the following equation:
'h
5,8H c h cos T D c2 D b2
0,333
(6)
8. The use of the initial elastic modulus for calculation of structure modeling analysis using software:
2hf c
Ed 0 (7)
' h cos 2 T
It can be concluded that an equivalent diagonal strut method is able to give prediction of the difference between
an infill frame and an open frame. Results of many experiments show that the method results in values that lies
within the safe boundaries and thus, it is suitable to be used in a design process [9].
FEMA 356 Method

Information on infill frame has been explained deeply in FEMA 356 (Seismic Rehabilitation Pre-standard) [10],
specifically in section 7.5.2 on masonry panel. Calculation of stiffness and strength of masonry infill panel can be
used to analyze structures with diagonal strut.
Elastic stiffness of a masonry panel (that is assumed to have cracks) can be represented with an equivalent
GLDJRQDOVWUXWĮWKDWKDVVLPLODUWKLFNQHVVDQGHODVWLFPRGXOXVZLWKWKHPDVRQU\SDQHO7KHFDOFXODWLRQXVHGLQWKLV
method can be seen as follows:
w 0,175(Oh .H ) 0, 4 dinf (8)
0, 25
ª Einf tinf sin 2T º
Oh « » (9)
¬ 4 Ec I c H inf ¼
030011-3
Equivalent Diagonal Strut ± Holmes Method
Holmes [11] states that the width of an equivalent strut should be one third of the diagonal of an infill frame,
which results in the infill strength being independent of the frame stiffness.
1
w d inf (10)
3
Where:
w = width of equivalent strut
dinf = diagonal of infill
Equivalent Diagonal Strut ± Stafford Smith and Carter Method

Stafford Smith and Carter [12] proposed a theory on the width of a diagonal strut based on the relative stiffness
of infill and frame:
0, 445 0, 064
§1· §1·
w 0,58¨ ¸ Oh .H inf 0, 335.
dinf ¨ ¸ (11)
©H¹ ©H¹
0, 25
ª Einf tinf sin 2T º
Oh « » (12)
¬ 4 Ec I c H inf ¼
Equivalent Diagonal Strut ± Mainstone

Mainstone [13] provided a concept on equivalent diagonal strut by performing tests on model frames with bricks
infill. This approach estimated the infill contribution both to the stiffness of the frame and to its total strength.
w 0,16dinf Oh H inf
0,3
(13)
Equivalent Diagonal Strut ± Mainstone and Weeks

References [14] and [15], based on experimental data, proposed an empirical equation for the calculation of the
width of an equivalent strut.
w 0,175dinf Oh H inf
0, 4
(14)
Equivalent Diagonal Strut ± Bazan and Meli

Bazan and Meli [16], on the basis of parametric finite-element studies for one-bay, one-story infill frames,
produced an empirical formula to calculate the equivalent width of an infill frame:

w 0,35 0,22E H (15)
Ec Ac
E (16)
Ginf Ainf
030011-4
Equivalent Diagonal Strut ± Liauw and Kwan
Liauw and Kwan [17] proposed the following equation based on experimental and analytical data:
0,95H inf cos T
w (17)
Oh H inf
Equivalent Diagonal Strut ± Paulay and Priestley

Paulay and Priestley [18] pointed out that a high value of w will result in a stiffer structure, leading to a
potentially higher seismic response. They suggested a simple formula useful for structure design as shown below:
w 0,25dinf (18)
Equivalent Diagonal Strut ± Durani and Luo

Durani and Luo [19@DQDO\]HGWKHODWHUDOORDGUHVSRQVHRIUHLQIRUFHGFRQFUHWHLQILOOIUDPHEDVHGRQ0DLQVWRQH¶V
equation. They proposed an equation for calculating the effective width of a diagonal strut:
w J L2 H 2 sin 2T (19)
0,1
ª H 4 Einf t º
J 0,32 sin 2T « » (20)
¬ mEc I c H inf ¼
ª 6E I H º
m 6«1 c b » (21)
¬ SEc I c L ¼
Equivalent Diagonal Strut ± Hendry

Hendry [20] presented an equation to find the equivalent strut width that can represent the masonry and
contribute to resisting the lateral forces in the composite structure:
w 0,5 D h2 D h2 (22)
0, 25
S ª 4 Ec I c H inf º
D 2
« » (23)
2 ¬ Einf t sin 2T ¼
h
0, 25
ª 4E I L º
D 2
S « c b inf » (24)
¬ Einf t sin 2T ¼
L
Equivalent Diagonal Strut ± Al-Chaar

Al-Chaar [21] proposed that the equivalent masonry strut has to be connected to the frame members. The infill
forces are assumed to be mainly supported by the columns and the struts are placed accordingly. The strut should be
030011-5
pin-connected to the column at a distance of lcolumn in front of the beam. The distance is defined by the following
equations:
w
lcolumn (25)
cos T column
w
H inf
cos T column
tan T column (26)
Linf
w 0,175dinf Oh H inf
0, 4
(27)
Equivalent Diagonal Strut ± Papia

Papia et al. [22] presented equations calculating the equivalent strut width to represent the masonry and
contribute to resisting the lateral forces in the composite structure:
c 1
w d inf (28)
z O*
c 0,249 0,0116vinf 0,576vinf

2
(29)
E 0,146 0,0073vinf 0,126vinf

2
(30)
Einf tH inf § H inf

2
AL ·
O* ¨¨ 2 c inf ¸¸ (31)
Ec Ac © Linf 4 Ab H inf ¹
Linf Linf
z=1 if 1 and z=1,125 if t 1,5
H inf H inf
Equivalent Diagonal Strut ± Chen and Iranata

References [23-24] proposed calculations to determine equivalent width of a strut, formulated from experimental
data and simulation research.
d inf
w (32)
O cos 2 T
§5 3 · Linf § 7 ·H § 3 · H3
O ¨ Q¸ ¨ 2 Q ¸ inf ¨ 2 Q ¸ 3inf (33)
©4 2 ¹ H inf © 4 ¹ Linf © 2 ¹ Linf
030011-6
EXPERIMENTAL TEST FOR COMPARISON
The experimental test to be compared with diagonal strut method is the experiment conducted by Mehrabi [25].
Two models of experimental frame are used here; the first one is an open frame with its weak frame is without an
infill and the second one is a weak frame with a solid infill).
(a) (b)
FIGURE 1. Experimental Test by Mehrabi for Comparison (a) Open Frame and (b) Frame with Solid Masonry Infill Panel
7KHUHDUHWZRGLIIHUHQWIUDPHVRI0HKUDEL¶VH[SHULPHQWVDVFDQEHVHHQLQ)LJ. 1 that need to be compared with

the methods of equivalent diagonal strut. The column base is fixed on plate to the floor of the laboratory. To
simulate gravitation load of a floor above, both columns were loaded with vertical constant load (Pv) and
horizontally, it was also given a monotonic force until it collapsed. All parameters used in the study are shown in
Table 1.
TABLE 1. Parameters of Infill and Frame
Infill Parameter Value Units Frame Parameter Value Units

Hinf 1422 mm H 1537 mm
Linf 2134 mm L 2312 mm
dinf 2564 mm Ec 21910 MPa
Ainf 196328 mm2 bc 178 mm
T 34 degree hc 178 mm
tan T 0.666 Ic 83656321 mm4
sin T 0.555 Ac 31684 mm2
sin 2T 0.023 bb 153 mm
cos T 0.832 hb 229 mm
Einf 9515 MPa Ib 153114610 mm4
tinf 92 mm Ab 35037 mm2
Ginf 317 MPa
‫ݝ‬inf 0.15
The graphic below (Fig. 2) shows force ± deflection diagram of experimental test by Mehrabi [25]. As we can
see in that graph, the frame with infill remains in a steady line until it reaches 180.000 N of horizontal loading force,
and the open frame stays similarly until it crosses 60.000 N.Frame with infill has bigger value of stiffness, thus
needing a bigger force to make horizontal deflection as compared to an open frame.
030011-7
ϯϱϬϬϬϬ
ϯϬϬϬϬϬ
ϮϱϬϬϬϬ
&ŽƌĐĞ;EͿ
ϮϬϬϬϬϬ
ϭϱϬϬϬϬ ŽƉĞŶĨƌĂŵĞ
ϭϬϬϬϬϬ ŝŶĨŝůůĨƌĂŵĞ
ϱϬϬϬϬ
Ϭ
Ϭ ϮϬ ϰϬ ϲϬ
ĚĞĨůĞĐƚŝŽŶ;ŵŵͿ
FIGURE 2. Force-Deflection Diagram of Experimental Test by Mehra
ANALYSIS AND MODELING

The modeling was conducted to fill the portal frame with a masonry panel that was built as an equivalent
diagonal strut, with variations of thickness (tinf) and width (w) for every equation. The analysis was conducted as
linear model, commonly used in structure analysis by designers. As shown in Fig. 3, the frame was modeled using a
structure analysis software and it was loaded by constant value of PV (294 kN) and horizontal monotonic load of PH.
For every horizontal load added, the horizontal deflection was plotted in the graph and compared to the experimental
results.
FIGURE 3. Masonry panel simulation as an equivalent diagonal strut

The calculation from fourteen equations is represented by Fig. 4. Al-Chaar and Mainstones-Weeks methods have
similar value of equivalent diagonal strut width (1893 mm), which was the widest. The second and the third widest
values are Mainstones (1731 mm) and Stafford Smith ± Carter (1021 mm). On the other hand, FEMA 356 equation
gives the narrowest equivalent diagonal width at 252 mm, followed by Durani-Luo with 300 mm. The average width
is 864 mm, and the equations that produce value closest to that average value are Bazan-Meli (753 mm) and Holmes
(855 mm). Moreover, Fig. 3 also shows that Mainstones and Stafford-Smith equations give the stiffest equivalent
diagonal strut, while the most flexible is given by FEMA 356.
030011-8
ƋƵŝǀĂůĞŶƚŝĂŐŽŶĂů^ƚƌƵƚtŝĚƚŚ;ŵŵͿ
WĂƉŝĂ
,ĞŶĚƌǇ
ƵƌĂŶŝĂŶĚ>ƵŽ
>ŝĂƵǁĂŶĚ<ǁĂŶ
DĂŝŶƐƚŽŶĞƐĂŶĚtĞĞŬƐ
^ƚĂĨĨŽƌĚ^ŵŝƚŚĂŶĚĂƌƚĞƌ
^ĂŝŶĞŶĞũĂĚĂŶĚ,ŽŽďƐ
Ϭ ϮϱϬ ϱϬϬ ϳϱϬ ϭϬϬϬ ϭϮϱϬ ϭϱϬϬ ϭϳϱϬ ϮϬϬϬ
FIGURE 4. Equivalent diagonal width of infill panel
FIGURE 5. Force ± Deflection Diagram of Various Models
Figure 5 shows the force ± deflection diagram of every model. As can be observed, the equation that gives the
FORVHVWUHVXOWWRLQILOOIUDPHH[SHULPHQWDOWHVWLV+ROPHV¶IROORZHGE\%D]DQ-0HOL¶V2QWKHRWKHUKDQGZHFDQVHH
that equivalent diagonal width proposed by Al-Chaar, Mainstones-Weeks, Stafford-Smith and Mainstones are stiffer
than the experimental result. Other equations such as Sainedjad-Hoobs, Liauw-Kwan, Paulay-Priestley, Hendry,
Papia, Chen-Iranata, Durani-Luo, and FEMA stay in the lower limit to be used as equivalent diagonal strut, due to
their force-deflection results that lie between those of the infill frame and the open frame.
030011-9
NOTATION
w = width of equivalent strut E = dimensionless parameter
H = Column height Ac = gross area of the column
Hinf = Infill panel height Ainf = gross area of the infill panel on the
horizontal plane
Ec = Elastic modulus of frame Ginf = shear modulus of the infill panel
Eme = Elastic modulus of infill panel H = height of the frame
Icol = Inertia moment of column Ib = Moment of Inertia of beam
Linf = Width of infill panel Ic = Moment of Inertia of column
dinf = Diagonal length of infill panel Ab = Cross sectional area of beam
tinf = Thickness of infill panel Ac = Cross sectional area of column
ș = the angle between diagonal length of Z = empirical constant
the infill and the horizontal line
Ȝh = Coefficient used to define width of Vinf 3RLVVRQ¶VUDWLR
diagonal strut
REFERENCES
1. Earthquake Engineering Research Institute dan International Association for Earthquake Engineering,
³7XWRULDO:RUOG+RXVLQJ(QF\FORSHGLD3HULODNX%DQJXQDQ6WUXNWXU5DQJND%HWRQ%HUWXODQJ'HQJDQ'LQGLQJ
3HQJLVL'DUL%DWD7HUKDGDS*HPSD´:+(± 01, 2009.
2. Al-M., Abdelkareem, A. A. 6D\HG³(TXLYDOHQW6WUXW:LGWK IRU0RGHOOLQJ 5&,QILOOHG)UDPHV´-RXUQDORI
Engineering Sciences, Assiut University, Faculty of Engineering, Vol.41, No.3. May 2013
3. A. Abdel and +DIL]³(IIHFWRILQILOOZDOOVRQWKHSHUIRUPDQFHRIPXOWL-storey building during earthquakes. 1st
LQWHUQDWLRQDO VWUXFWXUDO VSHFLDOW\ FRQIHUHQFH´ SUHVHQWHG DW 7KH &DQDGLDQ 6RFLHW\ for Civil Engineering,
Calgary, Canada, 2006.
4. W. Y. Jung and A. J. Aref ³$QDO\WLFDO DQG QXPHULFDO VWXGLHV RI SRO\PHU PDWUL[ FRPSRVLWH VDQGZLFK LQILOO
SDQHOV´-RXUQDO of Composite Structures, Vol.68, page 359, 2005.
5. L. D Decanini, L. Liberatore and F. Mollaioli³5HVSRQVHRIEDUHDQGLQILOOHG5&IUDPHVXQGHUWKHHIIHFWRI
KRUL]RQWDODQGYHUWLFDOVHLVPLFH[FLWDWLRQ´SUHVHQWHGDWWK(XURSHDQFRQIHUHQFHRQHDUWKTXDNHHngineering,
London, 2002.
6. R. 5DNLWWD ³6WXGL 3HULODNX %DQJXQDQ 5XPDK 6HGHUKDQD GHQJDQ 0HPSHUKLWXQJNDQ .HNXDWDQ GDQ .HNDNXDQ
'LQGLQJ%DWD´,QVWLWXW7HNQRORJL6HSXOXK1RSHPEHU6XUDED\D
7. P. G. $VWHULV ³)LQLWH (OHPHQW 0LFUR-Modeling of Infilled Frames´ SUHVHQWHG DW (OHFWURQLF -RXUQDO RI
Structural Engineering vol.8, 2008.
8. A. Saneinejad and B. Hobbs ³,QHODVWLF 'HVLJQ RI ,QILOOHG )UDPHV´ J. Struct. Engrg. ASCE, Vol.
121(4), pp. 634-650.
9. W. 'HZREURWR ³$QDOLVD ,QHODVWLV 3RUWDO ± Dinding Pengisi´ -XUQDO 7HNQLN 6LSLO ,7% (GLVL 9RO
Oktober, 2005.
10. FEMA 356, Seismic Rehabilitation Pre-standard
11. +ROPHV ³6WHHO )UDPHV :LWK %ULFNZRUN DQG &RQFUHWH ,QILOOLQJ´ 3URFHHGLQJV RI WKH ,QVWLWXWLRQ RI &LYLO
Engineers, vol. 19, pp. 473-478, 1961.
12. B. S. 6PLWK DQG & &DUWHU ³$ PHWKRG RI DQDO\VLV IRU LQILOO IUDPHV´ 3URFHHGLQJV RI WKH ,QVWLWXWLRQ RI &LYLO
Engineers, vol. 44, pp. 31-48, 1969.
13. 0DLQVWRQH³2QWKH6WLIIQHVVDQGVWUHQJWKRILQILOOHGIUDPHV´3URFHHGLQJRIWKH,QVWLWXWLRQRI&LYLO(QJLQHHUV
Supplement IV, pp. 57-90, 1971.
14. 0DLQVWRQH³6XSSOHPHQWDU\1RWHVRQthe Stiffness and Strength oI,QILOOHG)UDPHV´&XUUHQW3DSHU&3
Building Research Station, Garston, Watford, U.K, 1974.
15. 0DLQVWRQH DQG * $ :HHNV ³7KH LQIOXHQFH RI %RXQGLQJ )UDPH RQ Whe Racking Stiffness and Strength of
%ULFN :DOOV´ LQ 3URFHHGLQJV RI WKH QG ,QWHUQDWLRQDO %ULFN 0DVRQU\ &RQIHUHQFH %XLOGLQJ 5HVHDUFK
Establishment, Watford, England, 1974, pp. 165-171.
16. %D]DQDQG50HOL³6HLVPLF$QDO\VLV2I6WUXFWXUHV:LWK0DVRQU\:DOOV´LQWK:RUOG&RQIRQ(DUWKTXDNH
Engineering, Vol. 5, International Association of Earthquake Engineering (IAEE), Tokyo, 1980, pp. 633±640.
17. /LDXZDQG.+.ZDQ³1RQOLQHDU%HKDYLRURI1RQ-,QWHJUDO,QILOOHG)UDPHV´&RPSXWHUV 6WUXFWXUHVYRO
18, pp. 551-560, 1984.
030011-10
18. Paulay and M. Priestley, Seismic Design of Reinforced Concrete and Masonry Buildings. New York: Jhon
Wiley & Sons, 1992.
19. 'XUUDQLDQG<+/XR³6HLVPLF5HWURILWRI)ODW-VODE%XLOGLQJVZLWK0DVRQU\,QILOOV´1&((5ZRUNVKRSRQ
seismic response in Masonry Infills, 1994.
20. Hendry, Structural Masonry, 2nd ed. Macmillan Press, London, 1998.
21. Al-&KDDU³(YDOXDWLQJ6WUHQJWKDQG6WLIIQHVVRI8QUHLQIRUFHG0DVRQU\,QILOO6WUXFWXUHV´86$UP\&RUSVRI
Engineers, Construction
22. G. A. Papia, L. Cavaleri, and 0 )RVVHWWL ³,QILOOHG )UDPHV ,QIOXHQFH of Vertical Load on the Equivalent
'LDJRQDO 6WUXW 0RGHO´ LQ the 14th World Conference on Earthquake Engineering. October 12-17, 2008,
Beijing, China, 2008.
23. H. M. &KHQ DQG ,UDQDWD ³5HDOLVWLF 6LPXODWLRQ RI Reinforced Concrete Structural Systems with Combine of
6LPSOLILHGDQG5LJRURXV&RPSRQHQW0RGHO´6WUXFWXUDO(QJLQHHULQJDQG0HFKDQLFV9RO1RSS-
645, 2005.
24. Y. H. &KHQ³6HLVPLF(YDOXDWLRQRI5&%XLOGLQJV,Q-)LOOHGZLWK%ULFN:DOOV´3K' Dissertation, Department
of Architecture, National Cheng-Kung University, Tainan, Taiwan, 2003.
25. A. B. Mehrabi, P. B. Shing, M. P. Schuller and J. L. Noland. (1996),´ Experimental Evaluation of Masonry-
,QILOOHG5&)UDPHV´-6WUXFW(QJUJ$6&(9RO(3), pp. 228-237.
030011-11
Porosity and wear resistance of flame sprayed tungsten carbide coatings
Winarto Winarto, Nofrijon Sofyan, and Didi Rooscote

Porosity and Wear Resistance of Flame Sprayed Tungsten
Carbide Coatings
Winarto Winarto1, a), Nofrijon Sofyan1 and Didi Rooscote
1
Department of Metallurgical and Materials Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Depok - 16424, Indonesia.
a)
Corresponding author: winarto@metal.ui.ac.id
Abstract. Thermal-sprayed coatings offer practical and economical solutions for corrosion and wear protection of
components or tools. To improve the coating properties, heat treatment such as preheat is applied. The selection of
coating and substrate materials is a key factor in improving the quality of the coating morphology after the heat
treatment. This paper presents the experimental results regarding the effect of preheat temperatures, i.e. 200ºC, 300ºC and
400ºC, on porosity and wear resistance of tungsten carbide (WC) coating sprayed by flame thermal coating. The powders
and coatings morphology were analyzed by a Field Emission Scanning Electron Microscope equipped with Energy
Dispersive Spectrometry (FE-SEM/EDS), whereas the phase identification was performed by X-Ray diffraction
technique (XRD). In order to evaluate the quality of the flame spray obtained coatings, the porosity, micro-hardness and
wear rate of the specimens was determined. The results showed that WC coating gives a higher surface hardness from
1391 HVN up to 1541 HVN compared to that of the non-coating. Moreover, the wear rate increased from 0.072
mm3/min. to 0.082 mm3/min. when preheat temperature was increased. Preheat on H13 steel substrate can reduce the
percentage of porosity level from 10.24 % to 3.94% on the thermal spray coatings.
INTRODUCTION
Tool steel material of H13 is one of the wear-resistant materials that is widely used in various applications such
as forging mold, extrusion, hot presses, cutting components and plunger. In the operating conditions, tool steels are
subjected to face severe wear, corrosion and high temperature oxidation. In order to prevent the failure resulting
from the operating conditions, the protective layer or hard coating is used in a wide range of wear resistant
applications and in a variety of conditions including sliding, fretting, abrasion and erosion. Hard particles such as
WC, Ni and Cr can be used to achieve surface conditions due to their high hardness [1].
Today, metal flame spray is commonly used in surface coating technology due to its good adhesive properties,
high wear resistance and economical in terms of cost in the process [2]. The use of this method is generally to
increase the lifespan of a component so that the level of repair or replacement of material can be minimized. Some
of the advantages gained by using this method include increasing some mechanical properties such as hardness of
the material surface, increasing the wear resistance of the materials, and improving the corrosion resistance by
creating a barrier between the metal and its environment.
Thermal spraying is a coating process in which a coating material is heated quickly in a hot gaseous medium to
become molten or semi-molten and at the same time projected at high velocity onto a substrate surface to develop a
desired coating. The coating material may be melted either by electric or flame heating. However, because the
method with electricity is more expensive in economic terms, the use of flame heating method is more common in
several applications [3]. It has been revealed that for thermally sprayed coatings, porosity occurs during the spraying
process that affects the microstructure with a simultaneous decrease in the hardness and the wear resistance of the
materials. This occurrence depends on deposition conditions, which are characterized by high temperature, a
generally oxidizing atmosphere and high cooling rates. In this event, the sprayed material is subjected to complex
physical and chemical transformations. Several studies have also revealed that during the spraying of WC, a part of
WC is transformed into WC1-x, W2C and metallic tungsten [4], while another part is dissolved in the form of
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030012-1–030012-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985482
030012-1
carbides [5]. The stage of these transformations depends on the spraying method, the operating parameters [6] and
the powder properties [7].
The present investigation is focused on the effect of preheat temperatures i.e. 200ºC, 300ºC and 400ºC on the
porosity and wear resistance of WC coatings sprayed by flame thermal coating. A comparison between the
microstructures in the coating with different preheating is presented in an attempt to understand the phenomena
occur during spraying and in particular how to minimize the porosity of the coating.
EXPERIMENTAL DETAILS
A commercial WC powder (TungTec 10112) was used for the coating. Chemical composition of the powder is
shown in Table 1. Metal plates (tool steel of H13) with an initial hardness of 46 HRC and a dimension of 30 mm x
30 mm x 10 mm were used as substrates. Before the coating process, the surfaces of substrates were cleaning to
remove oxides and other impurities. The surfaces of substrates were then preheated at temperature variations of
200ºC, 300ºC and 400ºC followed by the flame spray coating on the surfaces of the substrates to obtain a
metallurgical bonding between the base material and the coating. The steel substrates material and the equipment of
flame spray for metal coating are presented in Fig. 1.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 1. Sample of H13 steel substrate (a) and a machine of flame spray for metal coating (b)
The WC coating powder was characterized using a field emission scanning electron microscope (FE-SEM) to
investigate the morphology of the powder particles. The XRD test was conducted to reveal the effect of the variation
preheat temperature on the coating product through the presence of any elements or compounds in the matrix of
coating. Other tests were performed including microstructure of the coating, transverse surface microhardness of the
coating and surface wear testing by using the Ogoshi wear machine.
Wear testing was conducted to determine the response of the load friction material and to see the effect of WC
coating on the wear failures. Wear testing was performed by using the standard testing methods of Ogoshi, which
employs a rotating disc with a diameter of 30 mm and a load of 3.16 kg with an abrasion speed of 1.97 m/s at a
distance of 100 m within 40 seconds.
RESULT
Powder Morphology and Phase Identification

Figure 2 (a) shows a secondary electron image of WC powder used as coating materials. It is seen that the
morphology of the powder particles shows a sphere shape uniformly dispersed in the nickel matrix. These sphere
particles are the WC-carbide; in which with its high hardness presents a significant improvement in the mechanical
properties such as hardness and surface wear. The measurement distribution of particle size on WC powders
(TungTec 10112) shows that WC carbide particles have a size range of 64-140 μm.
030012-2
(a)
(b)
FIGURE 2. (a) Secondary electron image of TungTec 10112 powder morphology and (b) The XRD pattern of TungTec 10112
powder
Figure 2 (b) shows a pattern of XRD test resulting from the TungTec 10112 powder. This pattern was analyzed
to obtain the peaks and the phases present in the powders. The results indicate the presence of the phases within the
particles and the matrix. The highest peak is located at the position of 2-theta = 39.678 which belongs to W2C.
Tungsten carbide particles consist of WC and W2C. These particles have the same crystal structure but at different 2-
theta positions. Both of WC and W2C have a cell volume of 20.83 and 36.54, respectively. W2C is a result of
decarburizes of the WC [8, 9]. Besides, there are also phases of nickel, chromium, boron and silicon with a high
enough intensity, which are in agreement with the mill certificate.
Coating Morphology
Figure 3 shows transversal surface microstructure images of the specimen WC with preheating temperature
variations. To reveal the microstructure, the specimen was etched with a nital 3% and the microstructure was taken
under an optical microscope. The bar scale is given in each of the image. The images show that the metal flame
spray coating consists of WC particles containing porosity. Coating thickness of the specimen at preheating 200ºC,
300ºC, and 400ºC are ȝPȝP, and 343 μm, respectively. The increasing preheating temperature results in
decreasing the amount of porosity in the coating. This result is an agreement with other result obtained by Zoran
[10] in which the layer thickness range of the metal spray method using oxy-acetylene flame has an average
thickness of 0.3 to 0.4 mm.
(a) (b) (C)

FIGURE 3. Macrostructure of WC coating with preheating of (a) 200 C, (b) 300 C and (c) 400OC
O O
Figure 4 shows secondary electron image of the specimen preheated at 300qC. The figure shows a layer
consisting of dispersed WC particles and porosity. In order to identify the elements present in the coating, EDS
examination was carried out and the results according to the number given in Fig. 4 can be seen in Table 1.
030012-3
FIGURE 4. The spot location of the energy dispersive spectrometry (EDS) test on WC coating at preheating of 300qC
TABLE 1. Weight percentage of elements on WC Coating with preheating of 300qC.
Table 1 shows the results of testing specimens with EDS on WC coating with preheating 300ºC. As can be seen
in the figure, the white area is the WC particles as indicated by the dominant content of W and C shown in point
number of 3, 4 and 6. The gray area is a nickel matrix shown in spectrum 5 and 7 wherein the Ni content is the most
dominant. The content of C is high due to the presence of WC and CrxCy at participating matrix. Spectra 1 and 2 are
the interfacial area dominated by high Fe content followed by some alloying elements on a substrate such as Cr, Mo
and V. To reveal the distribution of elements on the layer and the substrate, the elemental mapping of the coating
was performed and the result is shown in Figure 5. The content of WC appears to be distributed evenly in layers.
The content of O indicates the presence of the porosity, while Cr spreads evenly to the H13 steel substrate. The
content of C and B shows an intensity on the surface layer, which is expected to form a hard compound that can
increase the hardness and wear resistance of the coating. Si content has a high intensity on the particles WC. This Si
seems to envelop tungsten particles together with nickel matrix.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 5. The result of mapping elements on WC Coating with preheating of 300 0C
030012-4
DISCUSSION
Hardness Distribution and Wear Properties

Figure 6 (a) shows a graph of micro-hardness influenced by the preheat temperature. Increasing number of WC
presence in the coating seems too increase the micro hardness, which is expected to increase the wear of the tool
steel surface. This result is in agreement with the research result conducted by Wang and Franch [8, 9], who showed
that the presence of WC particles can increase the hardness and wear resistance.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 6. The graph of hardness distribution on WC Coating and (b) Wear resistance of WC Coating vs. Preheating.
Figure 6 (b) shows a graph of the influence of preheat on the wear resistance of the coating specimen. Increasing
of wear resistance is due to the presence of WC on the surface, which provides a barrier between the substrate with
the environment. In this event, objects in contact with the substrate are protected by a layer of WC beforehand that
caused the lost volume decreases and thus increases the wear resistance of the surface of the tool steel
Porosity Level
Figure 7 shows a graph of preheating temperature of the substrate on the level of porosity formed in the layers.
In the sample of WC with preheating 200ºC porosity percentage is around 10.24%, at preheating of 300ºC porosity
percentage is about 7.59%, while the percentage of porosity with the preheating of 400ºC is around 3.94%. The
results showed that the increasing in preheat temperature from 200ºC to 400ºC will decrease the wear resistance of
the substrate. Increasing the preheating temperature will reduce the trapped air within the coating. This can be
understood since the condition of the substrate still hot so that the solidification of molten coating will be slow.
Porosity in large quantities on the coating will cause the propagation towards underneath, thereby weakening the
bond of cohesion between the particles. Therefore, the optimal result would be such that the porosity of the coating
is in very small amounts.
FIGURE 7. The graph of percentage of porosity on the WC coating with different preheating temperatures.
030012-5
CONCLUSION
x WC coating as a top coat with oxy-acetylene flame spray can improve the micro hardness of H13 steel
surface with an optimized value of up to 1541 HVN at preheat temperature of 300ºC.
x The value of the wear rate increased from 0.072 mm3/min. into 0.082 mm3/min when preheat temperature
was increased from 200ºC to 400ºC.
x The percentage of porosity level can be reduced from 10.24 % to 3.94% by the thermal spray coatings
when preheat temperature was increased from 200ºC to 400ºC.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors would like to acknowledge the Directorate of Research and Public Services, Universitas Indonesia
for the financial support for this study through the PITTA Research Grant in 2016.
REFERENCES
1. I. Arun, M. Duraiselvam, V. Senthilkumar, R. Narayanasamy, V. Anandakrishnan. Synthesis of Electric
Discharge Alloyed Nickel±Tungsten Coating on Tool Steel and Its Tribological Studies, Journal of Materials and
Design, Elsevier. (2014). p. 257 ± 262.
2. S. Bose. High Temperature Coatings, Elsevier Butterworth-Heinemann, Amsterdam; Boston. (2007).
3. /60 +HWPDĔF]\N %0HQGDOD $GYDQFHG PDWHULDOV DQG SURWHFWLYH FRDWLQJV LQ DHUR-engines application,
J.Achiev.Mater.Manuf.Eng 24. (2007).
4. P. Mazars, D. Manesse, C. Lopvet, in: N.F. Eaton (Ed.), Advance in Thermal Spray, 11th International Thermal
Spraying Conference, Montreal, 8±12 September 1986, Pergamon, Oxford,1986, p. 111.
5. V. Ramnath, N. Jayaraman, Mater. Sci. Technol. 5 (1989) p.382.
6. M.E. Vinayo, F. Kassabji, J. Guyonnet, P. Fauchais, J. Vac. Sci.Technol. A3 (1985) p.2483.
7. S. Rangaswamy, H. Herman, in: N.F. Eaton (Ed.), Advance in Thermal Spray, 11th International Thermal
Spraying Conference, Montreal, 8±12 September 1986, Pergamon, Oxford, 1986, p. 101.
8. H. Wang, W. Xia, Y. Jin. (1996). A study on abrasive resistance of Ni based coatings with a WC hard phase.
Wear: 195. p.47±52
9. R. Franch, C. Lorenzana, JM. Miguel, JM. Guilemany. (2001). Cermet coating / wear resistant NiCrBSi te'rmica
REWDLQHGE\+92)6ROGDGXUD\WHFQRORJÕDVGHXQLRS±14
10. Z.Bergant, U.Trdan, J.Grum. (2014). Effect of High-Temperature Furnace Treatment on the Microstructure and
Corrosion Behavior of NiCrBSi Flame-Sprayed Coatings. Corrosion Science 88. p 372-386
030012-6
Hollow glass microsphere-epoxy composite material for helmet application to reduce
impact energy due to collision
Sutikno, Wajan Berata, and Wahyu Wijanarko

Hollow Glass Microsphere-Epoxy Composite Material for
Helmet Application to Reduce Impact energy due to
Collision
Sutikno1,a), Wajan Berata.2,b) and Wahyu Wijanarko.3, c)

1,2,3
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Faculty of Industrial Technology
Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: sutikno.its@gmail.com
b)
wajanb@me.its.ac.id
c)
wijanarko@me.its.ac.id
Abstract. Helmet is used as a safety gear to prevent the impact energy from a collision, due to a motorcycle accident,
IURP LQMXULQJ WKH ULGHU¶V KHDG 0DQXIDFWXULQJ RI D OLJKW ZHLJKWHG KHOPHW ZLWK D KLJK DEVRUSWLRQ RI LPSDFW HQHUJ\ LV
much expected because iW FRXOG LQFUHDVH WKH ULGHU¶V VDIHW\ DQG PRELOLW\ 0HDQZKLOH WKHUH DUH FRPSRVLWHV ZKLFK DUH
made from two or more materials that have different characteristics, that will give a better mechanical properties
compared to its original constituent material. In this research, a particular composite which is consist of 84% epoxy as its
matrix and 16% Hollow Glass Microsphere (HGM) as its reinforce, is simulated by finite element method. The three-
dimensional open-faced helmet model has an initial thickness of 4 mm, diameter of 87.57 mm, height 114 mm and foam
thickness 20 mm. The experiment simulation is conducted according to the SNI 1811-2007 (Standar Nasional Indonesia)
regulations. The penetration and absorption test instruments model are prepared also referring to the stated regulations,
which are a three-dimensional head piece as the helmet holder, a 3 kg sharp pendulum, a 5 kg helmet weigh and a
runway. The simulation concluded that the helmet with an 8 mm thickness has fulfilled the SNI 1811 ± 2007 provisions,
which stated that penetration should not happen on the lid of the helmet and the impact absorption forwarded by the
KHOPHWWRWKHULGHU¶VKHDGVKRXOGQRWH[FHHGNJI7KHPD[LPXPVWUHVVDQGGHIRUPDWLRQDUH4 Mpa and 8.28E-4
mm respectively. As for the impact energy forwarded by the helmet is only 460 kgf.
INTRODUCTION
Helmet is a safety gear that should be used by motorcyclists to prevent major damage especially to their heads in
traffic accident. Helmets specifications are standardized by SNI (Standar Nasional Indonesia) [1], DOT (Department
of Transportation) or American transportation standardization and other national or international standard, to ensure
the safety of the users. However, there are several cases where motorcyclists intentionally neglects the usage of
helmets because of the uncomfortable feeling around their head and neck due to the weight of the helmet. Thus, it is
an important matter to provide a lighter helmet for motorcyclists as an effort of constituting safety awareness on the
road and to reduce burden on motorcyclists' neck for health reason.
Composite is a material that is made up of two or more materials with different characteristics and gives a light-
weighted material with high strength and stiffness, resistant to corrosion that could be caused by chemical or
environmental factors, easy to form, and highly resistant to creep. It is consists of a reinforce material as its main
component and matrix as its compliment. Matrix is functioned as a bondage and protector of the reinforce material.
It also restrains and forwards stress that is applied to the composite. Reinforce in the other hand, is the main material
of a composite that determines the characteristics of the composite such as stiffness, strength and other mechanical
properties. Composites categorized by its matrix are divided into Polymer Matrix Composite (PMC), used mostly in
home appliances, Metal Matrix Composite (MMC), used mostly in automotive and airplane components and
Ceramic Matrix Composite (CMC), used mostly on spaceships and rockets components as heat protection.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030013-1–030013-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985483
030013-1
Meanwhile, composites categorized into its reinforce are divided into particle reinforced composite, fiber reinforced
composite, and structural reinforced composite.
Hollow Glass Microspheres (HGM) is widely used as low dense filler in polymers. HGM is a thin hollow-wall
glass and made up of sodium borosilicate glass. Though it is initially known that HGM is not strong enough to
endure high shear force and high pressure in plastic manufacturing and injection molding, 3M introduced a
microsphere glass, HGM iM30K, which has isostatic proportional compressive strength that reaches 10,000 psi.
Therefore, HGM iM30K could be used in high shear force applications and has the highest compressive strength
among its product and highest strength to density ratio among other HGM in the market. HGM iM30K is made up of
soda/lime borosilicate and could endure injection molding pressure around 30,000 psi. It has 16 micron sized grains
and isostatic strength up to 28,000 psi with a 0.6 g/cc density. Below is a table shows the properties of HGM
iM30K.
Table 1. Properties of HGM iM30K
Property iM 30 K
Shape Hollow sphere with thin walls
Composition Soda lime ± borosilicate glass
Color White, powder
Isostatic crush 28000 psi
True density 600 Kg/m3
Bulk density to true particle density 63%
Oil absorption 33,5
Some researchers have conducted researches on HGM-epoxy composite material. Effect of HGM volume
fraction within range of 10%-40% in the particle composite and curing temperature on compressive strength of the
composite material [2]. This research yields that HGM volume fraction within range of 15%-20% has the highest
compressive strength. This research followed by another researcher to find out more detail about those HGM
volume fraction range and obtained the results that HGM volume fraction of 16% has the best compressive strength
[3]. Researches on helmet have been conducted by some other researchers, investigated the energy absorption due
free fall and high speed impact cases [4, 5]. Meanwhile the other research carried out helmet impact strength test
modification [6].
Several superiority of HGM are, resistant to high temperature, has a high strength to density ratio, has a stable
chemical compositions, has a high pressure strength, and has a low thermal conductivity. In this paper, the idea is to
simulate a composite which is consist of 84% epoxy as its matrix and 16% HGM as its reinforce, as a material used
in helmet lids. The helmet should fulfill the SNI requirements to be safely used by motorcyclists, evaluated from the
amount of energy absorbed from impact and the correlations to helmet thickness. The impact and penetration test are
carried out referring to SNI provisions.
METHODOLOGY
Material Properties and Testing Standard

The material properties for this helmet model are, 1035.4 kg/m -3 density, Young Modulus of 567.02 Mpa and a
poisson ratio of 0.12. The sharp pendulum model for penetration test and impact absorption test has a Modulus
Young Modulus of 200,000 Mpa and Poisson ratio of 0.3. Below is a table showing the testing standard referring to
SNI 1811 ± 2007.
Table 2. SNI 1811-2007 Testing Standard

NO Test Method Requirements Passing Criteria
The pendulum distance to the helmet
Penetration must be 1.6 m. Material of the helmet lid is not
1
Test The pendulum is released in free ± perforated
fall mode
No crack or breaks occur on the
The steel circular anvil has a helmet lid.
2 Impact Test
diameter of 130 mm Energy forwarded by the helmet
should not exceeds 2,000 kgf
030013-2
Modeling and Simulation
The impact testing equipment is modeled as shown below.
(a) (b)
Figure 1. (a) Penetration Test (b) Impact absorption test
The tests are then simulated using a finite element method. Before compiling the simulation, several steps need
to be done as the input data that will be processed by the software. For penetration test, firstly, material choices of
the helmet and testing HTXLSPHQW¶V are selected. Then, meshing size is selected because the software will process the
model by dividing it into small elements. In this research, the small meshing size is selected in hope of achieving the
closest simulation result to reality. After that, load and fixed support are given. In the simulation, potential energy is
adjusted to kinetic energy. The sharp pendulum is placed on the helmet, which is attached to a testing head piece,
and the pendulum is given a 5.6 m/s penetration speed. The simulation will give the value of deformation and stress
occur on the helmet. The simulation is repeated three times for according to the thickness of the helmet, which are 4
mm, 6 mm and 8 mm respectively.
(a) (b) (c) (d)

Figure 2. Penetration test simulation (a) Materials selection (b) Meshing (c) Load given to the helmet (d) Support on the below
part of the helmet
The same procedures are also used in impact test simulation. The difference between the two tests are the
equipment used in the testing standard. In this test the helmet is placed on the runway and a 5 kg weigh in the helmet
is given a 5.6 m/s speed. The simulation will give the value of deformation and stress occur on the helmet. The
simulation is repeated three times for according to the thickness of the helmet, which are 4 mm, 6 mm and 8 mm
respectively.
030013-3
(a) (b) (c)
Figure 3. Input data for impact test simulation (a) Meshing (b) Weigh given to the helmet (c) Support on the helmet
SIMULATION RESULTS AND ANALYSIS

The simulation of the penetration and impact test results show the deformation and stress occur on the lid of the
helmet due to the given load. The energy absorbed by the helmet is also evaluated through the value of internal, heat
and kinetic energy on the helmet resulted to the load given in the test.
(a) (b)
Figure 4. Illustration for SNI 1811: 2007, (a) Penetration test result, (b) Impact test result
Penetration Test Analysis

Kinetic energy from the pendulum is transferred to the open-faced helmet and changed into internal and kinetic
energy on the helmet. Figure 5 shows that kinetic energy on the helmet decreases as the thickness of the helmet
increases. The biggest value of kinetic energy on the helmet is 5.2 Joule on the 4 mm thick helmet. While the
smallest value happens on the 8 mm thick helmet, 1.2 Joule. As for Figure 6, shows that internal energy on the
helmet increases as the thickness of the helmet increases. It is the opposite result from kinetic energy. The biggest
value of internal energy on the helmet happens on the 8 mm thick helmet, 41.59 Joule. While the smallest value of
internal energy happens on the 4 mm thick helmet, 35 Joule.
Figure 5. Kinetic energy on helmet versus its thickness Figure 6. Internal energy on helmet versus its thickness
030013-4
Besides kinetic and internal energy, heat energy is also transferred to the helmet due to the collision of pendulum
and helmet. Evaluating heat energy is through analysis of the helmet temperature. Fig. 7 shows the increment of
temperature from initial temperature 22oC. The heat energy on the helmet is then showed in Fig. 8. From both
figures shows that the increment of temperature indicates heat energy is also transferred during the collision.
Figure 7. Temperature on helmet before and after collision Figure 8. Heat energy on helmet versus its thickness
As stated before, the total energy absorbed, as shown in Fig. 9, by the helmet is the total of kinetic, internal and
heat energy transferred to the helmet during collision with the pendulum. The total energy of a 4 mm, 6 mm and 8
mm helmet is 44.5 Joule, 44.05 Joule and 44.99 Joule respectively. Fig. 10 meanwhile, shows that deformation
happens during collision of helmet and pendulum. However, deformation decreases as the thickness of the helmet
increases. The biggest deformation value happens to the 4 mm helmet, 9.07E-3 mm and the smallest deformation
value happens to the 8 mm helmet, 8.88E-4 mm.
Figure 9. Total energy of a 4mm, 6 mm, and 8 mm Helmet

respectively Figure 10. Deformation on Helmet Lid
Besides energy and deformation, maximum stress happens on the helmet lid needs to be considered to determine
whether the composite is safe or unsafe to be used as the helmet's material. Figure 11 shows that the stress occurs to
the three thickness variations is below the maximum allowable stress of the composite, so the composite is stated
safe to be used as the helmet's material. The stress for the 4 mm, 6 mm and 8 mm thick helmet is 1.52 MPa, 1.05
MPa and 0.74 MPa respectively.
030013-5
Figure 11. Maximum stress on helmet lid due to collision with the pendulum
Impact Test Analysis

The stress occurs on the helmet lid due to impact is as shown in Fig. 12. From the figure, it is shown that the
stress decreases as the thickness of the helmet increases. The biggest stress occurs to the 4 mm thick helmet, 213.11
MPa. While the smallest stress occurs to the 8 mm thick helmet, 15.44 MPa. The stress resulted for 4 mm and 6 mm
thick helmet is above the maximum allowable stress of the composite. Therefore, the composite is safe to be used as
the helmet material if the thickness is 8 mm. Fig. 13 though shows the deformation that occurs to the helmet due to
impact collision. The deformation increases as the thickness of the helmet increases. This happens because initial
energy of helmet also increases as the thickness is increased. This energy increment causes an increment to the
deformation. The biggest deformation value is 7.96 mm on the 8 mm thick helmet. From the simulation result, this
maximum value happens on the side of the helmet and the initial shape of the helmet deform.
Figure 12. Maximum stress due to impact collision Figure 13. Deformation on helmet due to impact
Figure 14 shows the amount of forwarded-energy by the helmet to the head due to an impact collision. The
amount of energy forwarded by the helmet decreases as the thickness of the helmet increases. The biggest amount
occurs to the 4 mm thick helmet, 1060.2 kgf while the smallest value occurs to the 8 mm thick helmet, 460 kgf. The
smaller the amount of forwarded-energy, the safer the head of the rider will be. Fig. 15 shows the internal energy
occurred to the helmet because of the impact. From fig. 14 and fig. 15 could be analyzed that the internal energy is
proportional to the amount of energy forwarded by the helmet. The smallest internal energy is 56.63 Joule on the 8
mm thick helmet, while the biggest internal energy is 62.97 Joule on the 4 mm thick helmet.
030013-6
Figure 14. Forwarded-energy by the helmet due to impact
Figure 15. Internal energy on the helmet
Figure 16. Forwarded-energy by the helmet due to impact
The total energy that could be absorbed by the helmet is the total of internal and kinetic energy. Figure 16 shows
the total energy absorbed which consists of helmet's lid kinetic and internal energy, foam internal and kinetic
energy, and weigh energy. The total energy of a 4 mm thick helmet is 70.65 Joule, 6 mm thick helmet is 69.83 Joule
and for 8 mm thick helmet, there is an additional deformation energy 19.23 Joule, so the total energy of 8 mm thick
helmet is 80.35 Joule.
CONCLUSIONS
From this research could be concluded:
1. Kinetic energy from the pendulum in penetration test could be transferred to the helmet as kinetic, internal and
heat energy, and the biggest total energy is on the 8mm thick helmet, 44.99 Joule.
2. The smallest deformation value from the penetration test is 8.88E-4 mm that happens to the 8 mm thick helmet.
3. The stress on the lid helmet in penetration test decreases as the thickness of the helmet increases and the three
thickness resulted a safe stress value below the maximum allowable stress of the composites.
4. The biggest kinetic energy from the weigh and helmet's weight that could be transferred to kinetic and internal
energy in impact test is 80.35 Joule on the 8 mm thick helmet.
5. The smallest stress occurred due to impact collision is on the 8 mm thick helmet, 15.44 MPa and is the only safe
value below the maximum allowable stress of the composites compared to the other two thickness.
6. The smallest forwarded-energy to the head due to the impact collision is by the 8 mm thick helmet, 460.39 kgf.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The author would like to acknowledge Mechanical Engineering Department - Institut Teknologi Sepuluh
Nopember (ITS) - Surabaya for the funding support.
030013-7
REFERENCES
1. SNI 1811-2007, Standar Nasional Indonesia, 2007, Indonesia.
2. ) < $ULVWD ³Pengaruh Variasi Fraksi Volume dan Temperature Curing terhadap Karakteristik Tekan
Komposit Epoxy Partikel Hollow Glass Microspeheres´6XUDED\D.
3. :5LWRQJD³Pengaruh Variasi Fraksi Volume, Temperature Curing dan Post-curing terhadap Karakteristik
Tekan Komposit Epoxy-Hollow Glass Microspheres IM30K´ %DFKHORU 'HJUHH 7KHVLV ,QVWLWXW 7HNQRORJL
Sepuluh Nopember, 2014.
4. 5.6LPDQMXWDN³(QHUJL,PSDN+HOPHW6HSHGD0RWRU\DQJ'LNHQDL%HEDQ-DWXK%HEDV´6XPDWHUD8WDUD
5. $1D\DQ³Penyelidikan Perilaku Mekanik Helm Industri Akibat Beban Impak Kecepatan Tinggi,´6XPDWHUD
Utara.
6. % 0 6LUHJDU ³Modifikasi Metode Pengujian Kekuatan Helmet Industri Akibat Beban Impak Kecepatan
Tinggi´6XPDWHUD8WDUD.
030013-8
Speaker box made of composite particle board based on mushroom growing media
waste
P. H. Tjahjanti, Sutarman, E. Widodo, A. R. Kurniawan, A. T. Winarno, and A. Yani

Speaker Box Made of Composite Particle Board Based on
Mushroom Growing Media Waste
Tjahjanti P.H 1,a), Sutarman 2,b), Widodo E1,c), Kurniawan A.R1,d), Winarno A.T1,e),
Yani A1,f)
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Universitas Muhammadiyah Sidoarjo, Sidoarjo, East Java, Indonesia
2
Department of Agriculture, Universitas Muhammadiyah Sidoarjo, Sidoarjo, East Java, Indonesia
Corresponding authors: a)prantasi@gmail.com,
b)
sutarman.jaya@gmail.com, ediwidodo@umsida.ac.id, d)Rizal.dj9@gmail.com, e)arief.3winarno@gmail.com,
c)
f)
eiwai_ghani@yahoo.co.id.
Abstract. This research aimed to use mushroom growing media waste (MGMW) that was added by urea, starch and
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) glue as a composite particle board to be used as the material of speaker box manufacture.
Physical and mechanical testing of particle board including density, moisture content, thickness swelling after immersion
in water, strength in water absorption, internal bonding, modulus of elasticity, modulus of rupture and screw holding
power, were carried out in accordance with the Stándar Nasional Indonesia (SNI) 03-2105-2006 and Japanese
International Standard (JIS) A 5908-2003. The optimum composition of composite particle boards was 60% MGMW +
39% (50% urea +50% starch) + 1% PVC glue. Furthermore, the optimum composition to create speaker box with
hardness values of 14.9 Brinnel Hardness Number and results of vibration test obtained amplitude values of the Z-axis,
minimum of 0.032007 and maximum of 0.151575. For the acoustic test, results showed good sound absorption
coefficients at frequencies of 500 Hz and it has better damping absorption.
INTRODUCTION
Particle board is one of composite products or wood panel made of wood particles or other lignocellulose
materials unified with synthetic adhesives or other binders, which then are hot-pressed [1]. Speaker box is a piece of
electronic equipment that is associated with the audio system. Speaker box can bring a high quality sound in the
living room, home theater/ home audio at home or in places associated with the audio that brings a sense of
satisfaction and pride. A beautiful design of speaker box will make it not only ideal as an audio system that is
tunable, but also as a sweetener in the interior of the room. The design of speaker box is greatly affected by the
quality of the tone. Currently, speaker box with minimalist design is widely preferred and many brands are offered
ranging from low-end to high-end quality, all of which have the particularity in terms of models, finishing, sound
and price. However, in Indonesia, the branded speaker boxes are always imported, instead of producing by our
nation [2].
However, the supply of timber obtained from the forest as the main material of speaker box, has limited
availability. In the last eight years, the number of timber from natural forests as raw materials in the timber industry
is declined. In 2005-2013, the raw material from natural forests dropped from 20.5 million m3 to 5.54 million m 3.
Meanwhile, the need for timber as raw material from plantations, including those from industrial plantations and
private forests increased from 11.22 million m3 to 39.8 million m3 [3].
The condition requires a solution, therefore an alternative material to replace the position of timber as speaker
box material, is required. Selection of alternative materials is done by utilizing wastes, one of them is agricultural
waste. One of agricultural wastes is mushroom growing media waste (MGMW), where the waste is abundant in
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030014-1–030014-9; doi: 10.1063/1.4985484
030014-1
number, because in a few months after the mushroom is harvested, MGMW will be discharged and generally used
for solids in the cliff to widen an area.
In this research, mushrooms growing media waste used as reinforcement for polymer-based composite material
to be formed as composite particle board for speaker box manufacture. Essentially, the raw materials in the speaker
box production are not necessarily obtained from high-quality materials. Moreover, they can be from natural waste
that supports the emergence of environmental issues and the scarcity of raw material resources. However, speaker
box can be made in accordance with the desired product based on the density of composite particle boards [4].
Composite particle board is composed of MGMW added with polyester resin and catalyst mekpo with optimum
composition of 75% MGMW + 24% polyester resin + 1% catalyst Mekpo (methyl ethyl ketone peroxides), in
accordance to the physical and mechanical tests and with SNI 03-2105-2006 and JIS A 5908-2003 [5].
EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES
The production of speaker box made of composite particle board that is based on MGMW added with PVC glue,
urea and starch is accompanied by acoustic, hardness and vibration testing. Samples were prepared for acoustic
testing and hardness test are shown in Table 1. Furthermore, to generate the best results, speaker box would be
tested by the vibration test. The complete flowchart for this research was shown in Fig. 1.
Table 1. Composition of MGMW with PVC glue, urea and starch.
Starch Urea
Particle MGMW (%) (%) PVC glue
No.
board (%) (%)
39
1 1 60 50 50 1
2 2 60 40 60 1
3 3 60 30 70 1
Acoustic Testing
Acoustic testing was done to determine the extent of noise reduction that can be absorbed by the composite
particle board based on mushroom growing media waste. Acoustic testing used the impedance tube method. Sample
size for acoustic testing with size (10 x 10 x 1.5) cm3 is suitable with standards ASTM C384/ISO 10534. Sample
was mounted on the tip of the tube so that there was no loophole and five different frequencies of 125, 250, 500,
1000 and 2000 hertz, were examined. Furthermore, these values determined the value of sound absorption.
Hardness Testing
Hardness testing used the universal hardness tester CV-700. The Brinnel hardness test was conducted at three
points of each material tested, using a ball identor of 5 mm and 306 N for 12 seconds.
Speaker Box Design and Production

The design of speaker box made of MGMW + PVC + glue (starch + urea) is shown in Fig. 2 for front and back
images and Fig. 3 for an image to the right and above.
Materials required to produce speaker box made of composite particle board from MGMW + PVC + glue (starch
+ urea) were G glue, Rajawali glue, nails, carpet rubber, and egg containers.
030014-2
Composite particle board of is suitable with standard
sample preparation and testing
Acoustic testing Hardness Testing

(ASTM C384/ISO 10534) (ASTM E10 ISO 6506)
No
Meet the standard?
yes
Design Speaker Box
Making Speaker Box with variations silencers
Vibration testing (accelerometer)
Analysis
Conclusions this research
Figure 1. Research Flowchart.
030014-3
Front Back
Figure 2. Front and back images of speaker box design.
Right Above
Figure 3. Right and above image of speaker box design.
Vibration (Accelerometer) Testing

After the assembly was complete, the last step was to perform the vibration test. The vibration testing scheme is
presented in Fig. 4. The vibration test equipment in sets and test equipment placed on the workpiece and then the
active speaker box was set to generate maximal bass sound. Active speaker box switched on track for two minutes,
and the results will be read on a computer that was connected with test equipment. The second treatment was to
determine the frequency of speaker box to find out whether the speaker box vibrates and this treatment will be able
to chart a neutral frequency.
030014-4
ACCELEROMETER
NOTE BOOK
ACCELEROMETER
BOX SPEAKER
Figure 4. The vibration testing scheme.
Acoustic Testing
The quality of the sound damping material indicated by the value ĮDEVRUSWLRQFRHIILFLHQWRIWKHPDWHULDOWKH
ELJJHUWKHEHWWHUĮLVXVHGDVDVLOHQFHU, where ĮYDOXHUDQJHVIURPWR,IĮLVit means no sound is absorbed
ZKHUHDV LI ĮLV it means that 100% sound that comes is absorbed by the material. Fig. 5 shows the correlation
between the frequencies and absorption.
ďƐŽƌƉƚŝŽŶsƐ&ƌĞƋƵĞŶĐǇ
Ϭ͘ϰ
Ϭ͘ϯ KƌŝŐŝŶĂů
ďƐŽƌƉƚŝŽŶ;ĚďͿ
ɲWĂďƌŝŬĂŶ
ɲϳϬй
Ϭ͘Ϯ
ɲϱϬй
ɲϰϬй
Ϭ͘ϭ
Ϭ
ϭϮϱ ϮϱϬ ϱϬϬ ϭϬϬϬ ϮϬϬϬ
&ƌĞƋƵĞŶĐǇ;,ǌͿ
Figure 5. The correlation between the frequencies and absorption.
Composition of 60% MGMW + 1% PVC glue + 39% (50% starch + 50% urea) at a frequency of 125 Hz has a
low value of coefficient of sound absorption and at high frequencies of 2000 Hz, it can absorb sound appropriately.
Results of acoustic testing is based on the value of the NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient), subsequently, the
composition of 60% MGMW + 1% PVC glue + 39% (50% starch + 50% urea) can absorb the sound well at high
frequencies in compared with others.
030014-5
Hardness Testing
Composition of 60% MGMW + 1% PVC glue + 39% (50% starch + 50% urea) has the highest hardness value,
which was 14.9 BHN. The hardness level is shown in Fig. 6.
ϭϴ
ϭϲ ϳϬй
ϭϰ ϰϬй
ϱϬй
ϭϮ
WĂďƌŝŬĂŶ
KƌŝŐŝŶĂů
ϭϬ
dŝƚŝŬϭ dŝƚŝŬϮ dŝƚŝŬϯ
Figure 6. The results of hardness testing.
Speaker Box Production

Speaker box was made of from the composition of 60% MGMW + 1% PVC glue + 39% (50% starch +
50% urea), because it was evidenced to have the highest value of absorption and hardness (Fig. 7).
Front image Top image

Figure 7. Speaker box with composition 60% MGMW + 1% PVC glue + 39% (50% starch + 50% urea).
Vibration (Accelerometer) Testing

The results of vibration/accelerometer test of speaker box with composition 60% MGMW + 1% PVC glue
+ 39% (50% starch + 50% urea) in compared with common speaker box, shown in Figure 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14
and 15. Speaker box made of MGMW had maximum vibration amplitude value X axis of 0.1073 and a minimum
value of -0.119934, Y axis experience the thrill of maximum and minimum values of 0.102356 -0.112244, whereas
030014-6
in the Z-axis vibration maximum values obtained by 1.051575 - 0.9 = 0.151575 and minimum 0.932007 - 0.9 =
0.032007.
Figure 8. Graph of natural frequency of speaker box MGMW. Figure 9. Graph of natural frequency of commercial speaker
box.
yĐĐĞů;ŐͿ yĐĐĞů;ŐͿ
Ϭ͘Ϯ Ϭ͘ϭ
ϲϴϵ͘ϱϯϮ Ϭ͘ϬϱϱϮϵ ϴϮϵ͘ϯϰϳ
Ϭ͘ϭ Ϭ͘ϭϬϳϯ
ϲϴϵ͘ϱϰϭ ϴ ϴϮϵ͘ϯϱϳ
Ϭ Ϭ
ϲϴϵ͘ϱϱϭ ϴϮϵ͘ϯϲϲ
ͲϬ͘ϭ ϲϱϬ speaker
ϳϬϬ ͲϬ͘ϭϭϵϵ
ϳϱϬ MGMW
box ϴϬϬ ϴϬϬ ϵϬϬ speaker
original
ͲϬ͘ϬϴϴϮ
ϭϬϬϬ box
ϯϰ ϲϴϵ͘ϱϲ ϴϮϵ͘ϯϳϱ
ͲϬ͘Ϯ ͲϬ͘ϭ ϱϳ
Figure 10. Graph of vibration X direction of Figure 11. Graph of vibration X direction of
speaker box MGMW original speaker box
zĐĐĞů;ŐͿ zĐĐĞů;ŐͿ
Ϭ͘Ϯ Ϭ͘ϭ
ϲϴϵ͘ϱϯϮ Ϭ͘Ϭϲϴϭϭ ϴϮϵ͘ϯϰϳ
Ϭ͘ϭϬϮϯϱ
Ϭ͘ϭ ϲϴϵ͘ϱϰϭ Ϭ͘Ϭϱ ϱ ϴϮϵ͘ϯϱϳ
ϲ
Ϭ ϲϴϵ͘ϱϱϭ Ϭ ϴϮϵ͘ϯϲϲ
ϲϱϬ ϳϬϬ ͲϬ͘ϭϭϮϮϰ
ϳϱϬ ϴϬϬ ϴϬϬ ϵϬϬ Ͳ ϭϬϬϬ
ͲϬ͘ϭ ϲϴϵ͘ϱϲ ͲϬ͘Ϭϱ ϴϮϵ͘ϯϳϱ
ϰ Ϭ͘Ϭϱϯϲϱ
ϲϴϵ͘ϱϲϵ ϴϮϵ͘ϯϴϱ
ͲϬ͘Ϯ ͲϬ͘ϭ
Figure 12. Graph of vibration Y direction of Figure 13. Graph of vibration Y direction of
030014-7
speaker box of MGMW. commercial speaker box.
ĐĐĞů;ŐͿ ĐĐĞů;ŐͿ
ϭ͘ϭ ϲϴϵ͘ϱϯϮ ϭ͘ϬϮ ϴϮϵ͘ϯϰϳ
ϭ͘ϬϬϳϲ
ϭ͘Ϭϱϭϱ
ϭ͘Ϭϱ ϭ Ϯϵ
ϳϱ ϲϴϵ͘ϱϰϭ ϴϮϵ͘ϯϱϳ
ϭ Ϭ͘ϵϴ
ϲϴϵ͘ϱϱϭ ϴϮϵ͘ϯϲϲ
Ϭ͘ϵϱ Ϭ͘ϵϯϮϬ Ϭ͘ϵϲ Ϭ͘ϵϱϴϱ
Ϭϳ ϲϴϵ͘ϱϲ ϱϳ ϴϮϵ͘ϯϳϱ
Ϭ͘ϵ Ϭ͘ϵϰ
ϲϱϬ ϳϬϬ ϳϱϬ ϴϬϬ ϲϴϵ͘ϱϲϵ ϴϬϬ ϵϬϬ ϭϬϬϬ ϴϮϵ͘ϯϴϱ
Figure 14. Graph of vibration Z direction of Figure 15. Graph of vibration Z direction of
speaker box MGMW. original speaker box.
While the commercial speaker box experience maximum vibration amplitude value X axis of 0.055298 and a
minimum value of 0.068115, Y axis experience the thrill of maximum and minimum values of 0.068115 -0.05365,
whereas in the Z-axis vibration maximum values obtained by 1.007629 ± 0.9 = 0.107629 and minimum 0.958557 ±
0.9 = 0.0585. For frequencies above, the natural direction of the Z axis in the speaker box mushroom growing media
waste is lower than in the speaker box manufacturer, it means that the speaker box mushroom growing media waste
is denser than the original speaker box to the Z direction. From the results of analysis, the comparison of vibration
test of speaker box MGMW and commercial speaker box, it indicates that speaker box MGMW has yield related to
damping vibrations with maximum vibration value X, Y, Z axis at -0.7927, -0.797644,0.151575 while the original
speaker box maximum vibration values in X, Y, Z of -0.844702, -0.831885, 0.107629.
CONCLUSIONS
From this research, several conclusions can be drawn as follows:
1. Composition of 60% MGMW + 1% PVC glue + 39% (50% starch + 50% urea) at a frequency of 125 Hz has
low coefficient of sound absorption and at high frequencies of 2000 Hz, it can absorb sound well.
2. Composition of 60% MGMW + 1% PVC glue + 39% (50% starch + 50% urea) has the highest hardness of
14.9 BHN.
3. Vibration obtained the amplitude values to the Z-axis, minimum of 0.032007 and maximum of 0.151575. From
the acoustic test, the results indicated good sound absorption at frequency of 500 Hz and it has better damping
absorption.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors would like to thank to the Ministry of Research and Technology National Education Indonesia for
the Grant (Hibah Kompetensi/HIKOM) 2015-016, and Universitas Muhammadiyah Sidoarjo (UMSIDA) for funding
and technical research supports.
REFERENCES
1. T. M. Maloney., 1993, ³0RGHUQ3DUWLFOH%RDUGDQG'U\3URFHVV)LEHU%RDUG0DQXIDFWXULQJ´0LOOHU)UHHPDQ
Inc. San Fransisco.
2. S. Maulana. Friday, 12 June 2009. http://www.peavey.com/.
3. W. Rusmantoro, 2013, Nasib Hutan Kita yang Semakin Suram, vol 3, 2014. Pelangi Indonesia.
030014-8
4. B. McCarthy. 2009. Sound Systems: Design And Optimization. US: Elsevier Science & Technology Books. ±
GRB.
5. P. H. Tjahjanti, Sutarman, E. Widodo , A. T. Kusuma. 2016. The Use of Mushroom Growing Media Waste for
Making Composite Particle Board, Proceeding of the 3rd International Conference on Functional Materials
Science 2016 (ICFMS 2016) Inna Grand Bali Beach Sanur Bali , Indonesia, October 19-20, 2016.
030014-9
Effect of waste banner as fiber on mechanical properties of concrete
Anis Rahmawati and Ida Nugroho Saputro

Effect of Waste Banner as Fiber on Mechanical Properties of
Concrete
Anis Rahmawati1,a) and Ida Nugroho Saputro2,b)
1,2
Structural Engineering Program, Faculty of Teacher Training and Education, Universitas Sebelas Maret,
Indonesia
a)
Corresponding authors: anisrahmawati79@gmail.com,
b)
nugroho.saputro@yahoo.com
Abstract. Banner is broadly used as advertisement media and event backdrop that is usually only used at one moment,
resulting to a lot of waste banners. Banner made from nylon fiber is covered by polyvinyl. Nylon is well known as a
material with high tensile strength. This research was done as a preliminary investigation on the opportunity of using the
waste banner as fiber material of concrete by evaluating its mechanical properties, namely compressive and flexural
strength. Research conducted by making cylinder shape specimens of 15 mm in diameter and 300 mm in height for the
compressive strength test. While the specimen shape for flexural strength test was a rectangular prism with dimension of
150 mm in height, 150 mm in width, and 600 mm in length. Fiber generated from waste banner was added in concrete
mixtures with percentage of 0.00%, 0.20%, 0.40%, 0.60%, 0.80%, and 1.00% by weight of concrete. The concrete
strength was tested at 28 days after standard moisture and temperature curing. Experimental results indicated that the
addition of 0.20% of waste banner obtained the highest compressive strength that was 21.967 Mpa, while 0.40% of waste
banner obtained the highest flexural strength of 4.663 Mpa.
INTRODUCTION
Trash or waste material is a problem in human life that affects a pressing in environmental, social, and economic
issues. Waste may affect human health and environment through emissions to air, soil, surface water and
groundwater. Both the government and society have made various efforts but they have not shown significant
results. In many areas, the accumulation of trash or waste becomes a prolonged problem for the environmental
sustainability. Therefore, people continually pursue the waste utilization or management to change the waste from
environmental pollutants that affect the quality of human health into other forms. In addition, there is incessant
campaign of the 3R movement (reuse, reduce, recycle). Through this movement, any attempt should be made to alter
waste into useful goods through reuse waste that can be used for the same function or other functions, reduce
everything that produces waste, and recycle waste into products or new products that are beneficial.
An example of the waste material that is difficult to be recycled is banner. Banner is usually used as advertising
media or event backdrop. Banner is made from material similar to plastic. Making the backdrop and billboard with
banner as the material is relatively easy, quick, and inexpensive. Therefore, this material is the main option in the
manufacture of recent advertising media or event backdrop. However, when the products is not displayed any
longer due to their irrelevanci, they turn into trash or waste material, whichcontributes to the environmental
contamination level.
Recent waste banner utilization is presumed to be inefficient because the waste banner is merely used as a
cushion. Banner is made from a mixture of nylon and polyvinyl, which is classified as inorganic waste. According to
Pine et al. [1], polyvinyl is a polymer formed by the interlock action with the characteristics of strong and hard,
while nylon is an artificial polyamide which has high tensile strength when used as fiber. To optimize the utilization
of waste banner, it is necessary to make an investigation in order to support the functional value of waste banner.
In the building construction industry, the green building concept has been promoted throughly. Green building,
according to [2], is a building the start of planning, construction, operation until the operational maintenance, are
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030015-1–030015-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985485
030015-1
carried out based on the principles of to protect, conserve, reduce the use of natural resources, maintain the air
quality in the room, and pay attention to the health of its inhabitants who adhere to the rules of sustainability. The
main aspect of green building regarding with the material selection is that the material should be feasible and tested,
but should contain the elements of recycled material, waste production reduction, and reused materials.
Concrete is currently the main material used in building construction. It is popular as a building material because
of its high compressive strength. Structurally, high compressive strength is useful to withstand the compressive
force. Nevertheless, it has weakness including low tensile strength, brittle, and often cracks in the hardened concrete
[3]. A lengthwise fracture and fine cracks caused by tensile force are frequenlty found on the concrete beam. The
length of the fines cracks will be elongated that will reduce the strength of concrete. Hence, Additional
reinforcement is required to withstand the tensile force.
To improve the properties of concrete which are susceptible to tensile, cracks and brittle nature, the requirement
of additional reinforcement is necessary in addition to specific materials in the concrete mix. They can be in the
form of powders, fibers, or liquid that is added into the concrete mix during the mixing process. One of the materials
that is commonly added is fiber. The mix of concrete and fiber is called fiber-reinforced concrete or fiber concrete.
The main purpose of fiber addition is to increase the tensile strength, ductility, and crack resistance, in order to gain
the better characteristics of concrete [4-6]. The most common fibers in fiber-reinforced concrete are glass fibers,
steel fibers, synthetic fibers such as nylon and polypropylene (PP), natural fibers and fibers from pre- and post-
consumer wastes [7].
This study was conducted as a preliminare investigation on the possibilities of waste banner as fiber material that
could improve concrete characteristics, as well as an effort to utilize waste banner. Concrete characteristics were
assessed from the compressive strength and flexural strength.
Materials
Concrete fibers constituent material is composed of fine aggregate, e.g., natural sand and coarse aggregate such
as crushed stone, portland cement, and fibrous materials. In this study, Portland Cement Composite manufactured by
Holcim was used as cementitious materials, which confirmed to Indonesian specification of SNI 7064-2004 [8].
Coarse aggregate was obtained from Merapi 0RXQWDLQ¶V quarry which was crushed with a maximum size of 20 mm
and granulometric curves of coarse aggregate as shown in Figure 1. Physical properties of coarse aggregate are
presented in Table 1. In addition, fine aggeregate was prepeared by sieving it in sieves size with selected fine
gradation as shown in Fig. 1. Physical properties of fine aggregate are listed in Table 2. Furthermore, the fibrous
material of waste banner with a rectangular shape of 25 mm - 100 mm in length and 5 mm in width, was prepared as
demonstrated in Fig. 2.
TABLE 1. The Physical Properties of Coarse Aggregate

Characteristic Point
Specific gravity 2.41 kg/m3
Abrasion 4.69 %
Fineness modulus 3.28
Percentage loss materials 46.47 %
TABLE 2. The Physical Properties of Natural Fine Aggregates

Property Point
Water content 0.0033%
Bulk Specific Gravity (SSD) 2.56 kg/m3
Absorption 1.02 %
Fineness modulus 3.25
030015-2
FIGURE 1. The gradation of aggregates.
.
FIGURE 2. Waste banner.
The mixing proportion of concrete to determine the amount of fine aggregates, coarse aggregates, cement, and
water was based on the Indonesian Standard of Methods for the design of normal concrete [9]. Mix ratio was
designed with the value of compressive strength (fc') of 20 Mpa. The proportion of each concrete material was
determined by the characteristics of each material that had been tested previously (Table 1, Table 2, and Figure 1).
The amount of waste banner in each mixture design was determined in the percentage of 0.20%, 0.40%, 0.60%,
0.80%, and 1.00% by weight of concrete. The sample was a cylindrical specimen with 150 mm in diameter and 300
mm in height for compressive strength testing. Meanwhile, flexural strength testing used beam-shaped sample with
square cross-section of 150mm x 150mm in dimension and 600 mm in length.
Experiment methods
In the concrete strength experiment, the process of specimen molding and curing were conducted based on the
specification of SNI 2493:2011 [10] on the procedure for creation and maintenance of concrete test specimens in the
laboratory. Furthermore, the test method and evaluation of compressive strength were conducted based on the
specification of SNI 1974-2011 [11] on the test method for compressive strength of concrete with cylindrical
specimen cast. As for the flexural strength test method and evaluation, the specification of SNI 03-4154-1996 [12]
on the test method for flexural strength of concrete using a simple beam with center-point loading was employed.
All specimens were measured at 28 day after the production.
030015-3
Research results
Compressive Strength Testing
Figure 3 is a bar chart as the results of compressive strength test.
FIGURE 3. Compressive Strength of Banner Fiber Concrete.
Based on the bar chart above, it can be seen that the optimal added value of waste cutting banner was obtained
by 0.20% waste banner with a maximum value of compressive strength of 21.967 N/mm2. Thus, it can be concluded
that the concrete with the addition of waste banner pieces of 0.20% has the highsest compressive strength in
compared with the percentage of 0.40%, 0.60%, 0.80% and 1.00%.
Flexural Strength
Figure 4 is a bar chart as the results of flexural strength test. Based on the figure, it can be seen that the optimal
added value of waste banner was 0.40% with a maximum value of flexural strength of 4.663 N/mm2. The higher the
percentage of waste banner, the lower the flexural strength. The optimal flexural strength was obtained by the
percentage of 0.40%, thus it can be concluded that the concrete with the addition of waste banner pieces that
obtained the highest flexural strength was the percentage of 0.40% in compared with the other percentage variations,
i.e., the percentage of 0.20%, 0.60%, 0.80% and 1.00%.
030015-4
FIGURE 4. Flexural Strength of Banner Fiber Concrete.
Discussion
The waste cutting banner was potential as fiber component of concrete fiber. Nylon fiber contained in the banner
has high-tensile strength, which contributes to the flexural strength of concrete with a maximum addition of 0.40%
of waste banner by weight of concrete. Meanwhile, the maximum addition of waste banner to produce the optimal
compressive strength was 0.20%.
The possible reasons that affected the reduction of compressive strength of banner fiber concrete with higher
percentage of additional waste banner than 20% and the reduction of flexural strength at additional waste banner of
0.40% are explained as follows. Banner smooth and slippery surface led to tKH ODFN RI DGKHVLYHQHVV RI EDQQHU¶V
surfaces with cement paste. The banner surface is a barrier which lessens the bonding between the aggregates. The
rectangular-shaped banner as the concrete specimen led to the air cavities in the concrete. The inter-particle friction
between banner fibers as well as between fibers and aggregates also affected the orientation and distribution of the
fibers and therefore the strength properties of the concrete [7]. The different results were obtained from research
which used elongated shape with small diameter fibers in fiber-reinforced concrete [13]. The shape of the fibers and
the high-value ratio would not affect the bond between aggregates in the concrete, hencehigh compressive strength
and flexural strength can be obtained.
The decreasing trend of flexural strength in linear to the increasing amount of waste banner could be due to the
uneven fiber distribution in the concrete mixture [14]. The higher the percentage of waste banner, the lower the
concrete workability. It is difficult for the fibrous material to be distributed evenly in the compacted concrete. It
confirms Dachlan [15], who mentioned that more and more fibers additions will cause balling and declined concrete
workability. This condition makes concrete manufacture is difficult to do.
Essentially, the basic ingredients of banner are polyvinyl chloride and nylon. Polyvinyl chloride in the banner
made banner has a chloride content with a water-soluble Ph of 4.6 to 6.0 which are highly acidic. The addition of
banner in concrete mix leads to aggressiveness acid in concrete. Aggressiveness acid occurs due to excessively high
acid content in the concrete. Basuki [16] stated that cement is a high alumina that will produce high alumina cement
concrete, which is highly alkaline with a pH of 11.8 - 18. Thus, when aggressive acids occurs, the performance of
cement as an adhesive in the concrete mixture will decrease. The decline in the performance of cement results to the
GHFOLQHRIFRQFUHWH¶performance and strength. The higher amount of fiber in concrete, the higher the acid content in
the concrete. Consequently, it will reduce the compressive strength and flexural strength of the concrete.
030015-5
CONCLUSIONS AND SUGGESTIONS
Conclusions
Based on the analysis and discussion above, several conclusions can be drawn as follows:
1. The percentage of waste banner that obtained the optimal added value related with the compressive strength of
concrete was 0.20%, which generated compressive strength of 21.967 N/mm2. Essentially, the higher the
percentage of waste banner, the lower the compressive strength of concrete.
2. The percentage of waste banner that yielded the optimal added value related with flexural strength was 0.40%,
whichproduced flexural strength of 4.663 N/mm2. In can be concluded, the higher the percentage of waste
banner, the lower the flexural strength of concrete.
Suggestions
Based on the conclusions and implications of the research results, it can be put forward the following
suggestions:
1. Further research on the value of the ratio or the size of the banner pieces to produce concrete with better
compressive strength and flexural strength is required.
2. Further research to find the shape of banner in fiber-reinforced concrete which produces better compressive
strength and flexural strength is required.
3. Reserach on the methods of mixing waste banner on the concrete particularly to prevent balling and to generate
homogeneous concrete mixture is required.
4. Research on the utilization of waste banner when only its nylon fibers are used related with the concrete
compressive strength and flexural strength, is required.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors would like to appreciate the financial support by DIPA PNBP from Universitas Sebelas Maret
[research grant contract number: 632/UN27.21/LT/2016].
REFERENCES
1. S. H. Pine, Hendrickson, J.B., Cram, D.J., & Hammond, G.S. Kimia Organik 2, (ITB Bandung, Bandung,
1988).
2. H. Zulmar, Konsep Pembangunan Green Building. Retrieved at 20 September 2016 from
http://helmizulmar.blogspot.co.id/2012/06/definisi-greenbuilding-adalah-bangunan.html
3. H. A. Nilson, Darwin, D., Dolan, W.C., Design of Concrete Structures, 14th ed. (Mc-Graw-hill, USA, 2012)
4. S. Ahmed, A. I. Bukhari, J. I. Sddiqui, S. A. Qureshi, A Study on Properties of Polypropylene Fiber Reinforced
Concrete (CI-premier Pte. Ltd., Singapore, p. 11., 2006).
5. V. Dey, A. Bonakdar, B. 0REDVKHU ³/RZ-velocity flexural impact response of fiber-reinforced aerated
FRQFUHWH´LQCement and Concrete Composites, 49, pp. 100±110, 2014.
6. D. Y. Yoo,Y. S. Yoon, N. Banthia. ³)OH[XUDO UHVSRQVH RI VWHHO-fiber-reinforced concrete beams: Effects of
strength, fiber content, and strain-UDWH´LQCement and Concrete Composites, 64, pp. 84±92. 2015.
7. A. S. M. A. Awal, & H. Mohammadhosseini, Green concrete production incorporating waste carpet fiber and
palm oil fuel ash (URL: http://doi.org/10.1016/j.jclepro.2016.06.162, 2016).
8. _____, SNI 7064:2014³3RUWODQG&HPHQW&RPSRVLWH´,QGRQHVLDQ1DWLRQDO6WDQGDUGL]DWLRQ$JHQF\-DNDUWD
2014).
9. _____, SNI 03-3449-2002, Manual for mix design of lightweight concrete with lightweight aggregate
(Indonesian National Standardization Agency, Jakarta, 2002).
10. _____, SNI 2493:2011, The procedure for creation and maintenance of concrete test specimens in laboratory
(Indonesian National Standardization Agency, Jakarta, 2011).
11. _____, SNI 1974-2011, Test method for compressive strength of concrete with cylindrical specimen casted
(Indonesian National Standardization Agency. Jakarta, 2011).
030015-6
12. _____, SNI 03-4154-1996, Test method for flexural strength of concrete using simple beam with center-point
loading (Indonesian National Standardization Agency, Jakarta, 1996).
13. A. 6DLIXGLQ³3HQJDUXK'RVLV$VSHN5DVLRGDQ'LVWULEXVL6HUDWWHUKDGDS.XDW/HQWXUGDQ.XDW7DULN%HODK
Beton Berserat Baja,´*UDGXDWHGWKHVLV8QLYHUVLWDV6HEHODV0DUHW
14. M. Mastali, Dalvand, A. and 6DWWDULIDUG$5³7KHLPSDFWUHVLVWDQFHDQGPHFKDQLFDOSURSHUWLHVRIUHLQIRUFHG
self-FRPSDFWLQJ FRQFUHWH ZLWK UHF\FOHG JODVV ILEUH UHLQIRUFHG SRO\PHUV´ LQ Journal of Cleaner Production,
124, pp. 312-324, 2016.
15. T. Dachlan, Perkerasan Jalan Beton Semen dengan Serat Polimer Sintetis, (Pusat Litbang Jalan dan Jembatan,
Bandung, 2011).
16. A. Basuki, Serangan Kimia pada Beton, Retrieved at 11th Mei 2016 from
http://sipil.ft.uns.ac.id/index.php?option=com_content&task=view&id=209&Itemid=1, (2012), In Indonesian.
030015-7
Effect of bond coat and preheat on the microstructure, hardness, and porosity of flame
sprayed tungsten carbide coatings
Winarto Winarto, Nofrijon Sofyan, and Didi Rooscote

Effect of Bond Coat and Preheat on the Microstructure,
Hardness, and Porosity of Flame Sprayed Tungsten Carbide
Coatings
Winarto Winarto1, a), Nofrijon Sofyan1 and Didi Rooscote
1
Department of Metallurgical and Materials Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Depok - 16424, Indonesia.
a)
Corresponding author: winarto@metal.ui.ac.id
Abstract. Thermally sprayed coatings are used to improve the surface properties of tool steel materials. Bond coatings
are commonly used as intermediate layers deposited on steel substrates (i.e. H13 tool steel) before the top coat is applied
in order to enhance a number of critical performance criteria including adhesion of a barrier coating, limiting atomic
migration of the base metal, and corrosion resistance. This paper presents the experimental results regarding the effect of
nickel bond coat and preheats temperatures (i.e. 200ºC, 300ºC and 400ºC) on microstructure, hardness, and porosity of
tungsten carbide coatings sprayed by flame thermal coating. Micro-hardness, porosity and microstructure of tungsten
carbide coatings are evaluated by using micro-hardness testing, optical microscopy, scanning electron microscopy, and
X-ray diffraction. The results show that nickel bond coatings reduce the susceptibility of micro crack formation at the
bonding area interfaces. The percentage of porosity level on the tungsten carbide coatings with nickel bond coat
decreases from 5.36 % to 2.78% with the increase of preheat temperature of the steel substrate of H13 from 200ºC to
400ºC. The optimum hardness of tungsten carbide coatings is 1717 HVN in average resulted from the preheat
temperature of 300ºC.
INTRODUCTION
Tungsten carbides coatings are generally used to improve the wear resistance of many types of engineering
components such as tool steel material of H13. It is very often practice to deposit WC coatings by thermal spray
techniques such as flame spray (FS), air plasma spray (APS), and high velocity oxygen fuel (HVOF) [1,2].
Today, metal flame spray is commonly used in surface coating technology due to its good adhesive properties,
high wear resistance and economical in terms of cost in the process [3]. In the powder flame process, powdered
feedstock is aspirated into the oxy fuel flame, melted, and carried by the flame and air jets to the workpiece. Particle
speed is relatively low (<100 m/s), and bond strength of the deposits is generally lower than the higher velocity
processes. Porosity can be high and cohesive strength is also generally low. Spray rates are usually in the range of
0.5 to 9 kg/h (1 to 20 lb/h) except for the low melting point materials, which spray at significantly higher rates.
Substrate surface temperatures can run quite high (about 200 to 300°C) because of flame impingement [4].
Bond coatings are commonly used as intermediate layers deposited on steel substrates (i.e. H13 tool steel) before
the top coat is applied in order to enhance a number of critical performance criteria including adhesion of a barrier
coating, limiting atomic migration of the base metal, and corrosion resistance. The adhesion of sprayed WC coating
depends on spraying system, spraying parameters, powder morphology, residual stresses in coating, roughness of
substrate and type of bond coat before WC deposition. If adhesion of WC coating on a part is not sufficient during
the exploitation time, coating may pull out results in failure [5].
During thermal spraying, WC particles are considerably deformed upon hitting the substrate. Li et al. [6] believe
that the adhesion of a thermally sprayed coating deposited by completely molten droplets is mainly achieved by the
mechanical interlocking effect except the deposition of refractory materials. This is because the deposition of
refractory materials may cause the local melting of steel substrate [7], which consequently leads to the metallurgical
bonding [8].
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030016-1–030016-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985486
030016-1
Berndt [11] reported that some chemical reactions may occur between the bond coat and steel substrate. In
addition, the bond coat may increase the adhesive strength of the resultant coating by reducing stresses in the
coating, which are caused by thermal expansion differences of the coating relative to the substrate material [9].
Therefore, the adhesion of thermal sprayed WC coating is usually improved with the improvement in the degree of
particle melting because good melting leads to a better flattening and/or using a suitable bond coat layer, which
provide a suitable base for overlay coating [10].
The objective of this paper is to investigate the effects of nickel based bond coat and preheating process, i.e.
200ºC, 300ºC and 400ºC, on the microstructure, hardness, and porosity of flame sprayed tungsten carbide coatings.
The results are presented and discussed.
A commercial nickel bond coat (Nitec 10224) and tungsten carbide (WC) powder (TungTec 10112) were used
for the coating with the chemical composition shown in Table 1 and Table 2, respectively. Tool steel H13 with the
chemical composition given in Table 3 and an initial hardness of 46 HRC and dimensions of 30 mm x 30 mm x10
mm were used as steel substrates. Before the coating process, the substrate surfaces were cleaning to remove the
oxides and other impurities. The substrate surfaces were preheated at temperature variations of 200ºC, 300ºC and
400ºC followed by the flame spray of bond coating in two layers and then finally top coated by tungsten carbide in
two layers on the surfaces of the bond coat to obtain a metallurgical bonding between the base material, bond coat
and the top coat. The steel substrates material and the equipment of flame spray for metal coating can be seen in
Figure 1.
TABLE 1. Chemical composition of bond coat powder - Nitec 10224 (in wt. %)
Element wt. %
C 0.020
B 1.340
Si 2.300
Fe 0.050
Cr -
Ni Balance
TABLE 2. Chemical composition of tungsten carbide powder- Tungtec 10112 (in wt. %)
MATRIX = 40.0 CARBIDE = 60.0

Element wt. % Element wt. %
C 0.400 C 3.840
B 3.010 Fe -
Si 4.330 W Balance
Fe 2.810 Co -
Cr 7.800 Cr -
Ni Balance
TABLE 3. Chemical composition of H13 steel substrates (in wt. %)
C Mn Si Cr Mo V Fe
0.38 0.35 0.95 5.32 1.43 0.93 Balance
The morphology of the powder particles of both Nitec and TungTec was investigated using a field emission
scanning electron microscope (FE-SEM). X-ray diffractometer (XRD) was used to reveal the effect of the variation
preheat temperature on the coating product through the presence of any phase in the matrix of coating. Other tests
include micro structure of the coating, transverse surface micro hardness testing of the coating and porosity testing
by using image analysis method.
030016-2
(a) (b)
FIGURE 1. Sample of H13 steel substrate (a) and a machine of flame spray for metal coating (b)
RESULT
Powder Morphology
Figure 2 shows a secondary electron image of FE-SEM on Nitec powder as a bond coat and Tungtec powder as
top coat materials. As can be seen in the figure, the morphology of the powder particles of Nitec (bond coat) shows a
sphere shape uniformly. However, the powder of Tungtec (top coat of WC carbides) shows a cuboidal shape, in
which with its high hardness presents a significant improve in the mechanical properties. The measurement
distribution of particle size on WC powders (TungTec 10112) shows that WC carbide particles have a size ranging
from 64 to140 μm and Nitec (bond coat) particles have a size ranging from 10 to 103 μm.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 2. Secondary electron images of powder morphology of Nitec bond coat (a) and Tungtec top coat (b)
Coating Morphology and Phase Identification

Figure 3 shows a transversal surface microstructure images of the specimen of Ni bond coat + WC top coat with
preheating temperature variations. To reveal the microstructure, the specimen was etched with nital 3% and the
microstructure was taken under an optical microscope. The bar scale is given in each of the image. The images show
that the metal flame spray coating consists of WC particles containing porosity (black spot). Coating thickness of the
VSHFLPHQ DW SUHKHDWLQJ & & DQG& DUH ȝP ȝP DQG P UHVSHFWLYHO\ 7KH LQFUHDVLQJ
preheating temperature from 200ºC, 300ºC, and 400ºC causes the decreasing the amount of porosity in the coating
from 5.36%, 4.42% and 2.78% respectively. This result is an agreement with the results obtained by Zoran [11].
030016-3
(a) (b) (c)
FIGURE 3. Macrostructure of Ni bond coat + WC Coating with preheating of (a) 200 OC, (b) 300OC and (c) 400OC
WC Top
Coat
Ni Bond Coat
Substrate of
AISI H13
FIGURE 4. The spot location of Energy Dispersive Spectrometry (EDS) test on Ni bond coat + WC top coat at preheat of 300qC
Figure 4 shows secondary electron image of the Ni+WC specimen preheated at 300°C. The figure shows a layer
consists of dispersed WC particles and porosity. In order to identify the elements present in the coating, EDS
examination was carried out and the results according to the number given in Fig. 4 can be seen in Table 4.
Table 4 shows the results of testing specimens with EDS on NI+WC coating with preheating 300ºC. The results
show that the white area is the WC particles as indicated by the dominant content of W and C shown in point
number of 5, 6 and 7. The gray area is a nickel matrix shown in spectrum 2, 3 and 4 wherein the Ni content of the
most dominant and might be the presence of compound of Nickel Boron (Ni XB). The content of C is high due to the
presence of WC and CrxCy at participating matrix. Spectra 1 are the interfacial area dominated by high Fe content
followed by some alloying elements on a steel substrate such as Cr, Mo and V.
TABLE 4. Weight percentage of elements on Ni+WC coating preheated of 300qC (in wt. %)
Elements
Spect # Indicated Phase
C W Ni Cr Si B Mo Mn Fe
1 30.07 0.03 0.34 4.12 1.73 - 0.77 0.28 61.94 H13 Steel
2 29.58 0.23 54.64 1.19 4.59 9.77 - - - Ni Bond Coat
3 27.60 0.41 41.50 0.82 2.42 26.83 - - 0.43 NixBy, CrxCy, WC
4 31.23 3.71 52.14 1.63 2.44 7.86 - - 0.99 Ni, WC, CrxCy
5 70.12 19.54 4.12 0.37 - 5.56 - - 0.29 WC
6 57.21 17.72 17.87 0.91 - 5.89 - - 0.41 WC
7 55.90 20.99 5.63 0.32 - 9.14 - - 0.27 WC
To reveal the compound presence in the coating, the XRD test was conducted to identify the compound on the
surface coating and the result is shown in Fig. 5. The results on Fig. 5 show that the formation of compounds
identified as NiCrSi and Cr2Ni3. These compounds present in the coating surface as the results of flame spray at
which the results of EDS analysis identified as CrxNiy, while Ni3B and NiCrB compounds were identified by the
XRD test results
030016-4
භ
Ɣ Ni17W3 6L2 ¸1L
ż Cr3C2 İ1L3B ɽ B
ӑ
ǻ Cr7C3 ı:2C
ප ѕ Ƒ Cr2Ni3 ‫ ڜ‬W
ѕ
ё
ɽ
‫נ‬
ȴ
ı
ɸ
FIGURE 5. X-ray Diffraction (XRD) test of Ni+WC coating at preheating of 300qC
DISCUSSION
Hardness Distribution
The micro-hardness affected by the preheat temperature is shown in Fig. 6. Increasing the preheat temperature of
Ni+WC from 200qC to 300qC results in increasing of top coat hardness from 1541 HVN to 1717 HVN. However,
further increasing in preheat temperature to 400qC reduces the hardness of top coat to around 1625 HVN. The
optimal hardness value is due to the distribution of hard particles (carbides) on the top coat. Increasing micro
hardness is a result of the increasing number of WC presence in the coating. This result is in agreement with the
research result conducted by Wang and Franch [11,12], who showed that the presence of WC particles can increase
the hardness and wear resistance.
Top Coat
Bond Coat Substrate
FIGURE 6. Micro-hardness test on the cross section of Ni+WC coating with different preheat temperature.
Formation of Micro Cracks at the Interfaces

In order to identify the presence of micro crack at the interface between the coating and the steel substrate, the
flame sprayed WC coating with Ni bond coat and without Ni bond coat with the same preheating (300qC) was
investigated and compared. The result shows that nickel bond coatings reduce the susceptibility to the formation
of micro cracks at the bonding area interfaces as can be seen Fig. 7. This is due to the fact that the bond coat may
increase the adhesive strength of the resultant coating by reducing stresses in the coating, which are caused by
thermal expansion differences of the coating relative to the substrate material [8].
030016-5
0,&52&5$&.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 7. Secondary electron images of flame sprayed WC coating (a) without Ni bond coat and (b) with Ni bond coat
CONCLUSION
x Bond coating as the intermediate layers of WC coating deposited on steel substrates with oxy-acetylene
flame spray can improve the hardness properties of H13 steel surface with an optimized value of up to 1717
HVN at preheat temperature of 300ºC.
x The percentage level of porosity on the tungsten carbide coatings with nickel bond coat decrease from 5.36
% to 2.78% by increasing the preheat temperature of the steel substrate of H13 from 200ºC to 400ºC.
x Nickel bond coatings can reduce the susceptibility to the formation of micro cracks at the bonding area
interfaces.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors would like to acknowledge the Directorate of Research and Public Services, Universitas Indonesia
for the financial support for this study through the PITTA Research Grant in 2016.
REFERENCES
1. H. Chen, I.M. Hutchings, Surf. Coat. Technol. 58 (1998) 106±109.
2. H. Liao, B. Normand, C. Coddet, Surf. Coat. Technol. 62 (2000) pp.235±242.
3. American SRFLHW\RI0DWHULDOV³Introduction to Thermal Spray Processing´, Handbook of Thermal Spray
Technology, ASM International, Cleveland, Ohio, (2004)
4. M.H. Staia, E. Ramos, A. Carrasquero, A. Roman, J. Lesage, D. Chicot, G. Mesmacque, Thin Solid Films
377±378 (2000) pp.657±664.
5. C.J. Li, Y.Y.Wang, T.Wu, G.C. Ji, A. Ohmori, Surf. Coat. Technol. 145 (2001) pp.113±120.
6. C.J. Li, A. Ohmori, K. Tani, Surf. Modif. Technol. (1997) pp.934±945.
7. J.M. Houben, G.G. Liempd, 10th International Thermal Spray Conference, German Welding Society,
(1983), pp. 66±71.
8. C.J. Li, J.L. Li, in: C.C. Berndt (Ed.), ³Thermal Spray: Surface Engineering via Applied Research´, ASM
International, Materials Park, OH, (2000), pp. 777±782.
9. X.L. Shi, G.Q. Shao, X.L. Duane, R.Z. Yuan, H.H. Lin, Mater. Sci. Eng. A 392 (2005), pp.335±339.
10. Z. Bergant, U. Trdan, J. Grum., Corrosion Science, 88. (2014) pp. 372-386
11. H. Wang, W. Xia, Y. Jin. Wear: 195. (1996) pp.47±52
12. R.Franch, C.Lorenzana, JM.Miguel, JM.Guilemany. 6ROGDGXUD\WHFQRORJÕDVGHXQLR 67 (2001) pp. 9±14
030016-6
The influence of plain bar on bond strength of geopolymer concrete
Evrianti Syntia Dewi and Januarti Jaya Ekaputri

The Influence of Plain Bar on Bond Strength of
Geopolymer Concrete
Evrianti Syntia Dewi1, a) and Januarti Jaya Ekaputri1, b)
1
Department of Civil Engineering, Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember (ITS),
Sukolilo, Surabaya, 60111, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: syntiaevrianti@gmail.com
b)
januarti_je@yahoo.com
Abstract. This paper presents some results of experimental study of bond strength of plain bar embedded in
geopolymer concrete. Fly ash class F was used as a raw material activated with alkali solutions. The combination of
8 Molar of sodium hydroxide (NaOH) and sodium silicate (Na2SiO3) as alkali activators was examined in the
mixture with ratio of 2.5 by weight. Nine cubical specimens with a size of 150 x 150 x 150 mm were prepared to
measure bond strength and slip between reinforcement and concrete. The influential factors studied for the
experimental investigation were the diameter of reinforcement bar, bond area, and concrete cover to diameter (c/d)
of reinforcement. The result showed that the average bond strength decreased as the diameter of plain bar and
bonded length were increased from 16 mm to 19 mm. However, the 12 mm showed the different result allegedly
caused by the effect of bond area and the passive confined provided by the concrete. Based on several equations used
to compare the bond strength, it is clear that deformed bar of 12 mm in diameter is potential to increase the bond
strength.
INTRODUCTION
Concrete is the most common and essential material in the construction of infrastructure application. The
worldwide consumption of concrete is enhanced due to the increase of infrastructure in countries such as India
and China [1]. Ordinary Portland cement is conventionally used as the main binder to product concrete. The
problem with Ordinary Portland cement is that it requires large amount of natural resource and energy causing
air pollution and carbon emission. Approximately 5% to 8% of all human-generated atmospheric carbon dioxide
is the result of the concrete industry. Among the greenhouse gases, carbon dioxide contributes about 65% of
global warming [2]. Thus, it is important to seek for environmentally friendly binding agents for concrete.
Currently, geopolymer concrete has been introduced as a solution for this problem.
Geopolymer is an aluminosilicate inorganic polymer synthesized from alkaline activator of various
aluminosilicate materials of geological origin or by product materials like fly ash, metakaolin and blast-furnace
slag. Several researches showed that geopolymer can act as a binding agent in concrete [3, 4]. Fly ash is one of
the construction materials which is used to produce geopolymer concrete [5]. In previous study, low calcium fly
ash (class F) was investigated as a material for geopolymer because of its abundant availability, pertinent silica
and alumina composition, and less water demand.
In application, the bond strength is critical contribution factor to strengthen the section of concrete which has
low tensile strength. Bond behavior is described as the transfer of force from the reinforcement to the
surrounding concrete by adhesion between the bar and concrete, frictional force at the interface and the ribs of
deformed bar against the concrete [6]. Bond ensured that there is no slip of the reinforcement relative to the
concrete which stress is transferred across the steel concrete [7]. Generally, bond strength is governed by
different factors such as compressive and tensile strength of concrete, the concrete cover to bar, confinement
due to transverse reinforcement, surface condition of the bar and bar geometry [8].
Research using the pull-out test has shown that geopolymer mortars generally perform well [9, 10, 11].
Another experimental study reported the development length of reinforcement embedded in fly ash-based on
geopolymer concrete for various compressive strengths of concrete and deformed reinforcement diameters [12].
Other recent studies [13, 14] reported bond behavior of reinforcing fly ash-based geopolymer concrete beams
with an emphasis on the effect of concrete compressive strength, bar diameter, and splice length of deformed
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030017-1–030017-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985487
030017-1
bars on the bond strength. In another study, the performance of pull out test on reinforced geopolymer concrete
was found a better bond performance than the use of reinforced OPC concrete [15]. A similar result was also
observed and the increase of bond strength by decreasing deformed bar diameters was reported [16, 17].
However, there were only few results discussing about bond performance of plain bar. This paper discussed the
influence of plain bar on bond strength of geopolymer concrete and compared the results with previous
researches on bond strength of OPC concrete [12, 18, 19, 20].
EXPERIMENTAL STUDIES
Materials
Low calcium fly ash type F was obtained from PT. Petrokimia Gresik Indonesia as the base material. Fly ash
used in this study was composed of 85% (SiO2 + Al2O3 + Fe2O3), 5% SO3, and 10% of CaO. Based on the [21],
those compositions of fly ash can be classified as Type F. The chemical compositions of this material are shown
in Table 1.
The combination of Sodium hydroxide (NaOH) and Sodium silicate (Na2Si03) was used as the alkaline
activator. Sodium hydroxide was prepared by dissolving sodium hydroxide flakes in distilled water. The
concentration of NaOH was 8 M. Sodium silicate with a chemical composition of 15% Na2O, 30% SiO2 and
55% H2O was obtained from PT. Kasmaji Utama (PTKIU), Indonesia. The mass ratio of Na2SiO3 to NaOH was
kept at 2.5. A commercially available superplasticizer from PT. Sika Indonesia with a dosage of 3% by weight
of fly ash was used to improve the workability of fresh concrete.
TABLE 1. The Chemical Composition of Fly Ash (%)
SiO2 Al2O3 Fe2O3 TiO2 CaO MgO Cr2O3 K2O Na2O SO3 Mn2O3
48.47 26.05 12.54 0.92 5.18 2.77 0.02 1.66 0.47 1.05 0.19
The aggregates were prepared in saturated-surface-dry (SSD) conditions before mixing them with the
concrete, which was determined from the absorption and the moisture content test as described in ASTM C127
[22] and ASTM C566 [23], respectively. Locally available aggregates comprising of 10 mm coarse aggregates
and fine aggregates sand were collected from PT. Surya Beton Indonesia. The mix proportion of geopolymer
concrete is given in Table 2.
TABLE 2. The Mix Proportion
Material Mass (kg/m3)

Coarse Aggregate 1080
Fine Aggregate 720
Fly Ash (Type F) 390
NaOH (8 M) 60
Na2SiO3 150
Superplaticizer (3% of fly ash) 11.7
The reinforcement bar embedded in concrete used geopolymer paste as bonding material. The nominal
reinforcement plain bar diameter were 12 mm, 16 mm, and 19 mm with 3 (three) specimens were made for each
series of specimen. Samples of reinforcement bar were tested in laboratory to obtain the actual yield strength
and ultimate strength. The results are given in Table 3.
TABLE 3. Properties of Reinforcement Bar
Diameter Nominal Area (mm2) Yield Strength (MPa) Ultimate Strength (MPa)
12 91.8 390 544
16 184 389 492
19 269 340 505
030017-2
Preparation of Specimens
There are three types of test to investigate the bond behavior of reinforcing bar, namely pull out test, beam
end test, beam anchorage and splice test [24]. In this study, the pull out test was selected to investigate bond
behavior of each variation of plain bar diameter. Each bar was embedded in 150 mm x 150 mm x 150 mm
concrete cube and the embedded length was five times bar diameter (5d). Standard 100 mm x 200 mm concrete
cylinders were used for compressive strength test. As shown in Fig.1, the contact between the concrete and the
bar was eliminated through the use of PVC tubing to achieve the desired embedment length.
Mixing was conducted with a pan mixer. The pan was cleaned and in wet condition, the materials were
placed into the mixer by hand. The specimens were put in a horizontal position and were compacted by a
vibrating table, it was necessary to hold the reinforcement during the compaction. The aggregates and base
material of fly ash were mixed previously. Furthermore, the alkali activators with superplasticizer were mixed
together. After the mixing, the fresh geopolymer concrete was placed into the mold. After demolding, the
geopolymer concrete specimens were stored under wet condition using gunny-sack until the test day, which was
28 days after the preparation as shown in Fig.2.
FIGURE 1. Pull Out Specimen
FIGURE 2. Curing Specimen
Test Setup
The test was performed by using universal testing machine with a tensile capacity of 2.000 KN. The load
was applied at the bottom side of the reinforcement until the failure of specimens was identified. The slip of the
bar relative to concrete at the free end was measured with linear variable displacement transducers (LVDT). The
force and displacement were recorded by using an automatically data acquisition system. The test setup is
shown in Fig.3.
030017-3
FIGURE 3. Setup of pull out test

The average bond strength calculated from the peak pull out load is assumed at the ultimate bond strength
between two materials. This definition of average bond strength is followed throughout the analysis, and it is
calculated as:
‫ܨ‬
߬ൌ (1)
ߨ ‫݀ כ‬௕ ‫ܮ כ‬௕
The bond area is depended on the diameter of reinforced bar and the bonded length of reinforcement
embedded in concreteǤThe bond area calculated by using Eq. (2).
(2)
‫ ܣ‬ൌ ߨ ‫݀ כ‬௕ ‫݈ כ‬ௗ
Where P is the maximum pull out load and db and ld are the diameter and the bonded length of the plain bar,
respectively. The experiment results for geopolymer are given in Table 4. The average curve from each
variation group of three samples was chosen as the representative of the bond slip behavior and is plotted in Fig.
4. The bond slip curve displays the characteristic stages of the typical bond-slip curve of geopolymer concrete.
When the failure occurs at the maximum bond stress point, softening of the bond stress follows. The failure of
bond strength rapidly decreases at the slip increases.
TABLE 4. Bond Test Result for GPC Concrete.

Bar diameter Cover Bond Length Bond Area Bond Strength
Specimen c/db
db(mm) c (mm) ld = 5* db (mm) A (mm) (Mpa)
GPC 12 12 150 5.75 60 2261 3.11
GPC 16 16 150 4.19 80 4019 6.34
GPC 19 19 150 3.45 95 5668 6.77
030017-4
7 19 mm
Bons Strength (MPa)

6
16 mm
5
4
3 12 mm
2
1
0
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Displacement (mm)
FIGURE 4. Bond Strength-Slip Curve
Table 4 and Fig.5 illustrate the influences of concrete cover to diameter ratio (c/d) of reinforcement bar for
each variation. The result shows that concrete cover to diameter ratio (c/d) is depended on bond area and the
thickness of concrete cover as the passive confined of concrete. In general, bond strength increases as the
concrete cover to diameter ratio is also increased. This study showed the same result as the increase from 3.45 to
4.19 indicates the increase of bond strength. However, the bond strength of 12 mm plain bar with cover to
diameter ratio 5.75 shows less value. The different results also indicated that the increase of c/d with the smaller
bond area and friction between concrete and reinforcement influence this behavior.
8.00 6.34 6.77

Bond Strength (MPa)
6.00
4.00 3.11
2.00
0.00
3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00
c/d (mm)
FIGURE 5. Bond Strength with variation of concrete cover to diameter ratio (c/d)
The effect of bonded length (ld) on bond strength of geopolymer concrete is shown in Fig.6. The trend of
the experimental results indicated the increase of bond length and the decrease of average bond strength. The
increase of bond length from 80 mm into 95 mm indicated a decrease of bond strength. This behavior is possibly
caused by the lack of the concrete thickness. In addition, the smallest bond strength was obtained by 60 mm of
bond length.
8.00 6.77 6.34

Bond Strength (MPa)
6.00
4.00 3.11
2.00
0.00
50 60 70 80 90 100 110
ld (mm)
FIGURE 6. Bond strength with variation of bond lengths
030017-5
The similar trend of increased bar diameter that leads to decreased bond strength of geopolymer and OPC
concrete have been reported previously [12]. Fig. 7 shows bond strength decreases as diameter of plain bar is
increased from 16 mm to 19 mm. Different results of bond strength as shown by diameter of 12 mm is caused
by the bond area and the thickness of concrete cover. Based on previous discussion in this paper, the behavior
that influences bar diameter is similar with the behavior that influences concrete to cover diameter ratio and
bond length. The bond area and the thickness of concrete cover were main factors that influenced bond strength
in this research. The uniformity of the thickness concrete cover with the variation of bond areas contributed by
bar diameter and bond length is shown by other results of bond strength of geopolymer concrete.
8.00 6.77 6.34

Bond Strength (MPa) 7.00
6.00
5.00
4.00 3.11
3.00
2.00
1.00
0.00
11 13 15 17 19 21
Diameter (mm)
FIGURE 7. Bond Strength with variation of plain bar diameters
Several researchers have attempted to formulate equations that represent the bond between the reinforcing
bars and the concrete. Below is a brief description of those equations:
Oragun et al, [18] proposed the following formula:
ܿ ݀௕
‫ ݑ‬ൌ ͲǤͲͺ͵ͲͶͷඥ݂ ᇱ ܿ ൤ͳǤʹ ൅ ͵ ൅ ͷͲ ൨ (3)
݀௕ ‫ܮ‬௕
The previous research [12] proposed the equation for bond strength related to length development in
geopolymer concrete. The new equation of bond stress was required for geopolymer concrete.
ܿ௠௜௡ ݀௕
‫ ݑ‬ൌ ඥ݂ ᇱ ܿ ൤ʹǤͲ͹ ൅ ͲǤʹͲ ൅ ͶǤͳͷ ൨ (4)
݀௕ ݈ௗ
TABLE 5. The Summary of Pull out Results

Calculated Bond Strength (MPa)
Diameter (mm) Cover (mm) Pmax (N) Oragun et al., Kim and Park
Experimental [18] [12]
12 150 6590 3.11 14.12 24.20
16 150 28125 6.34 11.79 22.33
19 150 36953 6.77 10.69 21.45
The summary of the pull out test results by using the several equations are given on Table 5 and Fig. 8. The
equation developed by Kim and Park [12] was used to compare the bond strength of geopolymer concrete for
each variation in this experiment. The results of the calculation with those from previous formula showed
significant differences. Using equation developed by Oragun et al. [18], the trend showed to decrease of bond
strength in accordace with the increase of bar diameter. Those significant differences of bond strength were
possiblycaused by the differrent specimens and type of bar. This experiment used the cube concrete specimen
while Oragun et al., [18] used the beam specimen. Furthermore the equation is particularlyproposed for
calculating bond strength of beam specimen and deformed reinforcement bar.
030017-6
The results of equation by Kim and Park [12] showed similar trend with Oragun [18] where the increase of
bar diameter is in accordance with the decrease of bond strength. Additionally, similar trend also occured in this
experiment with bond strength in diameter of 16 mm to 19 mm. Different results of 12 mm plain bar indicated
the lowest bond strength. The result showed that 12 mm of plain bar is not recommended as the reinforcement
embedded in geopolymer concrete. It is evident that deformed bar with 12 mm diameter is potential to increase
bond strength as illustrated in Fig. 8.
24.00
Bond Strength (MPa)
20.00
16.00
12.00 Experiment
8.00 Oragun [18]

4.00 Kim and Park [12]
0.00
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Diameter (mm)
FIGURE 8. Comparison of bond strength generated from the equations.
CONCLUSIONS
The bond strength as the results of plain bar was investigated in this research. The variation of concrete
cover to diameter ratio (c/d), bond length (ld), and diameter of plain bar was examined. The bond slip curve and
the average of bond strength for each specimen were observed. The following conclusions are drawn from the
experimental results:
1. The bond strength increases in accordance with the increase of diameter reinforcement (c/d) from 3.45
to 4.19 of concrete cover. However, the c/d of 5.75 showed less bond strength. The bond area and the
thickness of concrete cover caused this behavior.
2. The increase of bond length (ld) from 80 mm to 95 mm led to the decrease of bond strength. It is
possibly caused by the lack of passive confined provided by concrete. In addition, less bond strength
was indicated by a diameter of 12 mm on a bond legth of 60 mm.
3. Several equations were employed to compare the generated bond strengths. The results showed that
similar trend showed by diameter of 16 mm and 19 mm. However, a diameter of 12 mm showed the
different result. It indicated that the bar is not recommended as reinforcement embedded in geopolymer
concrete.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors gratefully acknowledge the Indonesia Endowment Fund for Education (LPDP) Thesis
Scholarship Program for the funding support of the research project and the contribution of Concrete and
Building Material Laboratory of the Department of Civil Engineering, Insitut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember
(ITS) in this experimental work.
REFERENCES
1. P.K. Mehta: Concrete International Vol.23, No 6 (2001), p. 61-66.
2. K. Sathish, S. T. Blassen and C. Alex,” An Experimental Study of the Properties of Glass Fiber Reinforced
Geopolymer Concrete,” International Journal of Engineering Research and Application, vol 2, no.6, pp.
722-726, 2012.
3. A. M. Bakrie, H. Kamarudin, M. Binhussain, K. Nizar, A. R. Rafiza,and Y. Zarina, (2011), “The
Processing, Characterization, and Properties of Fly Ash Based Geopolymer Concrete”, 90-97. Fly Ash-
Based Geopolymer Concrete in The Marine Enviroment”, Singapore Concrete Institute.
4. Z. F. Farhana, H. Kamarudin, A. Rahmat, and A. M. Mustafa Al Bakri (2013), “A Study on Corrosion
Behavior of Reinforcement Bar Embedded in Geopolymer Paste by Open Circuit Potential”, Australian
Journal of Basic and Applied Sciences, 7(5): 230-235.
030017-7
5. J. Davidovits, “Geopolymer cement for mitigation of Global Warming.” 2014.
6. ACI Committee 408, “Bond and Development of Straight Reinforcing Bars in Tension (ACI 408R-03),”
American Concrete Institute, 2003, pp.9-25.
7. R. F. Warner, B. V. Rangan, A. S. Hall, and K. A. Faulkes, Concrete Structures, Longman, Australia,
1998.
8. M. R. Esfahani and B.V. Rangan : ACI Structural Journal Vol. 95 (1998). P272-280
9. K. Sathish, S. T. Blessen and C. Alex, "An Experimental Study of the Properties of Glass Fiber Reinforced
Geopolymer Concrete," International Journal of Engineering Research and Applications, vol. 2, no. 6, pp.
722-726, 2012.
10. D. Hardjito and B.V. Rangan, "Development and Properties of Low-Calcium Fly Ash-Based Geopolymer
Concrete," Curtin University of Technology, Perth, Australia, 2005.
11. R. B. Vijava, S. Doby , W. Steenie and H. Djwantoro, "Reinforced Low-Calcium Fly Ash-Based
Geopolymer Concrete Beams and Columns," in CI-Premier PTE LTD, Singapore, 2006.
12. Kim, Jee-Sang and Jong Ho Park (2015), “An Experimental of Bond Properties of Reinforcements
Embedded in Geopolymer Concrete.” International Journal of Civil Structural Construction and
Architectural Engineering, Vol. 9, no. 2.
13. E. H. Chang, P. Sarkar, L. Natalia, and B. Rangan. (2009). “Bond behavior of reinforced fly ash-based
geopolymer concrete beams.” 24th Biennial Conf. of the Concrete Institute of Australia: Concrete
Solutions, Concrete Institute of Australia, North Sydney, Australia, 1–10.
14. Cui, Y., and Kayali, O. (2013). “Bond performance of steel bar and fly ash based geopolymer concrete.”
26th Biennial Conf. of the Concrete Institute of Australia: Understanding Concrete, Concrete Institute of
Australia, North Sydney, Australia.
15. Sarker, P. K. (2011). “Bond strength of reinforcing steel embedded in fly ash-based geopolymer concrete.”
Mater. Struct., 44(5), 1021–1030.
16. Tekle, B.H., Khennane A., and Kayali O. “Bond properties of sand-coated GFRP Bars with fly ash-base
geopolymer concrete,’ Journal of Composites for Construction, 04016025.
17. Sofi, M., van Deventer, J. S. J., Mendis, P. A., and Lukey, G. C. (2007). “Bond performance of reinforcing
bars in inorganic polymer concrete (IPC).” J. Mater. Sci., 42(9), 3107–3116.
18. C. O. Orangun, I. O. Jirsa, and J. E. Breen, “A Reevaluation of Test Data on Development Length and
Splices”, ACI Journal, vol. 74, no. 3, pp. 114-122, March 1977.
19. Australian Standard for Concrete Structures. AS3600, North Sydney, Australia, 1994.
20. D. Darwin, S. L. McCabe, E. K. Idun, and S. P. Schoenekase, “Development Length Criteria: Bars Not
Confined by Transverse Reinforcement”, ACI Structural Journal, vol. 89, no. 6, pp. 709-720, Nov.-Dec.
1992.
21. ASTM. (2015b). “Standard test method for relative density (specific gravity) and absorption of coarse
aggregate.” ASTM C127-15, West Conshohocken, PA.
22. ASTM. (2013). “Standard test method for total evaporable moisture content of aggregate by drying.”
ASTM C566-13, West Conshohocken, PA.
23. ASTM (2012). “Standard specification for coal fly ash and raw or calcined natural pozzolan for use in
concrete.” ASTM C618-12a, West Conshohocken, PA.
24. S.U. Pillai, and D.W. Kirk, Reinforced Concrete Design in Canada, McGraw-Hill, 1983.
030017-8
Synthesis and characterization of CaCO3 (calcite) nano particles from cockle shells
(Anadara granosa Linn) by precipitation method
Sri Widyastuti and Intan Ayu Kusuma P.

Synthesis and Characterization of CaCO3 (Calcite) Nano
Particles from Cockle Shells (Anadara granosa Linn) by
Precipitation Method
Sri Widyastuti1,a) and Intan Ayu Kusuma P2,b)
1
Department of Environmental Engineering, Universitas PGRI Adi Buana Surabaya Indonesia
2
Department of Biology Universitas PGRI Adi Buana Surabaya Indonesia
a)
Corresponding authors: rafirudi@yahoo.co.id
b)
intanakpe@yahoo.com
Abstract. Calcium supplements can reduce the risk of osteoporosis, but they are not automatically absorbed in the
gastrointestinal tract. Nanotechnology is presumed to have a capacity in resolving this problem. The preparation and
characterization of calcium carbonate nano particle to improve the solubility was performed. Calcium carbonate
nano particles were synthesized using precipitation method from cockle shells (Anadara granosa Linn). Samples of
the cockle shells were dried in an oven at temperature of 50°C for 7 (seven) days and subsequently they were
crushed and blended into fine powder that was sieved through 125-ߤm sieve. The synthesis of calcium carbonate
nanocrystals was done by extracting using hydro chloride acid and various concentrations of sodium hydroxide were
used to precipitate the calcium carbonate nano particles. The size of the nano particles was determined by SEM,
XRD data, and Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy (FT-IR). The results of XRD indicated that the overall
crystalline structure and phase purity of the typical calcite phase CaCO3 particles were approximately 300 nm in
size. The method to find potential applications in industry to yield the large scale synthesis of aragonite nano
particles by a low cost but abundant natural resource such as cockle shells is required.
INTRODUCTION
In relations to the provisions of Code of Conduct for Responsible Fisheries (CCRF), the processing business
of fishery products must be performed by more optimal and environmentally friendly procedure. However, the
utilization of solid waste of cockle shell (Anadara granosa Linn) by prevailing fish processing units in
Indonesia has not been optimal to increase the added value of this commodity.
So far, solid waste of cockle shell in the form of shell is only used as wall decoration materials, handicrafts,
and animal feed mixes. The sewage treatment would not obtain a great added value because it is still limited in
terms of price and quantity of production. Necessary efforts are required; among them is the utilization of waste
as a source of natural calcium and as calcium enhancer. Therefore, the use of shells Anadara granosa Linn as a
source of calcium is a solution for several problems.
The use of waste invertebrates (crustaceans) as an animal source for calcium in the calcium supplements by
using nano-blend technology is a breakthrough. Shells are turned into nano-sized calcium mineral that can be
utilized in various forms because it contains calcium carbonate in soluble form [1]. In the demineralization
process, minerals will dissolve in acid solution such as hydrochloric acid (HCl). Mineral recovery generated
from demineralization process can also be utilized as a source of calcium for the gypsum and calcium
supplements [2]. The synthesis of nano particles means the manufacture of particles with a size less than 100 nm
and simultaneously changes the nature or function.
Different techniques for the preparation of calcium carbonate nano particles have been reported, including
the precipitation of homogeneous solutions [3], water-in-oil-in-water emulsions [4], mechanochemical and
sonochemical syntheses [5], and water-in-oil (W/O) microemulsions [6]. Other preparation methods include the
high-pressure homogenizer (HPH) technique and high-gravity precipitation. For precipitation methods, there are
two different routes with the only difference is the used chemicals. The first method is based on the carbonation
process, whereby carbon dioxide gas is bubbled through aqueous slurry of calcium hydroxide at a specific
temperature in present of organic additive such as surfactant thereby inducing precipitation of calcium
carbonate. The second method is known as double decomposition that involves the combination of salt of
calcium ions and salt of carbonate ions, such as the reaction of calcium chloride or calcium nitrate with sodium
carbonate or ammonium carbonate [7]. The synthesis of pure calcium carbonate nano crystals using a high
pressure homogenizer (HPH) via a microemulsion system was reported by Abdullahi Shafiu Kamba et al., [8].
Basically, the formation of metal nano particles can be done with physics (top down) and chemical (bottom
up) methods. In physics method (top down), metal solids are broken down into small particles of nano-sized.
Chemical method (bottom up) is done by growing nano particles from metal atoms derived from a precursor
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030018-1–030018-5; doi: 10.1063/1.4985488
030018-1
molecular or ionic [9]. The formation of nano particles with high regularity can produce more uniform pattern in
uniform size. Numbers of studies were capable to produce better nano particles by using commonly used
methods, such as coprecipitation, sol-gel, microemulsion, hydrothermal/solvoterma, templated synthesis,
biomimetic synthesis, method of supercritical fluids, and ionic liquids synthesis. This study was conducted to
determine the optimum conditions for producing nanocalcium from the shells of Anadara granosa Linn with
precipitation method.
Precipitation method is the mixing of acids and bases that produces crystalline and water [9]. Isolation of
calcium from the shell is done by using HCl demineralization. This process is a process of dissolution of
minerals contained in the shell, especially the CaCO3 in chemistry. In this study, precipitation was done by
dissolving calcium component into the solvent acid (HCl) since calcium dissolves in acidic conditions.
Subsequently, NaOH solution was added to HCl solution which already contained calcium. The acid-base
mixing resulted in saturated solution and produced smooth and nano-sized precipitated calcium. According to
[10], precipitation method is performed with the active substance dissolved in the solvent and added with a
solution of another solvent (anti-solvent), in which it causes the solution becomes saturated and fast nucleation
to form nano particles occurs.
Materials and Instruments

Material used in this study was blood clam shells (Anadara granosa Linn) derived from the Fish Auction
Center, Kenjeran Beach, Surabaya. Instruments for nanocalcium extraction were HCl and NaOH. The tools
used in this study included extractor, glassware, oven, hotplate, and furnace.
Procedure for Powdered Shells Production

The Synthesis of calcium carbonate powders were prepared from the cockle shells according to the
procedure described by Islam et al. [4]. Cockle shells were obtained from the market. Samples of the cockle
shells were dried in an oven at a temperature of 50 °C for seven days. Subsequently, the samples were crushed
and blended into fine powder that was sieved through a 200-ߤm laboratory stainless steel sieve (Endecott,
London, England).
Nanocalcium Production Procedure

Shell powder was immersed in 1.5 N HCl for 48 hours and then extracted at a temperature of 90°C. The
extraction result was then filtered to obtain fluid/filtrate. Calcium crystal formation was conducted by
precipitation through gradual addition of NaOH solution dropwise to the filtrate until the formation of
precipitation saturated calcium hydroxide (Ca(OH)2) was obtained. Furthermore, the process of crystal
separation and crystal neutralization was done by using distilled water. Crystals generated from previous process
was oven dried at a temperature of 105°C for 1 hour to stabilize the precipitate weight, then the crystals were
burned using an electric stove to eliminate organic content. Subsequently, the crystals were put in a furnace at
600°C for six hours to form calcium oxide (CaO), and then the crystal extraction was smoothed with mortar.
The chemical and physical properties of generated nanocalcium were then analyzed.
Optimum Condition Determination

The determination of optimum condition was performed by using a concentration of 1.5 N HCl with various
extraction durations of 1 hour, 1.5 hours, and 2 hours. The deposition of potassium hydroxide (Ca(OH) 2) was
carried out by varying the concentration of NaOH in 2 N, 3 N, and 4 N.
Characterization of Calcium Carbonate Nanocrystals

The following instruments were employed for the observation and characterization of the calcium carbonate
nanocrystals. The morphology and particle size of the nanocrystals were analyzed by using a scanning electron
microscope (SEM, JOEL 7600F) that was operated at a voltage of 20 kV and equipped with an energy-
dispersive X-ray spectroscopy (EDX) unit. The crystal powder was examined by X-ray powder diffraction
(XRD) using a Rigaku X-ray diffractometer equipped with a Cu Kα (λ = 0.15406 nm) radiation source, and
samples were scanned at a rate of 40/min. Pellets of the calcium carbonate nanocrystals were calibrated in a
030018-2
weight proportion of 1 wt % in Ker and the analyses were performed with a Fourier-transform infrared
spectrometer (FTIR, model 100, Perkin Elmer, 710 Bridgeport Avenue, Shelton, CT, USA) in the range of 400–
4000 cm−1.

Calcium carbonate has three anhydrous crystalline phases: calcite, which is thermodynamically stable under
ambient conditions; aragonite, which is a high-pressure polymorph that is less stable than calcite; and vaterite,
which is the least stable among the three polymorphs and has the ability to transform into one of the other two
polymorphs [3]. Among these three polymorphs, calcite is thermodynamically stable [3, 11]. XRD result is in
samples number 3 and number 6 can be seen in Fig.1 respectively.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 1. The XRD images for synthesized calcium carbonate in calcite structure samples (a) number 3 and (b) number 6
Among those three polymorphs, calcite has a stable thermodynamic [3, 11]. Cockle shells are composed of
pure calcium carbonate, usually both in the forms of calcite and aragonite. Sea shell contained of 95 to 99% by
weight of CaCO3 which enable it to be applied for quite a number of purposes [7, 12] of chemical properties.
The most important aspect regarding with the synthesis of nano particles is control of the particle size,
polymorphism, and morphology of the desired material [13]. Control of this parameter has led to the
development of new materials with unique properties that differ from those in the bulk material.
The size of the CaCO3 nano powder obtained from cockle shell was demonstrated [XRD, analytical, (model:
DY-1656)] machine (Position 2θ, range 20-60). The XRD pattern is shown in Figure 1. The analysis of crystal
structure using XRD illustrates that the nano powder synthesized from cockle shell was made up of calcite,
CaCO3. It was one type of crystal form of calcium carbonate other than aragonite and vaterite.
The strong and sharp peaks showed that the cockle shell CaCO3 powder was well crystalline. The average
crystallite size (D) of the calcium carbonate was calculated using Debye-Scherrer equation [9].
The grain size was calculated of 628.64 nm. However, the calcium carbonate obtained from cockle shells
was mainly in the form of aragonite, natural aragonite on heating converts to calcite, the conversion is very
rapid at temperatures above 400◦C. It was concluded that all of the peaks obtained in the XRD pattern of cockle
shell CaCO3 nano powder was matched perfectly with the standard calcite pattern [10] and JCPDS file (88-
1807).
Fourier transforms infrared analysis

The phase of the cockle shell CaCO3 powder was further confirmed by (Shimadzu IR Affinity
Spectrophotometer) machine. An FTIR spectrum was generated by the absorption of electromagnetic radiation
in the frequency range of 400 – 4000 cm-1. The obtained spectrum is shown in the Fig. 2. The spectrum showed
vibrational bands at 1456.391 cm-1, 876.72 cm-1, 712.7281 cm-1, and 409.891 cm-1, indicates plane bending.
030018-3
Vibration of carbonate
FT-IR analysis confirmed that the CaCO3 nano powder obtained from cockle shell had the characteristic
peak of carbonate group. A sharp peak at 876.72 cm-1 confirmed that the CaCO3 nano powder obtained from
cockle shell was calcite. FT-IR analysis also demonstrated that the powder consisted of CaCO3.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 2. Fourier transforms infrared analysis of samples (a) number 3 and (b) number 6.
SEM Characterization of Calcium Carbonate Nanocrystals
The morphological characteristics of the calcium carbonate nanocrystals presented in Fig 3(a) and 3(b) are
the typical SEM micrographs of the samples under study. Scanning electron microscope (SEM) is a very useful
tool for studying morphology of nano powders. The surface morphology of the synthesized CaCO3 nano powder
was examined by scanning electron microscope/SEM (JEOL-JSM 5800) operated at 20 kV accelerating voltage.
The CaCO3 nano powder is a non-conducting powder, therefore the SEM images were taken at low vacuum
mode to obtain sharp images. The images of the crystal presented in Fig. 3(a) and 3(b). The images shown in
Figure 4, calcite and aragonite possess different crystal growth patterns and crystal structure. Calcite is
hexagonal and aragonite is orthorhombic. Cube-like crystals of calcite are stable in compared to Rod-like
orthorhombic crystals of aragonite.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 3. SEM results of samples (a) number 3 and (b) number 6.
Cockle shells are composed of pure calcium carbonate, usually both in the forms of calcite and aragonite.
Sea shell contained of 95-99% by weight of CaCO3 which enable it to be applied for quite a number of purposes
[7, 12]. The most important aspect with respect to the synthesis of nano particles is the control of the particle
size, polymorphism, and morphology of the desired material [13]. Control of this parameter has led to the
development of new materials with unique properties that differ from those in the bulk material.
030018-4
In this study, nano calcium carbonate was synthesized by precipitation as the size reducing agent. The
synthesis of calcium carbonate (calcite) nano particles from cockle shells is a potential approach. Cockle shells
are naturally purified source of aragonite polymorphs of calcium carbonate. However by applying high
temperatures, the aragonite polymorph converts to calcite, which is thermodynamically most stable.
CONCLUSION
This study investigated the synthesis of nano particles of CaCO3 from cockle shells by using precipitation
method. The generated calcium carbonate is characterized by XRD, FTIR, UV-Visible and SEM. The
precipitation method yielded calcium carbonate powder in nano metric scale. XRD analysis showed that the
synthesized CaCO3 nano powder from cockle shell had more stable calcite phase in compared to the aragonite
phase. FT-IR analysis confirmed that the CaCO3 nano powder obtained from cockle shell had the peak
characteristic of carbonate group at 1456.391 cm-1, 876.72 cm-1, 712.7281 cm-1, and 409.891cm-1. SEM images
confirmed that the synthesized calcium carbonate nano powder from cockle shells had calcite phase. The
generated calcium carbonate powder is in the nano metric scale that may have superior properties in compared
to the powders in larger particle size. In addition, the yielded nano particles can be used in various applications.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
We would like to express our deepest gratitude to Directorate General of Higher Education, Ministry of
National Education that funded the implementation of the activities of the Competitive Grant of Hibah Bersaing
of Fiscal Year 2016 as stipulated in the Contract No. 055.2.7/LPPM/IV/2016 dated April 25, 2016 and DIPA
DIKTI No. SP/DIPA.023.04.1.673.453/2016 Revision 01 dated March 3, 2016.
REFERENCES
1. R. Gupter, M.S. Thesis, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, Ga, USA, (2004).
2. P. Saravanan, R. Gopalan, and V. Chandrasekaran, 2008. Def Sci J.58, 4, 504-516 (2008).
3. K. N. Islam, A. B. Z. Zuki, M. M. Noordin, M. Z. B. Hussein, N. S. S. B. A. Rahman, and M. E. Ali.
Powder Technol, 213, 1–3, 188–191, (2011).
4. Kenth S. 2009. Investigation of Femtosecond Laser Technology for the Fabrication of Drug Nanocrystals
in Suspension. Sciences Pharmaceutiques, Université de Montréal.
5. Kh. Nurul Islam, A. B. Z. Zuki, M. E. Ali, Mohd Zobir Bin Hussein, M. M. Noordin, M. Y. Loqman, H.
Wahid, M. A. Hakim, and Sharifa Bee Abd Hamid. Nano Mater, 69-76, 2012 (2012). Accessed at:
http://dx.doi.org/10.1155/2012/534010.
6. Langford JI, Wilson AJ, C Scherrer, J. App Crystallography, 11, 102-113,(1978).
7. M. Hariharan, N. Varghese, A. B. Cherian, P.V. Sreenivasan, J. Paul, and A. Antony. Inter. J. Sci. Res.
Publ. 4, 1-5 (2014).
8. A.S. Kamba, T. A. T. Ibrahim, M. Ismail, and Z. A. B. Zakaria. J. Nanomaterials No. 9, 70-78, (2013).
Accessed at: http://dx.doi.org/10.1155/2013/398357.
9. Y. Guowei., L.Wang, and H.Jianhua. Powder Technol., 192 (1),58–64, (2009).
10. http://rruff.info/Calite/R040070.
11. C. Wang, J. Zhao, X. Zhao, H. Bala, and Z. Wang. Powder Technol., 163, 3, 134–138 (2006).
12. M. Dinamani, P.Vishnu Kamath, R. Sheshadri. Mater. Res. Bull. 37, 661-669 (2002).
13. B. S. Purwasasmita, and R. S Gultom. J.Life Phys. Sci. 10 (2): 155-167, (2008).
030018-5
Structural equation model to investigate the dimensions influencing safety culture
improvement in construction sector: A case in Indonesia
Rossy Armyn Machfudiyanto, Yusuf Latief, Yoko Yogiswara, and R. Mahendra Fitra Setiawan

Structural Equation Model to Investigate the Dimensions
Influencing Safety Culture Improvement in
Construction Sector: A Case in Indonesia
Rossy Armyn Machfudiyanto1, a), Yusuf Latief1, Yoko Yogiswara1,
R. Mahendra Fitra Setiawan1
1
Department of Civil Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Kampus UI Depok, Jawa Barat, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: rossyarmyn@gmail.com
Abstract. In facing the ASEAN Economic Community, the level of prevailing working accidents becomes one of
the competitiveness factors among the companies. A construction industry is one of the industries prone to high
level of accidents. Improving the safety record will not be completely effective unless the occupational safety and
healthy culture is enhanced. The aim of this research was to develop a model and to conduct empirical
investigation on the relationships among the dimensions of construction occupational safety culture. This
research used the structural equation model as a means to examine the hypothesis of positive relationships
between dimensions and objectives. The method used in this research was questionnaire survey which was
distributed to the respondents from construction companies in a state-owned enterprise in Indonesia. Moreover,
there were dimensions of occupational safety culture that was established, such as leadership, behavior, value,
strategy, policy, process, employee, safety cost, and contract system. The results of this study indicated that all
dimensions were significant and inter-related in forming the safety culture. The result of R2 yie lded the safety
performance was 54%, which means it was in low category and evaluation of policies on construction
companies was required in addressing the issue of working accidents.
INTRODUCTION
The enactment of liberalization through Asean Economic Community (AEC) in the end of 2015 should
be perceived as an alert for the construction workers in Indonesia so that our domestic market will not be
taken over by foreign competitors. In addition, the stakeholders in construction service industries in this
country, both state-owned enterprise and national private construction companies, should have active
contributions to improve their competitiveness under the climate change of the ongoing competition.
Nevertheless, poor safety culture becomes one of the main culprits in the global construction industry since it
frequently causes accidents and death [1].The impact of working accidents on the construction project is very
crucial, in addition to fatality, accidents at construction project leads to decreased productivity, increased
product costs, medical burden, and other adverse consequences [2]. In order to improve the competitiveness
in the global market, improvement in the performance of construction project should be performed entirely
by every domestic construction company. In 2007, International Labor Organization (ILO) confirmed that the
rate of work accident has adverse effect on the economic conditions of a country and shows the
predisposition of high work accident rate which highly correlates with the degradation of competitiveness
index of a country as shown in Fig. 1.
However, the issues related with the occupational health and safety in Indonesia has not been a major
attention for the stakeholders. In fact, the standard of occupational safety in Indonesia was perceived as the
worst among the Southeast Asian countries and it was also noted that the number of reported accidents was
less than a half of the actual accidents, which was confirmed by the staffs of Department of Labor. According
to the data of Workers Social Security Agency, the prevalence of occupational accidents from 2007 to 2015
showed fluctuating numbers and an increasing trend as illustrated in Fig. 2. Moreover, the numbers
represented the highest rate of occupational safety in Southeast Asian countries.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030019-1–030019-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985489
030019-1
FIGURE 1. The association between Country Competitiveness and Work Accident Rate (ILO, 2007).
FIGURE 2. Graphic of Working Accident in Indonesia (Source: Workers Social Security Agency, 2015).
The evaluation of the Safety Management System in Construction Company was based on the
qualifications of Construction Services Enterprises (BUJK) or the Service Provider. The results indicated that
the conditions in the construction project were relatively unsafe as represented by the obtained percentage,
which was 0% to 49%. It can be seen in Table 1.
TABLE 1. The Implementation of OSH Management System in the construction companies based on qualifications
(Source: Final report evaluation of safety management system in Department PUPR, 2015)
Qualification Contractor Safety Implementation Level Category
Grand Qualification 34.06% Unsafe
Medium Qualification 27.60% Unsafe
Small Qualification 22.78% Unsafe
Generally, the high number of occupational accident in Indonesia was perceived to be caused by the
unsafe behaviors of the workers. In fact, it was not true. Reason [3] suggested that the efforts to prevent
occupational accidents only by addressing the unsafe acts done by the workers would not solve the problems
root as the cause of occupational accidents. However, the main cause of occupational accident was not solely
due to the unsafe acts performed by the workers, but also due to the lack of management responsibility of the
stakeholders. One of the major keys of the success of safety management is by establishing a strong safety
culture within the company and implementing the applicable implementation of Management System of
Occupational Health and Safety appropriately. The aim of this research was to develop a model and to
conduct empirical investigation about the relationship among the dimensions of occupational safety culture
of the construction sector.
030019-2
THEORETICAL REVIEW
Safety Performance. According to OHSAS 18001:2007 clause 3.15 [4], Safety Performance is defined
as the result as measured by the management of Occupational Health and Safety risks within an organization,
taking notes the issues as follows:
1. The measurement of occupational health and safety Performance including the measurement of control
effectiveness implemented by the organization.
2. In the context of management system of Occupational Health and Safety, the result can be measured and
compared with the organization’s Occupational Health and Safety policy, Occupational Health and Safety
purposes, and other Occupational Health and Safety performance qualifications.
Safety Culture. The safety Culture within an organization is a product of values, behaviors, perception,
competence, and behavioral patterns of individuals and groups that have the commitment towards the safety
(ASCSNI, 1993).
Leadership. Leadership is defined as how a leader should develop and facilitate the achievement of
health and safety mission and vision, develop the values needed of the long term success, implement the
appropriate act and behavior, and be personally involved in confirming that the management of OSH is really
being developed and implemented. Leadership and commitment management of safety is known as a
fundamental component of organization’s OSH [5].
Policy. Safety standard, law and regulation: A good safety culture requires realistic safety regulations
which is possible to be practically implemented in any situation [6-7].
Strategy. The implementation strategy of OSH is an instrument to achieve the purposes of OSH which
are protecting the workforces, preventing and reducing occupational accident, and working together with the
government, entrepreneurs and community for the maintenance of environment security.
Worker. Worker is defined as how an organization manages, develops, and delivers knowledge and total
potential of the employees at the individual, group or wide organizational level, and this activity plan in order
to support the effective policy, strategy and operation from the ongoing processes. Niskanen [8] stated that
not only management participation and its involvement in the safety acts that is important, but also how far
the management support the involvement of the workforces.
Process. This dimension explains on how an organization designs, manages and improves the process for
supporting the policy and strategy and entirely satisfies and produces value improvement for customers,
employees and other stakeholders.
Behavior. Human behavior is a reflection of psychic condition such as knowledge, desire, interest,
emotion, willingness, thought, motivation, perception, attitude, reaction, and so on. Another definition of
behavior (human behavior) is all human actions or activities, both the ones can be directly observed or the
ones that cannot be observed by other parties, that is considered as a reflection of psychic condition to
provide response to the situation outside of one’s self.
Safety Cost. The Cost of management system of Occupational Health and Safety of construction is a cost
required to implement the management system of Occupational Health and Safety in every construction work
that shall be taken into account and allocated by Service Providers and Service Users. The commitment of the
leader regarding with the safety will be clearly reflected in this dimension, where the strong commitment of a
leader regarding with the safety will always lead his performance at the same level with productivity. It
means that the leader will not hastily “approve” the reducing of the budget allocated for Occupational Health
and Safety only to reduce the cost in order to win a project.
Contract System. Construction contract is defined as a process where the project owner establishes an
association with the agent with the tasks to coordinate all project implementation activity including feasibility
study, design, planning, construction contract preparation, and so on, project activity with the purpose of
minimizing the cost and schedule and also maintaining project quality.
Values. When Occupational Health and Safety has shifted into norms and values for a company, then
Occupational Health and Safety will be a priority regardless to the threats and conditions. The Occupational
Health and Safety will never be overlooked by other elements including production or customers. However,
it does not mean that Occupational Health and Safety will detain the production or business process, but it
exactly will ensure the success of production process by considering the entire possible failure risks.
As demonstrated in Fig. 3, research methodology is a way of thinking in determining the steps of research
based on how to build a safety culture in a construction company. This study was initiated by the expert
030019-3
validation by using the Delphi method to determine variables in the construction safety culture.
Subsequently, survey was performed on 105 respondents in state-owned companies to obtain the data as
embodied in the model of construction safety culture.
Input Process Output
• Regulation of • Expert validation • Safety Culture

Safety • Survey on Dimension
• Literature respondents • Indicator of
Review • Quantitative and Safety Culture
qualitative Dimension
analysis • Policy
Improvement
FIGURE 3. Research Methodology
RESEARCH RESULT
The analysis of literature review and expert validation obtained 9 (nine) dimension of safety culture on
the construction companies, as shown in Table 2. This evaluation used bootstrapping procedure whose aim
was to predict the relationship between the latent variables. Subsequently, it was used to evaluate the
structural model in order to assess the magnitude of the percentage of the explained variance to obtain the
value of R2, to construct latent endogenous, Stone-Geisser's = Q2 to test the predictive relevance and average
variance extracted (AVE) to predict the re-sampling procedure. This procedure used the entire original
sample to perform re-sampling where the record number should be higher than the original sample as
demonstrated in Fig. 4. Figure 4 demonstrated the significance of relation among the variables could be
identified by examining the value of t-value (T Statistic) which was greater than 1.96.
FIGURE 4. Safety Culture Model
030019-4
TABLE 2. The Dimensions and Indicators of Safety Culture
Code Dimensions
Leadership
X1.1 Top management commitment
X1. 2 Two-ways communication between management and employees
X1. 3 Accountability management
X1. 4 Leading with example (role model)
X1. 5 Support from management to the employees
Policy
X2.1 National Safety Standard
X2.2 Policy and procedure of the company
Strategy
X3.1 Safety incentive (reward system)
X3.2 Safety audit strategy
X3.3 Stakeholder collaboration
X3.4 Project participants’ teamwork
Worker
X4.1 Communal perception and consciousness on safety
X4.2 Support on occupational environment security (security, hygiene instruments)
X4.3 Worker involvement in Occupational Health And Safety program planning
X4.4 Co-workers relationship
X4.5 Overload work pressure leads to the increasing of injury frequency
X4.6 Comprehension of responsibility towards Occupational Health And Safety and occupational risks
Process
X5.1 Company provides safety training
X5.2 The assessment of risks and dangers
X5.3 Feedback of safety implementation
X5.4 Non-judgmental approach
X5.5 Site layout and housekeeping planning
X5.6 Possessing an effective benchmarking system
X5.7 Job clarity
X5.8 The availability of Occupational Safety Documents
Behavior
X6.1 Reporting occupational accident that happens
X6.2 Reminding other workers about occupational safety and danger
X6.3 Wearing occupational health and safety gear.
X6.4 Properly placing the material and instrument in the provided place
X6.5 Properly working according to all occupational safety procedure
X6.6 Following all instructions from management
X6.7 Joking with co-workers while working
X6.8 Often performing dangerous movement like running, throwing, hoping
Safety cost
X7.1 Equipment provision cost
X7.2 Occupational equipment maintenance cost
X7.3 Safety personnel provision cost
X7.4 Safety warranty cost
X7.5 Safety publication/training implementation cost
X7.6 occupational accident compensation cost
X7.7 management system of OSH (MSOSH) external audit cost
Contract System
X8.1 Worker quality
X8.2 Sanction
X8.3 Worker’s right and obligation
X8.4 Type of contract
Value
X9.1 Safety is a communal responsibility
X9.2 Discussing safety on every meeting schedule
X9.3 Identification and analysis of accident
X9.4 Attitude towards safety
030019-5
According to Table 3, the values of R-Square (R2) were obtained from Safety performance of 0.542 that
means the variability construct of Safety performance can be explained by Cost, Policy, Worker, Behavior,
Process, Systems Contracts, Value System, Strategy, and Leadership by 54.2%.
TABLE 3. Result of R Square (R2)

Dimensions Original Sample T Statistics
Cost 0.536 5.169
Policy 0.144 3.120
Safety Performance 0.542 5.711
Worker 0.555 7.103
Behaviour 0.782 17.889
Process 0.623 9.229
Contract System 0.422 4.576
Value 0.188 1.970
Strategy 0.663 11.554
Leadership 0.856 19.258
DISCUSSION
Results of the study indicated that in building a culture of safety in terms of safety performance, the state-
owned company gained 54%. It means that in achieving the target to improve the safety performance, the
construction company was less determined to establish the safety culture comprising of the dimensions of
leadership, employees, values, strategy, contract, policies, fees, behaviors, and processes. Indicators for the
success of a good leadership are the commitment of management, leadership that provides a good example,
and two-way communication between workers and management. The role of leadership in the top
management will determine the successful implementation of safety culture in construction projects.
The factor of Safety Cost is one determinant of success in building safety culture. To attain the effective
and ideal Safety, a construction company must allocate the cost of each element of the activities related to
Safety, for example, the provision of personal protective equipment, tool box meetings, safety patrols, safety
net etc. In addition, policies related to Safety that forms the culture of safety in the construction industry
should be implemented and evaluated continuously in order to be understood by all stakeholders in the
construction projects.
In the context of safety, the paradigm initially only focused on how to cope in the event of accidents has
changed gradually. In fact, people began to realize that precautions (prevention strategy) for workplace
accidents are far more important and cost much cheaper than the prevention efforts. One highly effective
preventive measure is the overall and integrative K3 policy implementation. Policies or regulations and
programs that regulate workplace safety are a very effective strategy in preventing accidents [9]. This was
confirmed by the results of research carried out by Abduh [10] that concluded the risk of workplace accidents
could be reduced if the government develop the laws and procedures related to safety.
CONCLUSIONS
According to the results of analysis and discussion, some conclusions can be drawn as follow:
1. Occupational Safety Culture Dimensions which significantly affect the performance of national private
construction company including Leadership, Policy, Strategy, Worker, Process, Behavior, Safety Cost,
Contract System, and Value.
2. Safety culture of the modeling as generated by T statistics tables illustrates that the level of safety
performance of state-owned companies amounted to 54%. Dimensional structuring of the results forming
the safety culture at the construction company was concluded that the dimensions of cost (5.169);
Worker (7.103); Behaviour (17.889); Process (9.229); Contract (4,576); Value (1,970); Strategy
(11,554); Leadership (19.258) and Policy (3.120). All of them were higher than 1.96 which is the
condition of T statistical significance.
This research suggests that:
1. The research result regarding with the occupational safety culture dimension can be implemented in
order to arrange occupational safety culture dimension of a company, especially within construction
industry which has a quite high rate of occupational accident.
030019-6
2. Monitoring and evaluation through a strict audit mechanism both from the internal and external, i.e.,
Central government, particularly the ministry associated with construction industry, may improve the
safety culture in the industrial sector.
3. Further research should explore the impact of safety cost on safety performance that involves the
authorities of government regulation through focus group discussion of Delphi round so that the
recommendation from this research can be manifested into a policy in Indonesia in the future.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors would like to acknowledge PITTA Grant of Universitas Indonesia for the funding support of
the research project.
REFERENCES
1. Choudhry, M. Rafiq, F. Dongping, & M. Sherif. (2007). The nature of safety culture: A survey of the
state-of-the-art. Safety science, 45(10), 993-1012.
2. A. P. C. Chen, F. K. W. Wong, D. W. M. Chan, M.C.H. Yam, A.W.K. Kwok, E.W.M. Lam, & E.
Cheung. (2008). Work at height fatalities in the repair, maintanance, alteration and addition works,
Journal of Construction Engineering and Management-ASCE, 134, 527-535.
3. J. T. Reason. (2000). Human error: Models and Management. BMJ, (online) vol.320.
4. OHSAS, BRITISH STANDARD. "18001: 2007." Occupational health and safety management systems.
London (2007).
5. H. Lingard and N. Blismas. (2006). “Building a safety culture: the importance of shared mental models
in the Australian construction industry”. In: D. Fang, R.M. Choudhry and J.W. Hinze, eds. Proceedings
of the CIB W99 2006 international conference on global unity for safety and health in construction, 28-
30 June 2006, Beijing, China. Beijing: Tsinghua University Press, 201-208.
6. A. I. Glendon and D. K. Litherland. "Safety climate factors, group differences and safety behaviour in
road construction." Safety science 39.3 (2001): 157-188.
7. T. Aksorn and B. H. W. Hadikusumo. "Critical success factors influencing safety program performance
in Thai construction projects." Safety Science 46.4 (2008): 709-727.
8. T. Niskanen. "Safety climate in the road administration." Safety Science 17.4 (1994): 237-255.
9. B. Endroyo & T. Tugino. (2009). Analisis Faktor-faktor Penyebab Kecelakaan Kerja Konstruksi. Jurnal
Teknik Sipil dan Perencanaan, 9(1), pp-21. www.ced.petra.ac.id.
10. S. B. Abduh. (Juni, 2010). Pengelolaan Faktor Non-Personil Untuk Pencegahan, Prosiding Seminar
Nasional Teknik Sipil Ke-4, Bali Kecelakaan Kerja Konstruksi. Jurnal dipresentasikan pada Konferensi
Nasional Teknik Sipil ke-4. Bali.
030019-7
Effect of deacetylation on functional properties of glucomannan
Dyah Hesti Wardhani, Dewi Puspitosari, Mochammad A. Ashidiq, Nita Aryanti, and Aji Prasetyaningrum

Effect of Deacetylation on Functional Properties of
Glucomannan
Dyah Hesti Wardhania), Dewi Puspitosari, Mochammad A. Ashidiq, Nita Aryanti,
and Aji Prasetyaningrum
Chemical Engineering Department, Faculty of Engineering, Diponegoro University, Indonesia

Jl. Prof. Sudarto, SH, Tembalang-Semarang 50239, Central Java-Indonesia
Phone +62-24-7460058, Fax +62-24-76480675
a)
Corresponding author: dhwardhani@che.undip.ac.id
Abstract. Glucomannan is one of the highest viscosity polysaccharides with high water absorbing capacity. This
property limits glucomannan applications; hence, it requires modifications. Glucomannan has 5-10% acetyl group which
confers its functional properties. Replacing the acetyl with alkali transforms the functional characteristic of modified
glucomannan. The aim of this study was to determine the effect of deacetylation conditions on the functional properties
of glucomannan of A. oncophyllus. Effects of concentration of Na2CO3 (0.1-0.5 M), reaction time (1-5 h) and
temperature deacetylation (40-80oC) were studied on glucomannan solubility, viscosity and water binding capacity
(WBC). Deacetylation conditions affected solubility, viscosity and WBC of deacetylated glucomannan differently.
Concentration of Na2CO3 showed negative impact on solubility, viscosity and WBC of deacetylated glucomannan.
Solubility increased with increasing temperature and extending duration of deacetylation. Meanwhile, temperature and
reaction time were in a reverse relation with viscosity. These changes of functional properties could be due to removing
the acetyl groups and subsequently replacing with the alkali during deacetylation. However, the effect of this replacement
to the functional properties of deacetylated glucomannan was not linear with the deacetylation conditions. This could be
due to various removal distributions of acetyl groups during glucomannan deacetylation.
INTRODUCTION
Glucomannan of Amorphophallus konjac is a non-ionic linear copolymer which consists of a random order of E-
1,4 linked D-glucopyranose and D-mannopyranose sugars in 1:1.6 ratio. Certain short side branches at the C-3
position of the mannoses are found through Ⱦ-1,6-glucosyl units. It also has a low degree of acetyl groups at C-6
position on average every 9-19 sugar units [1].
Glucomannan is one of the highest viscosity polysaccharides which is commonly used as a functional food
material due to its high water absorbing capacity. It also has an extraordinarily high water binding capacity, which
takes up to 200 times of its weight when dissolved in water [2]. Glucomannan is commonly used as a food
ingredient in Europe (E425) including as gelling due to its exceptionally high swelling characteristic when hydrated
[3]. Due to the unique high viscosity and gelling property, glucomannan is widely emSOR\HGDVHPXOVL¿HUstabilizer,
and thickening agent in the food, cosmetic and pharmaceutical areas, such as composite materials, biodegradable
¿OPDQGFRQtrolled release matrix [4].
Recently, glucomannan has been paid increasing attention as an encapsulation excipient and controlled release
material since it is nontoxic, safe, hydrophilic and biodegradable [3]. Unfortunately, the glucomannan native
properties limit these applications. Hence, many approaches have been conducted to improve and modify the
glucomannan functional properties in order to serve the particular applications.
Chokboribal et al. [5] reported that structurally the acetyl groups on the mannose residues are the only non-sugar
functional groups present in acemannan. Hence, these groups could be a functional domain of acemannan that
affects, at least partially, its physical properties and biological activity.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030020-1–030020-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985490
030020-1
The presence of acetyl groups in glucomanan restrains the formation of both intramolecular hydrogen bonds and
intermolecular hydrogen bonds between glucomannan molecules. It is well-known that the removal of the acetyl
groups upon the addition of an alkaline and heating results in the formation of a thermoirreversible gel [6].
Eliminating acetyl groups produces deacetylated konjac glucomannan, which has the ability to build junction zones
through hydrogen bonding, dipole-dipole (among water molecules and OH groups of deacetylated glucomannan),
van der Waals, charge transfer and hydrophobic interactions etc[2].
The alkaline degradation has been conducted in various polysaccharides such as chitosan and alginate. Thermal
treatment and molecular conformation are common leading roles of alkali degradation [4]. The removal of acetyl
glucomannan by alkaline treatment has been extensively studied by many research groups in relation to gelation
mechanism due to many interests in pharmaceutical, biomedical, cosmetic applications etc. The deacetylated
glucomannan has been studied for application in sausage and restructured seafood products [7], wound dressing [8],
and controlled release of DNA [9]. The impact of deacetylation on other glucomannan functional properties was still
underexplored. Deacetylation of glucomannan by alkali treatment has been commonly performed in homogeneous
systems mostly using water for preparing the solution. Unfortunately, high concentration of glucomannan is not able
to be prepared due to its high viscosity as well as the complicated procedures. This drawback has severely limited
the applications of homogeneous deacetylation. On the other hand, heterogeneous deacetylation was an excellent
method for mass production of the deacetylated glucomannan [10].
One of widely known local glucomannan sources is porang tuber (Amorphophallus oncophyllus). This tuber
commonly grows wildly in the border of Indonesia forestry. This tuber is underutilized for direct human
consumption due to the calcium oxalate content which causes irritation in mouth. So far, the tuber is only processed
as low-value dried chips or low quality flour [11]. The utilization of glucomannan of A. oncophyllus and its
deacetilation is underexplored. Therefore, the aim of this work was to study the effect of deacetylation conditions on
functional properties of glucomannan of A. oncophyllus. Effects of concentration of Na2CO3 (0.1-0.5 M), reaction
time (1-5 h) and temperature deacetylation (40-80oC) were studied on solubility, viscosity and water binding
capacity (WBC) of deacetylated glucomannan.
Materials
A. oncophyllus flour was bought from local farmers in Nganjuk, East Java-Indonesia. Glucomannan was
extracted from A. oncophyllus IORXU IROORZLQJ5DKD\X PHWKRG¶V using 2-propyl alcohol solution (IPA, 70%) [12].
The glucomannan content of purified flour was 76.3%. Na2CO3 and ethanol (95%) were used in deacetylation
reaction and washing the deacetylated glucomannan, respectively. Technical grade of Na2CO3, IPA and ethanol
were used in the glucomannan extraction and the deacetylation.
Deacetylation Reaction
Deacetylation was carried out based on the method of Du et al., [6]. Glucomannan (20 g) and etanol (70%, 100
ml) were placed and stirred continuously in Erlenmeyer for 30 mins. After adding certain concentration of Na2CO3,
the suspension was reacted at 50oC for 3 h with continuous mixing. The suspension was vacuum-filtered using cloth.
The cake was subsequently washed with ethanol (50 ml, 95%). The solid was oven-dried at 40oC to obtain dried
powder of deacetylated glucomannan. This reaction was conducted at various concentrations of Na2CO3 (0.1, 0.2,
0.3, 0.4 and 0.5 M), reaction periods (1, 2, 2.5, 3 and 5 h) and temperatures (40, 50, 60, 70 and 80 oC).
Solubility
Solubility of samples was determined based on the method of Akpa et al., [13]. Deacetylated glucomannan (0.1
g) diluted with 10 ml distilled water which was heated 60 oC for 30 min in waterbath. After centrifuged at 4000 rpm
for 20 min, the supernatant was collected and preweighted before being dried.
weigh of dried supernatan (1)
solubility (%) x100
weight of supernatan
030020-2
Viscosity
Viscosity was determined three times every 10 min using Ostwald viscometer. Deacetylated glucomannan (0.5
g) was diluted with 50 ml distilled water. The suspension was added to the viscometer, pulled into the upper
reservoir by suction, and then allowed to drain by gravity back into the lower reservoir. The time taken by the liquid
to pass between the top and bottom marks below the upper reservoir was measured. The equipment was calibrated
using distilled water as reference liquid. The relative viscosity (cP) is:
Uxt
K xK (2)
U o xt o o
where ȡ and t are the density and the time of outflow of the sample, ȡ0 and t0 are the density and the time of the
outflow of the reference liquid.
Water Binding Capacity

Water binding capacity (WBC) was determined following a slight modification of the method reported by
Sarbon et al. [14]. Samples (0.1 g) were diluted with distilled water (10 ml) and heated in water bath (60 oC, 30 min).
After centrifuged at 4000 rpm for 20 min, the tube was reweighed after the supernatant was decanted. The WBC was
calculated as the following equation:
water bound (g) (3)
WBC(%) x100
sample weight (g)
Solubility of Deacetylated Glucomannan

Effects of Na2CO3 concentration, reaction time and temperature of deacetylation on solubility of deacetylated
glucomannan were presented in Fig. 1, 2 and 3 respectively. Increasing Na2CO3 concentration in deacetylation
reaction conferred the negative effect on the solubility. Increasing Na2CO3 from 0.1 M to 0.5 M resulted in
decreasing solubility from 14.77% to 9.52%. Glucomannan contains 5-10% of acetyl groups reported to confer the
aqueous solubility of glucomannan. This acetyl was involved in enhancing hydrogen bonding with water and
reduced hydrophobic interaction [6]. The decrease of solubility could be due to the loss of acetyl groups during
deacetylation. Higher Na2CO3 concentrations involved in the deacetylation reaction increased the acetyl groups to be
substituted with the alkali. Decreasing the amount of acetyl group of deacetylated glucomannan removed steric
hindrance and made the glucomannan available to associate and to form more numerous junction zones [15].
7KLVUHVXOWFRQ¿UPs that the presence of acetyl groups confers the solubility of glucomannan in aqueous solution.
Our results are supported by Chokboribal et al., [5] who found that deacetylation of acemanan from Aloe vera
increases hydrophobicity but decreases water solubility. They suggested that deacetylation reduces the steric
hindrance and leads to increasing crystalline structure which has lower solubility. Fully acetylated acemannan had
an amorphous structure resembling porous sponge, while removing the acetyl groups by deacetylation resulted in
higher crystallinity of more flattened and sheet-like layered structure with irregular pores. Moreover, Li et al. [10]
reported that increasing ratio between alkali and acetyl resulted in higher degree of deacetylated (DD) of the
glucomannan. They found that the solubility of the glucomannan decreased with increasing DD. Higher DD
demonstrated a denser structure which allows the reduction of solubility [5]. Chen et al., [15] found that solubility of
deacetylated glucomannan with DD up to 52% was not significantly different compared to the native one.
Deacetylated glucomannan with DD higher than 67% showed a significant decrease of solubility.
Hence, Li et al., [10] proposed that good solubility of glucomannan occurred only within a very narrow range of
acetyl group content. In moderate acetyl group content, strong steric effect promoted the dissolution by hindering
molecular chain association. During deacetylation, the acetyl group content of glucomannan was reduced from
moderate to low content which resulted in decreasing steric effect and the solubility.
Meanwhile, solubility of deacetilated glucomannan slightly increased with extended time and temperature
deacetylation. Similar trend was found by Patria et al., [16] who showed the positive impact of temperature and
030020-3
duration deacetylation on DD of chitosan. The more acetyl groups are removed, the easier the polymer interacts with
water through hydrogen bonding and facilitates dissolution of glucomannan.
18 1400 200
180
1300
16 160
Water Binding Capacity (%)

1200
140
Viscosity (cP)
Solubility (%)
14
120
1100
100
12 1000
80
900 60
10
40
800
0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
Concentration of Na2CO3 (M)
Solubility (%)
Viscosity (cP)
Water Binding Capacity (%)
FIGURE 1. Correlation between concentration of Na2CO3 and the functional properties of deacetylated glucomannan
Viscosity of Deacetylated Glucomannan

Figures 1, 2, and 3 show that the viscosity of deacetylated glucomannan decreased with increasing Na2CO3
concentration, extended time and temperature. This decrease could be due to degradation effect of glucomannan
during deacetylation. Increasing alkali concentration from 0.1 M to 0.5 M affected decreasing viscosity from 1300
cP to 900 cP. Decreasing viscosity from 1150 cP to 900 cP was observed by extending the reaction duration to 5 h.
Viscosity is commonly proportional to molecular weight, particularly for materials with a high molecular weight
[17]. Increasing the deacetylation variables promoted more glucomannan degradation and resulted in lower
molecular weight. Hence, degradation of the polymer through deacetylation resulted in lower viscosity of the
polymer. Chen et al., [15] also showed that such degradation decreased the molecular weight after deacetylation of
glucomannan. A similar result was reported by Jin et al., [4] who found lower viscosity, which was observed at
moderate alkalinity. Moreover, higher temperature disordered the arrangement of molecular and weakened the
interaction molecular forces resulted in lower viscosity. This effect was more prominent at higher alkalinity [4].
Decreasing viscosity in extended deacetylation was also reported by Alishahi et al., [18], Abouzeed et al., [19], Pan
et al., [20], Patria et al., [16] and Bajaj et al., [21] on deacetylation chitosan. Kofuji et al., [17] noted unobserved a
linear relationship between viscosity and molecular weight. This could be due to differences in the distribution of
the acetyl group in glucomannan molecule which results from differences in deacetylation conditions. This
LQÀXHQFHVWKHYLVFRVLW\RIGHDFHW\ODWHGJOXFRPDQQDQE\FKDQJLQJWKHLQWHU- or intra-molecular repulsion forces.
Water Binding Capacity

WBC of deacetylated glucomannan decreased with increasing Na2CO3 concentration and deacetylation duration.
Reverse trend of WBC was observed for temperature effect. Similar trends of the effect of temperature and duration
of deacetylation on WBC were reported by Abouzeed et al., [19]. Herranz et al., [2] found no significant effect of
alkali concentration (0.6-1 mol/L) on WHC of deacetylated chitosan. Nouri et al., [22] found that WBC of chitosan
030020-4
showed a positive effect with deacetylation temperature (60-100oC), but in reverse correlation with the reaction
time. They suggested that an inhibition of the deacetylation could occur at longer time.
The WBC was found to have a high negative correlation with DD, molecular weight, viscosity and moisture
content on chitosan [14]. Trung et al., [23] reported that increasing DD promoted lower WBC in chitosan. They
showed that this phenomenon is in a good agreement with crystallinity. Low DD has a lower crystalline arrangement
than the higher DD. This discrepancies effect of deacetylation on WBC could be attributed to various distributions
of acetyl group during deacetylation as argued by Kofuji et al., [17].
FIGURE 2. Correlation between deacetylation time (h) and the functional properties of deacetylated glucomannan
FIGURE 3. Correlation between deacetylation temperature and the functional properties of deacetylated glucomannan
030020-5
CONCLUSIONS
Glucomannan has 5-10% acetyl group which conferred its functional properties. Replacing the acetyl with
Na2CO3 transformed the functional characteristic of deacetylated glucomannan. The results suggest that
concentration of Na2CO3, reaction time and temperature affect solubility, viscosity and WBC of deacetylated
glucomannan differently. Concentration of Na2CO3 showed a negative impact on solubility, viscosity and WBC of
deacetylated glucomannan. Solubility increased with the increasing temperature and extending duration of
deacetylation. Meanwhile, temperature and reaction time were in a reverse relationship with viscosity. These
changes of functional properties could be due to replacing the acetyl residue with the alkali during deacetylation.
However, the effect of this replacement to the functional properties of deacetylated glucomannan was not linear with
the deacetylation conditions which could be due to various removal distributions of acetyl groups during
glucomannan deacetylation.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors would like to acknowledge PNBP DIPA UNDIP for funding the research project [Project Number =
SD DIPA-042.01.2.400898/2016, Date 7 December 2015 Fiscal Year 2016].
REFERENCES
1. M. Chua, et al., Carbohydrate Polymer 87, 2202-2210 (2012).
2. B. Herranz, et al., LWT - Food Science and Technology 51, 500-506 (2013).
3. C. Zhang, et al., Carbohydrate Polymers 104, 175-181 (2014).
4. W. Jin, et al., Carbohydrate Polymers 99, 270±277 (2014).
5. J. Chokboribal, et al., Carbohydrate Polymers, 133, 556-566 (2015).
6. X. Du, et al., Food Research International 46, 270±278 (2012)
7. B. Solo-de-Zaldívar et al., Food Hydrocolloids 35, 59-68 (2014).
8. Y-C. Huang, et al., Carbohydrate Polymers 117, 778±787 (2015).
9. X. Wen, et al., International Journal of Biological Macromolecules 42, 256±263(2008).
10. J. Li, et al., Food Hydrocolloids 40, 9-15 (2014).
11. E. Harmayani, et al., Carbohydrate Polymers 112, 475±479 (2014).
12. L. H. Rahayu, MSc thesis, University of Diponegoro, Semarang, 2013.
13. J. G. Akpa, et al., 2012, International Journal of Engineering and Technology 2, 913-919 (2012).
14. N.M. Sarbon, et al., J. Food Sci. Technol. 52, 4266±4275 (2015).
15. J. Chen, et al., Carbohydrate Polymers 86, 865±871(2011).
16. A. Patria, et al., AACL Bioflux, 6, 339-344 (2013).
17. K. Kofuji, et al., European Polymer Journal 41, 2784±2791 (2005).
18. A. Alishahi, et al. J Polym Environ 19, 776±783(2011).
19. A. S. Abouzeed, et al., American Journal of Life Sciences 3, 38-44 (2015).
20. Z. Pan, et al., Particuology 9, 265±269 (2011).
21. M. Bajaj, et al., Biochemical Engineering Journal 56, 51±62 (2011).
22. M. Nouri, et al., Progress in Rubber, Plastics and Recycling Technology 32, 39-53 (2016).
23. T. S. Trung, et al., Bioresource Technology 97, 659±663 (2006).
030020-6
Aligning business strategy of incubator center and tenants
Yudha Prasetyawan, Elly Agustiani, and Sari Jumayla

Aligning Business Strategy of Incubator Center and Tenants
Yudha Prasetyawan1, a), Elly Agustiani2, b) and Sari Jumayla1, c)
1
Industrial Engineering Department, Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember Surabaya, Indonesia. Kampus ITS
2
Chemical Engineering Department, Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember Surabaya, Indonesia. Kampus ITS
a)
Corresponding authors: yudhaprase@gmail.com
b)
ellyagustiani@yahoo.com
c)
sjumayla@gmail.com
Abstract. Incubator center is developed to help a particular group of small business players to achieve the expected
business growth. In this center, business players often called as tenants will get assistances in pertaining with space,
professional network, marketing, investment or funding, and training to improve their business capability. There are three
types of incubator center, namely universities that help their alumni or business people in their surrounded area, company
that supports small business as the corporate social responsibility, and independent organizations that have specialties in
the business development. Some might success in increasing the capacity of the tenants, while other can have difficulties
to increase the simplest business capability, e.g., to define the production cost to measure the profit. This study was
intended to propose a model to align the business strategy between incubator center and its tenants. The sales and profit
growth are the main priorities for the tenants together with their business capability and sustainability. The proposed
alignment model provides measurement tools that link the motivation of tenants for joining the incubation process with
the mission of incubator center. The linkage covered the key performance indicators (KPI), steps to achieve the target and
evaluation tools to improve the current handicaps. An experiment on 4 (four) diverse business fields of the tenants of an
incubator center was performed to test the model. As a result, the increase of KPI of incubator center will simultaneously
yield a higher value of the WHQDQWV¶VDOHV
INTRODUCTION
A powerful start-up business player is needed in current tight business competition. Powerful here means the
start-up business players should have sufficient endurance to face failure and ability to seek potential opportunity for
gaining maximum profit. However, most of them only have limited capability in initiating a business although they
have a propensity to possess high spirit for understanding the current business environment, following the strategy
of the successful players, and producing the idea to solve the business problem. The lofty energy of new business
players would achieve better result with the guidance from experienced person or organization like incubator center.
The guidance may include the experiences for pursuing new customers, hunting the right suppliers, getting trust
from the investors, and managing the business growth and sustainability.
Incubator center has three different main organizations. The first is the government and non-government
organization (NGO) that have no profit orientation but creating job opportunities. The second is universities or
education institutions that disseminate their researches and innovations. The third is private organizations or
companies that seek for profit and extend their business networks. Based on their different missions, a typical
incubator center should have a specific strategy and communicate it with their tenants. Tenants as startup players
can choose which organization will be suitable for them where they might join one institution or more. However,
business ethics and agreement should be explicated in advance to avoid any conflict of interest. The model has been
offered as shared industrial incubator, semi-share industrial incubator, and non-shared industrial incubation [1]. A
bigger advantage has been identified for non-shared type rather than others in case of the acquisition, initial
investment, and flexibility. The non-profit institution often put the money or investment without having appropriate
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030021-1–030021-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985491
030021-1
mitigation steps to face the business risk. On the other hand, the profit-oriented organization will be very careful to
calculate every potential lost in any level of business risk.
Tenants are the primary key in incubation process as they can specifically choose how the business is operated,
which product is produced, and how to achieve business development. Thus, a strong motivation should be included
in each factor in incubation process framework. It is also important to include person with disabilities in an equal
condition with other tenants as well. Mutual respect and professional friendship, commitment, credibility and stature
in disability would be the basic foundation in order to have a promising business future [2]. The tenants presume
that incubator center will be their partner with the same vision towards their business and to address their
drawbacks. The factors in the incubation process are the technological factor, organization and human resource
development, and innovation capability [3]. To achieve better business performance, the combination of governance,
infrastructure, scenarios, and strategic development should be evaluated to find the optimum result [4].
Business sustainability is a crucial point of success in business incubation process, as this can be applied to both
tenants and incubator center. Sustainability means the determined activities during the pre-incubation to have
innovation and business assessment; incubation to have mentoring and advanced business planning; and post-
incubation to have further commercialization and business development [5]. Basically, incubator center classifies
two stages in the incubation process: the first 0-3 years as the stage of powerful spirit and the next 3-5 years as the
stage to determine the survival or business growth in the future. Those stages require the absorptive capacity for
receiving knowledge sources and complementary experiences as the competitive advantage through acquisition,
assimilation, transformation and exploitation [6].
Finally, incubator center will find the optimal way related with the space, service, counseling or mentoring, and
financial access to achieve the maximum target number of tenants who can pass the incubation process. Meanwhile,
tenants will follow the process at their maximum capability to obtain the best result of business creation and growth.
A comprehensive understanding of business process plays a vital role in the business where it is not merely the
capacity for selling products or gaining maximum profit. Thus, the alignment of mission and activities between
incubator center and tenants should cover the managing process (MP), core process (CP), and support process (SP)
in a complete package of business process [7].
LITERATURE REVIEW
Incubator center or business incubator is intended to provide technical assistance service, which is different with
the Scientific Technologic Park (STP) that offers services to transform innovation or technology into an actual form
of Small to Medium Enterprises (SME) [8]. However, it is common for STP to have incubator center to assist the
SMEs as the tenants. STP and incubator center were initiated in 1951 in California and spread over the world with
diverse patterns. Generally, STP becomes the first stage to create new business that is followed by incubator center
as the stage to enhance the capability of start-up players. Meanwhile in several cases, incubator center becomes the
initial stage for the start-up players due to the very tight competition between SMEs and large scale companies.
Furthermore, the business environment within a particular country will also affect the tenants¶ GHYHORSPHQW.
Several factors such as the cost of contract enforcement, property rights, labor markets, fiscal burden, trade barriers
and bankruptcy regulation might be a high cost for the tenants [9]. In many occasions, tenants at the SME level
cannot face the business competition because they do not have sufficient capital to produce the desirable product.
Consequently, tenants tend to seek for niche market in order to gain a small amount of profit to enhance their future
investment. For some reasons, the loan from a financial institution is not an option. Thus, an understanding of cost
structure and revenue stream as illustrated in a common business model is required to recognize clear and hidden
opportunities [10].
The Role of Incubator Center

Incubator center has the primary mission of bringing the start-up players or tenants into independent business
players. Although the main organization behind each incubator center is diverse, the collaboration among them
would be beneficial for tenants. An initiated collaboration among industry, researchers and institution, government,
financial institution, and civil society such as users and customers, will address the conducive factors, obstacles, and
remarks for further recommendation [11]. Furthermore, STP as cooperation between government and education
institution can also find the potential resources within a local area and identify the strength and problem [12]. In
terms of the local socio-economic problem, a joint program between academia, business and government can also
030021-2
provide the potential commodity that can be created by tenants [13]. Thus, cooperation agenda will always be the
best way to boost the number of start-up players and new potential products.
Based on the inspiration of collaborative action and recommendation, the role of incubator center can be
extended into several functions of partial mentoring such as consultation points and entrepreneurship support centers
[14]. However, the basic function of dealing with tenants should be the main priority while the extended function
can attract potential investors and potential tenants. Entrepreneurship policy issued by the government would also be
the input for the upcoming tenants [15] by clear mapping of region and citizen skill or ability [16]. This can be done
by selecting the best candidates of entrepreneurship idea and listing them as tenants. The cooperation, competitors,
the next-generation interest and lack of access to large business are still big problems in providing friendly
environment to grow tenants as SME [17]. Figure 1 summarizes the role of a good incubator center, as the whole
process will reduce difficulties and create extended function, while collaboration and mapping become the input of
potential tenants. The process shows specialties of each level of business process and incubation stage by face to
face for talking, walking in front for guiding, walking side by side for mentoring and walking from behind for
supporting.
FIGURE 1. The role of incubator center
University incubator center, in particular, has the responsibility to discover new product as a result of academic
research. The sources can be derived from the innovative activities and researches from the students and academic
staffs. The critical factor is the availability of potential licensees that can be converted into commercialization [18].
Collaboration between university and companies is very important for the model of single relation or clustered
relation for each business field [19]. Thus, a medium to long-termed business strategy for WHQDQWV¶ development can
be set, implemented and improved [20]. In addition the tenants of the private, NGO or other types of incubator
center are commonly the local people. It can be such a burden due to the various backgrounds and business levels. A
business trust is relatively hard to be established due the absence of previous relationship experience. However, the
collaboration between stakeholders plays a significant role to build a strong business climate and condition [21]. In
overall, incubator center should continuously manage proper entry requirement, sufficient number of incubated and
graduated firms, optimum period of incubation, and number of generated jobs [22]. Finally, venture capital has a
very significant influence on the business growth. A sustainable venture capital requires more flexible natures such
as practical idealism, startup failure compromise, slow-returned investment, long-termed nurturing and willing to
seek activities synergy [23]. A venture capitalist is expected to have experience at least 4²10 years [24].
Tenants Participation
Even though tenants are the object of mentoring evaluation and performance evaluation, they also manage the
overall incubation process activities in order to achieve the maximum result. Tenants should possess the
characteristics of innovative, proactive, risk taker, entrepreneurial intention, and willing to commercialize since
these variables are interrelated [25]. The DVVHVVPHQW RQ WHQDQWV¶ business capability is crucial that is performed
based on MP, CP, and SP. MP level is used to define the strategic level of WHQDQWV¶capability to achieve the business
030021-3
sustainability. CP level is used to define the operational level of WHQDQWV¶capability to create a valuable product for
the customer, that involves the ability to discover an innovative product, produce the expected quantity and provide
a better quality GXH WR SURGXFW¶V shorter life cycle. SP level is used to define the additional level of WHQDQWV¶
capability to have more effective and efficient process to support the business process that involve the ability to
choose the correct option for financial recording and reporting, increase the level of autonomous maintenance,
information technology support and dynamic human resource development since the present and future activities are
dynamic and diverse.
7HQDQWV¶Sarticipation can be divided into three categories, namely the potential entrance, willingness and spirit
of graduation. The potential entrance will be affected by the previous orientation of entrepreneurship and local
business index. Previous orientation means the tenants¶ orientation after completing their studies such as to be an
employee, an absence of any plan, to be entrepreneur and strong willing to be an entrepreneur [26]. Meanwhile,
business index means number of company in the surrounded area and the variety of business [27]. The duration of
incubation process is approximately 2-4 years, thus the willingness to join the process should be very high as tenants
have to attend many activities [28]. Some tenants might enjoy the incubation process since it discusses each aspect
of their business [29]. Spirit of graduation will encourage the tenants to become the great and independent players in
their business.
Innovation and motivation will be the main factors in IRUPLQJWKHWHQDQWV¶ZLOOLQJQHVVDQGFDSDELOLW\,QQRYDWLRQ
will follow the path of idea generation, idea conversion and idea diffusion [30], or the steps toward innovation
capability and innovation success [31]. However, innovation depends on the collaborative network such as
considering policies and process, external funding acquirement, promotion of collaborative innovation within the
network, and collaboration of management with partners [32]. To achieve a better result, innovation should be
merged with technology transfer [33]. Motivation generally depends on social norms, entrepreneurial intention [34],
technical skills, management practices [35], and ease of access to expected resources [36]. The combination of those
IDFWRUV LQ ZLOO HQKDQFH WKH WHQDQWV¶ PRWLYDWLRQ The summary of integrated innovation, motivation, DQG WHQDQWV¶
participation is illustrated in Fig. 2.
FIGURE 2. The role of tenants.
Key Performance Indicators

Key Performance Indicators (KPI) is the value of incubator center and tenants¶ SHUIRUPDQFH. An alert for
competition, potential investment, and technology improvement is very important since the future challenge might
be difficult to be predicted. In this study, the possibility of measuring overall business performance was performed
using the framework Computer Integrated Manufacturing System Open System Architecture (CIMOSA). CIMOSA
offers a wide range of integrated system application inside a business process [37], that could be applied in this
study to determine possible relationship between business process and product life cycle or business process and
business maturity as expected in each stage of the incubation process. A sales increase by 10% per year was
determined as minimum value for the tenant that indicated the successful development. The ultimate goal of
incubator center is to increase the number of tenants who graduate from incubation center. Similar to the academic
030021-4
process, the incubation process is expected to enhance WHQDQWV¶ business capability through the process of learning
and experience. Learning is obtained through different methods such as mentoring, reading and observing the
potential competitors. Furthermore, experience is to test the market through product launch, mechanism of product
certification, business selection, and the risk.
KPI can be defined into three values, namely business sustainability value, operational value, and relationship
value. First, business sustainability value entails WKH WHQDQW ILUPV¶ VDOHV JURZWK HPSOR\PHQW JURZWK DQG SURILW
growth [38]. Second, an operational value includes the innovation approach, interaction with business market
environment, and innovation process management within product development [39]. Third, relationship value
involves human and financial resources, mutual interdependencies, and commitment of different stakeholders [40].
Those values and their components will be represented as the success of business sustainability for MP, operational
for CP, and relationship for SP.
METHODOLOGY
This study was an attempt to generate business strategy alignment between incubator center and tenants.
Observation showed that an incubator center with high number of tenants frequently have difficulties in personal
mentoring while incubator center with small number of tenants shows a low business impact within the surrounded
area. This study offered an alignment model between incubator center and its tenants to maximize business
capability and sustainability through the available resources. It was initiated by measuring the gap between the target
and current condition and followed by a set of recommended actions within the different future challenges. In
particular, incubation process was focused on the business results rather than empowering tenants based on MP, CP,
SP in order to achieve business sustainability through integrative capability. The literature research focused on the
business strategy of incubation center that had been explored to find all types of incubator center and to figure out
the correlation with MP, CP, and SP. A similar procedure was performed to identify WKHWHQDQWV¶SDUWLFLSDWLRQin the
entire process from entrance to graduation. The sales and profit growth are the main focus for the tenants together
with their business capability and sustainability. Therefore, all the correlated variables will be established as the
EDVLV RI PHDVXUHPHQW IRU LQFXEDWRU PLVVLRQ DQG WHQDQWV¶ SDUWLFLSDWLRQ 0RUHRYHU WKH OLQNDJH EHWZHHQ WKH NH\
performance indicators (KPI) became processes to achieve the target and evaluation tools for improvement. The
model included all variables and the linkage, so that value alteration in one variable will affect to another variable.
This model has been tested on four business fields of tenants within an incubator center. Finally, this study showed
the performance of tenants which also the representation of incubator center.

All the variables that have been described as the roles of incubator center and tenants are listed. Subsequently, a
linkage between the similar stages was compiled to ensure that incubator center and tenants were aligned. All
variables (MP, CP, and SP) and their sub-variables (MP1, MP2, etc.) have different weight indexes so that the
overall value will be a sum of weighted score. The components of MP were Set Direction (SD), Set Strategy (SS)
and Direct Business (DB). The components of CP were Develop Product (DP), Get Order (GO), Fulfill Order (FO),
and Support Product (ST). The components of SP were Human Resources (HR), Financial (FI), Information
Technology (IT), and Maintenance (MC). A test was performed to assess the performance of the tenants using 4
(four) different business fields within a single incubator. The value of each sub-variable was classified into: 0
(unidentified); 1 (poor), 2 (sufficient), 3 (good), and 4 (excellent). The relations between variables, sub-variables,
and linkage can be seen in Table 1 as the basis of creating the dashboard of scoring.
In the end, the result of business capabilities measurement as shown in Fig. 3 can be used as an evaluation to
develop a specific recommendation. For instance, the score of ³getting order´ in the core process is indicated as
poor, thus the process of mentoring and tenants practicing should be improved in the next period. The recommended
minimum score is not less than 75% while the perceived value in average is 3.0 or can be identified as good.
030021-5
TABLE 1. Variables, sub variables, and linkage.
Relation Business Idea Business Creation Business Start-up Business Growth
MP 1 Extended function (EF) EF EF EF
MP 2 Collaboration (CO) CO CO CO
MP 3 Mapping (MP) MP MP MP
MP 4 Motivation (MO) MO MO MO
MP 5 Participation (PA) PA PA PA
MP 6 Innovation (IN) IN IN IN
MP 7 Product catalogue Company profile Finance analysis Life cycle
CP 1 DP & GO Product design Business model Production plan Manufacturing
CP 2 FO & ST Targeted customer Marketing strategy Marketing strategy Market share
SP 1 HR,IT,FA,MC Human resources Information technology Accounting Maintenance
SP 2 HR,IT,FA,MC Listening/talking (LT) LT LT LT
SP 3 HR,IT,FA,MC Following/guiding (FG) FG FG FG
SP 4 HR,IT,FA,MC Practicing/mentoring (PM) PM PM PM
SP 5 HR,IT,FA,MC Independency/supporting (IS) IS IS IS
SP6 HR Reducing difficulty Reducing difficulty Reducing difficulty Reducing difficulty
SP7 HR Graduation focus Graduation focus Graduation focus Graduation focus
FIGURE 3. A dashboard of the result of business capabilities.
CONCLUSIONS
A model of a business strategy alignment between incubator center and tenants has been presented to show the
business performance of both sides. This model covers the stages of business idea, creation, start-up and growth for
both incubator center and tenants. The activities of the incubator center consist of talking, guiding, mentoring and
supporting within the process of incubation, while of the tenants consist of listening, following, practicing, and
gaining independence. Some extended functions of incubator center and the factors behind the tenants¶DFKLHYHPHQW
are important as the catalyst of business growth. The proposed model of performance can be updated and adjusted
based on the respective conditions of an incubator center. Furthermore, the model can entail the involvement of
government, the collaboration with other incubator centers as well as other stakeholders.
030021-6
REFERENCES
1. L. P. C. d. S. Andrade, C. V. Ferreira, R. C. d. Silva and J. d. O. Gomes, Strategic Management Method for The Incubation
Process of Industrial Companies: Case Study of The Tooling Industry in Brazil, (Procedia CIRP, 41, 2016) pp. 129-134
2. F. E. Balcazar, J. Kuchak, S. Dimpfl and F. A. Varun Sariepella, An Empowerment Model of Entrepreneurship for People
with Disablities in the United States, (Psychosocial Intervention, 23, 2014) pp. 145-150
3. W. Dhewanto, E. A. Prasetio, S. Ratnaningtyas, S. Herliana, R. Chairuddin, Q. Aina, R. H and E. Rachmawaty, Moderating
Effect of Cluster on Firm's Innovation Capability and Business Performance: A Conceptual of Framework, (Procedia-Social
and Behavioral Sciences, 65, 2012), pp. 867-872.
4. A. S. L. da Silva and S. H. A. C. Forte, Technology Parks Strategic Capacity Evaluation Structure: A Framework Proposal
for Impelementation in Latin America, (RAI Revista de Administracao e Inovacao,13, 2016) pp. 67-75.
5. H. Allahar and C. Brathwaite, Business Incubation as An Instrument of Innovation: The Experience of South America and
The Caribbean, (International Journal of Innovation, 4, 2016) pp. 71-85.
6. Z. Hutabarat and M. Pandin, Absorptive Capacity of Business Incubator for SME's Rural Community Located in Indonesia's
Village, (Procedia-Social and Behavioural Sciences, 115, 2014) pp. 373-377.
7. M. A. Ould, Business Processes, Chichester: John Wiley & Sons Ltd, (1995).
8. A. Tola and M. V. Contini, From the Diffusion of Innovation to Tech Parks, Business Incubators as a Model of Economic
Development: The Case of Sardecna Ricerche. (Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, 176, 2015), pp. 494-503.
9. E. A. G. Rocha, The Impact of the Business Environment on the Size of the Micro, Small and Medium Entreprise Sector;
Preliminary Findings from a Cross-Country Comparison, (Procedia Economics and Finance, 4, 2012) pp. 335-349.
10. H. P. Desai, Business Model for Inclusiveness, (Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, 157, , 2014) pp. 353-362.
11. J. L. Solleiro and C. Gaona, Promotion of a Regional Innovation System: The Case of The State of Mexico, (Procedia-Social
and Behavioral Sciences, 52, 2012) pp. 110-119.
12. Z. S. Kusharsanto and L. Pradita, The Important Role of Science and Technology Park Towards Indonesia as a Highly
Competitive and Innovative Nation, (Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, 227, 2016) pp. 545-552.
13. E. S. R., Local Economic Development and Triple Helix: Lesson Learned from Role of Universities in Higher Education
Town of Jatinangor, West Java, Indonesia, (Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, 52, 2012) pp. 299-306.
14. R. Lisowska and R. Stanislawski, The Cooperation of Small and Medium-sized Enterprises with Business Institutions in the
Context of Open Innovation, (Procedia Economics and Finance, 23, 2015) pp. 1273-1278.
15. V. E. Erosa, Dealing with Cultural Issues in the Triple Helix Model Implementation: A Comparison among Government,
University and Business Culture, (Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, 52, 2012) pp. 25-34.
16. I. R. Mirzanti, T. M. Simatobang and D. Larso, Mapping on Entrepreneurship Policy in Indonesia, (Procedia-Social and
Behavioral Sciences, 169, 2015) pp. 346-353.
17. S. Herliana, Regional Innovation Cluster for Small and Medium Enterprises (SME): A Triple Helix Concept, (Procedia -
Social and Behavioral Sciences, 169, 2015) pp. 151-160.
18. T. Khademi, K. Ismail, C. T. Lee and M. Garmsari, The Role of Potential Licensee Availability in Facilitation
Commercialization of Academic Research Results, (Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, 172, , 2015) pp. 331-335.
19. A. A.A. and M. Mikhailov R.V., Implementation of New Educational Technologies Through Cooperation of Economic
Clusters of Enterprises with Scientific and Educational Centers, (Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, 191, 2015) pp.
1288-1292.
20. M. Pipiregeanu, G. Zaman, R. A. Horatiu Strasser and C. Strasser, Academic Entrepreneurship and Scientific Innovation in
Context of Bio-Economy Strategy, (Procedia Economics and Finance, 8, 2014) pp. 556-562.
21. S. R. Maryunani and I. R. Mirzanti, The Development of Entrepreneurship in Creative Industries with Reference to
Bandung as a Creative City, (Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, 169, 2015) pp. 387-394.
22. E. Stal, T. Andreassi and A. Fujino, The Role of University in Incubators in Stimulating Academic Entrepreneurship,
(Innovation & Management Review, 13, 2016) pp. 89-98.
23. N. Bocken, "Sustainable Venture Capital-Catalyst for Sustainable Start-up Success?," Journal of Cleaner Production, vol.
108, pp. 647-658, 2015.
24. S. K. Irinia Kuzmina-Merloni, "Venture Capital in Latvia: The Peculiarities, Contradictions, and Accessibility for SMEs,"
Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, vol. 150, pp. 97-106, 2014.
25. K. Ismail, M. A. Anuar, W. W. Omar, A. Aziz, K. Seohod and C. S. Akhtar, "Entrepreneurial Intention, Entrepreneurial
030021-7
Orientation of Faculty and Student towards Commercialization," Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, vol. 181, pp.
349-355, 2015.
26. Z. Papulova and J. Papula, "Entrepreneurship in the Eyes of the Young Generation," Procedia Economics and Finance, vol.
34, pp. 514-520, 2015.
27. G. Irina and K. Alina, "An Evaluation of Entrepreneurial Potential in the Republic of Tatarstan," Procedia Economics and
Finance, vol. 32, pp. 345-351, 2015.
28. I. Moroni, A. Arruda and K. Araujo, "The Design and Technological Innovation: How to Understand the Growth of Startups
Companies in Competitive Business Environment," Procedia Manufacturing, vol. 3, pp. 2199-2204, 2015.
29. D. H. P. Bulsara, D. S. Gandhi and D. P. Porey, "Grassroots Innovation to Technoentrepreneurship through Gian-
Technology Business Incubator in India: A Case Study of Nature Technocrats," International Journal of Innovation, vol. 1,
pp. 49-70, 2013.
30. F. M. d. Silva, E. A. d. A. Q. Oliveira and M. B. d. Moraes, "Innovation Development Process in Small and Medium
Technology-Base Companies," RAI Revista de Administracao e Inovacao, pp. 176-189, 2016.
31. T. M. Simatupang and F. B. Widjaja, "Benchmarking of Innovation Capability in the Digital Industry," Procedia-Social and
Behavioral Sciences, vol. 65, pp. 948-954, 2012.
32. P. Varrichio, D. Diogenes, A. Jorge and L. Garnica, "Collaborative Networks and Sustainable Business: A Case Study in
The Brazilian System of Innovation," Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, vol. 52, pp. 90-99, 2012.
33. M. Dobickis and E. Gaile-Sarkane, "Perspective on Inovation and Technology Transfer," Procedia-Social and Behavioral
Sciences, vol. 213, pp. 965-070, 2015.
34. N. Yildirm, O. Cakir and O. B. Askun, "Ready to Dare? A Case Study on the Entrepreneurial Intentions of Business and
Engineering Students in Turkey," Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, vol. 229, pp. 277-288, 2016.
35. A. B. S. A. Jamak, R. M. M. Ali and Z. Ghazali, "A Breakout Strategy Model of Malay (Malaysian Indigenous) Micro-
Enterpreneurs," Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, vol. 109, pp. 572-583, 2014.
36. E. Ilie, C. Balaceanu and D. Apostol, "Ethics and Effectiveness in Promoting Entrepreneurial Programs in Romania and The
EU," Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, vol. 186, pp. 440-444, 2015.
37. AMICE, ESPRIT Consortium, "CIMOSA: Open System Architecture for CIM," Springer-Verlag, New York, 1991.
38. O. C. Ozdemir and Y. Sehitoglu, "Assesing the Impacts of Technology Business Incubators: A framework for Technology
Development Centers in Turkey," Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, vol. 75, pp. 282-291, 2013.
39. V. Lendel and M. Varmus, "Evaluation of the Innovative Business Perfomance," Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences,
vol. 129, pp. 504-511, 2014.
40. R. Hernandez and G. Carra, "A Conceptual Approach for Business Incubator Interdependencies and Sustainable
Development," Agriculture and Agricultural Science Procedia, vol. 8, pp. 718-724, 2016.
030021-8
Value engineering on the designed operator work tools for brick and rings wells
production
Ayu Bidiawati J. R., Yesmizarti Muchtiar, and Ragil Okta Wariza

Value Engineering on the Designed Operator Work Tools
for Brick and Rings Wells Production
Ayu Bidiawati JR1, a), Yesmizarti Muchtiar1), Ragil Okta Wariza1)
1
Department of Industrial Engineering, Faculty of Industrial Technology,
Universitas Bung Hatta, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding email: ayubidiawati@yahoo.com
Abstract. Operator working tools in making brick and ring wells were designed and made, and the value engineering was
calculated to identify and develop the function of these tools in obtaining the balance between cost, reliability and
appearance. This study focused on the value of functional components of the tools and attempted to increase the
difference between the costs incurred by the generated values. The purpose of this study was to determine the alternatives
of tools design and to determine the performance of each alternative. The technique was developed using FAST method
that consisted of five stages: information, creative, analytical, development and presentation stage. The results of the
analysis concluded that the designed tools have higher value and better function description. There were four alternative
draft improvements for operator working tools. The best alternative was determined based on the rank by using matrix
evaluation. Best performance was obtained by the alternative II, amounting to 98.92 with a value of 0.77.
INTRODUCTION
Brick molding process requires manual labor, which is also done repeatedly in a long time and potentially leads
to a risk of Work Musculoskeletal Disorders (WMSDs). The ergonomic facilities and equipment have a very
important role in this activity to minimize the risk. Human has a dominant role in the manufacturing process,
because the work is done manually. It results in various complaints on the workers' body parts. Based on the results
of the NBM (Nordic Body Map) questionnaire on a study of brick molding process, the highest complaints of the
operators are pains on the backs, arms, shoulders, and the right hands of the workers. Therefore, this study was
conducted to design the material bath stirring and operators¶ZRUNGHVN to minimize the risk of WMSDs.
Operator working tools in making brick and ring wells were designed and made prior to the calculation of value
engineering to identify and develop the function of these tools in obtaining a balance between cost, reliability and
appearance. This research was focused to assess the functional value of products components (material bath stirring)
and to increase the difference between the costs incurred by the value or benefit that is generated from the product,
by either reducing production costs or increasing product value or both of them. Cost reduction would be
emphasized or concentrated on in detailed design of components, use of materials, shapes of products,
manufacturing processes and assembly processes. Value engineering can be applied to improve existing products or
new products design. Value engineering techniques are aimed to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of the
poduct design and development particularly to minimize errors that may occur.
Errors in design and product development can occur due to several factors, including the limited time for product
development. Inadequate quality information due to a lack of understanding on the characteristics of consumers'
needs is also a cause of design errors [1]. Moreover, the aspects of habits, less environmental support towards
creativity, and less understanding of the cost, are among the constraints in the product development process. To
anticipate the error during product design and development, a comprehensive method that addresses relevant aspects
to produce products that fulfill ergonomic aspects and consumer desires, is required.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030022-1–030022-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985492
030022-1
LITERATURE
Value engineering is a concept that aims to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of design by outlining errors
on the design. Value is defined as the ratio between product performances to the costs incurred to obtain
performance. Value engineering (VE) is a systematic method to improve the ³value´ of goods or products and
services by using an examination of function [2]. Good performance of a product will not necessarily produce a
high value if the cost incurred for such products is very high. Therefore, there are three ways to increase the product
value:
1. By reducing costs while maintaining performance
2. By improving performance while keeping costs
3. By improving performance and reducing costs
By referring to some definitions, value engineering is defined as a creative and systematic management
technique in identifying and developing the functions of objects or services to achieve a balance of cost, reliability
and appearance of a product or system. Value engineering is a method that emphasizes the analysis of various
functions of an item or a system through systematic and focused approach to achieve value, purpose, and the
optimum financing for each rupiah spent [3]. Therefore, the results of value engineering could be an alternative to
the use of materials, new designs, and so on, by considering alternatives that have higher value.
A product is designed with the primary goal to meet the needs and to satisfy the consumer. Product attributes
used to meet the needs and to satisfy the customers is called function (value). Frequently, product designers set
redundant functions on the product so that there are functions that are not or less necessary, thus incurring additional
costs. In addition, value engineering is aimed to improve the value of research object of value, the value is bound up
with function and cost which may rise or fall, the purpose of value engineering can be achieved as long as the value
increases [4]. Values are expressed by comparing the performance with the cost, using the following formula:
VALUE = Performance/ Cost
Description:
Performance : The advantages or benefits derived from the production function.
Cost : The total expenditure to get all the desired functions.
Good planning will produce good work. Similarly, the design of the product cannot be separated from the efforts
to pursue the best quality so that the product can be accepted by consumers. Several stages in applying Value
Engineering are:
1. Information Stage
At this stage, the information about customer needs is collected as much as possible and followed by setting
the assumptions, limitations, costs and operations. Information was collected using questionnaires, interviews,
and market survey. Analysis of the functions was performed by the Function Analysis System Technique
(FAST) method. FAST is a method of systematically mapping function, by identifying the functions required
for the product to work and other supporting functions.
2. Creative Stage
Creative stage is to produce a wide range of alternatives that can meet or run the main functions. This creative
phase begins when the desired function has been determined and evaluated. Creative thinking is an important
thing at this stage to develop the idea.
3. Analysis Stage
Analysis stage is to evaluate the various alternatives resulting from the creative phase. The results of these
evaluations are used to determine the useful alternative for further studies, which will provide the greatest
potential for cost savings.
4. Recommendation Stage
This stage presents selected alternative and convinces the owners/decision-makers that the product design will
result in the best value for future profits.
030022-2
Function Analysis System's Technique (FAST)
FAST is a way of systematically mapping function and a problem-solving technique that is done by identifiying
the functions needed for the product to be able to work and other support functions.
How Why
Higher Basic Explanatory Explanatory Lower

Function Function function Function Function
Explanatory Explanatory
Function Function
Scope of study
FIGURE 1. FAST Diagram
Qualification Matrix
Qualification matrix is a consideration of the proposed alternatives selection. The eligibility criteria are relied on
the proposed product. Each alternative will be assessed, with criteria ranging from 0 to 10.
Evaluation Matrix
Evaluation matrix is a decision-making tool by considering many criteria. Decision-making is done by weighting
of each criterion based on the analyzed altrenatives.
Functions Analysis
Function analysis is used to identify the things that will be done and the production cost. Value can therefore be
increased by either improving the function or reducing the cost.
Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP)

AHP is a decision support model developed by Thomas L. Saaty. The decision support model will describe the
problem of multi-factor or multi complex criteria into a hierarchy. The hierarchy is defined as a representation of a
complex problem in a multi-level structure where the first level is a goal, followed by a level of factors, criteria, sub-
criteria, and so on, down to the last level of the alternative [5]. Procedure in AHP method, according to Suryadi and
Harry in [6], consists of two stages as follows:
a. To arrange the hierarchy of the prevailing problems.
b. To determine the priority elements.
The stages of the research are:
1) Introduction about research purpose and identification of data collection method.
2) Information stage was perfomed to collect data and make a function analysis (FAST chart).
3) Creative stage to choose the alternatives.
030022-3
4) Analysis stage consisted of:
x To identify advantages and disadvantages.
x To determine priorities with matrix eligibility criteria.
x To determine evaluation matrix criteria.
x To determine the weight of each criteria.
x To calculate analysis of evaluation matrix.
x To calculate performance analysis.
5) Development Stage consisted of:
x To determine analysis for each alternative.
x To calculate value for each alternative.
x To select the best alternative.
6) Recommendation stage was to determine the best alternative
Information Stage
The components required to make operator work tools of brick and ring wells were table blocks frame, plat,
mixing tub, and cement mixing tub. The VE team gains as much information as possible about the design,
background, constraints, and costs. Subsequently, the team performed a function analysis and relative cost ranking
of systems and sub-systems to identify potential high cost areas [7]. Information obtained from interviews with
operators based on the analysis of design requirements were as follows:
a. Poor working system.
b. The body position leads to complaints from the manual labors in the long term.
c. Equipment dimensions are not in accordance with the anthropometry.
d. Facilities used are not durable.
The functions identified on these tools design can be drawn to form the FAST diagram, as shown in Figure 2,
and the functions of brick and ring wells production tools are given in Table 1.
Why ?
How To ease the using
Provide
Practicality
Facilitate the
production process
Brick and Ring
Wells production
tools
Wear appropriate
materials
Provide
Comfort
Facilitate the
Provide comfort at
operator working
work
position
FIGURE 2. Chart of FAST Tools

TABLE 1. Function of Brick and Ring Wells Production Tools
Function
Component Type
Verb Noun
Tools of Making Brick To give Comfort and Practicality Secondary (S)
and Ring Wells To give Brick and Ring Wells Production Tools area Primary (P)
030022-4
Creative Stage
Based on the weakness and condition of existing equipment components, improved alternative tool designs were
developed in accordance with the anthropometric data as shown in Figure 3.
FIGURE 3. Modification Alternatives
Analysis Stage
Advantages and Disadvantages Analysis

Research analysis and objectives showed the operators¶GHVLUHGFKDUDFWHULVWLFV were associated with the shape,
design, size, materials and performance of the design. Systematic analysis is carried out to identify and select the
best alternative for designs, materials, processes, and systems [2]. The desired characteristics for product sales are
uncomplicated design form, the material costs or production costs, and the ease of obtaining the material. The
criteria used as consideration in the analysis of the advantages and disadvantages were: (1) Shape, (2) Size, (3) Type
of material, (4) Performance, (5) Material costs or production costs, (6) Ease to obtain material.
Determination of Priority Criteria by Eligibility Matrix

The order of priority criteria level was obtained from 10 respondents, by using questionnaire that contained the
criteria order. Assessment was performed by using a Likert scale with results provided in Table 2 and Figure 4.
TABLE 2. Summary of Priority
Criteria Score % Rank

Shape 40 18.02 2
Size 47 21.17 1
Material 37 16.67 3
Performance 35 15.76 4
Material Cost 33 14.86 5
Facility 30 13.51 6
Total 222 100
FIGURE 4. Graph of Priority
Weighting Analysis Using Matrix Eligibility Criteria

Table 3 shows the recapitulation results of feasibility assessment matrix based on questionnaires that have been
filled out by the respondents.
Weighting Criteria at Modification Alternatives

Calculations on the weighting criteria was required to calculate each criteria performance using pair wise
comparison method based on Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP), in accordance with the level of interest. Based on
the Geometric mean pair wise comparisons, pair wise comparisons for all criteria are presented in Table 4.
030022-5
TABLE 3. Recapitulation Results of Feasibility Assessment
Criteria
Alternative Total Rank
1 2 3 4 5 6
Preliminary Design 19 17 17 19 20 20 112 5
Alternative I 26 28 33 30 30 35 182 4
Alternative II 47 46 45 42 43 44 267 1
Alternative III 35 36 38 35 38 38 220 2
Alternative IV 27 35 35 33 33 33 196 3
TABLE 4. Pair Wise Comparisons Matrix

Criteria 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1 1.245 1.335 1.75 2.244 2.608
2 0.803 1 1.822 2.817 3.358 3.496
3 0.749 0.549 1 3.564 2.38 2.312
4 0.571 0.355 0.280 1 4.11 4.119
5 0.445 0.298 0.420 0.243 1 2.766
6 0.383 0.285 0.432 0.243 0.361 1
Total 3.952 3.734 5.291 9.618 13.454 16.303
Table 5 shows the matrix priority value for all of the criteria derived from vector eigenvalue, after its relative
weight was normalized.
TABLE 5. Matrix Priority Value
Criteria Vector eigen % Weight
1 0.2246 22.46
2 0.2621 26.21
3 0.2025 20.25
4 0.1591 15.91
5 0.0902 9.02
6 0.0615 6.15
Total 1 100
Table 6 shows the maximum eigenYDOXHVȜPD[LPXPE\GLYLGLQJWKHVXPRIWKHHQWU\ILHOGVE\(LJHQYHFWRU

The consistent index values obtained from the 6 criteria matrix are given in the table.
TABLE 6. Maximum Eigen Value
Criteria Sum of Entry Matrix Priority Ȝ Max. (A/B)
1 1.468 0.2246 6.511581536
2 1.778 0.2621 6.782892489
3 1.438 0.2025 7.105179314
4 1.061 0.1591 6.669271743
5 0.503 0.0902 5.568218173
6 0.381 0.0614 6.204571511
Total 38.84171477
Ȝ0D[LPXP 6.473619128
Selected Alternative Performance

Performance value (Pn) was obtained by multiplying the weight obtained for each criterion with the results
obtained from the questionnaire. Table 7 shows the performance values for each alternative. For example, the
performance calculation of the selected alternative II is:
Pn (alt.II) = Ȉ&ULWHULDZHLJKW[HYDOXDWLRQPDWUL[YDOXH
= (0.2246 x 96) + (0.2621 x 100) + (0.2025 x 100) + (0.1591 x 100) + (0.0902 x 98) + (0.0615 x 100)
030022-6
= 98.92
TABLE 7. Performance Asesssment
Modification Criteria Pn Rank
Preliminary Design 77.02 5
Alternative I 85.71 4
Alternative II 98.92 1
Alternative III 92.08 2
Alternative IV 88.89 3
Development Phase
The Value Engineering process and procedures are generally well defined and well-understood at all levels in the
industry. It is recognized as an effective way to improve the performance of a product with reduction in cost [7].
Calculation of detail costs incurred for the preparation of the preliminary design is available in Table 8.
TABLE 8. Total Budget Plan of Preliminary Design
No Material Quantity Unit Unit Price Total Cost
1 Wood beams 6 Piece 28.500 171.000
2 Saw timber 2 Piece 80.000 80.000
3 Plywood 3 Piece 60.000 60.000
4 Zink 1 Piece 87.500 87.500
5 Nail 2 Kg 18.000 18.000
Sub Total I 416.500
No Position Quantity Working Days Wage per day Total Cost
1 Handyman 1 2 50.000 100.000
2 Prentice 1 2 50.000 100.000
Sub Total II 200.000
Total (Sub Total I + Sub Total II) 616.500
The initial design cost was Rp.616.500,-. The value calculations for each alternative are shown in Table 9 and is
subsequently provided in Figure 5. The initial design was used as a benchmark alternative for other modifications, in
order to obtain the formula and to design an alternative modification II, as follows:
= 8.100 = 0.77
TABLE 9. Modification Alternative Value

Alternative Pn N Cn (Cost) Vn (Value) Rank
Preliminary Design 77.02 8.100 616.500 1 5
Alternative I 85.72 8.100 1.028.500 0.67 4
Alternative II 98.92 8.100 1.038.500 0.77 1
Alternative III 92.08 8.100 978.500 0.76 2
Alternative IV 88.89 8.100 1.008.500 0.71 3
Recommendation Stage
Recommendation stage describes the selected alternative, which was alternative design II. The performance of
altenative II obtained the highest score of 98.82, as well as the highest value of 0.77. During the development phase
of the VE study, each designated idea is expanded into a workable solution [7].
030022-7
FIGURE 5. Performance and value of each alternative
CONCLUSIONS
From the results and discussion, the following can be concluded:
1. Results of the engineering value analysis indicated that the designed brick and ring well production tools have a
better value based on a function description using FAST diagram analysis.
2. The priority criteria that affected alternative design modifications were: size design (21.17%); forms design
(18.02%); type of materials (16.67%); performance (15.76%); material costs (14.86%) and ease of getting
material (13.51%)
3. The highest performance was obtained by the second alternative of 98.92. In addition, it obtained the highest
value of 0.77, approaching the initial design.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors would like to acknowledge Kemenristek Dikti for the funding support of the research project
[Penelitian Hibah Bersaing].
REFERENCES
1. I. Djati. (2005). Perencanaan dan Pengembangan Produk. UII Press, Yogyakarta.
2. A. J. Chavan. (2013). Value Engineering in Contruction Industry, International Journal of Application or
Innovation in Engineering & Management (IJAIEM), ISSN 2319-4847, Vol. 2, Issue 12, December 2013.
3. L. Zimmerman & G. D. Hart, 1982. Value Engineering: A Practical Approach for Owners, Designers, and
Contractors. Van Nostrand Company, NewYork.
4. H. Wang & X. Li, The application of value engineering in project decision-making, Journal of Chemical and
Pharmaceutical Research, ISSN : 0975-7384, CODEN(USA), 5(12):714-720, 2013.
5. T. L. Saaty. (1993). Pengambilan Keputusan Bagi Para Pemimpin, Proses Hirarki Analitik untuk Pengambilan
Keputusan dalam Situasi yang Kompleks. Jakarta, PT. Pustaka Binaman Pressindo.
6. Taminanto. (2012). Sistem Pendukung Keputusan Dengan Metode Analytical Hierarchy Process (AHP) Untuk
Penentuan Prestasi Kinerja Dokter Pada RSUD. Sukarjo, Infokes, 2(1), pp. 1-15.
7. A. Chougule & A. K. G. S. Patil. (2014). Application of Value Engineering Technique to A Residential
Building ±Case Study, International Journal of Innovative Research in Advanced Engineering (IJIRAE), ISSN:
2349-2163, Volume 1 Issue 12, December 2014.
030022-8
Material nonlinearity plate bending analysis with boundary element method
Supriyono, Marwan Effendy, and Wijianto

Material Nonlinearity Plate Bending Analysis with
Boundary Element Method
Supriyono1,a), Marwan Effendy2, Wijianto3
1,2,3
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering Universitas Muhammadiyah Surakarta,
Jl. A.Yani Pabelan Tromol Pos 1 Kartosuro Surakarta, Jawa Tengah, Indonesia
Phone: +62271717417; Fax: +62271715448
a)
Corresponding author: supriyono@ums.ac.id
Abstract. In this paper, material nonlinearity plate bending analysis with boundary element method is presented. The
nonlinear term in the formula is analysed by considering that the material is assumed to undergo small strains. The von
Mises criterion is used to evaluate the plastic zone and elastic perfectly plastic material behaviour is assumed. The
domain integral due to material nonlinearity is evaluated using a cell discretization technique and a total incremental
method is implemented to solve the nonlinear system of equation. The size of the increment, the number of boundary
elements and the number of domain cells are varied to study the convergence of the analysis. The size of load increment
shows big influence on the results. The smaller the size the better results can be obtained, however 200 steps to reach the
final load is a reasonable size to get a good results. The number of boundary and domain cells has an influence on the
accuracy of the results. The increased number of boundary as well as domain cells gives better results, however a relative
coarser mesh can be implemented to have a good results. The current results have a good agreement with the previous
results by other researchers.
INTRODUCTION
Nonlinear analysis of plate bending can be divided into two categories i.e. geometrical and material nonlinearity
or plasticity. Geometrical nonlinearity in plate bending usually is called as large deflection. There are two widely
used plate theories. The first one was developed by Kirchhof [1] and is commonly referred to as the classical theory.
The other was developed by Reissner [2] and is known as the shear deformable theory.
The classical plate theory neglects the shear deformation through the plate thickness whereas the shear
deformable theory takes into account the shear deformation and the transverse normal stresses through the plate
thickness. The Reissner theory is based on modeling a plate structure as two-dimensional structure with assumed
stress variation through the plate thickness. In Reissner plates, the problem is represented in terms of three degrees
of freedom, involving generalized displacements (i.e. two rotations and deflection) and generalized tractions (i.e.
moments and transverse shear force).
Nonlinear analysis of plate bending with boundary element method (BEM) can be found in the works by Tanaka
[3], Kamiya and Sawaki [4], Lei, Huang and Wang [5], Karam and Telles [6], Ribeiro and Venturini [7], Wen,
Aliabadi and Young [8], Dirgantara and Aliabadi [8], Purbolaksono and Aliabadi [9], Supriyono and Aliabadi [10]
and Supriyono [11].
The works by Tanaka [3], Kamiya and Sawaki [4] and Lei, Huang and Wang [5] dealt with large deflection
using the classical plate theory. Whereas the works by Wen, Aliabadi and Young [12], Dirgantara and Aliabadi [8]
and Purbolaksono and Aliabadi [9] were for the large deflection analysis using Reissner plates theory. The BEM
analysis of Reissner plates with material nonlinearity can be found in the works by Karam and Telles [6], Ribeiro
and Venturini [7] and Supriyono [11]. Supriyono and Aliabadi [10] developed the formulation of the BEM for
Reissner plates by considering combined large deflection and plasticity.
In this paper BEM for plate bending analysis with material nonlinearity is presented. The formulation of the
BEM formula follows closely the work by Karam and Telles [6]. However, new contribution is made in the solution
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030023-1–030023-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985493
030023-1
of the non linear term of the BEM formula. Total increment method developed by Wen and Aliabadi [12] is used
instead of increment iterative method. The nonlinear term in the formula is analyzed by considering that the
material is assumed to undergo small strains. The von Mises criterion is used to evaluate the plastic zone and elastic
perfectly plastic material behavior is assumed. The domain integral due to material nonlinearity is evaluated using a
cell discretization technique. Examples are presented to show the agreement between this research and the previous
research by Karam and Telles [6].
BEM FORMULATION
Displacement and Stress Integral Equations

Applications of BEM in solid mechanics are based on the Somigliana’s identities. Somigliana’s identity for
displacements in elastoplastics shear deformable plate bending problems states that the rate of the displacements
(two rotations and one deflection) at any points X’ [ w  i(X’)] that belong to domain (X’Є V) to the boundary values
 j(x)] and traction rates [ p j(x)] can be expressed as [6] :
of displacement rates [ w
w i ( X ' )   Wij ( X ' , x) p j ( x)dS   Pij ( X ' , x)w j ( x)dS 

S S
W
V
i3 ( X ' , X )q 3 ( X )dV    i ( X ' , X ) M
V
 pl ( X )dV

(1)
where, Wij(X’,x), Pij(X’,x) and χij(X’,X) are called fundamental solutions representing a displacement, a traction and
strain in the j direction at point X due to a unit point force in the i direction at point X’. These fundamental solutions
can be found in Karam [6]. q ( X ), M 
pl
( X ) are the load rates and the plastic rate terms due to the loading
respectively. Equation (1) is valid for any source points within domain (X’Є V), in order to find solutions on the
boundary points, it is necessary to consider the limiting process as X’→ x’Є S. After limiting process, boundary
displacement integral equations can be expressed as
Cij ( x' )(w i ( x' )   Wij ( x' , x) p j ( x)dS   Pij ( x' , x)w j ( x)dS   Wi 3 ( x' , X )q 3 ( X )dV 
S S V
 i ( x' , X )M  ( X )dV

pl
(2)
V
where, Cij(x’) is free term that is Cij(x’)=δij(x’)+αij(x’), for smooth boundary the free term is 0.5.
The Somigliana’s identity for stresses can be expressed respectively as
M  ( X ' )   Wk ( X ' , x) p k ( x)dS   Pk ( X ' , x)w k ( x)dS  Wk ( X ' , X )q3 ( X )dV
S S V
   ( X ' , X ) M pl ( X )dV 

1
8

2(1   ) M  (1  3 ) M
 pl
   (3)
V
Q ( X ' )   Wk ( X ' , x) pk ( x)dS   Pk ( X ' , x) wk ( x)dS   W3k ( X ' ,V )q3 ( X )dV
S S V
   3  ( X ' , X ) M
 ( X )dV

pl
(4)
V
where, Mαβ and Qα are moment and shear stresses respectively. Wαβk(X’,x), Pαβk (X’,x) and χαβθk (X’,X) are called
fundamental solutions and can be found in Karam [6].
030023-2
Dicretization and System of Equation
In order to solve equation (1), (2), (3) and (4), a numerical method is implemented. The boundary S is discretized
using quadratic isoparametric elements. The domain V is divided into number of cells of 9 nodes quadrilateral cell.
In order to avoid coincidence nodes between boundary and cell nodes, semi discontinuous cells are implemented
along the boundary (see figure 1).
FIGURE 1. Discretization
In this formulation, boundary parameter xj, the unknown boundary values of displacements wj and tractions pj are
approximated using interpolation function, in following manner:
3
x j   N  ( ) x j
 1
3
w j   N  ( ) w j
 1
3
p j   N  ( ) p j (5)
 1
The shape functions Nα are defined as

1
N1   (  1)
2
N 2  (1   )(1   )
1
N 3   (  1) (6)
2
Substituting equation (5) and equation (6) into equation (2), one gets (the integrations on the boundary S):
Ne 3 1
 Pij ( x' , x)w j ( x)dS   w j  Pij ( x' , x( )) N ( ) J ( )d

 n
S n 1  1 1
Ne 3 1
W ij ( x' , x) p j ( x)dS   p j  Wij ( x' , x( )) N  ( ) J n ( )d


(7)
S n 1  1 1
where, Ne is the number of elements on the boundaries S and Jn is the Jacobian transformations.
After discretization process the integration on the domain V can be stated as:
Nc 3 1
 Wi3 ( x' , X )q3 ( X )dV   q3  Wi3 ( x' , X ( , )) N ( , ) J ( , )dd

n
V n 1  1 1
030023-3
Nc 9
 i ( x' , X )M  ( X )dV   (M  ) ( X ) 

pl pl
V n 1  1
 i ( x' , X ( , )) N ( , ) J n ( , )dd

1
(8)
1
After discretization and point collocation passes through all the collocation nodes on the boundary as well as in
the domain, the equations (2) can be written in the matrix form as
H w   Gp  b T M pl  (9)
where [H] and [G] are the well-known boundary element influence matrices, [T] is the influence matrix due to
plasticity. {.w}, {.p}, are the displacement and the traction rate vectors on the boundary. {b} is the load rate vectors
on the domain and {Mpl} is the nonlinear term due to plasticity.
After imposing boundary condition, equations (9) can be written as
Ax   f  T M pl  (10)

where, [A] is the system matrix, {x} is the unknown vector and {f } is the vector of prescribed boundary values.
Analogously, the stress integral equations of equations (3) and (4) can be presented in matrix form as
 M 

    G p   H w   b  T  M
 
 pl  (11)
Q 
Solution Algorithm
The total incremental method solves the nonlinear system of equations of equation (10) based on the incremental
load to be applied on the structure. It has an algorithm as:
1. Solve the equation (10), assume that the nonlinear term Mpl=0 for the first load increment. It means that the
linear system equations are solved. For the (k+1)th load increment it is assumed that (Mpl)(k+1)th=(Mpl )kth
2. Solve equation (11) based on the boundary values obtained from number 1. The same case as number 1 is
implemented for the nonlinear term.
3. Evaluate of the plastic zone based on the stress obtained from the number 2. In this stage the von Mises
criterion is used.
4. If the plasticity has taken place then, obtain the nonlinear term otherwise go to the number 5. The clear
explanation of the determination of the plastics term can be found in the work by Karam and Telles [6].
5. If the load is less than the final load then go to number 1 and repeat until the load is equal to the final load.
NUMERICAL EXAMPLE
In order to show the accuracy of the method developed in this paper, two examples are presented, i.e. a simply
supported square plate and a simply supported circular plate. The circular plate having radius a=10.0 Inc and
thickness h=1 Inc, is subjected to a uniformly distributed load q (see figure 2). The square plate having side a=1 and
thickness h=0.01 is subjected to a uniformly distributed load q (see figure 3).
These examples have been studied by Karam and Telles [6]. In order to have comparisons, the same materials
are also used The square plate has properties of E = 10.92 GPa,  = 0.3, Y = 1600 MPa and h/a = 0.01. The circular
plate has properties of E=104 ksi, σy=16 ksi and ν=0.24.
030023-4
FIGURE 2. Simply supported circular plate
FIGURE 3. Simply supported square plate
Discretization of the two examples is shown in Figure 4.
FIGURE 4. Discretization model
The results of the two plates are presented in Fig. 5 to Fig. 8. Non-dimensional parameters are presented as
follows
 qa 2  wD
Q and W 
M0 M 0a2
for the circular plate, where M0= σyh2/4, w is the deflection on center plate and D=Eh3/12(1-ν2)
 qa 2  10 2 wD
Q and W 
M0 M 0a2
030023-5
for the square plate, where M0= σyh2/4, w is the deflection on center plate and D=Eh3/12(1-ν2)
Figure 5 shows the convergence study of the square plate with respect to the number of increment. The results
are obtained using discretization of 32 elements on the boundary with 6×6 cells on the domain. Five sizes of load
increments i.e. Q = 0.5, Q = 0.25, Q =0.125, Q = 0.1 and Q = 0.089 are considered to assess the sensitivity of
the solutions to the size of the load increments. It can be seen that the increased number of increment which mean
smaller size of load increment gives better results. In this particular case, the convergence can be achieved after the
Q = 0.125.
FIGURE 5. Convergence study with respect to the number of increment
The results of the convergence study with respect to the number of boundary meshes and domain cells are
presented in Fig. 6. Four different numbers of boundary meshes and domain cells are considered i.e. 20 elements on
the boundary with 4 × 4 domain cells, 24 elements on the boundary with 5 × 5 domain cells, 28 elements on the
boundary with 6×6 domain cells and 32 elements on the boundary with 7×7 domain cells for Q = 0.1. It can be
seen that for this particular case in this example the four discretizations give almost the same results.
FIGURE 6. Convergence study with respect to the number of boundary element and domain cell
030023-6
Figures 7 and 8 present comparisons between the current results and the ones obtained by Karam and Telles [6].
The current results of the square plate are obtained using 32 elements on the boundary with 6×6 domain cells for Q
= 0.1, while the current results of the circular plate are obtained using 32 elements on the boundary with 44 domain
cells for Q = 0.1. The meshes are found to be the converged solutions. It can be seen that the current results have a
good agreement with the results obtained by Karam and Telles [6].
FIGURE 7. Comparison between current results and reference for square plate
FIGURE 8. Comparison between current results and reference for circular plate
030023-7
CONCLUSIONS
The application of BEM to material nonlinearities for shear deformable plate-bending analysis was presented.
The detailed formulations of the boundary integral equations were presented including the integral equations used to
calculate the internal values. The numerical implementation of the formulation was performed. From the results
obtained it can be concluded that:
1. The size of load increment shows big influence on the results. The smaller the size the better results can be
obtained, however 200 steps to reach the final load is a reasonable size to get a good results.
2. The number of boundary and domain cells has an influence on the accuracy of the results. The increased
number of boundary as well as domain cells gives better results, however a relative coarser mesh can be
implemented to have a good results.
3. The current results based on formula developed in this research have a good agreement with the previous results
by other researchers.
REFERENCES
1. G. Kirchhoff, “Uber das gleichgewicht und die bewegung einer elastischen scheibe,” J. Rein Angew Math, no.
40, pp. 51–88, 1850.
2. E. Reissner, “On a variational theorem in elasticity,” J. Math. Phys., no. 29, pp. 90–95, 1950.
3. M. Tanaka and F. I. N. Elastostatics, “Boundary element method applied to some inverse problems,” vol. 3, no.
3, pp. 138–143, 1986.
4. N. Kamiya and Y. Sawaki, “An integral equation approach to finite deflection of elastic plates,” Int. J. Non.
Linear. Mech., vol. 17, no. 3, pp. 187–194, 1982.
5. X. Y. Lei, M. K. Huang, and X. Wang, “Geometrically Nonlinear Analysis of A Reissner Type Plate by The
Boundary Element Method,” Comput. Struct., vol. 37, no. 6, pp. 911–916, 1990.
6. V. J. Karam and J. C. F. Teiles, “The BEM applied to plate bending elastoplastic analysis using Reissner â€ TM
s theory,” Eng. Anal., vol. 9, pp. 351–357, 1992.
7. G. O. Ribeiro and W. . Venturini, “Elastoplastic analysis of Reissner’s plate using the boundary element
method,” in Computational Mechanics Publications, 1998.
8. T. Dirgantara and M. H. Aliabadi, “A boundary element formulation for geometrically nonlinear analysis of
shear deformable shells,” Comput. Methods Appl. Mech. Eng., vol. 195, no. 33–36, pp. 4635–4654, 2006.
9. J. Purbolaksono and M. H. Aliabadi, “Stability of Euler’s method for evaluating large deformation of shear
deformable plates by dual reciprocity boundary element method,” Eng. Anal. Bound. Elem., vol. 34, no. 9, pp.
819–823, 2010.
10. Supriyono and M. H. Aliabadi, “Analysis of shear deformable plates with combined geometric and material
nonlinearities by boundary element method,” Int. J. Solids Struct., vol. 44, no. 3–4, pp. 1038–1059, 2007.
11. Supriyono, “Boundary Element Method for Shear Deformable Plate with Material Nonlinearity,” ARPN J.
Eng. Appl. Sci., vol. 11, no. 8, pp. 5309–5313, 2016.
12. P. H. Wen, M. H. Aliabadi, and A. Young, “Large deflection analysis of Reissner plate by boundary element
method,” Comput. Struct., vol. 83, no. 10–11, pp. 870–879, 2005.
030023-8
Preparation of sago starch-based biocomposite reinforced microfibrillated cellulose of
bamboo assisted by mechanical treatment
S. Silviana and H. Hadiyanto

Preparation of Sago Starch-Based Biocomposite Reinforced
Microfibrillated Cellulose of Bamboo Assisted by
Mechanical Treatment
S. Silviana1, a) and H. Hadiyanto2, b)
1,2
Department of Chemical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Diponegoro University
Jl. Prof. Sudarto, SH. Kampus Tembalang Semarang 50275 Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: silviana@che.undip.ac.id
b)
hady.hadiyanto@gmail.com
Abstract. The utilization of green composites by using natural fibres is developed due to their availability, ecological
benefits, and good properties in mechanical and thermal. One of the potential sources is bamboo that has relative high
cellulose content. This paper was focused on the preparation of sago starch-based reinforced microfribrillated cellulose of
bamboo that was assisted by mechanical treatment. Microfibrillated cellulose of bamboo was prepared by isolation of
cellulose with chemical treatment. Preparation of bamboo microfibrillated cellulose was conducted by homogenizers for
dispersing bamboo cellulose, i.e. high pressure homogenizer and ultrasonic homogenizer. Experiments were elaborated
on several variables such as the concentration of bamboo microfibrillated cellulose dispersed in water (1-3 %w) and the
volume of microfibrillated cellulose (37.5- 75%v). Four %w of sago starch solution was mixed with bamboo
microfibrillated cellulose and glycerol with plasticizer and citric acid as cross linker. This paper provided the analysis of
tensile strength as well as SEM for mechanical and morphology properties of the biocomposite. The results showed that
the preparation of sago starch-based biocomposite reinforced bamboo microfibrillated cellulose by using ultrasonic
homogenizer yielded the highest tensile strength and well dispersed in the biocomposite.
INTRODUCTION
Bamboo as one of a grass plant has a relative high cellulose content [1]. Bamboo has higher ecological
advantage compared to other cellulosic crops. In addition, the abundant numbers of bamboo are available in
Indonesia, which are as many as 143 species and spread over 2.1 million hectares [2]. Nowadays, biopolymer has
been modified physically and chemically to form a thermoplastic for various purposes of utilization. The use of bio-
based materials as composites is a new opportunity for the future in relation with the global issues, such as the
scarcity of fossil fuels, environmental problem of global warming, toxicity, as well as social and economic
problems. Furthermore, bio-composites in the form of green composites also have some advantages including their
biodegradable, renewable, and environmental friendly characteristics. Previous research had been conducted on
Indonesia bamboo (Dendrocalamus asper) by examining chemical modification that was assisted by supercritical
CO2 in order to extend the durability by acetylation reaction [3]. Bamboo fibre has higher level of stiffness and
specific stiffness of epoxy glass. It was reached aproximately 30 GPa [4]. Dendrocalamus asper has a fibre length of
20.03 mu and a specific gravity of 0.61, thus, it has good mechanical properties comprising of high modulus
elasticity (stiffness) and high fiber strength among bamboo species in Indonesia [5]. Moreover, the utilization of
bamboo cellulose was confirmed as a reinforcement agent for several polymer matrixes.
Tailoring a biocomposite requires another material with a high amount of amylopectin. One of natural resources
was sago starch. Sago starch consists of approximately 73% amylopectin%. Amylopectin is known as an adjuvant in
formation of amorphous, smooth, homogeneous, transparent, and defect-free films [6][7]. Indonesia has the largest
area of sago plantation in the world, approximately 1.2 million hectares [8]. Biocomposite can be produced from
bamboo fibre and sago starch. Bamboo fibres can be prepared from microfibrillated cellulose (MFC) and nano-
fibrillated cellulose (NFC). The preparation of fibre from bamboo is commonly carried out by using chemicals
treatment.
The objectives of this paper were to develop the utilization of microfibrillated cellulose of bamboo as
reinforcement of biocomposite and to investigate the performance of sago starch-based biocomposite reinforced
MFC of bamboo. MFC of bamboo was prepared by the mechanical treatment, i.e. high pressure homogenizer and
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030024-1–030024-5; doi: 10.1063/1.4985494
030024-1
ultrasonic homogenizer. This paper provided the analysis of tensile strength and SEM for mechanical and
morphology properties of the product.
Materials
Bamboo was obtained from an agricultural land in Sragen, Central Java. Sago starch was obtained from the
commercial market. Potassium hydroxide and citric acid were supplied from Merck, Germany. Aqueous hydrogen
peroxide (50%) and glycerol were purchased from PT. Brataco.
Research Location
This research took place at Advanced Material Laboratory (AMaL), Department of Chemical Engineering,
Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Diponegoro.
Methods
Step of Bamboo Preparation
Bamboo was previously grinded by using a mini crusher after the clean up by washing it to remove the solid
impurities. Subsequently, the grounded bamboo was screened until 150 mesh and washed with distilled water.
Step of lignocellulose Isolation Using Chemical Treatment
Bamboo powder was subjected by washing it with hot water to remove impurities. Afterward, bamboo powder
was extracted with ethanol and toluene to yield the extractives and waxes at a temperature of 110 ϶C for 6 (six)
hours. The lignin and hemicellulose of bamboo were isolated from the lignocellulose of bamboo by mixing it with
KOH at a temperature of 80 ϶C for 4 (four) hours. The undissolved cellulose was generated by washing it with
deionized water. Subsequently, the cellulose was purified to eliminate the phenolic component by using NaOCl and
H2O2 for bleaching at a temperature of 30 ϶C for 3 (three) hours. The isolated cellulose was washed with deionized
water until it reached the pH of 7 (neutral) and centrifuged to separate the water residue. The homogenous cellulose
was mixed with water with the ratio of 1 %w/w, 3 %w/w, and 5 %w/w that was assisted by ultrasonic homogenizer
and manual high pressure homogenizer to generate MFC solution.
Step of MFC Preparation Using Ultrasonic and High Pressure Homogenizer
The cellulose as the product from the previous step was initially prepared with low concentration of suspension
(1, 3, and 5 %w of bamboo cellulose) and dispersed in water. Subsequently, the suspension was pressed by using
manual high pressure homogenizer with the average pressure of 50 kg/cm2 at 65 ϶C for about 4 (four) hours.
For further observation, each of the cellulose product (1, 3, and 5 %w of bamboo cellulose were dispersed in
water) was also introduced by using ultrasonic homogenizer for 4 (four) hours with the power of 150 watt and the
frequency of 20 kHz.
Step of Biocomposite Manufacturing
Four grams of sago starch was added into 100 ml of water. Subsequently, the sago solution was added by 1.5
%w of glycerol and a varied concentration of MFC (1, 3, and 5 %w) as much as 0 ml, 2 ml, 4 ml, 8 ml, and 10 ml.
Afterwards, ultrasonic homogenizer was used to homogenize each of the mixture for 30 minutes. The mixture was
then heated at a temperature of 90 °C and stirred at 1200 rpm for 15 minutes to avoid the clustering of MFC
bamboo. After 15 minutes, the temperature was reduced into 65 °C and the mixture was added by 0.7% citric acid as
cross linker. Subsequently, the mixture was re-stirred for 15 minutes. The next step was execution by casting the
mixture on the acrylic casting with 0.05 cm in thickness. The product was dried at a temperature of 40 °C for 48
030024-2
hours until it formed a thin biocomposite. The biocomposite was heated and pressed for curing with a hydraulic
pressure at a temperature of 100 ϶C and pressure of 1 bar for 5 minutes.
Step of Biocomposite Reinforced MFC Tests
The performance of sago starch-based biocomposite reinforced microfibrillated cellulose of bamboo (MFC)
could be analyzed based on tensile strength and SEM for mechanical and morphology properties of the
biocomposite, respectively.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS

In the beginning, preliminary research had been conducted to obtain mechanical property effect of glycerol
concentration as plasticizer in the sago starch-based biocomposite. The result is showed in Fig. 1(a) that the tensile
strength of the product reached 2.74 MPa for glycerol maximum of 1.5 % and citric acid of 0.7 %. Afterwards, the
research was accomplished by observing the concentration of MFC in the product (Fig. 1(b)). The MFC
concentration was achieved at 21.9 MPa of tensile strength for 5 % for sago starch-based biocomposite without any
glycerol and citric acid.
ϯ Ϯϱ
Ϯ͘ϱ
ϮϬ
Tensile strength (N/mm2)

Tensile strength (N/mmϮ)
Ϯ
ϭϱ
ϭ͘ϱ
ϭϬ
ϭ
Ϭ͘ϱ ϱ
Sago starch-based biocomposite + Sago starch-based biocomposite
citric acid 0.7%
Ϭ Ϭ
Ϭ͘ϰ Ϭ͘ϲ Ϭ͘ϴ ϭ ϭ͘Ϯ ϭ͘ϰ ϭ͘ϲ ϭ Ϯ ϯ ϰ ϱ ϲ
Glycerol (%) % MFC
(a) (b)
FIGURE 1. (a) The effect of glycerol to the tensile strength (b) The effect of MFC concentration to the tensile strength.
By using these preliminary results, the research further observed the effect of MFC volume to the tensile
strength. These results can be seen in Fig.2. It can be concluded that the increase of MFC volume turned the tensile
of strength. However, 5 % of MFC acquired an optimum volume of 20 % with 1.45 MPa. These experiments had
been carried out by using high pressure homogenizer to disperse MFC into sago starch-based solution.
1.8 2.0 1.6

Sago Starch + Sago Starch +
Tensile Strength (N/mm )

1.4
2
2
2
1.6 1.8 Glycerol 1.5% +

Glycerol 1.5% +
Citric Acid 0.7% + Citric Acid 0.7% + 1.2
1.4 1.6 MFC 3%
MFC 1%
1.0
1.2 1.4
0.8
1.0 1.2 Sago Starch +
0.6 Glycerol 1.5% +
0.8 1.0 0.4 Citric Acid 0.7%
+ MFC 5%
0.6 0.8 0.2
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0
MFC (%V) MFC (%V) MFC (%V)

(a) (b) (c)
FIGURE 2. (a) The effect of 1% MFC volume to the tensile strength, (b) The effect of 3% MFC volume to the tensile strength,
(c) The effect of 5% MFC volume to the tensile strength.
030024-3
Based on the preliminary result, the use of other mechanical treatment for MFC preparation with high pressure
homogenizer, i.e. hydraulic high pressure homogenizer of 50 bar and heating up temperature of 65 ϶C, was
observed. The set-up of this equipment can be seen in Fig.3.
Input
Hydraulic Pump
Chamber
Output
Gap controller
FIGURE 3. The experimental set-up of hydraulic high pressure homogenizer.
MFC was used as reinforcing agent for the biocomposite. The biocomposite preparation had been already
prepared with two different treatments, i.e. mechanical or high pressure and ultrasonic homogenizer. Based on the
tensile strength analysis as presented in Fig.4, biocomposite reinforced MFC using high pressure homogenizer had a
lower tensile strength than those of ultrasonic homogenizer for 4 (four) hours. Fig. 4(a) shows that the highest
tensile strength was obtained by biocomposite using MFC high pressure of 16.9 Mpa with the addition of 50 %v of
MFC. The biocomposite treated by ultrasonic homogenizer (Fig. 4(b)) resulted a higher tensile strength of 18.25
MPa in the additional of 37.5 %v of MFC. However, both had the same tendency to have decreased tensile strength
during increased volume of MFC. It can be concluded based on mechanical analysis that MFC assisted by high
pressure and ultrasonic homogenizer can improve the treatment of the sago starch-based biocomposite with 5 % of
MFC concentration.
Furthermore, effect of mechanical treatments to the product had been confirmed with morphology analysis.
Figure 5 describes the morphology of both mechanical treatments. Fig 5. (a) confirms that surface morphology of
biocomposite with high pressure treatment for the MFC formed coalition across grain pattern which was not entirely
perfect. The presence of holes or pores that were not even in distribution and size can also be identified. In contrast,
Fig. 5. (b) of biocomposite surface prepared by ultrasonic homogenizer had less pores and the surface seemed
smoother and distributed evenly.
ϮϬ ϮϬ
ϭϴ ϭϴ
tensile strength (N/mm2)
ϭϲ ϭϲ
Tensile strength (N/mm2)
ϭϰ ϭϰ
ϭϮ ϭϮ
ϭϬ ϭϬ
ϴ ϴ
ϲ ϲ
ϰ ϰ
Ϯ Sago starch-based bicomposite reinforced MFC 5% Ϯ
Sago starch-based composite reinforced MFC 5%
Ϭ Ϭ
ϯϲ ϰϲ ϱϲ ϲϲ ϳϲ ϯϲ ϰϲ ϱϲ ϲϲ ϳϲ
MFC (%v) MFC (%v)
(a) (b)
FIGURE 4. (a) The effect of biocomposite preparation by high pressure homogenizer to the tensile strength, (b) The effect of
biocomposite preparation by ultrasonic homogenizer to the tensile strength.
030024-4
(a) (b)
FIGURE 5. (a) The effect of biocomposite preparation assisted by high pressure homogenizer, (b) The effect of biocomposite
preparation assisted by ultrasonic homogenizer.
CONCLUSIONS
The use of microfibrillated cellulose of bamboo could improve the performance of sago starch-based
biocomposite based on the tensile strength and the surface morfology. The tensile strength resulted from the
biocomposites reinforced MFC without plasticizer and cross linker (i.e. glycerol and citric acid) was at 2.8-21.9
MPa, while the tensile strength of the commercial plastic was obtained at 1.6-12 MPa. The MFC preparation using
ultrasonic homogenizer obtained the highest tensile srength and more homogenous in surface morfology. The
performance of the mechanical and morphology properties of biocomposite product can be improved by the
reinforcement of sago starch-based biocomposite with bamboo MFC.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors would like to acknowledge Ministry of Research, Technology, and Higher Education of Republic of
Indonesia for funding grant of Fundamental with number of 181-14/UN7.5.1/PG/2016.
REFERENCES
1. J. Janssen ³Bamboo in building structure´ Ph.D. Dissertation, Technical Sciences, Eindhoven University,
Holland: s.n, 1981.
2. Y. S. Hadi, W. S. Wuisang, N. Hadjib, and M. Utama. International Union of Forest Research Organizations.
[Online] (2005).
3. S. Silviana, ³Modification of bamboo through acetylation and silicone oil assisted by supercritical CO2´
Bochum: Ruhr Universität Bochum, 2014.
4. L. Osorio, A. V. Vuure and I. Verpoest. ³The relation between bambo fibre microstructural and mechanical
properties´ Antwerp, The World Bamboo Organization, 2012.
5. E. A. Widjaja and Z. Risyad. ³Anatomical Properties of some bamboo utilized in Indonesia´ China,
International Bamboo Workshop, 1985.
6. A. Lopez-Rubio, J. M. Lagaron, M. Ankerfors, T. Lindstrom, D. Nordqvist, A. Mattozzi and M. S. Hedenqvist,
³Enhanced film forming and film properties of amylopectin using microfibrillated cellulose´ Carbohyd.
Polym, Sí (2007).
7. D. Plackett, H. Anturi, M. Hedenqvist, M. Ankerfors, M. Gallstedt, T. Lindstrom and I. Siro, ³Physical
properties and morphology of films prepared from microfibrillated cellulose and microfibrillated cellulose in
combination with amylopectin´ J. Appl. Polym. Sci., Sí (2005).
8. M. Flach. Sago palm: Metroxylon sagu Rottb. Volume 13 ed. s.l.:IPK (1997).
030024-5
Numerical, analytical and experimental prediction of force of solid cylindrical steel
beam subjected to axial tension force using vibration technique
Guntur Nugroho, Henricus Priyosulistyo, and Bambang Suhendro

Numerical, Analytical and Experimental Prediction of Force
of Solid Cylindrical Steel Beam Subjected to Axial Tension
Force Using Vibration Technique
Guntur Nugroho1,a), Henricus Priyosulistyo2,b) and Bambang Suhendro2,c)
1
Ph.D Student of Civil and Environmental Engineering Department, Universitas Gadjah Mada, Indonesia,
Universitas Muhammadiyah Yogyakarta, Indonesia.
2
Civil and Environmental Engineering Department, Universitas Gadjah Mada,Yogyakarta, Indonesia.
a)
Corresponding author: guntur.ars@gmail.com
b)
priyo_ugm@yahoo.co.id
c)
bbsuhendro@yahoo.com
Abstract. Vibration method is widely used to estimate axial force of string and beam element by using natural frequency.
This paper demonstrates the use of vibration method to estimate the force of beam element. The specimen has ratio of
length to diameter of 79.68. The specimen was subjected to the axial tension which was applied increasingly from 1000
N up to 20000 N. Numerical and analytical calculation modeling were used to predict the natural frequency of the solid
cylindrical steel beam. Experimental research was also used to verify the value of natural frequency of the specimen. The
results showed that the natural frequency of analytical and numerical calculation is in line with experimental results in the
first mode of natural frequency.
INTRODUCTION
Vibration Technique is one of the methods that is used to estimate the tension and compression force of the beam
elements. It is also used to estimate axial tension force on cable of the cable-stayed bridge and on hanger of the
suspension bridge.
Due to the simplicity of application and the high accuracy in many cases, the force prediction based on the
vibration technique has been widely used and has therefore become extremely popular in engineering practices.
In this research, the analytical, numerical and experimental methods were used to calculate the axial tension
force of specimen in several axial tension loads. The objective of this paper was to evaluate the compatibility of
analytical and numerical analysis to estimate the tension force verified by experimental research.
THE BEAM THEORY

Beam theory considers the parameter value of bending stiffness (EI) and ignores the flexural deformation. [1]
and [2] described that the beam deflection, v(x,t) under the first mode (Fig.1) can be expressed as:
FIGURE 1. Beam model
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030025-1–030025-5; doi: 10.1063/1.4985495
030025-1
(1)
Where A = amplitude of vibration at mid span. Kinetic energy during the vibration can be expressed as:
(2)
Potential energy due to flexural deformation minus the work done by the externally applied force due to the
movement of the two ends is given by:
(3)
Equating maximum kinetic energy to maximum potential energy obtains:
(4)
The equation for other modes of shape (n) can be defined as the following:
(5)
6WRNH\¶V)RUPXOD
Stokey [1] developeda a practical formula to calculate the tension force by including value of bending stiffness.
The formula involves the parameter of (shown in Table 1) that depends on the respective boundary conditions.
The formula is expressed as:
(6)
TABLE 1. Parameter of depends on boundary condition ofthe ends

Mode number 1 2 3 4
Hinge-hinge 3.14 6.28 9.42 12.56
Clamp-clamp 4.73 7.85 10.99 14.13
Hinge-clamp 3.92 7.06 10.21 13.35
Clamp-Free 1.84 4.69 7.85 10.99
Experimental Testing
A laboratory experiment was conducted by using cylindrical steel beam specimen. The set-up of laboratory test
([4]) is shown in Fig. 2.
030025-2
FIGURE. 2. Set-up of the experiment
Numerical Modeling
Finite element modeling of solid cylindrical steel beam was conducted using Abaqus CEA 6.11. The geometry of
specimen was solid element of 2000 mm in length and 25.1 mm in diameter. The material was homogeneous,
isotropic and linearly elastic. The material had 7800 kg/m3 of mass density and 200000 MPa of modulus of
elasticity. Meshing model used tetrahedral element and generated 2694 elements.
The steps consisted of the initial, static general and frequency steps. Hinged-hinged boundary condition was
applied on both ends of specimen at the initial condition step. The end supports used two types (type 1 and type 2) as
shown in Fig. 3. The load was applied by using pressure type in the static general step. The load was applied step by
step from 1000 N to 20000 N. The calculation of natural frequency was performed on frequency step using lancoz
eigensolver.
(a) Type 1 (b) Type 2

FIGURE 3. Shape of end support
030025-3
RESULTS
Figure 4 and Fig. 5 show the relationship between the natural frequency and axial load in the first two modes.
Fig. 4 shows that the experiment result has close result with those of the analytical solution using the beam theory,
6WRNH\¶VIRUPXODDQGQXPHULFDOPRGHOW\SH0HDQZKLOHWKHUHVXOWVRIQXPHULFDOPRGHOW\SHare quite different
from the experimental UHVXOWV )LJ VKRZV WKDW EHDP WKHRU\ 6WRNH\¶V IRUPXOD DQG numeric type 1 are almost
similar. The experimental UHVXOW KDV ORZHU YDOXH WKDQ WKRVH RI WKH EHDP WKHRU\ 6WRNH\¶V IRUPXOD DQG QXPHULFDO
model type 1 and type 2.
FIGURE 4. Relationship between the first natural frequency and axial load
FIGURE 5. Relationship between the second natural frequency and axial load
In both frequencies, numerical model using end support type 2 always resulted in higher value than those of the
other theories. It is possibly caused by the shape of the end support. The end support type 2 behaves as a fix support
although the boundary condition of every solid element has been applied as a hinge.
CONCLUSION
The results showed that the analytical and numerical calculations are in line with the experimental results in the
first mode of natural frequency.
030025-4
REFERENCES
1. M. Saiidi, B. Douglas and S. Feng (1994³3UHVWUHVVforce effect on vibration frequency of concrete bULGJH´-
Struct. Eng., 120(7): 2233-2241.
2. H. Priyosulistyo and M. )HUGLQD³)RUFHSUHGLFWLRQRIF\OLQGULFDO steel beams on pinned-pinned supports
XQGHUD[LDOORDGE\YLEUDWLRQWHFKQLTXH´, Procedia Engineering, 95:178-184.
3. W. F. Stokey, 1998, Vibration of Systems Having Distributed Mass and Elasticity, 4th edition, McGraw-Hill.
4. G. Nugroho, H. Priyosusilo and B. Suhendro ³(YDOXDWLRQ RI WHQVLRQ IRUFH XVLQJ YLEUDWLRQ WHFKQLTXH
UHODWHGWRVWULQJDQGEHDPWKHRU\WRUDWLRRIPRPHQWRILQHUWLDWRVSDQ´, Procedia Engineering, 95: 225-231.
030025-5
Engineering design of centrifugal casting machine
Roni Kusnowo and Sophiadi Gunara

Engineering Design of Centrifugal Casting Machine
Roni Kusnowo1, a) and Sophiadi Gunara2, b)
1,2
Foundry Engineering Technology Department, Politeknik Manufaktur Negeri Bandung,
Jl. Kanayakan no.21 Dago, Bandung, Indonesia, 40135
a)
Corresponding authors: roni@polman-bandung.ac.id
b)
sophiadi@polman-bandung.ac.id
Abstract. Centrifugal casting is a metal casting process in which metal liquid is poured into a rotating mold at a specific
temperature. Given round will generate a centrifugal force that will affect the outcome of the casting. Casting method is
suitable in the manufacture of the casting cylinder to obtain better results. This research was performed to design a
prototype machine by using the concept of centrifugal casting. The design method was a step-by-step systematic
approach in the process of thinking to achieve the desired goal of realizing the idea and build bridges between idea and
the product. Design process was commenced by the conceptual design phase and followed by the embodiment design
stage and detailed design stage. With an engineering design process based on the method developed by G. E. Dieter, draft
prototype of centrifugal casting machine with dimension of 550x450x400 mm, ¼ HP motor power, pulley and belt
mechanism, diameter of 120-150mm, simultaneously with the characteristics of simple casting product, easy manufacture
and maintenance, and relatively inexpensive, was generated.
INTRODUCTION
Centrifugal casting (Figure 1) is a metal casting process in which metal liquid is poured into a rotating mold at a
specific temperature [1]. Basically, the metal liquid must have a specific temperature to reach the desired length and
thickness prior to the freezing. Centrifugal force will hold the molten metal into a rotating mold. The thickness of
the object is determined by the volume of liquid that is poured into the mold. In the centrifugal casting process,
enhancer and canal system are not required. Thus, the yield will be higher than those of the gravity casting process.
Casting will generate products with higher density level and better mechanical properties than the results of gravity
casting.
FIGURE 1. The Process of Centrifugal Casting
Horizontal centrifugal casting machine has several sections as shown in Figure 2. Centrifugal casting machine
has a capacity to perform and repeat the four processes accurately, namely:
1. To rotate the mold at a certain speed.
2. To drain the liquid metal into a rotating mold.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 030026-1–030026-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985496
030026-1
3. Once the liquid metal poured into the mold, the machine is able to let the fluid freezes well.
4. Objects cast should be removed from the mold.
FIGURE 2. Horizontal Centrifugal Casting Machine
Solidification of Centrifugal Casting

Solidification process that occurs in centrifugal casting is almost equal to the gravity casting solidification
process that is affected by the heat transfer fluid into the centrifugal casting mold in addition to the mechanical
actions. In ideal conditions, the crystals will grow when the liquid is in contact with the mold wall and will grow up
to the rest of the liquid freezes uniformly toward the interior of the casting and the casting produces smooth without
any shrinkage defects. It can occur in the presence of continuous heat transfer. Solidification is started from the
outside of the body that comes into contact with the mold toward the inside of the object. To avoid shrinkage defects
or center line shrinkage, heat transfer must be uniform to the deepest part of the object and the whole part has been
frozen in prior to the deepest part freezes. It can be achieved if there is liquid flowing in the mold. Unlike the
solidification that happens in the gravity casting process that starts from the parts in contact with the mold and the
core so that the subsequent frozen is the center of the object, so that many defects occur in centreline shrinkage or
shrinkage. The picture of solidification difference between centrifugal casting and gravity casting is presented in
Figure 3.
FIGURE 3. Differences in Solidification Processes
ENGINEERING DESIGN
The design method is a step-by-step systematic approach in the process of thinking to achieve the desired goal of
realizing the idea or ideas and to build bridges between ideas or ideas with the product. The process of making the
design requires a lot of considerations in order to obtain the design that suits the needs. There are several stages in
the creation of design that must be considered in order to obtain an appropriate design. According to [2], the design
method is conducted in stages in the order available in Figure 4.
030026-2
FIGURE 4. Stages of Engineering Design
Engine design was made to obtain horizontal centrifugal casting machine. Engine design includes engine image,
engine parts, manufacture stages, plan making, and assembly plans.
Conceptual Design
Conceptual design is the process of collecting data relating to the design development. The results of this process
are acquired possibilities of design that is suitable for the needs. Several steps must be done in the process of design
concepts, as follows:
x Problem definition
The main problem is how to design a tool or a machine to rotate the mold where the liquid metal will be
poured into it with a temperature of 14000C with a certain speed.
x Information gathering
The information from literature and Internet will be a consideration in the process of making the prototype
engine design.
x Concept generation
Once information and data were collected, a concept of how to work the machine was developed as given
in Figure 5.
FIGURE 5. Working concept of the Machine
After the structure of design concepts was determined, the concept of prototype machine was prepared (Table 1).
TABEL 1. Concept Table of Centrifugal Casting Machine
No Function 1 2 3
1 Change electricity into mechanic Motor AC / Motor Synchronize Motor DC
Induction
2 Change rotation speed torque Gears Chain and sprocket Pulleys and belts
3 Set the speed of rotation inverter Gear ratio The ratio of the diameter
pulleys
4 Rotate the mold permanent mold ceramic mold CO2 process
From Table 1, the variants of concept prototype centrifugal casting machine is demonstrated in Table 2.
030026-3
TABLE 2. Variants of Concept Prototype Machine
Variant Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4

Variant I 1.1 2.3 3.1 4.3
Variant II 1.1 2.2 3.1 4.1
Variant III 1.1 2.1 3.1 4.3
Concept Evaluation
From the produced concept design, the variants of the working mechanism of the machine were observed and
then evaluated by using weighted evaluation criteria (Table 3). Weight of evaluation criteria used a value of 0 to 1.
TABLE 3. Evaluation of Concepts Variants
No Engineering parameter 1.1± 2.3 ± 3.1 ± 4.3 1.1± 2.2 ± 3.1 ± 4.1 1.1 - 2.1 ± 3.1 ± 4.3
Variant I Variant II Variant III
1 Easy in obtaining materials 1 1 1
2 Easy made 1 0,5 0,25
3 Easy to assemble 1 0,5 0,5
4 Easy to maintain 1 0,5 0,5
5 Economic factors 1 0,1 1
TOTAL SCORE 5 2,6 3,25
Variant 1.1 - 2.3 - 3.1 - 4.3 were the variants selected for the design. A machine with motor AC/induction using
pulleys and belts to transfer the rotation to the roller was selected in which the roller will rotate mold by using CO2
system process.
Embodiment Design
After the design concept was established, embodiment was conducted. This design was designed as reference for
the process of the machine. This design was made by considering the materials, size, shape, and others. The aspects
that must be addressed in the embodiment process are product architecture (Figure 6), machine parts (Figure 7),
configuration design and parametric design. The last two are elaborated in the next paragraphs.
roduct Architecture
Shell Mould
Roller
Shaft
Pillow Block
Frame
Belt
Motor AC
Bolt
Nut
FIGURE 6. Product Architecture
030026-4
No Part Sketch No Part Sketch
Description Description
1 Frame 6 Nut M8
2 Roller
7 Pulley
3 Shaft
8 Shell Mold
4 Pillow
block
9 Motor AC
5 Bolt M6
FIGURE 7. Machine Parts
Configuration Design
The manufacturing process required cutting machines, drilling machines, welding machines and lathes (see
Table 4). The materials consisted of mild steel, ST-60, and aluminum.
TABLE 4. Configuration Design
No Part Description Quantity Process Materials

1 Frame 1 CW B W QC Steel 40x40
2 Roller 4 T B - QC ST-60
3 Shaft 2 T B - QC ST-60
4 Pulley 2 T B - QC Alumunium
5 Shell Mold 1 CW R W QC Mild steel
Parametric Design
The tolerance used is a general tolerance amounting to 0.3.
030026-5
Detail Design
After the design concept was realized, the design was drawn in detail to make it easier for the next process. The
detail design is given in Figure 8.
FIGURE 8. The Detail Design
Bill of Materials
The Bill of Materials (BOM) or the list of parts is a list of each individual component in the product as
demonstrated in Table 5.
TABLE 5. Bill of Materials
Engine Part List

No Part Qty/Engine Materials Part Number
Description
1 Frame 1 Steel 01
2 Shell Mold 1 Mild steel 02
3 Motor DC 1 Standard 03
4 Shaft 2 ST-60 04
5 Pulley 2 Alumunium 05
6 Roller 4 ST-60 06
7 Pillow block 2 Standard 07
8 Bolt M8 12 Mild steel 08
9 Nut M8 12 Mild steel 09
10 Belt 1 Standard 10
030026-6
CONCLUSION
Engine design has been created in such a way to follow the engineering design principle. From the design,
invented horizontal centrifugal casting machine was generated with the machine specification as follows:
x Dimensions : 550x450x400 mm
x Motor Power : 1/4Hp, 1410 rpm
x Mechanism : Pulley and belt mechanism
x Diameter Casting : 120-150 mm Cylinder Casting
REFERENCES
1. Kamlesh. Centrifugal Casting. Available at http://efoundry.iitb.ac.in/TechnicalPapers/dissertations/Kamlesh-
CentrifugalCasting.pdf, accessed on 12 August 2016.
2. Dieter, George E. and Linda C. Schmid. 2000. Engineering Design. New York.
030026-7
Traffic safety program for school children through safe action and safe condition
Budi Yulianto, Setiono, Amirotul Musthofiah Hidayah Mahmudah, and Anjar Budi Santoso

Traffic Safety Program for School Children through Safe
Action and Safe Condition
Budi Yulianto1,a), Setiono1,b), Amirotul Musthofiah Hidayah Mahmudah1,c) and
Anjar Budi Santoso1,d)
1
Civil Engineering Department, Engineering Faculty, Sebelas Maret University, Jl. Ir. Sutami 36A, Surakarta
(57126), Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: budiyuliantophd@gmail.com
b)
setiono@ft.uns.ac.id
c)
amirotulmahmudah@yahoo.com
d)
santosoxyz@gmail.com
Abstract. The facts indicate that the rights of pedestrians is on the wane. Many motorists are unwilling to provide a space
for pedestrians, even when they want to cross the road at zebra-cross facility. The data of traffic accident in Surakarta
City showed that 7.0% of accident victims in 2014 to 2015 were children aged 5-15 or the group of school-aged children.
In general, the location of schools is on the edge of the road where a lot of vehicles run at high speed. Hence, it is very
dangerous for the school children to cross the road. Pertaining to this issue, the Department of Transportation implements
a program named School Safety Zone (ZoSS). ZoSS is a time-dependent speed control zone consisting of road markings,
traffic signs, optional traffic signals, and rumble strips. The objective of this study was to evaluate the effectiveness of the
ZoSS based on the perception of the users, including the students, teachers, parents, and community. This study was
conducted through a series of activities including the distribution of questionnaire to obtain the road userV¶ perceptions.
The results showed that most of the respondents understood the meaning, aim, and benefit of ZoSS. However, it also
found that traffic sign and method of cross the road (Four-T) was not recognized appropriately by the respondents. ZoSS
program was generally ineffective since the pedestrians felt unsafe to cross the road due to the high-speed vehicles.
INTRODUCTION
The development of urban economy leads to the increase of people mobility and goods distribution. The increase
is characterized by the high number of vehicles and pedestrians on the roads. It causes the problems of traffic
congestion and the safety on the roads. Pedestrians as a group of road users is the most vulnerable group to traffic
accidents. Pedestrian safety in the urban areas is frequently neglected which there is indicated by a lack of adequate
pedestrian facilities, particularly the road crossing facilities. Additionally, it is common to find the motorists who are
unwilling to provide a space for pedestrians, even when they cross the road at zebra-cross facility. This phenomenon
leads to potential traffic accidents, especially for pedestrian. Reference [1] reported that 65% of road accidents
caused fatalities on pedestrians, of which 35% were children.
Table 1 shows the data of the victims of traffic accidents based on age in Surakarta City in 2010 to 2015. Data
analysis showed that 7.0% of the victims of traffic accident in 2014 to 2015 were children aged 5 to 15 who are in
the school-aged children.
Reference [3] mentioned that children relatively have little knowledge, skills, and concentration level which are
required for their safety. The wide range of children's behavior without sufficient awareness, such as, practical joke,
less concentration while cycling or walking, do not look at traffic before crossing the road, do not pay attention to
traffic signs and traffic lights when crossing the road, could increase the risk of accidents. School children aged
under 14 years-old frequently do not understand the traffic rules because their basic education does not involve the
rule to behave in traffic in a good manner [4]. Ignorance knowledge of road users (adults) against the traffic signs,
road markings, and lack of awareness in obeying traffic rules is also a factor that leads to high traffic accidents [5].
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040001-1–040001-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985497
040001-1
TABLE 1. Traffic accident victim by age in Surakarta City.
Age
Year
5 to 15 years 16 to 25 years 26 to 35 years 36 to 45 years 46 to 55 years > 56
2010 5.1% 32.0% 18.5% 19.8% 14.8% 9.9%
2011 5.4% 33.8% 21.4% 17.7% 13.3% 8.5%
2012 2.1% 4.3% 39.5% 16.5% 15.6% 22.0%
2013 5.7% 29.9% 8.9% 16.9% 15.1% 23.5%
2014 7.7% 30.5% 7.5% 16.7% 13.8% 23.9%
2015 6.4% 25.9% 7.8% 15.2% 14.0% 30.7%
Source: [2].
Pedestrian safety should be a serious concern in transportation. It is important to promote the pedestrian safety in
the school areas since most of kindergarten, primary school, junior high school, and senior high school are located
on the major roads. It means that many children can be found on the streets in the beginning and the end of school
hours [6]. As an effort to anticipate the problems pertaining to school children safety, the Department of
Transportation implemented School Safety Zone (ZoSS) program [7]. ZoSS provides facility to control the speed of
vehicles in the school area in a specific time hence pedestrians particularly the school children can cross the road
safely. In Surakarta City, Department of Transportation, Communication and Information (DoTCI) of Surakarta has
implemented ZoSS in some schools, among them are at SDN Madyotaman, SDN Kristen, and SMPN 8.
The objective of study was to evaluate the effectiveness of the ZoSS based on the perception of the users,
including students, teachers, parents, and community. This study was conducted in a series of activities to obtain the
road userV¶ perceptions by using questionnaires method. Survey was carried out at 2 (two) primary schools and 1
(one) junior high school as mentioned previously and at Car Free Day (CFD) event on Brigjend Slamet Riyadi
Street, Surakarta city.
SCHOOL SAFETY ZONE

The main purposes of traffic calming are to reduce traffic accidents and to improve the condition of the
neighborhood for people to live [8]. References [9] and [10] suggested that traffic calming techniques can be
classified into: legislation and enforcement, surface and signing treatment, vertical and horizontal deflection, entry
treatment, and zones restriction. One type of zones restriction is ZoSS in which this facility is built in the school area
[7].
The aim of ZoSS is to protect school children, particularly the pedestrian children, from the susceptibility of
traffic accidents. Low speed is obliged for all vehicles in the school zone to anticipate any spontaneous and
unpredictable movement of school children that can cause traffic accidents. ZoSS is established by modifying the
zebra-cross which is equipped with road markings (zebra cross, red carpet marker, yellow zig-zag marker, parking
restriction marker), traffic signs (parking restrictions, pedestrian crossing and speed limits), rumble strip, and traffic
signal. Fig. 1 shows type of ZoSS at road type 2/2UD at speed limits of 25 km/hr.
040001-2
FIGURE 1. ZoSS at road type 2/2UD at speed limit of 25 km/hr [7].
DATA ANALYSIS AND RESULTS

Surveys were carried out at SDN Madyotaman - Gajah Mada Street, SDN Kristen - MT Haryono Street, SMPN 8
- HOS Cokroaminoto Street and CFD area - Birgjend Slamet Riyadi Street. Total number of respondents involved in
this activity were 408 respondents, consisting of 48 teachers, 96 students, 64 parents who drop and pick up their
children at school, and 200 people at CFD area. Following section describes the data analysis and results.
Understanding ZoSS Function

In order to determine the level of respondentV¶ understanding on ZoSS, the respondents' recognition on ZoSS
was inquired previously 7DEOH VKRZV WKH QXPEHU DQG SHUFHQWDJH RI UHVSRQGHQWV¶ recognition on ZoSS. The
results indicated that many students did not recognize the concept of ZoSS (52.1%), especially primary school
students. According the information obtained from the respective schools, the socialization from DoTCI regarding
with ZoSS was carried out some times ago, and hence most of the students had forgotten the concept.
TABLE 2. 5HVSRQGHQWV¶UHFRJQLWLRQRQ=R66
Recognize Not recognize
Respondents
Number % Number %
Teacher 44 91.7 4 8.3
Student 46 47.9 50 52.1
Parent 56 87.5 8 12.5
CFD
159 79.5 41 20.5
attendant
Respondents who recognized ZoSS was subsequently inquired about their understanding related to the meaning,
aim, and benefit of ZoSS. The results indicated that not all respondents who recognized the presence of ZoSS
understanding its function in terms of meaning, aim, and benefit. The specific number and percentage of
UHVSRQGHQWV¶ XQGHUVWDQGLQJ on ZoSS are presented in Table 3. In general, all respondents had relatively good
understanding on the function of ZoSS, except the students and parents who had less understanding on the aim of
ZoSS.
040001-3
TABLE 3. 5HVSRQGHQWV¶XQGHUVWDQGLQJRQ=R66
CFD attendants Teachers Students Parents
Understanding Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
P % P % P % P % P % P % P % P %
Meaning 88 55.3 71 44.7 26 59.1 18 40.9 29 63.1 17 36.9 29 51.8 27 48.2
Aim 103 64.8 56 35.2 35 79.5 9 20.5 21 45.7 25 54.3 26 46.4 30 53.6
Benefit 89 55.9 70 44.1 30 68.2 14 31.8 29 63.1 17 36.9 31 55.4 25 44.6
Note: P = number of respondents.
Understanding the Four-T Method

Four-T method is the procedure on how to cross the road safely. Four T stands from ³:DLW D PRPHQW /RRN
Right, Look Left, DQG/RRN5LJKWDJDLQ´7DEOHVKRZVWKHQXPEHUDQGSHUFHQWDJHRIUHVSRQGHQWV¶XQGHUVWDQGLQJ
on the Four-T method. The results indicated that all respondents generally understand the Four-T method, except the
students, in which approximately 82.3% students did not understand the Four-T method. It shows that most of the
students whose schools were equipped with ZoSS facilities did not practice the Four-T method.
TABLE 4. 5HVSRQGHQWV¶XQGHUVWDQGLQJRQ)RXU-T method

Understand Not Understand
Respondent
Number % Number %
Teacher 40 83.3 8 16.7
Student 17 17.7 79 82.3
Parent 41 64.1 23 35.9
CFD attendant 137 68.5 63 31.5
'ULYHUV¶$WWLWXGHtoward ZoSS
Data analysis showed that 40 teachers, 64 parents, and 186 people, drove their vehicles regularly (driver) while
the students were pedestrian and passenger (non-driver)7KHGULYHUV¶DWWLWXGHWRZDUGV=R66, in detail, is presented
in Table 5. In general, all respondents reduced their speed and stopped at the stop line, and there was no respondent
who did not care to the pedestrian or run their vehicles at high speed. This result showed WKDWGULYHUV¶DZDUHQHVVWR
pedestrian safety was relatively high.
TABLE 5. 'ULYHUV¶DWWLWXGHWRZDUGV=R66
'ULYHUV¶$WWLWXGH Teachers Parents CFD attendant
Reduce the speed and stop at the
50.0 43.8 39.2
stop line
Reduce speed but do not stop at the
32.5 29.7 31.2
stop line
Stop due to dismissal by traffic
17.5 26.5 29.6
warden
Do not even bother by pedestrians
and stay in the vehicle at high 0.0 0.0 0.0
speed
040001-4
Understanding and Compliance to Traffic Signs Installed on ZoSS
5HVSRQGHQWV¶XQGHUVWDQGLQJDQGFRPSOLDQFHWRWUDIILFVLJQVLQVWDOOHGRQ=R66 are demonstrated in Table 6 and
7. The results showed that all respondents generally understand the meaning of traffic signs and comply with the
sign regulation, except the students. Most of the students did not understand the meaning of traffic signs especially
the primary school students, therefore, they did not comply with the sign regulation. Traffic signs that were less
understood and obeyed by the respondents was the pedestrian crossing signs.
TABLE 6. 5HVSRQGHWV¶XQGHUVWDQGLQJRQ7UDIILF6LJQV
CFD attendants Teachers Students Parents
Signs
Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
87.0 13.0 91.7 8.3 22.9 77.1 73.4 26.6
86.0 14.0 93.7 6.3 36.4 63.6 65.6 34.4
64.5 35.5 85.4 14.6 14.6 85.4 54.7 45.3
77.5 22.5 81.2 18.8 8.3 91.7 62.5 37.5
82.5 17.5 93.7 6.3 8.3 91.7 67.2 32.8
43.0 57.0 47.9 52.1 13.5 86.5 34.4 65.6
100.0 0.0 97.9 2.1 67.7 32.3 98.4 1.6
62.0 38.0 91.7 8.3 4.2 95.8 71.8 28.2
040001-5
TABLE 7. 5HVSRQGHWV¶FRPSOLDQFHWR7UDIILF6LJQV
CFD Teachers Students Parents
Signs
Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
84.5 15.5 91.7 8.3 21.8 78.2 73.4 26.6
70.5 29.5 93.7 6.3 33.3 66.7 64.1 35.9
61.0 39.0 81.2 18.8 14.6 85.4 54.7 45.3
68.5 31.5 77.1 22.9 6.2 93.8 60.9 39.1
80.0 20.0 91.7 8.3 6.2 93.8 65.6 34.4
40.0 60.0 47.9 52.1 12.5 87.5 34.4 65.6
99.0 1.0 97.9 2.1 65.6 34.4 98.4 1.6
60.5 39.5 85.4 14.6 4.2 95.8 71.8 28.2
Understanding the Red Carpet and Yellow Zig-Zag Markers Installed on ZoSS
5HVSRQGHQWV¶XQGHUVWDQGLQJon the red carpet and yellow zig-zag markers installed on ZoSS is demonstrated in
Table 8. The results showed that all respondents generally understand the meaning of red carpet marker installed on
ZoSS, except the students. Meanwhile, most of the respondents did not understand the meaning of yellow zig-zag
marker installed on ZoSS.
TABLE 8. 5HVSRQGHQWV¶XQGHUVWDQGLQJRQWKHUHGFDUSHWDQG\HOORZ]LJ-zag markers (%)
Red Carpet Marker Yellow Zig-Zag Marker
Respondents
Yes No Yes No
Teachers 70.5 29.5 34.1 65.9
Students 28.3 71.7 10.9 89.1
Parents 67.9 32.1 17.9 82.1
CFD attendant 80.5 19.5 25.2 74.8
Effectiveness of ZoSS
The effectiveness of ZoSS performance can be examined from the pedestrians¶ perception, in which the
pedestrians IHHO VDIH ZKHQ FURVVLQJ WKH URDG 5HVSRQGHQWV¶ perception due to the availability of ZoSS is
demonstrated in Table 9. The results showed that most of CFD attendants and teachers feel safe to cross the road
while the students and parents relatively feel unsafe to cross the road because of high speed vehicle.
040001-6
TABLE 9. 5HVSRQGHQWV¶SHUFHSWLRQUHODWHGWRWKHDYDLODELOLW\RI=R66
5HVSRQGHQWV¶)HHOLQJ CFD attendant Teachers Students Parents
Safe to cross 69.5 72.9 36.5 39.1
Unsafe to cross without any assistance 9.5 16.7 19.8 25.0
Unsafe to cross due to high speed vehicles 21.0 10.4 43.8 35.9
CONCLUSIONS
From the results of the data analysis, several conclusions can be derived as follows:
1. Many students, particularly the primary school students, did not recognize the ZoSS.
2. In general, the respondents have relatively good understanding on the function of ZoSS, except the students and
parents who have less understanding on the aim of ZoSS.
3. The respondents, except the students, generally understand the Four-T method.
4. 'ULYHUV¶DZDUHQHVVWRSHGHVWULDQVDIHW\LVUHODWLYHO\high. It can be concluded from the drivers who reduce speed
and stop at the stop line.
5. The respondents, except the students, generally understand the meaning of traffic signs and comply with the sign
regulation.
6. Pedestrian crossing sign is the traffic sign that is least understood and obeyed by the drivers.
7. The respondents, except the students, generally understand the meaning of red carpet marker installed on ZoSS
but did not understand the meaning of yellow zig-zag marker.
8. In general, the effectiveness of ZoSS performance is ineffective EDVHGRQWKHVWXGHQWVDQGWHDFKHUV¶SHUFHSWLRQ.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The authors would like to acknowledge the LPPM of Sebelas Maret University for their support in funding this
research. Thanks also for our colleagues and student who have helped indirectly for this research.
REFERENCES
1. DGoLT. Peraturan Ditjend Perhubungan Darat Nomor 3226 Tahun 2006 tentang Uji Coba Zona Selamat
Sekolah di 11 Kota di Pulau Jawa. Jakarta: Ditjend Hubungan Darat (Directorat General of land Transportation),
2016.
2. N. Hidayati, L. Ronghui and M. Frank. The Impact of School Safety Zone and Roadside Activities on Speed
Behaviour: the Indonesian Case, Procedia Social and Behavioral Sciences 54 (2012), pp. 1339-1349.
3. T. Harvey. A Review of Current Traffic Calming Techniques, University of Leeds, UK, 1995, see
http://www.its.leeds.ac.uk/projects/primavera/p_calming.html.
4. T. Kurniati, G. Hendra and Z. Dony. Evaluasi Penerapan Zona Selamat Sekolah di Kota Padang. Jurnal
Rekayasa Sipil Jurusan Teknik Sipil, Fakultas Teknik, Unversitas Andalas, Volume 6 No. 2, Oktober 2010, pp.
55-64.
5. I. Kusmaryono, S. Ferry and W. Endang. Persepsi Pengguna Fasilitas Zona Selamat Sekolah. Jurnal Transportasi
Volume 10 No. 3, Desember 2010, pp. 205-214.
6. A. Rahmah. Kajian Model Perilaku Pengambilan Keputusan Menyebrang Jalan Bagi Pejalan Kaki. Tesis.
Universitas Indonesia, 2003.
7. M. Slinn, P. Matthews and P. Guest. Traffic Engineering Design: Principle and Practice, Oxford: Elsevier
Butterworth-Heinemann, 2005.
8. Traffic Accident Unit of Surakarta City Police. Traffic Accident Victim by Age in Surakarta City, 2015
9. J. C. Weiss, G. A. Smith, C. A. Baum, D. M. Dowd, D. R. Duebin, K. P. Quinlan, R. D. Sege, M. Turner and J.
Wright. Policy Statement - Pedestrian Safety. Journal of the American Academy of Pediatrics, 124, 802-808
(2009).
10. WHO. World Report on Child Injury Prevention 2008, World Health Organization (WHO) Publication, Geneva,
2008.
040001-7
The impact of noise level on students’ learning performance at state elementary school
in Medan
Buchari and Nazaruddin Matondang

The Impact of Noise Level on Students’ L earning
Performance at State Elementary School in Medan
Buchari1,a), Nazaruddin Matondang1,b)
1
Industrial Engineering Department, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Sumatera Utara
Jalan Almamater Universitas Sumatera Utara, Medan, Indonesia 20155
a)
Corresponding author: ibossanti@yahoo.com
b)
nazaruddin_matondang@yahoo.com
Abstract. This study was conducted to determine the level and impact of noise on pupils’ learning performance that was
observed through a survey at State Elementary School (SDN 060882), which is located on the corner of Abdullah Lubis
Street and Pattimura Medan Street. The study was done by measuring the noise level using the Threshold Limit Value
(TLV) by taking 24 locations as the measurement points. The results indicated that the noise levels exceeded the standard
TLV >55 dBA as regulated in the Decree of the Minister of Environment No. KEP/48/MENLH/11/1996. According to the
data processing, the noise level at school was 70.79 dBA. The classrooms were classified into noisy zones based on the
Noise Mapping. Those in Red Zone which noise level were in the range of (69-75 dBA) were Class IIIa, Class IVb, and
Class VI. In addition, those in Yellow Zone which were in the range of (65-69 dBA) were Class II, Class IIIa, Class IVa
and Class V. The noise brought the physiological impact in the forms of dizziness that had the highest percentage of 22%
and emotional and uncomfortable feeling of 21%; the communication impact of teacher's explanation disturbance of 22%;
and Pupils’ learning performance was evidenced to decline of 22%. Some improvements are suggested to reduce the noise
such as the reposition of windows, acoustic material to cover the classrooms’ wall, and bamboo trees or grasses as the
barried around the school area.
INTRODUCTION
The teaching and learning quality is highly influenced by the internal factors, e.g., the teacher’s performance, since
teachers can affect their students' achievements. Many researchers have suggested that teacher’s quality is an important
factor in improving the student performance, as well as high teacher incentives are associated with better student
performance. Nevertheless, external factors, namely the environment factor [1], also affect the student performance
as reported by most of recent studies that the association between teacher’s knowledge and students’ learning has
linear effects [2], and also involves external factor. The social atmosphere of a school is a potential and important
contributing factor to the student outcomes [3]. Therefore, educational zone requires a serene atmosphere instead of
any disturbances including from the traffic noise.
Here, noise is defined as unwanted noise that could give negative effects to a person both physically (such as
hearing loss) and psychologically (such as frustration and nuisance). In modern cities, noise becomes a global problem
which has been examined extensively around the world. Today, urban noise is considered as a public health problem
[4]. Noise pollution is a major environmental problem. It was estimated 10 millions of people in Europe were exposed
to the excessive traffic noise, which may cause stress, illness and even fatal impact. A conservative estimation
predicted the social cost of traffic noise was amounted to 0.4% of total GDP [5]. However, there is no model for
estimating urban noise based only on urban variables (and, thus, excluding variables related to traffic) has been
proposed [6].
The effect of noise in the classroom can make several disorders in students hearing, communication and
intelligence [7]. Noise pollution, in the recent years, has been well recognized as one of the major trepidations that
affect the quality of life in urban areas worldwide [8]. Currently traffic noise is not a new problem, but a persistent
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040002-1–040002-9; doi: 10.1063/1.4985498
040002-1
problem that should be solved together, since 54 % of the world’s population lives in urban areas, a proportion that is
expected to rise 66 % by 2050 [9].
The main impact of noise in urban areas is endured by students, especially whose schools are located near the busy
road. Noise exposure from machines produced by large vehicles noise pollution may cause interference and work
stress [10]. The negative impact of noise is worse at school with an open classroom design or located near to external
noise sources [11].
Long term and repeated noise exposure can lead to psychological health as well as it can reduce the students’
learning motivation when they are at school [12]. The noise of various vehicles can disturb the mood of students in
the class [13]. Noise as a chronic stressor has the potential to disrupt executive functioning (EF) in children [14].
Basically, noise in the school environment affects the teaching and learning process. A comprehensive model of
effect and motivation is necessary for disentangling the variance of subject-specific measures into component [15].
This process needs good verbal communication, especially at the beginning of school life when children are the
development process of hearing strategies, thus impairing the understanding of certain activities in the case of not
being able to hear the full statement [16]. Additionally, it can disturb the clarity of the child’s voice in the classroom
and the loss of concentration during school activities and even lead to a decline of student’s academic performance
due to constant exposure to noise. The noise might hinder the students to improve their talent, where environment is
one of the central factors in optimizing an individual’s performance of his or her everyday activities [17]. Students'
learning experiences contribute to the development of their interest in particular learning domains [18], hence, if the
domains are influenced by noise, the student cannot fully concentrate.
Based on the Ministry of Environment No.KEP/48/MENLH/11/1996 regarding with the Threshold Limit Value
(TLV) of the noise for the school is 55 dBA. The value of TLV of >55 dBA would disturb students in terms of hearing
when they are exposed to the frequencies continuously. Effects of noise exposure that are described above by the
specified TLV will affect the performance of student learning so that it will affect the development of student
achievement. It is certainly a benchmark to the progress of teaching and learning process at schools. The noise level
at the school which is located right on the corner of the busy road of Abdullah Lubis Street Medan, according to the
results of the initial measurement is 73 dBA. It is caused by the condition of the school that is located alongside a road
and crossroads (traffic light) where many vehicles pass through in front of the school and the volume of vehicles pass
around the school is approximately more than 70 vehicles per minute at a speed of 10-20 km/hrs, causing the
cumulatively voices from the noise of horns, machinery, crowd, exhaust, parking attendants, student exercising sound,
that add noise into the school environment besides causing vehicle noise pollution. Consequently, it is such a nuisance
in the learning process of the students . The purposes of this study were to investigate the noise level in the school
environment and the classrooms that affect the learning performance of the students and to assess the potential of this
disturbance on the students’ academic achievement, so that some solutions to overcome the noise are suggested in
this paper.
RESEARCH METHODS
This research was conducted in State Elementary School (SDN 060882) Medan located on the corner of Abdullah
Lubis Street and Pattimura Street, Medan. The research was carried out for 4 (four) months. This study used a survey
to get the facts of phenomena that exist and to find the actual information to get to the truth [19]. A survey generally
uses the instruments such as questionnaires and checklists that are filled by the selected respondents. The object of
this research was the students in the school environment.
The steps of data collection in this research were:
1. Collecting noise levels data at state elementary school in Medan by using a sound level meter.
2. Determining the point of measurement in accordance to the European Commission Working Group Assessment
of Exposure to Noise (WG-AEN) with a measurement area of 10 x 10 meters.
3. Distributing questionnaires to students at state elementary school in Medan.
4. Recapitulating the noise level data and questionnaire data.
The instruments used in this study were the sound level meter, meter, stopwatch, and questionnaires. The variables
observed in this study were:
1. The noise level, the noise level depends on the time during measurement.
2. The position of the classroom, which is the distance of the classroom from the road. The impact experienced by
the students and the impact of noise exposure heard by students.
040002-2
3. The impact on the teaching and learning process, which is the impact of noise exposure to the interaction between
teachers and students during the learning process.
4. Noise Engineering fomulation to provide some solution to reduce the noise by proposing several improvements.
Data processing was carried out with the steps as follows:
1. Measurements Point Mapping and Noise Mapping
Mapping measurement point was prepared using a contour map, with a 10x10 meter grid and noise mapping using
software surfer 11.0.
2. Calculation of Noise Equivalent at each Measurement Point
Calculation of equivalent sound pressure level was done in period of time recommended by the Ministry of
Environment.
3. Calculation of Total Noise Equivalent
The calculation of the noise level equivalent was taken during the day time at the research period.
4. Distribution of Noise Impact on Teaching Learning Process Questionnaire
At this stage, the distribution of questionnaires was to find out the impact of noise on the students.
5. Analysis of Noise Impact.
The noise impact analysis was to determine the most frequent impacts of noise on the students.
Measurement Point Mapping

Measurement point mapping aimed to describe the details of the entire school area for the subsequent analysis. It
used a contour map with 10x10 meter grid. By examining the specific area in the school, as many as 24 points of
measurement are detemined. Image of measurement point map can be seen in Fig. 1.
FIGURE 1. Measurement points in SDN 060882 Medan
040002-3
Noise Mapping
Noise mapping aimed to find the noise level in school zones based on the color. Noise Mapping was created by
using software suffer 11.0. The data was the average noise level. Image of Noise Mapping in SDN 060882 Medan can
be seen in Fig. 2.
FIGURE 2. Noise Mapping of SDN 060882 Medan
The object of the research questionnaires were students who were in the classrooms included in the red and yellow
zone of noise mapping. Class VI, class VB and class IIIB were in red zone, while class V, class IVA, class IIIA and
class II were in yellow zone. Students in those classes were presumed to endure the impact of noise because their
classes were in the zone that over the standard of TLV of 55 dBA.
Equivalent Noise Level Calculation to Measurement Points

Noise level at each point and time measurement of 24 days was represented by the equivalent noise level. Sample
calculation at point 1, for L1 (7 a.m.) can be seen in Table 1.
TABLE 1. Noise Level of Measurement Point 1
Day Noise Level (dBA) Day Noise Level (dBA) Day Noise Level (dBA)
1 73.83 9 73.24 17 74.12
2 72.35 10 74.33 18 73.66
3 74.65 11 73.90 19 74.98
4 72.86 12 72.78 20 74.56
5 72.13 13 72.63 21 73.26
6 74.11 14 74.31 22 74.16
7 72.15 15 74.22 23 74.43
8 72.58 16 72.61 24 72.36
The calulation used the formula as follows:

Leq = 10 log10[Ʃtj10Lj/10] [1] (1)
040002-4
Where, tj = fraction of time with the measurement of 24 days (that is = 1/24).
Subsequently the calculation used the following equation,

ଵ ଵ ଵ
Leq =10log10[1079,6/10+ 1080,3/10+ 1082,4/10+.........+ 1081,8/10] (2)
ଶହ ଶହ ଶହ
Leq = 73.61 dBA
Differences of equivalent noise level (Leq) in Elementary School 060882 Medan can be seen in Fig. 3. Based on
the graph, it can be seen that the measurement point 1 4 exceeds the TLV set by the Ministry of Environment that is
> 55 dBA.
FIGURE 3. Noise Level Graph in State Elementary School 060882 Medan
Calculation of Total Equivalent Noise Level

Total equivalent noise level is the noise during day and night. However, this research only counts the daytime
noise level (Leq daytime). Sample calculation as follows:
L1 (07.00) = 73.61, L2 (10.00) = 73.12, L3 (12.00) = 73.48
The formula was:
Leq = 10 log10[t110L1/10+ t210L2/10+ t310L3/10][2] (3)
Where:
t1 = the fraction of time representing the hours 6:00 a.m. to 9:00 a.m. (that was = 3/7).
t2 = the fraction of time representing the hours 09:00 a.m. to 11:00 a.m. (that was = 2/7)
t3 = the fraction of time representing the hours 11:00 a.m. to 13:00 p.m. (that was = 2/7)
It was followed by,
ଷ ଶ ଶ
Leq =10log10[ 1073,61/10+ 1073,12/10+ 1073,48/10] (4)
଻ ଻ ଻
Leq = 73.44 dBA

With the same formula, the recapitulation of the noise level during daytime in each measurement point was
established and it is presented in Table 2.
Subsequently, the average of total noise level equivalent was determined.
(Leq Point 1 + Leq Point 2 + …… + Leq Point 24)
Total average Leq= (5)
24
73,49+73,23+…+65,53
=
24
= 70.79 dBA
040002-5
It can be assumed that the total equivalent noise levels in State Elementary School 060882 Medan was amounted
to 70.79 dBA.
TABLE 2. Summary of Noise Level Daytime at State Elementary School 060882 Medan
Noise Level (L)
Point Leq (dBA)
L1 L2 L3
1 73.61 73.12 73.48 73.44
2 73.40 72.89 73.33 73.24
3 73.89 73.24 73.58 73.63
4 73.67 73.36 73.45 73.52
5 73.23 73.39 73.52 73.36
6 71.67 71.63 72.36 71.87
7 70.80 71.63 72.49 71.58
8 70.88 71.29 71.68 71.24
9 68.51 68.25 68.61 68.47
10 68.54 68.62 68.22 68.47
11 69.41 69.13 74.08 71.27
12 73.09 73.16 73.64 73.27
13 73.00 72.91 73.52 73.13
14 68.93 69.15 73.95 71.07
15 67.05 66.93 74.13 70.40
16 66.34 66.65 74.24 70.32
17 65.37 64.82 73.72 69.57
18 66.77 66.79 66.22 66.63
19 69.58 68.58 69.40 69.27
20 73.35 71.42 69.09 71.92
21 73.38 69.32 69.22 71.51
22 69.16 68.56 69.11 68.98
23 66.87 65.79 68.87 67.30
24 62.68 62.66 68.97 65.53
Noise Impact Assessment

To determine the impacts caused by the noise on the students’ performance, data collection through questionnaires
that have been distributed previously was performed.
The Impact of Noise Towards

Physiological Disorders
Noise that makes dizzy
Noise that makes feeling

tired
19% 22% Noise that makes headache
19% 19%
Noise that felt in almost all
21% side of school
Noise that makes heart

palpitate
FIGURE 4. Physiological Disorders Statement Questionnaire Result Diagram
In Fig. 4, the physiological impacts of noise on students included tiresome, headache, crowded, heart palpitation,
and the highest percentage was dizziness (22%).
040002-6
Psychological Disorders
Noise that makes mad
Noise that makes hard to

concentrate
21% 21%
Noise that makes stress
20% 20%
18% Noise that makes feeling lazy
Noise that makes not

comfortable
FIGURE 5. Psychological Disorders Statement Questionnaire Result Diagram
In Fig. 5, the psychological impacts of the noise on the students included hard to concentrate, stress, laziness, and
less comfortable, while the highest percentage was it made the students angry and uncomfartable (21%).

Communication Disorders
Noise that makes
teacher's sound not clear
Noise that distrubing

questions that given by
teacher
19% 22% Noise that distrubing
comunication between
classmates
20% 19% Noise that makes hard to
understand explaination
20%
Noise that distrubing
when asking question
FIGURE 6. Communication Disorders Statement Questionnaire Result Diagram
In Fig. 6, communication impact of noise to the students can disturb question from the teacher, disturbing
communication between classmates, hard to understand, and hard to ask question. The highest percentage is to make
the teacher’s sound not clear (22%).

Students Performance
Lots of students don’t
attend the class
Decreasing of students
development
22% 18%
Unfocus during the
class
20%
20% Uneffective practical
lesson
20%
Declining achievement
due to decreasing of
student performance
FIGURE 7. Student Performance Statement Questionnaire Result Diagram
In Fig. 7, the impact of noise on the students’ performance can cause the students are less enthusiastic to attend
the class, less focus during the class, ineffective practical lesson, student development decline and the largest
percentage was the declining achievement due to lower students’ performance, of 22%.
040002-7
DISCUSSION
The result of noise level calculation in the State Elementary School 060882 Medan was considered too high related
with the learning process and student achievement. The noise from vehicles horns, machinery, noise, exhaust, parking
attendants, student exercising sound was included and the average result was approximately 70.79 dBA, while the
maximum noise level as set by the Ministry of Environment No. Kep-48 / MENLH / 11/1996 is 55 dBA. Classrooms
can be classified as "noise", which is included in the Red Zone by mapping noise class where the noise level in the
range of 69-75 dBA, namely: class IIIa, IVb Class, and Class VI. In addition, classrooms included in Yellow Zone
based on noise mapping were classes where the noise level was in the range of 65-69 dBA, namely: class II, class IIIa,
class IVa and Class V.
Noise engineering was formulated to provide some solutions to reduce the noise by proposing improvements, like
the reposition of the class window for not facing the road, or the plant of bamboos as a barrier and grasses to reduce
the noise. Using bamboo as a barrier could reduce the noise by 1.1 dBA, in which 3 trunks of bamboo are planted
every 2.5 meters, with the length around 50 m from Abdullah Lubis Street. The recommended number is 16 trunks
that will reduce approximately 7.33 dBA, and around 5.68 dBA at Pattimura Street. Grasses also can reduce noise in
the school. They cover the entire open space of the school, and it can reduce 10.81dBA from Pattimura Street and
7.214 dBA from Abdullah Lubis Street towards the classroom. Changing the material in the classroom with acoustic
material also can reduce noise, covering the ceiling with gypsum, using plaster bricks, changing the windows glass
with thickest one, can reduce the noise until 8.55 dBA.
CONCLUSIONS
The conclusions that can be taken from this study are:
1. The noise level in State Elementary School 060882 Medan Terrain exceeded the standard set by the Ministry of
Environment No. Kep/48/MENLH/11/1996, which is 55 dBA for the noise in the school. The noise level in the
observed school based on the data processing was 70.79 dBA which exceeded 55 dBA.
2. Classrooms included in the Red Zone based on noise mapping were classed where the noise level was in the range
of (69-75 dBA), namely: Class VI, Class IVb, Class IIIa, meanwhile classrooms included in the Yellow Zone
based on noise mapping were classed where the noise level was in the range of 65-69 dBA, namely: Class V,
Class IVa, Class IIIa and Class II.
3. The impact of noise generated by distributing questionnaires resulted the moise may bring physiological impact,
which is often experienced by students in the form of dizziness. While the psychological impact include emotional
and uncomfortable feeling. It also affect the communication process since the teacher’s voice becomes unclear.
4. The impact on the student performance is the declined achievement due to the consequenses of noise disturbance.
5. Proposed improvements to reduce the noise are as follows:
a. The barriers such as bamboo and grasses around the school area are recommended.
b. The reposition of the classroom window that faced the source of the noise and replacement of the window
materials with acoustic material.
c. Material selection for the classroom wall by using acoustic material to reduce the noise at the class.
REFERENCES
1. H. Feng and J. Li. 2016. Head Teachers, Peer Effects, and Student Achievement. China: University Huangzhou
(Journal).
2. S. A. Agathangelou, C. Y. Charalambous and M. Koutselini. 2016. Reconsidering the contribution of teacher
knowledge to student learning: Linear or curvilinear effects. Cyprus: University of Cyprus (Journal).
3. L. E. Maxwell. 2016. School building Condition, Social Climate, Student Attendance and Academic
Achievement: A Mediation Model. Journal of Environmental Psychology.
4. P. E. Fielder. 2014. Evaluation of Noise Pollution in Urban Traffic Hubs—Noise Maps and Measurements.
Brazil: University Panara (Journal).
5. H. Xie, J. Kang and R. Tompsett. 2011. The Impacts of Environmental Noise on the Academic Achievements of
Secondary School Students in Greater London. UK: University of Shield (Journal).
040002-8
6. G. R. Gozalo, J. M. B. Morillas, J. T. Carmona, D. M. Gonzales, P. A. Moraga, V. G. Escobar and R. Vilchez-
Gomez. 2016. Study on The Relation Between Urban Planning and Noise Level. Chillie: Universidad Autónoma
de Chile (Journal).
7. B. M. Shield and J. E. Dockrell. (2003) the effects of noise on children at school: a review, Journal of Building
Acoustics, 10(2), 97–116.
8. M. Abbaspour. 2015. Hierarchal Assessment of Noise Pollution in Urban Areas – A Case Study. Iran: Sharif
University of Technology (Journal).
9. E. Margaritis and J. Kang. 2016. Relationship between Green Space-Related Morphology and Noise Pollution.
UK: University of Shiffield (Journal).
10. A. Budiman. 2014. Hubungan Intensitas Kebisingan Dengan Stres Kerja Pada Pekerja Kantor Bandara
Domini Eduard Osok Sorong (Jurnal). Makasar: FKM Universitas Hasanuddin.
11. D. M. Connolly, J. E. Dockrell, B. M. Shield, R. Conetta and T. J. Cox. 2015. Students’ Perceptions of School
Acoustics and the Impact of Noise on Teaching and Learning in Secondary Schools: Findings of a Questionnaire
Survey. UK: University Southampton (Journal).
12. Ikhron, I. M. Djaja and R. A. Wulandari. 2007. Pengaruh Kebisingan Lalu lintas Jalan Terhadap Gangguan
Kesehatan Psikologis Anak SDN Cipinang Muara (Jurnal). Jakarta: Universitas Indonesia.
13. B. M. Sheild and J. E. Dockrell. 2003. The Effect of Noise on Children at School: A Review. London: London
University (Journal).
14. G. Belojovic. 2012. Traffic Noise and Executive Functioning in Urban Primary School Children: The Moderating
Role of Gender. Serbia: University Belgrade (Journal).
15. K. Gogol, M. Brunner, R. Martin, F. Preckel and T. Goetz. 2016. Affect and Motivation Within and Between
School Subjects: Development and Validation of an Integrative Structural Model of Academic Self-Concept,
Interest, and Anxiety. German.
16. L. T. Silva, I. S. Oliveira and J. F. Silva. 2015. The Impact of Urban Noise on Primary School. Perceptive
Evaluation and Objective Assesment. Portugal: University of Minho Braga (Journal).
17. M. A. Bar and N. Z. Ratzon. 2016. Enhancing Occupational Therapy Students’ Knowledge, Competence,
Awareness, and Interest in Accessibility. Israel: University of Tel Aviv (Journal).
18. L. K. Fryer. 2016. Modelling The Links between Students' Interest in A Domain, The Tasks They Experience
and Their Interest in A Course: Isn't Interest What University is All About. Australia: University of Sydney
(Journal).
19. S. Sinulingga. 2012. MetodePenelitian. Medan: USU Press.
040002-9
Ring stability of underground toroidal tanks
Asnawi Lubis and Ahmad Su’udi

Ring Stability of Underground Toroidal Tanks
Asnawi Lubis1, a) and Ahmad 6X¶XGL1, b)

1
Structure Mechanics Research Group, Department of Mechanical Engineering, University of Lampung
Jalan Professor Soemantri Brojonegoro No.1, Bandar Lampung, 35145, Indonesia
a
)Corresponding author: asnawi.lubis@eng.unila.ac.id
b)ahmad.suudi@eng.uni.a.ac.id
Abstract. The design of pressure vessels subjected to internal pressure is governed by its strength, while the
design of pressure vessels subjected to external pressure is governed by its stability, which is for circular cross-
section is called the ring stability. This paper presented the results of finite element study of ring stability of
circular toroidal tank without stiffener under external pressure. The tank was placed underground and external
pressure load from soil was simulated as pressure at the top of the vessel along 300 circumferentially. One might
ask the reason for choosing toroidal rather than cylindrical tank. Preliminary finite element studies showed that
toroidal shells can withstand higher external pressure than cylindrical shells. In this study, the volume of the tank
was fixed for 15,000 litters. The buckling external pressure (pL) was calculated for radius ratio (R/r) of 2, 3, and
4. The corresponding cross-section radiuses were 724.3 mm, 632.7 mm, and 574.9 mm, respectively. The
selected element type was SHELL 281 from the ANSYS element library. To obtain the buckling load, the arc-
length method was used in the nonlinear analysis. Both material and geometric nonlinearities were activated
during the analysis. The conclusion of this study is that short-radius and thin-walled toroidal shell produces
higher buckling load.
INTRODUCTION
Toroidal shells are used in many areas of engineering, such as space technology, nuclear power plant, under
water field, and pressure vessel. Toroidal shells can be found in the complete form and incomplete form. The
application of incomplete toroidal shell can be found in the piping system as elbows or pipe bends. Complete
toroidal shells are currently used as LPG fuel tank for passenger cars in some countries in Europe.
The design of toroidal pressure vessel subjected to internal pressure loading is governed by its strength. Stress
behavior of toroidal shells has been investigated by many researchers. Reference [1] investigated the influence of
major to minor axis ratio of elliptic cross-section toroidal shell on its limit pressure, and found that toroidal shell of
circular cross-section withstand the highest limit pressure of all. The influence of cross-section ovality of toroidal
shell on limit pressure was further studied by Ref. [2] and confirmed that toroidal shell with circular cross section
withstand the maximum internal pressure higher than those of oval cross-section. Nonlinear behavior of toroidal
shell having in-plane and out-of-plane oval cross section under internal pressure load was reported by Ref. [3]. In
addition, the influence of radius ratio on limit internal pressure was also studied by Ref. [4] that found out in various
radius ratios R/r in the range of 2 to 10. The volume and thickness was constant and cross-section radius was
different for each value of radius ratio. It found that radius ratio of 4 (four) could withstand the highest limit
pressure. The influence of circumferential position of radial flush nozzle on limit pressure of toroidal tanks was
reported by Ref. [4].
The design of pressure vessels subjected to external pressure is governed by its stability or buckling. The type of
buckling for shell structures is snap-through buckling. For axially loaded shell the buckling type is called post
buckling/bifurcation snap-through. For shells under external pressure load, such as underwater or underground
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040003-1–040003-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985499
040003-1
pressure vessel, the type of buckling is called limit point snap-through buckling [5]. Toroidal shell loaded by internal
pressure would undergo limit point type of snap-through buckling. Numerous studies of buckling behavior of
toroidal shell were reported in scientific and engineering literatures. Stability analysis of an orthotropic complete
toroidal shell based on the Sanders-Budiansky buckling shell theory was reported by Ref. [6], which obtained
numerical results by using differential quadrature method. References [7] and [8] theoretically solved for stress and
displacement of toroidal shell with ring-stiffened ribs subjected to uniform external pressure by using the simple
curved beam theory. In the previous cited papers, it was assumed that the external pressure works uniformly on the
entire external surface of the shell. This paper presented the results of a finite element study of ring stability of
circular toroidal tank loaded by external pressure. For underground application, it was assumed that the external
pressure worked on 300 on the top surface of circumference of the tank as a simulation of soil load from the top. The
plane view of the tank was placed horizontally accordingly.
BEHAVIOUR OF TOROIDAL SHELLS UNDER EXTERNAL PRESSURE

A complete toroidal shell is a special shell of revolution which can be obtained by rotating a circle of radius r
along a line circle of radius R. The ratio of major radius R to cross-section radius r is called radius ratio. Small
radius ratio is called short radius toroidal shell and high value of radius ratio is called long radius toroidal shell, as
shown in Fig. 1.
ƌ ƌ
.
FIGURE 1. Toroidal shell, (a) short radius, (b) long radius
Figure 2 shows the geometric parameters of a complete circular toroidal shell, where R is the major toroidal
radius (the distance between the axis of rotation and the centre of the circular cross-section); r is the radius of the
circular cross-section; t is the shell thickness; ș is the angular coordinate along the meridian, and ĳ is the angular
coordinate along the hoop circle of revolution for the toroid, measured from extrados.
040003-2
ȡ
ǆϬ ĳ ǆŝ ǆŝ ǆϬ
ƌ
ƌϮ
FIGURE 2. Geometry parameters of a toroidal shell
The shape of the toroidal shell is characterized by r1 and r2 (the principal radii of curvature of the shell mid
surface in the meridional plane and the second principal plane respectively):
r1 rr (1)
U R r r cos M
r2 (2)
cos M cos M
Toroidal shell has double curvature, i.e., positive Gaussian curvature for -900 ĳ 0, negative Gaussian
FXUYDWXUH IRU ĳ -900 DQG ĳ ! 0 DQG KDV WXUQLQJ SRLQW DW ĳ 0 7KH DQJOH ĳ LV FLUFXPIHUHQWLDO SRVLWLRQ
measured from extrados (xo). The classical buckling analysis was performed by Ref. [9] and proposed the buckling
pressure due to external pressure as follows:
2
2 §t·
p E¨ ¸

(3)
3 1 X 2 ©r¹
Where, E LV<RXQJ¶VPRGXOXVt is shell thickness, r is cross-section radius, and ȣLV3RLVVRQ¶VUDWLR
Ring stability is defined as resistance to collapse due to external pressure (and internal vacuum). For underground
toroidal tank, resistance to collapse depends upon ring flexibility D/t and soil embedment. Soil support increases
critical vacuum that depends on soil quality, density of the soil, and ring deflection. However, a water table above
the tank decreases the soil support. The classical equation for collapse circular ring subjected to uniform external
pressure is calculated by the following equation [10]:

pr 3 1 X 2 3 (4)
EI
In the present study, the load was vertical soil pressure at the top of the tank, simulated as internal pressure along 30 0
of circumferential angle. The tank position was horizontal and external pressure load acted along 15 0 toward
extrados and 150 toward intrados, from crown position. Radial displacement of a node representing nodes at crown
040003-3
(900 from extrados) was plotted in a graph of load (pressure) vs. displacement and would exhibit either of the two
primary types of snap-through buckling: post buckled/ bifurcation snap-through or limit point snap-through as
shown in Fig. 3.
FIGURE 3. Typical nonlinear load-displacement relation for snap-through buckling [6]
FINITE ELEMENT MODELING AND ANALYSIS

The tank was designed for 15,000 litters in capacity. The volume of a toroidal tank can be calculated by using the
following formula:
V Sr 2 2SR (5)
where, r is radius cross-section and R is major radius of a toroidal tank. If ȡ = R/r is radius ratio, equation (5) can be
written as,
V 2US 2 r 3 (6)
If volume is constant, the cross-section radius r can be calculated according to the following formula:
1
§ V · 3
r ¨¨ ¸
2 ¸
(7)
© 2 US ¹
For volume of 15,000 litters, the cross-section radius for corresponding radius ratio of 2, 3, and 4 were presented in
Table 1. Geometrical in-plane view of the tanks is shown in Fig. 4.
TABLE 1. Toroidal geometry parameter for 15,000 liter capacity
R/r 2 3 4
r , mm 724.3 632.7 574.9
040003-4
Ă ď Đ
FIGURE 4. Circular cross-section toroidal tanks, (a) R/r = 2, (b) R/r= 3, (c) R/r = 4
ANSYS shell281 element was used in finite element modeling. Element sizes in longitudinal and circumferential
direction were 50 and 20, respectively. The total number of element was 12,960. Typical finite element modeling is
shown in Fig. 5.
FIGURE 5. Typical finite element modeling
The tank would be placed underground in horizontal. The vertical loading came from soil on the top of the tank.
Nodes on bottom part of the tank (crown position and 15 0 toward extrados and intrados) had zero displacement in
vertical direction. External pressure from soil at the top part was applied at opposite crown along 30 0 of the
circumference. The arc length method to solve nonlinear problem was used to obtain the buckling load. Typical
boundary condition and applied loading is shown in Fig. 6.
040003-5
FIGURE 6. Boundary conditions and external pressure loading act on a toroidal tank

Figure 7 shows the relation of external pressure and radial displacement of nodes of crown (90 0 from
extrados). It was plot for radius ratio of 2, 3, and 4. The volume and thickness were kept constant for 15,000 litter
and 4 mm respectively. The corresponding ring flexibility D/t for radius ratio of 2, 3, and 4 were 362, 316, and 287,
respectively. It indicated that the toroidal tank exhibited limit point snap-through buckling behavior with the highest
buckling load was obtained from radius ratio of 2, and decreased in accordance to higher radius ratio.
ƌĂĚŝĂůĚŝƐƉůĂĐĞŵĞŶƚĂƚĐƌŽǁŶ
Ϭ͘ϬϬϬϯϱ
Ϭ͘ϬϬϬϯϬ
Ϭ͘ϬϬϬϮϱ
Ϭ͘ϬϬϬϮϬ
Ɖƌͬƚ
ZͬƌсϮ
Ϭ͘ϬϬϬϭϱ Zͬƌсϯ
Zͬƌсϰ
Ϭ͘ϬϬϬϭϬ
Ϭ͘ϬϬϬϬϱ
Ϭ͘ϬϬϬϬϬ
Ϭ͘ϬϬ Ϭ͘ϬϮ Ϭ͘Ϭϰ Ϭ͘Ϭϲ Ϭ͘Ϭϴ Ϭ͘ϭϬ Ϭ͘ϭϮ Ϭ͘ϭϰ Ϭ͘ϭϲ Ϭ͘ϭϴ Ϭ͘ϮϬ
Ěƌͬƌ
FIGURE 7. Load (external pressure)-displacement relation for toroidal tanks
040003-6
Recalling the formula of pressure to yield pY for a toroidal shell subjected to internal pressure [1], which was:
2tV Y U 1
pY (8)
r 2U 1
where ȡ = R/r is radius ratio. Equation (8) indicates that pressure to yield (also limit internal pressure) will be higher
for long radius toroidal. However, due to external pressure as shown in Figure 7, buckling load becomes higher for
short-radius toroidal.
Figure 8 shows the load-displacement for radius ratio of 2 and ring deflection of 362, 290, and 241. It can be
seen that limit point (buckling load) was the highest for ring flexibility D/t of 362 and it decreased in accordance to
the increase of the ring flexibility. In Equation (8) for internal pressure, limit pressure is higher in linear to the
higher thickness. Surprisingly, the present result for external pressure showed that buckling load was lower in
relation to the increased thickness of the shell.
ZͬƌсϮ
Ϭ͘ϬϬϬϯϱ
Ϭ͘ϬϬϬϯϬ
Ϭ͘ϬϬϬϮϱ
Ϭ͘ϬϬϬϮϬ
Ɖƌͬƚ
ͬƚсϯϲϮ
Ϭ͘ϬϬϬϭϱ ͬƚсϮϵϬ
ͬƚсϮϰϭ
Ϭ͘ϬϬϬϭϬ
Ϭ͘ϬϬϬϬϱ
Ϭ͘ϬϬϬϬϬ
Ϭ͘ϬϬ Ϭ͘ϬϮ Ϭ͘Ϭϰ Ϭ͘Ϭϲ Ϭ͘Ϭϴ Ϭ͘ϭϬ Ϭ͘ϭϮ Ϭ͘ϭϰ Ϭ͘ϭϲ Ϭ͘ϭϴ Ϭ͘ϮϬ
Ěƌͬƌ
FIGURE 8. Load-displacement relation for toroidal shell under vertical external pressure
CONCLUSION
From this analysis, it was found that the behavior of toroidal tank under external pressure was opposed the behavior
under internal pressure:
x Buckling load is higher for short radius toroidal shell and is lower for long radius toroidal shell. However,
for internal pressure load, limit pressure is higher for long radius toroidal shell.
x Buckling load is higher for thin shell toroidal shell and is lower as the thickness of the shell increase. Again,
it contradicted the behavior under internal pressure, where higher limit pressure would be obtained by higher
thickness of the shell.
040003-7
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors would like to acknowledge the Research Institute (LPPM), Universitas Lampung for funding this
research under the scheme of BLU Senior Research 2016 with contract No. 550/UN26/8/LPPM/2016.
REFERENCES
1. A. Lubis, J. Akmal, and M.Y.A. Winata, Analysis of Strength and Volume Expansion of Toroidal Tanks of
Elliptic Cross-Section under Internal Pressure Load. Jurnal Mechanical, Vol.5, No.2, pp. 36 ± 42, Department
of Mechanical Engineering, University of Lampung, 2014.
2. $/XELV66DYHWODQDDQG$6X¶XGL7KH,QIOXHQFHRI5DGLXV5DWLRDQG&ross Section Ovality on Limit
Pressure of LPG Toroidal Tanks. Proceedings of the 12th SNTTM, University of Lampung, 2013.
3. A. Lubis, Strength design of toroidal tank for LPG 3-kg. Proceeding of the 10th SNTTM, Brawijaya
Universitas, 2 ± 3 November 2011.
4. A. Lubis, A. Suudi, and N. Tanti, Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis of Pressurized LPG Toroidal Tank with
Radial Flush Nozzle. Proceedings of the 8th SNTTM, Gajahmada Universitas, 2012.
5. R. Wiebe, L.N. Virgin, I. Stanciulescu, and S.M. Spottswood, On Snap-Through Buckling. AIAA Journal
2011-2083
6. D. Redekop, Buckling analysis of an orthotropic thin shell of revolution using differential quadrature.
International Journal of Pressure Vessels and piping, Vol 82, pp. 618 ± 624, 2005.
7. Q. Du, W. Cui, and B. Zhang, Buckling characteristics of a circular toroidal shell with stiffened ribs. Ocean
Engineering, Vol. 108 (2015), pp. 325 ± 335.
8. Q. Du, G. Zou, B. Zhang, and Z. Wan, Simplified theoretical solution of circular toroidal shell with ribs under
uniform external pressure. Thin-Walled Structures, Vol. 96, pp. 49 ± 55, 2015.
9. J.W. Hutchinson, Initial Post-Buckling Behaviour of Toroidal Shell Segments. International Journal of Solids
and Structures, vol. 3 (1967), pp. 97 ± 105.
10. AISI, Welded Steel Pipe, Design manual. American Iron and Steel Institute, Washington, 2007.
040003-8
Study of crack patterns in beam column joint due to upwards anchoring beam effect
Bambang Sabariman and Mochamad Firmansyah Sofianto

Study of Crack Patterns in Beam Column Joint Due to
Upwards Anchoring Beam Effect
Bambang Sabariman1, a) and Mochamad Firmansyah Sofiantob)
Universitas Negeri Surabaya, Jl. Ketintang Baru XII No.34, Ketintang, Gayungan, Kota SBY, Jawa Timur 60231, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: bambangsabariman@unesa.ac.id
b)
firmansyah.s.87@gmail.com
Abstract. Beam-column joint (BCJ) of reinforced concrete is an area of critical which must be carefully designed to
absorb the seismic energy. Inability to absorb seismic energy will cause serious damage to structural failure. It will lead
to shear failure, i.e. brittle and endanger users of the building if the BCJ area is not designed properly. In order to get a
building structure is safe and resistant to disasters, mainly due to the earthquake, the structure must be designed in
accordance to the rules of standard construction (eligible detailing). In general, the anchorages (detailing) reinforcement
beams to the column is pointing downwards, however, what if the steel anchoring beams are pointing upwards. Different
anchoring will result in the behavior of different structures, such as fracturing pattern. This study observes two anchoring
model, by making two test specimens of BCJ. One set of reinforcement beams anchored BCJ upward and downward
respectively, which are applied with monotonic static load. The study investigated the pattern of cracks and ductility of
the beam displacement on BCJ. The results showed that the downward anchoring in the fracturing pattern out of the area
BCJ was anchoring upward pattern rift goes deep into the area BCJ, thus anchoring above makes BCJ unsafe. Downward
anchoring are more ductile than the upward anchoring, however the deflection of all BJC specimens was higher than the
boundaries maximum deflection prediction (ǻprediction = 10.45 mm < HNVSǻexp-min = 13.15 mm), which can be assumed
that all BCJ specimens were ductile, but it still in ductile limited due to displacement ductility Pǻ<3,5.
INTRODUCTION
Area of beam-column joint (BCJ) of reinforced concrete (RC) is a critical area which give a critical damage and
the BCJ has carefully designed in other to absorb the seismic energy. Inability to absorb the seismic energy will give
serious damage on the reinforce concrete of beam and column structure or it is called failure.
Reference [1] developed a new model to predict the shear strength on reinforced concrete beam with small
length of shear and with a point of contra-flexure on range of shear length. On their article, the method was
expanded to be applied to beam-column joint. However, the development of method was not discussed yet about the
effect of the upward anchored of steel reinforcement, especially about the ductility.
In other to obtain the safety of building structure and the resistance of disaster, especially seismic disaster,
structure should be designed to accordance the structure design code include the requirement of detailing structure.
Oftentimes, the detailing of building structure has been designed with good performance, on the construction work,
there is an error work which the detailing is not set to accordance the detailing design, and the mistaken of the
detailing is occurred when the construction management employs a laborer without good skill or they do not to
recheck the detailing. The mistaken of detailing, for example, are the overstake of anchorages steel reinforcement,
WKH VWHHO UHLQIRUFHPHQW ZLWKRXW ³NQLN´ WKH SRVLWLRQ RI anchorages, the length of anchorages, the direction of
anchorages, and the difficulties of construction as consequence of detailing design. This research will do the several
experiments about the effect of upward anchorages to the crack pattern on the beam-column joint, this is conducted
due to answer if the building construction is found incompatibility work between building contractor and
engineering consultant. For example, contractor has to set the anchorages on the upward in the BCJ. Incompatibility
of construction work effect the structure failure, the point of failure is shear failure, and the mechanism of failure is
usually a sudden collapse without any sign of collapse. In the future, these phenomena must be anticipation by good
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040004-1–040004-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985500
040004-1
design on detailing and good construction work. However, on the construction work, there is the difficulty to
upward anchorages steel reinforcement or other modification to simply the construction, therefore this research try
to answer the effect of upward anchorages steel reinforcement and to show the crack pattern of these on the beam-
column joint (BCJ) and the ductility ± displacement value.
SHEAR STRENGTH ON BEAM COLUMN JOINT

According to some models of shear behavior, it is assumed that the shear force resisted by a sloping press area or a
VKHDU FUXWFK ³VWUuW´ LQ WKH FRQFUHWH ,WV VORSLQJ RI FUXWFK (³VWUuW´ LV RQH RI FRQVLGHUDWLRQ LQ Wo determine joint
strength itself. In the shear models which developed on Ref. [1] method, the critical sloping is determined by a crutch
pressure which has maximum strength in the shear displacement resistance. The critical sloping on the flexure
resistance point between two forces is done with opposite direction in a beam, from these recommended that critical
sloping (Tcrit) is shown with function:
f(T) = (1 - JtanT) sin2TCos2T (1)
Where, J = av/h, av = net shear length, h = height of element, T= slope of crutch pressure depend on main axis
of element. Shear strength of element without any bond on each point of contra-flexure, shear strength is confined by
steel bond strength, it is shown with function:
V = 2.Ast.fy.tanTcrit (2)
Where, Ast is area of pressure on each element surface. As alternative, shear strength can be confined by crutch
concrete strength otherwise:
V = D.Q.fcu.b.h (3)
Where, D = (1- J tanT critis)/(tanTcritis + 1/ tanTcritis ), J = a v / h, v = ineffectiveness factor (failure).
Figure 1 shows the typical cross-section, special on beam-column joint (BCJ) which some resemble the
experiment be tested by Ref. [1]. That structure can be analyzed to give a pressure force T to steel beam and shear
force (Vcol) on the column above the beam. Shear force on the joint can be calculated with the formula:
Vj = T ± Vcol (4)
N N
d
d
Vcol
Vcol
P
P
T
T
av
av db
db
Concrete
Concrete strut strut Compression
Compression zone zone in beam
in beam
Vcol Vcol
N+P N+P
FIGURE 1. The steel anchoring beams are downwards. FIGURE 2. The steel anchoring beams are upwards.
040004-2
CRACK IN CONCRETE
Crack on the concrete is a phenomenon which be recognized all over the world and have many causes. Some of
crack situation is not considered dangerous and fully unacceptable, but on the other crack situation is a seriously
deformed, even the negative impact on the structure strength, function and appearance [2]. Visually, crack look like
an irregular line. Crack occurred after the concrete harden is structural crack. This crack is occurred because the
loading cause the flexure strength, the shear strength and tensile stress. Basically, there are three kind of beam crack
[3] i.e. 1. Flexural cracks occurred on area which has the value of flexural moment greater than the small of shear
force. The direction of crack occur the almost perpendicular with beam axis, 2. Shear-flexural crack occur on the
part of beam which has been occurred flexural crack. Shear-flexural crack is a propagation slope-crack from flexural
crack which is occurred before, 3. Web crack shear is a slope-crack which is occurred in the area of center of line of
cross section where each maximum shear force and axial stress is smallest.
When the structure loaded with a force generate the flexure moment which its value are lower than the cracking
PRPHQW WKHQWKHVWUHVVLVDOVRORZHUWKDQWKH PRGXOXVRI UXSWXUHRIFRQFUHWH ZKLFKIU ¥I¶F,IWKHORDGLV
increased then tensile stress is reached the value of fr, so small crack will be occurred. If the tensile stress has been
larger than fr, so the cross section will crack. There are three cases to be considered on the crack problem i.e. a).
When the tensile stress (ft) is lower than modulus of rupture (fr), so the cross section are considered as not-crack or
crack will not occurred (where Ig = 1/12.b.h3), b). When the tensile stress (ft) is equal with modulus of rupture (fr),
so the crack is appear, the moment given a crack is crack moment, c). If moment worked is more than crack
moment, so the crack pattern on the cross section has been spread. For the calculation use crack inertia moment
(Icr), the transformation beam concrete which is stressed and the transformation from the steel reinforcement.
DISPLACEMENT DUCTILITY
Displacement or deflection is important to be predicted, because it include on part of the ability of serviceable
structure. After the data of displacement was obtained, then displacement ductility can be calculated. Displacement
ductility is obtained from the divide of all displacement to the first yield displacement [4]:
'u
P' (5)
'y
Where, P' = displacement of ducktail, 'u = lateral displacement on the end of post-elastic, 'y = lateral
displacement on the first yield on steel reinforcement. As a reference about displacement ductility can be shown on
figure below:
FIGURE 3. Relationship between strength and ductility [4]
040004-3
EXPERIMENTAL STUDY
Concrete Under-Reinforced Design
Beam is designed with under-reinforced concept where U = 0.008, this is conducted in order to avoid the
suddenly collapse as like as the collapse on the over reinforced beam design. Beam are also designed to resist from
shear failure which is caused from vertical beam (P), while the constantly axial pressure force is design as N =
0.1.I¶F.Ag.
Material Preparation
CompressioQVWUHVVGHVLJQRIFRQFUHWHXVHI¶F 03DRQWKHDJHRIFRQFUHWHLVGD\V&XULQJRIFRQFUHWH
are also conducted in order to reduce the crack of heat hydration from interaction between cement and water. The
specimen of concrete is using cylinder with I150x300 mm. The diameter of steel reinforcement use 4 of deform
11.93 mm with yield strength (fy) = 385.733 MPa and the nominal diameter of stirrup use I6.43 and span of stirrup
are 80 mm with yield strength (fy) = 457.667 MPa.
Specimen Preparation
The total of specimen is 2 specimens with the detail, first is specimen with downward anchorages and second is
specimens with upward anchorages.
1
PP
%HDPGHWDLOV
9FRO 3 EE PP
KE PP
GE PP
Standard (3I) '
radius bend 3
PP I\ 385.733 MPa
StirrupI
I·F 42.8403D
&ROXPQGHWDLOV
EF PP
PP KF PP
GF PP
'
I\ 03D
9FRO
StirrupI
I·F 03D
13
FIGURE 4. The Detailing of Reinforced Concrete on Beam Colum Joint with Upward
Anchorages
040004-4
1
PP
%HDPGHWDLOV
9FRO 3 EE PP
KE PP
GE PP
6WDQGDUGI '
UDGLXVEHQG 3 I\ 03D
PP
StirrupI
I·F 03D
&ROXPQGHWDLOV
EF PP
PP KF PP
GF PP
'
9FRO I\ 03D
StirrupI
13 I·F 03D
FIGURE 5. The Detailing of Reinforced Concrete on Beam Colum Joint with

Downward Anchorages
Setting Up of the Specimens Testing (Laboratory Testing)

Setting up of the specimens testing is designed to obtain the actual data which compatible with research
planning. In this research, beam is not put on the vertical direction but the beam is positioning on the horizontal
direction and the beam reclines above the rigid floor (Fig. 3). The constantly compression axial force column is
given by the hydraulic jack tools, while the P force on the end of the beam is given by the hydraulic jack tools which
is parallelized with load cell. Linier Variable Displacement Transducer (LVDT) is assembled on the point of beam
and the behind of beam-column joint (BCJ), the LVDT is assembled for obtaining the displacement data on the
beam and the swift position of the point behind of BCJ. Steel strain gauge is assembled on the beam steel reinforced
and the column steel reinforced, and then steel strain gauge is positioned 5 cm in front of BCJ. While steel strain
gauge assembled on the column steel reinforced is exactly located in the middle of BCJ. Furthermore, the cell load
data, LVDT and steel strain gauges, is recorded by logger data. This research is also conducted the observation by
using visual method, particularly the crack pattern on the specimens.
FIGURE 6. Setting Up the Specimen on the Laboratory
040004-5
EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS
Compressive Strength
Based on the concrete mix design, making the concrete mixing, volume of mixing was designed based on the
volume of beam and the volume of cylinder of I150x300 mm. The expectation of the concrete mixing on the beam
and cylinder could be finished together. After the concrete mixing on the beam and cylinder, the specimen was also
conducted the curing method which the time of curing were 24 days. After that, the result of compression test on
cylinder specimens and tensile stress of the steel reinforced can be shown by the table below:
TABLE 1. The Result of Cylinder Compression Strength

Area of The
Number Diameter of Compression
Cylinder maximum
of Cylinder Strength
force (Pi -
Specimen (mm) (mm2) kN)
(MPa)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) = (4)/(3)
1 150 17663 770 43.595
2 150 17663 750 42.463
3 150 17663 750 42.463
Avarage 42.84
TABLE 2. Main Tensile Stress Test (D11,93 mm)
Number I Yield Yield strain

nominal fsh
of Strees (fy (H)
(mm) (MPa)
Specimen - MPa)
1. 11.83 382.194 0.00290 538.000
2. 11.98 386.684 0.00210 533.000
3. 12.00 388.321 0.00275 532.000
Avarage 11.93 385.733 0.00258 534.333
Failure Modes
Based on the result of experiment on the laboratory was obtained that the failure of all the specimens, include the
upward and downward anchorages, is caused of the flexural mechanism. This happens because the beam had been
avoided from shear failure accordance to the Ref. [1]. The mechanism of the crack on the BCJ with downward
anchorages was started from crack around the plastic hinges, and then the crack spread to low part of the beam,
coincide the crack in front of the column and spread on the vertical on the low part of beam until it reached the
collapse. Mechanism of the crack of BCJ with the upward anchorages is exactly on the BCJ joint, and then spread
with diagonal on the connection of BCJ. The crack pattern spread into the area of BCJ is caused that the longer of
strut concrete on BCJ.
040004-6
(a) (b)
FIGURE 7. (a) Crack Patter on the BCJ-D, (b) Crack Patter on the BCJ-U
Displacement Ductility
When the loading of P was continued, it could be obtained the displacement data from LVDT and steel strain
from steel strain gauge. The number of steel strain correspond with the number of force (P), i.e. starting from P-awal
to collapse of BCJ. Therefore, the first yield strain (ǻ\DQGWKHILUVW\LHOGGLVSODFHPHQWǻ\ZHUHDOVR discovered.
So that, it could be calculated the displacement ductility of BCJ, the calculation of the displacement ductility used
the formula, Pǻ ǻXǻ\DIWHUWKDWLWFRXOGEHPDGHWKHJUDSKEHWZHHQ00-max and the ductility of displacement.
The result of this research show that the displacement of all the BCJ specimens are greater than the predict value,
ZKLFKWKHSUHGLFWYDOXHRQWKHIDLOXUHDUHǻ .45 mm [5], it can be exceeded by all the BCJ specimens, where the
number of displacement on the failure are obtained the lowest of displacement value on the BCJ-U specimens,
ǻHNVS .15 mm. The lowest value caused P force were P = 7.932 ton. WhileWKHGLVSODFHPHQWSUHGLFWLRQǻHNVS
= 10.45 mm, is occurred at the P = 6.7658 ton. If it compare with the displacement prediction that can be discussed
that all the BCJ specimens on the safety condition.
The experiment result of displacement ductility and its prediction are illustrated in one graph, its goal is to
compare between both result, experimental and prediction, so that can be discovered how much the capability of
BCJ to deform due to the work load. And the result is can be shown on the table and graph below.
TABLE 3. The Recapitulation of Experimental Result on the Displacement Ductility

M/Mmaks
Specimen
(%)
Pȴ Noted
Downward
BCJ-D 0.85 3.164
Anchorages
Upward
BCJ-U 0.85 1.628
Anchorages
FIGURE 8 Comparison Graph Between the Displacement Ductility vs M/Max
040004-7
Table 3 shown that the displacement ductility value of BCJ-U specimens (upward anchorages) is lower the
displacement ductility value of BCJ-D specimens (downward anchorages). The difference happen is caused of the
slip between steel reinforced and concrete on the upward anchorages area. From the displacement ductility value at
0.85 Mmax, BCJ-D (downward anchorages) is obtained P'=3.164 which is almost to P'=3.5. While the displacement
ductility (upward anchorages) is obtained P'=1.628 which is far from the P'=3,5 (the value of limited ductility).
CONCLUSIONS
The displacement of all the specimens is able to exceed the maximum displacement limit accordance the
SUHGLFWLRQǻSUHGLNVL= 10.PPDQGǻHNVS-min = 13.15 mm. The BCJ-D displacement ductility is more ductile
than The BCJ-U displacement ductility, it can shows on Pǻ = 3,164 for BCJ-D and Pǻ = 1,628 for BCJ-U. While, all
the specimens of BCJ in this experiment is still on the limited ductility category, because the value has Pǻ = <3,5 on
figure 3.
The failure pattern on all of the BCJ specimens on this experiment is flexural collapse, its mean that the Ref. [1]
had been able to anticipate the shear failure, but on the BCJ-U specimens with the condition unsafe, because the
failure pattern go into the joint area.
SUMMARY
Beam ± column joint is more importance to be designed; the error of detailing will give the damage which is not
unregulated on the code. In this research shows that the upward anchorages causes the crack pattern go in to the BCJ
area, if it is happened on the BCJ of building then the failure occur on the that building.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The first time said thanks to the Kemenristekdikti RI and The State of Surabaya University that has given the
research grant. Said thanks also to PSIT UGM Yogyakarta that has helped to finished BCJ experiment.
REFERENCES
1. D.E. Parker & P.J.M. Bullman, Shear Strength within Reinforced Concrete Beam-Column Joints, (The
Struktural Engineer, London, Volume 75/no.4 18 February 1997).
2. D. Beal, Types and Causes of Crack and Cracking, (Queensland University of Technologi), pp. 1-6
3. R. I. Gilbert, & N. C. Mickleborough. 1990. Design of Prestressed Concrete (Unwin Hyman Ltd, London, 1990).
4. T. Paulay & M.J.N. Priestley, Seismic Design of Reinforced Concrete and Masonry Buildings (John Wiley &
Sons Inc., New York, 1992), pp. 26-139.
5. J. Moehle, Seismic Design of Reiforced Conrete Buildings (McGraw-Hill Education, New York, 2015), pp.
230-235.
040004-8
The value of corridor in flat as place attachment in the life of the dwellers
Lilianny Arifin, Wanda K. Widigdo, Anik Juniwati, and Danny Mintorogo

The Value of Corridor in Flat as Place Attachment in the
Life of the Dwellers
Arifin, Lilianny1,a), Widigdo, Wanda K1,b) Juniwati, Anik1,c) Mintorogo, Danny1,d)
1
Architecture Department, Universitas Kristen Petra, Surabaya, Indonesia.
a)
Corresponding author: lili@petra.ac.id
b)
wandaw@petra.ac.id
c)
ajs@petra.ac.id
d)
dannysm@petra.ac.id
Abstract. Place attachment has been examined extensively in the behavioral and architecture studies over the past two
decades. In the production of housing, designers mainly focus on the quality of the physical components. Place attachment
is just the form of connection between a person and the environmental setting. However, it was challenging for this study
to grasp the aspects of meanings and attachment, both in the level of personal, community and natural environment
contexts, which are not adequately considered in the design process. In this study, three-dimensional model of personal
and community attachments to their corridor in the flat was conceptually and empirically examined. The aim is to test an
integrated approach to measuring place attachment at the corridor in flat in understanding the values of locations in the
life of the dwellers. Sample cases included the examination of attachment to the hallway in three units located in
Surabaya, Indonesia. It found out that the value of corridor as a place was affected by the daily experience of the places,
social bonding, neighborhood interaction, and landscape values.
INTRODUCTION
The concept of place attachment has been around in the environmental psychology and built environment
literature for a quite long time, for some decades. People study some sort of these concepts, trying to understand its
meaning. Also concerning the meaning, especially in the making of a dwelling place, some studies emphasized on
research related to sustaining the physical elements and activities. While the essential function of meaning is less
explored in housing research, other studies highlighted to the meaning refers to the space and the psychological
aspects of environmental experience from place attachment.
Reference [1] described that space and venue are interlocked, where the physical dimensions of space have the
meaning according to the values of people experience. The place is an area filled with meanings [1]. The social
characteristics combined with the personal perceptions and functional needs shape place attachment [2]. The place-
based approach emphasizes that the experience of place is not just physical but also perceptual. Likewise, the
psychological of the dwellers and their experiences and perceptions are the fundamental sources of evidence in
understanding place values. This study interested in the place process and dialectics of place that have placed
considerable emphasis on a two-dimensional model of place attachment comprising of personal and community
context [3].
Recent studies have developed effective YDOXHVWRXQGHUVWDQGLQGLYLGXDOV¶DWWDFKPHQWVWRSODFHEDVHGXSRQWKHLU
interactions with both the personal and community context. The connection between two dimensions of place
attachment named social and natural environment has been examined by Ref. [4].
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040005-1–040005-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985501
040005-1
Social and natural environment bonding was distinct and separate dimensions of place attachment and they had
significant associations with environmental concern. The physical aspects were represented by natural surroundings
attachment and the social aspects were present as dwellers attachment. Both approaches articulate the physical and
social dimensions of place attachment, they perceive how the natural and social aspects of place relate to place
identity and location dependence [5]. This study advocated for new integrated models which consider the
LQWHUDFWLRQVEHWZHHQSODFHDVDSHUVRQDOFRPPXQDODQGQDWXUDOVHWWLQJDQGKRZWKHVHWWLQJVXSSRUWVGZHOOHUV¶VHOI-
identity [6]. Associating nature-based and social attachments with more traditional measures of place attachment,
such as place identity and location dependence, may begin to address this need [3]. Place identity refers to those
dimensions of self, such as the mixture of feelings about particular physical settings and symbolic connections to
place. Location dependence addresses the functional relationship based specifically on the individual physical
connection to an environment, for example, how it reflects the degree to which the physical environment provides
conditions to support an intended.
The objective of this paper was to grasp the value of corridor as place attachment in flat. It discussed the way in
which people value a place based on qualitative explorations. The physical features do not produce a sense of place
directly, but influence the symbolic meanings of the space, which relate to the strength of place attachment. Using
place-based approach, it focused on the sense of place embedded in the feeling of dweller as personal, emotional
connection of dwellers as a community, and relation to the surrounding natural environment.
PLACE ATTACHMENT
Place attachment is evident in the functional bonding between people and places described as place dependence.
The main characteristic of place attachment is the desire to maintain closeness to the object of attachment [7]. It can
be connected with elements of the feeling of belonging, or emotional connection to the precise history [6] [8]. Place
attachment also relates to the affective aspects of environmental meaning. It is embedded in the emotional bond or
link between people or individuals and particular places [7].
This study applied an integrated model of place attachment: personal, community and natural environment [3].
Place identity and location dependence are included in the individual context pole, because they are related to highly
personalized connections to place which are either symbolic (identity) or functional (relationship) in nature.
TABLE 1. Operational Definition of Place Attachment [3]
Context Construct Definition

Personal Place Those dimensions of self, such as the mixture of feelings about
identity particular physical settings and symbolic connections to place, that
define who we are.
Place Functional connection based specifically on the individual physical

dependence connection to a setting, for example, it reflects the degree to which the
physical environment provides conditions to support an intended use.
Community Social Feelings of belongingness or membership to a group of people, such

bonding as friends and family, as well as the emotional connections based on
shared history, interests or concerns.
Environment Nature Implicit or explicit connection to some parts of the non-human natural
bonding environment based on history, emotional response, or cognitive
representation (e.g., knowledge generation).
040005-2
Place Attachment: Personal Context
As suggested by those definitions of place attachment, an underlying assumption is that dwellers and their works
are integrally intertwined. The place is a powerful WKLQJ EHFDXVH LW RIIHUV D ZD\ WR DUWLFXODWH WKH GZHOOHUV¶ ZKROH
experiences more precisely, which people perceive as normal, everyday world, of taken-for-granted. Any emotional
bond between dwellers and environment requires a clear language arising from and accurately portraying this lived
emplacement.
Scholars on place studies have paid significant attention to the strength of individual or personal attachments to
place. Most researchers have operationalized these particular place attachments using constructs of place identity and
place dependence. Although place identity and location dependence are highly correlated, different relationships
have been found between these constructs and dependent variables such as experience use history and landscape
values [3]. A review of the place attachment literature indicates that personal connections to places are dynamic and
encompass a broad range of physical settings, such as residential, recreational, and leisure settings.
Place Attachment: Community Context

In architecture, Yi Fu Tuan theory of topophilia has already discussed a primary node of space and place
concepts that deal with cultural identity and memory, but excluding social interaction. Instead then, the social context
has been operationalized in a variety of ways, including community attachment, belongingness, rootedness, and
IDPLOLDULW\ 7KH WHUP µFRPPXQLW\¶ LV EDVHG RQ D V\VWHPLF PRGHO RI FRQQHFWLRQ EHWZHHQ UHVLGHQWV DQG WKHLU
communities [9]. This model postulates that community attachment is strongly related to individual connections to
local social bonding and the interactions which occur between them.
Study of place as articulated moments in the networks of social relations and understandings, has been discussed
in Ref. [10] who defined a place as a product of sensing and perceiving. They found that the social connectedness
developed among people over the course of their residence in a given place was a more powerful predictor of
community attachment than population size or density of the city population. More recent studies build upon the
systemic model in different settings. Reference [11] referred to these social connections in place as social bonding or
the feelings of belongingness or membership to a group of people, as well as the emotional connections based on
shared history, interests, or concerns.
This study interested in the socio-cultural dimension of place discussing the two-dimensional model of private
place attachment that is inadequate in addressing place attachment and highlighting the need to consider the social
context of place bonds, including the social interaction through which place meanings are mediated [7] [12] [6].
Social attachments to places have been described by using a variety of constructs that in some instances have
overlapping meanings. However, there are high correlations between private place and community place contexts
that explain most of the variance in place attachment.
Place Attachment: Environment Context

This study acknowledged that place attachment has special connections to the physical environment beyond
natural settings. The recreational literature has also explored how the characteristics of the natural environment affect
the place attachment. A number of studies have examined relationships among place attachment, human use, or
experience of the leisure activity and the characteristics of the natural environment. Kyle and colleagues observed the
relationships among place attachment, leisure activity involvement, and the characteristics of specific natural
environments [13]. Schultz and colleagues suggested that individuals hold implicit cognitive associations between
themselves and the natural environment which influence their environmental concerns [14].
The previous literature review indicated that there are multiple, overlapping meanings of place attachment and its
operational measures that have been developed in different disciplines, such as social psychology, environmental
psychology, and community sociology. The environment constructs include: 1). Place belongingness where people
IHHODµPHPEHUVKLS¶WRDQHQYLURQPHQW [15], 2). Place rootedness which refers to a unyielding bond to home [16], 3).
Place familiarity defined as pleasant memories, achievement memories, and environmental images associated with
places. Nature bonding has been operationalized in a variety of ways, together with heartfelt sympathy towards life,
and connectedness to nature. Unlike the definition of place identity presented in the leisure and recreational sciences,
it has a much greater emphasis on the connections between the individual and the natural world. Reference [17]
040005-3
showed that emotional towards nature could be distinguished IURPLWVFRJQLWLYHHTXLYDOHQWRIµLQWHUHVWLQQDWXUH¶DQG
is a powerful predictor of nature-protective behavior.
METHODS
In this study, we conceptualized and empirically examined a model of place attachment among three samples of
Penjaringan, Grudo and Jambangan flat contexts. The design has involved place identity and place dependence
(personal connections to place), nature bonding (links to the natural environment), and social bonding (links to the
community in place). First, the theoretical basis for a three-pole conceptualization of place attachment was
expounded. Each of the proposed place attachment dimensions was defined and discussed.
&ULWHULDRIVDPSOHVLQFOXGHGWKHGZHOOHUV¶GXUDWLRQRIOLYLQJLQWKHIODWVUHSUHVHQWDWLYHRIMREYDULDWLRQGULYHU
security, construction workers, street hawkers), the number of children as the dominant groups occupying and
intimacy with (having harmony with the close neighbor). This paper focused on the practical values of the places
expressed in the feelings about the place, memory, sense of pride, and belonging. The findings would be applicable
to the study areas which covered the housing for low-income people in Surabaya City. The results were discussed in
the value of corridor from the dwellers perspective and the secure place attachment.
FINDINGS AND RESULTS: THE VALUE OF CORRIDOR IN FLAT

This study interested in the tangible and intangible dimension of place was focused on: 1) the personal context of
place attachment, specifically in the degree of individual attachments on place identity and place dependence (Table
1), 2) the community context, grasping the dwellers activities and their social interaction within neighborhood, and
3) the natural environment context, describing the related constructs of environmental identity, emotional
connectedness to nature, which we proposed can be assessed by using the overarching construct of nature bonding.
The aim was to avoid any loss of the characteristics that are familiar and meaningful to dwellers that would impact
their continued attachment. Therefore, it enhanced the value of corridor as a social setting. Identification of elements
that were significant to dwellers to ensure that any form of natural intervention would encourage the dwellers in
daily engagement and comfort their sense of attachment to flat as a place they engage with. Table 2 summarizes the
value of corridor in flat.
CONCLUSION
The purpose of this study was to test an integrated model of place attachment which four constructs of place
identity, place dependence, social bonding, and natural bonding. The outcome showed that the attributes of place
dependence have an emotional connection with social bonding and nature bonding. It was represented by the
GZHOOHUV¶FDUHDERXWWKHFOHDQOLQHVVVLQFHWKH\XVHGFRUULGRUDVSOD\LQJSODFHIRUWKHLUFKLOGUHn. In addition, they have
a connection related to the social bonding of their neighbors in taking care of children who play around the corridor.
Besides having a connection with social bonding, the dwellers also feel comfortable when notifying some people to
take care of plants at corridors. From these result, it is possible that place dependence can be placed on both as the
attribute of personal or community contexts. Moreover, the significance in identifying area identity is the impact of
the presence of harmony between place dependence, social bonding, and nature bonding. The dwellers felt happy and
enjoyed the shady corridor. The understanding about which attributes have emotional connections with the other
characteristics would help to improve the design process of corridor in flat. Thus, the appreciation of the dweller's
daily experience, how they perceive the corridor, how they interact with their neighbors, and how they feel comfort
with plants as shading, have an important role for the flat corridor design.
040005-4
TABLE 2. The Meaning of Place Attachment in Corridor of Flats
Construct Dwellers of Penjaringan Dwellers of Grudo Dwellers of Jambangan
Place Lively place of corridor Lively place of corridor Happy being at corridor
identity
Enjoy the busy atmosphere Enjoy the shady corridor Enjoy the shady corridor
of corridor
Happy with the physical Happy and satisfied with Happy and pleased with the
condition of the hallway. the physical condition of physical condition of the
the corridor. hallway.
The sense of pride due to
the popularity of receiving The sense of pride due to the
the third award from popularity of receiving the
national housing ministry second award from municipal
for flat cleanliness. for the flat cleanliness.
Place Care about the cleanliness Care about the Care about the cleanliness of
dependence of corridor. cleanliness of corridor. corridor.
Like the hallway¶V Like the hallway¶V Like the corridor¶V

atmosphere that can be used the atmosphere that can atmosphere that can be used
for playing of their be used for playing of for playing of their children
children. their children
Pleased with the price range Pleased with the price Pleased with the price
of different floor. range of different floor the range of different floor
Social Care about the other Care about the other Care about the other children
bonding children who are playing children who are playing who are playing around the
around the corridor. around the corridor. corridor.
Feeling comfortable and Feeling comfortable and Feeling comfortable and

satisfying due to good satisfying due to its satisfying due to familiarity
business and familiarity strategic location in the with people and the flat.
with people and the flat. heart of Surabaya city.
Nature Love the corridor for Love the corridor for Love the corridor for
bonding playing, chatting and planting, chatting and planting, chatting and
observing people activities. observing people observing people activities
activities.
Proud of the specialty
facilities, like traditional Secure attachment to the
food vendors, Broadbent location due to being
learning centers. familiarized with the
place. (The Flat was
built on their former
Kampong)
REFERENCES
1. E. Relph. Place and placelessness. Pion, London (1976).
2. S. Bott, S, J. G. Cantrill and O. E. Myers Jr. Place and the promise of conservation psychology. Human
Ecology Review (2005), 10(2), 100-112.
3. C. M. Raymond, G. Brown and D. Weber. The Measurement of place attachment: Personal, community and
environment connections. Journal of Environment Psychology. (2010), 30, 422-434.
4. J. M. Brehm, B. W. Eisenhauer and R. S. Krannich. Community attachments as predictors of local
environmental concern: The case for multiple dimensions of attachment. American Behavioral Scientist
(2006), 50(2), 142-165.
5. D. R. Williams and J. J. Vaske. The measurement of place attachment: Validity and generalizability of a
psychometric approach. Forest Science (2003), 49(6), 830-840.
040005-5
6. K. A. Sampson and C. G. Goodrich. Making place: Identity construction and community formation through
³VHQVHRISODFH´LQ:HVWODQG1HZ=HDODQG. Society & Natural Resources (2009), 22(10), 901-915.
7. M. C. Hidalgo and B. Hernandez. Place attachment: Conceptual and empirical questions. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, (2001), 21, 273-281.
8. C. K. Trentelman. Place attachment and community attachment: A primer grounded in the lived experience of
a community sociologist. Society & Natural Resources (2009), 22(3), 191-210.
9. J. D. Kasarda and M. Janowitz. Community attachment in mass society. American Sociological Review (1974),
39, 328-339.
10. D. Massey. A Global Sense of Place. Place and Gender (1991), 154.
11. D. D. Perkins and D. A. Long. Neighborhood sense of community and social capital: A multi-level analysis in
A. Fisher, C. Sonn, & B. Bishop (Eds.), Psychological sense of community: Research, applications and
implications. New York: Plenum Press (2002), 291-318.
12. G. Kyle and G. Chick. The social construction of a sense of place. Leisure Sciences (2007), 29(3), 209-226.
13. G. Kyle, A. Graefe, R. Manning and M. Bacon. Effect of activity involvement and place attachment on
UHFUHDWLRQLVWV¶SHUFHSWLRQVRIVHWWLQJGHQVLW\. Journal of Leisure Research (2004), 36(2), 209-231.
14. P. W. Schultz, C. Shriver, J. J. Tabanico and A. M. Khazian. Implicit connections with nature. Journal of
Environmental Psychology (2004), 24(1), 31-42.
15. G. S. Mesch and O. Manor. Social ties, environmental perception, and local attachment. Environment and
Behavior (1998), 30(4), 504-519.
16. Y. F. Tuan. Rootedness versus sense of place. Landscape (1980), 24, 3-8.
17. E. Kals, D. Schumacher and L. Montada. Emotional affinity toward nature as a motivational basis to protect
nature. Environment and Behavior (1999), 31, 178-202.
040005-6
Prediction of surface distress using neural networks
Hamdi, Sigit P. Hadiwardoyo, A. Gomes Correia, Paulo Pereira, and Paulo Cortez

Prediction of Surface Distress Using Neural Networks
Hamdi1,3,a, Sigit P. Hadiwardoyo1,b, A. Gomes Correia2,c, Paulo Pereira3,d and
Paulo Cortez4,e
1
Department of Civil Engineering, Faculty Technic, Universitas Indonesia Depok 16242, Indonesia
2
Department of Civil Engineering, ISISE, School of Engineering, University of Minho, Azurém 4800-058
Guimarães, Portugal.
3
Department of Civil Engineering, CTAC, School of Engineering, University of Minho, Azurém 4800-058
4
Department of Information Systems/ALGORITMI R&D Center, University of Minho, Azurém 4800-058
a)
Corresponding author: hamdi_pmu@yahoo.com
b)
sigit@eng.ui.ac.id
c)
agc@civil.uminho.pt
d)
ppereira@civil.uminho.pt
e)
pcortez@dsi.uminho.pt
Abstract. Road infrastructures contribute to a healthy economy throughout a sustainable distribution of goods and
services. A road network requires appropriately programmed maintenance treatments in order to keep roads assets in
good condition, providing maximum safety for road users under a cost-effective approach. Surface Distress is the key
element to identify road condition and may be generated by many different factors. In this paper, a new approach is
aimed to predict Surface Distress Index (SDI) values following a data-driven approach. Later this model will be
accordingly applied by using data obtained from the Integrated Road Management System (IRMS) database. Artificial
Neural Networks (ANNs) are used to predict SDI index using input variables related to the surface of distress, i.e.,
crack area and width, pothole, rutting, patching and depression. The achieved results show that ANN is able to predict
SDI with high correlation factor (R2 = 0.996%). Moreover, a sensitivity analysis was applied to the ANN model,
revealing the influence of the most relevant input parameters for SDI prediction, namely rutting (59.8%), crack width
(29.9%) and crack area (5.0%), patching (3.0%), pothole (1.7%) and depression (0.3%).
INTRODUCTION
Road infrastructures contribute to a healthy economy throughout a sustainable distribution of goods and
services. Every country prioritizes highway pavement projects according to limited budgets using pavement
distress rating in one form or another [1]. A road network requires appropriately programmed maintenance
treatments in order to keep roads assets in good condition, providing maximum safety for road users under a cost-
effective approach.
Road management would be supported by a robust strategy comprising monitoring and evaluation of pavement
distress so as to maintain an adequate condition of roads [2]. The main surface distresses found in flexible
pavement could include: cracking, pothole, rutting, patching, depression, distortion, disintegration, polished
aggregate, blooding or flushing. These different distresses are analyzed together in order to produce performance
indicators to evaluate pavement condition, essential to define type and priority of treatment.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040006-1–040006-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985502
040006-1
PURPOSE OF STUDY
In a view to identify and prioritize a program maintenance treatment, road deterioration is used to evaluate and
forecast pavement condition during the analysis period. This paper presents a new approach to predict surface
distress of pavement based on performance indicator Surface Distress Index (SDI), following a data-driven
approach. The Directorate-General of Highways (DGH) has been applying SDI comprising several variables: crack
area and crack width, pothole and rutting. This paper proposes a new approach to predict SDI by using additional
components, namely patching and depression.
LITERATURE REVIEW
Currently, using a single model to produce road condition models for all types of the road has been widely used
by many researchers [3,4]. Although a single model may produce reasonable results, but it may not obtain the best
solution due to the differences nature condition or variability of road performance [5]. This paper adopted a
combined performance indicator (SDI) to analyze and evaluate the road condition. The surface distress index can
be defined as the value of damage due to changing of pavement condition. SDI, as a measure of highway system
condition is widely used in monitoring, planning and rehabilitation [6]. The method of collection is conducted
through different approaches, including manual, infrared and laser. SDI in Pennsylvania integrates seven distresses
[5]: Excess Asphalt, Block Cracking, Raveling and Weathering, Transverse and Longitudinal Cracking, Widening
Drop-off, Edge Deterioration, and Rutting. Development of road deterioration model has been carried out by many
researchers [7-13]. Reference [14] proposed several measurements of performance flexible pavement. ANNs are
the most widely used for determination of road condition. Reference [15] applied ANN and Support Vector
Machines as methods for determining the visual condition of roads on inventory and traffic data set with 16
continuous-valued and 2 nominal-valued dimensions.
Data mining (DM) is the scientific field that analyzes raw data in order to extract valuable knowledge [16,17].
DM has been widely successfully applied in several areas, including the Civil Engineering domain, used in various
studies around the world. DM is a set of processes to explore additional value in the form of information that had
been unknown manually from. For instance, DM has been used for the earthworks optimization by a new genetic
programming model, showing the advantages in comparison with traditional methods [18]. DM has also been used
to predict individual wine taste preferences based on physic-chemical analytical tests performed at the wine
certification step [19]. Another application example of DM is the prediction of the risk of organ failure in intensive
care units [20].
METHOD
DM is an emerging area that lies at the intersection of statistics, artificial intelligence and data management.
There are several DM techniques, each one with its own purposes and advantages. In the process of executing this
DM project, several computational tools were adopted, including Microsoft Excel for the storage of distress data,
in term of the CSV (comma separated value) format, while the data-driven modeling was executed using the R
tool (http://www.r-project.org). An example of the adopted Artificial Neural Network (ANN), used during the
modeling phase, is illustrated in Fig. 1. The ANN was set with an intermediate layer composed of 3 neurons, which
led to the best modeling results. All neurons of a given layer are connected to all neurons in the subsequent layer.
A single output layer node is used to compute the SDI value. The data was divided into segments I and II. The
adopted ANN was evaluated using the holdout 2/3 method. ANN was selected as a reference model and to get
robust results, 20 runs of the holdout scheme were executed. The hold out is usually used to estimate the
generalization capability of a model [19]. This method divides on two partitions of the data into training and
validation test. The previous training data is used to fit the model (2/3 of the data), while the latter (with the
remaining 1/3 of data) is used to compute the quality of the prediction estimates.
IRMS Data
The road network from which data supporting this research was collected is in Jambi province, based on the
assumption that the corridors are considered as a primary road network system. This research has been performing
data from IRMS. The data of survey from DGH were obtained for 824 road sections. The data is related with 3
040006-2
corridors, i.e., Eastern, Center and Connecting Corridor in Jambi province and to train the ANN, six input variables
were considered as shown in Table I. These corridors are divided into 2 Segment Data Set, namely; Segment I and
II.
FIGURE 1. Artificial Neural Network Model adopted
TABLE I. Main Statistics of The Numeric Input Variables Each Corridor

Corridor SDI Area Width Pothole Rutting Depression Patching
Crack Crack (%) (mm) (mm) (%)
(%) (mm)
Eastern 20.96 4.96 1.73 3.97 0.00 0.53 2.60
Center 31.62 12.08 2.24 2.90 0.51 0.59 2.28
Connecting 26.43 9.72 2.05 470 0.24 0.58 1.60
Development of Data Mining Model

ANN is powerful learning method with widespread applications in many fields [16]. In this study, an ANN
was applied as the most standard of NN type, the multilayer perceptron. In this model, the equation is adopted
from [17] as in Equation (1). ANN in this class consists of H processing units as one hidden layer, which uses a
feed forward multilayer perception [21,22].
‫ݕ‬ො ൌ ܹ௢଴ ൅ σ଴ିூ ூ

௝ୀூାଵ ݂൫σ௜ୀଵ ܺ௜ Ǥ ܹ௜௝ ൅ ܹ௝௢ ൯ Ǥ ܹ௢ǡ௜ (1)
where ܹ௢଴ is a zero weight represents no connection between two neurons and negative weight represents a
prohibited relationship, ܹ௜௝ is the weight of the connection from neuron j to the unit i (if j = 0, threshold for node
ଵ
j or a bias connection), o the output unit, f is logistic function ቀ షೣቁǡand I is the number of input neurons [11].
ଵା௘
To obtain an accurate model in this study, the ANN hyper parameter (H) is optimized using a grid search of H (4,
8,12). For each H value, a NN is trained and its generalization estimate is measured. The database divided into
Segment I and Segment II dataset in order to avoid over fitting. At Segment I data set comprises 607 random
sections (74%) of total data set. After Segment I stage, the remaining 217 sections (26%) are used for Segment II.
040006-3
Performance Indicator
A performance indicator can be defined in the form of technical parameters as a rule dimensional [23].
Performance indicator consists of a single performance indicator (e.g., IRI) or combined performance indicator
(e.g. SDI, PSI) [2]. Performance indicator can be used as a pavement prediction model based on a scale of
pavement distress. The pavement surface is considered in good condition if the SDI value is inferior or equal to
50 and in bad condition if SDI value is higher than 150. In Indonesia, the road condition is classified according to
IRI and SDI rating [2] as shown in Table 2.
TABLE 2. Surface Condition, Scale of IRI And SDI Rating and Type of Treatment
Surface condition IRI scale SDI scale Type of treatment
Good IRI <= 4 SDI <= 50 Routine maintenance
Fair IRI > 4 & IRI <= 8 SDI > 50 & SDI <= 100 Periodic maintenance
Poor IRI > 8 & IRI <= 12 SDI > 100 & SDI <= 150 Rehabilitation
Bad IRI >12 SDI > 150 Reconstruction
Assessing the validity of ANN Model
The application of ANN model for pavement performance prediction has been used to predict transportation
project [24,25]. The assessing of the interconnection between the nodes and weights is processed onward a perfect
relationship to estimate the results [26,27]. Many research studies used the root mean square (RMS) as a standard
statistical metric to measure model performance [17,24,27]. If the number of the sample reaches 100 or more, then,
by utilizing the calculated root mean square error (RMSE), it can reconstruct the error distribution close to its
accuracy and will be even more reliable. The lower values of mean absolute error (MAE) and RMSE correspond
to a higher forecasting capacity, while an R2 with a value closer to 1 indicates a model that accounts for the greater
proportion of variance.In this study, RMSE, correlation coefficient (R 2) and MAE are used for assessing model
quality. The corresponding equations are defined as follows:
σಿ ത௞ሻమ
೔సభሺ௬௞ି௬
ܴ‫ ܧܵܯ‬ൌ ට ே
(2)
σಿ ෢
ത ሻǤሺ௬ො௞ି௬ሻ
಺సభሺ௬௞ି௬
ܴଶ ൌ ሺ ሻଶ (3)
ටσಿ തሻమ Ǥσಿ
೔సభሺ௬௞ି௬ ො ௞ି௬ොሻమ
೔సభሺ௬
σಿ ෢
೔సభห௬௞ି௬௞ห
‫ ܧܣܯ‬ൌ (4)
ே
Where, yk is desired value,‫ݕ‬

ෝ is predicted value, ‫ݕ‬ത is mean of variables and N is number of sample.
Multivariate Statistical Model

The purpose of any data analysis is to extract information from raw to produce an accurate estimation of an
individual variable, single or composed. The most important and shared question is: which statistical relationship
between a response variable (y) and explanatory variables (xi) can be established. SDI data values are used to try
to develop a mathematical model using program Statplus. This study objective is to define the priority type of
model to be tried and found all correlation variables with R2 = 0.93, this value is generated based on Regression
Statistic.
Based on analysis statistic multivariate above, SDI model obtained the Equation (5) as following:
040006-4
ܵ‫ ܫܦ‬ൌ σ଺௜ୀଵሺ‫ܥܣ‬௜Ǥ ‫ͳݔ‬Ǥ͸ͺሻ ൅ ሺܹ‫ܥ‬௜ ‫ͳݔ‬Ǥͳ͵ሻ ൅ ሺܲ௜ ‫ʹݔ‬Ǥͻͳሻ ൅ ሺܴ௜ ‫ͳݔ‬ǤͲ͸ሻ ൅ ሺܲܿ௜ ‫Ͳݔ‬ǤͲʹሻ ൅ ሺ‫ܦ‬௜ ‫͵ݔ‬Ǥ͵ͺሻ െ
ͳǤʹ͸ʹ (5)
where SDI is Surface Distress Index, AC is Area crack, CW is crack width, P is Pothole, R is rutting, Pcis
Patching and D is depression.
Data Mining Technique of Segment I

The summary of database value input variables (minimum, maximum, mean and standard deviation) for
Segment I and II are shown in Table III. In this study, algorithm ANN was used to train the dataset of Segment I,
obtained from Indonesia Integrated Road Management System (IIRMS) in order to predict the SDI.
TABLE 3.The Summary of Database Values Input Variables for Segments I and II
Area Crack Width Crack Pothole Rutting Depression Patching
(segments) (segments) (segments) (segments) (segments) (segments)
I II I II I II I II I II I II
Min. 0.08 0.00 1.00 1.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.50 0.50 0.00 0.00
Sd. 8.31 6.46 0.87 0.74 4.84 7.40 0.61 0.31 0.07 0.06 4.32 2.64
Mean 9.03 6.16 2.01 1.76 4.03 4.71 0.28 0.09 0.57 0.55 1.96 1.26
Max. 40.00 40.00 4.00 4.00 69.00 69.00 6.00 2.00 0.70 0.70 36.00 15.00
Based on Fig. 2(a), it can be analyzed that the relationship between predicted versus observed by the ANN
model, if the SDI value under than 75, the prediction was more accurate. Similar to Fig. 3(a), SDI is more accurate
if it has value under than 75. This is due to the SDI value under 75 is the majority (75%) of the database.
Figure 2(b) shows the relative importance of each input variable, as measured by a painful analysis procedure.
Based on this Fig. 2(b) the key variables in SDI prediction present the following weight: rutting with more than
50% (corridors are a primary road, with intense and congested, submitted to truck overloading), width crack 29.9%,
area crack 5.0%, patching 3,3%, pothole 1.7% and depression 0.3%. These findings strengthen the empirical data
that consider of rutting, width crack and area crack as the most relevant parameters to develop of surface distress
index.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 2. (a) Observed versus predicted by ANN model for Segment I. (b) Relative importance of each parameter
according to ANN model
040006-5
The MAE, RMSE and R2, 0.173, 0.012 and 0.996, respectively, confirm the quality of prediction Segment I,
as shown in Table 4. Based on this study, the formulation of SDI can be achieved by using the parameters rutting,
width crack, area crack, patching, pothole and depression.
TABLE 4. Performance Measure of Models Segment I and Segment II
Model MAE RMSE R2
Segment I 0.173 0.012 0.996
Segment II 0.492 0.017 0.954
(a) (b)
FIGURE 3. (a) Box Plot Graphic of SDI Segment I (b) Box Plot Graphic of SDI Segment II
Data Mining Technique of Segment II

After training stage of Segment I, the remaining 217 sections (26%) were used for Segment II. The input
variables for a Segment I was similar to Segment II, i.e., the total area of cracks, crack width, pothole, rutting,
depression and patching. The input variable as statistical for Segment II are composing of a summary of the
minimum, maximum, standard deviation and mean value, shown in Table 3.
Regarding the modeling of ANN for Segment II, the predicted versus observed results are shown in Fig. 4(a).
Analyzing the relationship between predictive and measured value shows the case ofSDI higher than 75,
predictions are less accurate. Otherwise, for SDI under 75, the prediction was more accurate, as shown in Fig. 3(b).
The fact of spreading values above 75 in the database is only under 25% and contributes to weaker prediction,
because of SDI more than 75, based on scattered box, is out layer data. The importance of each parameter, obtained
by sensitivity analysis,is shown in Fig/ 4(b),with rutting contributing with 47.9%, crack width 34.2%, followed by
patching, pothole, and area crack area, 9.9%, 7.6% and 0.4%, respectively. Although this model presents a high
performance, it is only valid for data found in the IRMS and for road submitted to the overloaded truck.
Table 4 shows the performance of quality of prediction Segment II obtained by MAE, RMSE and R2, 0.492,
0.017 and 0.954, respectively. This indicates a high accurate prediction. The performance achieved by ANN model
more accurate. Because, it has R2 considerably high. When comparing ANN model of Segment I and Segment II,
the Segment I is superior, as shown in Table 4. Whereas R2 in the Segment I is higher than Segment II; as found
0,996 and 0.954.
040006-6
(a) (b)
FIGURE 4. (a) Observed versus predicted by ANN model for Segment II. (b) Relative importance of each parameter
according to ANN model
CONCLUSIONS
Surface Distress is the key element to analyze and evaluate the road condition. Through the NN Data Mining
approach, the predicted SDI can be obtained, providing a valuable contribution in terms of improving the
assessment process of road conditions to be more accurate in the definition of rehabilitation. Surface Distress Index
(SDI) value was computed for 607 sections of Segment I and 217 sections of Segment II for a complete set of data:
area crack, width crack, pothole, rutting, depression and patching. The Multivariate Statistic Regression and NN
Data Mining were used to try modeling SDI value.
Based on the test results on Segment I and Segment II, it was concluded that the Segment I provides the best
result. because NN Data Mining provided a high coefficient correlation of R2, of 0.996 and 0.954 for Segment I
and Segment II, respectively. When applying Data Mining to Segment I and Segment II, the more accurate
prediction is obtained as SDI value below 75 (Fig. 3 (a) and (b)). The variables weight in SDI prediction for
Segment I and Segment II is as follow: rutting with more than 50% and 48%, respectively, followed by width
crack, 29%, and 34%, respectively. These findings strengthen the empirical data that considers rutting and width
crack as the most relevant parameters to develop surface distress index for road network in Province of Jambi.
Furthermore, it is possible to model the data using multivariate linear statistics model and NN Data Mining has
proved to be powerful tool to predict surface distress index and with similar models that we propose to develop
the models predicting the performance service index and another indicator from database as well as data traffic
and other types of pavement structure.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The Authors are grateful to the Lembaga Pengelola Dana Pendidikan (LPDP) for the financial support
provided to this thesis through the grant financed by the Ministry of Finance Republic of Indonesia.
REFERENCES
1. T. Adams, T. (2011). “Estimating cost per lane mile for routine highway operations and maintenance.” Rep.
No. MRUTC 07-12, Wisconsin Dept. of Transportation, Madison, WI.
2. Hamdi, S. P. Hadiwardoyo, A.G. Correia and P. Pereira, “Road Deterioration Analysis for the National Roads
of Indonesia”,in Proc. of the 14th International Conference on QIR, 2015, pp. 101-110. ISSN 1411-1284.
3. C. L. Saraf, and K. Majidzadeh. Distress Prediction Models for a NetworkLevel Pavement Management
040006-7
System. In Transportation Research Record 1344, TRB, National Research Council, Washington, D.C., 1992.
4. Y. Lee, A. Mohseni, and M. I. Darter. Simplified Pavement Performance Models. In Transportation Research
Record 1397, TRB, NationalResearch Council, Washington, D.C., 1993.
5. X. Chen, S. Hudson, G. Cumberledge, and E. Perrone, 1995, 'Pavement Performance Modelling Program for
Pennsylvania', Transportation research Board, TRR 1508, Washington, D.C.
6. Ministry of Transportation and Communications (MTCO) 1980, 'Pavement Maintenance Guidelines', MTCO,
Policy Planning and Transportation, SP 001, Ontario, Canada.
7. Sayers, Gillespie &Paterson, (1986). Guidelines For Conducting And Calibrating (The World Bank:
Washington DC) Road Roughness Measurements/The International Road Roughness Experiment. World Bank
Technical Paper No 45, pp.365
8. W. Xiaodan, (1999), Research on the International Roughness Index (IRI) as the Pavement Roughness Index
9. N. Bandara., M. Gunaratme, (2001). Current and future pavement maintenance prioritization based on rapid
visual condition evaluation. Journal of transportation engineering, vol. 127, no2, pp. 116-123 (14 refs.)
10. S.A. Dawan, , and R.E. Smith, (2002). “Estimating International Roughness Index from Pavement Distress to
Calculate Vehicle Operating Costs for the San Francisco Bay Area”. In Transportation Research Record:
Journal of the Transportation Research Board, No. 1816, pp. 65-72, Washington, DC
11. Gedafa, (2006),“Present Pavement Maintenance Practice: A Case Study for Indian Conditions Using HDM-
4.” In Compendium of Papers for Transportation Scholars Conference, Nov. 15, 2006, Ames, Iowa.
12. J. Diana and F. Adelino, Road network pavement maintenance optimization using the HDM-4 pavement
performance prediction models, International Journal of Pavement Engineering Vol. 13, No. 1, February 2012,
39–51
13. A. I. Rifai, S. P. Hadiwardoyo, A. G. Correia, P. Pereira, P. Cortez (2015). The data mining applied for the
prediction of highway roughness due to overloaded trucks. International Journal of Technology, 6 (5), pp. 751-
761
14. AASHO, (1962), The AASHO Road Test: Report 5 – Pavement Research, HRB SpecialReport 61E. Highway
Research Board, Washington, D.C.
15. J.F. Egan Louis,Road Visual Condition Rating Assessment Using Artificial Neural Network and Support
Vector Machine. IEEE Xplore, Modelling Symposium (AMS), 2011 Fifth Asia.
16. J. Han, and M. Kamber, “Data Mining: Concepts and Techniques”. Morgan Kaufmann Publishers Inc., San
Francisco, CA, USA, 2000
17. J. Tinoco, A. G. Correia, and P. Cortez, “Jet grouting column diameter prediction based on a data-driven
approach”. European Journal of Environmental and Civil Engineering, pp. 1-22, June 2016.
18. M. Parente, P. Cortez, A. Gomes Correia(2015).An evolutionary multi-objective optimization system for
earthworks. Expert Systems with Applications, 42 (19), pp. 6674-6685
19. P. Cortez, A. Cerdeira, F. Almeida, T. Matos, J. Reis. “Modeling wine preferences by data mining from
physicochemical properties”, Decision Support System, pp. 547-533, June 2009.
20. A. Silva, P. Cortez. M.F. Santos, L. Gomes and J. Neves, “Rating organ failure via adverse events using data
mining in the intensive care unit”. Artificial intelligence in Medicine, 43. Pp. 179-193, March 2008.
21. L. Tsoukalas, and R.E. Uhrig, (1997). Fuzzy and neural approaches in engineering, Wiley, New York.
22. M. Khashei, S. Hejazi, and M. Bijari, (2008). “A new hybrid artificial neural networks and a fuzzy regression
model for time series forecasting.” Fuzzy Sets Syst., 159(7), 769–786.
23. J. Litzka, B. Leben, F La Torre, A. V. Weninger, M. Antunes, D. Mladenovic, S. Brittain, H. Viner, “The way
forward for pavement performance indicators across Europe,” COST Action 354, July. 2008.
24. T. Chai and R.R. Draxler, “Root mean square error (RMSE or mean absolute error MAE) Arguments gainst
avoiding RMSE in the literature. Geosci. Model Dev., 7, 1247-1250, 2014.
25. M. Karlaftis, and I. Vlahogianni, (2011). “Statistical methods versus neural networks in transportation research:
differences, similarities and insights.” Transp. Res. Part C, 19(3), 387–399.
26. B. Smith, B., and M. Demetsky, (1997). “Traffic flow forecasting: comparison of modeling approaches.” J.
Transp. Eng., 10.1061/(ASCE)0733-947X (1997)123:4(261), 261–266.
27. A. Radfar, T. D. Rockaway, Captured Runoff Prediction Model by Permeable Pavements Using Artificial
Neural Networks, Journal of Infrastructure. ASCE, ISSN 1076-0342, February, 2016
040006-8
The function of green belt Jatibarang as quality control for the environment of
Semarang city
Titien Woro Murtini, Arnis Rochma Harani, and Loretta Ernadia

The Function of Green Belt Jatibarang as Quality Control
for the Environment of Semarang City
Titien Woro Murtini1,a), Arnis Rochma Harani1, and Loretta Ernadia1, b)
1
Architecture Department, Faculty of Engineering, Diponegoro University, Semarang, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding authors: titien_wm@yahoo.com
b)
arnis.rochma@gmail.com
Abstract. The quality of the healthy environment in a neighborhood city is decreasing in number. According to the
government regulation, Act No. 26 of 2007, a city should have 20% of green areas from the total area of the city. Now,
Semarang only has 7.5% of green areas from the total city area. One of the efforts made by the Government of Semarang
is the establishment of a greenbelt in Jatibarang area. It consists of several parts, namely, the reservoirs in the green belt
area and also the plant zone in other sectors. The reservoir has a function as the controller of water resources
sustainability where the crops serve as the balance for the combination. Thus, it is interesting to study how the interplay
of these two functions in a green belt area. The primary data used in this study was obtained from the locus of research by
direct observation, interview, and physical data collection. Based on the data collection, data was then processed and
analyzed in accordance with the indicators that had been compiled based on theories of reservoirs, green belts, and the
quality of the urban environment. Government regulations regarding with the greenbelt and tanks were also used as
references in the discussion. The research found out that the presence of the reservoir and the plants in the green belt of
Jatibarang can improve the function of the green belt optimally which is a real influence for the improvement of the
environment quality, especially water. The Greenbelt was divided into four zones, namely the Arboretum, Argo -
Forestry, Ecotourism, Buffer - Zone also made the region became a beautiful greenbelt that brought a positive influence
to environmental quality.
INTRODUCTION
Semarang city is the capital of Central Java province which is now growing in all areas. The development
continues and as a consequence, the available land declines and land use conversions are carried out. One of these
conversions occurred on green land area land use. It led to the continuous decline in the environmental quality of
Semarang City. Environmental degradation was indicated by the conditions where Semarang only had 7.5% green
area of the total city area in which based on Law No. 26 of 2007; the green area should be 20% of the total area of
the city. A consequence, the numbers of flooding and landslide hazard continually increase in the rainy season as
well as the increasing air temperature in Semarang City.
The Government of Semarang City made several attempts to expand the green areas including to build a city
park and to multiply the green belt areas. One of those efforts was the designation of Jatibarang Green Belt Area. In
this area, a green belt was designed with a variety of zones. One of them was the reservoir. According to the Local
Government Regulation (PERDA) No. 22 of 2003, Article 1, the reservoir is a place / river water storage containers
used for irrigation or other purposes. But in Jatibarang, the reservoir was designed as a single unit with a green belt
area. It was perceived as one of the highlights to review the success of the tank balance and plant area in the green
belt as an environment quality control in Semarang City.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040007-1–040007-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985503
040007-1
THE CONDITION OF JATIBARANG AREA
Legend:
Jatibarang Dam area

Jatibarang Greenbelt area
FIGURE 1. Map of Jatibarang Green Belt Area
Greenbelt Jatibarang Reservoir has a total area of 128.80 hectares located in the Jatirejo Village and Kandri
Village, Gunungpati Subdistrict and Jatibarang Village and Kedungpane Village, Mijen District of Semarang.
Therefore, Jatibarang Green Belt Area is bordered by four villages (Fig.1). Jatibarang reservoir already serves as
flood control, power generator, and the source of raw water. In addition, the Jatibarang reservoir also serves as a
tourist attraction in Semarang City including the greenbelt area.
According to Ref. [1], the general causes of declined number of green belt area in the major cities are: 1)
industrialization, 2) urbanization, 3) inappropriate plan of economic development, 4) the absence of proper control
mechanisms to maintain a green belt area, and 5) declined to carry capacity of the environment that exacerbates the
urban conditions. So, the presence of the Jatibarang green belt was expected to solve those problems.
ZONE DEVELOPMENT IN JATIBARANG AREA

The greenbelt conservation area in Jatibarang Reservoir is divided into (Fig. 2):
a. Arboretum
The arboretum is a conservation area with the collections of variety living plants for the needs of science,
education, natural laboratory, and aesthetics. This area is located in segment 1 and 6.
b. Argo - Forestry
Patterns and farming systems, with a combination of trees and crops, so, it is a mixed plantation of forest trees
and fruit. This area is located in the segments 2, 3, 4, and 5.
c. Ecotourism
An area of nature with the presence of tourism-based activities in parts 2 and 3.
d. Buffer - Zone
An area that serves as the controller and processor of pollution so that water quality can be well-controlled as
located in the fifth segment.
040007-2
FIGURE 2. Zone Development of Jatibarang Green Belt Area
There are six segments of the working area of the Jatibarang Reservoir Green Belt with different functions,
namely:
a. Segment 1 is located in the Jatirejo Village with an area of 24.59 ha, where the Arboretum area is established
with various plants collections, typical plants of the region in Indonesia, and herbs. As a greenbelt area, it
balances the land function and it supports the conservation effort in maintaining Indonesia's natural wealth of
medicinal plants by setting it up in the first segment. Reference [2] suggested that medicinal plants can improve
the means of nature conservation.
b. Segment 2 is located in the Kandri Village with an area of 13.84 ha, where the ecotourism and agroforestry
regions with a variety of fruit crops (Fig. 3) are developed. Gunungpati is known as a region that produces a lot
of fruit. The selection of segment 2 as a fruit crop was considered as highly potential for the success in
improving the environment quality. Native fruits are cultivated in this area. Hence, this zone can also provide the
additional revenue for the local community. So, it will not only maintain the quality of the environment, but also
increase it at the same time.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 3. Existing Condition at Segment 2 of Jatibarang Green Belt Area.
Đ͘ Segment 3 is located in the Kandri Village with an area of 30.27 ha, where Agroforestry, long-tailed monkeys
wildlife tours, open stage with a variety of fruit crops and forage plants for long-tailed monkeys are established.
The green belt is in adjacent to Kreo Goa which is well-known as a tourist object for the number of animals.
040007-3
These monkeys live in the protected forest. However, the number of the animals was declined since 2005, due to
the changes in WKHFLUFXPVWDQFHV%\SURYLGLQJDQGUHVWRULQJWKHPRQNH\V¶KDELWDWLWZDVH[SHFWHGLWFRXOGVDYH
the living of the remaining animals in this area. The plant zone was expected as the resemblance of place where
monkeys can live in safe. In fact, since the existence of the green belt, the number of monkeys actually increased
represented by numbers of animals were proliferating. Gradually, this segment was evidenced to manage and
maintain the sustainability of the environment quality successfully.
(a) (b)
d. Segment 4 is located at the Kedungpane Village, at 23.53 ha area which serves as Agroforestry, Buffer-Zone,
travel and fruit and flowers, as well as the office of the business with a variety of fruit trees and flowers. In this
segment, a lot of fruit trees planted with green land use approach that provided results which can be utilized as a
treatment of this region. So, the quality of the environment can be controlled accurately and enhanced. Similar
with Ref. [3], the development of green belt which is optimized to suppress air pollution becomes the attention of
the biophysical and socio-economic parameters (Fig. 5)͘
(a) (b)
e. Segment 5 is located in the Kedungpane Village of 14.53 ha area that serves as the Agroforestry and Buffer-
Zone with a variety of fruit crops. In this segment, fruit trees planted with green land use approach that provided
results which could be utilized as a treatment of this region. Thus, the quality of the environment can be
controlled accurately and enhanced. This is in line with Ref. [3] that the optimal development of green belt could
suppress the air pollution, which becomes the attention of the biophysical and socio-economic parameters.
040007-4
f. Segment 6 is located in the Jatibarang Village and Kedungpane Village with a total area of 22.05 ha where
Arboretum serves as the region with a variety of timber plants and fruit. This segment is a segment in the form of
timbers used for the endurance of groundwater in the city of Semarang, in which it is expected to reduce flooding
and landslides.
FIGURE 6. Jatibarang Green Belt Area Plan.
With the division of the green belt into four zones, namely the Arboretum, Argo - Forestry, Ecotourism, and
Buffer ± Zone, Jatibarang green belt became an interesting and complete green belt (Fig.6). The green belt is usually
attractive if it is designed into an area that has the role in improving the quality of the environment as well as an
interesting one. It is in accordance with Article 4 of The Government Regulation of Central Java Province No. 22 of
2003 regarding with the objectives of the protected area management, which are to improve the function of
protection against soil, water, climate, flora and fauna and historical and cultural values of the nation and to maintain
the diversity of plants, animals, ecosystems and natural uniqueness types.
The four zones in Jatibarang Green Belt had met the aspects as mentioned in the article. Thus, it is expected that
the proper zoning will attain the objectives of a green belt area. The four zones fulfill the principle of sustainable
development according to Ref. [4], which is a process of development in the forms of land, cities, businesses,
communities, and so on should meet the needs of the present and also compromise the fulfillment of the
requirements of future generations.
THE INFLUENCE OF JATIBARANG RESERVOIR IN GREEN BELT AREA

Conservation itself is derived from the word Conservation that consists of the phrase con (together) and severe
(keep / save), which is defined as an understanding of the effort to maintain what we got (keep / save what you
have), but in prudent (wise use). Conservation of water resources is an attempt to maintain the existence and
sustainability of the circumstances, the nature and the function of the water resources in order to retain the viability
including the sufficient quantity and quality to meet the needs of living beings, both in the present and in the future
(Act. No. 7/2004). Reservoir conservation is the preservation of the green belt and the catchment area of the river
including the preservation of soil and water that leads to the economic and ecological balance.
040007-5
Jatibarang Reservoir is a place of water stored in as a reservoir to prevent flooding in Semarang City. With the
establishment of this reservoir, water resources are maintained and the water can be used as a power plant. From the
collected data, the flood level in the Semarang City decreased by 17% the flood level in the city of Semarang
dropped to 17% after the establishment of the Jatibarang reservoir. Hence, it can be a parameter that the presence of
reservoir in Jatibarang Green Belt supports the success of the function of green belt area. In addition, as the water
resource conservation, it is able to reduce the flooding level in Semarang City.
CONCLUSIONS
1. The existence of reservoir in the Jatibarang Green Belt Area provides a positive value to improve the quality of
the environment, especially water resources.
2. The division of Jatibarang Green Belt into four zones, namely the Arboretum, Argo - Forestry, Ecotourism,
Buffer - Zone make it become an attractive and complete green belt that subsequently provide the improvement
of the environment quality.
3. The ecological system area of teak goods is raised.
REFERENCES
1. C. C. Bae and M. Jun. ³Counterfactual Planning. What if there had been no GUHHQEHOWLQ6HRXOín Journal of
Planning Education and Research, (2013).
2. G. Lestari. Taman TOGA (PT. Gramedia, Jakarta, 2008).
3. I. Setiawan. ³-DOXU +LMDX *UHHQ %HOW 6ebagai Kontrol Polusi Udara Hubungannya dengan Kualitas Hidup di
Perkotaan´LQJurnal SMARTek, Vol. 7, No. 2, pp 113 ± 120, (1999).
4. G. H. Brundtland. Our Common Future World Commission on Environment and Development (WCED), (Oxford
University Press, New York, 1987).
040007-6
A system to preserve pedicab as cultural heritage in Solo city, Indonesia
Wahyu Apri W. Sari, Cahyaning D. Handayani, Yulina Rahayu L. Putri, and Ratna T. Dewa

A System to Preserve Pedicab as Cultural Heritage
in Solo City, Indonesia
Wahyu Apri W. Sari1, a), Cahyaning D. Handayani2, b), Yulina Rahayu L. Putri3, c),
Ratna T. Dewa4, d)
1,2
Industrial Practitioner, Jl. Semen Romo No.4 Makamhaji, Solo, Central Java, Indonesia.
3
Computer and Informatics Education, Universitas Sebelas Maret, Jl. Ir. Sutami No. 36A, Solo, Central Java, Indonesia.
4
Industrial Engineering, Universitas Atma Jaya Yogyakarta, Jl. Babarsari No.43, Yogyakarta, Indonesia.
a)
Corresponding author: wulandjoenardi@gmail.com
b)
cahyaningdh@gmail.com
c)
yulinarahayulp@gmail.com
d)
ratnadewa@mail.uajy.ac.id
Abstract. Pedicab, a traditional three-wheeled transportation operated manually, has become the cultural heritage for
decades, or even before the Indonesia Independence Day. Today, this kind of traditional transportation ought to compete
with other modern transportation modes, such as bus, motorcycle, and taxi. This research investigated the possibility to
divert the function of pedicab from conventional usage to the tourism usage that can provide more additional value to
compete with other means of transportations. Descriptive qualitative was used as the method to gather the information, in
addition to literature studies on the previous researches and the fundamental theories. We also did some interviews to the
both sides, namely the public transportation users and the pedicab drivers. However, a city will be recognized if it has
many uniqueness and cultural senses. By this consideration, it is expected that the pedicab drivers will have a capacity to
approach and introduce their services directly to the tourists, which is supported by additional support systems, such as
information and training system. Hopefully, the existence of pedicab can still be preserved for many decades ahead.
INTRODUCTION
Nowadays, there are diverse options of transportation means around us, including manual transportation and
electric transportation. Nevertheless, manual transportation has been gradually left behind by the people, although
many of them still exist in several cities, such as Solo, Yogyakarta, and other cities in Indonesia [1]. Pedicab is an
easy transportation in which services can be adjusted to the user's request and its accommodation is provided by
themselves [2]. In Southeast Asia, every country has their particular style, which is traditional three-wheeled
transportation type, like minibus [3]. Pedicab still has many values related to its feasibility. One of those values is
the environmental value, since the pedicab is free gasoline transportation. Another value is the social value, because
by using pedicab service, we support the drivers to survive and sustain their existence. Particularly, there is a
considerable value, which is the economic value, because of the fact that there is a high number of pedicab drivers
who cannot afford their monthly needs. In addition, a pedicab is perceived as the detrimental and poverty symbol in
many cities [4].
Based on the observation, people prefer to take a bus as public transportation, because it is more economical than
other means of transportations, including pedicab. However, based on the perspective of pedicab operators, there are
several personal motivations were found in pertaining to their preferences to keep the occupation [4].
The primary research was performed to prove previous argument. Based on the interview and questionnaires, it
could be inferred that in many cities, pedicabs become an option after bus or minibus. Besides, there are still
available in high number, hence, there are two groups of drivers are classified in this study, namely ³the active´ and
³the passive´ driver. The active drivers are pedicab drivers who have regular and loyal customers, so they do not
need to look for other passengers. Meanwhile, the passive drivers are pedicab drivers who must make an effort to get
clients and they should compete with other modern transportation modes, yet there are also many drivers who just sit
on their pedicabs and wait for passengers. Nevertheless, the number of the passive drivers is high and this condition
becomes a problem. It is worsened the contemporary situation where technology leads everything in just only one
touch. As an indirect result, it can make passive drivers become unemployment.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040008-1–040008-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985504
040008-1
This study is a primary research about building a system, both information system and organizational system.
The goal of this study was to provide an alternative solution which can make all pedicab drivers become active
drivers who can compete with other modern transportation modes.
The information system will employ Google Maps to show the pickup location and destination. Google Maps is
free online map applications provided by Google where there are many destinations around the world have been
recorded in Google Maps, except the North and South Pole [5]. For the data of the users/passengers and the drivers,
as well as the price, they will be provided by Android studio. This android studio will be created almost similar to
the system of Mobile commerce ticket travel (M-ticket) application which has been previously developed by
previous research [6]. As a result, it is expected that the pedicab drivers will obtain the exceptional values, such as
social, environmental, cultural, and economic value.
METHODS
This research was initiated by completing and gathering the data from reliable sources, which were literature
study, questionnaires, and interviews addressed to the transportation users and the pedicab drivers. By collecting the
data, we could notice and explore the reality of the present and the past phenomena. The research condition
employed the descriptive qualitative method that can be shown either in individual or in a group of numbers [7].
First, data collection was carried out to gain information related to the issue by doing literature study,
questionnaire preparation, and interviews with both public transportation passengers and drivers. Subsequently, the
analyses could be conducted by comparing data between the questionnaires and examining two-sided interviews to
find the result and conclusion. After the data analysis had been finished, the next step was the mapping and grouping.
There were hundreds of tourist destinations around Solo, but most of them were located near to the center of the city,
so the destinations would be picked around the city. In the mapping step, the use of Google Maps was considered to
determine the locations and then apply it to the built information system. This information system would help the
tourists to pick certain places and to request a pedicab driver. For the finalization, in prior to the system application,
the organization and training should be conducted to make both passengers and drivers are in a wellbeing situation.
Based on the explanation, it can be drawn in Fig. 1.
Start
A
Study literature,
Collecting Data questioner, and interview.
Estimating the price per
Organizing and
Comparing the data pedicab ride, and the
between the questioner creating online daily subscription.
Analyzing data and two sided interview application
Mapping all tourist

Mapping and destinations based on
grouping Google Maps and
grouping the pedicab's Finish
drivers to many certain
spot locations
A FIGURE 1. The research flow chart.

In fact, there are numbers of pedicab drivers who could not afford all this time appropriately. Most of them are
passive drivers who used to wait for their passengers without making any effort, which is such kind of persistent
habit until today. As a consequence, most of the pedicab drivers ask for high even unreasonable tariff to their
passengers. Another issue related with pedicab is time limitation to reach certain destinations that become a barrier
in the modern era since the potential passengers are office workers, students and businessmen with a tight schedule.
It can be inferred that those pedicab drivers need some triggers to improve their productivity and wellness. Hence,
040008-2
the methodology of this study should be performed correctly to reach the goal, which is to increase the pedicab
drivers¶ capacity and well-being.
Many studies have discussed the pedicab issue, but they just only reviewed about how the pedicab drivers could
be like today. There has not been any study about the solution to address the general problem. Based on the
methodology that has been determined, as the first step, 100 respondents filled in the questioner. The respondents
had a high diversity background, including students, teachers, freelance workers, housewives, full-time worker
(public and private sectors), traditional traders, and they aged between 18 to 75 years old. Based on the results, they
can be elaborated as follow:
Survey and Questionnaire Analysis

The Citizens Perspective
Based on the survey, the respondents perceive that pedicab is the second best option after the bus and minibus
for a destination less than 2 kilometers. 46% of the interviewees chose pedicab while 65.5% chose bus/minibus.
However, many public transportation passengers need a cheaper and faster transportation. The results can be seen in
Fig. 2.
FIGURE 2. The most popular public transportation based on the questionnaire.

Based on the survey, most of the passengers preferred pedicab for once to 3-times per month for a destination
less than 2 kilometers/riding. It was approximately 84% respondents preferred this mode. The percentage of the
users is demonstrated in Fig. 3(a). In average, the passengers need to spend about Rp10,000.- to Rp15,000.- (1USD
or less for the 2 km/riding), which was 40%. For the rest, there was about 34% of the passengers who paid more
than Rp15,000.- (1USD), as can be seen in Figure 3(b).
From 100% passengers, nearly 50% claimed to be dissatisfied with the service especially at the time.
Furthermore, most of the passengers decided to say ³No´ were the employee or people who have time commitment
and limitation, while the passengers who chose ³Yes´ were the passengers without any time limitation and
commitment. The percentage of unsatisfied users can be shown in Fig. 3(c).
(a) (b) (c)

FIGURE 3. (a) The number of passengers takes pedicab as their transportation per month, (b) The expenditure of
the passenger per pedicab riding, (c) Time Consuming to travel from one spot to another.
In accordance with the survey, it could be assumed that there were a positive response and enthusiasm from the
citizens. Most of them do not expect any elimination, because this transportation has an environmental and social
value. Moreover, many citizens perceive pedicab has become the hallmark of Solo City, this, it is necessary to the
existence of pedicab.
040008-3
The Perspective of Pedicab Drivers
The survey was carried out in several pHGLFDEV¶ ports around Solo City, where 10 drivers were selected from
each port. Most of the drivers were 60 to 70 years old, about 51.02% of the total respondents can be seen in Fig. 4(a).
Most of the drivers were elementary graduated, approximately 83.67% of the total of interviewees which can be
seen in Fig. 4(b). 71.4% of the drivers have been working for 30 years as a pedicab driver. Because of their personal
reason, they decided to maintain their occupations or to take another job as shown in Fig. 4(c), although most of
them only earn below Rp1,000,000.- per month.
ϰ͘Ϭϴй ϭϬ͘ϮϬй
ϭϲ͘ϯϯй Ϯ͘Ϭϰй хϳϬ Ϯ͘Ϭϰй
ϮϬͲϰϬ
^
^D
ϰϬͲϲϬ
ϱϭ͘ϬϮй ϯϬ͘ϲϭй ^D<
ϲϬͲϳϬ ϴϯ͘ϲϳй ^DW
(a) (b) (c)
FIGURE 4. Data are presented based on the interviews and surveys to pedicab drivers. (a) Pedicab drivers range of age,
(b) Pedicab drivers¶ education background, (c) The possession of another job.
By examining the data analyses, it is possible to create the redirect function of the pedicabs from the
conventional transportation to the tourism transportation by considering the time consuming and the rate of price.
Steps of the Organizational System Establishment

An establishment of organizational system certainly requires more efforts, because in addition to the online
application, human system is also required. Thus, it is important that all the steps are subjected to the human well-
being. The steps are:
Destination Mapping
There are about 123 destinations in Solo and surroundings, but most of them are inside of the city. Because
pedicab is a manual transportation, only destinations inside of the city that is included with an area are about 44 km2.
In addition, destinations which are located in adjacent to the hill would not be included. The description is shown in
Fig. 8.
Selected area
FIGURE 5. Destination Mapping based on Google Maps.
Drivers Grouping and Allocation
There are two spots of the location selected as the Tourism Pedicab Meeting Point. Based on the survey, most of
the tourists visited Solo by train, thus, the railway stations become the meeting points. The members of Tourism
Pedicab would be allocated into two groups of drivers. The first point is Purwosari Railway Station and the second
thing is Balapan Railway Station.
040008-4
System Design
The process is started by request from the user/passenger. Subsequently, data would be transferred to the server
and directly sent to the Database. Admin will search for the available pedicab drivers based on the queue and the
admin will send SMS to a pedicab driver to give further instruction on where the passenger should be picked up.
Once the process is done, the driver has to submit the report by replying the SMS to the admin. SMS is selected as
the primary communication with the drivers since almost all the drivers have basic mobile phone, instead of the
smart phone. Another reason is due to the budget limitation of this initial research. The description can be drawn in
Fig. 9.
Show The Route Booking process
Show the booking

Show The account
Sending SMS
User Login
Show the Tourism Pick The driver
Destination Menu
Creating account
user
admin Driver
Show the Confirmation
transportation fee Pick the drivers
menu Destination Confirm the
Subscription
Fee
Show the
transportation fee
Performance
based on the Result
destination
Booking
Confirmation
Suggestion input
FIGURE 6. Use case diagram.
The Application Architecture Design
internet
FIGURE 7. Application architecture.
The application, The Pedicab Online Booking, will be made by using an Android Studio. This application would
make the users be able to search for the tourism-related information, especially the destinations and the booking
price based on either a single or multiple-route. In addition, the passengers would also be able to make all day
booking based on their needs.
040008-5
Basically, it is intended to share the information about the destination points, pricing, the name of the drivers,
and timeline. The interface of the design is presented in Fig. 8.
Remarks: 1
1. Application Title
2. User interface
a. Login
b. Menu
i. Single route
ii. Multiple route
iii. One day Booking 2
c. Pick up point
d. Destination point / (s)
e. Time Estimation
3. Destination View based on GoogleMap 3
4. List of Tourism Destinations
5. Total price
4 5
FIGURE 8. Interface application.
Pricing
Pricing is one of the important factors of the system as many pedicab drivers set high fare to the passengers.
Hence, it is important to determine the pricing standardization that can be implemented into the system to prevent
any pricing conflict between the drivers and passengers.
There are 3 (three) types of booking price, they are:
* Assumed the exchange rate for 1 dollar is Rp 15,000.
a. Single Route
The price for each booking is based on the kilometers, Rp 5,000.-/km (3 cents), while the minimum payment
is Rp10,000.- (6 cents).
b. The multiple-route
There will be some additional price based on the idle time, for example, when the user wants to visit two
destinations in one GD\7ULZLQGX0DUNHWĺ Kasunanan Palace) and they stay in Sahid Raya Hotel, the price
will be:
x Sahid Raya Hotel ĺ7ULZLQGX0DUNHW2 km)
Rp 5,000.- x 2 km = Rp 10,000.-
x Idle time (Rp 2,000.- per half hour)
Rp 2,000.- x 1.5hours = Rp 6,000.-
x 7ULZLQGX0DUNHWĺ.DVXQDQDQ3DODFH
Rp 5,000.- x 1km = Rp 5,000.-
x Idle time (Rp 2,000.- per half hour)
Rp 2,000.- x 2 hours = Rp 8,000.-
x Kasunan 3DODFHĺ6DKLG5Dya Hotel Rp 5,000,- +
Rp 34,000.- (2.26USD)
c. One day Booking
From day to night = Rp150,000.- (10USD)
With an assumption one driver could have 5 single route passengers who travel about 3 km for each passenger,
the calculation will be following:
1. Income per 5 times riding 5 x Rp 15,000.- Rp 75,000.-
2. Contribution /day Rp 5,000.- -
040008-6
Rp 70,000.- (4.6USD)/day
Rp 70,000.- x 25 Rp1,750,000.- (116USD)/month
*Monday is day-off.
Pedicab drivers ought to pay the contribution about Rp 5,000.-/day, for the entire categories without any
distinction due to considerations, as follows:
a. The Pedicab drivers¶ daily expenditure is approximately Rp 20,000.- to Rp50,000.- (1.3USD to
3.3USD).
b. The minimum wages in Solo City is approximately Rp 1,418,000.- (94.53USD).
By paying a contribution, the pedicab drivers will gain many benefits including training (Grooming Skills,
Language Skills, Cleaning Skills, etc.) that are carried out twice a month and Pedicab¶V Maintenance Skill once
every 2 months.
The Facilities Provision

Facilities are the second important aspect of pricing because many important aspects must be focused, such as
the introduction of tourist objects in Solo and the promotion of the existence and heritage characteristic of pedicab
as a traditional transportation in Indonesia. Thus, there will be two facilities included in the system:
a. Twice a month Training
The practices are subjected to the Pedicab's drivers' wellbeing. Hopefully, it can change the paradigm about the
bad image of pedicab drivers. The training involve: Grooming skills (the appearance from top to bottom), Language
proficiency (Bahasa Indonesia, English, and Javanese), Cleaning (cleaning facilities), History of Solo City and the
buildings, Passengers treatment (how to greet the customers, to give the best services, etc.)
b. Bonus based on KPI (Key Performance Indicator)
Bonuses will also be provided in the system, particularly to encourage the pedicab drivers to gain more
passengers and to make them enthusiast with the training given twice a month.
CONCLUSIONS
Generally, habit is hard to change, especially when it is an old habit that has been performing for a person for a
long time and becoming a comfort zone. One of the cases is endured by the pedicab drivers who have ridden their
pedicabs for almost 30 years. Consequently, the effort to change their mindset will be very challenging, because it
involves the changes of system and also the people's habit. Hence, it is important to have a training system that is
organized by an organization to increase the values of the pedicab drivers, in addition to collaborations with other
agencies to make a rapid movement of changing the mindset and habit of the drivers.
This research is classified as the socio-entrepreneur that attempts to make the pedicab's drivers gaining more
wellness and also, hopefully, it would increase the tourist number in Solo. By giving training to the pedicab's
drivers, it is expected they can be more confident to speak either in English or in Bahasa Indonesia, so they can
entertain their passengers with stories and also other well entertaining ways.
Furthermore, the online system would connect the users with the pedicab's drivers easily and safety, in which the
drivers can pick the destinations based on the user's requirements without any possibility of the overwhelming fare
like before.
This system also can facilitate many historical places that should be promoted, because by opening the
application, the users will be directly noticed the name of their destinations by looking at the attached Google maps
and the given list. Subsequently, well-trained drivers will provide the system by telling about several places which
are located along the road toward the SDVVHQJHUV¶destinations. If they want to stop by in one of the places that are
mentioned by the drivers, the idle time will be added.
Furthermore, Pedicab will have its own heritage identity as well as other cultural and historical places around
Solo city, hence, there will a promotion, "Let's Visit Solo and ride an enjoyable pedicab!". Thus, our goal to sustain
the cultural heritage would be nearer to the success.
Another thing to be considered is about the pleasantness; hence, it would be momentous if the pedicab is
redesign based on anthropometry because there are many foreign tourists perceive that the size of pedicab is too
small. Pedicab will be designed based on the global anthropometric data from the foreigners.
040008-7
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
The researchers would like to thank all the volunteers who participated in the research and the system building.
They included all pedicab drivers who provided their spare time to join the interview, all the respondents, and the
research team who performed the price estimation and created the online application. It is expected that this research
can be applied and can sustain the cultural heritage in Indonesia, especially in Solo City.
REFERENCES
1. T.B Joewono. "The Characteristics of Paratransit and Non-Motorized Transport in Bandung, Indonesia",
Eastern Asia Society for Transportation Studies, Vol. 6, 262-277 (2005).
2. Z. Mandala. "Transportasi Informal (Paratransit) dan Karakteristiknya". Universitas Gajah Mada, Yogyakarta
(2013).
3. R. Cervero. "Paratransit in Southeast Asia: A Market Response to Poor Roads" (1992).
4. F. Alauddin. "Keberlanjutan Becak di Kawasan Perkotaan Kabupaten Sumedang". Semnas Plano 55 (2014).
5. M.E. Kusuma, Y. Budisusanto. "Aplikasi Googlemaps API Dalam Pengembangan Sistem Informasi Geografis
(SIG) Pariwisata Berbasis Web (Studi Kasus: Kabupaten Sukoharjo)", GEOID Vol. 10, No. 02, (Februari
2015), p. 129-136.
6. F. Mintarsih, B. Rizal. "Analisis dan Perancangan Aplikasi Mobile Commerce Tiket Travel (M-Ticketing)
Pada Smartphone Android (Studi Kasus: Travel Umbara Trans)", Universitas Islam Negeri Syarif
Hidayatullah, No. 2 / Vol.7 (2014).
7. N.S Sukmadinata. "Metode Penelitian Pendidikan", PT. Remaja Rosdakarya, Bandung (2012).
040008-8
Impact analysis of freight vehicle access restriction (A case study of Jakarta Intra
Urban Toll way)
Ferdian Irbany, Sigit P. Hadiwardoyo, Nahry, and Nahdalina

Impact Analysis of Freight Vehicle Access Restriction
(A Case Study of Jakarta Intra Urban Toll Way)
Ferdian Irbany1, b), Sigit P. Hadiwardoyo1, a), Nahry1, c), and Nahdalina1, d)
1
Civil Engineering Department, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Kampus Baru Depok, Depok 16424,
Indonesia
a)
Corresponding authors: sigit@eng.ui.ac.id
b)
ferdian.irbany41@ui.ac.id
c)
nahry@eng.ui.ac.id
d)
nahdalina@ui.ac.id
Abstract. Since the access restriction policy on freight vehicles was implemented in some parts of Jakarta Intra-Urban
Tollway (JIUT) in 2011, i.e. section Cawang ± Tomang ± Pluit, several sections had an improved performance. However,
there were sections that showed the opposite effect. The purpose of this research was to analyze the impact of the policy
on JIUT as a whole by using the parameters based on sustainable transportation indicators. The study area was divided
into the statutory segment (Cawang ± Tomang ± Pluit) and the affected segment (Cawang ± Tanjung Priok ± Pluit). The
assessment results of five parameters including travel time, fuel consumption, fatality rate, CO2 emissions, and noise
level indicated that the implementation of the policy provided an advantage to the traffic smoothness priority at the
statutory segment, but it did not support the sustainable urban transportation priority of the entire JIUT system. The
proposed solution to maintain the sustainable condition of urban transportation is to complement the statutory system
with the advisory system ZLWKLQ-DNDUWD¶VWHUULWRU\
INTRODUCTION
Freight vehicles efficiency could play a significant role in competitiveness among the cities and it is an important
factor for the urban economy. However, freight vehicles also have a responsibility towards traffic and environmental
impact on the urban area such as traffic congestion, air pollution, and noise pollution. In June 2011, The Minister of
Transportation of The Republic of Indonesia released Regulation of The Minister of Transportation No. 62 in 2011
[1] (hereinafter called the Regulatory Restriction) regarding with the operating time restriction of freight vehicles at
Jakarta Intra-Urban Tollway (JIUT). The Regulatory Restriction is applied to freight vehicles with axis
configuration of 1.2 or more, in some segments of intra-urban tollway in Jakarta, i.e. Cawang ± Tomang ± Pluit and
Kembangan ± Tomang, at specific time of 05.00 am ± 10.00 pm with an exception for freight vehicles that carry
petrol and gas (see Fig. 1). Before the Regulatory Restriction was implemented, most of the Jakarta residents were
conscious of the congestion impact of allowing large trucks to access intra-urban tollway. However, although the
restricted segment showed an improved performance after the implementation of Regulatory Restriction, several
segments of JIUT showed the opposite effect at the same time. The purposes of the research were to analyze the
impact of such policy on the sections in 2010 to 2012 by using the parameters based on sustainable transportation
indicators and to determine a solution to maintain a sustainable condition of urban transportation.
LITERATURE REVIEW
City logistics play an important role in promoting the efficient, environmentally friendly, and safe urban freight
transport systems. A number of policy measures including urban consolidation centers, regulations of access control
to city centers, off-peak hour deliveries, low emission zones, have been tested and implemented in urban areas or
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040009-1–040009-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985505
040009-1
cities around the world to achieve the goals of city logistics, namely: mobility, sustainability, and livability [2].
Access restriction to freight vehicles is one of the strategies commonly applied in many cities due to its easiness of
implementation. Access restriction to freight vehicles could involve route or time specification, i.e. statutory system
and advisory system [3]. The statutory system is related to the route or time period at which the access to freight
vehicles are restricted, whereas the advisory system concerns to the route or time period at which the freight vehicles
are suggested to shift. Logistic has a wide scope of activities, but freight transportation is a significant element of the
logistics that currently become the most unsustainable aspect of the logistic system. Reference [4] underlined the
difference between sustainable transportation for people and goods. Passenger transport is influenced by physical,
psychological, and social needs, whereas market forces and government policies dominate freight transport.
Economic activities rely on the effective logistic system to supply materials to industry and distribute products
through the supply chain to finally reach the customers [5]. Currently, the focus of the world is to actualize a
sustainable development strategy, which should be characterized by the economic, social, and environmental
sustainability [6]. To achieve an objective of sustainable development in urban areas, a strategy for freight
transportation is required, which simultaneously can achieve the economic advantages as well as reduce the impacts
on ecosystem and social responsibility.
METHODS
JIUT as the study area was divided into two segments, i.e., the statutory segment (Cawang ± Tomang ± Pluit)
and the affected segment (Cawang ± Tanjung Priok ± Pluit). The map of the study area is presented in Fig.1. The
research parameters were categorized into three indicators of: 1). Economic indicator including three parameters,
i.e., travel time, fuel consumption, and transport cost; 2). Social indicator including two parameters, i.e., fatality rate
and casualty cost; and 3). Environmental indicator including three parameters, i.e., CO2 emission, carbon pollution
cost, and noise level prediction.
The determination of research parameters was based on previous studies, which were: Calculation of Vehicle
Operational Costs Part I: Running Costs [7] for fuel consumption; Calculation of Road Accident Costs Amount [8]
for casualty cost; Calculation Methodology of Greenhouse Gases Emission Level [9] for CO2 emission amount; and
empirical equation of Ref. [10] for noise level prediction.
FIGURE 1. Map of the study area.
Data used in the research consisted of two types. First, basic data for transportation parameters was obtained
from the toll road operators of those two segments. Second, data involved the length of the road segment, traffic
040009-2
volume, road capacity, average speed, the number of accidents, and the number of casualties, and supplementary
data derived from the interview on the regulators and questionnaire on the logistic operators.
Due to the limited detail from the collected data, some limitation and assumptions were applied in order to
analyze the changes in the parameters¶ values of both segments during 2010-2012. They were as follows:
1. Traffic volume on Pluit tollgate was excluded from the parameters¶DVVHVVPHQW.
2. Recorded traffic volumes on four tollgates, i.e. Cililitan, Halim, Kapuk, and Tomang, were assigned to both the
statutory segment and affected segment by considering the geometric characteristics of the JIUT as a ring road.
3. Buses that used JIUT during 2010 to 2012 was equalized under vehicles of category I (light vehicles) and had the
same PCE (Passenger Car Equivalent) value with light vehicles.
4. Travel speed was determined as the average value from speed survey results for the year of 2010 to 2012, which
was performed by toll road operators for the statutory segment.
5. The assessment of fuel consumption and CO2 emission of both segments used the distance unit approach (one
kilometer), which an assumption the entire segments had similar values of fuel consumption per kilometer and
CO2 emission per kilometer.
6. Fuel types used for the assessment of fuel consumption and CO2 emission was equalized to premium fuel for
vehicles under category I (light vehicles) and solar fuel for vehicles under category II-V (medium-heavy vehicles
and large trucks).

Figure 2 showed the trend of the average daily traffic of total vehicles on the statutory segment and the affected
segment, while Fig. 3 showed the trend of the average daily traffic of freight vehicles of both segments. In terms of
the average daily volume of total vehicles, both segments had an almost similar trend of traffic growth. However, it
could be seen in Fig. 3 that the average daily volume of the truck at the statutory segment decreased after the
implementation of Regulatory Restriction in June 2011, in contrast to the increase of the average daily volume of the
truck at the affected segment. Those figures indicated that the Regulatory Restriction had a significant change in
vehicles composition of both segments and it led to the question of its effect on the sustainable transportation
indicators of both segments and also JIUT in the whole intra-urban tollway system.
FIGURE 2. The average daily volume of total vehicles on the statutory segment and the affected segment
(Data source: PT. Citra Marga Nusaphala Persada).
FIGURE 3. The average daily volume of freight vehicles on the statutory segment and the affected segment
(Data source: PT. Citra Marga Nusaphala Persada).
040009-3
As mentioned before, analyses on sustainable transportation indicators included the parameters of travel time,
fuel consumption, fatality rate, CO2 emission, noise level prediction, and additional parameters of the integrated cost
of fuel consumption, casualty, and carbon pollution.
Travel time parameter was analyzed by comparing the condition on the statutory segment before and after the
implementation of Regulatory Restriction. Table 1 showed the improvement on travel speed value in 2012 in
compared to 2010, from 38.15 km/hour to become 53.95 km/hour. In other words, there was a travel time reduction
at the statutory segment in 2010 to 2012. It could be a result of the decreased number of freight vehicles in this
segment, considering the relatively low speed of large trucks that impeded the traffic movement, particularly on
peak hours.
Fuel consumption parameter was analyzed by comparing the values between the segments. Table 1 showed the
trend of fuel consumption in 2012 compared to 2010 in which fuel consumption at the statutory segment decreased
by 0.1 %, fuel consumption at the affected segment increased by 10.9 %, and the total amount of JIUT increased by
5.4 %. The increase in total fuel consumption was allegedly due to the changes in the composition of vehicles that
passed the toll road during the implementation of Regulatory Restriction in 2011. It was recorded that the number of
medium-heavy vehicles and large trucks (category II-V) at the statutory segment decreased after the restriction and
it affected to the increased number of vehicles of those categories in the affected segment. In fact, the number of
light vehicles (category I) at the statutory segment increased after the restriction.
Fatality rate parameter was analyzed by comparing the values between the segments. Based on the pattern of
fatality rate values showed in Table 1, the statutory segment generally had higher values than the affected segment.
For example, fatality rate values of the statutory segment were 0.34 and 0.27 fatality per 100 million vehicle km in
2010 and 2012, respectively, while of the affected segment were 0.13 and 0.12 fatality per 100 million vehicle km.
This condition was caused by some factors, such as, drivers, vehicles, the road, or the environment. However, as the
number of casualty at the statutory segment was stable, it implied that the consideration factors in the
implementation of Regulatory Restriction, which was to ensure traffic safety, was not optimal.
CO2 emission parameter was analyzed by comparing the values between the segments. Table 1 showed the trend
of CO2 emission in 2012 in compared to 2010 where CO2 emission at the statutory segment decreased by 2.2 %,
CO2 emission at the affected segment increased by 11.9 %, and the total amount of JIUT increased by 4.9 %. The
increase in total CO2 emission was allegedly due to the changes in the composition of vehicles as mentioned
previously, considering the linkage between CO2 emission and fuel consumption.
TABLE 1. Summary of the parameters analyzed by segments in 2010 - 2012.
Year
No. Parameter Unit Segment
2010 2011 2012
Statutory segment 38.15 45.81 53.95
1 Travel speed (km/hour)
(20.1%)* (17.8%)*
Statutory segment 320,361,302 313,489,711 320,076,253
(-2.1%)* (2.1%)*
Affected segment 320,036,184 331,646,071 354,763,330
2 Fuel consumption (liter per year)
(3.6%)* (7.0%)*
Total of JIUT 640,397,486 645,135,782 674,839,583
(0.7%)* (4.6%)*
(fatality per 100 (-41.2%)* (35%)*
3 Fatality rate
million veh.km) Affected segment 0.13 0.12 0.12
(-7.7%)* (0%)*
Statutory segment 768,831,694 744,177,625 752,090,357
(-3.2%)* (1.1%)*
(kilogram per Affected segment 766,838,783 797,922,458 858,428,379
4 CO2 emission
year) (4.1%)* (7.6%)*
Total of JIUT 1,535,670,477 1,542,100,082 1,610,518,735
(0.4%)* (4.4%)*
Noise level
(1%)* (1%)*
5 prediction within (dBA)
Affected segment 69.83 71.33 72.82
NPA
(2.1%)* (2.1%)*
* Percent (%) of change to the previous year.
As for noise level, the one that should be noted was the noise level prediction within Noise Protection Area
(NPA), which is an area with 30 meters width from road pavement side that has noise level requirement less than 65
040009-4
dBA [11]. Table 1 shows that the noise level prediction within NPA for the segments in 2010 to 2012 relatively
exceed the required noise level, i.e. 65 dBA. In addition, the noise levels within NPA for both segments increase
every year. It occurred because of the increased number of vehicles at JIUT in 2010 to 2012.
Based on Fig. 2, both segments have almost similar growth trend of total vehicles volume, albeit the statutory
segment has a higher value than the affected segment. However, Table 1 shows that the affected segment has higher
growth percentage than the statutory segment for parameters like fuel consumption, CO 2 emission, and noise level
prediction. For example, CO2 emission at the affected segment increases by 7.6% in 2012 compared to 2011, while
CO2 emission at the statutory segment increased by 1.1% in 2012 compared to 2011. In addition, the entire JIUT
system has an upward trend for fuel consumption value and CO2 emission value according to Table 1. These
conditions pointed out that although there was a travel speed improvement on the statutory segment, the Regulatory
Restriction had disadvantages to the affected segment and JIUT as a whole.
In order to assess the policy impact based on the sustainability concept, it was necessary to add another
parameter that combined the economic, social, and environmental indicators. The parameter was represented by the
monetary value from each of indicators, i.e. integrated cost, that consisted of fuel consumption cost, casualty cost,
and carbon pollution cost. Fuel consumption cost was calculated by multiplying the fuel consumption value (liter) of
each segment with the fuel price (rupiah/liter) of each vehicle category in the relevant year. Casualty cost was
calculated by using a formula to calculate road accident costs amount [8] with casualty number of each segment as
the input. Carbon pollution cost was calculated by measuring the amount of carbon (ton) from the CO2 emission
(kilogram) and multiplying it by carbon social cost (rupiah/ton). The carbon social cost was in accordance with the
US social cost of carbon as a reference [12] and was adjusted to dollar inflation rate and rupiah exchange rate of the
relevant year.
Table 2 shows the summation of the monetary value from three indicators and Fig. 4 shows the integrated cost
rate (rupiah/vehicle) by taking into account the number of vehicles in both segments every year. Table 2 shows the
trend of the integration indicator in 2012 compared to 2010 including: the integrated cost value of the statutory
segment increased by 0.24 %, the integrated cost value of the affected segment increased by 11.39 %, and the total
integrated cost value of JIUT increased by 5.81 %. Furthermore, Fig. 4 shows the comparison of the integrated cost
rate per vehicle between two segments in 2010 to 2012. The figure shows that the integrated cost rate of the
statutory segment had a downward trend, while the integrated cost rate of the affected segment went upward in
2012. This condition reaffirmed that the implementation of freight vehicle access restriction at the statutory segment
had a negative impact on the affected segment.
TABLE 2. Integration indicator (monetary value) at the statutory and affected segments in 2010 - 2012.
Affected segment
Year Statutory segment (Rupiah) Total of JIUT (Rupiah)
(Rupiah)
2010 1,517,987,786,766 1,514,780,382,770 3,032,768,169,536
2011 1,483,765,601,393 1,569,642,935,929 3,053,408,537,322
2012 1,521,665,272,904 1,687,260,023,422 3,208,925,296,325
FIGURE 4. Comparison of the integrated cost rate in 2010 ± 2012
It is important to notice that the integration values did not consider the influence of two other parameters, which
were travel time and noise level. Table 3 shows that four of five parameters have negative assessments of the
040009-5
changes in the parameter values in 2012. However, it was crucial to notice that travel time parameter had a positive
assessment as a result of travel speed improvement at the statutory segment in 2012. Those assessment results
indicated that in 2010 ± 2012, the Regulatory Restriction at the statutory segment had the advantage to the traffic
smoothness priority, as the target of the transport authority, although it did not support the sustainable urban
transportation priority, particularly for JIUT system as a whole.
TABLE 3. Summary of the assessment on the implementation of the Regulatory Restriction.
Indicator Parameter Assessment Interpretation
x Improvement of average speed value to become 53.95 km/hour at the statutory segment
Travel time Positive
in 2012.
x Increasing amount of fuel consumption at the affected segment by 10.9 % in 2012
Economic
Fuel compared to 2010.
Negative
consumption x Increased total fuel consumption on the intra-urban toll road by 5.4 % in 2012 compared
to 2010.
x Increased rate of a fatality at the statutory segment in 2012 compared to 2011.
Social Fatality rate Negative x Higher values of fatality rate at the statutory segment compared to the affected segment
in 2010 ± 2012.
x Increased CO2 emission at the affected segment by 11.9 % in 2012 compared to 2010.
CO2 Emission Negative x Increased total CO2 emission on the intra-urban toll road by 4.9 % in 2012 compared to
Environmental 2010.
Noise level x Noise level prediction on both segments exceeded 65 dBA in 2010 ± 2012.
prediction Negative
within NPA x Increased value of noise level prediction on both segments in 2012.
In accordance with the logical structure of decision-making [13], it is necessary to perform evaluation phase after
the implementation phase in order to provide an opportunity to learn from experience and to refine the
comprehension of policy instrument performance. However, based on the interview result on the regulators, there
was no periodic evaluation. The evaluation process can be initiated if there are changes to the situation related to the
Regulatory Restriction or the restricted access area can be improvised if there are emerging issues that have to be
resolved under particular conditions.
Based on the assessment results, the Regulatory Restriction provided an advantage to the traffic smoothness
priority but it did not support the sustainable urban transportation priority. In the context of sustainable urban
transportation, each parameter value was affected by the main factors such as average travel speed, the composition
of the number of vehicles, travel distance, and a number of casualties. As a measure to maintain the traffic
smoothness priority, it is necessary to review the linkage between the prevailing change of parameters¶ values and
the role of freight vehicles under related development plans to determine a necessary solution to maintain the
sustainable condition of urban transportation.
From the energy consumption and vehicle emission perspective, the trend of CO2 emission did not complement
with the objective of National Action Plan of Greenhouse Gases to reduce greenhouse gasses emission in the energy
and transportation sector. In the Implementation Guidelines of The Action Plan [14], some of the possible main
strategies were mentioned in order to maintain urban sustainability under mitigation act for land transport sector,
which was: avoid, shift, and improve, i.e. avoid means to reduce the need to travel; shift means to switch
transportation modes that more environmentally friendly; and improve means to increase energy efficiency of
transportation modes and vehicles technology. From road safety perspective, the trend in the fatality rate also did not
complement with the long-term objective of National General Plan of Road Safety [15] to reduce the fatality rate
from traffic accidents and casualties. The long-term objective could be achieved with the implementation of road
safety strategies, which were categorized into five pillars of: road safety management, safety road, safety vehicle,
road user safety behavior, and post-crash handling of casualty.
As for the role of freight vehicles, Blueprint of National Logistic System [16] mentioned that the target of road
transportation development was to make trucks as an integration part of the multimodal transportation system in
order to achieve local and national connectivity. There would be an improvement in freight traffic to bolster up the
efficiency and the effectiveness of national logistic system performance. Essentially, freight vehicles role designed
should be harmonized with the local development plan, which in this study was the Medium-Term Development
Plan of DKI Jakarta Region [17]. It is known that the Regulatory Restriction has its role as one type of traffic
FRQWURO XQGHU -DNDUWD¶V PDFUR Wransportation scheme while large trucks are plotted to be an integral part of the
multimodal transportation system in order to achieve local as well as national connectivity.
040009-6
From the questionnaire results on the logistic operators, the Regulatory Restriction influenced the travel
behaviors ZLWKLQ -DNDUWD¶V DUHD 7KH TXHVWLRQQDLUH¶V results confirmed that 14.2 % of the respondents chose to
change their routes after the implementation of Regulatory Restriction. The Regulatory Restriction is one strategy in
the statutory system that targeted on the traffic smoothness priority. However, the policy should be complemented
with an advisory system while considering the sustainable urban transportation priority. One of the advisory routes
that could be proposed as an alternative route is Tanjung Priok access toll road, which will be finished in 2017 and
should complete the shape of Jakarta outer ring road to give an additional route choice to the freight vehicles that
used south section of Jakarta outer ring road as a consequence of the implementation of Regulatory Restriction.
Considering the assessment results of all related parameters and freight vehicle role under the related plans, the
proposed solution to maintain sustainable condition of urban transportation is to complement the statutory system
with an advisory system ZLWKLQ-DNDUWD¶VWHUULWRU\DVDZD\WRmaintain the traffic smoothness priority yet to support
the sustainable urban transportation priority with consideration on the main influenced factors mentioned previously,
i.e., average travel speed, composition of the number of vehicles, travel distance, and road safety. It is expected that
the proposed solution must also take into consideration of all the related established strategies whose objectives
including the energy efficiency and greenhouse gasses mitigation, road safety management, development of local
and national logistic connectivity, and development of transportation infrastructure. The emphasis of those strategies
integrated with the urban sustainability will have a positive impact on the parameters under sustainable indicators
that was examined in this research.
CONCLUSIONS
1. Changes in the number of medium-heavy vehicles and large trucks (category II-V) that used the statutory
segment or the affected segment either before or after the implementation of Regulatory Restriction indicated
that route alteration is one of the preferred solutions due to the access restriction at the statutory segment. The
questionnaire¶V results also confirmed that 14.2 % of the respondents preferred to change their routes after the
implementation of Regulatory Restriction.
2. Based on the trend of sustainable transportation indicators in Table 1, in 2010 to 2012, the parameter of travel
time had a positive impact and the parameters of fuel consumption, fatality rate, CO2 emission, and noise level
prediction, had negative impacts. Those assessment results indicated that the Regulatory Restriction provided an
advantage to the traffic smoothness priority, but it did not support the sustainable urban transportation priority.
3. The proposed solution to maintain sustainable condition of urban transportation is to complement the statutory
system with an advisory system ZLWKLQ-DNDUWD¶VWHUULWRU\DVD ZD\WR maintain the traffic smoothness priority,
yet to support the sustainable urban transportation priority along with consideration of some factors such as
travel speed, composition of the number of vehicles, travel distance, and road safety.
RECOMMENDATIONS
1. The limitation and the used assumptions in this study should be improved as ways to calculate parameters more
accurately and in order to give a better evaluation of the policy.
2. The proposed solution in this research is the initial phase of problem-solving. It must be followed by further
study, particularly by taking into account the chosen range of a period in the analyses (2010 - 2012) and the
existence of Jakarta outer ring road, which has been operated in the west segments in 2014 and has provided the
logistic operators with another alternative solution against the Regulatory Restriction. The initial phase should be
carried on to the next phases according to the logical structure of decision-making [13], in order to develop a
better freight vehicles access restriction policy.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors would like to acknowledge Universitas Indonesia for the funding support of the research project
(PITTA 2016).
040009-7
REFERENCES
1. Peraturan Menteri Perhubungan Nomor 62 Tahun 2011, Pengaturan Waktu Operasi Kendaraan Angkutan
Barang di Jalan Tol Dalam Kota DKI Jakarta, 2011. [Regulation of the Minister of Transportation No. 62 in
2011, Control of Freight Vehicles Operating Time in DKI Jakarta Intra Urban Toll Road, 2011. In Indonesian].
2. E. Taniguchi, R.G. Thompson, and T. Yamada, "Recent Trends and Innovations in Modelling City Logistics,"
in The Eighth International Conference on City Logistics, 2014, pp. 4-14.
3. K.W. Ogden, "Truck Movement and Access in Urban Areas," Journal of Transportation Engineering, vol. 117,
no. 1, pp. 71-90, 1991.
4. B.C. Richardson, "Sustainable Transport: Analysis Frameworks," Journal of Transport Geography, vol. 13, pp.
29-39, 2005.
5. A. Whiteing, The Future of Sustainable Freight Transport and Logistics, 2010, available at
http://www.europarl.europa.eu/RegData/etudes/note/join/2010/431578/IPOLTRAN_NT(2010)431578_EN.pdf
6. F. Russo and A. Comi, "Measures for Sustainable Freight Transportation at Urban Scale: Expected Goals and
Tested Results in Europe," Journal of Urban Planning and Development, pp. 142-152, 2011
7. Departemen Pekerjaan Umum (DPU), Perhitungan Biaya Operasi Kendaraan Bagian I: Biaya Tidak Tetap
(Running Cost), Pedoman No: T-15-2005-B. Indonesia, 2005. [DPU, Calculation of Vehicle Operational Costs
Part I: Running Costs, Guidelines Number: Pd T-15-2005-B. Indonesia, 2005. In Indonesian].
8. Departemen Pekerjaan Umum (DPU), Perhitungan Besaran Biaya Kecelakaan Lalu Lintas dengan
Menggunakan Metoda the Gross Output (Human Capital), Pedoman No: Pd T-02-2005-B. Indonesia, 2005.
[DPU, Calculation of Road Accident Costs Amount with the Gross Output (Human Capital) Method,
Guidelines Number: Pd T-02-2005-B. Indonesia, 2005. In Indonesian].
9. Kementerian Lingkungan Hidup, Metodologi Perhitungan Tingkat Emisi Gas Rumah Kaca, Pedoman
Penyelenggaraan Inventarisasi Gas Rumah Kaca Nasional, Buku II Volume I. Indonesia, 2012. [Ministry of
Environment, Calculation Methodology of Greenhouse Gases Emission Level, Implementation Guidelines of
National Greenhouse Gases Inventory, Book II Volume I. Indonesia, 2012. In Indonesian].
10. J.J. Hajek and R. Krawczyniuk, "The Accuracy of Highway Traffic Noise Predictions," Canadian Acoustics,
vol. 12, no. 2, pp. 28-38, 1984, available at http://jcaa.caa-aca.ca/index.php/jcaa/article/view/522/198.
11. Departemen Permukiman dan Prasarana Wilayah, Prediksi Kebisingan Akibat Lalu Lintas, Pedoman No: Pd T-
10-2004-B. Indonesia, 2004. [Department of Housing and Regional Infrastructure, Road Traffic Noise
Prediction, Guidelines Number: Pd T-10-2004-B. Indonesia, 2004. In Indonesian].
12. Environmental Defense Fund, Social Cost of Carbon Pollution Fact Sheet, 2014, available at
http://costofcarbon.org/files/Cost_of_Carbon_Fact_Sheet.pdf.
13. A.D. May, A Decision Makers' Guidebook, Developing Sustainable Urban Land Use and Transport Strategies.
UK: European Commission, 2003.
14. Badan Perencanaan Pembangunan Nasional (Bappenas), Pedoman Pelaksanaan Rencana Aksi Penurunan
Emisi Gas Rumah Kaca. Indonesia, 2011. [Bappenas, Implementation Guidelines of the Action Plan of
Greenhouse Gases Emission Reduction. Indonesia, 2011. In Indonesian].
15. Departemen Perhubungan, Rencana Umum Nasional Keselamatan (RUNK) Jalan Tahun 2011-2035.
Indonesia, 2011. [Department of Transportation, National General Plan of Road Safety in 2011-2035.
Indonesia, 2011. In Indonesian].
16. Peraturan Presiden Republik Indonesia Nomor 26 Tahun 2012, Cetak Biru Pengembangan Sistem Logistik
Nasional, 2012. [Regulation of the President of the Republic of Indonesia No. 26 in 2012, Blueprint of
National Logistic System Development, 2012. In Indonesian].
17. Badan Perencanaan Pembangunan Daerah (Bappeda) Jakarta, Rencana Pembangunan Jangka Menengah
Daerah Provinsi DKI Jakarta Tahun 2013-2017. Indonesia, 2013. [Bappeda Jakarta, Medium-Term
Development Plan of DKI Jakarta Region in 2013-2017. Indonesia, 2013. In Indonesian].
040009-8
Analysis on logistic company action toward the access restriction policy on freight
vehicle
Muhammad Nur, Sigit P. Hadiwardoyo, Nahry, and Nahdalina


! "

! " #

#
#

#
$ % & & % % ! !
'( && ) ! ! & & %
'( * ++,'*++ $ -
% & ! % !& ! $
%
. ( % / && & ! '*++$
! & &! 0 ! !'*++
& !! &% & ! !

/
1 ! 21 %
! 3! 2.1 & &
! 241
!
$ ! % %& % !! ! !! %
5 ! & ! ! 6 % 7
- !& ! &! !& (
! $ &! &&&& ! &
!% & & !
7 ! & '( & !
! $ % % && &7& &
&&! & % $ %% !
&
8 % % - 9 !% %
& && + ( & !!
%! ! $% ! &
& ( && $ !!
4/:
% & && $!! ( &
2 ! % % % !& ! $
%& & ! 3 &%
! % % '( $ &
$ ! &+!&5 +& &$ ! ;.
! && % '( 5 < $ ,'5<$ $ (
!!% % 3 &
&'5<$ .2..=
...!3!& % ! ,8

AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040010-1–040010-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985506
040010-1
'( * ++,'*++ &'( '( > %
( ! % $'
! !!% ! &&

'5<$

'*++
IGURE#'( $+ (, ">! &$ ! >?5'(
!&! 9 !& (

!! ! + ! %
&& % 9 $ & !
& $
$! '*++ !
! & (&'(
0 ( &
! ( '*++ !! % !&!
! $@%& - & !
( '*++ !!!
$%& '
$ -& % !&
! & ( '*++5 & &
& & & &
$!& ! !
> - % / && & ! & !
( '*++5 &! %
( % ( ! ! &% ! 5
& %&
. ( % '*++$9 &
9 !69 0 % % %
(! %& ! %
9& $! % 3! ! & 9 !
(& A & %
&
$ % % '( 6(!( '( 6$
'( 60 $ &! &
& ! &'( '( @(!( $
0 & ( '*++
! ,8

040010-2
$9& & 0 9$
& !& 0 9 & "
( $α A ) #
%≤

"
B & !
CB%&
!B! ! &9
9B! ! &9
5 ! ( &$ &
& ! & 5&
% ! %
! D% & &
6! !! ? %6 % &
5& &%&!& ..2 -
D% & ..2
8 & !
9 + & "
(
%# &+5 !
)* )
+,+-#++ D
+.+-+,+
+/+-+.+
+0+-+/+ )
$ % % & !% $%
& & & "
6 5&E..2. !5 !% F
6 5&G..2. @5 !%
5 @ & % !&!! !
!% ! -!&

%'!

1''
0 9 & ! / &
! ! 7 ,? %6 % &&
% - , G..2 ! 6!
8 & H 7! .2,.6.;. 5!

> !&! ! 3! &
- & % (! 0 - ;, 3 !
!3!
! , 5 &,& ! G
.
II.
II.E.5
&! -:, ! & !
9! 9! % !( ( &
8 - -;, 3 ! & -G.
I& -I.
I&
- ;.;
& - :.:
& -
..& -E
..+ & %
!!! !;, 3 % G.
% .

040010-3
% ;.;
% :.:
%
.. % E
.. % (! !2,&%
! 3,

3 ,
3 & 3 &%3
+ ! &! % & !& 9
% ! % % ! $ !& 9 & ! (
! ( % 5 !2 ! ! G.. ! ;.;
! 4.4
!
.
! E
.8 % !,(A ! - ! !G.. !
;. !E;.> %,( & ! &; ! G
..
..
...
2..2.
/../.

.. E
..$
& %
$ % & ; , 3 &
% 6 & & 6 &
& &,& % ! $
$
!&! 5 & & !& 3
& 5 ! & & ! !
&& (& ( !

8 /1& ! &
1& &%
1&

:;1&% $ && !
! ! ( ! !!5 && !&
( !$ 8 ,1 9 &
% ($! %% ! %% &
%%
(
%0 > !&>
" 2 2 "
2 (" %3 " 7
) 8" '
' 45 6
2 4975 4795 475 45
A 5
+ G
. G. G. G. G. G
..
/;
! 3
&
: : : : : : : : : :
A 5
$ G
. G. G. G. .6;.
..6..
222;:
! 3
&

A 5
G
. G. G.
3 ;
64. .6;.
..6..
2.....
9!
&

+J A 5

G
. G. G. G. .6;.
..6.. 4.;
$ ! 3
&
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
A 5
7 G
. G. G. G. .6;.
..6.. ./2;/
! 3
!

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
040010-4
:!%0> &7 %7
(
%3$&*!
!! &
!
7 % !! ,1
,+!
,+!
+ &
/; /;/
.
/
$ &
222;: 4:4// 2
&
2.....
...... 62.
+ & 4.; ./:4 24
:!%;$&*!
$8 % &&! & !

8 & !
/
18
! 21 !
241 2.1&!
8 ! & ( !'*++% &!
! &!$ &! ! % &
! &! &% 9!
! & (& % 5 & &
! -& 9&
&%
0 8 % ( !3!
&&'*++%%! 7!
3! & ! 5 ( %
040010-5
- %% &
9% % & ! ! !!
!% (! && ! &
*&% !% % (
! ! (

!'
$ & & %
!!!'*++$! % !
'*++&&! &) !7 % & & &
& & ! &
/
1221
! 2.15 (9
! !! !% (! &&
! &
<=
% :%$%
$ ((<% 5 & & !! & ! @,5$$7
.
;
%%%%'
' > 8 ( J + ? K& 8 & $ ! L " 7
7!! ,..
7! LD JL ( + < 8 5%'
*&$ ! M !,.

'$ J? 5! &) $ (+ 8 *!
' &L 7 & $ ! ,..2
'$? J$7$5!L&&% &$$ (0
' &L 7 & $ ! ,..
2 ?K*< M %"7,7
44
; ? &

'
&
() %"!* (!+* &
,
-

.
/ * /
" ,$ &
$ ! '( .

/ N & $ ! 0 ? '( 5 < $ ! 5
,.

: & 0 1&112
!3,L3?!'( 5 .
;
4 &
4&
1 * 1 ,L '( 5 ..2
. 0* &
. & 1 1&11,7*&& N(
.
2
040010-6
Analysis on 3RWB model (Reduce, reuse, recycle, and waste bank) in comprehensive
waste management toward community-based zero waste
Nur Azizah Affandy, Enik Isnaini, and Arif Budi Laksono


!

, Indonesia

, Indonesia

, Indonesia

! "#$ %&

#'$&(%&

($&(%&
"% ) && & % *

( + &
, (+ +
( ( - ++
+ && % ((& ((-&& ( %
.-&
&, +( + && &&
&.(/.% 0& (( + 1+ + 21+ 2+
4& ( 56
(& + %) +((&
7 7( %0& - +- + +4& ( 8%#99 %
:+ ( &
( ;& <(( & /
& :
& 8+'5#(%; & (+ &+4& (
8%#99 4'5# =>89 %) ,):( -( - %
( &
(
?+& && ( &+
(
% && @ +
+ && + +

( %:+ (( -((
-& (4 ( & (

(& +& (% &(& + && +
,)&(& ( &
&&
&( + && (
( ( + %-( -((&-& (4 +
&4 (( --( + ( -
+ && %
#$%&'(%#&$
) && -(&& +%4
(((& + ( & %;
((
+ % ( -( & +
&+ &&&(
&
+ %
4(+ + && &
( &+ -&

%
;

&(4 + && ( (&
(
((+ /;A &
+ BC%D
( &
(
&+ , /,,, (% ,
(-(&
+
& ( 4 -(&
+
(
(((%&(&
, (( + (
&& 4
( %0 && &+
( &4& (&-(
(
(((E&%
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040011-1–040011-10; doi: 10.1063/1.4985507
040011-1
& *? ( -& ( +
&
& + ;&,+ 88F 8&9 88
8#%'&9 %:+ ( (
&*? >G>%8'&9 %
; & + (& (-+ ( &%;
+ &&(

& (
( &(& *? &
, % &(

&,) &
+ +8%#99 %
& &
+ & (
& & (
- %; 7 & & - +@
-( ( & ( (
%

&: H &*? 8 (( &*? +
5#GG'(%
-( 4& ( 8%#99 ( &
+
&+ 5'%F89 5# 9 % ( ( &
-(+#9& -(&

(+ &*?
+8F5&9 %; &
-
&*? +G86
FF6

FF6
( 86
& (6
(6
( 49F>6
+F6

86
(BC%
0& 4 ?& ( HA:HI;

& -) :& :(&&& ?J) :-&
&,,, () /,)%; +&(
&& %
; (
4 & (&&(
& -+
&&
& & + &
+ (&&*?

+ && ?+ %
)
&*?

&, K-A-+ >%5#I&/>5#%
L
%0& &#'#%>> &(

(#8%88
((
5G8%88
( +
%
; ( +( -(

((+!
% 8<((&*?
((
&&.(&

%
% &*? +?+ &
( -& % ;
+ &(&
), :( /, , , ( )
& - ) :& &
&& ? J ) ;&
<((&*? &(( ,;8',)<,;8,)<,;8,)<,;8
,)<%
% ; ( +
-
&

;&<((+

& &4&&+ && 4 + &(
4&(
&& & -& + %
* )

; & &

+ *(-0&(BC
((+!
, =88
+ =*&(=( /=85G=&(/86%

; + +
&( -((&& /,;8',)<,;8,)<,;8,)<

F# && /,;8,)<
# %
040011-2

?&& ?+ && &(( + && %
?H & -((&*? %
? H
& ( + && ,;9,) ( ( E
%
+ #,
&*?

&, K-- >%5#I& />5#%
%0&
(#'#%>> &(

(#8%88
(( 5G8%88

( +
%;&<((&&
&*? +
%'#&
F/--((%;
;&
<(((
( ( (
'&+
888&&9 + &
'M%
; , *
?
-#+(./%; * %
;
&*? !
N !;*?
N !H *?
N* !;I& *?
N) !**?
+ 0 )"

H + &
&+
&& &%;
& (
7 &
+ && ( -%
,
%B'C+ 88 &
+ (( +
-( (& + && + !
O ;(( (( +- (
O :
; ,
O , (
(
O
((

((
; + &&
&'/
(

+
&
(%; - + - &
+
(
040011-3
+8%P8%P8%P8%9'=8%89 %; &
+ (+

&
**8'?>>?8 *
*
) .
;+*&((
+
& (/& &?& ?& & -

8%#N8%'9-(9 %
0& - &
+ + 8%99 + % &
&
+ & (
& & ( - %;
7 & & - + ( +@

- ( ( & ( (
%
&
: H & *? 8 ( ( & *? +5#GG'
(%
-( 4& ( 8%#99 (&
+ &
+ 5'%F89 5# 9 % ( ( &
-(
+ #9& -(&
( + & *? + 8F5
&9 %

; 4 +
+ & &6+ /(( 1+
+ 2&
&+( ( 4( & ((

%;( + (
+ &
( & *? % &
+
-
&*? %
% 0./1; (
) &
& (&*? /6+ + %
$ % , 2
) + 9 5#
A( '
A 8
' : ( %
# H ) .(
5 ) %
F 4
G 0 %
> % 8%
; ( 88
0& ( & +

+
5#6(
'6
86
& (
%6(
6( 4
6 +
%6

%6
8%6%

+ & ;&<((&*? ;(%
% 0.3%; (
+ &
& (;&<((&/6+ +
$ % , 2

) ) 5
A( '
A G
' : ( #
# H .( 8
5 ) ) 8
F 4 8
G 0 8
> % 8
; ( 88
;( ( ( + ;& <(( & *?

56+ + '6( G6#6& (% ( -(
(9& + +#9&Q -(&

&( 9 (+ +8F5&Q9
B#C%; ((
&(+-&&
-
(
040011-4
+ & 0%+ (0% + ,)&(
& -&& ?
) :& %
) .
&?
) ) /56 H ) /F6
& /#6 ,/6 ,/G6 , (H )
/>6
) <(&*

0(H(/>6
-#+(.31((
&(;&<((&*?
-#+(.
1; && ?) :& :(%
! , 0 '

(( + ? & &(& &? - --+
+
( - (

&( &
-& %
& &-+ , %; &
& && &- 7(
&& ?+ && %
( &( ((

&

&( + &
((
&(& ((& -( %0 & (
(
& & & && %
040011-5
) ,

!
.-& 4 + & ( + +
&& % & -(-
&& ( -,;9,)
/ 9& - (+ (-( AII/+&@&&
((+ &%
( -&& & && ((
,;9,)/
9 & - (+ (-( AII% ; 4 (
+ -& &&
; &(

+ && %
-#+(.41*

A(*(
7 (& #86

( &(( + ?
- (
E (((
& % +
&& @++ && %:+ ( ( #>6
(& & &
+ && ( +-+
-& + ( 6 & ((&
&+ - & %
"
? ; + && &+ (

-& %; -& ( (
&

(
( && %
? * ( - - -%( - && -
+ ( (
?+ -(& &
&
--(& %
? .-& ( & -& ( (( . (
&- +
+ & &&&& &
+ && % * + - & - & -
%
? (+ &
,;9,)+ && ( &%
? .-&
(
& (
&(& %
? : (
&( + (
& +
(((

%
? (+ &(
,;9,)&- && ( &
+ %
040011-6
? :&
&& +
& &
& &%
? && + & %
? && ( ( (( + (%
? ; +-4 & & - R
&((

-

7 %
? ; +-- 4(
&( && ( ( + N -

&%
-#+(.5%*

&(&
7
& 887 586 + && -
1
& (

(
-& 2%

#
; -&

(
,;9,) & -%
&
-& 4 %
; &((
,;9,) (
& - -&
& &%
; + & & -% &
-&
4 %
; + & (
& - -&
& &%
, && (- (&
(( (
+( 9& ( &,;%
-#+(.61*

(:
56 88 7 &(

(
,;9,) + (
&& & & -
( ( & + (
040011-7
586 &
( & + (
(
+ %

.-& ( -( (( ( (- &
(
(
& %
-( &- ((
&
-
( %
( -(
(&
,;9,)4 + -
-& + &@ (+ (@
%
:(- -( ( -& && (( %
, & - & ( ( %: ( -(
& & @(& + ( (& 7&
%
:&
&& - -& &%
; (
& 887 &(
-(
586 + & ,;9,)
(+ &

& ( ?+ %
7 !

; -( & ( &+ (!
%
+ + && %L(

;
(
?&( %,& - + R

&& @( (
( 9%*& (
& + %
% - (( ( + %; + & (!
( ( (4& (&4 %
+
+ %
-#+(.81& -) :& !&& ?J) %
040011-8
%& ,

+ ? + &(+
%0&
(-
(( + (
(!
? ?+ &(
& (+( + -
& (( * * %
? ; + &+(( &4+ (( - %
? &
& + &&
( && @

(+&(( %
: ( && - ( + (

+ && !
? ;
%
?
+((&&%; + +(( + ( +
+ (& (&4+ %
? ; &+ +((
((%
? D+ +(( && ;& %
? ?+ (( (
(+ %+(( (%:+ ( +((
( + %
" ,-

-((
(+ &&
( && +& &&
-( %
7 & -((

+ &
( &(%; ( + (& >6
(&
- + && 1-((21 2%;&
H ( - && ( + & && (@
&(& -(& %
9 %

; && ;&H - & + && %; @-
- % ; @ ( (
& @
-(
( && %0& +
&& +((&(( (9-(& &
(
( -(-
& %+ && ++ &
&%) &@ + & %
#
& - (( - + &&
&
&

( && % *&

(! (
( - ( (
+
(%
.

; +-+ -(- &(--& (
&& - - -
& -& (+((%; - (+ ( && (
-(&
+ & ( -& %)
(
( + &&(% & (7
(
040011-9

& + ( 7(
(
(
(-( %
&$0()#&$)
0& (( 1+ + 21+ 24& ( 56+

& + %) &
+ &
+((&( -( 7( %0&
(- &
8%#9-(9
7% :+ ( (
;& -(( & /: H
&
8+'5#(%L (&
+ &+5# 9 %
,):(-( - &( A(?H-(& * &(& *
( : * -( * % A(?H-(& * (
?+ &
&& ( &+ (
& % +
&& @+ &+ +
( %:+ ((

-& (4 ( ?&
( ++ && %
&(& + && + ,)&(- (( && %;
( + && + (( + %D -( -((
&-& (4 + &4 (( --( + (
-
+ && %
.-..$.)
% *%% &*%:%(%885%1A(A !0( A(@A A(?-
A
*(+ :& %@L (8/'!FG?F>5%
% %%
%8%A ? H(& A(( I&

*& : H
I( *&( I & /A ; I( L
&%
% %*-(( %(%>>A : A( A SK %
'% %H& %88'%H I( A((*& ;?#8;;*&
88'988#%
#% %%
%8#%& -:(:& 0; && ?J) *,:
)E I&S- %
040011-10
Identification of reluctant factors in using footpaths based on the pedestrians’
perception
Wahyu Hadiyanto, Dewi Handayani, and Budi Yulianto

Identification of Reluctant Factors in Using Footpaths Based
on the Pedestrians’ Perception
Wahyu Hadiyanto1, a), Dewi Handayani1, Budi Yulianto1
1
Post Graduate Civil Engineering Programs Sebelas Maret University, Jl. Ir. Sutami 36A, Surakarta,
Indonesia 57126
a)
Corresponding author: coey_act@yahoo.com
Abstract. Footpath is a path intended particularly for pedestrians to avoid any conflicts with motor vehicles. However in
reality, most of the pedestrians are unwilling to use paths and they prefer to walk on the roads. This research was
conducted with the aim to identify the existing condition of pedestrian footpaths based on field observations and to
determine the factors that cause the pedestrians are reluctant to walk on the trails. The method used to investigate the
pedestrians’ perception was by distributing questionnaires to the pedestrians. The results of this study found that the
factors that caused the pedestrians did not want to use footpaths were the footpath width, the existence of barriers and
obstacles, unstable height (not continuous), damaged surface, non-standard driveway that intersects sidewalk, suboptimal
function of ramp, transverse steep slope, and the absence of bollard that could protect footpaths from the access of
motorcycles.
INTRODUCTION
Pedestrians are people that travel or move to other places on foot. Reference [1] suggested that pedestrian is a
circulation or movement of individuals from one point of origin to another location as a destination by foot. The
pedestrian footpath is a path intended particularly for pedestrians to avoid any conflict with motor vehicles.
However in reality, most of the pedestrians are unwilling to use footpaths and they prefer to walk on the roads.
Pathways that are not used optimally can trigger the lack of facility support and consequently, they will be utilized
for other functions [2]. Basically, the concept of footpaths requires several criteria. The rules will promote the
optimal use of footpaths and will provide comfort and safety for pedestrians. They are: safe and free from vehicles;
convenient and lucid travel route; accessible from all direction without any obstacles and barriers; available curb
ramp; misappropriation of other functions; having an aesthetic value and amusement represented by facilities and
infrastructures such as benches, trash bins, trees, lighting, etc. [3]
Pedestrians’ willingness in using the pedestrian paths can be influenced by their perception on the footpath.
There are differences in the perceptions of the elder and the younger pedestrians in using the roads. The elderly
depends on the provided facilities as they decide to use footpaths, while the more growing concerns about the
convenience and safety [4]. Pedestrians’ satisfaction in using trails is influenced by the convenience, security, safety,
and visibility. In terms of convenience, the use of concrete material for the surface of the pathway has an adverse
impact on the willingness of pedestrians since they prefer natural stone material. Pedestrians’ perception on the
security will decrease when the number of vehicles increases. In terms of safety, the existence of adequate lighting
will improve the safety level especially at night, meanwhile, the number of advertisements on a footpath will
interfere the visibility of pedestrians [5]. Physical characteristics of the pedestrian paths that affect the walkers’
satisfaction and convenience are the construction of trail, surface texture, and the dimensions of the sidewalk [6].
METHODOLOGY
The study area of this research was a footpath on Jenderal Sudirman Street, Salatiga City, precisely from
Tamansari Roundabout to Simpang Tiga Sukowati Salatiga (Fig. 1). This area was divided into 3 (three) segments:
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040012-1–040012-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985508
040012-1
Segment I was from Tamansari Roundabout to Shopping Center, Segment II was footpath on Pasar Raya 2 Salatiga,
and Segment III was from Pasar Raya 1 Salatiga to Simpang Tiga Sukowati.
FIGURE 1. The Study Area.
The method used to investigate the perception of the pedestrians was the questionnaires about the facilities of the
footpath. The population was determined by estimating the number of pedestrians who did not use the path. From
the analysis of Slovin method, with an assumption of an error of 10%, 100 respondents for each segment were
selected; hence, the total sample in this study was 300 respondents.
A preliminary survey was conducted before the initial survey by distributing questionnaires to 30 respondents in
each segment to determine the validity and reliability of the questionnaire. Results of validity and reliability test
based on 18 variables that were included in the survey showed that all variables could be verified as valid and the
questionnaire was reliable.
Analysis of the data used to process the results of the study from the respondents was the descriptive method by
using the analysis of ratings that had been evaluated according to the range of 1 - 5 (Likert scale). Total score of
each variable was sorted from the largest to the smallest. The results of the analysis consisted of variables rank that
was obtained from the total score of respondents' response.
Characteristics of Respondents
The characteristics of the interviewees based on gender and age in each segment are presented in Table 1.
040012-2
TABLE 1. Characteristics of Respondents
Segment I Segment II Segment III Total
Age classification Male Female Male Female Male Female Male Female
Qty (%) Qty (%) Qty (%) Qty (%) Qty (%) Qty (%) Qty (%) Qty (%)
Children
0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0.00 0 0 0 0
(0 - 11 years old)
Adolescent
8 2.67 23 7.67 3 1.00 16 5.33 5 1.67 15 5.00 16 5.33 54 18
(12 - 25 years old)
Adult
24 8.00 29 9.67 28 9.33 31 10.33 34 11.33 35 11.67 86 28.7 95 31.7
(26 - 45 years old)
Elderly
9 3.00 7 2.33 14 4.67 8 2.67 7 2.33 4 1.33 30 10 19 6.33
(above 46 years)
From Table 1, it can be seen that the pedestrians were dominated by the female (18%) of the younger group (12 -
25 years old) and the female (31.7%) of the adults (26 - 45 years old). The highest percentage of pedestrians was
from the adult category (26 - 45 years) of 60.33%. The elderly (46 - 65 years) also used the footpath on Jenderal
Sudirman Street, Salatiga with a percentage of 16.33%.
The Existing Condition of Pedestrian Path on Jenderal Sudirman Street

Identification of the current condition of the footpath was carried out based on 4 (four) variables, namely: the
corridor of the sidewalk, supporting facilities, service for diffable, and crossing facilities. Recapitulation of the
identification is demonstrated in Table 2. Based on Table 2, it can be summarized that:
x Footpaths on Segments I and Segments III had average widths, which were 2.5 meters and 2 meters,
respectively. Segment II had a narrow width of 1.2 meters.
x The existence of street vendors (PKL) and motorcycle parking lot became the barriers and obstacles on
pedestrian paths that led to the ineffectiveness due to the reduced width of paths.
x The pedestrian paths tended to be unstable (disconnected) because there were changes in the level of the
footpath surface.
x The driveway surface condition was relatively good, although there was a difference in the height of 0.25 -
0.6 meters between the footpath and the road surface.
x The surface of the footpaths in Segment I, Segment II, and Segments III endured a lot of damages. The
footpath surface in Segment I was slippery, while the steep slope and grades in Segments III could endanger
pedestrians.
x There were many supporting facilities on the pedestrian paths that reduced the effectiveness of the footpath.
Supporting facilities were not maintained properly that caused a lot of damaged facilities.
x Facility for diffable was merely in the form of curb ramp as provided in Segment I. Meanwhile, warning tile
and guiding tile were not found on pedestrian path along Jenderal Sudirman Street, Salatiga. Curb ramp in
the segment I had a narrow width, the surface of the ramp was in slippery conditions and in damaged
condition, thus, it endangered the pedestrians especially the wheelchair users.
x Crossing facilities provided on Jenderal Sudirman Street, Salatiga, did not accommodate the pedestrians
with disabilities.
Pedestrians’ Perception on the Reluctance in Using Footpath

The results of the respondents’ assessment of the reluctant factors to use footpaths were divided into 2 (two)
groups, namely “factors with effect” and “factors with no effect”. The determination of “factors with effect” was
based on the limit value of the score of 300. The score of 300 was derived from the number of respondents for each
segment (= 100) multiplied by a threshold value towards agreed (Taken value 3). The score of 300 and above was
determined as “factors with effect” and vice versa the score below 300 was considered as “factors with no effect”.
The results of the assessment are shown in Table 3.
040012-3
TABLE 2. Identification the Existing Condition of Pedestrian Footpath on Jenderal Sudirman Street
Variables Indicators Explanation Segment I Segment II Segment III
Corridor of 1 Width the total width of the 2.5 m 1.2 m 2m
sidewalk footpath
2 Barriers or Obstacles The effective width of the 0.6 - 1.4 m 0 - 0.4 m 0 - 0.8 m
footpath that is free from
obstacles and barriers.
Forms of barriers or Street Vendors (PKL) Street Vendors (PKL) Street Vendors and
obstacles motorcycles parking lot
3 Stability of footpath Requirements Footpath surface is not stable, there is a change in the surface level of the
footpath
Differences in the level of 0.6 - 1.2 m 0.4 m 0.25 m
the footpath elevation
4 Surface of Footpath surface material Sleek ceramics Patterned tiles Paving sidewalks
footpath The condition of the No holes, poor, and Holes and cracks exist, Holes exist, poor,
surface cracks exist and poor fractured and separated
paving
5 Slope of footpath Transverse slope 0% 1.2% 2.8 - 3.5 %
6 Grade of footpath Longitudinal slope 0% 0% 5.5 - 9 %
7 Driveways The width of the driveway 5-7m 5.75 - 6.85 m 4-7m
The condition of the The road surface condition is good, but there is a difference in the height of
driveway 0.6 meters between the footpaths and the road surface
The height different 0.6 m 025 m 0.3 m
8 Bollard Height (m) - - -
The distance between the - - -
bollard pole (m)
Supporting 9 Lighting on footpath Distance (m) 18 m 18 m 18 m
facilities Placement of lighting pole Lighting is in furniture zone and outside the main pedestrian path
Height (m) 3.75 m 3.75 m 3.75 m
10 Trash bin Facilities Distance 20 m 40 m 20 m
Placement of trash Outside the main Outside the main Above the main
facilities pedestrian path pedestrian path pedestrian path
Height 0.4 - 0.5 m 0.6 m 0.8 m
11 Fire Hydrant The number of fire hydrant 1 piece - 1 piece
12 Signs Height 2.4 - 2.6 m 2.4 - 2.5 m 1.8 - 2.6 m
Location of signs Signs are outside the main pedestrian path
Requirements Visible and unambiguous
13 Bench Distance - - -
Dimensions - - -
Placement of bench - - -
14 Fountain for drinking Placement - - -
water Dimensions - - -
15 Trees and garden Distance (m) 9m 9m 9m
The distance between the 2 - 2.2 m 1.8 - 2.4 m 1.8 - 2.2 m
lowest tree branch with the
footpath surface (m)
Diffable 16 Warning and guiding Notice tile dimensions - - -
facilities tiles
Placement of warning tiles - - -
Guiding tile dimensions - - -
Placement of guiding tiles - - -
17 Curb Ramp The slope of the ramp 2.0 - 6.0 % - -
Conditions of curb ramp There are holes, cracks
on the surface of curb - -
ramp
Curb Ramp width (m) 0.50 m - -
Amenities 18 Amenities crossings Dimensions 3m 3m 3m
crossings Type of crossings zebra cross zebra cross zebra cross
Supporting facilities There is no curb ramp, warning and guiding tiles. There are guiding
pedestrian signs with 2.5 meters in height
040012-4
TABLE 3. The Result of the Respondents' Assessment of the Reluctant Factors in Using Footpaths.
Segment I Segment II Segment III
Factors Score Factors Score Factors Score
Footpath Stability 442 Barriers or Obstacles 453 Barriers or Obstacles 428
Barriers or Obstacles 419 Footpath Surface 408 Footpath Surface 405
Curb Ramp 397 Footpath Width 380 Footpath Width 382
Footpath Surface 374 Footpath Stability 378 Footpath Slope 337
Driveway 342 Curb Ramp 368 Bollard 333
Bench Facilities 234 Driveway 363 Curb Ramp 327
Warning & Guiding Tile 214 Bench Facilities 227 Driveway 325
Footpath Width 197 Warning & Guiding Tile 205 Footpath Grade 293
Trees and Park 193 Footpath Slope 199 Warning & Guiding Tile 229
Footpath Slope 181 Footpath Grade 184 Footpath Stability 207
Signs 176 Bollard 182 Signs 199
Crossing Facilities 164 Crossing Facilities 181 Crossing Facilities 195
Lighting 160 Trash bin Facilities 180 Bench Facilities 192
Trash bin Facilities 159 Lighting 179 Trash bin Facilities 178
Bollard 156 Signs 178 Lighting 163
Grade Sidewalk 151 Trees and Park 174 Trees and Park 144
Fountain for Drinking Water 128 Fire Hydrant 137 Fountain for Drinking Water 133
Fire Hydrant 125 Fountain for Drinking Water 124 Fire Hydrant 128
“Factors with effect” from each segment in Table 2 were subsequently classified into 3 (three) groups, which
were: 1) group of factors that affect the three segments, 2) group of factors that affect two segments, and 3) group of
factors that affect only one segment. The results of this classification can be seen in Table 4.
TABLE 4. Factors behind the Pedestrians’ Reluctance in Using Footpath on Jenderal Sudirman Street, Salatiga
Variables/Indicators Segment I Segment II Segment III Total Rating
Barriers or Obstacles 419 453 428 1300 I
Variables that affect the Footpath Surface 374 408 405 1187 II
Segment I, II, and III Driveway 342 363 325 1030 IV
Curb Ramp 397 368 327 1092 III
Variables that affect Footpath Stability 442 378 - 820 V
Segment I and II or Segment
II and III Footpath Width - 380 382 762 VI
Variables that affect only a Footpath Slope - - 337 337 VII
Particular Segment Bollard - - 333 333 VIII
Based on Table 4, the major factors that caused the pedestrians’ reluctance in using footpaths were the existence
of obstacles or barriers particularly due to the numbers of street vendors (PKL) and motorcycle parking lot on
pedestrian paths, the damaged surface condition of the footpath, the absence of curb ramp or the suboptimal curb
ramp, and the existence of driveway between the footpaths. The second factor was the instability or
disconnected/non-continuous footpath due to the difference heights of trail surfaces and relatively narrow footpath.
The third factor was the steep slope of trail and the absence of bollard on the path.
CONCLUSIONS
This research identified the factors of the pedestrians’ reluctance in using footpath that was derived from the
pedestrians’ perception. From the discussion, it can be concluded that:
x From the investigation of the existing conditions, the existence of street vendors (PKL) and motorcycle
parking lot on the footpaths can reduce the effectiveness of footpath, in addition to the unstable height of
footpath surface, steep slope and grade footpath, and damaged path surface as found out on Jenderal
Sudirman Street, Salatiga. Supporting facilities were available, but the conditions were not maintained
appropriately. Facilities for diffable were merely provided in the form of curb ramp in segment I.
x Factors that affected the pedestrians’ reluctance in using footpath on Jenderal Sudirman Street, Salatiga,
were the barriers and obstacles caused by the presence of street vendors and motorcycle parking lot, the
040012-5
damaged surface of the footpath, driveway that intersected the footpath, narrow curb ramp, and damaged
surface, unstable or disconnected footpath due to different levels of walkway surface, insufficient in width,
steep slope of crosswise footpaths that endangered pedestrians especially the wheelchair users, and the
absence of bollard to protect the path from the access of motor vehicles.
REFERENCES
1. H. Rubenstein, 1992, Central City Malls, John Willey & Sons, New York.
2. L. Mauliani, A. W. Purwantiasning and W. Aqli 2014, Designing better environment by providing a pedestrian
way for pedestrian, Jurnal Science Direct - Elsevier. 179 (2015), pp. 80 - 93.
3. J. Tumlin, 2012, Sustainable Transportation Planning, John Willey & Sons, New York.
4. N. I. Bahari, A. K. Arshad and Z. Yahya, 2012, Pedestrian’s Perception of the Sidewalk Facilities in Kuala
Lumpur’s Commercial Areas, Faculty of Civil Engineering, Universiti Teknologi MARA, Shah Alam, Selangor,
Malaysia.
5. A. Sukhbaatar and N. Harada, 2012, The Relationship between Pedestrian Perception and Characteristics of
Sidewalk Environment in the case of the central area of Ulaanbaatar City, Department of Architecture,
Mongolian University of Science and Technology, India.
6. R. Prijadi, Sangkertadi and R. Tarore, 2014, Pengaruh Permukaan Jalur Pedestrian terhadap Kepuasan &
Kenyamanan Pejalan Kaki di Pusat Kota Manado, Jurnal Media Matrasain ISSN 1858 1137. Vol. 11, No. 1, pp.
43 - 54.
040012-6
The utilization characteristics of social facilities in the border area of Semarang city
Bambang Setioko, Deasy Olivia, Edward E. Pandelaki, and Titien Woro Murtini

The Utilization Characteristics of Social Facilities in the
Border Area of Semarang City
Bambang Setioko1, a), Deasy Olivia2, Edward E. Pandelaki1, and Titien Woro
Murtini1, b)
1
Lecturer of the Department of Architecture, Faculty of Engineering – Universitas Diponegoro, Indonesia,
2
Student of the Graduate School-Department of Architecture, Faculty of Engineering – Universitas Diponegoro,
Indonesia.
a)
Corresponding author: keliek2000@yahoo.com
b)
deasyolivia24@gmail.com
Abstract. The rapid growth of settlement in border areas is often considered as a problem of big cities in Indonesia,
where people from rural areas prefer to move out and settle in the border areas of big cities due to the provision of better
social facilities. Border areas generally do not receive adequate attention and are often overlooked by the local
government. It is a common phenomenon in Indonesian cities, including in Semarang City. Increased number of
settlements in the border areas in Semarang City is in linear with spontaneous urbanization processes which indicate the
heterogeneity emerging of settlement areas. In the early stages of Semarang City spatial planning, the need for social
facilities in border areas is included based on the regular standard which is commonly applied to the urban core. In a very
short period, the numbers and types of existing social facilities are insufficient to fulfill the needs of the community.
Nowadays, in the context of rapid urbanization, the growth of social facilities in border areas is very high. The intense
growth of settlements in border areas is very high due to the low price of land in Demak Regency in compared to those of
other areas in Semarang City. However, only a few developers involved social facilities as a part of housing estate
construction. Consequently, most of the occupants utilize a limited number of social facilities provided by the municipal
government, which are actually intended to serve the citizens of Semarang City. This research was conducted at Sendang
Mulyo Village which is located in the border of Semarang municipal administrative area and included in Demak
Regency. This paper discusses the utilization characteristics of social facilities in the border area of Semarang City, with
the aim to get the trigger factors. The method analysis consisted of a statistical test and descriptive analysis. The
utilization characteristics were formulated based on the relationship between neighborhood and human behavior. The
settlements in the border area of Semarang City have different characteristics. The differences led to a gap of the
utilization of facilities between people who live in the planned and unplanned settlement. Therefore, the social spatial
concept is required to address the issue.
INTRODUCTION
Cities always grow and develop through sustainable urbanization [1]. This process causes urban sprawl spreads
to the outer part of the city, known as the border area. The city is the venue for a human with all of their life as a part
of a human settlement that consists of "contents and container". Content consists of individual and society, while
container consists of shells, networks, and nature [2]. The relationship between man and space in regional physical
element consists of content and container. Content is the population of the city while the container is a region that
consists of nodal, path, natural resources, and the administrative boundaries [3]. Those factors affect the emergence
of new sub-service facilities that influences the use of social facilities in the border area. The emergence of new sub-
service facilities occurs because there are some areas with an absence of facilities due to their low accessibility.
Therefore, sub-service facilities are provided to reach some areas which are not well served to make accessibility
easily. In addition, the service center hierarchy is influenced by threshold population and range of goods [4]. The
emergence of the subservice center is triggered by some factors, such as, 1). location factor, 2). natural resources
availability factor, 3). agglomeration factor, 4). government investment factor [5]. In the early stages of Semarang
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040013-1–040013-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985509
040013-1
City spatial planning, the provision of social facilities in border areas was assessed based on a basic standard that is
commonly used for the development of urban settlements. However, a few years later, the number and types of
existing social facilities are inadequate to fulfill the needs of the community, particularly due to the intense growth
of settlements in border areas.
The rapid growth of settlements in border areas is often considered as a problem for Indonesian cities where
people from rural areas prefer to move out and settle in the border areas of big cities to obtain better social facilities.
Border areas generally do not receive adequate attention and are frequently overlooked by the local government. It is
a common phenomenon in Indonesia, including in Semarang City. Increased number of settlements at the border
areas in Semarang City is in linear with spontaneous urbanization processes which indicate the heterogeneity of
settlement areas. The intense growth of settlements in border areas is very high due to the low price of land in
Demak Regency in compared to those of other areas in Semarang City. However, merely a few developers involved
social facilities as a part of housing estate construction. Consequently, most of the occupants utilize a limited
number of social facilities provided by the municipal government, which are actually intended to serve the citizens
of Semarang City. The absence of sufficient social facilities at a neighborhood center in the border areas, however,
has an adverse impact.
The utilization of social facilities in the border areas of Semarang City is not only influenced by the flourish of
settlement and sub-service center, but also by the local people behavior. Nevertheless, it shapes specific
characteristics. The utilization characteristics are formed based on the relationship between neighborhood and
human behavior. In addition, human behavior will influence and shape the behavior setting of their neighborhood
[6]. The settlements in border areas of Semarang City have particular characteristics. The differences trigger the gap
between people who live in a planned and unplanned settlement in pertaining to the facilities utilization. Therefore, a
social spatial concept that consists of spatial practice, representations of space, and representational space, is
required to bridge the gap [7]. Sendang Mulyo Village is a village that is located in the border area of Semarang
municipal city and Demak Regency, as the study area of this research.
STUDY AREA
This study was conducted in the capital of the Central Java Province, Semarang City. It is located in the North
Coast of Java Island. Data in 2010 to 2015 recorded an average of 0.97% population growth with the total
population of Semarang of 1,723,988 inhabitants.
FIGURE 1. Map of Semarang Municipal Area

(Source: Semarang Local Planning Development Agency).
The percentage of population growth in Semarang is considered low in compared to other metropolitan cities, for
instance, Bandung, Medan and Palembang. In addition, the most populous sub-district is Pedurungan whereas the
least populated sub-district is Tugu. In 1986, 62% of Semarang population was still concentrated in the city center,
but in 1995, the population concentration was shifted to sub-district fringe by 64%. The population data indicated
that there was a population shift from the city center to the border areas. It is predicted that this tendency will
continue due to the density level of population and building in fringe areas is relatively low. The increasing interest
040013-2
of people to live in the border areas is motivated by several factors, including the increasing number of real estates
in the form of various types of new settlements, various social strata, and the easiness of house ownership process by
the availability of many housing credit scenarios (Fig. 1).
Sendang Mulyo Village is the locus of this research which located in the border area of Semarang municipal area
and included in Demak Regency. The settlements in Sendang Mulyo Village can be categorized into three
characteristics of: 1. Planned settlement, 2. The unplanned settlement, and 3. Autonomous settlement. The
differences among those categories led to a gap among the residents who live in the planned and unplanned
settlement, in pertaining to the characteristics in utilizing the social facilities (Fig. 2 and Fig. 3).
Planned
Settlement
PETA KECAMATAN TEMBALANG
20
Unplanned
30
20
20
20
20
20
Settlement
Autonomous
Settlement
FIGURE 2. Map of Sendang Mulyo Settlements.
FIGURE 3. Settlement Characteristics in Sendang Mulyo Village: (a) Planned, (b) Unplanned, and (c) Autonomous settlement.
STATISTICAL ANALYSIS
Research Population and Respondent (Sampling)

The number of respondents was 100 residents (a 95% confidence interval).
Validity and Reliability Test

The process of validity and reliability test was performed by using Pearson’s correlation to determine the
variable reliability, which can be seen from the generated variable that has signification value of <0.05. Meanwhile,
Pearson correlation value for valid data is >0.3.
Subsequently, then reliability level was examined through Corrected item-Total Correlation with SPSS software
(Table 1 and 2).
040013-3
TABLE 1. Cronbach’s Alpha Variable X
Case Processing Summary Reliability Statistics

N % Cronbach’s
Cases Valid 100 100.0 Alpha Based
on
Excluded a 0 .0 Standardized
Total 100 100.0 Cronbach’s Alpha Items N of Items
aLeastwise deletion based on all variables in the procedure .741 .764 30
TABLE 2. Cronbach’s Alpha Variable Y
Case Processing Summary Reliability Statistics

N % Cronbach’s
Cases Valid 100 100.0 Alpha Based
on
Excluded a 0 .0 Standardized
Total 100 100.0 Cronbach’s Alpha Items N of Items
aLeastwise deletion based on all variables in the procedure .613 .625 40
Based on the table of Cronbach’s Alpha variable X and Y, it can be seen that Cronbach’s Alpha on variable X
was 0.764 and on variable Y was 0.625, therefore, variable X and variable Y were included in 0.60 to 0.80 category
with the reliable predicate.
Mean Factor Analysis

Mean Factor Variable Analysis of Utilization Characteristics of Social Facilities (Variable X)
The lowest mean factor in the variables of the characteristics of social facilities utilization was obtained by the
accessibility to settlement facilities with a value of 2.31. This value was included in the range of 1.5-2.5 with low
interpretation. It can be interpreted that the accessibility to settlement facilities significantly affects the utilization
characteristics of social facilities in the border areas of Semarang City.
Mean Factor Variable Analysis of Human Settlements (Variable Y)
The lowest mean factor in the variable of human settlements was obtained by an individual with a value of 2.46.
This value was included in the range of 1.5-2.5 with low interpretation. It can be interpreted that individual
significantly affects the utilization characteristics of social facilities in the border areas of Semarang City.
Mean Factor Correlation Analysis on Variable of Utilization Characteristics of Social Facilities and Human
Settlements
The average mean factor of variable Y was 2.82. It was determined from the median calculation of factors in the
utilization characteristics of social facilities variable. Subsequently, the value was converted into a semantic
differential element or opposing adjectives in the scale of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, that refers to agreement and disagreement
statement. The result was the value of 2.82 included in the range of 2.5-3.5, which can be classified as
neutral/ordinary.
Furthermore, the average value of mean factor of human settlements variable was 2.63. This value was also
classified as a neutral/ordinary category. Hence, the gap between the variables of the utilization characteristics of
social facilities and the human settlements was 0.19. The respondents’ response to the utilization characteristics of
social facilities variable was less than 0.19 toward human settlements variable.
040013-4
Factor Analysis
In the factor analysis, not all variables are involved in the analysis process since merely valid variables that are
included in the process. To determine whether the collection of factors is significant to be included in the analysis,
KMO and Barlett’s Tests were performed. In case the KMO value is >0.5, it can be assumed that the factors are
significant (Table 3 and 4).
TABLE 3. KMO and Bartlett’s Test Variable X in the Initial Step
KMO and Bartlett’s Test
Kaiser-Meyer-Olkin Measure of Sampling .622
Adequacy
Barlett’s Test of Approx Chi-Square 1.317E3
Sphericity Df 435
Sig. .000
TABLE 4. KMO and Bartlett’s Test Variable Y in Initial Step

Adequacy
Sphericity df 703
Sig. .000
Based on the factor analysis, there were some variables that obtained MSA of <0.5. There were variables X of
X2.1 (0.381a), X5.5 (0.392a), and X3.11 (0.493a). While for variable Y were Y3.8 (0.445a) and Y3.9 (0.492a). In
accordance with the determination of MSA value of <0.5, thus, one factor with the smallest value was eliminated.
The eliminated variables were X2.1 with MSA value of 0.381 and Y3.9 with MSA value of 0.445a.
After the elimination of variables with MSA value of <0.5, KMO value by the end of the analysis can be
determined, which were 0.665 for variable X and 0.643 for variable Y (Table 5 and 6).
TABLE 5. The Final Output of KMO Value and Barlett’s Test of Variable X
Adequacy
Sphericity Df 378
Sig. .000
TABLE 6. The Final Output of KMO Value and Barlett’s Test of Variable Y
Adequacy
Sphericity Df 636
Sig. .000
After identifying the correlation value and KMO value, the next step was to assess the factor components that
were formed. Based on the factor analysis, there were 28 components of factor X and 37 components of factor Y.
Furthermore, the factor components with significant effect were determined as components with an eigenvalue of
>1, hence, components with eigenvalue of >1 would be included. Finally, there would be only 8 (eight) factor X and
11 factor Y that obtained the eigenvalue of >1.
040013-5
Factor X
Factor 1. Accessibility to market facilities (shopping complex, stall) (X3.1) with a loading factor of 0.793.
Accessibility to college/academy (X3.6) with a loading factor of 0.611. Accessibility to government facilities
(citizen association, neighborhood association, village, sub-district) (X3.7) with a loading factor of 0.733.
Accessibility to public health center and maternity care facilities (X3.11) with a loading factor of 0.622.
Accessibility to the hospital (X3.12) with a loading factor of 0.538.
Factor 2. Accessibility to kindergarten education facilities (X3.2) with a loading factor of 0.444. Accessibility
to elementary school education facilities with a loading factor of 0.768. Accessibility to Junior High School
education facilities (X3.4) with a loading factor of 0.832.
Factor 3. Accessibility of road infrastructure (highway, street) (X1.1) with a loading factor of 0.712.
Accessibility to water network infrastructure (X1.2) with a loading factor of 0.633. Accessibility to water channel
infrastructure (X1.3) with a loading factor of 0.684.
Factor 4. Electricity network services (X1.7) with a loading factor of 0.704. Telecommunication network
services (X1.8) with a loading factor of 0.754.
Factor 5. Waste management system services (X1.4) with a loading factor of 0.431. Transportation network
services (X1.10) with the loading of 0.606. Accessibility to security facilities (police office) (X3.10) with a loading
factor of 0.630. Homogeneous topography (X4.1) with a loading factor of 0.821.
Factor 6. Accessibility to open space (X3.9) with a loading factor of 0.787. Homogeneous land in fertility,
productivity, and cost of transport (X5.2) with a loading factor of 0.344.
Factor 7. Homogeneous economic life and does not allow for primary production (X4.2) with a loading factor of
0.602. Systems in an isolated condition (X5.1) with a loading factor of 0.388. There are a large number of producers
who want to maximize the benefits and a large number of the land statue who intend to maximize the rental fee
(X5.4) with a loading factor of 0.759.
Factor 8. General lighting service (X1.5) with a loading factor of 0.846. Fire engine infrastructure service (X1.6)
with a loading factor of 0.395. Services of sewerage and drainage systems (X1.9) with a loading factor of 0.386.
Factor Y
Factor 1. Socio-Culture (Y2.3) with a loading factor of 0.697. Law and administration in the neighborhood
(Y2.7) with a loading factor of 0.481. Distributed by water channel system (Y4.3) with a loading factor of 0.779.
Distributed waste management network (Y4.4) with a loading factor of 0.810. Distributed sewerage and drainage
(Y4.9) with a loading factor of 0.817.
Factor 2. Health and welfare conditions (Y2.6) with a loading factor of 0.617. Distributed road network
(highway, street) (Y4.1) with a loading factor of 0.751. Distributed water channel (Y4.2) with a loading factor of
0.561. Distributed electricity network (Y4.7) with a loading factor of 0.809. Distributed telecommunication network
(Y4.8) with a loading factor of 0.603.
Factor 3. The relationship between social interaction and others in the neighborhood (Y1.3) with a loading
factor of 0.681. Moral values in the neighborhood (Y1.4) with a loading factor of 0.571.
Factor 4. The condition of settlements spatial enclosure (Y1.1) with a loading factor of 0.679. Sensation and
perception (Y1.2) with a loading factor of 0.643. Social stratification (Y2.2) with a loading factor of 0,749. Social
education (Y2.5) with a loading factor of 0.536.
Factor 5. Social economic development (Y2.4) with a loading factor of 0.741. Land use (Y5.3) with a loading
factor of 0.660.
Statistical Analysis Results

After performing statistical tests on the factor analysis, factors that formed the utilization characteristics of social
facilities in the border areas of Semarang City were determined. In overall, there were 16 factors in the utilization
characteristics of social facilities, which consisted of 8 (eight) variable X and 5 (five) variable Y.
Variable X comprised of: Factor 1 (18.395%), factor 2 (13.045%), factor 3 (10.498%), factor 4 (7.783%), factor
5 (5.142%), factor 6 (4.842%), factor 7 (4.303%), factor 8 (3.910%). These factors of the utilization characteristic of
social facilities had a significance value of 67.918%, while the other 32.082% was influenced by other factors
outside the research model.
040013-6
Furthermore, the factors of variable Y comprised of: Factor 1 (15.389%), factor 2 (12.626%), factor 3 (6.235%),
factor 4 (4.379%), and factor 5 (3.095%). These factors of human settlements in the utilization characteristics of
social facilities had a significance value of 73.869%, while the other 26.131% was influenced by other factors
outside this research model.

By using statistical test, the utilization characteristics of social facilities in the border areas of Semarang City
were categorized based on two dominant aspects as follows:
Physical aspects
Based on physical aspects point of view, the characteristics consisted of several factors as follows:
Factor 1. Accessibility to trading facilities, college, government facilities, public health center, and maternity
care facilities.
Factor 2. Accessibility to education facilities.
Factor 3. Accessibility to water channel infrastructure.
Factor 4. Electricity network services.
Factor 5. Waste management system services.
Factor 6. Accessibility to security facilities.
Factor 7. Homogeneous topography.
Factor 8. Accessibility to open space.
Factor 9. Homogeneous economic life and the absence of primary production.
Factor 10. General lighting service Fire engine infrastructure service Services of sewerage and drainage
systems.
Non Physical Aspects

Based on non-physical aspects point of view, the characteristics consisted of several factors as follows:
Factor1. Socio-culture, law and administration in the neighborhood.
Factor2. Health and welfare conditions.
Factor3. The relationship between social interaction and others in the moral values in the neighborhood.
Factor4. The condition of settlements spatial enclosure.
Factor5. Social economic development.
CONCLUSIONS
Based on the analysis, the results can be summarized as follows:
1. Characteristics of the utilization of social facilities in the border areas of Semarang city are affected by the
physical aspects such as accessibility, electricity network services, waste management system services,
homogeneous topography, homogeneous economic life, general lighting service, fire engine infrastructure service,
sewerage system, and drainage systems. Meanwhile, non-physical aspects such as socio-culture, law and
administration in the neighborhood, health and welfare conditions, and the relationship between social interaction
and others in the moral values in the neighborhood, the condition of settlements spatial enclosure, and social
economic development, also have a significant contribution.
2. There is a close relationship between the physical layout of an environment and human behavior. Hence,
several groups were formed in accordance with their diverse behaviors in utilizing social facilities among people
who live in the border areas. This condition leads to social inequality.
040013-7
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors would like to acknowledge the Institute for Research and Community Service of Universitas
Diponegoro for the funding support of the research project. The authors also thank the community and the staffs of
Sendang Mulyo Village that provided the data.
REFERENCES
1. B. Setioko and O. Deasy (2015). "Shaping Factors of Urban Fringe Characteristics with Case Study Semarang
City- Indonesia." (AENSI Publisher).
2. D. H.Asikin, P. Handajani, P. Rinawati, Pamungkas, T. Sigmawan, Razziati, A Haru. (2013). Identifikasi
Konsep Arsitektur Hijau di Permukiman DAS Brantas Kelurahan Penanggungan Malang (Identification of the
concept of Green Architecture in Settlement DAS Brantas Village Penanggungan Malang). Jurnal RUASVol 1.
3. S. Soetomo. (2013). Urbanisasi dan Morfologi, Proses Perkembangan Peradaban dan Wadah Ruangnya
Menuju Ruang Yang Manusiawi. (Urbanization and morphology, Process Development of Civilization and Its
space Containers Into Space Humane). Yogyakarta: Graha Ilmu.
4. A. Hamdi. (2014). Sebaran Lokasi SMP Negeri Kaitannya dengan Aksesibilitas Mendapatkan Pendidikan di
Kecamatan Ciputat Timur, Kota Tangerang Selatan, Provinsi Banten. (Distribution Locations Junior High
School in Relation to accessibility getting education in the district of East Ciputat, South Tangerang City,
Banten Province). Jakarta: Fakultas Ilmu Tarbiyah dan Keguruan Universitas Islam Negeri (UIN) Syarif
Hidayatullah.
5. P. Lahagina, J. J. Geovani, R. J. Poluan, Mononimbar, Windy. (2015). Kajian Struktur Ruang Kota Tomohon
(Study of Urban Space Structures in Tomohon). Jurnal Perencanaan Wilayah dan Kota, 1, 46.
6. A. Rapoport. (1969). House, Form, and Culture. New Jersey: Prentice Hall Inc, Englewood Clift.
7. A. Madanipour. (1996). Design of Urban Space-An Inquiry into a Socio-Spatial Process. England: John Willey
& Sons.
040013-8
Discrete event simulation model for external yard choice of import container terminal
in a port buffer area
Ferry Rusgiyarto, Ade Sjafruddin, Russ Bona Frazila, and Suprayogi

Discrete Event Simulation Model for External Yard Choice
of Import Container Terminal in a Port Buffer Area
Ferry Rusgiyarto1, a), Ade Sjafruddin2, b), Russ Bona Frazila3, c) and Suprayogi4, d)
1, 2, 3
Civil Engineering Post Graduate Department, Civil Engineering and Environment Faculty, Bandung Institute of
Technology, Indonesia.
4
Industrial Engineering Department, Industrial Engineering Faculty, Bandung Institute of Technology, Indonesia.
a)
Corresponding author: ferry_rus@yahoo.com
b)
ades@si.itb.ac.id
c)
frazila@si.itb.ac.id
d)
yogi@mail.ti.itb.ac.id.
Abstract. Increasing container traffic and land acquisition problem for terminal expansion leads to usage of external yard
in a port buffer area. This condition influenced the terminal performance because a road which connects the terminal and
the external yard was also used by non-container traffic. Location choice problem considered to solve this condition, but
the previous research has not taken account a stochastic condition of container arrival rate and service time yet. Bi-level
programming framework was used to find optimum location configuration. In the lower-level, there was a problem to
construct the equation, which correlated the terminal operation and the road due to different time cycle equilibrium.
Container moves from the quay to a terminal gate in a daily unit of time, meanwhile, it moves from the terminal gate to
the external yard through the road in a minute unit of time. If the equation formulated in hourly unit equilibrium, it
cannot catch up the container movement characteristics in the terminal. Meanwhile, if the equation formulated in daily
unit equilibrium, it cannot catch up the road traffic movement characteristics in the road. This problem can be addressed
using simulation model. Discrete Event Simulation Model was used to simulate import container flow processes in the
container terminal and external yard. Optimum location configuration in the upper-level was the combinatorial problem,
which was solved by Full Enumeration approach. The objective function of the external yard location model was to
minimize user transport cost (or time) and to maximize operator benefit. Numerical experiment was run for the scenario
assumption of two container handling ways, three external yards, and thirty-day simulation periods. Jakarta International
Container Terminal (JICT) container characteristics data was referred for the simulation. Based on five runs which were
5, 10, 15, 20, and 30 repetitions, operation one of three available external yards (external yard – 3) was the optimum
result. Apparently, the model confirmed the hypothesis that there was an optimum configuration of the external yard.
Nevertheless, the model needs detail elaboration related to the objective function and the optimization constraint. It
requires detail validation, in term of service time value, distribution pattern, and arrival rate in each unit server modeled
in the next step of the research. The model gave unique and relatively consistent value of each run. It was indicated that
the method has a chance to solve the research problem.
INTRODUCTION
Background
The Container terminal is a part of a logistic supply chain where transportation mode transfer was taken place.
Increasing container traffic and land acquisition problem for terminal expansion leads to usage of external yard in a
port buffer area. This condition influenced the terminal performance because a road which connects the terminal and
the external yard was also used by non-container traffic. Container reposition conducted based on Yard Occupancy
Ratio (YOR) or storage maximum time criteria.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040014-1–040014-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985510
040014-1
Based on container terminal operator interview result, external yard location choice consideration for FCL/LCL
container is determined by terminal operator and user (consignee), meanwhile, for empty container storage is
determined by sea-liner. Container arrival rate at server and service time in container terminal found stochastically.
Terminal operator distributes container to external yard proportionally to each external yard capacity. The literature
studies have not found a method to choose external yard location in a port buffer area which uses the public road.
There was a problem to construct the equation, which correlated terminal operation and the road due to different
time cycle equilibrium. Container moves from the quay to a terminal gate in a daily unit of time, meanwhile, it
moves from the terminal gate to the external yard through the road in a minute unit of time. If the equation
formulated in hourly unit equilibrium, it cannot catch up the container movement characteristics in a terminal.
Meanwhile, if the equation formulated in daily unit equilibrium, it cannot catch up the road traffic movement
characteristics in the road. This problem can be addressed using simulation model. Discrete Event Simulation model
was used to handle this problem.
Research Objective
The objective of this research was to obtain discrete event simulation model which was used to determine
optimum location of an external yard in the port buffer area. The model could be able to handle stochastic condition
of container arrival rate and service time. The model could also be used to handle differences of equilibrium time
cycle in the terminal (in daily time cycle) and the road (in hourly time cycle).
Research Scope
This study was conducted in a container terminal at buffer port area, where external yard and terminal were
connected by the public road. Jakarta International Container Terminal characteristic data was collected and referred
to construct the discrete event simulation model concept. Container service approach in the model was queueing
model that simulated loading/unloading at a quay, horizontal transfer at a terminal, road and external yard, storage at
terminal and external yard and also custom and gate check. This paper is a part of author research of Container
Terminal System and Access Road Optimization.
PREVIOUS RESEARCH
Container terminal layout in worldwide was varied, nevertheless, based on Héctor J. Carlo et al. [1], five main
area was identified and sketched in FIGURE 1. The berth and quay areas were considered seaside, while the storage
yard and gate areas were considered land side. The transport area was at the intersection of the seaside and landside
areas.
(source : [1])
FIGURE 1. Container Terminal Main Area
040014-2
Inland Container Depot Location was studied by Yuanquan [2], which applied a discrete choice model to
describe user competition in service location choice. Oper Baron studied the optimal location of the determined
facility for stochastic demand and congestion condition [3]. Stochastic Capacity and Facility Location Problem
(SCFLP) was used, where, the user would travel to the nearest facility to get services. The objective of the study was
the number, location, and facility capacity determination. The previous study assumed terminal as one node/point, so
it was not considered terminal internal condition yet, related to container reposition criteria to the external yards,
such as maximum storage limitation time in the yard or YOR value.
Research that was developed by Huynh [4] and Moini [5], tried to optimized container terminal sub-system in
yard area. Meanwhile, research that was developed by Guan [6] tried to model terminal gate queueing to obtain
evaluation method of gate policy effect to gate operation cost. The research that they were conducted has not
considered access road performance yet. Dougherty [7] tried to calculate gate operational policy effect to road
network surrounding container terminal, but has not considered the policy effect to container terminal performance
yet. Those research used simulation approach as the analysis method. The summary of related previous research is
shown in TABLE 1.
TABLE 1. Previous Research

Description
No. Researcher
Area Coverage Method Objective Location
Discrete Choice
Inland Container
Based Facility Sea-Land Intermodal
1. Yuanquan Xu [2] Regional Network Depots Location
Location Model - Terminal at Chicago
Choice
Tabu Algorithm
Yard Layout Norflok International
2. Liu [8] Container Terminal Simulation
Optimization Terminal, Port of Virginia
Heuristic Ad-hoc Truck Turn Times Barbour’s Cut Terminal,
3. Huynh [4] Container Terminal
and Simulation Reduction Port of Houston, Texas
Alleviation truck
Container Terminal Multi-server Port of New York (New
4. Guan [6] queueing at terminal
Gate Queueing Model Jersey)
gate
Analytic and Container Dwell Time one of US container
5. Moini [5] Container Terminal
Simulation Reduction terminal
Gate policy influence Port of Newark/Elizabeth
Access Road
6. Dougherty [7] Simulation test for access road (New York and New
Network
network Jersey)
The previous method which used mathematical programming could not be applied due to integration of internal
terminal process, road, and external yard. Time cycle difference of internal terminal (in daily time unit) and road
access (in hourly time unit) caused a single equation formula of equilibrium difficult to construct. The previous
method which developed equilibrium equation in optimization could not be applied in this research. The previous
research coverage area did not cover internal terminal and public road so that the method could not answer this
research objective yet related to terminal and road performance parameters.
Generally, Stochastic Facility Model formulation with queueing interaction approach would give 2N combination
of facility location existance. This number of combination made algorithm optimization difficult to integrate [9].
Discrete Event Simulation based on multiserver queueing model as in Moini [5] with modified objective
function as in Xu [2] proposed to handle this research. Modification of objective function in Xu was conducted by
considering the stochastic condition of container arrival rate and service time in servers (terminal, road, external
yard). This approach could also handle the cycle time unit differences in terminal and road. Bi-level Programming
was applied to handle decision maker conflict between terminal operator and container user (consignee). A terminal
operator would maximize the revenue and consignee would minimize the transport cost (or time).
DISCRETE EVENT SIMULATION MODEL CONSTRUCTION

The model construction based on queueing theory which has two variables i.e. arrival rate and service time.
Entity comes to a server and will be serve if the server available as long as service time. If the entity come and
server still serve another entity, the entity will wait in the queue line. Arrival rate (O) and service time (P) can be a
constant number or probabilistic. Illustration of the queueing system can be seen in FIGURE 2.
040014-3
FIGURE 2. Queueing System
The model formulation for the research consists of two levels decision making, i.e. lower-level and upper-level.
Lower-level described container user decision-making which chose the server location prepared by terminal operator
with time minimization. Meanwhile, upper-level described container operator decision-making which chose an
external yard optimum location with revenue maximization. Optimization objective in the upper-level (OPT) would
calculate the maximum income and operation & maintenance cost difference.
The Lower-level model was simulated container flow process from the quay to the Industrial location through
the external yard (or not) and used the public road. Process flow represented service units in a queueing system
approach (arrival rate and service time variables). The Stochastic condition was applied to represent arrival rate and
service time distribution pattern.
Model test was conducted for a concept model with three external yard alternative locations are shown in
FIGURE 3.
ACCESS ROAD INDUSTRY
QUAY
GATE
YARD
EXTERNAL YARD
FIGURE 3. Model Concept for Import Container Flow Process
The upper model was constructed for all external yard available locations outside the terminal area, and then
simulated by the open and close gate to represent the external yard existence. Income and operation & maintenance
cost difference were calculated for all possible location combination. Optimum condition was a location
combination that gave highest income and operation & maintenance cost difference.
040014-4
OBJECTIVE FUNCTION OF LOCATION CHOICE
In container transportation, demand was derived from goods international trade, which was owned and controlled
by shippers i.e. importer and exporter. Shipper was final user of intermodal container transportation, so that, to study
the relationship between demand and choice location, it was preferable to consider shipper behavior or shipper
preference in transportation service choice [2]. Choice consideration at simulation model in lower-level was
categorized into two fields:
x Custom check type choice was a mandatory option based on container proportion data record which shown
portion of each custom checking lane, i.e. priority user and nonpriority user lanes.
x External yard location for container reposition was assumed to follow minimum service time which was
represented by a minimum number of container queueing in road connected terminal and each external yard.
The Objective function of the lower-level was the external yard location choice process which was done by
shippers with minimizing transportation user cost, which was represented by minimum queue length in the road.
Assume that nL1 is a number of the queue in road access to the external yard (1), then the mechanism to choose the
external yard is shown in equation (1)

p find min nL(1) , nL( 2) , nL(3) ,..., nL( k )
(1)
Objective function formulation in the upper-level for external yard location choice in this research was addressed
to maximize a difference between Revenue (Ry) and Operation & maintenance cost (OMy) of external yard
Q i , [ u y a is container i throughput in the external yard (a) for y external yard
combination. By denoting that a Qa
combination with ξQa distribution pattern data. Meanwhile QCT , [ CTa u y a , is container i throughput in the terminal
i
for y external yard combination with ξQCTa distribution pattern data. Assume that I is container set and A is
external yard set and (OPT)y is total difference operator income, the objective function which was modified from Xu
[2] is maximization difference of revenue and operation & maintenance cost as shown in Equation (2),(3) and (4).
max(OPT ) y Ry OM y (2)
§ ·
¨ i
>
¨ (Qa , [ Qa ) u ya u (Ta , [Ta ) u ya u TrCa Fra
i i i
@ ¸
¸
max(OPT ) y ¦¦ ¨ CT QCT a CT>
¨ (Q i , [ ) u y u (T i , [ ) u y u TrC i Fr i
TCT a CT CT @
¸
¸
(3)
iI aA
¨ (Q i , [ ) u y (Q i , [ ) u ya ¸
¨ a Qa a
u CCra a Qa u CEqa ¸
© uAd uEd ¹
ya ^1 if external yard (a) is part of configuration set of y
0 otherwise (4)
constraint : Q ≥ 0; T ≥ 0; iI and aA

where:
OPTy = Difference of revenue and operation & maintenance cost scheme y combination of external
yard location
Ry = External yard and terminal revenue for scheme y
OMy = Terminal and external yard cost for scheme y

Qai , [ Qa = Throughput of container i in external yard (a) with throughput distribution ξQa
T a
i
, [ Ta = Service time of container i with pattern distribution ξTa in external yard (a)
TrC i
a
= Storage tariff per time unit of container i in external yard (a)
Fr a
i
= Handling tariff per container i in External Yard (a)
Q i
CT , [ QCT = Throughput of container i in terminal with throughput distribution ξQCT
T i
CT , [ TCT = Container service time i in container terminal with sevice time distribution ξTCT
040014-5
i
TrC CT = Container storage tariff per unit i per time unit in terminal
Fr i
CT
= Handling tariff per container i in terminal
Ada = External yard area (a)
CCra = Construction cost per area unit of external yard (a)
CEqa = equipment cost per unit of external yard (a)
uAd = area required per container
uEq = equipment required per container
Equation (3) is an objective function at the upper-level based on input from simulation output in a lower-level,
i.e. Q (container throughput), T (service time) and ξ (distribution output of related throughput and service time).
External yard location choice in the lower-level was minimizing user transportation cost which was represented by
minimum queue length in the road network. Decision variable in the lower-level was queue length, meanwhile in the
upper-level was open or close external yard. The Time horizon of upper-level objective function, as most of the
facility location model was one year. This research assumes that the upper-level analysis period in one year. So, the
variable input from simulation in the lower-level would be converted to one year value.
NUMERICAL EXPERIMENT OF THE MODEL
Lower-level
Model was tested by numerical data which was obtained from Jakarta International Container Terminal (JICT).
Based on JICT data from January 2012 to December 2012, it shown that average dwell time was 4.42 days. Based
on the same period data, the average time needed to unload container in quay was 10 minutes 16 seconds. This
container characteristic data is shown FIGURE 4. This data were used to refer model time setting adjustment in
lower-level.
The model was run for thirty days time period (43200 seconds, where assumed 1 minute equal to 1 second) with
the assumption of external yard 1, 2 and 3 available, gave 4.24 days average dwell time in Gate-1. The distribution
pattern of container arrival rate in Gate-2 tend to look like arrival rate distribution of container unloading data year
2012 but had a different mean value of 3.2 minutes.The distribution pattern is shown in FIGURE 5. This condition
probably caused by the congestion in the preceding unit of service such as custom check lane.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 4. (a) Unloading Ttime Distribution in Quay (b) Container Dwell Time Distribution
040014-6
(a) (b)
FIGURE 5. (a) Container Arrival Rate in Gate-2 (b) Container Dwell Time in Gate-1
Upper-level
The upper-level model was the determination of optimum location external yard configuration with the criteria
of maximization of revenue and operation & maintenance cost difference. Model concept assumed that the container
size was 20 feets which will be refined in the next step of the research. Assumptions which used to calculate the
optimum criteria are as follows:
x Container throughput and service time in terminal, gate and access road from lower-level simulation result
based on open or close configuration.
x Container handling tariff was Rp. 2.570.000,-/container (in terminal) and Rp. 3.845.000,-/container (in the
external yard) and container storage cost was 27.200,-/container/day in terminal and external yard.
x Land acquisition and construction cost of external yard (Rp. 1 billion,-/m2)
x Equipment provision and operation & maintenance cost of external yard (Rp. 0,9 billion,-/container/month)
Based on 5, 10, 15, 20 and 30 repetitions for each open or close external yard configuration, was calculated the
mean value of throughput and service time in the terminal, road and external yard. Repetition was run the model
with different initial seed for a random number. Several repetitions were done to check the consistency of the model
result. Based on the results, it could be concluded that the optimum scenario for the numerical experiment was the
operation of external yard 3 as a support for the terminal. The objective function needed detail elaboration because
the result tend to give an extreme condition i.e. only one external yard operation with minimum service time. The
summary of calculation criteria result is shown in TABLE 2.
CONCLUSION
The model confirmed the hypothesis of the research that there was an optimum configuration of the external
yard. Nevertheless, the model needed detail elaboration in associated to model objective function and model
optimization constraint. It was required detail validation, in term of service time value, distribution pattern and
arrival rate in each unit server which will be modeled in the next step of the research. The model gave unique and
relatively consistent result value of each run. It was indicated that the method has a chance to be used to solve the
research problem.
040014-7
TABLE 2. OPT Result Model of External Yard Configuration (Rp. x 1012)
External Yard Number of Repetition
Configuration
1 2 3 5 10 15 20 30
1 closed closed closed 2,3370 2,3461 2,3451 2,3437 2,3459
2 closed open closed 2,9253 2,9181 2,9199 2,9271 2,9191
3 open closed closed 2,8192 2,8242 2,8191 2,8209 2,8207
4 open open closed 2,8133 2,8279 2,8121 2,8235 2,8213
5 closed closed open 3,0390 3,0402 3,0400 3,0459 3,0417
6 closed open open 2,9116 2,9217 2,9220 2,9206 2,9237
7 open closed open 2,8276 2,8245 2,8149 2,8249 2,8221
8 open open open 2,8227 2,8161 2,8205 2,8221 2,8192
source : model result
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors would like to acknowledge Jakarta International Container Terminal (JICT) for the data support of
the research.
REFERENCES
1. J. C. Héctor, F. A. Iris, Vis, and K. J. Roodbergen, “Storage yard operations in container terminals: Literature
overview, trends, and research directions,” in European Journal of Operational Research 235, pp 412–430
(2014).
2. X. Yuanquan. “A Discrete Choice Based Facility Location Model for Inland Container Depots,” Ph.D. Thesis,
West Virginia University, (1999).
3. Baron, et al., “Facility Location with Stochastic Demand and Constraints on Waiting Time,” in Manufacturing
& Service Operations Management Vol. 10, No. 3 (2008).
4. N. Huynh. “Methodologies for reducing truck turn time at marine container terminals,” Ph.D. Thesis, Texas
University (2005).
5. N. Moini. “Modelling the Interrelationship between Vessel and Truck Traffic at Marine Container Terminals,”
Ph.D. Thesis, New Jersey University (2010).
6. C. Q. Guan. “Analysis of Marine Container Terminal Gate Congestion, Truck Waiting Cost, and System
Optimization,” Ph.D. Thesis, New Jersey Institute of Technology (2009).
7. P. S. Dougherty. “Evaluating the Impact of Gate Strategies on A Container Terminal’s Roadside Network
Using Microsimulation the Port Newark-Elizabeth Case Study,” MSc Thesis, New Jersey University (2010).
8. C. I. Liu, H. Jula, K. Vukadinovic, and P. Ioannou. “Automated Guided Vehicle System for Two Container
Yard Layouts,” in Transportation Research Part C 12 (2004).
9. Curent, Daskin, Schilling, “Discrete Network Location Models,” in Facility Location: Applications and
Theory. edited by Z. Drezner and H.W. Hamacher (Springer-Verlag, ISBN 3-540-42172-6) (2001).
040014-8
New optimization strategies of pavement maintenance: A case study for national road
network in Indonesia using integrated road management system
Hamdi, Sigit P. Hadiwardoyo, A. Gomes Correia, and Paulo Pereira

New Optimization Strategies of Pavement Maintenance: A
Case Study for National Road Network in Indonesia Using
Integrated Road Management System
Hamdi1,a), Sigit P. Hadiwardoyo1,b), A. Gomes Correia2,c) and Paulo Pereira2,d)
1
Department of Civil Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Indonesia, Depok 16242, Indonesia
2
Department of Civil Engineering, School of Engineering, University of Minho, Azurém 4800-058 Guimarães,
Portugal.
a)
corresponding author: hamdi_pmu@yahoo.com
b)
sigit@eng.ui.ac.id, c)agc@civil.uminho.pt, d)ppereira@civil.uminho.pt
Abstract. A road network requires timely maintenance to keep the road surface in good condition onward better services
to improve accessibility and mobility. Strategies and maintenance techniques must be chosen in order to maximize road
service level through cost-effective interventions. This approach requires an updated database, which the road network in
Indonesia is supported by a manual and visual survey, also using NAASRA profiler. Furthermore, in this paper, the
deterministic model of deterioration was used. This optimization model uses life cycle cost analysis (LCCA), applied in
an integrated manner, using IRI indicator, and allows determining the priority of treatment, type of treatment and its
relation to the cost. The purpose of this paper was focussed on the aspects of road maintenance management, i.e.,
maintenance optimization models for different levels of traffic and various initial of road distress conditions on the
national road network in Indonesia. The implementation of Integrated Road Management System (IRMS) can provide a
solution to the problem of cost constraints in the maintenance of the national road network. The results from this study
found that as the lowest as agency cost, it will affect the increasing of user cost. With the achievement of the target plan
scenario P1000 with initial value IRI 2, it was found that the routine management throughout the year and in early
reconstruction and periodic maintenance with a 30 mm thick overlay, will simultaneously provide a higher net benefit
value and has the lowest total cost of transportation.
INTRODUCTION
The road infrastructure contributes in facilitating the distribution of goods and services to improve the quality of
human life. A road network requires treatment in the form of maintenance to keep the road in good condition so that
it can serve as the provision of access and convenience. Road maintenance should always be planned to provide
maximum safety for road users with cost-effective. It is important for the person in charge of the road to use the
budget efficiently and effectively in maintaining roads in good condition during the services. The obstacle is
apparently often occurred to those who are responsible for the road when it must be decided on the level of damage
and the type of maintenance.
PURPOSE OF STUDY
The goal of optimization is set in order to minimize the sum of agency cost (AC) and road user cost (RUC) in
present value or to maximize the net benefit to people over the analysis period. The aim of this study was to propose
pavement maintenance management by means of optimization models of maintenance costs for different levels of
traffic volume. The proposed maintenance optimization strategy is refining the previous version of the IRMS. By
using this model, the optimization of maintenance costs and RUC costs can be performed on the optimal
maintenance strategy options, appropriately applied into various initial of road distress conditions. This paper
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040015-1–040015-9; doi: 10.1063/1.4985511
040015-1
presents a new approach to set initial IRI to provide the maximum level of services and results of saving on sum AC
and RUC.
LITERATURE REVIEW
In order to integrate the strategic plan and maintenance work of pavement, it requires a pavement management
system (PMS). According to [1], PMS is defined as a system that consists of a set of engineering tools for
performing pavement condition surveys and condition prediction and developing work plans with the objective of
optimizing spending. The main function of PMS is to increase efficiency in decision-making, and the scope of
management. PMS is a way to overcome the problem of how to get the maximum road conditions with minimum
cost [2]. Otherwise, the method of PMS has provided feedback to the consequences of decisions, and ensures the
consistency of decisions made by the organization at different levels [3]. PMS is designed to provide objective
information from existing data and analysis so that policy makers can give a decision in cost savings [4]. At this
time, the optimization techniques have been widely adopted for planning and programming of road maintenance,
such as integer linear programmed by [5]. Otherwise, [6] applied techniques of multi-objective decision aid tool to
obtain maintenance optimization model. HDM-4 model has used Net Present Value (NPV) for calculating a wide
range of appropriate options [7].[8] has used the IRMS for the management of the road network with the aim of
planning, programming, and budgeting to be more effective and efficient. IRMS is a part of system policy, which
has provided a way to managers that can make decisions faster, better, and sustainable [9].
METHODOLOGY
The IRMS is constituted by the following components: strategy analysis, work program analysis, and project
analysis. In this paper, the deterministic model of deterioration was used to forecast road condition during analysis
period based on the expected impact of each applied treatment technique, and without treatment on the road
condition. The output of the model is fully determined by the parameter values and the initial conditions. Therefore,
the older data IRI and traffic will be modelled on current year to the less one year. The main component of IRMS is
the methodology used to select the best option of maintenance and rehabilitation taken into account in the coming
planning period. The method applied in this IRMS is based on economic ranking by IRI as a present road condition
and indicative cost for maintenance and reconstruction, where the treatment cost is based on the treatment selected.
The economic ranking is determined by comparing the total cost of maintenance alternatives to the basic cost
alternative. The basic cost is a minimum standard and routine maintenance [10].
In this paper, the net benefit was computed to people, and it is based on simulation of roughness scenario on
difference level of traffic to the total cost transportation during project period in present value. The scenario analysis
in this research was divided into two simulating different levels of traffic, namely P1000 and P5000. Where P1000
is AADT from 0 t 1000 and P5000 are more than 1000 vehicles per day. This level is chosen to look at the
maintenance of optimal strategies in order to deliver net benefits in its high. Besides, the P1000 and P5000 are taken
as a form of innovation in providing better services in the long term and can save transportation costs. The selection
process for P1000 and P5000 is used by using three alternative scenarios as follows: Scenario I multi-objective
optimization with unconstraint budget, Scenario II multi-objective optimization between unconstraint and
constrained budgets AC, Scenario III multi-objective optimization with constrained budget scenarios. Analyses of
the budget in this scenario used the value of the discount rate of 12%. This optimization model uses LCCA, applied
in an integrated manner, and allows determining the priority of treatment, type of treatment and its relation to the
cost, the concept of LCCAs based on determining the best the lowest cost way to accomplish the maintenance
scenario. IRMS optimization strategies use the iterative procedure heuristically, and the combination of several
strategies to produce in accordance with the optimization capabilities specified a budget.
Type of Maintenance Operations

In this study, the road maintenance was based on 8 different types of maintenance operations, applied as
individual or combination of several types. Table 1 shows the types of operations and costs, which T0 is do nothing
and T1 to T3 are handling patching, crack sealing and asphalt concrete overlay 1 layer with thickness of 30 cm. This
type is used for routine maintenance. T4 to T7 are periodic maintenance using asphalt concrete thickness of 40 cm,
50 cm, 60 cm and 70 cm. T8 is reconstructed by using asphalt concrete with a thickness of 80 cm.
040015-2
TABLE 1. Type of Maintenance Operations.
Treatment Treatment
Maintenance Work Cost (IDR)^9 Maintenance Work Cost (IDR)^9
action action
Do Nothing T0 0 Overlay 50 mm T5 2.25
Drainage works for every year T1 0.2 Overlay 60 mm T6 2.27
Patching, Crack sealing,
T2 0.25 Overlay 70 mm T7 3
cracking
Overlay 30 mm T3 0.3 Overlay 80 mm T8 3.5
Overlay 40 mm T4 1.5
Data Sources
This paper uses data obtained from a database IRMS. The database has been made up on the results of a survey
of visual observation and with the aid of NAASRA. From the results of the survey, it is found that AADT of 12
types of vehicle and axle load calculated in millions ESA, has been classified into 5 groups of vehicles (motorcycle,
passenger car, medium trucks, large buses and heavy trucks). Motorcycle type was not included in the calculation of
the ESA.
In Table 2, it can be seen the separation between P1000 and P5000, the difference for P1000 is AADT 679 and
P5000 AADT 4930. The group of P1000 composition was dominated by motorcycle of 95% in compared to the
P5000 of only 55.52%, while the composition and the rate of traffic growth of each group varied. The rate growth of
such vehicles has been calculated for traffic prediction during 10 years. ESA calculations have been obtained for
P1000 subsequently determined by MESA 280.29x107, whereas the P5000 was determined by MESA 351.17x107.
TABLE 2. Composition and Annual Growth Rate of Traffic
Traffic class Vehicle type
Passenger Heavy
Motorcycle Medium truck Large Bus Total
Car truck
AADT 1000 13172 372 161 55 86 679
P100 (composition, %) 95 2.68 1.62 0.2 0.5 100
Annual Growth Rate 10.38 7.2 1.43 2.02 1.6
AADT 5000 6153 3172 1238 262 254 4930
P5000 (composition, %) 55.52 28.62 11.19 2.38 2.29 100
Annual Growth Rate 12.72 8.92 1.11 3.4 1.41
DEVELOPMENT OF MAINTENANCE OPERATION MODEL
The Proposed Maintenance Optimization Model

To develop optimization model, several parameters were required such as: length of the analysis period, budget
periods, objective function, and resource constraints for each funding period [11]. The modeling of optimization
considered two objectives, namely the minimization of AC and minimization of RUC over planning time span. The
AC constraint defined the costs for AC. Objectives function can be formulated by equation (1) and equation (2) as
follows:
‫ ܥܣ݊݅ܯ‬ൌ σ்௧ୀଵሺͳ ൅ ‫ݎ‬ሻିଵ σே ெ

௡ୀଵ σ௠ ‫ܥܣ‬௧௡௠ Ǥ ‫ݔ‬௧௡௠ (1)
where Min AC is minimum agency cost, T is total years of planning time span, t is in year t, r is the discount rate,
N is total segment, n is segment, M is total operational option and m is operational option and ‫ݔ‬௧௡௠ is equal zero if
not operation applied and equal to one if operational m to segment n in year t. The calculation of minimization RUC
did not include the cost of traffic motorcycle users.
040015-3
‫ ܥܷܴ݊݅ܯ‬ൌ σ்௧ୀଵሺͳ ൅ ‫ݎ‬ሻିଵ σே
௡ୀଵ ܴܷ‫ܥ‬௧௡ Ǥ (2)
where, Min RUC is minimum user cost, T is total years of planning time span, t is in year t, r is the discount rate,
N is total segment, n is segment. The constraint optimization model of road condition, function formulated by
equation (3)-(7), expressing the road condition in each road segment and year as a set of functions of initial road and
maintenance scenario used to the road segment. This function uses roughness as represent of road condition. The
warning level constraints defined the maximum of IRI level for the road condition is formulated by equation (3).
തതതത
‫ܫܴܫ‬௧௡ ൑ ‫ܫܴܫ‬ (3)
where ‫ܫܴܫ‬௧௡ is the road condition for segments n in year t and തതതത
‫ ܫܴܫ‬is warning level road condition for segment n.
The AC constraint equation (4) defined the costs for road agency cost functions involved types of operation to road
segment in year as the the the a function of the road condition in that segment and year. These costs are found by
multiplying agency cost for maintenance operations.
‫ܥܣ‬௧௡௠ ൌ ሺ݂௔ ሻ‫ݔ‬௧௡௠ ǡ ‫ܫܴܫ‬௧௡ (4)
whereሺ݂௔ ሻ is the AC function. The RUC constraint equation (5) defined as the costs for RUC functions involved
types of operation to road segment in year as a function of the vehicle operational cost in that segment and year.
ܴܷ‫ܥ‬௧௡ ൌ ሺ݂௨ ሻܸܱ‫ܥ‬௧௡ (5)
where ሺ݂௨ ሻ is the RUC function and ܸܱ‫ܥ‬௧௡ is the annual RUC charges for type of vehicle. The vehicle
operational cost for the annual year is formulated by equation (6).
௞మ
ܸܱ‫ܥ‬௧௡ ൌ ݇ଵ ൅ ൅ ݇ଷ Ǥ ܸ ଶ ൅ ݇ସ Ǥ ‫ ܫܴܫ‬൅ ݇ହ Ǥ ‫ܫܴܫ‬ଶ (6)
௏
where ݇ଵିହ is constant and V is speed of vehicle. The annual budget constraints equation (7) defined as the
maximum to be spent on budget on maintenance work in each year.
σ்௧ୀଵ σே
௡ ‫ܥܣ‬௧௡௠ Ǥ ‫ݔ‬௧௡௠ ൑ ‫ܤ‬௧ (7)
where ‫ܤ‬௧ is the budget for year t. The modelling of road condition function on IRMS which applied to evaluate
the roughness progression using equation (11) by [8] as follows:
‫ܫܴܫ‬ሺ௧ሻ ൌ ݁ ଴Ǥ଴ଶଷǤ௧ ൣ‫ܫܴܫ‬ሺ଴ሻ ൅ ʹ͸͵ሺͳ ൅ ܵܰ‫ܥ‬ሻିହ Ǥ ܰ‫ܧ‬ସሺ௧ሻ ൧ (8)
where IRIt is roughness in year t, e is exponential 2.278, ‫ܫܴܫ‬ሺ଴ሻ is roughness in year t, SNC is modified structural
number of pavement strength, ܰ‫ܧ‬ସሺ௧ሻ is the value of ESAL cumulative to year of t million (load damage power 4).
The relationship between modified structural number of pavement strength and deflection using the equation (9) by
[11].
ܵܰ‫ ܥ‬ൌ ͵Ǥʹ‫ݔ‬ሺ‫ି ܨܧܦ‬଴Ǥ଺ଷ ሻ (9)

where DEF is benkelman beam deflection (mm).
Performance Indicators
To prioritize highway pavement projects according to limited highway budgets, pavement distress rating was
made, in one form or another. Performance indicator for a road pavement is the term for technical characteristics
that indicate the condition of road. In this paper, the road condition was rated based on the roughness value that was
040015-4
classified into four categories. The pavement is stated in good condition if the IRI <= 4, fair 4 < IRI <= 8, poor 8 <
IRI <= 12, bad 12 < IRI [12].
Maintenance Optimization for Different Levels of Traffic

The simulation resulted the three scenarios using P1000 and P5000, AC, UC, Total Transport Cost, NPV and
IRI, the results were subsequently obtained, as shown in Table 3. Based on all the scenarios, scenarios I to P1000
has the higher agency cost of 1.67 billion IDR instead of II and III. The scenario III has the lowest user cost of 70.46
billion IDR instead of I and II, while the scenario II has the lowest value of total cost is 72.1 billion IDR instead of I
and III. The scenario I has the higher NVP value is 10.96 instead of scenario II and III, while the scenario I has the
lowest IRI is 3.1 instead of scenario II and III. As can be seen in Table 3 and Figure 1(a) scenario III is the lowest
agency cost, allowing saving of approximately 56.89% to scenario I. This is a good finding to show that the scenario
I is always avoided since it provided the implication of an increasing investments (agency cost) in order to
maintenance of road condition. On the other hand, the scenario II would increase 56.20% to scenario III, related
with the user cost is much higher when considering scenario III instead of scenario I and scenario II. The scenario II
is the lowest user cost scenario, allowing saving of approximately 2.65% to scenario I and 0.38% to scenario III.
Table 3 and Figure 1(b) for the all scenario on P5000 shows that scenario I has the higher value of agency cost
87.27 billion IDR in compared to scenario II and III. While, the scenario II has the lowest user cost 81.07 billion
IDR instead of scenario I and III, thus the scenario II has the lowest total cost 85.23 billion IDR instead of scenario I
and III. The scenario I has the higher NVP value is 10.96 instead of scenario II and III, while the scenario I has the
lowest IRI is 3.1 instead of scenario II and III. Scenario III is the lowest agency cost, allows saving 83.81% to
scenario I. Moreover, the scenario II an increase 78.37% to scenario III. This mean to reduce of total cost it is
necessary to allocate more in the maintenance of road condition. The scenario II is the lowest user cost, allowing
saving of approximately 5.60% to scenario III and 0.88% to scenario I. Similar with scenario P1000, on P5000 the
lowest total cost of transportation is the scenario II, instead of scenario I and III.
TABLE 3. Scenario Agency, User Cost, Total Transport Cost, NPV and IRI under P1000 and P5000
Agency Cost User Cost Total Transport Cost NVP IRI
No. Scenario
P1000 P5000 P1000 P5000 P1000 P5000 P1000 P5000 P1000 P5000
1 I 1,67 5,56 70,73 81,71 72.4 87.27 10,96 20,98 3.1 3,1
2 II 1,64 4,16 70,46 81,07 72.1 85.23 5,62 7,27 3.2 3,6
3 III 0,72 0,90 72.38 85,95 73.1 86.85 5,62 0 5.62 7,0
Figure 2(a) presents the value of annual IRI predictions for P1000. Simulation in scenario I, II and II have a final
value of IRI of 3.10, 3.20 and 5.30, respectively, which the lowest value is scenarios I and the scenario III has the
highest IRI value. This can be explained by Fig. 3(a) that the year 1st to year 5th on graphics, scenarios I, II and III
appear in positions coincide, where the costs budgeted by the agency is relatively the same. In the 6 th year budget
allocation for scenario I is greater than the scenario II and scenario III. Then in the 8th year and 9th year, scenario I
and II got a portion of a larger budget than the scenario III so that the value of IRI scenarios I and II be decreased. In
the 10th year scenario III got the biggest budget compared to scenarios I and II but the value of IRI scenario III still
does not decline, the final value of IRI is 5,30 which in this condition the road is in fair condition. The value of IRI
predictions for P5000 is shown by Fig. 2(b). In this figure the scenario I, II and III have a final value of 3.10, 3.60
7.00, respectively, which the lowest value is scenarios I, and scenario III has the highest IRI. This can be explained
by Fig. 3(b) that the 1st year to the 4th year the graph of scenario I, II and III in positions coincide. The agency is an
allocated budget by the same relative. In the 6th year, budgets allocation for the scenario I is slightly larger than the
scenario II. The scenario III budget is the same until the end of the planning. It seems that the IRI for scenario III is
increasing by the year-end planning. In the 9th year cost budgeted for scenario III is greater when compared to
scenario I and II, but it was not declined on to IRI value, with the final value of IRI is 7.00, meaning that roads in
fair condition.
040015-5
(a) (b)
FIGURE 1 (a) FIGURE 1 (b)
FIGURE 1. (a) Cost over the planning time of 10 years under P1000; (b) Cost over the planning time of 10 years under P5000.
(a) (b)

FIGURE 2 (a) Predicted IRI over planning time on P-1000; (b) Predicted IRI over planning time on P-5000.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 3 (a) Predicted A Cover planning time on P-1000; (b) Predicted A Cover planning time on P-5000.
Maintenance Optimization Model for various initial of IRI

To provide the maximum level of service and the results of saving on sum AC and RUC, two values AADT and
five initial values for IRI have been developed. In this model, scenario II multi-objective optimization between
unconstraint and constrained budgets agency cost is applied, based on the assumption that the scenario II on P1000
and P5000 have the lowest total cost of transportation, instead of scenario I and III. By using optimization model for
040015-6
various initial of IRI, the person in charge of road can decide how much IRI value is taken as a baseline to use the
budget efficiently and effectively in maintaining roads during those services.
The results of running the optimum operation of the IRMS for the maintenance on P1000 can be seen in Table 5
and Figure 4 (a). The initial value of IRI 2, the handling routine throughout the year, reconstruction of 80 mm
carried out in 2015, and T3 carried out in 2018 and 2020, while the T4, T5 and T6 carried out in 2020 - 2023. The
net benefit obtained value is 6.41. The initial value of IRI 4, the handling of routine throughout the year, T5 carried
out in 2015 and T6 carried out in 2016 - 2019. The net benefit obtained is 0.22. The initial value of IRI 6, routine
management throughout the year, T7 in 2015 and 2017, while T8 was carried out in 2015. The net benefit obtained
is 0.24. The initial value of IRI 8, handling routine maintenance throughout the year, T7 and T8 in 2015. The net
benefit obtained is 0.26. The initial value of IRI 12, handling routine throughout the year, T7 is performed in 2015.
The net benefit obtained is 0.36. Figure 4 (a) show if the initial value is used IRI 2,4, 6, 8 and 12 produces the final
IRI 3.1, 3.3, 3.3, 3.3 and 3.4, respectively. Based on all scenario above showed that initial IRI 2 produce the lowest
final IRI 3.1 and has higher net benefit 6.41 instead of initial IRI 4, 6, 8 and 12.
TABLE 5. Optimum Maintenance Option P1000 and P5000
Initial IRI No. of maintenance Net
Operation Option T (year)
applied Benefit
P1000 P5000 P1000 P5000 P1000 P5000 P1000 P5000
T1(2015-2025); T1(2015-2025);T2(2016,
T8(2015);T3(2018, 2017); T4(2019,2020);
2 18 22 6.41 0,17
2020; T4,T5(2021); T5(2019,2020,2022);
T6(2022,2023) T8(2017,2021,2022,2023
T1(2015-2025); T1(2015-2025);
4 16 14 T5(2015); T6(2016, T5(2016); 0.22 0.2
2017,2018,2019) T6(2017,2018)
T1(2015-2025);
6 14 12 T7(2015,2017); T1(2015-2025);T7(2016) 0.24 0.24
T8(2015)
T1(2015-2025); T1(2015-2025);
8 14 12 0.26 0.25
T7,T8(2015) T8(2015)
T1(2015-2025); T1(2015-2025);
12 12 12 0.36 0.39
T7(2015) T8(2015)
FIGURE. 4 (a) FIGURE. 4 (b)
FIGURE. 4 (a). Predicted roughness progression for optimal Maintenance option under P1000; (b) Predicted roughness
progression for optimal Maintenance option under P1000.
The results of running the optimum operation on P5000 can be seen in Tables 5 and Figure 4 (b). If the initial
value of IRI 2, the handling routine throughout the year, T2 performed in 2016 and 2017, T4 carried out in 2019 and
2020, while T5 is performed continuously in 2019 - 2022, T8 carried out in 2017, 2021 - 2023. The net benefits
obtained value is (the least of all scenario) 0.17 and the last final IRI 3.1. If the initial value of IRI 4, the handling of
routine throughout the year, T5 made in 2016 and T6 made in 2017 and 2018. The net benefits obtained value is
lowest is 0.22 and the last final IRI 3.4. If the initial value of IRI 6, routine management throughout the year, T7 in
040015-7
2016 and the last final IRI 3.5. If the initial value of IRI 8, routine management throughout the year, T8 carried out
in 2015 and the last final IRI 3.3. If the initial value of IRI 12, handling routine maintenance throughout the year, T8
carried out in 2015. The net benefit obtained value is the highest of 0.39 and the last final IRI 3.5. The net benefit is
the maximum net benefit over analysis period of the optimum maintenance option and defined as allowing saving on
sum agency cost and road user cost. The value of progressive IRI in P5000 with several scenarios show that the
initial IRI 2 has the lowest final IRI 3.1, instead of initial IRI, 4,6,8 and 12. This indicates that at the end of the
scenario, roads in good condition. From the comparison between the P1000 and P5000 shows that on P1000 and
P5000 with initial IRI 2 has the similar lowest final IRI 3.1 and on P1000 with initial IRI 2 has higher net benefits
6.41 compared to other scenarios.
CONCLUSIONS
On the P1000 and P5000, it is found that scenario III has the lowest AC that will affect the increase of RUC. The
finding show that the scenario I is always avoided since it provides the implication of an increasing investments
(AC) in order to maintenance of road condition. Three funding scenarios in this paper were examined, it found that
the scenario II has the lowest total cost of transportation in compared to scenario I and III. The scenario III on P1000
with constant budget pattern until the 5th year, will provide the condition of roads in good condition. However, in
the 6th year, allocation will give higher costs in order to maintain the roads in good condition. In scenario III where
the budget on P5000 is given constantly until 8th year, the road conditions will be in good condition. However, if in
the year 9th budgeted cost is larger, it will not decline the IRI value. With the achievement of the target plan
scenario P1000 with initial value IRI 2, it is found that the routine management throughout the year and in early
reconstruction and periodic maintenance with a 30 mm thick overlay will provide a higher net benefit value and has
the lowest total cost of transportation among all scenarios. In the near future, we propose the significance of
pavement management system to apply the other performance indicators and maximization of residual value of
pavement.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The author would like to express gratitude to Lembaga Pengelola Dana Pendidikan (LPDP) for the financial
support provided to this thesis through the grant financed by The Ministry of Finance of Republic of Indonesia.
REFERENCES
[1]. A.A. Elhadidy, E. E, Elbeltagi, M. A. Ammar., Optimum analysis of pavement maintenance using multi-
objective genetic algorithms, 2014. Housing and Building National Research Center, HBRC Journal.
[2]. J.W.Jian, Yong. J.K.F, Zhi, Multi-objective optimization for pavement maintenance and rehabilitation
strategies Int. Conf. Transp. Eng., 4 (2009), pp. 2919–2924.
[3]. S.W.Hudson, W.R. Hudson, and R.F. Carmichael, 1992. “Minimum Requirements for Standard Pavement
Management Systems”. In Pavement Management Implementation, eds F.B. Holt & W.L., Gramling, STP
1121, American Society for Testing and Material, Philadelphia, PA, pp 19-31.
[4]. AASHTO,1990. “AASHTO Guidelines for Pavement Management Systems” American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials, Washington, D.C., July 1990.
[5]. A. Ferreira, A. Antunes, L. Picado Santos, 2002. Probabilistic Segment linked Pavement Management
Optimization Model. Journal of Transportation Engineering. Vol 128, No.6, pp.568-577.
[6]. S. Meneses and A. Ferreira, 2012. New optimization model for road network maintenance management.
Procedia - Social and Behavioral Sciences 54 (2012) 956 – 965.
[7]. Archondo, R. Callao, 2008. Applying the HDM-4 Model to Strategic Planning of Road Works. Transport
Paper Series, TP-20, The World Bank Group, Washington D.C.
[8]. Directorate General of Highways. (2006). Integrated Road Management System.
[9]. A. Rafi, (1998). Integrated Road Management Systems (IRMS).4th International Conference on Managing
Pavement.
[10]. H.R.Kerali, R.Robinson, and W.D.O Paterson., (1998) The Role of New HDM-4 in Road Management.Fourth
International Conference on Managing Pavements, Durban, May 1998. South Africa: University of Pretoria.
[11]. T. Watanatada, and others, (1987). The highway design and maintenance standards model Volume 1:
040015-8
description of the HDM-III model. The Highway Design and Maintenance Standards Series. Baltimore: Johns
Hopkins for the World Bank.
[12]. S. P. Hamdi, Hadiwardoyo, A.G. Correia and P. Pereira, “Road Deterioration Analysis for the National Roads
of Indonesia”, in Proc. of the 14th International Conference on QIR, 2015, pp. 101-110. ISSN 1411-1284.
040015-9
Morphology analysis in middle-downstream area of Progo River due to the debris flow
Ahmad Azmi Fitriadin, Jaza’ul Ikhsan, and Puji Harsanto


!"
#$
%"&

'%(&&

!'%(&

) $
!

"*+
$
$

,

&-

!

$

,
&./
!!($

!
!""
+ (

&- !"" + ,$$
(
&(!

! $""
"

+ &

! $

,$$

($

,
&"
*+
"$$

+

" "

", &0

$ $
(((

,!!/
(12333333 $
"*+ 3 4&$

""
"
+ (
+ (
5,
$
"*+ &6
+

,

!!($+! +
/ +
"
&7 +

$
!!(,
"
! &

"
$

!!(
!

" !! (&
!"#$!"
8
8 ! $

+ +
,

+ 9"(

&0

$
!

$: !
$8
8 !, (+
$"
( $ 433
333; <&$

!
$8
8 !)
:
3 3

"
!
$

!
12 ;<&" 8
8 ! !

!(
(&- !(

" ! ,
!

$
+

/" !(
$,&- ($+ !
+
$&+

$,
"$
"+ +/ ,

,
&
= $,
$
+ !
3 3,!!/
( 43

!
+
+ ,"" $8
8 ! ;<&) $
+ $$
(
!
,

"*+ &- "+
1
"
&

,
8
6

!!/
(>&1&31:
&-

$"*+ ,"" $
8
8 ! 0 "*+ ?*+ !*+ 0 "*+ 0
"*+
*+
*+ 0" "*+ &
- !"" "*+

$, $ @
(+ !
(

5,
&8 +
$$

+

"
"

", ,

(
$9"(
!
(

+ " (& , +

( $
$

, $ (
+ $

& - $
+
"

+ " " *+ "
(
@ &
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040016-1–040016-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985512
040016-1
%$&
' " '%% ! !
'"!
-

!
$
$+ $,+
(
!
&6
(

5 !

!
(
$,$,
+ &!
$

($
$, ! ,
" !

!

"
(!!"

&
" !
"+ $

!

"
("" & "

+
$
&
(#% ) -
$
;><
% ' *

6

$$
$
!
!
"

$$
$ $
,
(
?!;4<-!;:<&-
,

!

"

$
$ &- $
"

$

""
&-
!
!
$
"($$,
$
$,+
(;2<&

." 5 $
,
!

!
&- "
!
@
/! #
A
43 ⎡ τ ⎤
= 3&34 γ !
⎢ ⎥
⎛γ ⎞ ⎣ ( γ − γ ) 43 ⎦
⎜
⎜ − ⎟⎟
⎝γ ⎠ B
,

!
C

, "
$,
C

, "
$!
!

+ " +
(D
+
"#
!
$,43E(, "
$

!
&

,
$,

$
+ &$

$
+
"

, $, ( !
;1<&
%!&""+"(,
-
( ,"F
! ("G42$
,

=,
("6

&-
+ $
,

(
!"(!

$
(" "*+

$,$8
8 !&-

""
"
!
+ &-

$

"

! $ $
5! &

( $
, .5*6 +&>& &3 ,
! $ 5 (
$
!"(("

&- (!
(

$,

$ +
$,+
(
&- ! $

(,
"
!$

"( "
,
$
$"*+ &-

"

"
$,
$,$
,
"
"
$
"
&
040016-2
$
) 5 "
(
("!(

!"!(

$$

"*+ &("!
$)
3 3
)
3 4,

(

!
$ "
&
,
$ "

+ "
! ,

!

(

.5*6&6
"

(,

!
$
"*+

$? ""0" &
-
,
$
+ "
"& "&,

!

"! &
B
B B
(#% - 0(
.5*6 "#B("!
B
"

+ "B
(

$$

"*+ &
8
,! $
" +
!&

8"" $$

!

$,
!
+
(,
+

"*+
? ""0" 0
0" 60" &-
, !
$

(
"
&0
"
8" $$
$"
*+ ,
"
, 3&3>4
3&343&

!

,

!

"! &6 $

, $

$

"
,
$

+
&-
$
+ $$
! , ""

!+ (
$- + $
!

,

(!"

+ $

.5*6
"

& "& ,

!
$"*+

$

+
&
040016-3
(#% .6
!
"
&
%'#+!'
'$#''"
- ($!"("
,! $
"

$"
*+ &6
(,+
$!

"&B&6
,=,
("
6

7"! H ,
+ " ! $ 3&332& 6
, 7"! H
0

H,
! $3&33 1&6
,0
H
6!
,
! $3&33 4&

,
6
I,6!

6H,
+ " ! $3&33 & "&>
,
!"
+ +
"

$
3 3
3 4&
BB B
B B
(#% /*+ +
$"*+ "

B6

B6
B6
B6
I&
0
"

+ +
$6
! (

,
$
?,"
!!/
( 33A( $ "
,

!
$7"!H
!!/
(:&:A( $ ""
& 6
"
$>&1A(

040016-4
,
$7"!H, ""
$1&A(

!
$0
H&
6
"

,
$0
H""

!
$6!

, 4&1A( >&1A( !
+ (&6
I "
$ A( 4
$6!

,
, ""
$2&A( &
-
$
($

!
" (".5*6
." 5
$
,>2&:>> A($

5,
$
"*+ & "&4,

+ $

$ ,

"*+ $

8
8 ! !
3 3&
(#% 0.

+ $

"*+ &
$" $+#'" '

- 5
$ $,
"

,! $

!""
"*+ &-
$,#
& - !"" $
"*+
$$
$
8
8 ! !
3 3!
!
(

&0(3 4
$12333333$
!!/
($
42&JE$ 43$
,!
+

8
8 !

"*+ &
& - $,

$
"*+ ,
! $3&332 "$
"
(!
&""
"

+ (

&

($

!$
" &"&0"
$ &

,
,
! $
3&33 1""
!
(

$
"&

F
"
$
"
+ (

&
& 6
$
+
,

!!($+! +
/ +
"
&, + $
$

!!(,

"
! &
- $
"
$
!!(

!

" !! (&

$1 "2+%(%% !
-
,
, " K+
8(9"(
$
$"!!
$

!
&-
"
(!!

* H!
3 :
-
7
*
8=,!
&
%%% $%'
& &L+" &&-
0&I"
0&6,&6(&L
8 !I
+#
)+ + ,&M$I"(H
* NI& 33>5>4:B333&
040016-5
& 7
0 $ =
8"
&
$
5=
*

*

$8
8 ! !

+ $=&&9"(

+9 3 53
B8
($7
= + !
"A7
= + !
"" ( 3 &
& 6&*&H(&! 60LBH8K+
( 9"(
3 >&
>& &&"= "= 6"B("(F
-

BH
8K+
( 9"(
JJ4&
4& &F&?!&M$ $6H+ - .$ + 6
N&$(&*
I&17& >54B JJ3&
:& & .& L& -! & L& & M.$$
$ 6 8+
+ 6

N $
(." "I& 37& 5 4B33>&
2& & .& 7& .& 0 " & M- .$$
$ 0 5 -!
8 -
,
!
NH !"(I&4:2521B333&
1& &
& M.

$ + 6
0 0 - .$$
*+
8!"(N&=&
?(
K+
(3 &
040016-6
Flower garden trees’ ability to absorb solar radiation heat for local heat reduction
Muhammad Ilham Maulana, Ahmad Syuhada, and Hamdani


!" # $
% &" '())) *$+$*

!

"

#
!

"

$

"

%
&

% %

"

'

%
$
# %

%% #
#

$ $ (

) *
+
)
,"
-
.

.

" /

#&
'&
%%"
%
%

!

%

% %

"

' % #
# %
0
.

1$
23*
-
/1$
4* (

#
(
1$ 56
*
!
'
"

# # "
#$
7 %
%
'
% 1

" % % ' #

#

8 % %

'

%
%

%

9:
# #

$

%

%

&

%%

"
8 %

"

93;4:
< $%

$
#

%

'
$%%%

""
%

"

"

9=2: >

%" %%%
%%

" %

'
#
%

%
"

#
?
&

'&
%%
"
%
%
!

% #
# #

"

%

%%% #

AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040017-1–040017-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985513
040017-1
"#$"%"%"
'#
' -

/%@
"%A %
35=
35% #
# #
%!

-&

#

#

%

'
%#
1>
"&'

% #

%% # #% #

$
, -. $ ,
. $ 1+" $7 7
, ".

,-
" /.
, ! . $
,0
!. $

,/.
, 1
. $
,
!2. ,#".
7
,-
".$

,3! #
.$ $1 / 7,2., . 1 *" .
"% #$% #
-$% #
"''
%% #,#".

'?%
#5B&5B&56C
#"# '

"%%%#
+ #

040017-2
" !
% (

#%
%" %-

5
%%
% # >&
%
3
% #

%

DD5E!
=5B F1> D

# GD5E!# #
B'
GD5

%

'
B55E!

##% % #
%

%
0#

-
" ) ''<

><> #
,3
'"%

%

"

1>4 >

%

%

% %%
#
#
#

"

#

%

%
%%

#
'
%

0

%%
%3
1>D
#
%

0

%%
%3

1>D
>

#
"
%

'
#%$
"%
%%

'

% #"%
"
#
%%
% #
<
%"
%

>4=
>2 > 35%% #
#
$
1

# #
% #

$7 7
% #C

%
#
$

040017-3
"*/##$
7
$
"+ #% #$

" , # % #$

$7 7

>4#%

#

DD5DBDF$$
DB2F
DG2F 7#
0

%65B "'
%% #% #
43

436
$
4D3 1>=
# %

% ##4G$77
4G=
$4G61>2
040017-4
< <3 <D
"-/#$% #

3
D
< <3 <D
". % #

3
D
< <3 <D
"/% #

3
D
>B#

$
% #%3
D'

$
% ##
#
#
% #
&

# >G#
% #
% #%3
D'% #% # ;>6#

%

% # % 3
D '

% ##

040017-5
>BG
6"#

%

%
D
3'#

%

"

3
D

"%% #

3 %

"0 1$
'
%
%%
$
%% #

%

>5'#%
%

% #
#%
023*
;

4* # #$#5G2*
" &2'

%

% #

!!
!
% #

#

' #
DD5

DB2F#

%65B
" #

7
436

%

$% #4G6
3 (

%

%

'#

%

3
D
D > #
#%
0
$
1.

#
23* C

$
1-
/ #4*

#
$1(
#56*
040017-6
!34"%"
'# $
$#

%

%

%' -

/@

"""!"
.-3554
-
"

3 + "".-
==H
3554
%
.%

H

-

3 355G 1
! 4 0
" 5 6 "
( +
$
,!>$ '$
$@
"A !

D .
355A7
' A
'

+
A
+

+
.
$
+
, *
'$
$

) =I
355
4
3556 0 0 " &
&7
I
'

'$
$
1I'' $;6+

= !/$
66B8"

$
$.7,%
+*$
2 ' $ 6B5
3

+
;

040017-7
Improving the quality of urban public space through the identification of space
utilization index at Imam Bonjol Park, Padang city
Tomi Eriawan and Lestari Setiawati


, Indonesia

!

,
Indonesia

!"# !
""

#

#

#

# $
# ###

#
!

#
#

#% !
"

"

&'
#

##
("

( # ')) *

#

+""
# (
"
"

"

" # ,"#

#!
"

"-.
+!(/ " # "

#" ""##

01
/'')
2

3

#!-
3
4 01/''5 # "
,"#
!
" ,"

6
!-
3

"#

"#"
#"

"# #
3 #,"
- .
+
"

7/# #,".
#
"2

3 ,
'898
,"#
-.
+!(
4"

(#"
:"
#
#

" #:

3

$%&'( %'$
!
#
"

"

4#

!
"

#
"

-

";/
"

"-.
+!(%<

4!

=
<
-.
+!(

#!
/!
*

#

#!
".
"

"#

#

##
># #

###"

(

# #

.

"

"
0;1/''; " # (
"
# #

(

#
/
" ?

?

(-

3

"#2

#

"

( " # @

( *
# 3
# # " ,

3 $

" (
"
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 040018-1–040018-5; doi: 10.1063/1.4985514
040018-1
##3

""#
"

# (
#
2
##

:#
#"
# " ,"#
!
""-
.
+!(
"# ##

# 2
# 3
A #
"

#

#!
,"
#
,"
)*%+'(
"
#
/ " *
#

# :
#"
,

"0&1/%"

9975>5&
4 #6!-
3/6!- #

##

"
# "
#
071
/!

'; 6!-

#

3
"
#

("

#
#
(
"

3
" 3
#
(

" "

#

#
#

(
;

3
"
# "

( "
#

&

#"

#
"
#
B*"-
3*
#

#"#
/

7
# "# "

#
B*"-
3*#

#"
8
# "# #
"
#
B*"-
3*#

#" #
&*,%
>52 # -.
+!("( "

C
#7

#!
(

" #

#"

-.
+!(
"
#
###

"" -#
"
#

#8'"

:"

% # #

(#

#3
#

#

"
<
-.
+!(

##
-

(

"
#

(# (

3 !=$###!

=
3# ,"#
-.
+!(
"
7/# #
," #

#

040018-2
%!,*
-#
-

"#D/-D
$

" "

"
$ '"

. /
4

/'5''>'9''
E
/''>'' ;87
;

/''>7'' 5
& E /5''>9''
E# 58
<
# )7
%
# ;87
0#123
%!,*
4#
-

"#D/-D
$

" "

$ '"

"
. /
4

/'5''>'9'' 9)
E
/''>'' '
;

/''>7'' )9
& E /5''>9''
E# &9'

7
%
# '
0#502
%!,*
6#
!:*
#"/!*
(

"

"
$ '"

. "/
4

/'5''>'9'' '
E
/''>'' &7
;

/''>7'' 9'
& E /5''>9'' 8'
E# ;7
/
5)57

/
'
( 0#575
%!,*
1#
*"#D
$ '"
% $ 8- .8-/
4

/'5''>'9'' 5 8 &
E
/''>'' ; 8
;

/''>7'' 5 8 &
& E /5''>9''
/E 9 7 9
E> ) & 9
E/E> ;&
( 0#455

"
0#361
040018-3
%!,*
7#
F"#D
$ ! 8- .8-/
G
' 9 ;)'
C(
' 9 ;)'
; ." 7 & '
&
7 & '
7
7 & '
8 !"
' 9 ;)'
5
7 & 8''
/E '' 9; )''
E> 99 9 599
E/E> 99''
( 0#-94
"
0#9-9
%!,*
5#
*"#D
$ %

"
8- .8-/
< 4

/'>7 ' > '

/8> 7 & '
; G
/;>) 7 & '
& </9>&7 ' 9 ;)'
7 "/H&7 ' 9 9'
. C

/'>7 ' > '

/8> 7 & '
; G
/;>) ' 9 ;)'
& </9>&7 7 & '
7 "/H&7 ' 9 9'
/E '' 9' &''
E> 99 )9 ;99
E/E> 99''
( 0#-1-

"
0#972
%!,*
3#
I"#-.
+!(
$ :
-

"#/-D '&95
-

"#/-D '8'9
; !B
#"/!* '878
& "#/*D '5;&
7 F"#/FD '))
8 *"#/*D ')79
6!- &5&
<6!- '898

) ;)
040018-4
'$ ,'$
"
,"#-.
+!(
#4 ,"#-
.
+ !(
,"
3 ( # "
:"
#
#

"
#
3

! <$'=,*(>)*$%
((
*6
#%
# #

#
+0!+EJ!>*-!<>'&'8&'78@'81
&*?*&*$ *

44 %
'') !
="

A
6

E K(
4 F''5<(##
#&;-$<=!

;
'';
#
$ !#%

G
!

C"
L-
(
.

.

& %"

997 & #
#
# *( G
!
(

*
!
(

L"
=(-

7 !

G
'; ' ( =

# !
"#D
*
*
#D

=
!

D
"#. +"
040018-5
Biodegradation of BOD and ammonia-free using bacterial consortium in aerated fixed
film bioreactor (AF2B)
Prayitno, Sri Rulianah, Hadi Saroso, and Diah Meilany

%LRGHJUDGDWLRQRI%2'DQG$PPRQLD)UHH8VLQJ%DFWHULDO
&RQVRUWLXPLQ$HUDWHG)L[HG)LOP%LRUHDFWRU$)%
3UD\LWQRD6UL5XOLDQDKE+DGL6DURVR'LDK0HLODQ\F
1
Chemical Engineering Department, Politeknik Negeri Malang, Jalan Soekarno Hatta No. 9 Malang 65141
Indonesia
D
&RUUHVSRQGLQJDXWKRUSUD\LWQRBSROPDO#\DKRRFRP
E
UXOLDQDKSROLQHPD#\DKRRFRP
F
GPHLODQ\#JPDLOFRP
$EVWUDFW %2' DQG $PPRQLDIUHH 1+1 DUH SROOXWDQWV RI KRVSLWDO ZDVWHZDWHU ZKLFK RIWHQ H[FHHG WKH TXDOLW\
VWDQGDUGV,WLVEHFDXVHELRORJLFDOSURFHVVHVLQZDVWHZDWHUWUHDWPHQWSODQW::73KDYHQRWEHHQHIIHFWLYHLQGHJUDGLQJ
%2'DQG1+17KHUHIRUHDVWXG\RQIDFWRUVWKDWLQIOXHQFHWKHELRGHJUDGDWLRQRI%2'DQG1+1E\FKRRVLQJWKH
W\SHRIEDFWHULDWRLPSURYHWKHPHFKDQLVPVRIELRGHJUDGDWLRQSURFHVVHVLVUHTXLUHG%DFWHULDOFRQVRUWLXPLVDFROOHFWLRQ
RIVHYHUDOW\SHVRIEDFWHULDREWDLQHGIURPLVRODWLRQSURFHVVZKLFKLVNQRZQWREHPRUHHIIHFWLYHWKDQDVLQJOHEDFWHULDOLQ
GHJUDGLQJSROOXWDQWV2QWKHRWKHUKDQG$)%LVDW\SHRIUHDFWRULQZDVWHZDWHUWUHDWPHQWV\VWHP7KH$)%FRQWDLQVD
ILOWHU PHGLD WKDW KDV D ODUJH VXUIDFH DUHD VR WKDW WKH ELRGHJUDGDWLRQ SURFHVV RI SROOXWDQWV E\ PLFURRUJDQLVP FDQ EH
LPSURYHG 7KH REMHFWLYH RI WKLV UHVHDUFK LV WRGHWHUPLQH WKH HIIHFW RI YROXPH RI VWDUWHU DQG DLU VXSSOLHV RQGHFUHDVLQJ
%2' DQG 1+1 LQ KRVSLWDO ZDVWHZDWHU XVLQJ EDFWHULDO FRQVRUWLXP LQ WKH $)% RQ EDWFK SURFHVV 7KH UHVHDUFK ZDV
FRQGXFWHG LQ WKUHH VWDJHV WKH PDNLQJ RI WKH JURZWK FXUYH RI WKH EDFWHULDO FRQVRUWLXP EDFWHULDO FRQVRUWLXP
DFFOLPDWL]DWLRQDQGKRVSLWDOZDVWHZDWHUWUHDWPHQWLQWKH$)%ZLWKEDWFKSURFHVV7KHYDULDEOHVXVHGDUHWKHYROXPHRI
VWDUWHU DQG LQ YROXPH DQG DLU VXSSOLHV DQG /PLQ 0HDQZKLOH WKH PDWHULDOV XVHG DUH
KRVSLWDO ZDVWHZDWHU EDFWHULDO FRQVRUWLXP Pseudomonas diminuta, Pseudomonas capica, Bacillius sp, and Nitrobacter
sp)EORZHUDQG$)% $)%LVDSODVWLFEDVLQFRQWDLQLQJDILOWHUPHGLDZLWKDZDVSQHVWVKDSHXVHGDVDPHGLXPIRU
JURZLQJWKHEDFWHULDOFRQVRUWLXP,QWKHSURFHVVRIPDNLQJWKHJURZWKFXUYH DVROLGIRUPRIEDFWHULDOFRQVRUWLXP ZDV
GLVVROYHGLQVWHULOL]HGZDWHUWKHQJURZQLQDQXWULHQWEURWK1%7KHQVKDNLQJDQGVDPSOLQJZHUHGRQHDWDQ\WLPHWR
GHWHUPLQH WKH SDWK JURZWK RI EDFWHULDO FRQVRUWLXP ,Q WKH DFFOLPDWL]DWLRQ SURFHVV EDFWHULDO LVRODWHV ZHUH JURZQ XVLQJ
KRVSLWDOZDVWHZDWHUDVDPHGLDWKDWZDVDGGHGJUDGXDOO\IROORZHGE\WKHDGGLWLRQRIQXWULHQWVDQGDHUDWLRQ)XUWKHUPRUH
LQWKHELRGHJUDGDWLRQSURFHVVRI$)%WKHUHVXOWRIDFFOLPDWL]DWLRQDVDVWDUWHUZDVIHGLQWRWKH$)%WKHQDGGHGWR
WKHKRVSLWDOZDVWHZDWHUDWDFHUWDLQYROXPHDVYDULDEOHVDQGIROORZHGE\DHUDWLRQDWDFHUWDLQIORZUDWHDVYDULDEOHV
6DPSOLQJ ZDV GRQH DW DQ\ WLPH WR GHWHUPLQH WKH GHFUHDVH RI WKH FRQFHQWUDWLRQ RI %2' 1+1 DQG 0/66 0L[HG
/LTRXU 6XVSHQGHG 6ROLG %2' DQG $PPRQLDIUHH DQDO\VHV ZHUH FRQGXFWHG XVLQJ ZLQNOHU ERWWOH WLWUDWLRQ DQG
VSHFWURSKRWRPHWU\PHWKRG0/66DQDO\VLVXVHGJUDYLPHWULFPHWKRGV7KHUHVXOWVRIWKHUHVHDUFKVKRVWKDWWKHYROXPHRI
VWDUWHUYDQGDLUVXSSOLHVRI/PLQFDQUHGXFH%2'DQG1+1RIDQGUHVSHFWLYHO\%HVLGHVWKDW
$)%DQGEDFWHULDOFRQVRUWLXPKDYHDJUHDWDELOLW\DQGDUHYHU\IDVWLQGHJUDGLQJ%2'DQG1+1
,1752'8&7,21
+RVSLWDOZDVWHZDWHULVZDVWHZDWHUGLVFKDUJHGIURPKRVSLWDODFWLYLWLHVERWKPHGLFDODQGQRQPHGLFDODFWLYLWLHV
LQFOXGLQJDFWLYLWLHVDWFOLQLFURRPVODERUDWRULHVQXUVHU\URRPVUDGLRORJ\URRPVNLWFKHQVDQGODXQGU\URRPV>@
+RVSLWDO ZDVWHZDWHU FRQWDLQV KD]DUGRXV SROOXWDQWV VXFK DV SDWKRJHQLF PLFURRUJDQLVPV EDFWHULD YLUXVHV KHDY\
PHWDOV SKDUPDFHXWLFDOV WR[LF FKHPLFDOV SKHQRO OHDG UDGLRDFWLYH HOHPHQWV DQG ELRGHJUDGDEOH RUJDQLF PDWHULDOV
VXFK DV &2' %2' 1+1 DPPRQLDIUHH DQG SKHQRO >@ 7KH SROOXWDQW PDWHULDOV WKDW H[FHHG WKH TXDOLW\
VWDQGDUGVFDQFDXVHSROOXWLRQDQGKHDOWKSUREOHPVIRUKXPDQDQGHQYLURQPHQW>@
,Q ,QGRQHVLD +RVSLWDO :DVWHZDWHU 7UHDWPHQW 3ODQW +::73 JHQHUDOO\ XVHV D FRPELQDWLRQ RI ELRORJLFDO
FKORULQDWLRQ SURFHVVHV EXW WKH GLVFKDUJHV DUH RIWHQ H[FHHGLQJ WKH TXDOLW\ VWDQGDUG VXFK DV SKHQRO &2' %2'
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 050001-1–050001-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985515
050001-1
1+1DQGFKORULQHIUHH>@7KHORZTXDOLW\RI WKHGLVFKDUJHV RQ+::73HVSHFLDOO\%2'DQG1+1 FDQ EH
FDXVHG E\ WKH QRQRSWLPDO ELRORJLFDO SURFHVV 6HYHUDO ELRORJLFDO SURFHVVHV KDYH EHHQ XVHG LQ +::73 IRU
H[DPSOH$QDHURELF$HURELF)L[HG)LOP%LRUHDFWRU$)%>@ 6XEPHUJHG0HPEUDQH%LRUHDFWRU60%>@ DQG
WKHFRPELQDWLRQRI8S)ORZ$QDHURELF)L[HG%HG8$)%DQG6XVSHQGHG$HURELF5HDFWRU6$5>@ 7KHUHIRUH
LW LV QHFHVVDU\ WR LQWHQVLYHO\ VWXG\ WKH ELRORJLFDO WUHDWPHQW SURFHVV V\VWHP WKDW LV HIIHFWLYH LQ UHGXFLQJ WKH
FRQFHQWUDWLRQRI%2'DQG1+1$V DILUVWVWHSWRILQGLQJDQ HIIHFWLYHELRORJLFDOWUHDWPHQWSURFHVV LWLVQHFHVVDU\
WRVWXG\WKHSROOXWDQWFRQFHQWUDWLRQUHGXFWLRQ LQDEDWFKSURFHVV
,Q ELRORJLFDO WUHDWPHQW SURFHVVHV WKH UHPRYDO RI SROOXWDQWV LV DIIHFWHG E\ WHPSHUDWXUH S+ NLQGV RI
PLFURRUJDQLVP FRQWDFW WLPH WKH W\SH RI UHDFWRU DQG WKH SUHVHQFH RI LQKLELWRUV >@ )XUWKHUPRUH %DFWHULDO
&RQVRUWLXP%&LVSURYHQDV DQ HIIHFWLYHPLFURRUJDQLVPWRUHGXFHRUJDQLFFRPSRXQGVFRQWDLQHGLQZDVWHZDWHUV
>@ 7KXV WKH UHPRYDO RI %2' DQG 1+1 LQ KRVSLWDO ZDVWHZDWHU FDQ EH GRQH E\ XVLQJ VHOHFWHG
PLFURRUJDQLVPV%DFWHULDO&RQVRUWLXP%&DQGLQFUHDVLQJFRQWDFWWLPHLQELRORJLFDOSURFHVVWKURXJKWKHXVHRID
ZDVSQHVW VKDSHG ELRILOWHU $)% +RZHYHU WKLV UHVHDUFK XVHG $)% RSHUDWLQJ LQ EDWFK ZKHUH LV SDUW RI DQ
RQJRLQJUHVHDUFKJUDQWRI DQ$)%UHDFWRUWKDWRSHUDWHVFRQWLQXRXVO\7KHDLPRIWKLVUHVHDUFKZDVWRGHWHUPLQHWKH
HIIHFWRI YROXPHRIVWDUWHUDQGDLUVXSSOLHVRQUHGXFLQJ%2'DQG1+1 LQ KRVSLWDO ZDVWHZDWHUXVLQJ%&LQWKH
$)%ZLWKEDWFKSURFHVV
(;3(5,0(17$/'(7$,/6
0DWHULDOV
7KH H[SHULPHQWDO DSSDUDWXV V\VWHP XVHG LQ WKLV UHVHDUFK LQFOXGHV $)% DV LOOXVWUDWHG LQ )LJ 7KH $)%
FRQWDLQVILOWHUPHGLDZLWKDZDVSQHVW VKDSH7KHGLIIXVHULVSODFHGDWWKHERWWRPRIWKHILOWHUPHGLDFRQQHFWHGWR D
EORZHUWRVXSSO\DLUIRUWKHJURZWKRI%&DQGWKHSHUIHFPL[LQJSURFHVV$S+FRQWUROOHULVILWWHGRQWKHLQOHWRIWKH
$)%7KHPDWHULDORIWKHILOWHUPHGLDLVSODVWLFZLWKGHQVLW\RIJFP DQG D VSHFLILFVXUIDFHDUHDRI
PP
),*85( 6FKHPDWLFYLHZRI$)%
:DVWHZDWHUZDVWDNHQIURPKRVSLWDOVLQ 0DODQJ&LW\ZKLFKKDGWKHIROORZLQJFKDUDFWHULVWLFV WHPSHUDWXUHq&

S+%2' PJ/DQG1+1± PJ/7KHPLFURRUJDQLVPVXVHGZHUH%DFWHULDO&RQVRUWLXP
(%& REWDLQHG IURP WKH LVRODWHG EDFWHULD LQ KRVSLWDO ZDVWHZDWHU EDFWHULDO HQGRJHQRXV %& FRQVLVWV RI VHYHUDO
W\SHVRIEDFWHULDVXFKDVPseudomonas capica Pseudomonas diminuta Bacillus sp1DQGNitrobacter sp2
0HWKRGV
,Q WKH SURFHVV RI PDNLQJ WKH JURZWK FXUYH LVRODWHV RI EDFWHULDO FRQVRUWLXP %& LQ D VROLG IRUP ZHUH
GLVVROYHGLQVWHULOH ZDWHUWKHQJURZQ LQD PHGLXP QXWULHQWEURWK1%LQVRPH WXEHVWKDWKDG EHHQ VWHULOL]HGDQG
FRYHUHGZLWK FRWWRQ)XUWKHUPRUHWKHWXEHZDV LQVHUWHGLQWRDQLQFXEDWRUVKDNHUDQGWKHQHYHU\WLPH VDPSOHVZHUH
WDNHQVHTXHQWLDOO\E\WDNLQJWKHLVRODWHVFRQWDLQHGLQHDFKWXEHIRUDQDO\VLQJWKHQXPEHURIEDFWHULD
050001-2
,QDFFOLPDWL]DWLRQ SURFHVV%&LVRODWHVZHUHGLVVROYHGLQGLVWLOOHGZDWHUDQGWKHQKRVSLWDOZDVWHZDWHUZDVDGGHG
JUDGXDOO\7KHQXWULHQWVDQGKRVSLWDOZDVWHZDWHU ZHUH DGGHGLQRUGHUWR UHDFKWKHLUPD[LPXPJURZWK%&LVRODWHV
WKDWKDG EHHQFXOWLYDWHG LQWKHSURFHVVRIDFFOLPDWL]DWLRQZHUHXVHGDVDVWDUWHU
,QWKHSURFHVVRIELRGHJUDGDWLRQRISROOXWDQWVXVLQJ$)%KRVSLWDOZDVWHZDWHUDQGVWDUWHUDWDFHUWDLQUDWLRDV
YDULDEOHVDQGLQYROXPH ZHUH IHGLQWRWKH$)%UHDFWRUFRQWDLQLQJ DILOWHUDVDJURZWKPHGLDIRU
%&DQGIROORZHGE\WKHDGGLWLRQRIQXWULHQWVDVPXFKDVY$WWKHERWWRPRIWKHUHDFWRUDLUZDVIORZQDW D
FHUWDLQIORZUDWHXVLQJDEORZHUDVYDULDEOHDQG/PLQ7KHWRWDOYROXPHRIWKHUHDFWRUZDV/ 7KH
VDPSOHV ZHUHWDNHQIURP$)%HYHU\ PLQXWH IRUPLQXWH )XUWKHUPRUH WKHVDPSOHV ZHUHDQDO\]HG E\XVLQJ
$3+$ VWDQGDUG SURFHGXUHV LQ RUGHU WR DQDO\VLV WKH %2' 1+1 DQG 0/66 0/66 0L[HG /LTXRU 6XVSHQGHG
6ROLG ZDV XVHG DV D SDUDPHWHU WR GHWHUPLQH WKH QXPEHU RI EDFWHULD %2' ZDV PHDVXUHG XVLQJ :LQNOHU ERWWOH
PHWKRG 1+1 ZDV PHDVXUHG XVLQJ 6SHFWURSKRWRPHWU\ PHWKRG DQG 0/66 ZDV PHDVXUHG XVLQJ D JUDYLPHWULF
PHWKRG.
5(68/76$1'',6&866,21
7KH UHVXOWV RI WKH H[SHULPHQWV RQ WKH GHWHUPLQDWLRQ RI WKH JURZWK FXUYH VKRZ WKDW WKH JURZWK RI EDFWHULDO
FRQVRUWLXPDWDQ\WLPHIROORZHG WKHSDWWHUQRIWKHJURZWKFXUYH DVVKRZQ)LJ7KLVFRQGLWLRQLQGLFDWHVWKDWWKH
EDFWHULDO LVRODWHV REWDLQHG IURP KRVSLWDO ZDVWH ZDWHU KDG JURZQ DQG ZHUH UHDG\ WR EH XVHG DV D VWDUWHU LQ WKLV
H[SHULPHQW )LJXUHVKRZVWKDWWKHEDFWHULDOFRQVRUWLXPJUHZXSRQKRXURIUG ± WK DQGWKURXJKDSKDVHRI GHDWK
DIWHU KRXU WK 7KXV LQ WKH DFFOLPDWL]DWLRQ H[SHULPHQWV WKH DGGLWLRQ RI ZDVWH ZDWHU RU DFFOLPDWL]DWLRQ ZDV GRQH
HYHU\KRXUV
),*85( 7KHJURZWKFXUYHRIEDFWHULDFRQVRUWLXP%&
0HDQZKLOH LQ WKH H[SHULPHQW XVLQJ $)% WKH KRVSLWDO ZDVWH ZDWHU FRQWDLQLQJ %2' DQG 1+1 DW YDULRXV
FRQFHQWUDWLRQVDQG%& DVVWDUWHU LQDFHUWDLQUDWLRDVDYDULDEOHDQG LQYROXPH ZDV DGGHGWRWKH
$)%7KHQLW SDVVHGWKURXJKWKHDLURQDIORZ UDWHRI/PLQDQGQXWULHQWVZHUH DGGHGY7KH REWDLQHG
GDWDDUHSUHVHQWHGLQ)LJ
)LJXUH VKRZV WKDW WKH FRQFHQWUDWLRQ RI %2' DQG 1+1 GHFUHDVHG IURP WLPH WR WLPH 7KH %2' UHGXFWLRQ
PD[LPDOO\ RFFXUUHG LQ WKH WLPH UDQJH RI PLQXWHV ZKLOH LQ WKH WK PLQXWH DQG WKH QH[W ZDV OLNHO\ WR
VWDJQDWH7KLVFRQGLWLRQKDSSHQHGEHFDXVHDWWKHWKPLQXWHEDFWHULDOFRQVRUWLXP%&ZHUHVWLOODGDSWLQJWRWKH
HQYLURQPHQWPHGLD6RWKHJURZWKRI%&ZDVQRWPD[LPL]HG,W ZDVLQGLFDWHGE\ WKHIHZVOLPHV IRUPHGRQWKH
VXUIDFHRIWKHILOWHUPHGLDLQWKH$)%
0HDQZKLOHDWWKHWLPHRI± PLQXWHVWKH%&EHJDQWRDGDSW 6R WKHJURZWKRI%&DQGWKHELRGHJUDGDWLRQ
SURFHVV DOVR EHJDQ WR WDNH SODFH ,W ZDV VKRZHG WKDW WKH ORQJHU GHJUDGDWLRQ WLPH UHVXOWHG LQ PRUH ELRGHJUDGDEOH
%2' DQG 1+1 .DSODQ HWDO >@ SURSRVHG WKDW ELRILOP IRUPDWLRQ LQ D VXEPHUJHG ELRILOWHU WDNHV SODFH LQ ILYH
VWDJHVLQLWLDODWWDFKPHQWLUUHYHUVLEOHDWWDFKPHQW PDWXUDWLRQ PDWXUDWLRQDQGGLVSHUVLRQ
050001-3
D E
F
),*85( 7KH%2'DQG1+1LQWKH$)%IRUYDULRXVYROXPHVWDUWHU9VDWDLUVXSSO\RI/PLQD9VYE
9VYDQGF9VY
2Q WKH RWKHU KDQG LQFUHDVLQJ WKH YROXPH RI VWDUWHU UHVXOWHG LQ WKH UHGXFWLRQ RI %2' DQG 1+1 7KH XVH RI
VWDUWHU YDQGELRGHJUDGDWLRQWLPHRIPLQXWHVFDQUHVXOWLQWKHODUJHVWUHGXFWLRQRI%2'DQG1+1RI
DQGUHVSHFWLYHO\0HDQZKLOH WKHXVHRIVWDUWHUYROXPHRI/FDXVHG WKHGHFUHDVHRI%2'DQG1+1
RIUHVSHFWLYHO\7KXVWKHYROXPHRIVWDUWHUDIIHFWV WKHGHFUHDVHRI%2'DQG1+1
7KH $)%FRQWDLQHGDZDVSQHVWVKDSHGELRILOWHUWKDWKDVDODUJHVSHFLILFVXUIDFHDUHD PPZKHUH
%&JUHZDQGZHUHLQFRQWDFWZLWKZDVWHZDWHU$WWKHWLPHRI± PLQXWHVWKH%&JURZWKLQFUHDVHGDORQJZLWK
WKHLQFUHDVHRIVXEVWUDWHZDVWHZDWHUFRQVXPSWLRQE\%&,WFDXVHGDOOVXUIDFH RIWKH ILOWHUPHGLDFRYHUHGE\WKH
%&
2QWKHRWKHUKDQGDEHWWHUDLUVXSSO\ZLOO LQFUHDVHWKHFRQWDFWWLPHLQWKHILOWHU VXUIDFH 6R WKHELRGHJUDGDWLRQ
SURFHVVHVRISROOXWDQWVRFFXUHGUDSLGO\ > @ 7KLVLVLQGLFDWHG E\WKHLQFUHDVLQJFRQFHQWUDWLRQRI0/66IURPWLPH
WR WLPH ZKHUH 0/66 DV D SDUDPHWHU LQGLFDWHG WKH QXPEHU RI %& LQ WKH UHDFWRU DV D UHVXOW RI %2' DQG 1+1
ELRGHJUDGDWLRQ
,QWKHDHURELFELRORJLFDOSURFHVVWKHELRGHJUDGDWLRQUDWHV RI%2' DQG1+1 E\PLFURRUJDQLVP ZHUHDIIHFWHG
E\WKHWHPSHUDWXUHLQLWLDOFRQFHQWUDWLRQS+W\SHRIPLFURRUJDQLVP+\GUDXOLF5HWHQWLRQ7LPH+57WKHW\SHRI
UHDFWRUDQGWKHSUHVHQFHRILQKLELWRUV7KHRUJDQLFPDWWHUV %2' 1+1ZHUHGHFRPSRVHGE\ %& LQWR QHZ FHOO
&2 +2 DQG HQHUJ\ > @
7KHELRGHJUDGDWLRQ RI%2' E\ PL[HGFXOWXUHV LVPRUHHIILFLHQW WKDQ WKDWE\SXUHFXOWXUHV ZLWK &2 DQGHQHUJ\
DVWKHSURGXFWV>@ %& FRQVLVWVRIPseudomonas capica DQGBacillus sp1 WKDWKDYH WKHDELOLW\WRGHJUDGHRUJDQLF
FRPSRXQGVVXFKDV%2'DQG1+1 LQDHURELFDQDHURELFSURFHVV > @
&RPSDUHG WR RWKHU ZDVWHZDWHU WUHDWPHQW SURFHVVHV LQ WKH FDVH RI RUJDQLF PDWWHUV WKH 6XEPHUJHG 0HPEUDQH
%LRUHDFWRU 60% FRXOG UHGXFH WKH %2' DQG FROLIRUP >@ 7KH FRPELQDWLRQ RI 8S IORZ
$QDHURELF )L[HG%HG 8$)% DQG 6XVSHQGHG $HURELF 5HDFWRU 6$5 ZLWK WKH PLFURILOWUDWLRQ FRXOG UHGXFH WKH
050001-4
FRQFHQWUDWLRQRI&2' >@ 7KH$)%SURFHVVFRXOGUHGXFHWKHFRQFHQWUDWLRQRISROOXWDQWVLQWKHKRVSLWDO
ZDVWHZDWHUQDPHO\&2'DQGFROLIRUPXSWRDQG UHVSHFWLYHO\ >@ 7KXV %&DQGWKHZDVSQHVWVKDSHG
ELRILOWHUKDYHDKLJKDELOLW\WRGHJUDGH%2'DQG1+1
)XUWKHUPRUHLQ WKHH[SHULPHQWVXVLQJYDULRXVDLUVXSSOLHV DQG/PLQVWDUWHUYROXPHRIYWKH
IROORZLQJUHVXOWVDUHREWDLQHG)LJ
D E
F
),*85( 7KH%2' DQG1+1 LQWKH$)%UHDFWRUIRUYDULRXVDLUVXSSOLHV DW VWDUWHUYROXPHRIY D 4D /PLQ
E 4D/PLQDQGF 4D /PLQ
)LJXUHVKRZVWKDWWKHFRQFHQWUDWLRQRI%2'DQG1+1GHFUHDVHGIURPWLPHWRWLPHZLWKWKHLQFUHDVLQJWLPH
RIELRGHJUDGDWLRQ0HDQZKLOHWKH0/66FRQFHQWUDWLRQLQFUHDVHGIURPWLPHWRWLPHZLWKWKHGHFUHDVH RI%2'DQG
1+1 FRQFHQWUDWLRQV%HVLGHV WKDWWKHJUHDWHUWKHDLUVXSSOLHGLQWRWKHUHDFWRUWKHJUHDWHUWKHUHGXFWLRQRI%2'
DQG1+17KHODUJHVWGHFUHDVHRI%2'DQG1+1RFFXUHG DWELRGHJUDGDWLRQWLPHRIPLQXWHVDQGWKHDLU
VXSSOLHVRI/PLQ HTXDOWRDQGUHVSHFWLYHO\0HDQZKLOHELRGHJUDGDWLRQWLPHRIPLQXWHVDQGDLU
VXSSO\ RI/PLQUHVXOWHGLQDQG7KXVWKHDLUVXSSO\DIIHFWV WKHGHFUHDVHRI%2'DQG1+1 7KLV
FRQGLWLRQ FRXOGEH GHVFULEHG DV IROORZVJUHDWHUDLUVXSSO\ PDNHV%&JURZV IDVWHU VRWKDWPRUH%&GHJUDGHVWKH
VXEVWUDWH%2'1+17KXVWKHDLUVXSSO\DIIHFWVWKHGHFUHDVHRI%2'DQG1+1
%HVLGH WKDW WKHZDVSQHVWVKDSHGELRILOWHUZKLFKKDVDODUJHVXUIDFHDUHDPDNHV WKHFRQWDFWWLPHEHWZHHQ%&
VXEVWUDWHODVWORQJHU7KXV WKHELRGHJUDGDWLRQWLPHRIPLQXWHVLVNQRZQDVWKHUHVLGHQFHWLPHIRU%&WRGHJUDGH
%2'DQG1+1E\DQGUHVSHFWLYHO\,QRWKHUUHVHDUFK 8$6%5HDFWRUZLWK+57RIGD\VZDVDEOHWR
UHGXFH%2' E\ZKLOH6%55HDFWRUZLWK+57RIGD\VZDVDEOHWRUHGXFH%2'E\ >@7KXV $)%
DQGEDFWHULDOFRQVRUWLXPKDYH DJUHDWDELOLW\DQGDUHYHU\IDVWLQ GHJUDGLQJ %2'DQG1+1
050001-5
6800$5<
%DVHG RQ WKH DQDO\VLV RI WKH GDWD LW FDQ EH FRQFOXGHG WKDW WKH DLU VXSSO\ DQG WKH YROXPH RI VWDUWHU DIIHFW WKH
GHFUHDVH RI %2' DQG 1+1 :LWK WKH ELRGHJUDGDWLRQ WLPH RI PLQXWHV WKH DLU VXSSO\ RI /PLQ DQG WKH
YROXPH RIVWDUWHU YWKH %2'DQG 1+1 GHFUHDVHE\DQG UHVSHFWLYHO\ %HVLGHV WKDW $)%DQG
EDFWHULDOFRQVRUWLXPKDYH DJUHDWDELOLW\DQGDUHYHU\IDVWLQ GHJUDGLQJ %2'DQG1+1
$&.12:/('*(0(17
7KH DXWKRUV ZRXOG OLNH WR WKDQN WKH 0LQLVWU\ RI 5HVHDUFK 7HFKQRORJ\ DQG +LJKHU (GXFDWLRQ IRU IXQGLQJ WKLV
UHVHDUFKWKURXJKUHVHDUFKJUDQW3837
5()(5(1&(6
001DVU$5<D]GDQEDNKVK
6 6XDUH]-0/HPD ) 2PLO %LRUHVRXU7HFKQRO
39HUOLFFKL0 $O$XNLG\( =DPEHOOR6FL7RWDO(QYLURQ
33UD\LWQR =.XVXPD%<DQXZLDGL 5: /DNVPRQR 5HVHDUFK,QYHQW\,QWHUQDWLRQDO-RXUQDORI(QJLQHHULQJ
DQG6FLHQFH
$5H]DHH 0 $QVDUL $ .KDYDQLQ $6DE]DOL00 $U\DQ $PHULFDQ-RXUQDORI(QYLURQPHQWDO6FLHQFHV

;:HQ+'LQJ;+XDQJ5/LX 3URFHVV%LRFKHP
%.RFDGDJLVWDQ( .RFDGDJLVWDQ17RSFX1'HPLUFLRۜOX 3URFHVV%LRFKHP
65'KRNSDQGH-3.DZDUH ,QWHUQDWLRQDO-RXUQDORI(QJLQHHULQJ6FLHQFHDQG,QQRYDWLYH7HFKQRORJ\

&,1DL= .-D\DFKDQGUDQ66KDVKLGKDU $IULFDQ-RXUQDORI%LRWHFKQRORJ\
2&KDDODO $< =HNUL,VODP5 (QHUJ\6RXUFHV
,+)DURRTL) %DVKHHU7$KPDG *OREDO1(67-RXUQDO
-%.DSODQ&5DJXQDWK15DPDVXEEX'+)LQH -%DFWHULRO
6 'H\ 6 0XNKHUMHH ,QWHUQDWLRQDO -RXUQDO RI :DWHU 5HVRXUFHV DQG (QYLURQPHQWDO (QJLQHHULQJ

9 6ULGHYL 0 9 9 & /DNVKPL 0 0DQDVD 0 6UDYDQL ,QWHUQDWLRQDO -RXUQDO RI (QJLQHHULQJ 6FLHQFH
$GYDQFHG7HFKQRORJ\
59DUJKHVH3.09$%$$0 +DWKD -RXUQDORI0LFURELRORJ\%LRWHFKQRORJ\DQG)RRG6FLHQFHV

050001-6
Gold grade of epithermal gold ore at Lamuntet, Brang Rea, West Sumbawa District,
West Nusa Tenggara Province, Indonesia
Rika Ernawati, Arifudin Idrus, and Himawan TBMP


!"
#

! "

#$
! "

!"
#$
%&"'%

&"'%

(!
&(#%%
$ %)

"' "
(
#
'*''' +'",*+'

-
* %

#

#

# ''
'
#
# "%
'.

#
"
' '
!
# '(
%#
'
#"
'
'(/" '!'
# 0%12 *"'
# 0%013 %#
(
/" '!'%# #

!
# '(

# 4
5
.6
#6""(
"(
4
%#
# #
'(.
# "'"
#
'#"7
"% # #
# ' '

(! 6 # ' '
(

!

% # '

( ! ! 6 #
# '
( % # '
!
6
!'"%8 '

"' 96 %*4
!'
'(.

# " 9
'%# "'
('(
# !
# 4!'
#

# #"#
"'" %)
(

:
("8 (,8"'"

!
*!
!#

(,*"7"% '

# '(#
# "
" ,0%!!; 3%<!! 1!!=320!! 0!!=>2000!!73!!=
>0000!!"!!=<?!! ?0!!=1?0!!"0%0<!!=%<@!!%))?##"#
" ''6' ,"7"%+' '.
'
"

#"#
# 0A%
'
# !'
#
( "' !#'
!(

#'!(
###
# #

#
'7
)* !
# '%
# &' #
# #'
)

# "' '.
'

-
* B

-
/
""6 ,8"%%"
6

(
# *+
# ''
(
C

# "'
%# "
6
#6
#

(( %# "

( 6
'
'
#,#

"' 96
#!'
'#!
#
# # %#
"
#
' '! ''
' !
#%6
'
! !'
#
''
#
#!! '# ,8"% %# (''(
<
!

#
# ( '! "

# (''
# '"
! %# "' #
# #

!!4
'(=
#
'' 1
<#%#
''"
2#
#

'' ( (

1=<#%
6
"
"'
)

5

# '
#
# % 6
#
4
"' '.
#
(
# "6

# % DE '
#

#
"' '.

#

' " " ( ## '

# " " (% +'
'.

"'(

#
# !
# ' (

#''
=!"
='
=
5
.=
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 050002-1–050002-9; doi: 10.1063/1.4985516
050002-1

9''
=
'

% F
. 6 #
4
##
# ' (
' '
"(9#'9 " (
'' 5
."#
=' % " #
('(
# "'

#
( % !!
# " 1 <0!!%

#
"' #"#'(

#
= " ', '" "
'.
!(
!
%
# B !

"( '-
/ ""6 !

#
)

'
"
" (' ='
"' !
# '(
###
# 4
5
.6
4

#
"( 6""(
4
D E% #
'"'

)

' '(
/" '!'
# 0%12 *"'
# 0%013 ,8"%%8
#
(!
'

"'' ,'(='G!(
##

# ' ='
"' !
# ' (
%
'.

!(
="' =!#'

#'(='G!(
##
="=
= " '%
)

'( '!!4
'(10%000
0% ;%?1!!
" %
# !!
# #
6
"

# "' " !
# ' "'
#
'
)

# " 7 "%

/" '! '% # #
! '(
( '

# "'! "("
# "6
(! %'(
# 8 (
,8
#
'
#
!
*!
!#

(,*%
(#&
)%!
# *
(
*#
$#+$ #(
!# ,
*$
# " '"( )

' ! (

(
'' 6'% (
''
6' !

#

#*+ #'

*+ % + ''
/" '!'*
#-
;/
#

# '.
!(
=
!#'
="' =#'!(

#"6""(
4
%+ # ''(#
#

# "
050002-2
%?1!!22 !!"@!! ## 6 6
# %#
"
'#"#"

#
(D E%
#(
# ''

'(
#
(!
4

# 6

"'(!!
#

#
'.

# !
# ' 6
' (
% #

# !
# ' (

# (
# 4
5
.6 #
# # '(
'' ##'
"(
4
%'

!
("" "
''
=!"
''
='
''
=

=''
##

#!(
%''
=!"
='
=

#
=#(
# '
' ##
'!%/
'

,"'''

!

#
=
'
=

# . 4"
'6'
'
%"#"

#
'.
'

= " '!# ##'(

#"' 5
. 6 #
!(
,8 * "
,*2'.
,!# "
DE%
(!'H #

)* !
# '"','=
!
# ' !

! !
6
!'

'(
DE%+ ''(
(!'
)* !
# '

'
('

#
6
4
6 !#
"
,
! ' 6 '"
#(
# ' D2E%#
4
)* !
# '"'''
%#
'

'

'' %# '!(
'
"'!#'
!(
D?E%

$',*
,
# #
# '

(! 6 # ' '
(
!

%
# '

( !
''(
! 6 #

#
( % # '
!
6

# !' "' 96
# '

# #,8"% %8 '

"' 96 %+' !'
##
#
#
=?" "#
%# 4
!' 4
#

#
'(.

9
'"
,' %# !'"'
##
!
8"%%)
(

:
("8 (,8"
!
*!
!#

(,*"
7"" %# "
# 4!'
#
# #"#
" '(.
# '
(%
(#&
-%I
' ',*#

050002-3
$
)%# *!'")
#*#
'

' . /
% ) 2@ 23 @022@?
% ) 2@ 2? @022@
% ) 2@ 213 @022<<<
2% )2 2@ 232 @022<1
?% )? 2@ @2 @022<12
1% )1 2@ 2? @022<?1
3% )3 2@ 21 @022<?@
<% )< 2@ 2 @022<2?
@% )@ 2@ @ @022@0
0% )0 2@ ?31 @022<2?
% ) 2@ ?21 @022<0
% ) 2@ ?2? @0223@0
% ) 2@ 2@ @022<01
2% )2 2@ ?31 @022<01
?% )? 2@ 3? @022<3
1% )1 2@ ?? @022<

& $#'&#
5
'( !
' %"
)

# " 6' 0%!!
3%<!!,

'
0%00?!!%# #"#
" !
6 '( ))?)2)?
,8"%2,%
% '
#
'=
!
# '" ''(#" =30"9
D1E% 6
# !

# "

# '
2; 0!!DE%?1!!D E%
# "" "' !!
?2!!
#

'
!!%#
# !' #
"" #"#
#00!!
#
#

'
?!!
# '
?!!)J<?!!
)?J !!)?%# #"#
"" ))?)<)? !
6 '(,8"%2,%''
"9
> #'
#

# #

5
.='!# GD2E%# "

##
# 0A

#
"'
#
6 "' '
%8' !
*
, 0? !

#
"" @!! !

# "" K0%?;1!!DE%
# " "' 6 ""0!!=220!!,

'
2!!%#
# !' ### #"# " #"#

#2000!!
#"
#

'
0%0A%% %
%?<A)0%<1A)%0A)? !
6 '(,8"%2,%

# !' ##"#"

#
'.

# '"' %
# 7" "' 3!!
1@00!!
#

'
!!%
# " 7
" %*'

#
!' #6"#"#" 7% %1%0 A)%A)?
#

'
0%0A%# #"#
" ) 10% 00!! ,8"%2 ,%# #"# 7"

#

'!#'
%
" "' 1!!
320!!,

'
!!%

#

#
'
!' #'!(
%8"%2, #
#
)?#
# #"#
" 320!!)#
#
#"#
" @ !!%'=
!
# ',)* !
# '#
# #

#6"#
'7D1E%8' !
*
#
" 22 !!%
" "' ?0!!
1?0!!,

'
20!!%

# !' ##"#"

# !' #6"
# #"#
" )) )?)?,8"%2,%# #"#"

( !(
"
'.
'%

#
"

#
( <
1 <0!!DE%
# '(""

# 4!'
#
# #"#
" ## )))?
) )2)?%"" 0%0<!!
%<@!!,8"%2,"%# 6' "" 5

#
#
""'

#
# 6 "' '"
! %
-

'"
! #"

#
C

#
( %
050002-4
$
-%
'+
)

-
/ ""
# $ $ $ ! ! + + ' $ ,
& ! 0 0 !
% 1%112 ) 2 3 1%1) - 1%1) - 31 1%1)
) 1% >00 ? >2000 %?< >0000 1%0 @ ?10 %<@
) %21 ? 0 30 1 1?0
) 2%@< 0 3<0 0 21 ?20 0%
)2 0% ??< 3 0 ?0
)? <% @ >00 <? 20 1@00 30 230 %
)1 %2 3 21 ?@ 2@ @00
)3 %0< ? 1 0 @0 << ?10
)< 2%< ?2 00 ?00 3 3?0
)@ %0 1 10 0 1< 0
)0 %12 ? 20 @0 ? 10
) 0%302 3 220 0 @0
) 2%?< 2 00 ?1 0 0 2@0 0%
) %2 0 >2000 0%<1 2? 0 ? @@0
)2 1% 2 1 0 130 2 <0 0%0<
)? 3%< >00 >2000 %0 >0000 % 320 120 0%?
)1 %2 ?0 110 1< 10
(#&
4%
*!'"H /" '!')

050002-5
FIGURE 4. Au and Metal Grade Graphic at Lamuntet
,
,
,
050002-6
FIGURE 4 (Cont.) Au and Metal Grade Graphic at Lamuntet
,
,
,
050002-7
,"
(#&
3 (Cont.)
'+ +!#

)

, + ,+ ,""+
,+ ,"+ ,+ ,7+
# !
#
'" ! 6 #
# #
#''
!

' %
$
4%!
'+ 6 #
# #
*
$ ,
*$5)6 (#$
! (&*$$5-6 ,#

$',7-1)89
2; 0!! %?1!! 0%; 3%<!!
" K0%?;1!! @!! ;<?!!
= 22 !! 1;320!!
<;1 <0!! = ?0;1?0!!
''&#
+' '.
'

# "

# 0A%# '

# !' 6

#
( "' !#'
!(
#'!(
###
#
#

'#7
)* !
# '%''!' #
#
))?#
#"#"
#
6' ,"7"%# ! 6 #
# #'

!'
(
*+
)

%
$':
*

#
#''(!!

# !!
%/B"*

# "( '
B !

-
/ "" 6 % ' 8
# "( '
B !

-
* B

"
# '
)

%

(

'

% B%7%
!
'!
# ' *
L#
# '
L
M M
)" ' " / ""
% :' + '" I'% /%
* !
003!%=2 %
% 8' !
*
(
'*''*' +'"
-
* B

"( '
B !

-
/ ""6 % 0?%
050002-8
% /%%-#
:%-% 5
!
# '+'B !
$*
(' #

4!'
'#
*+/ '
@@?/% !%@=%

2% +%
!

# ' =" -' +'
'

"

''"( 1= 3* !
0%
?% % % ) # +% :%
#

) *'
+'=!! *(
# *
#
" @?@= /6 @@?'/ 7 ' ! "$ '

*
##
'

"
''"(!% 3= %
1% 8%
M% % ' % B +'B !
# + '"' '
"
4!'
@3$8
#B '

' '4!'
@@3!% 0@= 0%
050002-9
Design and field test equipment of river water level detection based on ultrasonic
sensor and SMS gateway as flood early warning
Riny Sulistyowati, Hari Agus Sujono, and Ahmad Khamdi Musthofa

Design and Field Test Equipment of River Water Level
Detection Based on Ultrasonic Sensor and SMS Gateway as
Flood Early Warning
Riny Sulistyowati1,a), Hari Agus Sujono1,b) and Ahmad Khamdi Musthofa1
1
Department of Electrical Engineering, Institut Teknology Adhi Tama Surabaya, Surabaya, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: riny.itats@yahoo.com
b)
hari911092@yahoo.co.id
Abstract. Due to the high rainfall, flood often occurs in some regions, especially in the area adjacent to the river banks
that led to the idea to make the river water level detection system as a flood early warning. Several researches have
produced flood detection equipment based on ultrasonic sensors and android as flood early warning system. This paper
reported the results of a field test detection equipment to measure the river water level of the Bengawansolo River that
was conducted in three villages in the district of Bungah, Dukun, and Manyar in Gresik regency. Tests were conducted
simultaneously for 21 hours during heavy rainfall. The test results demonstrated the accuracy of the equipment of 97.28%
for all categories of observation. The application of AFD (Android Flood Detection) via android smartphone
demonstrated its precision in conveying the information of water level as represented by the status of SAFE, STAND,
WARNING, and DANGER. Some charts presented from the analysis of data was derived from the data acquisition time
of testing that can be used as an evaluation of flooding at some points prone to flood.
INTRODUCTION
Indonesia is a country that has a fairly high rainfall which potentially causes flooding. The flood hazard is still
common in some areas, particularly areas in adjacent to the riverbanks. Floods cause a lot of harms, not only
material damages but also fatalities. The impact of flooding can be minimized if society has adequate preparation
against the coming flood. One way is to deliver flooding information as soon as possible to the community as an
early warning system [1].
This paper contained a report of a research that tested an equipment of water level detection for a flood early
warning. This equipment was tested in the Bengawansolo River located in Gresik, East Java. Previous studies had
presented the manufacture of this device and several stages of testing at the laboratory level. This equipment was
designed based on ultrasonic sensors as the water level detection and android smartphones as the medium to deliver
information to the public. Results of the testing of this equipment at the laboratory level were: 1. the performance of
ultrasonic sensor showed an average error of 1.121%, and 2. the average error for the speed of change in the water
level by 1 cm. For sending Short Message Service (SMS) on smartphone, the average delivery time was 5.414
second [2, 3].
Ultrasonic sensors and SMS gateway were selected based on previous studies that examined the water level
measurement techniques and the dissemination of information to the public. Previous studies reported that the
detection of water level using Doppler radar was costly and required sophisticated design [5, 6], using the data
logger indicated less accurate results [7], using twitter as a medium of information delivery was quite effective but
not all people could access it easily [8].
Three locations were determined to test three equipment of river water level detection. The equipment was
observed for 21 hours during heavy rainfall. The data during the observation was recorded to monitor the level of
river water and the information was sent continuously every 1 minute via SMS gateway.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 050003-1–050003-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985517
050003-1
RESEARCH DESIGN AND METHODS
Research design
The design of the research included the system block diagram as shown in Fig. 1, the mechanical design of water
level detection using ultrasonic sensor as shown in Fig. 2, and the flow chart of river water level detection system as
shown in Fig. 3. The system was designed based on ATMega 8535 microcontroller.
FIGURE 1. Block Diagram System [2].
START
INITIALIZATION
Read
Ultrasonic
Sensor
S = v.t / 2
Maximum
water level
Yes Show in
Reflector Safe
LCD
Buoy, floating on the
water level to be
measured Stand/ Yes Shown LCD, an alarm
sounds and lights activated
Warning per 5 seconds
Water level
Yes Shown LCD, an alarm
Danger sounds and lights activated
per 1 second
Send sms
Cyllinder
Tube YES
SYSTEM
active
END
FIGURE 2. Mechanical design of river water level FIGURE 3. Flowchart of river water level detection
detection [2]. system [2].
The design of the river water level detection system based on ultrasonic sensors and android as an early warning
of flooding can be seen fully in [2].
Equipment used in the field study consisted of three pieces of river water level detection equipment that were
adapted to the conditions of the fields. The size of the tube was 10 cm in diameter and 1.5 meter in height. The tube
was put on an iron frame that constructed a tower of 2 meters in height. Electronic systems included ultrasonic
sensors, LCD display, voice warning, LED warning, while the microcontroller was designed similar to the river
050003-2
water level detection equipment that was tested previously at laboratory. In addition, the android smartphone
employed in field study utilized GPS technology, Google Maps, JSON, and Geocoding that could be used to provide
the location of the river water level detection equipment, thus, the users could obtain the information of flooding in
particular area.
Research methods
In this study, some methods were employed covering the field study, laboratory research, simulation testing, and
field testing method. Furthermore, this study included analysis at the Laboratory of Electronics Institute of
Technology Adhi Tama Surabaya.
Field study method: At this stage, survey was conducted to determine the location of the installation of river
water level detectors. It was conducted in several districts, namely Bungah, Dukun, and Manyar District that are
included in Gresik Regency. A tributary of Bengawansolo River passes through those district starting from
Bojonegoro continues to Lamongan and the last river’s basin is in Ujungpangkah District, Gresik Regency. In these
districts, floods occur almost every year due to the overflow of Bengawansolo River, particularly during the rainy
season with high frequency of rainfall where the water level often increases rapidly within 45 –60 minutes. In
addition to Bungah, Dukun, and Manyar District, the overflow of Bengawansolo River also affected several villages
including Bedanten, Masangan, Melirang, Sukorejo, Sungon Legowo, and Mojopuro Village.
Laboratory research method: In this stage, several tests were carried out including on the sensor performance
by comparative measurements using a ruler, the sensor accuracy to test the changes of river water level, the
equipment in detecting the water level at the laboratory using a container of water, the warning light and voice, LCD
and delivery of SMS by SMS gateway. Ultrasonic sensors were used to detect the river water level, the
microcontroller was used to control the system operation, hence it run in accordance with the designation. SMS
gateway was used to send information regarding with river water level automatically at any moment. The
application of Android Flood Detections (AFD) has been designed and manufactured so that the smart phone can be
used to receive information from this equipment. All of these elements establish a flood early warning system where
the input is the river water level and the output is information to the public. The system will send data to provide the
information related to river water level in four categories of status, namely SAFE, STAND, WARNING, and
DANGER. Laboratory level testing had been done including testing on the performance of the sensor with a ruler
comparator, the accuracy of the sensor when there was a change of water level, water level detection system,
performance for SMS gateway, and simulation. Simulation testing was conducted on a small river to test the overall
system including the warning light or voice and the application of AFD in real condition. At the end of this stage, a
prototype of the equipment was obtained that proved its reliability. In a subsequent study, the manufacture of three
pieces of such equipment was done with similar specification as the first prototype except for the height of the tower
that was adjusted to the condition of the field.
Simulation testing method: Simulation testing was done on a small river located in front of the campus of
Institut Teknologi Adhi Tama Surabaya. Guidelines to test the equipment at the field was different to the testing as
the laboratory as specified in Table 1. Results of the testing in laboratory research and the complete simulation have
been published and can be seen on [2].
TABLE 1. Laboratory guidelines for field testing of water level
Laboratory Small River
Water Level
Distance (cm) Distance (cm)
SAFE Distance > 60 Distance > 140
STAND 25 < Distance ≤ 60 39 < Distance ≤ 140
WARNING Distance ≤ 25 Distance ≤ 39
Field testing method: Field trials were conducted at three locations that had been assigned according to the
survey. Three equipment were set up on three different locations, namely Dukun District, Bungah District, and
Manyar District in Gresik Regency. The equipment was placed in different locations by using the same reference
based on the distance between sensor and the lowest ground of the location where the water will overflow in the first
time. The distance was determined of 40 cm. The equipment was activated at the same time and tested for
approximately 21 hours. Those equipment had been modified including the cylinder and tower’s height of the
pedestal, while the electronic system had similar specifications as those used in laboratory research and testing
simulations. Guidelines for field testing of river water levels are shown in Table 2.
050003-3
TABLE 2. Simulation guidelines for field testing of water level
Bengawansolo River
Water Level
Distance (cm)
SAFE Distance > 69
STAND 54 < Distance ≤ 69
WARNING 39 < Distance ≤ 54
DANGER Distance ≤ 39

The locations used for field testing were demonstrated in Fig. 4.a, 4.b and 4.c, where the equipment was set on
the riverbank of Bengawansolo River by using the information provided by GPS in an android Smartphone. At these
three locations, water level detection equipment was planted and named as equipment-1, equipment-2, and
equipment-3, which was in Bungah District, Dukun District, and Manyar District, respectively. The establishment of
the equipment was done in accordance with the standards that already set in which the distance of sensors on the
lowest ground level was 40 cm. A ruler was used to determine the distance and the bar is also important as a control
to compare the results of the river water level as provided by the equipment and the condition in real.
FIGURE 4.a. The location and placement of the tool in the Bungah District.
FIGURE 4.b. The location and placement of the tool in the Dukun District
FIGURE 4.c. The location and placement of the tool in the Manyar District.
050003-4
Functionality testing was performed including testing on the readability of the river water level sensor, the SMS
gateway, and the application of AFD. The results indicated that the equipment could function appropriately in
accordance with the results of laboratory tests.
Equipment testing regarding with the water level monitoring was twice. The first test was conducted on March
26th, 2016 when the condition of the river was classified as in stable condition and the changes of water level were
insignificant. The status of river water level was in SAFE condition. Thus, this result was not included in this paper.
On April 2nd, 2016, the river water was recorded to flow rapidly and to show a significant change. The testing was
begun on April 2nd, 2016 at 2:13 pm and finished on April 3rd, 2016 at 11:12 am. Graph of the results of testing for
equipment-1, equipment-2, and equipment-3 were presented in Fig. 5a, 5b, and 5c. The observation on the river
water level of the equipment-1, equipment-2, and equipment-3 were demonstrated in Table 3, 4, and 5.
FIGURE 5.a. Graph of river water level monitoring in the Bungah District.
FIGURE 5.b. Graph of river water level monitoring in the Dukun district.
FIGURE 5.c. Graph of river water level monitoring in the Manyar District.
050003-5
TABLE 3. River water level in the Bungah District
Time Period River Water Level Status
2.13 p.m – 3.49 p.m 74 – 73 cm SAFE
3.50 p.m – 5.42 p.m 69 – 56 cm STAND
3.43 p.m – 08.34 a.m 54 – 40 cm WARNING
08.35 a.m – 09.52 a.m 39 – 38 cm DANGER
09.52 a.m – 11.29 a.m 40 – 45 cm WARNING
TABLE 4. River water level in the Dukun District

2.13 p.m – 3.49 p.m 72 – 68 cm SAFE - STAND
3.50 p.m – 5.42 p.m 68 – 55 cm STAND
5.43 p.m – 08.34 a.m 55 – 38 cm STAND - WARNING - DANGER
08.35 a.m – 09.52 a.m 38 – 37 cm DANGER
09.52 a.m – 11.29 a.m 37 – 41 cm DANGER - WARNING
TABLE 5. River water level in the Manyar District

2.13 p.m – 3.49 p.m 63 – 59 cm STAND
3.50 p.m – 5.42 p.m 58 – 45 cm WARNING
5.43 p.m – 08.34 a.m 44 – 38 cm WARNING – DANGER
08.35 a.m – 09.52 a.m 37 – 36 cm DANGER
09.52 a.m – 11.29 a.m 39 – 35 cm DANGER
Basically, the system sends data to the microcontroller android Smartphone every one minute. By enabling AFD
application that has been installed on the Smartphone, the Smartphone will receive the data and inform the status of
the water level of the river and also determine the status of alarm and light indicator. Subsequently, each data will be
stored. Fig. 6.a., 6.b, 6.c, and 6.d indicate various conditions of the river water level received by the Smartphone.
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
FIGURE 6. (a), (b), (c), and (d). Display information from AFD application on Smartphone.
The entire process of the water level monitoring in this study had been observed by comparing the results of the
monitoring which were provided by the equipment and by direct observation using a ruler in order to obtain the ratio
of the equipment’s accuracy as shown in Table 6.
050003-6
TABLE 6. The accuracy of the results
Category of Observation Average Average
(Distance of Sensor to the Surface of the Water) Accuracy (%) Error (%)
SAFE 96.88 3.13
STAND 96.33 3.67
WARNING 96.91 3.09
DANGER 97.37 2.63
WARNING 98.92 1.08
Average 97.28 2.72
CONCLUSION
Field testing of the river water level detection equipment based on ultrasonic sensors and android Smartphone as
flood early warning was conducted in three study sites and showed good result. The level of accuracy of the
equipment to detect the water levels was 97.28% for some categories of observation. The AFD application on
Smartphone functions appropriately to provide information regarding with the changes of water level of the river.
The graph of analysis results can be used as an evaluation for flooding mitigation at several areas prone to flooding.
REFERENCES
1. E. Basha and D. Rus, “Design of Early Warning Flood Detection Systems for Developing Countries”, IEEE
Trans., p. 612-617 (2007).
2. R. Sulistyowati, H. A. Sujono, and A. K. Mustofa, “Flood Detection System Based on Ultrasonic Sensor and
Microcontroller with SMS Gateway Communication Media,” in Proceeding of The 3rd SAINTEKPAN ITATS,
Surabaya, Indonesia, 2015 p. 43-58.
3. R. Sulistyowati, H. A. Sujono, and A. K. Mustofa, “A River Water Level Monitoring System Using Android –
Based Wireless Sensor Networks for A Flood Early Warning System,” in Proceeding of the 2nd International
Conference on Electrical System, Technology and Information (2015) (Springer 2015), Vol.365, p. 401-408.
4. G. Wang, C. Gu, J. Rice, T. Inoue and C. Li. “Highly Accurate Noncontact Water Level Monitoring using
Continous-Wave Doppler Radar,” IEEE, DOI: 10.1109/WiSNet.2013.6488620 (2013).
5. B. Raj, K. Kalgaonkar, C. Harrison and P. Dietz. “Ultrasonic Doppler Sensing in HCI,” IEEE. DOI:
10.1109/MPRV.2012.17 (2012).
6. Taufiqurrahman, A. Basuki and Y. Albana, “Design of Telemetry System for Water Level Measurement Based
on Ultrasonic,” in Proceeding of Conference on Smart-Green Technology in Electrical and Information Systems,
Bali, Indonesia, 2013 p. 125-130.
7. E. W. Jati and M. Arrofiq, “River Water Level Monitoring System with Views on Twitter Social Networking
Site for Flood Early Warning,” (National Symposium, RAPI XII, UMS, Surakarta, Indonesia, 2013). p. E79-84.
8. K. Prawiroredjo and N. Asteria, “Distance Detector with Ultrasonic Sensor Based on Microcontroller,”
(Research Studies Press, JETri. Vol. 7. No. 2. Trisakti University, Jakarta, Indonesia, 2008). p. 41-52.
050003-7
Phenol biodegradation by immobilized Pseudomonas putida FNCC-0071 cells in
alginate beads
Lukman Nul Hakim, Rochmadi, and Sutijan

Phenol Biodegradation by Immobilized Pseudomonas Putida
FNCC-0071 Cells in Alginate Beads
Lukman Nul Hakim a), Rochmadi b) and Sutijan c)
Chemical Engineering Dept., Faculty of Engineering, Universitas Gadjah Mada

Jalan Grafika No. 2, Bulaksumur, Yogyakarta – 55284, Indonesia.
a)
Corresponding Author: lukman.nul.h@mail.ugm.ac.id
b)
rochmadi@ugm.ac.id
c)
sutijan@ugm.ac.id
Abstract. Phenol is one of industrial liquid waste which is harmful to the environment, so it must be degraded. It can be
degraded by immobilized Pseudomonas putida FNCC-0071 cells. It needs the kinetics and mass transfer data to design
this process which can be estimated by the proposed dynamic model in this study. This model involves simultaneous
diffusion and reaction in the alginate bead and liquid bulk. The preliminary stage of phenol biodegradation process was
acclimatization cells. This is the stage where cells were acclimated to phenol as carbon source (substrate). Then the
acclimated cells were immobilized in alginate beads by extrusion method. The variation of the initial phenol
concentration in the solution is 350 to 850 ppm where 60 g alginate bead contained by cells loaded into its solution in
reactor batch, so then biodegradation occurs. In this study, the average radius of alginate bead was 0.152 cm. The
occurred kinetic reaction process can be explained by Blanch kinetic model with the decreasing of parameter μmax' while
the increasing values of initial phenol concentration in the same time, but the parameters KM, KM',and kt were increasing
by the rising values of initial phenol concentration. The value of the parameter β is almost zero. Effective diffusivity of
phenol and cells are 1.11 x 10-5 ± 4.5% cm2 s-1 and 1.39 x 10-7 ± 0.04% cm2 s-1. The partition coefficient of phenol and
cells are 0.39 ± 15% and 2.22 ± 18%.
INTRODUCTION
Phenols, due to their wide spread usage, are often found in the effluents from certain industrial plants like the
effluent of cooking plants, brown coal distillery plants, pulps and paper industry [1]. The average concentration of
phenol in the wastewater from a wide variety of industrial processes varies between 35 to 800 mg L -1 [2]. Based on
the decree of Minister of Environment Kep.42/MENLH /10/1996, the total phenol content in liquid waste disposal in
exploration and production activities are limited up to 2 mg L-1[3] so that the phenol content must be reduced. The
immobilized Pseudomonas putida cells in alginate beads can degrade high phenol concentration [4], [5], and it
needs the kinetics and mass transfer data to design the process of phenol biodegradation. The proposed model for
process of phenol biodegradation involves simultaneous diffusion and reaction. The values of the physical
parameters are estimated by a mathematical model which the reaction follows the kinetic model of first order [6],
[7], Michaelis – Menten [8], Haldane [9], shown in Table 1. In this table, there are no model involving the rate of
cells death, diffusion cells in the alginate bead, the rate of released cells from alginate bead to liquid bulk, and the
rate reaction of phenol degradation in liquid bulk. Based on research, the cells will die when phenol concentration is
over 4 mM [10] and the cells can diffuse in alginate bead than the cells release into liquid bulk [11], so phenol in
liquid bulk will be consumed by released cells.
Blanch kinetics model is used in this study. It is involved rate of death cells, the transfer of cells in the bead, and
the released cells from calcium alginate bead to the liquid bulk, so that the reactions in the alginate bead and the
liquid bulk occur simultaneously.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 050004-1–050004-9; doi: 10.1063/1.4985518
050004-1
The objective of this study is to set up the dynamic model of phenol biodegradation by immobilized
Pseudomonas putida FNCC-0071 cells. This model is used to estimate the kinetic and mass transfer parameters in
the process of phenol degradation by immobilized cells.
TABLE 1. Modelling of phenol biodegradation by immobilized Pseudomonas putida cells in alginate bead.
Reference Model Kinetics Diffusion Coefficient Reactions in
PX Ps Rate Reaction Cell Phenol Liquid Bulk
Model Diffusion Diffusion
Chung et al [5] - kS First order - DeS -
model
Aksu and Bülbül [6] - kS First order - DeS -
model
Bandhyopadhyay et al [7] - KP max ' S Michaelis – - DeS -
Km S Menten model
Banerjee et al [8] KP max ' S PX Haldane model - -

S2 YX / S
Km S DS (1 k ' X ) 2
K m'
The symbol Yx/s is yield factor of cell, Ds is (cm2 h-1) diffusivity of phenol in water, Des is (cm2 h-1) diffusivity
coefficient of substrate, μx is (Cfu dm-3 h-1) rate reaction of cell, μs is (g dm-3 h-1) rate reaction of substrate, μmax’ is
(h-1) maximum specific growth rate, X is (Cfu dm-3) cell concentration, k is (cm3 g-1 h-1) coefficient of rate reaction,
k’ is (L g-1) specific volume of cell, S is (ppm) substrate concentration, KM is (g dm-3) half – saturation constant, KM’
is (g dm-3) inhibition constant.
THE PROPOSED MODEL

The system in this study consists of the immobilized Pseudomonas putida FNCC-0071 cells in calcium alginate
beads that are suspended in a batch bioreactor containing phenol. The mechanism of phenol biodegradation reaction
follows inhibition cells model proposed by Blanch [12].
X S XS (1)
k2
XS o X new cell (2)
XS S SXS (3)
Ek2
SXS o XS new cell (4)
Equations (1) and (2) describe the cell consumes substrate (phenol) to form complex XS then it forms into new
cell. Equations (3) and (4) describe the complex XS consumes substrate (phenol) to form cell inhibition then it forms
new cell. The Pseudo-Steady-State-Hypothesis (PSSH) is used to obtain the rate of reaction (eq. (5 to 8) :
ES
P max ' S (1 )
KM ' (5)
PX 2
S
KM S
KM '
with
P max ' k2 [ X t ] (6)
k _1 k2 Ek 2 k 3 (7)
KM
k1 k1[k _ 3 Ek 2 ]
050004-2
k _ 3 Ek 2
KM '
k3 (8)
where β is constant of formed new cells, Xt (Cfu cell dm-3) is total cell concentration.
The system of above reactions occurred simultaneously in the alginate bead and the liquid bulk where phenol as
a source of carbon diffused from the liquid bulk to the bead surface. Phenol passed through a layer of film and then
diffused into the alginate bead. The cells in the alginate bead consumed phenol growing out to the alginate bead.
When the cells in bead surface were diffusing into the liquid bulk passing through the film, the cells were
consuming phenol in liquid bulk. In the model, following basic assumptions were applied: i) The alginate beads
have the same radius (R), the uniform matrix and diameter size does not change during the process of
biodegradation. ii) The process was isothermal. iii) The phenol was used only as a carbon source for cells growth.
iv) No reaction occurs in the liquid film.
Based on these assumptions, mass balance equations for two phases, bead and liquid bulk, can be written as
follows.
The mass balance of substrate (eq. (9)) and cell (eq. (10)) in the bead:
ES B
P max ' S B (1 )
wSB 1 w wS B 1 KM '
( r 2 Des ) XB
wt r 2 wr wr YX S
2
KM SB B
S
KM ' (9)
ES B
P max ' S B (1 )
wX B 1 w 2 wX B KM '
(r DeX ) X B (k d k t S B ) X B
wt r 2 wr wr S
2
KM SB B
KM ' (10)
where Dex is (cm2 h-1) diffusivity coefficient of cells, kd is (h-1) coefficient of nature die, kt is (g-1 dm3 h-1) coefficient
of die due to toxicity, SB is (ppm (mg phenol dm-3 the alginate bead)) substrate concentration in the alginate bead,
XB is (Cfu cell dm-3 the alginate bead volume) cell concentration in the alginate bead.
The mass balance of substrate (eq. (11)) and cell (eq. (12) ) in the liquid bulk:
ES L
P max ' S L (1 ) (11)
dS L mb 1 KM '
k SL A( S L S B ) XL
dt 4 r R
YX SL
2
H RV R U B SR 3 KM SL
3 S
KM '
ES L
P max ' S L (1 )
(12)
dX L mb KM '
k XL A( X L X B ) X L (k d k t S B ) X B
dt 4 r R
SL
2
H RV R U B SR 3 KM SL
3 KM '
where kSL is (cm h-1) mass transfer coefficient of substrate in the liquid film, kXB is (cm h-1) mass transfer coefficient
of cell in the liquid film, mb is (g) mass of the alginate bead, SL is (ppm) substrate concentration in the liquid bulk,
Vr is (dm-3) reactor volume, XL is (Cfu dm- 3) cell concentration in the liquid bulk, εR is (dm3 dm-3) volume fraction
of solution in the reactor, ϕS is (dm3 liquid bulk dm-3 the alginate bead) partition coefficient of substrate, ϕX is (dm3
liquid bulk dm-3 the alginate bead) partition coefficient of cell, ρB is (g dm-3) density of the alginate bead.
Initially (t = 0), the alginate beads were assumed without phenol, the uniform cell concentrations were assumed
beads and the cells were not present in the liquid bulk. Therefore, the initial conditions of substrate in the liquid bulk
(eq. (13) and (15)) and cell (eq. (14) and (16)) are as follows:
when t = 0:
S B (r ,0) 0 for 0 d r d R (13)
X B (r ,0) X0
for 0 d r d R (14)
050004-3
SL S L0 (15)
XL 0 (16)
and the boundary conditions of substrate in the liquid bulk (eq. (17) and (19)) and cell (eq. (18) and (20)) are as
follows:
when r = 0:
wS B (17)
(0, t ) 0
wr
wX B
(0, t ) 0
wr (18)
when r = R:
wS B SB (19)
Des ( R, t ) k SL ( S L r R
)
wr IS
wX B XB (20)
DeX ( R, t ) k XL ( X L r R
)
wr IX
The above differential equations can be modified by Method of Line (MOL) to obtain linear differential equation
system solved with MATLAB subrutine called ode15s. The values of DeX, DeS, kSL, kXL, μmax’, KM’, KM, YX/S, kd, kt,
ϕX, ϕS and β are obtained by minimization for Sum of Absolute Relative Distances (SARD) in eq. (21) with
MATLAB subrutine called fminsearch.
n S S Ldata i X X Ldata i X X Bdatai
SARD ¦ L sim ulationi L sim ulationi B sim ulationi
i 1 S Ldata i X Ldata i X Bdatai
(21)
The symbol n is number of data points, SL0 is (ppm) initial substrate concentration in the liquid bulk, t is (h) time,
XB0 is (Cfu cell dm-3 the alginate bead volume) initial cell concentration in the alginate bead, R is (dm) outside
radius, r is (dm) radial position in the alginate bead.
MATERIAL AND METHODS
Material for Immobilization

Microorganism: This study used Pseudomonas putida FNCC-007 cells (Laboratory of Food Nutrition Study
Center, Universitas Gadjah Mada ).
Mineral medium: the mineral medium as suggested by Rehm and Bettmann [13]: K2HPO4 1 g L-1 (Merck
Millipore; Purity 98%, Molecular Weight 174 g mol-1), (NH4)2SO4 0.5 g L-1 (Merck Millipore; Purity 99.5%,
Molecular Weight 132.14 g mol-1), NH4NO3 1 g L-1 (Merck Millipore; Purity 95%, Molecular Weight 80.01 g mol-
1
), MgSO4·7H2O 0.5 g L-1 (Merck Millipore; Purity 99%, Molecular Weight 246.48 g mol-1), NaCl 0.5 g L-1 (Merck
Millipore; Purity 99.5%, Molecular Weight 58.44 g mol-1), FeSO4 0.02 g L-1 (Merck Millipore; Purity 99.5%,
Molecular Weight 278.02 g mol-1), CaCl2·2H2O 0.02 g L-1 (Merck Millipore; purity 99 %, Molecular Weight 147.01
g mol-1).
Chemicals: Sodium Alginate (Sigma Aldrich; Viscosity 4 to 12 cp, 1% in H2O (25 oC)), CaCl2·2H2O (Merck
Millipore; Purity 99 %, Molecular Weight 147.01 g mol-1), Phenol (Merck Millipore; Purity 99%, Molecular Weight
94.11 g mol-1), Nutrient Broth (DifcoTM ; composition: Gelatin Peptone 5 g L-1, Beef Extract 3 g L-1),
Phenol and cell concentration determination. Sodium Nitroprusside (Merck Millipore; Purity 99%, Molecular
Weight 297.95 g mol-1), Hydroxylamine Hydrochloride (Merck Millipore; Purity 99%, Molecular Weight 69.49 g
mol-1) NaH2PO4 (Merck Millipore; Purity 99%, Molecular Weight 156.02 g mol-1). NaOH (Merck Millipore; Purity
99%, Molecular Weight 40 g mol-1), NaH2PO4 (Merck Millipore; Purity 99%, Molecular Weight 156.02 g mol-1),
Agar Bacteriological (OXOID).
050004-4
Method for Acclimatization
One loop of cell from culture transferred into 5 mL of Nutrient Broth (NB) were incubated for 24 hours at 30oC.
This culture was changed into 95 mL solution containing 20 ml of mineral medium and 75 mL of NB with 50 ppm
of phenol concentration. It was incubated in a rotary shaker at temperature of 30oC and then it was stirred at 120 rpm
for 24 hours. Ten mililiters of solution from this incubation was transferred into 100 mL of solution consisting of 20
mL of mineral medium solution and 80 mL solution with 50 ppm of phenol concentration in a 250 mL flask
erlenmeyer. Furthermore, the incubation process was repeated in a rotary shaker at temperature of 30oC and then it
was stirred at 120 rpm for 24 hours. These treatments were used as inoculum for biodegradation studies in order to
ensure that the cells can consume phenol as source of carbon and energy.
Preparation of The Immobilized Cells in Alginat Beads

Sodium alginate was dissolved in distilled water to produce 4% concentration of alginate solution. The solution
was kept for at least 1 hour to allow deaeration. Before using it, the cells were uniformly dispersed into the alginate
solution (ratio up to 1:1) [14]. The alginate-cells solution was charged in a syringe pump with the stainless steel
needle, 23 G. While this solution was being extruded into a 50 mM of CaCl2 solution in a glass beaker, CaCl2
solution was stirred with a magnetic stirer at low speed. The position of needle tip is about 1.5 cm from the top from
CaCl2 solution. The beads are leave to stand for 1 hour to insure full gelation and than the beads are filter on a filter
paper where pory size is 11μm.
Biodegradation Experiments
All batch runs were performed at 30oC in 2 L Erlenmeyer flask (working volume 1 L) aerated on a rotary shaker
(150 rpm). Sixty grams of alginate beads contain 1.15 x 109 Cfu g-1 of Pseudomonas putida FNCC-0071 cells are
loaded into 1 L of the phenol solution (800 mL distilled water, 20 mL mineral salt medium) of the phenol initial
concentration variation ranges from 350 to 850 ppm. The samples of phenol and released cells at various times were
analyzed as described in section 3.5.
Analytical Methods
The measurement of algnate bead diameter was adapted from the method of Purwaningsih et al [15]. The images
of 300 alginate beads were taken by using digital cameras with Image Pro Plus software to process then measured in
diameter. For analizing phenol concentration, the procedure was done based on the reaction between phenol, sodium
nitroprusside, and hydroxylamine hydrochloride in a basic buffered medium in alkaline medium, the phenol group
was deprotonated and makes the benzene ring very reactive. The nitroso group of the nitroprusside attacks the
benzene ring and the reaction takes place providing a blue product with a maximum absorbance at 700 nm [16]. The
estimation was carried out following the method of Kang et al [17]. For the cell concentration, 1 g the bead was
dissolved by 100 ml 0.9% (w/v) NaCl solution with agitated at room temperature and 250 rpm. One mililiter of
samples were taken in order to periodicaly analyze the cell concentration in solution and were evaluated by pour
plate method [18]. All of the experimental data were analyzed at least twice. The values were used in the calculation
mostly the arithmetic average of the experimental data.

The size of alginate beads was not uniform (Fig. 1a) when the average radius of 0.152 cm was obtained. The
distribution of alginate bead was caused by ununiform alginate bead shapes. The shapes of alginate bead were
spherical shape and tear shape (Fig. 1b). When the alginate solution was extruded in CaCl2 solution, the volume of
CaCl2 solution was increased, so that the distance between needle tip with surface of CaCl2 solution was changed.
Chan et al [19] have reported that the distance between needle tip with surface of CaCl2 solution had the effect of
alginate bead shapes.
050004-5
Tear
Spherical
(b)
(a)
FIGURE 1. (a) Alginate bead distribution, (b) The shapes of alginate bead.
The experimental data of phenol and released cell concentrations were shown in Fig. 2a and 2b when the
immobilized Pseudomonas putida FNCC-0071 cells in alginate beads could completely degradate 300 ppm of
initial phenol concentration after 18 hours (Fig. 2a). In the beginning of biodegradation process, the phenol
concentration decrease slightly because phenol in the liquid bulk began to diffuse in the alginate beads. When
immobilized cells in alginate beads were entered in the phenol solution, the cells were released in the phenol
solution (Fig. 2b). The released cells occurred because of the alginate beads leakage. The mineral salt medium like
phosphate and sodium ions in the phenol solution can promote destabilization of calcium alginate beads that remove
calcium ions and exchange calcium ions in the alginate beads, so that the alginate beads leak [20].
(a) (b)
FIGURE 2. (a) Profiles of phenol concentrations in the liquid bulk, (b) Profiles of released cell concentrations in the liquid bulk.
The immobilized cells in alginate beads could completely degrade 600 ppm of initial phenol concentration at 48
hours (Fig. 3a) and the experimental data of released cells were shown in Fig. 3b. It was different from free cells in
initial concentration of phenol 600 ppm (Fig. 3a) where the cells could not completely degrade phenol because the
cells were inhibited by phenol, so that the process was stalled at 300 ppm of phenol concentration. The cells in
alginate beads at 600 ppm of initial phenol concentration were not inhibited because the mass transfer limitations led
the phenol concentration in the alginate beads that would be different with the phenol concentration in the liquid
bulk. The cells in the alginate beads were inhibited of 850 ppm of initial phenol concentration where the
immobilized cells could not completely degrade phenol, and the process of biodegradation was stalled at 332 ppm of
050004-6
phenol concentration (Fig.3a). In Fig. 3b (SL0= 850 ppm), when the process occured above 52 hours, many released
cells were die, so that the cell concentration in the liquid bulk decreases.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 3. (a) Profiles of phenol concentrations in the liquid bulk, (b) Profiles of released cell concentrations in the liquid bulk.
The experimental data of phenol and released cell concentrations were fit to the model in Fig. 2 and 3 and the
corresponding fit parameters are given in Table 2. But the experimental data of released cell concentrations at 300
ppm of initial phenol concentration were not fit to the model above 30 hours (Fig. 2b) where the cells stay alive. The
cells consumed the alginate beads as source carbon because the Pseudomonas putida cells have the alginate lyase
enzyme [21] which can decompose polymer alginate to a simple compound [22], but this explanation required
further experiments. The effective diffusivity of phenol in the alginate bead was 1.11 x 10-5 ± 4.5% cm2 s-1
approaching the phenol diffusivity in water (2.61 x 10-5 cm2 s-1 at 30°C) and the effective diffusivity of
Pseudomonas putida FNCC-0071 cell in the alginate bead was 1.39 x 10-7 ± 0.04% cm2 s-1 approaching the
diffusivity Serratia marcescens cell in the alginate bead (0.45 x 10-7 cm2 s-1) [11]. The movement of cells in bead
was slower than the movement of phenol in the bead where the effective diffusivity of cell was smaller than the
effective diffusivity of phenol. The partition constant of phenol below 1 and cell above 1 mean that no phenol
adsorbed into alginate beads and there was an interaction between alginate and cells [23]. The initial phenol
concentration affected to the kinetic parameters where the parameter μ max’ decreased with the increasing values of
initial phenol concentration, but the parameters Km, Km', and kt increased with the rising values of initial phenol
concentration. The value of the parameter β indicated that the inhibited cells could not grow to form new cells where
the mechanism reaction at equation (4) was not happening, so that the Haldane model will be formed. When the
Blanch model in equation (9) to (12) was changed by the Haldane model, the experimental data were fitted by this
model (Fig. 4) had parameters value equal to the parameter value of Blanch model (Table 3).
(a) (b)
FIGURE 4. (a) Profiles of phenol concentrations in the liquid bulk (Haldane model), (b) Profiles of released cell concentrations
in the liquid bulk (Haldane model).
050004-7
.TABLE 2. The optimum value of parameter value from data analysis using Blanch model
Parameter Parameter Value Parameter Value Parameter Value
(350 ppm) (600 ppm) (850 ppm)
Des (cm2 s-1) 1.27 x 10-5 1.219 x 10-5 1.186 x 10-5
Dex (cm2 s-1) 1.383 x 10-7 1.47 x 10-7 1.477 x 10-7
kSL (cm s-1) 3.76 x 10-3 1.08 x 10-3 3.69 x 10-3
kXB (cm s-1) 3.11 x 10-10 7.81 x 10-11 1.636 x 10-8
ϕS 0.39 0.33 0.33
ϕX 2.412 2.22 2.21
μmax’ (h-1) 4.56 2.37 4.564
KM (g L-1) 0.13 0.922 1.112
KM’ (g L-1) 0.073 0.697 3.33
YX/S (Cfu g-1) 1.69 x 1015 2.31 x 1013 8.56 x 1012
β 2.48 x10-8 1.29 x10-11 1.128 x10-11
kd (h-1) 0.47 0.087 1.118
kt (g L-1 h-1) 8.85 x 10-4 0.155 0.551
TABLE 3. The optimum value of parameter value from data analysis using Heldane model
Parameter Parameter Value Parameter Value Parameter Value
(350 ppm) (600 ppm) (850 ppm)
Des (cm2 s-1) 1.27 x 10-5 1.219 x 10-5 1.186 x 10-5
Dex (cm2 s-1) 1.383 x 10-7 1.47 x 10-7 1.477 x 10-7
kSL (cm s-1) 3.77 x 10-3 1.08 x 10-3 3.69 x 10-3
kXB (cm s-1) 3.11 x 10-10 7.81 x 10-11 1.636 x 10-8
ϕS 0.38 0.33 0.33
ϕX 2.246 2.22 2.21
μmax’ (h-1) 4.56 2.37 4.564
KM (g L-1) 0.13 0.922 1.112
KM’ (g L-1) 0.073 0.697 3.33
YX/S (Cfu g-1) 1.68 x 1015 2.31 x 1013 8.56 x 1012
kd (h-1) 2.48 x10-8 0.087 1.118
kt (g L-1 h-1) 0.47 0.155 0.551
CONCLUSION
The Blanch kinetic model can explain the reaction with the parameter of μmax’ which is decreasing while the
increasing values of initial phenol concentration occurs in the same time, but the parameters of Km, Km', and kt were
increasing with the rising value of initial phenol concentration. The value of the parameter β is almost zero.
Effective diffusivity of phenol and cells are 1.11 x 10-5 ± 4.5% cm2 s-1 and 1.39 x 10-7 ± 0.04% cm2 s-1. The partition
coefficient of phenol and cells are 0.39 ± 15% and 2.22 ± 18%.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors would like to thank to Department of Chemical Engineering and Biotechnology, Universitas Gadjah
Mada, for providing the facilities of this research project.
REFERENCES
1. NPCS Board of Consultants and Engineers, Water and Air Effluents Treatment Handbook, (Asia pacific
business press inc. India, 2000) p. 317.
050004-8
2. Isyuniarto, W. Usada, A. Purwadi, and Suryadi, Degradasi Fenol Dalam Limbah Pengolahan minyak Bumi
Dengan Ozon, in Prosiding PPI – PDIPTN, Jogjakarta, 2005. ISSN 0216 – 3128. p. 76-81.
3. Kementerian Lingkungan Hidup, Keputusan Menteri Negara Lingkungan Hidup Nomor: Kep-
42/Menlh/10/1996 Tentang Baku Mutu Limbah Cair Bagi Kegiatan Minyak dan Gas Serta Panas Bumi,
(Kementerian Lingkungan Hidup, 2002), p. 109.
4. A. M. Hannaford and C. Kuek, Journal of Industrial Microbiology and Biotechnology 121-126, 22 (1999).
5. K. Bandhyopadhyay, D. Das, and B. R. Maiti, (Applied Microbiology and Biotechnology, 891–895, 51
(1999).
6. T. P. Chung, H. Y. Tseng, and R. S. Juang, Process Biochemistry, 1497–1507, 38 (2003).
7. Aksu and G. Bülbül, Enzyme and Microbial Technology, 344–348, 25 (1999).
8. K. Bandhyopadhyay, D. Das, P. Bhattacharyya, and B. R. Maiti, Biochemical Engineering Journal. 179–
186, 8 (2000).
9. Banerjee, J. M. Modak, K. Bandopadhyay, D. Das, and B. R. Maiti, Journal of Biotechnology, 211–223, 87
(2001).
10. M. Putrins, H. Llves, L. Lilje, M. Kivisaar and R. Horak, BMC Microbiology, 110-122, 10 (2010).
11. C. Quirós, M. Rendueles, L. A. García, M. Díaz, Biotechnol Tech, 809-814, 9 (1995).
12. H. W. Blanch., Biochemical Engineering, (Marce Decker.inc, New York, 1996 ), p. 162-275.
13. H. J, Rehm and H. Bettmann, Appl Microbiol Biotechnol, 285-290, 20 (1984).
14. D. Poncelet, V. Babak, C. Dulieu, A. Picot, Colloids and Surfaces A: Physicochemical and Engineering
Aspects, 171–176, 155 (1999).
15. W. Purwanisngsih, Rochmadi, A. Prasetya end W. Hasokowati, Pembuatan Microcalsul dari Urea
Formaldehid: Pengaruh Waktu dan perbandingan Reaktan pada Pembutan Resin Terhadap Proses
MicroEncapsulasi, in Prosiding seminar reakayasa kimia dan proses, Semarang, 2010. ISSN: 1411 – 4216.
p. E-12-1 – E-12-6.
16. E. Ro´denas-Torralba. A´. Morales-Rubio. M. D. L. Guardia, Anal Bioanal Chem, 138–144, 383 (2005).
17. C. Kang, Y. Wang, R. Li, Y. Du, J. Li, B. Zhang, and Y. Du, A, Microchemical Journal, 161–171, 64
(2000).
18. Jutono, J. Soedarsono, S. Hartadi, S. K. S, S. D, and Soesanto, Pedoman Praktikum Mikrobiologi Umum
Untuk Perguruan Tinggi, (Departement Microbiologi, Fakultas Pertanian, Universitas Gadjah Mada,
Yogyakarta, 1980), p. 145-156.
19. E. S. Chan, B. B. Lee, P. Ravindra, and D. Poncelet, Journal of Colloid and Interface Science, 63-72, 338
(2009).
20. K. Buchholz, V. Kasche, U. T. Bornscheuer, Biocatalysts and Enzyme Technology, (Willey Black Well,
Germany, 2012).
21. T. Y. Wong, L. A. Preston, and N. L. Schiller, Annu. Rev. Microbiol, 289–340, 54 (2000).
22. H. S. Kim, C. Lee, and E. Y. L, Biotechnology and Bioprocess Engineering, 843-851, 16 (2011).
23. J. Oyaas, Storro, S. Hallvard and D. W. Levine, Biotechnology and Bioengineering, 492-500, 47 (1995).
050004-9
The kinetics, current efficiency, and power consumption of electrochemical dye
decolorization by BD-NCD film electrode
Ervin Nurhayati, Yaju Juang, and Chihpin Huang


!"

# $%$

&'&(')
# $%$

!
"
#

##$%!&
' &

! (
!
")
&*'&'
#(

&

'( (
'((*(
''
( '

'
'&' &
' +

' ,'

'

,
&'

'
(
(

& -

'

(

' *& '# '' ,&
# * '.
**

/ &0)

*&

'

(

*
''
***
(&
'.
1 #*'.
"

''
&2-)")
*'&'
'

*
*

* '
' (
* &

'*

3'*** %%
%&3& "(
*

*
'.

4
'**

*
'
''.

5$%60)
&
'
'

(

786( *(&*8 8#9 & "2&*
'&*'
8:#9 #" 2&*#0)

#$%&#%
)
&*'&
* &*

'*
' &

(

*#(
' &*
&'; < +

'

'

';<

&&&''&

';< 1

'
'

'

*
'

*&*

'

*

' &&
'
* '(&'

''
*

(
'((
=&
;< -
*

'

&

'
&
' ' &
'' ''

&
'
&
'(
(

& +
'
*' &
'(
(

& &
'
&
'
'
' (
'((* '
&
3(
'((
*,'
''(,

,'

''
*&(

;<
' ,
'
(
' ((
*
'
1 (

'((*"
&2-))*'&*
>8?;8<

'(
#'(

'
&
'"&
'*

'(',;:>7< '
&
'
*-))'
(
(

&
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 050005-1–050005-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985519
050005-1
@
( &
'

&
* (
(
' -))
**
*&

& 1AB0:CB0DA11@0
D0
(
'
(

,

'(;$< B
*
''&
'
0)
2
*&$%>
%%6',

-))
*&*&
**'8:" ,.

&
.'''
'
''( "'
'
''
'
# %
++

'.

B;$< 3 (' &
'
&*,
* &
-))

;$<
+(

*"

''2-)")
(

*

*'
& &
'
2/"?)
&'

'

*
&
'&
&;E<

; % < + ' &
''
.
(

'
'
&
*&

'
+(
*

*''(
&
*

'#(

='
'

&
'

'*-)")2++D2++
2++(

;E< +
'
*(
(

&' &
''
.

-)")'
&*&*
',

'.
**; <
0

=
'* ' **

*

'
**

',
3 *''(

#*'.
**

3
'

(

'

'
'&*(
(

'
&
'
**
( &* '.

#
'!$#!()!'*%
1 *-)")*'& *
*B
(

"*'
&?)2/?)

1 '+ 1
(

'( ; %< -)")*'&
'
'
*'.
',
(
'#'',&

'''('& (/ 2
2 :%&F

F

'
,&2'&G%%%&F("*'('
'

2 :%&F(
%%&F&" *'(
2/ 2 ) ',
,&0@D
'

1)B&(*& B
&'(
''
(**

'*100)

H?A'

3I

.
' #(
&
' ''( (
&'

(
(

1 ,&,
((
''
%&AF3I2 :&JK'*

8 *

'

'

''*%&3A& (
'*
2
( B08 -)")
D'
( *

*& (
'

' / ***'*

'%&AF3I(
'
B08 :&J2
( B08

K' :&J2
( '08'
D
'
&'(
*&

&'(

'.* 0)
2
)@A8%%%
B &HB3
H?A'

2
H% %B &

+ H?A'
&
&
#(
' *88&(

#*3I
.2G

#H?
$%:I
%&(&

* '.

,''
$)&()!#)&))#%
+

1
'
*****

#*'.
-)")*'&',&(

:%&F3I' ',

050005-2
#,&$- B &
*2
'''('&
2*'('

*'#''
,&

+
(#
&
*

,'*

'' '(
*& *
* '( '

'*

'(#
''( ,'

'
''
;E< + '

***&

';I <
(
'; > :<

';E<
+&

*
'* '(

*'' +'
'

2('&' '&
258( '
'
2 %('&
' '&
25$ 1 &(

'
; : I<

*&
*

**''

#,&$. ***

'2
88&H?A?

2
;E<
2*
#** * %&* '.
2'' :&J
B08B08

:&JK''083I%&F" %&3&"

:%&F
050005-3
#,&$/ ***'2
88&H?A?

2
;E<
2*#**
* %&* '.
2'' :&JK'

& B08

0'3I%&F" %&3&"

:%&F
/ * %"&'.

*&

*#&'2/

* ' '.
& *
2#G% :& " &
'*
2#G% %E
&" 1

' '.
*

&
'

(

***% $%
% %7&" '2/

1 *** ***'.
-)")*'&'(

'
/ 8 ( '*
'*** %%
%&3& " /& *'

' '
*
'.
/ '*& * %&*
''*#&'

***% I7 % I$
% %I7& "

(
'* %%
%&3&"'
#,&$0 ***

'* %%
%&3&"2
88&H?A?

2*
#** * %&* '.
2'' :&JK' B083I
%&F" %&3&"

:%&F
050005-4
+

,&
'

(
*&
F* % & F " 3I 8
''
'&&

=
/: (
'3I

;E %< 1

*

* 88 &
#

*'&
'
#
*
.2G(

&

*

#H?
$%:I
%&
**&
* '.

,''
1 ( &
*3I

*
''&
'.;E %<
/I (
'.

' * :%&( ( &* '(

&2E%6 1 &
'(
& &'('& 1 ***#
/I2 (

* :%"&''(
% % & " ( '
*

*&
''% %%&"
#,&$1 2
H?A?'
*3I8 ''-)")
2 '

*3I
288& '2$%&.2:I&

,'2%& &2'' :&JK'
3I%&F" %&3&"'

F
#,&$2 2
1 88&H?A?

'

*8
2 *
#*
050005-5

1
'
**
(&*-)")

0)

(

#*& ,&
'

( (
*&
F*%&F " 3I
8 ''
(/ 7
#,&$3 0)

8
'

2'' :&JK'3I%&
F" %&3&"'

F
B&'
';E<

*0)
&*

(

1
*0) &
(
'
( 0)

'& A=&**

& 1
'

&'
*
&
( 0)&
&
&
'('
A**'

**

* & 1
*
&*'
0)2
10
*

*''(
'(
&'
,&('
1 *

*,&
'(
*
& /&

&
0)&
&* *
( 1 0)
'

*0)A1 0)'
'
'

'
; 7< 1

(

*
**
(&
''

1
'**24*
,

''
*& 0)
'
*''('
; $<
⎛ %% − % ⎞
,& = *+ ⎜ ⎟
⎝ $ ⎠
( 0)%
0)
&
',&
2& "
&G%2
'
2'L
+ 23//

M
2EI8$%&' " L? '&* ''2& "
$
,=
'&
2= " + (#( 8
0)*F*&
::
&F" 2&
'***5$%6
'*%&3& :&-)") 4

''
% 782786
'**
1 4&'
+2

**&
; E<,

4

'(
'&%

0)&
,&
*'

''
+('

4(

** 1 *&2#9 &"(

''
*''(=
'(;%<
( &!!
& =
+ I%%
050005-6
( H''

'''
2?+ 23 ''&2
? '&*

'2F 1 ***' &
'
&
'*&
*&,#*0)&2BD; <
*''(
*( &!!
& =
I%% ,&%
( HFF
'''
'2?$ =
'&
*,20 8&'"
40)

'***0)&
' /''(=
2
2 ***
* &
''
8 8#9 &"
8:#9 #" &*'&*'

*#
0)&'
%(&)#%
1

3I ',
-)")
(
* '
'
*
* 3 I
'.
1
'
'
***
'
*'.
0

'

( '

&''&,
&(

'

&* & 4
'**

*
''.

5$%60)
&
'(

786( *(&*8 8#9 & "2'&
8:#9 #"
2#0)

!%4(,'
1
(
*

'B'*1
(
4
BEE" ""%%E"%8

J*&3**
*1
(
4
% "" 7"3"%$"B "%$ 1
('
''#,

BD3D ) **B
1 '+3+B
#

**
'

M

+1+3% I
$ $)
3 J D'
J J

B D
'&
3 ?

&''4 2 ' &
B(#% % %:>7
1 @
3 / &
3 3 /
&

1 @
) 3 1# 2 )
&
' & '- ? 3%%: > %
4 N#
#*' &/'- ? 3&
&%%7
8 J 4
J 9# O 9
J 3
#J ) K
-'4 F
.

J J&, 9 B#4 J B(
3
' & 72%%%7E>$%8
: 1 F- J
' ) 4'K - J
' ) 4'3
' 82%%E EI:>7E
I 3 J
P." 'J 3 S 3'*
J

$2%%$ ::> 7
7 3 / &

1 @
) 3 1# )
&' &'3&
&%%:
$ J D
'
"T.J JU."1
@ 4
"BT .
J
P."' F

+
' & % 2% > $
E

B 8:2% I %%> %7
%

@ D
B
B D* 1 ' %2% $E>E:

J @
#&

" B D* 1 ' :I2% : %87> %:I
@ D
'&
"4 / F 4.&T")= 4 DV'
+ 4.T'. F

@
1"D
'&

& $ 2% %I>
J J

B B F

4 -
#
@
B

B D* 1 ' 7E2% :I>I
8 @ -
(.
/

X#
F 4'#J B
.#J 4
@'K )
(#1 0(#
B )
K
J B'#
)
& @'
J
E2% > 7
: 0 B
'B @

..3 4
'
4 B'9
@ 82%%EI%>7
I ) @
#&
4#K&K D
'
' & 1 ' $2%%:E$> %:
7 @ -
#J 9 J'# @ J '9
@ 2 EEE7>8
050005-7
$ J D
..
&''4 2 ' & B(#% % :>
:8
E &'' D'
3' ' & 2 EE %$>
% B '
J D
..
4 '
1 J )
'
72% 8$> :
@
) F B'
# B 1 ' 8E2% : E> %
050005-8
Drainage network optimization for inundation mitigation case study of ITS Surabaya
Yang Ratri Savitri and Umboro Lasminto

Drainage Network Optimization for Inundation Mitigation
Case Study of ITS Surabaya
Yang Ratri Savitri1 a), Umboro Lasminto1
1
Hydraulic and Coastal Engineering Laboratory, Department of Civil Engineering, Institut Teknologi Sepuluh
Nopember. Kampus ITS Sukolilo, Surabaya JawaTimur – 60111, Indonesia.
a)
Corresponding author: yangratrisavitri@gmail.com
Abstract. Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember (ITS) Surabaya is one of engineering campus in Surabaya with an area
of ± 187 ha, which consists of building and campus facilities. The campus is supported by drainage system planned
according to the ITS Master Plan on 2002. The drainage system is planned with numbers of retention and detention pond
based on the city concept of Zero Delta Q concept. However, in the rainy season, it frequently has inundation problems in
several locations. The problems could be identified from two major sources, namely the internal campus facilities and
external condition connected with the city drainage system. This paper described the capabilities of drainage network
optimization to mitigate local urban drainage problem. The hydrology-hydraulic investigation was done by utilizing the
Storm Water Management Model (SWMM) developed by US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). The mitigation
is based on several alternative that based on the existing condition and regarding the social problem. The study results
showed that the management of the flow from external source could reduce final stored volume of the campus main
channel by 31.75 %.
INTRODUCTION
Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember (ITS) is one of engineering campuses in Surabaya that is envisioned as an
Eco-Campus, thus, its development should concern the environmental aspects. The campus has ± 187 ha area
consisting of building and campus facilities. The Eco-Campus concept is represented by the greenery, the forest, and
a number of ponds that are designed as water retainer and flow control in the rainy season. The drainage system
itself is designed based on ITS Master Plan of 2002 [1]. Furthermore, as one of the developed urban sites, the
campus should accord with the Surabaya Drainage Master Plan (SDMP), which is the master plan for drainage in
Surabaya City. SDMP has been implemented since 2002 and it introduced a concept called the “Zero Delta Q” that
obliges the developed area to manage its own drainage system hence the developed surface run-off will not give
more pressure to the city drainage channel. However, despite of the implementation of this master plan, the campus
site has prevailing problem with inundation particularly in the rainy season. The site investigation showed that the
problem was not only caused by the drainage facilities condition, but also by the condition of external drainage
channel which is connected to the city drainage system. Therefore, a drainage management is planned by the campus
authority to mitigate the problems in which it should accord with the concept of city drainage plan to avoid the
further problem in the campus area.
Literature Review and Data Collection

Existing Drainage System
The existing drainage system is mainly based on the ITS Master Plan (2002) [1] that is supported by site survey
and channel measurement. Based on the master plan, the drainage networks on the campus consist of 3 (three)
drainage systems, with the downstream connected to the Kalidami River and 2 (two) storage area. The system is a
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 050006-1–050006-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985520
050006-1
part of SDMP sub-system of Kalidami River and Bosem Kalidami. The main drainage system schematic for the
campus is described at Fig. 1.
East Channel
West Channel
Middle Channel
FIGURE 1. The main drainage system schematic of ITS Surabaya.
Based on a previous study,, there are 7 (seven) drainage zones on the campus site described as:
1. Graha ITS drainage zone

2. Product Design drainage zone
3. FMIPA drainage zone
4. Undeveloped land drainage zone
5. ITS Stadium drainage zone
6. Farming land drainage zone
7. Rectorate building drainage zone
In fact, only the Graha ITS that had adequate drainage facilities. Most of the zones required facility improvement
such as the enhanced channel capacity. In addition, the undeveloped area should have an integrated drainage system
as planned previously in the master plan. This condition was presumed as the main cause for the inundation
problems.
Hydrology and Hydraulic Condition
The hydrological flow was estimated based on the rainfall-runoff transformation that would be solved by
SWMM. The rainfall data of 25 years (1990 – 2015) was obtained from nearby station, Keputih Rainfall Station.
050006-2
Subsequently, it was statistically analyzed with three different frequency distributions, which were Pearson Type III,
Log Pearson Type III, and Gumbel. The frequency distribution analysis showed the rainfall data was in accordance
to the distribution of Log Pearson Type III based on Kolmogorov-Smirnov test. The rainfall return period then
obtained as shown in Table 1. Subsequently, the rainfall data was distributed on 4 (four) hour duration as an input in
the SWMM.
TABLE 1. Rainfall return period based on Log Pearson Type III Distribution.
Return Period Probability of Occurrence Rainfall Depth
2 0.50 100 mm
5 0.20 134 mm
10 0.10 162 mm
The hydraulic condition in the study area was based on the data in the ITS Master Plan combined with field
investigation of channel dimension. The measurement was done in several primary channels of the local system
based on the field investigation.
Model Building
Hydrology simulation needs several data (i.e., rainfall data, spatial data, and land use data). In this study, rainfall
data was used to obtain rainfall distribution from rainfall return period data. Spatial data was divided into sub-
catchments based on drainage network with an assumption each sub-catchment flows into each drainage channel.
Land use data was used to determine impervious and pervious percentages as data input in SWMM model.
Hydraulic simulation needs several data including the drainage network, cross section and long section
drainage channel, length, slope, and cross section material. Those data were used as input data in SWMM
model and combined with hydrology data to obtain the water surface elevation for each channel. Hydraulics
simulation was performed with two input data, namely nodes and links.
Storm Water Management Model (SWMM)
Storm Water Management Model (SWMM) is a rainfall-runoff simulation software developed by the US
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). SWMM is a free open source software and already recognized as a
reliable tool to solve the urban storm water problems. The essence of SWMM model could be described as two part:
the hydrological rainfall-runoff computation and the hydraulic routing computation [2].
SWMM uses nonlinear reservoir model developed by [3] that conceptualizes a sub-catchment as a rectangular
surface that has a uniform slope and width that drains into a single outlet channel. The process of surface runoff was
presented schematically with the inflow from precipitation (rainfall and snowmelt) and the losses from evaporation
and infiltration. Subsequently, the net was established in the sub-catchment area with the ponded water above the
depression storage depth will become the runoff outflow (q) (Fig. 2.). An equation was explained from the
conservation of mass in which the net change in depth (d) per unit time (t) is the net difference between the inflow
and outflow rate of the sub-catchment:
wd
ie f q (1)
wt
Where i is the rate of rainfall + snowmelt, e is the surface evaporation rate, f is the infiltration rate and q is the
runoff rate. Where all the fluxes (i, e, f, and q) are expressed as flow rate per unit area. The flow across sub
catchment is assumed to behave like a uniform flow in a rectangular channel with width W, height d-ds, and slope S.
SWMM also capable to use an approximation of surface runoff by using several well-known method such as the
runoff coefficient method and SCS curve number method.
050006-3
FIGURE 2. Nonlinear reservoir model schematic.
The hydraulic routing in SWMM was done by solving the dynamic wave equation for one-dimensional flow.
Dynamic wave formulation was used because of its capabilities to include the storage, backwater, entrance/exit
losses, flow reversal, and pressurized flow. Furthermore, SWMM is capable to run a steady flow computation and a
kinematic wave computation. This capability is known as the SWMM advantage, because the software can solve the
rainfall-runoff simulation and dynamic wave routing simultaneously (Fig. 2).
Existing Drainage System Simulation
The simulation of existing drainage condition was described from the model building process. Based on the
newest drainage system, the map was digitized and divided into sub-catchment area based on the hydrological
boundary of each sub-catchment. The sub-catchment area entailed several parameters, which were the rainfall
station, the outlet from sub-catchment overland flow into the drainage channel, sub-catchment area, the width of
overland flow, percentage of impervious and pervious layer, and the infiltration method. The 4 (four) hour
distributed rainfall depth was applied in the rainfall station as presented in Fig. 3.
300
250
rainfall depth (mm)
200
10 year
150 5 year
100 2 year
50
0
1 2 3 4
hour
FIGURE 3. Distributed rainfall data for each return period.
The drainage channel was modeled as conduit element where the dynamic wave routing would be solved. The
conduit was connected into a junction node. Subsequently, the outfall node was applied at the downstream of the
primary channel. The boundary condition for the downstream was applied in the outfall node for the dynamic wave
routing.
050006-4
Mitigation Scenarios
The purpose of this study was to solve the inundation problem by change the land use cover and drainage
network, and to make alternatives for the drainage channel to mitigate the discharge for each channel that has
capacity problem. The alternatives were established based on the simulation result of SWMM model.

SWMM model combined the hydrology and hydraulic simulation based on the primary and secondary data.
Primary data was obtained from the field investigation related with drainage network including the cross section and
the long section. Data was used to identify the link and node. Node as a junction was interpreted as confluence node
between two channels or more. This analysis simulated the condition during the study and alternative condition by
changing the drainage network based on the advantages and disadvantages derived from this study.
West Channel Simulation Result
FIGURE 4. Water Surface Elevation for West Channel.
050006-5
East Channel Simulation Result
FIGURE 5. Water Surface Elevation for East Channel.
The status report based on simulation result is presented in Table 2. The table shows that the changes of drainage
network will decrease the final stored volume on drainage system.
TABLE 2. Simulation Result for Existing and Alternative Mitigation.
Runoff Quantity Volume hectare – m

Continuity Existing Alternative
Total Precipitation 404482.268 404482.268
Final Surface Storage 369563.806 358058.623
CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATION

Drainage network change in this analysis was established based on the Master Plan proposal and it showed
discharge reduction. Water surface elevation in the primary channel was below the allowed maximum water level.
Therefore, the implementation of the alternatives that have been proposed in this research is necessary to mitigate
flood inundation for drainage system in the ITS area.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
This study was supported by Lembaga Penelitian dan Pengabdian Masyarakat (LPPM) of Institut Teknologi
Sepuluh Nopember (ITS) under the scheme of “Peneliti Pemula” research grant.
050006-6
REFERENCES
1. ITS Master Plan
2. SWMM User Manual.
3. C.W.Chen, and R. P. Shubinski, “Computer Simulation of Urban Storm Water Runoff”, J. Hydraul. Div.,
Proc. ASCE, 97(HY2):289-301, 1971.
050006-7
Simulating the arrangement of subsystem to reduce inundation in the drainage system
of Pepelegi housing area Sidoarjo
Steven Brouwer, Wasis Wardoyo, and Umboro Lasminto

Simulating the Arrangement of Subsystem to Reduce
Inundation in the Drainage System of Pepelegi Housing Area
Sidoarjo
Steven Brouwer 1,a), Wasis Wardoyo 2,b), and Umboro Lasminto 3,c)
1,2,3Civil Engineering Department of Water Resources Management, Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember (ITS), 60111
Sukolilo, Surabaya, Indonesia
a)
Corresponding Author: steven_brouwer@yahoo.com
b)
wasis@ce.its.ac.id
c)umboro@ce.its.ac.id
Abstract. Pepelegi Indah Resident is a place which is frequently inundated by floodwater. This condition happened since the
drainage system was designed with inappropriate waterflow method. The concern of this research was to figure out alternatives
by managing the floodwater from the disposal drainage system. The existing information showed the area would be inundated if
rainfall occurred for 2-3 hours. Half of Pepelegi Indah Resident would be inundated and subsidence time of flood on vulnerable
time was 5-24 hours. To reduce the floodwater, some scenarios or simulations were carried out among others the management of
tertiary drainage, the pool accommodation, and the provision of pumps at the enable point. From the simulation, the researcher
should choose the best scenario which worked and optimally reduce the flooding. Based on the simulation results, the best
scenario is the pool accommodation with new pumps at the primary channel.
INTRODUCTION
In the housing drainage sub-system, the elevation of the water surface in the main channels is a basis to determine the
elevation of the floor in building the area [1]. The profile of water surface along drainage channel in the flooding time
always changes in accordance with the height of water surface at every cut across the channel in a certain time to reach the
maximum condition. This condition is greatly relied on the channel capacity and cross section of downstream control.
However, the changes do not run well if the arrangement of drainage system does not refer to the integrated planning
system of drainage, so it will lead to inundation in the area. The area that has inappropriate drainage planning included a
housing area of Pepelegi Indah Waru Sidoarjo. This housing area is located in Waru Sub-district, Sidoarjo Regency, East
Java Province.
Pepelegi Indah Resident is approximately 14 acres in width and 600 households. The resident is located in the area
which is always inundated by the overflow in the rainy season. The data was obtained for the last 10 years, the recorded
seasonal flood that occurred in the area ranges between the elevation of ± 0.5 m to 1 m with duration of inundation
approximately 6 to 12 hours with a volume reaches into 49.000 m3. The primary main sewer in this resident is Semampir
River with the downstream effluent in the avoer Buntung channel. However, the lengthways condition of Semampir River
has experienced many changes due to the population growth and the land-use conversion in adjacent to the river that lead
to the change of function and dimension of the river. The residents perceive that the river is a channel that is made to
irrigate the fields. However, nowadays when the number of population is increasing, the river serves as a disposal channel
or sewer where there are many settlements around it. Besides, the channel is also narrower, which was approximately 6
meters into 3 meters. If it is reviewed from the River ability. It can have potential to cause flood in the upstream area.
Examination on the difference of channel measurement, the width of the upstream cross section is ± 6 meters in width and
the downstream is ± 3 meters in width. This condition is very critical in which the condition of the debit level is extreme
and it is discharged into the downstream area, thus, overflow occurs in the upstream area.
Study Location
This research was located in Pepelegi Indah Resident, Sidoarjo, East Java and Semampir River watershed. Pepelegi
Resident is approximately 17 Ha in width and located in Waru Sub-district.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 050007-1–050007-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985521
050007-1
Rainfall Data
The research site to obtain rainfall data is in the area of 3 (three) rain station, namely Wonocolo Rain Station,
Gedangan Rain Station, Taman Rain Station, which is located in the area of the research. Polygon Thessien was used as the
method. Rainfall data is very important because it is the main input in HEC-HMS or HEC-RAS. From the analysis, it can
be determined that the location research is in the area of Gedangan Rain Station. This research used rainfall plan for 2
(two) years, 5 (five) years and 10 (ten) years. Moreover, 5 (five) years and 10 (ten) years were chosen based on the
Sidoarjo drainage planning.
Bozem (Pool Accommodation)

Bozem is a pool that built to hold some water (overflow) both from rainfall or drainage in order to keep the area safe
from any flooding [2]. The concept of bozem is as a controller in the hydrology system, which is by balancing the water
flow from the upstream to the downstream as well as supplying groundwater. Based on the functions, bozem is utilized as
flood control during the rainy season and as a water reservoir in the dry season.
HEC-HMS
The Hydrologic Modeling System (HEC-HMS) is designed to simulate the precipitation-runoff processes of dendritic
drainage basins. It is designed to be applicable in a wide range of geographic areas for solving the widest possible range of
problems. It includes large river basin water supply and flood hydrology, and small urban or natural watershed runoff.
Hydrographs produced by the program are used directly or in conjunction with other software for studies of water
availability, urban drainage, flow forecasting, future urbanization impact, reservoir spillway design, flood damage
reduction, floodplain regulation, and systems operation [3].
The program is a generalized modeling system capable of representing many different watersheds. A model of the
watershed is constructed by separating the water cycle into manageable pieces and constructing boundaries around the
watershed of interest. Any mass or energy flux in the cycle can then be represented with a mathematical model. In most
cases, several model choices are available for representing each flux. Each mathematical model included in the program is
suitable in different environments and under different conditions. Making the correct choice requires knowledge of the
watershed, the goals of the hydrologic study, and engineering judgment.
HEC-RAS
River Analysis System (HEC-RAS) is a program which is needed for this research to perform one-dimensional
unsteady flow [4].
Methods
The methodology will be used to link the literature study, data collection, and field study. The data related to the
analysis included rainfall, topography and cross section of channel that were obtained from related institution and field
measurement which was done by the surveyor to analyze the data that would be done from hydrology to calculate the plan
of flood debit by using HEC/-HMS, and hydraulic analysis with the assistance of HEC–RAC 4.0 to do simulation in order
to know the capacity of all channels by using one dimension. To reduce the floodwater, there were some scenarios for the
simulation which were Tersier drainage management, pool accommodation, and the pumps at the enable point. Based on
the simulation, the researcher should choose the best scenario which is capable to reduce the potential flooding.
RESULT
Rainfall Data
In this research, there are three rain stations in adjacent to the research site. They are Wonocolo Rain Station, Gedangan
Rain Station, and Taman Rain Station. Based on Polygon Theissen, Gedangan Rain Station is the closest station from the
study sire. From the relevant office of Gedangan Rain Station, the 10 years rainfall data was obtained and after was
analyzed by using a statistical test. Based on the statistical calculation using Gumbel, Pearson Type III, Log Pearson Type
III, Log Normal, Pearson Type III was the most eligible for performing the prediction of reset period Table 1.
050007-2
TABLE 1. Rainfall plan using Pearson Type III
Reset Periode (Year) Rainfall Plan (mm)
2 100.83
5 119.79
10 130.74
HEC-HMS Modeling
Pepelegi Resident was divided into two sub-watersheds with different areas. This modeling had hydrograph as a result
to indicate the quantity of water in the channel during the rain. There were 87 tertiary channels, three secondary channels,
and one primary channel. The system drainage scheme can be observed in Fig. 1.
FIGURE 1. Scheme of Pepelegi Drainage System.
HEC-RAS Simulation
In this research, the researchers used HEC-RAS 4.0 to simulate the capacity of the existing channels (tertiary,
secondary, and primary). The existing condition of Pepelegi Resident is illustrated in Fig. 2.
050007-3
FIGURE 2. HEC-RAS modeling for the existing condition.
From the simulation of the existing condition, the flood will take place in all channels for 10 years period of rainfall.
Figure 3 shows the tertiary and primary channel.
FIGURE 3. The condition of in the primary, secondary and primary channel.
050007-4
SCENARIO I (ARRANGEMENT OF TERTIARY CHANNEL)
This scenario was to change the outflow from all tertiary channels. It should pay attention about the contour of all
tertiary channels. However, the scenario would not work for the tertiary channel with ∆h > + 0.4 m and it was
recommended for +0.1-0.3 m. the scenario can be seen in Fig. 4.
FIGURE 4. The arrangement of the tertiary channel
The result of this scenario was the prevailing flood the entire channel including the tertiary, secondary and primary
Channel).
SCENARIO II (INSTALLING NEW SECONDARY CHANNEL AND 2 PONDS WITH 2

PUMP STATIONS
FIGURE 5. The position of the new bozem and new secondary channel.
050007-5
SCENARIO III (NEW PUMP 3, BETWEEN KS 27 AND 28)
FIGURE 6. The position of New Pump 3.
RESULTS OF THE SCENARIOS

After the simulation of the three scenarios, the scenario which was perceived as the best method to reduce the
flood was selected. The results can be observed in Table 2.
TABLE 2. Main result of the scenarios
Channel Status Scenario I
Tertiary Flooding Flooding
Secondary Flooding Flooding
Primary Flooding Flooding
Channel Scenario II Scenario III

Tertiary Not Flooding Not Flooding
Secondary Not Flooding Not Flooding
Primary Flooding Not Flooding
CONCLUSIONS
Flood in Pepelegi Indah Resident was not caused by the capacity of the entire channels. It was presumed that
flood in this location was caused by the insufficient capacity of all channels to accommodate the runoff.
The arrangement of the tertiary channel did not show any significant effect to reduce flood. It was the
consequence of the prevailing flood in the secondary channel, thus, inundations were formed in tertiary channel for
several times.
Based on the result as presented in Table 2, the third scenario was the best scenario to reduce the flood in the
entire channel. Actually, the second scenario also yielded a good result, but there was a problem at the upstream of
the primary channel. Because of this condition, the new pump station was installed at the downstream area to ease
the water from the upstream to the downstream.
050007-6
REFERENCES
1. Suripin, Sistem Drainase Perkotaan yang Berkelanjutan (Semarang. 2003).
2. S. Sosrodarsono and M. Tominaga. (1985). Perbaikan dan pengaturan sungai. Translated by Gayo, M. Y.
Jakarta: Pradnya Paramita.
3. Hydrologic Engineering Centre, HEC-HMS Hydraulic Modelling System (US Army Corps of Engineering,
2002).
4. Hydrologic Engineering Centre, HEC-RAS Hydraulic Modelling System (US Army Corps of Engineering,
2002).
050007-7
Alternative study of type and location of flood control infrastructure in the drainage
system, Avfour Kelor channel, Tuban regency
Rangga Adi Sabrang and Wasis Wardoyo

Alternative Study of Type and Location of Flood Control
Infrastructure in the Drainage system, Avfour Kelor
Channel, Tuban Regency
Rangga Adi Sabrang1,a) and Wasis Wardoyo2, b)
1, 2
Civil Engineering, Civil Engineering and Planning Faculty, ITS Surabaya, Indonesia
a)
ranggaadis@gmail.com
b)
wasis@ce.its.ac.id
Abstract. The topography of Tuban Regency which is close to the sea has both advantage and disadvantage. The
advantage is the main channels of drainage can be directly discharged into the sea, while the disadvantage is the flow of
the channels will be influenced by the sea tide. However, the absence of the channel capacity of drainage to load the
runoff from the catchment area of Afvour Kelor channel led to inundations in the downstream and upstream. In addition,
in the middle of the downstream and the upstream of Afvour Kelor channel, precisely in the Perbon Village, inundation
frequently takes place particularly in the rainy season. It is allegedly caused by, the extreme runoff from the catchment
area of Afvour Kelor channel, in addition to the influence of the sea tide. Due to the prevailing problem and the absence
of the solution from the related institutions, the effort to manage drainage system in the area through the debit
arrangement of runoff of Afvour Kelor cannel is urgently required. There were 3 (three) flood control scenarios that were
simulated in this research. The scenarios in this research consisted of: to join the plan from the location of 7 (seven)
ponds, 1 (one) pond at a predetermined location, and normalization of the channel. Subsequently, the most optimal
scenario would be selected and reviewed based on the water surface profile in the cross section of the lowest Avfour
Kelor channel.
INTRODUCTION
Avfour Kelor channel is located in Tuban Regency, East Java. This channel empties into the Java Sea and has
approximately 4.1 km in length with the catchment area approximately of 7.3 km 2. The elevation of the upstream
channel is approximately 15 meters and the downstream channel approximately 3 meters above sea mean level.
Recently, the land use of the catchment area of Afvour Kelor channel is mostly dominated by settlement, while other
parts are a paddy field and green open area. The drainage networking system of this area includes a small tertiary
channel that receives water runoff from the existing fields and the secondary channel is a channel that receives the
runoff from the tertiary channel and discharges the runoff to the primary cannel, which is Afvour Kelor channel.
Afvour Kelor channel has several secondary channels that are discharged into the Afvour Kelor channel, namely
Kembangbilo channel, Latsari channel, Al-Falah channel, Perbon channel, Teuku Umar channel, Bogorejo channel,
Alpokat channel, Sidorejo channel, Manalagi channel, Rejoso channel, Manggis channel, Letda Sucipto I Channel,
Letda Sucipto II channel, Delima channel, Nasional I channel and Nasional II Channel. The flowing area of Avfour
Kelor channel includes several areas in Tuban sub-district, namely Kembangbilo Village, Latsari Village, Perbon
Village. The location of Afvour Kelor channel in the Tuban sub-district, Tuban regency is presented in Fig. 1. It can
be observed that the topography of Tuban sub-district is close to the sea. As a consequence, this area has both the
advantage and disadvantage. The advantage is the main channels of drainage can be directly discharged in to the sea,
while the disadvantage is the flow of the channels will be influenced by the sea tide. However, the absence of the
channel capacity of drainage to load the runoff from the catchment area of Afvour Kelor channel led to inundations
in the downstream and the upstream.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 050008-1–050008-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985522
050008-1
FIGURE 1. The Catchment Area of Avfour Kelor Channel.
In fact, there is an inundation in Avfour Kelor channel (Fig. 2 and Fig. 3), the precise location of this inundation
is in Perbon Village. The inundation is approximately 30 cm in the height of 0.5 km2 in width it takes more or less 4-
5 hours. It is formed due to the capacity of the channel cannot load the runoff from the catchment area.
By considering the prevailing problem and the absence of the action from the related institutions, the effort to
manage drainage system in the area through the debit arrangement of the runoff of Afvour Kelor cannel is required.
FIGURE 2. The Location of the inundation.
050008-2
FIGURE 3. The Drainage Network System of Afvour Kelor and the location of the inundation.
In carrying out this research, the field study or field survey as the direct observation in the study area was a
necessity. It was done to know the real condition of Afvour Kelor channel area. Subsequently, the problem
framework was formulated regarding with the flood control in drainage system of the Afvour Kelor channel, which
were the calculation of the flood debit in the Afvour Kelor channel and the selection of the best scenario to arrange
drainage networking system in the flowing area of Afvour Kelor channel to prevent the occurrence of inundation.
From the problem formulation, the collection of data was done including the hydrology data, hydraulic data, and
topography data of the area. The analysis of hydrology was done comprising of the rainfall data analysis, the
calculation of planned flood debit, and the assisting program of HEC-HMS to determine the hydrograph of the
flood. Subsequently, the hydraulic analysis and the simulation of the planned scenarios were performed by using the
assisting program of HEC-RAS. There were 3 (three) scenarios that were simulated in this research. The scenarios in
this research were: to join the plan from the location of 6 ponds, one pond at a predetermined location, and
normalization of the channel. The best scenario was then selected and the water surface profile in the cross section
of the lowest Avfour Kelor channel was reviewed.
It was expected that the result of this study would generate the best scenario among the planned scenarios.
Subsequently, this scenario would be implemented to prevent or at least reduce the occurrences of inundation in the
Avfour Kelor channel, Tuban Regency.
METHODOLOGY
The scheme of the implementation on the study of the flood control drainage system of Afvour Kelor channel,
Tuban Regency included several steps that were formulated as follows:
1. The Literature review
A literature review was carried out to examine the references and to obtain further information about related
and diverse theories to analyze the problem of this study. It was derived from books related to this research,
including Sistem Drainase Perkotaan yang Berkelanjutan [1], Hidrologi Terapan (Bambang Triatmojo),
Hidrologi Teknik (Soemarto), Penataan Drainase Perkotaan [2], and Hidrolika (Van Te Chow).
2. Data Collection
The data was collected regarding with this study including:
 Map of the study area. It was significant to determine the location in adjacent to the study site.
 Land use data. It was used to determine the dominant land use to estimate the amount of water that
could be absorbed by the land. Regarding with this calculation, the hydrological analysis was used to
determine the coefficient of land drainage.
 Rainfall data. This data was used in the form of daily rainfall data. This data was obtained from the
Department of Irrigation Works, Tuban Regency. Rainfall was used to calculate the height of rain plan
in the hydrology analysis.
050008-3
 Map of rainfall stations. This map was used to determine the location of the rain stations and their
relationship on the Kelor Afvour channel. The analysis used Thiessen Polygon to determine the station
which affected rainfall in the Kelor Afvour channel.
 Lay Out of Network Systems Drainage of Afvour Kelor channel. Lay Out of the network system was
used to determine those that serve the drainage network of rainwater runoff from the watershed areas of
Kelor Afvour channels.
 Channel Measurement Data. Measuring channel data was used to determine the dimensions of the
channel that existed in the area of drainage network.
The analysis of data as the input for decision-making in addressing the prevailing problem consisted of:
1. Hydrology analysis
The hydrological analysis was done with the assistance of HEC-HMS program. At this stage, the analysis
was done by modeling the watershed of Kelor Afvoir channel. Data inputs were used in this stage including
the rainfall data, drainage network, the area of each sub-watershed, channel data, and others. The results of
the simulation model in the form of flood hydrograph data of every sub-basins and all watersheds.
2. Hydraulics analysis
Hydraulics analysis was done with the assistance of HEC-RAS program. The input data used in this stage
was the result of the flood hydrograph of HEC-HMS modeling program and the data of each channel. The
results of the simulation model were in the form of the water surface profile conditions of each channel.
3. Simulation of scenarios
Scenarios were simulated to find the alternative to solve the problems of inundation in Afvour Kelor
channel. The locations where the inundation frequently took place during the rainy season were observed to
establish scenarios to prevent the occurrences. The scenarios in this study combined the layout plan of the
bin and pumps, reservoirs and reservoirs, as well as the storage and widening the channels close to the
location of the inundation. The scenarios were as follows:
 Scenario 1: 7 (seven) ponds in the locations which the discharge was adequately high because it
influenced the channel.
 Scenario 2: normalization of the channel.
 Scenario 3: one pond in the location where the runoff from all sub-basins in the upstream were
discharged.
RESULTS
The assessment of the rainfall can be done by using the Arithmetic Mean, Thiessen Polygon, and Isohyet Method
[1]. This study used Thiessen Polygon to calculate the rainfall of the study area. The Thiessen Polygon method
assumes that at any point in a catchment area (as shown in Fig. 4), the rainfall level is the same in which it is
recorded by the nearest rain station so that the level is presumed to the distance halfway to next rain station in any
direction. The relative weight for each station is determined from the corresponding area.
FIGURE 4. Thiessen Polygon Method
050008-4
Rainfall data that affected the catchment area of Afvour Kelor was derived from one observation station that was
Sidomulyo Rain Station.
The hydrologic analysis was supported by the application of HEC-HMS software. This application was designed
to simulate the precipitation-runoff process of dendritic watershed system. The computation procedure in HEC-HMS
consisted of input data, computation, and output as the result. Input of basin data used in this stage was the
watershed area, lag time, curve number, and impervious. Meteorological data consisted of the precipitation level and
the control specification was the duration of simulation. The existing modeling scheme is presented in Fig. 5.
FIGURE 5. The existing scheme of Avfour Kelor modeling as the result of HMS program.
The hydraulics analysis was supported by using the application of HEC-RAS software. Generally, the
computation produce in HEC-RAS consists of input data, computation, and the output as result. Input data consisted
of the data of geometry and area boundary. The geometry data consisted of the basic map of study area and channel
cross section data as derived from the survey. After processing the data, the output was obtained as the result. The
result can be arranged by using time control, computation interval, hydrograph interval output, and detail output
interval. The existing modeling scheme can be shown in Fig. 6.
FIGURE 6. The existing scheme of modeling Avfour Kelor as the result of HEC-RAS program.
By referring to the existing condition, a model was established by using precipitation data for a period of 25
years (X25 = 181.71 mm) for input basin data in HEC-HMS program. The result of computation was flood
hydrograph for the period of years. Flood peak discharge was 5.20 m³/s and hydrograph as shown in Figure 7. This
050008-5
hydrograph can be used for the upstream boundary of Avfour Kelor channel in HEC-RAS modeling. Figure 8 shows
the water surface profile in the long section of Afvour Kelor channel.
FIGURE 7. Hydrograph for Return of 25 years. FIGURE 8. Water surface profile of the cross section of the channel.
Scenario 1 was he simulation of 7 (seven) ponds at predetermined locations. It modeled 7 (seven) ponds in the
locations where the discharge level was relatively high. Flood peak discharge was 5.14 m³/s and hydrograph as
shown in Fig. 9 and 10. This hydrograph can be used for the upstream boundary of Afvour Kelor channel in HEC-
RAS modeling. Fig. 10 shows the water surface profile in the cross section of Afvour Kelor channel for scenario 1.
FIGURE 9. The simulation of 7 (seven) ponds in location A, B, C, D, E, F, and G.
FIGURE 10. Hydrograph for Return the 25 years FIGURE 11. Water surface profile of the cross section of the
channel
050008-6
Scenario 2 was the simulation of the normalization of channel. The normal length of the channel was 800 meters,
and the width was 1 meter. This condition was modeled by the normalization of the upstream of the overtopping
channel. Flood peak discharge was 4.47 m³/s and hydrograph as shown in Figures 11 and 12. This hydrograph can
be used for the upstream boundary of Afvour Kelor channel in HEC-RAS modeling. Figure 12 shows the water
surface profile in the cross section of Afvour Kelor channel for scenario 2.
FIGURE 12. The simulation of the normalization of channel
channel
Scenario 3 was the simulation with one pond at predetermined locations. This condition was modeled by one
pond which was in adjacent to the location of the inundation. Flood peak discharge was 4.68 m³/s and hydrograph as
shown in Fig. 13 and 14. This hydrograph can be used for the upstream boundary of Afvour Kelor channel in HEC-
RAS modeling. Fig. 14 shows the water surface profile in the cross section of Afvour Kelor channel for scenario 3.
FIGURE 15. The simulation of 1 (one) pond in location H.
050008-7
channel
CONCLUSIONS
The discharge of Afvour Kelor channel was approximately 5.2 m3/s. The overflow occurred in Afvour Kelor
channels 6, 7, and 8. Inundation took place due to the capacity of the channel cannot load the runoff of water flows
from the catchment area. From the scenarios simulated in this study, the normalization scenario was the best
scenario for flood control with rainfall return of 25 years period. This scenario successfully declined the elevation of
water surface profile.
REFERENCES
1. Mulyanto. 2012. Penataan Drainase Perkotaan. Semarang. Graha Ilmu.
2. Suripin. 2004. Sistem Drainase Perkotaan yang Berkelanjutan. Yogyakarta. Andi.
050008-8
Suitability assessment of the urban water management transition in the Indonesian
context - A case study of Surabaya
Mar’atus Sholihah, Maria Anityasari, and Diesta Iva Maftuhah

Suitability Assessment of the Urban Water Management
Transition in the Indonesian Context - a Case Study of
Surabaya
Mar’atus Sholihah1, a), Maria Anityasari2, and Diesta Iva Maftuhah3
1,2,3
Department of Industrial Engineering, Faculty of Industrial Technology, Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember
(ITS), Indonesia.
a)
Corresponding author: sholihah@ie.its.ac.id
Abstract. The rapidly growing urban population, the increasing impact of climate change, and the constantly decreasing
availability of the good quality water become the major triggers that force urban water professionals to continuously
focus on sustainable urban water management (SUWM). The city as a focal point of population growth in the world has
become a critical object for its resiliency, not only in terms of the environmental deterioration but also of the water
supplies security. As a response to the current condition, the framework of urban water management transition has been
introduced as a sort of transformation for a city to achieve SUWM. Water Sensitive City (WSC) is the ultimate goal of
this framework which integrates water access and supply security, public health protection, flood prevention,
environmental protection and livability, and economic sustainability. Recently, the urban water management
transition and WSC concept are going to be implemented in some cities in Indonesia, including Surabaya. However, in
addition to provide a wide range of benefits, the implementation of WSC also brings challenges. In terms of geographical
and social aspect, public policy, and the citizen behavior, the cities in Indonesia are undoubtedly different with those in
Australian where the concept was developed. Hence, assessing the suitability of urban water management transition in
the Indonesian context can be perceived as the most important phase in this whole plan. A case study of Surabaya would
be identified as a baseline to measure whether the proposed sequence of urban water management transition is suitable
for Indonesian local context. The research aimed to assess the suitability of the framework to be implemented in
Indonesia and to propose the modified framework which is more suitable for local context in Indonesia.
INTRODUCTION
The global population is undoubtedly increasing rapidly and exponentially over the past years. A census was
done by The United Nations in 1995 (Fig. 1) predicted and showed that the increase of global population in 2013 to
2028 (an interval of 15 years interval) would be equal to the increase of global population within 1922 to 1959 or an
interval of 37 years. It means that the population growth of the future is predicted approximately 2.5 times higher
than in the past. Moreover, 54% of the global population live in the cities or urban areas which made the city as a
focal point for the population growth in the world. Due to these global phenomena, water security has become an
indispensable yet a complex problem. The increasing impact of climate change and the constantly decreasing
availability of sufficient quantity and quality of water are major triggers that force urban water professionals and
researchers to continuously focus on sustainable urban water management (SUWM). The city as a critical object
should be more resilient, not only in terms of the environmental deterioration but also of the water supplies security.
As a response to this current condition, a framework of urban water management transition has been introduced
as the city transformation to achieve SUWM [1]. The framework illustrated in Fig. 2 explains that the water
condition of a city is transformed in a sequence stage. Based on the SUWM, there are several stages. It is started
with the city as a water supply with the most ideal city concept, which is Water Sensitive City (WSC). Water
Sensitive City (WSC) is the ultimate goal of the framework which integrates the water supply access and security,
public health protection, flood protection, environmental protection and livability, and economic sustainability.
WSC is perceived to be the best model for the modern population. The framework was firstly introduced in
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 050009-1–050009-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985523
050009-1
Australia based on intensive researches and practical implementations that involved the collaboration between
government, private sectors, and community.
FIGURE 1. Prediction of world population growth.
In 2016, under a research collaboration between the four universities in Indonesia and Australia, the Urban
Water Management Transition was planned to be implemented in some Indonesian cities. This framework is
designed as a bridge to transform the cities in Indonesian into green and livable cities. In prior to the
implementation, there is an assessment to determine the current stage of the cities and the leapfrogging programs
that should be enforced to achieve the ultimate goal, which is a water sensitive city. However, in addition to its wide
range of benefits, the implementation of the framework and WSC will bring on challenges. However, in terms of
geographical, social, and political aspect, the cities in Indonesia are undoubtedly different with those in Australia
where WSC concept has been developed.
Assessing the suitability of the Urban Water Management Transition in Indonesian context is perceived as the
most important phase in this whole research plan. A case study of Surabaya would be identified as a baseline study
to measure whether the proposed sequence of the Urban Water Management Transition is suitable for the local
context. The research aimed to assess the suitability of the framework to be directly implemented in Indonesia and to
propose the modified framework which is more suitable for the local context in Indonesia.
URBAN WATER MANAGEMENT TRANSITION

Urban water management has gained a lot of attention related to the current issue of water-related research. The
expansion of the population’s settlement particularly from the village or rural area to the city or urban area has
forced the researchers and practitioners to continuously evaluate and seek for the best water management to ensure
the fulfilment of water demand. Nevertheless, there is a complex challenge in designing the technologies and
formulating the policies to manage the water sustainability against multiple vulnerabilities, for instance attributable
to the effect of climate change, population growth, and hydrological variability. The water management of a city
should ensure the sustainability of water provision and the protection of water environments simultaneously [2].
Therefore, both the developed and developing countries search for a guidance to overcome the institutional
challenges and to utilize the existing infrastructure to facilitate a transition into more water sensitive practice [3]
introduced an urban water management framework which presents the typology of diverse states of a city’s
transition towards more sustainable stage which can be seen in Fig. 2.
050009-2
FIGURE 2. Urban water management transition [3].
The framework offers a benchmarking tool to assist the urban water decision-makers to identify the attributes
and to develop capacities to achieve a more sustainable city. The transition of the city is started with an effort to
attain a water supply city. In this stage, the city implements the planning, construction, and management of
centralized water supply schemes to provide a large quantity of water by building dams and pipe system. In the
sewered city, public health is protected by the installation of well-managed sewerage system where waste water
flows to environmentally benign waterways. In accordance to the development of water system, the drained city has
more number and robust drainage channels that are capable of catching rainwater. In the next stage, i.e. the
waterways city, water is integrated into the planning function, which is the important visual and recreational feature
for communities. The city designs the centralized sewerage system in discharging wastewater treatments plants and
industrial processes and septic tanks. Due to the decreasing number of water sources, the city needs good
collaboration between communities, private, and the government on how to provide, manage, and maintain the
limited number of water sources. In this stage, there is a co-existence of the centralized and decentralized system
and new form of co-management between government, communities, and private sectors on water production,
management, and recycle [3].
Water Sensitive City

Comprehensive urban water management has gained high attention from practitioners of city planning and
government. After successfully accomplishing the essential services for the people such as fresh water and
sanitation, nowadays, a city is expected to become a livable and sensitive to the people’s needs. Sensitive means that
a city is resilient to multiple vulnerabilities such as the effect of population growth, climate change, and hydrological
variability and simultaneously, it should ensure the sustainable water resource as well as protect the water
environment [2]. The urgency to transform a city into a water sensitive city is significantly increasing. Since there
are very limited practices in this area, both the developed and developing countries search for guidance for the
leapfrogging possibilities.
[3] explained that the WSC concept is the ultimate goal of urban water management that will change a city to
meet the basic need of water and continuously provide benefits to increase the city resilience and livability.
Furthermore, [4] argued that WSC concept is a new urban water paradigm used by governance to meet the urgency
and importance of the decentralized water system. This concept was developed based on the comprehensive and
holistic point of view to manage the integrated water cycle, which can be flood risk mitigation and creation of public
spaces that harvest, clean, and recycle water.
WSC uses water management as a means to deliver better and wider livability outcomes. It is perceived that the
implementation of water sensitive approach on the urban development and regeneration processes will provide a set
of critical objectives to the city livability, for instance, public green space, healthy waterways, engaged
050009-3
communities, biodiversity and cultural significance. Moreover, WSC introduces the new paradigm that health, clean,
and sustainable water can directly contribute to the connected, conscious, and livable communities.
Water Sensitive City is characterized by the three key pillars of practice which should be integrated into the
urban environment as follows [3]:
1. Cities as Water Supply Catchment. The city can access diverse water sources as reflected by a diversity of
centralized and decentralized infrastructure.
2. Cities Providing Ecosystem Services. The city is capable to provide ecosystem services for the built and
natural environment.
3. Cities Comprising Water Sensitive Communities. It is related to the socio-political capital to maintain
sustainable water by sensitive decision making and behaviors.
To ensure the sustainability and resilience of city and its water system, comprehensive integration of
technological, planning, economic, cultural, and institutional dimensions is required. In addition, it should be
considered while developing leapfrogging strategies and investment plans. The question of how to conduct the
transition into water sensitivity is a challenge not only for individual, governments, or organizations but for larger,
socio-political system that supports such change. Shifting the city to the proposed concept is obviously not an easy
process. Focus on technical innovation should be accompanied by an understanding on the social and institutional
dynamic connection as the main key when trying to shift deeply-rooted water management systems into new
directions.
A hybrid combination of centralized and decentralized water systems and sources will operate at an interval of
scales by providing sustainable fit-for-purpose water services. It will protect the environmental quality. The
implementation of decentralized water systems should be accompanied by governance arrangements that include
strategies to enhance the trust among the stakeholders and to facilitate the sharing of knowledge to inform decision-
making [5]. Furthermore [6] stated that collaboration and leadership are also essential in the transition of Water
Sensitive City.
SURABAYA WATER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Surabaya as the second largest city in Indonesia has more than 2.9 million people as its permanent residents [7].
It is predicted the number will continuously increase in the future. This increase is not only caused by the number of
birth but also due to the high urbanization rate of non-permanent residents who come to Surabaya to find job. This
high population obviously causes many problems in terms of the economic, environment, and social aspects. The
city government has an obligation to provide sufficient water, transport, energy, and other basic needs. If this
condition has not appropriately and comprehensively addressed, it will generate serious instability in multiple
aspects. One of the most crucial aspects in Surabaya is the sustainable water provision.
A comprehensive focus group discussion and series of visits have been conducted involving related stakeholders
of national, regional and local government as well as private sectors to identify and understand the water
management system of Surabaya. Based on this preliminary study supported by the secondary data, the geographical
and social aspect, public policy, and the citizen behaviors in Indonesia, including Surabaya, are undoubtedly
different with those in Australia. The fact directly impacts the water management and the process required for a city
to transform into a water sensitive city. The following findings underpin the uniqueness of Indonesian water
management system which could not be examined directly based on the proposed Urban Water Management
Transition.
The Scope of Surabaya City

Surabaya City is divided into some areas based on its advancement on social, economic, and environmental
aspects. The major groups in Surabaya City are:
x Slum area
x Kampung (a modern concept of village)
x Apartment
x Middle and high class residence
Diverse stages of water management were found in these groups. For instance, slum areas in Surabaya encountered
the water supply security issue while the Green and Clean Kampungs already implemented the water cycle practices.
050009-4
Green and Clean Kampung is a special and particular award given to the modern villages in Surabaya which
successfully perform leading environment management programs. In addition, the community also performs garbage
sorting, composting, wastewater treatment in their local residence [8]. This advance community-based environment
management was constructed due to the high participation of local people. Some examples of the leading Green and
Clean Kampungs in Surabaya are Jedong, Sukomanunggal, Pacar Keling, Moho, Gadukan, Dukuh Setro, Karang
Gayam, Jemur Wonosar, and Bubutan.
This condition is obviously different to the original concept of WSC where a city is perceived as a whole
package and single entity which moves thoroughly towards WSC. Hence, it is obvious that the original concept of
Urban Water Management could not be directly implemented in in Surabaya City since it is comprised of different
areas based on the advancement in social, economic and environmental aspects. However, it is clear that based on
the Urban Water Management Transition framework, slum areas in Surabaya are still in the stage of Water Supply
City, meanwhile Kampungs in Surabaya are far ahead in the stage of Water Cycle City.
Inter-regional Dependency in Water Provision

In Surabaya, clean water is mainly supplied by the local water supply company, Perusahaan Daerah Air Minum
(PDAM). Nevertheless, there are very limited direct accesses to ground water particularly in the household area. It is
caused by several factors, mostly because of the significant lack of reserve clean ground water and land subsidence.
Approximately 84% of households in Indonesia are the permanent customers of PDAM [9]. It is very clear that the
dependency of households to water provided by PDAM is very high. Whereas, the foremost source of clean water in
Surabaya is the Brantas River which flows along several cities in East Java, i.e. Malang, Blitar, Tulungagung,
Kediri, Jombang, Mojokerto, Sidoarjo, and finally Surabaya.
There is a noticeable connection between water management in the upper-stream cities and the quantity and
quality of raw water in Surabaya. The quantity and quality of raw water extremely depend on the upper-stream cities
since Surabaya is located in the downstream. If the water management in the upper stream regions is inappropriate,
for instance high level pollutant and waste contaminated in the water, it will obviously and directly affect the quality
of raw water. This condition is very different with the origin city of the Urban Water Management Transition, where
it is definitely an independent city. However, in Indonesian context, there is a high inter-regional dependency in
providing water for the community in a city.
Cross Integration of Stakeholders

There is the cross integration of stakeholders related to the water management system in Surabaya. The
authorized government in Surabaya water management is not only Surabaya City Government but also the East Java
Province Government as well as the Central Government. It obviously requires a very good and strong cooperation
and coordination. As a response to that condition, the related stakeholders are divided into three different levels, i.e.
city level, province level, and national or central level. The following are the specific explanations of the cross
integration among these stakeholders in managing water system in Surabaya.
National Level
In national level, there are a central government that has full authorization in managing water-related agency or
institution in Surabaya. The central government which actively and directly involves in Surabaya water system is the
Ministry of Public Works, Ministry of Energy and Mineral Resources, Ministry of Finance, and Ministry of State-
owned Enterprises. Those ministries directly and indirectly manage the water system in Surabaya by supervising,
monitoring, and funding the institutions at the province level. However, all the policies in water management system
in Surabaya and also in other areas refer to the policies of central government. It means that there is a connection
between the central government and the provincial government as well as the institutions under their supervision.
Province Level
In province level, there are some governments and state-owned enterprises related to the water management
system in Surabaya. They are Balai Besar Wilayah Sungai Brantas (BBWS), Perum Jasa Tirta, and Regional Clean
Water Supply Company (PDAB). Those institutions have their own roles to manage water system.
050009-5
1. BBWS
BBWS implements all policies and roles under the supervision of the Ministry of Public Works. BBWS has
the task of managing the water resources in the river area/basin that includes planning, construction,
operation, and maintenance in the context of the conservation and utilization of water resources and control
of water resources in rivers, lakes, reservoirs, dams, reservoirs, , irrigation, ground water, raw water, marsh,
ponds, and beaches. This institution arranges and performs not only planning maps of water resources in
river area, but also deals with operational and maintenance of water resources in river area, such as
managing water debit and water taking in watershed area of Brantas River. However, there are still lack of
monitoring and coordination between BBWS and other institutions and governments in Surabaya City. The
regular discussion among water-related stakeholders only happens in limited occasion, i.e., the Team
Koordinasi Pengelolaan Sumber Daya Air (TKPSDA) Meeting.
2. Perum Jasa Tirta
Perum Jasa Tirta is a state-owned enterprise which is responsible for several roles for including to organize
the general usage of water and other sources of adequate water, to manage and monitor the water quality of
raw water supply, and to perform its duties under the central government in the watershed area (DAS).
3. PDAB
PDAB is a regional company in province level, which optimally manages spring water sources for wider
community and as the organizer of the Regional Water Supply System in all cities of East Java Province.
As the provider of water supply system in East Java Province, PDAB facilitates the development of water
supply system including raw water needs, overcomes the problem of water supply system, as well as
monitors and evaluates the water supply system.
City Level
At the city level, there are many city governments and institutions that manage the water system in Surabaya.
Although the institutions serve at the city level, the co-cooperation among the institutions should be improved
incessantly.
1. Surabaya City Development Planning Agency (Badan Perencanaan Pembangunan Kota

Surabaya/Bappeko)
Bappeko is the long-term development planning agency for the city government of Surabaya. This agency
aims to create long-term plans with the participation of city agencies/institutions through wide stakeholder
engagement and also to create the integrated land use plan, which requires input from the Clean Water
Supply Company (PDAM), the Cleansing and Park Department (street lighting, waste, wastewater), and
other city agencies. In order to support its duties, Bappeko collaborates with external parties including local
universities, community leaders, and private sector businesses and developers as well. In water
management system, Bappeko is a key actor of the city government whose main role is to coordinate all
agencies in Surabaya. Bappeko continuously coordinates and cooperates with other agencies to manage
water system, for instance to arrange plan and to overcome water crisis in the future, to develop integrated
wastewater treatment plant (WWTP), and to achieve 100-0-100 program (100% of access for drinking
water, 0% of slum areas, and 100% of sanitation access for the community).
2. The Clean Water Supply Company (PDAM)
PDAM as City Water Supply Company in Surabaya has to distribute and produce clean water for
customers as well as to provide sustainable service for its customers. In performing its business, PDAM
faces several problems, such as the excessive clean water consumption, poor quality of drinking water, and
wastewater management. There are still no intervention related to the excessive clean water consumption
and water quality as well as Non-Revenue Water and waste water problem. It is impossible for PDAM to
solve these problems itself. Therefore, co-management among institutions is required.
3. The Department of Public Works & Drainage (Dinas Pekerjaan Umum dan Bina Marga)
The main role of this department is to build, manage, and maintain the city water drainage system. This
department develops the Surabaya Drainage Master Plan (SDMP) and coordinates with Bappeko to
maintain waterways, water piping, and sedimentation in city river area.
4. The Department of Cleansing & Park (Dinas Kebersihan Dan Pertamanan Surabaya [DKP])
050009-6
DKP has some roles in managing the cleanliness of the city area, for instance to reduce and haul a number
of trashes or wastes in all areas in Surabaya, including river and streets. The department also supports
Surabaya City to open and manage the green areas like city gardens as water catchment areas.
5. The Environmental Agency (Badan Lingkungan Hidup [BLH])
There are some problems identified by BLH in regard to Surabaya water management system, i.e. the
absence of priority mechanism and water quality classification monitoring, unclear information about the
agencies who are responsible for managing the wastewater treatment plant (WWTP), ambiguous and
incomprehensive management information about river management, the absence of technical step to
maintain the river water quality (at the upstream and downstream) from all regions/districts that are fed by
rivers. These problems are the inter-agencies or institutional problems which require very close and
comprehensive coordination among water-related stakeholders in Surabaya.
From the previous explanation, it could be concluded that the water system and management in Surabaya
involves a lot of agencies/institutions from different levels. Cooperation, coordination and collaboration among
those institutions is not a simple task. It requires high intention and commitment from each governmental agency to
work together on many aspects of the water system.
CONCLUSIONS
This paper presented an introduction of Surabaya Water Management. Based on the findings, it is clear that the
Urban Water Management Transition proposed by [3] could not be directly adopted in Indonesia. Several findings
are presented to support the discrepancy of the proposed framework with the implementation in Indonesia. Surabaya
as a case study is used as a baseline to show the discrepancy of urban water management in Indonesia and those in
Australia.
The first finding shows that Surabaya City is divided into several types of area which is clearly different with the
original concept of framework where the city is perceived as a whole package and single entity which moves
thoroughly towards WSC. In Indonesia, the quantity and quality of clean water provision of a city depend greatly on
other cities’ water management system. Since the main source of the water provision of a city is from a long river
which flows along several regions. There is an apparent connection between water management in the upper-stream
cities with the quantity and quality of the raw water in the downstream cities including Surabaya. This condition is
very different with the origin city of the Urban Water Management Transition concept, where the cities are
definitely independent city while in Indonesia, there is high inter-regional dependency in the provision of water for
the community. The last finding is that the water system and management in Indonesian cities like Surabaya
involves a lot of agencies/institutions from different levels, i.e. central, regional as well as local/city level. It is
relatively difficult to define the agency that authorizes and should manage rivers, roads, and other water related
facilities.
In terms of social, cultural, and religion aspect, Indonesian people relatively feel inconvenient with dry and less
water used toilet. It is supported by the fact that more than 95% of Indonesian people are Muslim who practice
wudhu (a procedure for washing part of the body before pray) at least 5-times a day. The fact directly and obviously
caused high consumption rate of water. This kind of aspect has not been included in the proposed framework.
After analyzing all collected data, facts, and information, it is concluded that in Indonesia, the problems related
to water is very complex. There has not been any study conducted to identify and solve the problem as an integrated
system. Previous studies related to water in Surabaya were only done in local scale. An integrated system approach
has not been implemented yet to assess the Surabaya urban water management in more comprehensive way as what
has been done in the cities in Australia through the implementation of the Urban Water Management Transition.
This study is a multiple years research. The result of this preliminary study would be a baseline to conduct
further research. In the future, the identification of critical factors in the implementation of WSC will be identified in
order to adjust the proposed Urban Water Management Transition as well as WSC framework to be more suitable
for Indonesian context. After being successfully implemented, the WSC index of Surabaya will be measured. The
best practice of WSC implementation in Surabaya will be broadly disseminated to Surabaya citizens as a campaign
to increase their awareness and to actively participate in bringing Surabaya as a greener, more livable, sustainable,
and resilient city.
050009-7
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors would like to acknowledge ITS Research Center for the funding support of the research project
[Project Number: 31414/IT2.11/PN.08/2016].
REFERENCES
1. R. Brown, N. Keath, T. Wong, editors. Transitioning to water sensitive cities: historical, current and future
transition states. 11th international conference on urban drainage; 2008.
2. R. Brown, N. Keath, T. Wong. Urban water management in cities: historical, current and future regimes.
Water Science & Technology. 2009;59(5).
3. M. F. Dobbie, R. R. Brown, M. A. Farrelly. Risk governance in the water sensitive city: Practitioner
perspectives on ownership, management and trust. Environmental Science & Policy. 2016;55:218-27.
4. J. Floyd, B. L. Iaquinto, R. Ison, K. Collins. Managing complexity in Australian urban water governance:
transitioning Sydney to a water sensitive city. Futures. 2014;61:1-12.
5. F. Sarah H, I. Avianda and V. Alodia. Dooms of Our Lives: The Reality About Water in Your House.
Surabaya: Institut Teknologi Sepuluh Nopember, Engineering I; 2016.
6. Surabaya BPSK. Population by Sex and Sub District taken from Population Registar 2008 - 2014 2014
[cited 2016 14th of October 2016]. Available from:
https://surabayakota.bps.go.id/linkTabelStatis/view/id/323.
7. T. Wong, R. Brown. The water sensitive city: principles for practice. 2009 0273-1223 Contract No.: 3.
8. C. Yu, R. Brown, P. Morison. Co-governing decentralised water systems: an analytical framework. Water
Science and Technology. 2012;66(12):2731-6.
9. III UHP. Green and Clean Kampung 2016 [cited 2016 14th of October 2016]. Available from:
http://prepcom3surabaya2016.id/kampung-green-clean-2/page/2/.
050009-8
Population resizing on fitness improvement genetic algorithm to optimize promotion
visit route based on android and google maps API
Tri Listyorini and Syafiul Muzid


, Indonesia

s, Indonesia

! "!

! ! "!

#$
%&$#

% %

"
'

!%(

"
#) * +

,( !
% "%
-&
" !. (% /
" "

% "

( " !'

" " " "
%

"
" !
% %
"
"

"
"

"

!
"
# &,+ 0'12(
!

3 "
( % %

"%
("%
"
! "(

3 "

"

"
!"

&2,'

!
!"#$!
#$
%&$# "
% "
4
) %
'
&,
"
# +
"!
%
"
5

% %
( " " $#

%
("
"

" !6

"%

( %"

" " "

"
! . (%
7"

"
( " !(

" " "
"

"
" !
1
" 2
" %

"
$
% &,!6
%

"

!
"
#&,+ 0'12 " "

"

"
%

7

89&:

;;<!,+ 0'122 %
"
%
"

!
, %

!"

&2,' "

=

"(

%%

"
(",+ 0'12

!"

&2,'

# >
!
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 060001-1–060001-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985524
060001-1

&
" %"

"

" "

&! "

&
%

"

"
!2
"
&

")
.
"
$
%
?@- %
!'
"
% &

" &

&A " "
% %

"
&< "
" &-
"

"

&B

"

"
"

" %

&!
'

,+ 0'12% %
% "

%

" "
"
%
"!

,+ 0'12 "

%

%
"

(" (89
3 '
(

"

(
% (

"

"

!
3 '
(
"

(
"

• A;"
&A;C
(

%
%

" !
• A;"
&A;C
(

%
%(
" !
• + <;"
&<;C

%
!
%
&
:
89 7

"

" %

%

%
"
"
%
"!

!
"
# &,+ 0'12
%

"

"
("

7

%
" "

" "

%

!
2 "

) % '

" !
"

" % "

!(

" ""

"
("

(
"

" &<!
4 89
%
"

""

7

" 2+
" "
" ! " (

(" "
"

% " "

" !
'('$)
'!)"%*
'
"%
,+ 0'12

1,(
' !(

" " "
""
%
&D!
'(#%!(
"
"($#((
!""
#

!
"
#&,+ 0'12 (
!
+
,

("

"
"

!/

!
060001-2
' " "
" "
% " !
( "

" "
%

7&
$ " 3

("
% " ("

(
"
! "

% "

"

("

" ("
7"
(
!

"
("(

!
$

( "" "
" ! "
"

!E
"

" (
" "

!'
" "

7

(
"
%
!
(
" "

"

"
7

("!
-

.

" "

"

% %
(
! %

%%
(

"
"
"

"
!
! %
( %"

%

%
%
(!
)

"
"

!
!%'
/!* $ , "

"

" *%
%
*"

"
(
"

" *%
%
"

"
! (!
A " "
F
" !
%!
< "
"

F 0

!
"
" %
- "
F
!

!
B
1, F
!

&

=

" %"

(B"
" !
&

=

( % "
5"&" (
!
060001-3
"

+
0
0 " "

%
" "

0!
!0! " "
(" !
(0! " "
" "
!

/!2
"

1!" "

1
E

% % "" %

"
""
!

5
0!A!2

"

"
"
" %( !'"

0!
<!

2
'
"
060001-4

3
" %
(0
!
'
,+ 0'12 "

!'

% " (7
!/
( "
,+ 0'12

% (
/

" "
"" ("
%

"2 2=
4$
#= 2 >

!

(

("( -;!'

(
(
(
7
&G&:2=*
1
'
2
(
"
%
( " "
" (

" " %!:7 0
&G:2H2=H=*H*G!H!;H<!@H
B!?GA!?
2 (

7( "
" ( (
" (

"

7

!'
""
( (!
3
"( " %
% (7
"

% &
( (
"

*&
4

( '
""

7"

(
7
!"

" &;!
" ( ;!;!
5 !
$
+

(
'
""

(

%
(
•
"

" "

%

"

• "

" "

(
%

!"
"
" ("
(

-"
&3-C89!
"

" 7
%

"

/

" "
"
"

!'
""
"
" -C
060001-5
6 (
$
'
"
" "%

"
A&

!
'
" %,+ 0'12 "

"
( -B!;D@#!
$ $%#( (
"
(#'(! (
$
=
" "
"
"
(

,+ 0'12 " ""

"
"

$# %
" "%
"
!
A!

,+ 0'12

3 "

!

"
% "

""

"
!
(
" (

" /!
(
(
0 "/
"

"

"
%

"
"

"

!
<! '7" ( " %
%
"

"
!
-! '7" "
(% %
"

"

/"

"

6
3 %"!
$7 8%'"' !
(

+ "'

$
% # %
"
"!
''' $'(

! !4 !;<! "
+
!' +"
!
+
+

,
'
0
'# $
% *
4(
!
! :
2
:

" :

F F2;;<:%
(
33

5

&%
, <3-;!
A! )
'*(
4" ( F;,

)
, ) *=

, ) (

2 1
-,

+$+
+
+
.-",""$/<<3-D
060001-6
Web application and database modeling of traffic impact analysis using Google Maps
Budi Yulianto and Setiono


!"

#
!

!" $%

&

!"

%

$

'

!"
#

! (
)

#
!"

!

!

!"

!
!"*
&

# !"(

#
%
(

+

,-.
, -
.

!"

% %
/ 0

#

#

!"

1

%

%
#

" !

!

$
#
1
%

!

%

#

%(

#

#

2#

#
$

!"!"

&

#

#

!"%
#

#

3%# %

1

!"

1

%

##

#

( %

4

+
#

56
!
#

!"

#
!"

!

!"

&

!"# !"(

#
5 76
# #

7

#

%
%

0

%%%

%
/!

/!

%/!
#
&

#

586

AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 060002-1–060002-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985525
060002-1
"77 '3'9 0:;
% /0"'!
#

#%
!"

/0"'!

#

!" %
# &+

(

#
!"

%
#
$
!"

!"""#"

"
5<6 !" &

%
%
$

= >

1

1

%

#

1

%

#
?
=
1

#
?
= " %
#

# #

?
= >

% #

1

#

?
"

%59 @6 # #

#

%

'A
,

!".#

$
!"

0

,
! 5B6

$
%
/!

/!

2
%

2

%
%

%
/! #

2%

5C6
>

%!

#2

%

1%%
/

#
/!

#%
% #
#

%
%

"'!
%
"%( % >/!/!
%

#
>>
>D!

%%!
#

/!

!

/!

$
%
%(%

A

>/! %
%%(0&)1 A!

5E6
$>#

#

+

%

&
/0"'!##/0 !
'##

# /0#"
5F6
# 7FF9

/0"'!##/

&

/0 #

/0"'!##

#
#

% %%

060002-2

%
56-

#
#

"'!

%
",
.
0

,.0

!

.G)

!0
E@F576

%
#(
$

#

#
,.0
%:;# 0" 0",!". 0:;

%
% >>>

%2

$

% ) ># %"
># '3'9 H#

'"("

>
576
"%" )")
!

(

! )7%
&+

%(
(

%

+
%

%

#

#

> #

DD
)%
"71 '3'9

0:;

# > )'
I
JJ
1

'

/0"'!
060002-3
'"* &+

%((

$%

# %

!"

#
(

!"

(

)

%#

#

!

#

!" 0:;

%

!"
/0

"'!

#

"%!% %%

!"

#

+

%
# +
(

" 1

+

)8
'"+
!"
!
#F@<9
FB<9"0
060002-4

0:;% )<
@

"
#
" $ " " "#

"
#
" $
" $ "
" "
#

"# "

%

!

"
# " $ " "

#

/0
"#

!"

+ (#
%%%

'",,

!"

)9%
1

+
% %

("
#
(%%% %

#

(%%

!"% )8
'"-
!"
!

(
)@

%

"

+

%
/0 #% )B
060002-5
'".

'"/H

)C%

+

%((

)

( ( #

!"
%
)E
'"0H

060002-6
'"1!"

!%
)

"%
!"
# '3'9 0:;
# /0
"'!
7

+

8

#
$
!"

1

"'"" "%

;

!

/!KL
-
!#
'+
7F7
7 I ;

M +" .(;;
" M
(
C

)'!

- ; "
7C 7F9
8 "M"( A" !

/!
%
/0"'! /G
"'!
%8. !

H , !H, !I A 78E2BF@< N7
! I#7F8
< A
!
" / .

>
7F<
9 '
,(! - 2- --I77 7FFE

;;
" (

H 7FFE
@ '
M
(
'
. ' M
(
I 7F8

' ' 7F8
B 0
' ,(! '
0
' ,(! I'0B9
7F9

' " .(;;
7F9
C 0 )& !

! /0 ( /0".'
"
0% H !0G,!!I77972<EC8 N9I7I7F<
E 3M
( 3 , .#
A/%"
- A
" ! #
# " ) .
0

" 0
)
I

A /
, .#
" /%
O 927B
A
F7 !!
3 7F7
F / 7F@

DD%%%(D

D D
DQ7FF9
)0 )I#
'
/0"-
('
! 0 +

;
(' "0>
M '
.M
(
H + ( (!
(2!I788C29EB NI H 7F8
060002-7
7 H/ 0:;D'3'.
"
0R( I%( I -" 7FF
060002-8
Design of information systems for population data collection based on client-server at
Bagolo village
Ucu Nugraha

Design of Information Systems for Population Data
Collection Based on Client-Server at Bagolo Village
Ucu Nugraha
Information System, Widyatama University, Jl. Cikutra 204A 40125, Bandung, Indonesia
Corresponding author: ucu.nugraha@widyatama.ac.id
Abstract. Village is the level under the sub-district level in the governmental system in a region where the information
system of population data service is majority provided in a manual system. However, such systems frequently lead to
invalid data in addition to the available data that does not correspond to the facts as the impact of frequent errors in the
process of data collection related to population including the data of the elderly and the process of data transfer. Similarly,
the data correspondences such as death certificate, birth certificate, a certificate of domicile change, and so forth, have their
own problems. Data archives are frequently non-systematic because they are not organized properly or not stored in a
database. Nevertheless, information service system for population census at this level can assist government agencies,
especially in the management of population census at the village level. A designed system can make the process of a
population census easier. It is initiated by the submission of population letter by each citizen who comes to the village
administrative office. Population census information system based on client-server at Bagolo Village was designed in
effective and non-complicated workflow and interface design. By using the client-server as the basis, the data will be stored
centrally on the server, so it can reduce data duplication and data loss. Therefore, when the local governments require data
information related to the population data of a village, they can obtain it easily without the need to collect the data directly
at the respective village.
INTRODUCTION
The services of the government agencies in providing the needs of the community are frequently considered as
excellent, despite there are still some people who complain about the service performance of the government
apparatus, particularly in the rural areas where the administrative services are still performed conventionally including
in recording the data of the villagers. Registration of population data at the village level is very important because the
provision of valid data will produce eligible information for the local and central government. Hopefully, by
performing organized population census at the village level, the local government does not need to perform the
population data recording directly.
The use of information technology has not been evenly and optimally distributed at the village-level governance,
particularly in the administrative services at the village, which is a sub-system of the state administration system. In
this case, the village is the spearheading in the process of data recording on population, which has a crucial role in
population-related office tasks and civil registration as well as reports the incident or important events related to the
residents. Such changes may be related to the identity card or family card, birth, death, and so on.
Bagolo Village is a village in the Pangandaran District where the recording of population data and administration
services are still carried out conventionally. Many problems are faced in recording the population data and
administrative services, in addition to other constraints for instance when the residents apply for a death certificate,
the preparation of the certificate is hampered because the officer is absence or the head of the village is on duty at
other regions, in which the letter requires validation of the head of the village and the service is not available.
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 060003-1–060003-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985526
060003-1
Information System
Information system is identified as the collection of several interrelated components so as to produce certain
information, as well as the organized system of data collection along with procedures for the use. The information
system is a combination of human resources, equipment, instruction processing, storage, conversion, and distribution
of information within an organization or institution (Fig. 1).
Hardware People
Database Data/
Information
Software Procedure
FIGURE 1. Elements of information system.
Functions of Information System

The information system has several functions as follows:
a. To collect data from the internal and external of an organization or institution.
b. To process data and convert them into meaningful and useful information.
c. To store the information required by an organization or institution and distribute the information to all users.
The information system for villagers data recording aims to facilitate the department of population and civil
registration related to the event of residents, namely the events experienced by them that should be reported as
consequences such as the issuance or amendment of family card, identity card or certificate of other issues such as
move in, change of address, and permanent or temporary residency status [1]. While the important events is the events
experienced by a person including births, deaths, stillbirths, marriages, divorces, child recognition, child validation,
adoption, name changes and citizenship status change [1].
Client-Server
Servers is aimed to serve or provide, thus, it can be concluded that the server is a computer that serves or provides
the data requested by the client of the computer in which each computer client will request something to the computer
server and it will be served by the computer server. While the client is a computer that must be served by the server,
in which the client networks can be more than one. Client-server is a network architecture that separates a computer
server to the computer client (Fig. 2). Each client can request data or information to the server, and the server will
provide every request of the client or the server [2].
060003-2
Client
Client
Client
Server
Client
Client
Client
FIGURE 2. Client-server model.
The basic components of client-server are middleware, server, and client. The components can be illustrated in
Fig. 3.
Middleware
Request
Serve/Responses
Server Client
FIGURE 3. Basic components of client-server.
There are several models of client-server designs, among them are the two-tier model and three-tier model. Two-
tier model is the direct communication between the client and the server. There is no intermediary between the client
and the server. While in the three-tear model, the third component is added, which is called the middle tier or often
called business service. Business service is an application that enforces the seal of the document business rules, process
data, and manages transactions. Figure 4 is the schematic model of the two-tier and the three-tier.
060003-3
Database Database
Middle Tier
Client Client
Client Client Application
Application
Application Application
(a) (b)
FIGURE 4. Scheme of the two-tier model (a) and three-tier model (b)
The method used in the design of information systems for the villagers refers to a problem-solving framework.
The framework structure is demonstrated in the following figure.
FIGURE 5. The framework of problem solving structure [3]
Problem Solving Framework consisted of four stages, namely: 1). Problem definition and planning, 2). Data
gathering, 3). Data analysis and synthesis, 4). Recommendations and solution. The most important and critical stage
was the problem definition & planning. This stage would identify the prevailing problems, in addition to analyze them
and to plan a problem-solving. A problem analysis was done by using PIECES framework approach [2].
PIECES is an abbreviation of Performance, Information, Economics, Control, Efficiency, and Service. PIECES
has six sections, in which each of section has its particular checklist. Each checklist on the corresponding name would
bring up the issue. The explanation of each section of PIECES is as follows:
1. Performance (P) = throughput, response time (system performance).
2. Information (I) = outputs, inputs, storage of data (presented information).
3. Economic (E) = Costs, benefits (expected benefits).
4. Control (C) = Security (security system).
5. Efficiency (E) = people, the users, the machine (the efficiency of people and processes).
6. Service (S) = rendered services.
060003-4
The subsequent stage was Data Gathering. At this stage, the site of the service of the village population was visited,
the staffs of services department were interviewed, and study the documents used in the service process was
performed. It was done to understand and comprehend the materials and to decide the liaison officers from the
ministry. In addition, the discussion with the decision makers at the village including the head of the village, the
secretary of the village (scribe), and the staffs of the population services, was carried out to collect data related to the
policy of population data.The third stage was the Data Analysis and Synthesis. At this stage, the investigation was
performed on the external parties outside the object under study. It was conducted internally by the researchers or in
a team of designers or developers of the system. This stage was the process of analysis and synthesis, which referred
to the data that had been collected previously. Expected results of the analysis and synthesis might result in a decision
or development of new systems which is capable in solving the problems that had been discussed in the previous
stages.The last stage was the Recommendations and Solutions. At this stage, the conclusion as the solution was
provided. In order to be understood by all parties, this conclusion should contain the recommendations embodied in a
model by using Use Case, Class Diagram, and User Interface design.
After all four stages of the Problem Solving Framework were done, the next step was to determine the architectural
design and the design process. The architectural design of information service system at the village level included the
three layers (three-tier), the server layer, client layer, and the middle layer.
1. Server layer
It is for data storage and the sources of the data contained on the database server.
2. Client layer
It is the interface requirements for each user, including administrator, operator, secretary, and village head.
Login is required to use this layer.
3. Middle layer
It is the business logic of the information service system for the villagers, such as in managing the data of the
villagers and making the birth certificate, death certificate, domicile certificate, a certificate of business, a
certificate to move in/out, and other certificates.
The client-server architecture of information system services at the village level is presented in Fig. 6.
Database Server
Web Server
Web Client
Server Layer
Middle Layer
Client Layer
FIGURE 6. Client-server architecture of information system services at the village level.
Results of PIECES Analysis

The results of PIECES analysis on the service information system at the village level based on the current
conditions are as follows:
1. Performance
a. Response time: Currently, the preparation of certificates and other letters uses a word processing
application, which is the Microsoft Office. In addition, the number of letters is specified at the time. The
060003-5
impact is the number of letters is not in order and the letters related to data population are not stored in the
database. Besides, the letter is not duplicated, hence, when the letters are lost, the village office cannot
provide any available archives. Finally, the staffs must make more from scratch, and sometimes the service
personnel are not in place because they are on duty outside the office. Likewise, when there are new
residents who move into the village, the data is not recorded directly.
b. Throughput: Lack of good response time resulting in less maximal performance parts services to citizens
in the process of making the necessary letters as well as the invalidity of the actual number of registered
citizens.
2. Information
a. The outputs
1) To determine the actual number of residents of the village who frequently look for documents that
sometimes the documents are not archived properly, hence, re-recording should be performed.
2) To know the family members of resident village authorities is sometimes difficult.
3) Information about the people who died, who was born and who are immigrants is difficult.
b. The inputs
1) It did not record the entire data on mortality, birth, migrant, or residents who move in/out.
2) It did not carry any citizen who proposed for a statement.
c. Stored Data
1) Data storage had not been well-organized (the absence of database).
2) In the absence of systematic data storage, the frequent occurrence of duplication of data, the available
data was invalid.
3. Economics
The high amount of paper use and the cost of photocopy as well as the required space.
4. Control
The process of data storage, change, and delete is easily controlled and the data is secure because the data is
stored in the database on the server. The system is designed based on client-server.
5. Efficiency
a. Residents who apply to make official statements frequently have to wait for the ratification of the head of
the village.
b. When the head of the village needs a report or data, the report is processed manually.
6. Service
a. The administrative system implemented at the village level is still manual. Although the use of computers
is implemented, all the data is stored on the computer of each PC, so when the head of the village needs
information from the ministry, it must be transferred in advance to the storage media such as flash disk and
subsequently transferred to a PC owned by the village head.
b. If there is a change of the data, the data must be re-transferred to the PC of the head of the village to keep
the data up-to-date.
Based on the results of the PIECES analysis, the prevailing service information system at Bagolo Village should
be improved in several ways. The improvements should not merely change the existing system, but it should focus on
the engineering changes associated with a better and clearer system. Furthermore, it is expected that the village
services for the community will be more quickly, effectively and efficiently. The use of PIECES framework was
intended to avoid any fatal failure in the implementation of the engineering process.
060003-6
Use Case Diagram
create a
new letter
add
population
data search mail list
delete
population
data add family
data Operator >>
nd
<<
te delete mail
ex
ex
data
<<
ten
Admin d>>
d>
find population xten

<<e
>
data <<extend>
> list of <<extend>> download mail
mail list
population data
d>> Secretary of <<ex
download xten tend>
population <<e village head >
>
d>
data view mail data

ten
list of
ex
family
<<
<<e
view Village head xten
d>>
population >>
>
<<extend>>
<< delete family
d>
data nd ext
ten
e end data
ext >>
ex
<<
<<
edit family download find family
data view family family data data
data
FIGURE 7. Use case diagram of information system.
CONCLUSIONS
Information systems based on client-server is capable to provide the administrative services in the rural areas more
quickly and accurately. Furthermore, problem analysis by using PIECES framework is capable to provide appropriate
solutions and recommendations for the services to the citizens in the rural areas, particularly.
REFERENCES
1. Peraturan Menteri Dalam Negeri Republik Indonesia Nomor 19 Tahun 2012.
2. C. Haryawan. 2016. Analisis Perancangan Sistem Informasi Pembayaran Biaya Studi Mahasiswa di STMIK
AKAKOM Yogyakarta Menggunakan PIECES Framework. Seminar Riset Teknologi Informasi (SRITI).
3. B. Ternoway. 2005. Framework for Structured Problem Solving, Canada: Info-tech.
060003-7
Development of enterprise architecture in university using TOGAF as framework
Endang Amalia and Hari Supriadi

Development of Enterprise Architecture in University Using
TOGAF as Framework
Endang Amalia1, a) and Hari Supriadi2,b)
1
Information System Department, Widyatama University, Jalan Cikutra No. 204A Sukapada Cibeunying Kidul Kota
Bandung Jawa Barat 40125 Indonesia
a)
Corresponding author: endang.amalia@widyatama.ac.id
b)
hari.supriadi@widyatama.ac.id
Abstract. The university of XYZ is located in Bandung, West Java. It has an infrastructure of technology information (IT)
which is managed independently. Currently, the IT at the University of XYZ employs a complex conventional management
pattern that does not result in a fully integrated IT infrastructure. This is not adaptive in addressing solutions to changing
business needs and applications. In addition, it impedes the innovative development of sustainable IT services and also
contributes to an unnecessary high workload for managers. This research aims to establish the concept of IS/IT strategic
planning. This is used in the development of the IS/IT and in designing the information technology infrastructure based on
the framework of The Open Group Architecture Framework (TOGAF) and Architecture Development Method (ADM). A
case study will be done at the University of XYZ using the concept of qualitative research through review of literatures and
interviews. This study generates the following stages:(1) forming a design using TOGAF and the ADM around nine
functional areas of business and propose 12 application candidates to be developed at XYZ University; (2) generating 11
principles of the development of information technology architecture; (3) creating a portfolio for future applications
(McFarlan Grid), generating 6 applications in the strategic quadrant (SIAKAD-T, E-LIBRARY, SIPADU-T, DSS, SIPPM-
T, KMS), 2 quadrant application operations (PMS- T, CRM), 4 quadrant application supports (MNC-T, NOPEC-T,
EMAIL-SYSTEM, SSO); and (4) modelling the enterprise architecture of this study which could be a reference in making
a blueprint for the development of information systems and information technology at the University of XYZ.
INTRODUCTION
A university is an institution that organizes professional and academic education within the scope of several
scientific disciplines. According to Law No.20 Year 2003, a University is an organization which is obliged to provide
education, research, and community service (Tridharma). It has autonomy to manage its own various institutions. In
order to realize the process of university’s quality should also plan to maintain the information technology
infrastructure to support the alignment of Information Technology (IT) to the organization's business strategy [1].
Education becomes highly competitive, especially for enterprises managed by people (private). This requires the
managers to develop or build information system (IS). These will provide support to business activities, help to achieve
the objectives of the organization, and be a valuable service for stakeholders, especially related to data, information,
technology and application [2].
Management of data and information will give wider access to data networks that connect globally. The
construction and development of information systems should be in accordance with the strategic direction of the
organization. In many cases, the management of information systems fails in achieving the organization's objectives
for their design was not done in accordance with the direction, objectives, and the needs of universities [3].
The University of XYZ is a university located in Bandung. The university has an IT infrastructure that is managed
independently. Currently, the IT at the University of XYZ is complex. It consists of various pieces,which include the
main server, the Storage Area Network (SAN), switching distribution, access points, and other supporting devices
scattered throughout the work unit. Every year, they often bring physical and nonphysical damage to various devices.
The various types/brands used create difficulties for managers as they have to study the characteristics of each device.
The university already has the facilities and infrastructure to support the IT infrastructure. Unfortunately, the
utilization of Information Technology (IT) in the governance of the university, especially at the University of XYZ,
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 060004-1–060004-9; doi: 10.1063/1.4985527
060004-1
has not fully followed the modern development of IT. The current implementation does not have the architecture and
frameworks particularly in use of IT nowadays. It is used to only meet the need for a specific section or division.
Organizational information system architecture planning is a complex process. The planning process should be
managed by a clear indication with the aim of aligning an organization's business strategy and technology strategy to
deliver maximum results for the organization.
These conditions have an implication for the emergence of the need for integration with information systems (IS)
between sections or divisions. Integration is necessary in the design of an architecture with a specific framework for
the creation of a system that is effective and efficient. Both eeffectiveness and efficiency in the application of IT
require Framework. Framework is needed to organize innovations within the company and can be used to develop the
architecture easily [4].
In principle, enterprise architecture is a tool used to realize the alignment of information technology within a well-
run business organization. Alignment application of information system to the organizational needs is only able to
answer the concern of integration’s factors, which aims to reduce disparities in the system development process. It
would require a paradigm in planning, designing, and managing information system called the Enterprise Architecture
(EA).
A wide variety of paradigms and methods could be used in the design, which include Zachman, The Open Group
Architecture Framework (TOGAF), Federal Enterprise Architecture (FEA), dan Gartner [5].
TOGAF provides a detailed description of how to build, manage and apply framework and information systems
used to draw an enterprise architecture development model. TOGAF framework provides a detailed method of how
to build, manage, and implement the framework and information system called the Architecture Development Method
(ADM) that can be made on the development of an integrated system.
Research Identifications
This research aims to improve the competitiveness of academic activities in the University of XYZ in Bandung
which employs information systems supported by IT; however, the IT utilization is not in accordance with the vision
and mission of the University.
The problems identified include:
1. IT utilization has not yet have an integrated system of architecture models and frameworks
2. IT utilization has not yet have a blueprint that supports the availability of information system
Research Questions
The problems that happen today, based on the viewpoints of TOGAF, include: phase A to phase B and there are
aspects and question words which deal with aspects of the data (What?), aspects of function (How?), networking
aspect (Where?), the aspect of resources (Who?), the aspect of time (when?), and finally aspects of motivation (Why?),
which consist of:
1. How to build the EA design in accordance with the reference standard and produce blueprints which are aligned
with business needs?
2. How could the data scattered in every unit be integrated and the result does not take a long time and the data be
accessed easily?
3. How do they execute their respective functions which include applying IT demand planning?
Research Scopes
The preparation of this development is based on data obtained during the study. Because of the breadth of the field
faced by the authors during this study, the authors’ restriction of the compilation is based on the scope of activities,
including the following:
1. The research focused on the use of IT in the governance of university, especially in the university of XYZ located
in Bandung, West Java. The retrieval of data was performed directly in the University of XYZ.
2. The development of enterprise architecture at the University of XYZ, intended to produce the model and the basic
framework (blueprint) in developing information systems (IS), is integrated to support the business objectives of
the organization.
060004-2
3. The design of the infrastructure is performed by limiting the scope which is composed of a preliminary phase:
framework and principles as well as the six initial phases (Phase A, B, C, D, E and F) of the TOGAF ADM that
include: architecture vision, business architecture, information systems architectures, technology architecture,
opportunities and solutions, and migration planning for the author which only concentrates on the development of
architecture.
4. The result of the development of infrastructure needs is limited to research only and should not be implemented as
it requires a bureaucracy in the university.
Research Objectives
The objectives of this research are:
1. to build an appropriate Enterprise Architecture Framework (EAF) and produce the best solution in making the
blueprint that is aligned with business needs;
2. to optimize the function of Framework TOGAF ADM to design integrated systems which are more effective and
efficient;
3. To produce recommendations appropriate business architecture model so that it could carry out their respective
functions in which applying IT demand planning.
Research Methodology
This research will design the enterprise architecture using TOGAF framework in order to generate the steps in
manufacturing business architecture, data architecture, application architecture, and technology architecture. This
method was chosen because it has many advantages; one of which is that TOGAF framework is open source, more
detailed, more complete, and flexible.
To be able to conduct this research, the plan is as follows:
1. Study of literature
The study of literature was performed by searching information and references from handbooks and research
publications, articles, journals, websites and other information resources related to this research, the internet and
other resources related to this research.
2. Method of data collection
This research was conducted by collecting data directly from the object of research through:
a. Interview: Used to obtain information and review the problems that exist
b. Observation: The data were collected by observing the problems directly on the object.
c. Data analysis
3. To analyze and design the Information Systems, the method of TOGAF Architecture Development Method (ADM)
was used. The initial steps can be described as follows:
a. Preliminary Phase: framework and principles
The framework used in this research was The Open Group Architecture Framework (TOGAF) with Architecture
Development Method (ADM) to produce a blueprint of Academic Information System.
b. Requirements Management Phase
Details ADM requirement management are described as follows: Phase A: Architecture Vision, Phase B: Business
Architecture, Phase C: Information System Architecture, Phase D: Technology Architecture and Phase E:
Opportunities and Solutions
METHODOLOGY LITERATURE
Architecture
The definition of architecture here is not only limited to a general sense associated with physical construction, but
also in the context of business and architecture for software engineering; the following are some definitions related to
architecture:
1. Architecture is the components of a system consisting of network, hardware and software that is structured [6].
2. The overall design of the construction of both physical and context, as real or virtual [7].
060004-3
From the definitions above, it can be concluded that architecture basically describes the system construction form
embodied in a model (blueprint) which is viewed from several perspectives.
Enterprise
Here are some notions of enterprise:
1. Organizations that support the business environment and the mission that has been set.
2. The proper functioning of the overall component of an organization that operates under the control of the
organization.
Enterprise is not only a profit-oriented organization but also a non-profit organization such as an educational
institution. Enterprise can be in an organization as a whole or part of the organization.
Enterprise Architecture
The definitions of enterprise architecture are:
1. A descriptive representation (model) that is relevant to describe an enterprise and what should be produced to meet
the needs of management or organization [6].
2. A blueprint mapping relationship between components and all people working in the company consistently to
improve cooperation/collaboration, and coordination among them..
3. A mechanism to ensure information technology resources of an organization may be in line with the strategy of
the organization.
The Open Group Architecture Framework (TOGAF)

TOGAF is a framework to develop an enterprise architecture. TOGAF has a method that details at the same time
supporting tool for implementing it. This framework was issued by The Open Group's Architecture Framework in
1995. The design of this infrastructure will use the approach of Enterprise Architecture Model derived from the
framework of The Open Group Architecture Framework (TOGAF) version 9.1 as a framework for drafting.
TOGAF as a framework architectural design has several characteristics, which are: (1) Included in the third
framework architectural design which is most often used. (2) A framework which is an open-standard. (3) Focusing
on implementation cycle (ADM) and processes. (4) Neutral. (5) Accepted by the international community at large. (6)
The approach is comprehensive (holistic). (7) Having the tools to complete the planning and processes.
Framework of preparation of this research is derived from TOGAF framework on the basis that:
1. It takes a flexible method for integrating the units of information and information system with different standard
platforms. TOGAF is able to perform integration for a variety of different systems.
2. TOGAF tend to be generic and flexible. TOGAF be able to anticipate all kinds of artifacts that may arise during the
design process (for TOGAF Resource base provides plenty of reference material), a widely accepted standard, and
is able to cope with change.
3. TOGAF is relatively easy to be implemented.
4. TOGAF is open source, so it is neutral to the technology of a particular vendor.
Structures and components of TOGAF:
1. Architecture Development Method
2. Architecture Development Method describes how to find an architecture organization is specifically based on its
business needs. This is the main part of TOGAF.
3. Foundation Architecture (Enterprise Continuum)
4. Foundation Architecture is a “framework-within a framework” which provide links to providing relevant
architectural asset gathering and manual assistance during the transfer of different levels of abstraction.
5. Foundation Architecture consist of:
- Technical Reference Model, providing a model and the classification of generic platform services.
- Standard Information Base, provide basic standards of information.
- Building Block Information Base, providing blocks of basic information in the future.
- Resource Base
- This section provides information sources in the form of guidelines, templates, checklists, background
information and detailed supporting materials that help architects in use (ADM).
060004-4
Architecture Development Method (ADM)
Architecture Development Method (ADM) is the core of TOGAF as a result of contributions from many
practitioners in the world of information technology architecture. ADM is specifically designed to meet the needs of
business and enterprise-scale information technology. ADM is equipped with many tools both in the planning and
process, as describe below:
1. In guiding the design process, ADM is a set of architectural views that include a business view, data, applications
and technologies.
2. A set of deliverables recommended.
3. Linkages with many real case studies.
4. Method for managing requirements.
ENTERPRISE ARCHITECTURE PLANNING

In this research, each stage will be adjusted to the TOGAF framework. Based on the stages that exist in TOGAF
ADM, it is expected to be obtained an information technology architecture model that covers four important
components of the business architecture, the data architecture, application architecture, and technology architecture.
Preliminary Phase: Framework and Principles

Preliminary phase is a preparatory stage enterprise architecture planning. These steps which are performed for
architectural modeling process can be directed properly.
1. Determining Framework and Principles
Framework used in the design of information technology architecture framework TOGAF XYZ University is with
reference to the TOGAF ADM methodology which is a detailed method of how to build and manage and implement
enterprise architecture and information system.
2. Management Commitment
Support management is one of the success factors manufacture enterprise architecture. Therefore, before entering
into the next phase of enterprise architecture planning should be ascertained in advance commitment of management
to the next process is going well.
Requirement Management Phase

The purpose of this phase is to provide process management architecture needed throughout the phases of the cycle
ADM, collect, inventory and identify all the needs of the enterprise, then give it to the relevant TOGAF ADM phase
store. References required in this phase include academic administration, financial budgets, Standard Operating
Procedure (SOP). Phase requirement management includes important phase because it is associated with the strategic
plan and policy management. Development of information systems will have to conform to the management
requirements of the organization. Detail requirements associated with the management information system that will
be built are as follows: Architecture Vision, Business Architecture, Information System Architecture, Architecture
Technology and Opportunities and Solutions
Architecture Vision Phase

The first step in this phase is to identify requirement management for architectural vision before designing.
Identification performed during this phase is represented through the following aspects: Business Goals, Business
Objective, Scope, organizational Structure and Stakeholders
Business Architecture Phase

This phase aims to understand the current state of business processes at XYZ University and subsequently make
the proposed improvements to the modeling business architecture. The steps performed in this phase include:
060004-5
a. Analysis Business Environment of University of XYZ: internal value chain analysis and strength-weakness
(SW) analysis
b. Analysis External Business of University of XYZ: external value chain analysis and opportunities-threat (OT)
analysis
Business Strategy Alternative

a. Strategy mapping the strength of the opportunities (SO)
b. Strategy mapping of force against threats (ST)
c. Strategy mapping weakness of the opportunities (WO)
d. Strategy mapping weakness against threats (WT)
e. Mapping critical success factor (CSF)
INFORMATION SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE PHASE

This phase aims to make the modeling of information systems architecture. This phase consists of 2 architectures,
application and data. The application architecture discusses existing applications and applications to be designed while
the data architecture includes the current existing data architecture and data architecture proposal, referring to a
business architecture that has been described previously.
Application Architecture
a. Current Application Architecture
Table1. McFarlan grid as is an application in University of XYZ
Strategic High Potential
- -
Key Operational Support

Academic IS, Graduation IS, Finance IS, HRD IS IT Complaint IS
RKAKL MIS, Asset IS, Higher Education’s Database IS, VOIP IS
EPSBED IS, Library IS, Product and Service IS, SERDOS E-mail IS
System, LEMLIT IS, Community Service IS, Quality Network Monitoring IS
Control IS, Library IS, Journal Online IS, E-Learning Wireless LAN IS
Admission IS, Website Portal of University of XYZ,
Repository IS, Simple
b. Expected Application Architecture

From the analysis of IS in University of XYZ needs, obtained that the application portfolio forward (to ... be)
which is the unity of University of XYZ’s IS Strategy (Table 2).
c. Future Portfolio Application

The application portfolio is a list of applications that could be recommended for application in the University of
XYZ. The following list of applications (Table 3) become IS strategy to support University of XYZ business strategies
to support organizational goals.
Expected Data Architecture

Data architecture that is expected are: Education providers, Research, Dedication, Organizers of educational
activities and Operational
060004-6
Table 2. Expected Application Architecture
Integrated Application Modules Used Behavior
Integrated Academic IS: Graduation-IS, Scholarship IS**,

Integrated Academic IS Practical Work IS**, KKN IS**, Lab IS**, Learning IS, Critical
Lecturers Evaluation IS**
E-Library OPAC**, Warintek Application Critical
Integrated IS of Academic Repository IS, Financial IS, Asset IS, Pdpt IS, Log IS, Qc
Critical
Administration IS, Epsbed IS, Serdos IS, Swmp IS, Rkakl IS, Hrd IS
Single Sign On (Sso) Application Sso-IS** Critical

Integrated Community Service IS Lemlit IS, Ejournal IS, Lpm IS** Critical
Integrated Multimedia& Conference Support

Voip-IS, Vid.Conf-IS.
System Application
Bwmgt IS, Firewall IS, Proxy/Wireless IS, Dns IS,
Integrated Network Operation Center Support
Helpdesk IS, File Sharing IS
Data warehouse**, SMS Gateway IS**, Parents IS**,
Customer Relationship Management
Cooperation IS**, Graduated IS**, Carrier Management Support
(CRM)
System IS**
Department Porta lIS, University of XYZ’s Portal Web IS,

Integrated Management System Portal Critical
Social Network IS**, Mobile Information IS**, Forum IS**
Email System Mail IS Support

Decision Support System
Data warehouse** Critical
(DSS)
Knowledge Management System KMS IS** Critical

(KMS)
Table 3. Future Portfolio Application
Integrated Application Modules Used Behavior
Siakad IS: Graduation IS, Scholarship IS**, Practical Work

Integrated Academic IS IS**, KKN IS**, Lab IS**, Learning IS, Lecturers Critical
Evaluation IS**
E-Library Opac Application**, Warintek Application Critical
Repository IS: Financial IS, Assets IS, Pdpt IS, Log IS, Qc
Integrated IS of Academic Administration Critical
IS, Epsbed-IS, Serdos-IS, Swmp-IS, Rkakl-IS, HRD-IS
Single Sign On (Sso) Application SSO-IS** Critical
Integrated Community Service IS Lemlit IS: Ejournal IS, Lpm IS** Critical
Integrated Multimedia & Conference System
Voip IS, Vid.Conf IS. Support
Application
BWMGT IS: Firewall IS, Proxy/Wireless IS, DNS IS,
Integrated Network Operation Center Support
Helpdesk IS, File Sharing IS
Data warehouse **: SMS Gateway IS**, Parents IS**,
Customer Relationship Management (CRM) Cooperation IS**, Graduated IS**, Carrier Management Support
System IS**
Department Portal IS: University Of XYZ’s Portal Web IS,
Integrated Management System Portal Critical
Social Network IS**, Mobile Information IS**, Forum IS**
Email System E-Mail IS Support
Decision Support System (DSS) DATAWAREHOUSE ** Critical

Knowledge Management System (KMS) KMS IS** Critical
060004-7
TECHNOLOGY ARCHITECTURE PLANNING
Table 4. Development of IS/IT Principles
Type Principle
Support client server technologies
Hardware Independent toward certain vendors and brands
Able to adapt to the future development of technology
Based on the needs and the purpose of University of XYZ
Able to adapt to all units in the university

Software The operating system supports the use of hardware and software applications are built
Support Network
Having License
Using the concept of open standards
Characteristically multiplatform (can operate on all platforms)
DBMS must be able to accommodate the needs of data transactions
Data is created once, not redundant, and should be consistent
The data is a common property does not belong to a specific organizational unit
Accessing data is limited by user access rights
Data easily maintained and backed up
Programming language can produce applications that are GUI
Programming language supports object-oriented development techniques
Guarantee the security of application data on the risk of loss or misuse of data.
Communication Communication technology supports client-server communication

Channel The networks built to be reliable and fast internet access should
Internet is used to support the entire application
Communications technology capable of supporting business functions in the future
Mode must be redundant and communication devices perform mutual backup between one
another.
Application Development Solution Pattern

The University of XYZ is a university located in Bandung which already has an IT infrastructure that is managed
independently. Currently, the IT at the University of XYZ is complex, consisting of various pieces including the main
server, the Storage Area Network (SAN), switching distribution, access points, and other supporting devices scattered
throughout the work unit. Every year often brings physical and nonphysical damage to various devices. The various
types/brands used create difficulties for managers as they have to study the characteristics of each device.
This research aims to establish the concept of strategic planning IS/IT. It is used in the development of the IS/IT
and the design of the information technology infrastructure based on the framework of The Open Group Architecture
Framework (TOGAF) [6, 7] and Architecture Development Method (ADM) [8]. A case study was done at the
University of XYZ using the concept of qualitative research through a review of literature interviews.
CONCLUSIONS
1. The depiction of the business model in the University of XYZ using the tool value chain to identify the process
of implementing the tridharma in the University of XYZ. Business modeling resulted in three major functional
areas, namely teaching, research, community service and six areas of functionality supporting namely academic
administration, management and development of human resources, financial management accounting and
auditing, management and asset management, public relations and cooperation, resource management IS /IT.
2. The analysis of the research, mapping the 11 principles of the development of information technology architecture
in University of XYZ.
3. All applications will be developed based Single Sign On (SSO), modular and integrated with each other.
4. Based on the analysis which uses a framework TOGAF ADM, nine functional areas and 12 candidate applications
which will be developed in support of the tridharma of University of XYZ are acquired.
5. The result of the design of future applications when mapped in the matrix Mc Farlan can be identified; there are
6 applications in the strategic quadrant (SIAKAD-T, E-LIBRARY, SIPADU-T, DSS, SIPPM-T, KMS), 2
060004-8
applications in the operational quadrant (PMS- T, CRM), and 4 quadrant application supports (MNC-T, NOPEC-
T, SSO, EMAIL-SYSTEM).
6. Platform technologies that exist today largely support the proposed application, yet the process of optimization
through scaling up and scaling out to improve performance is necessary.
SUGGESTIONS
1. With the development of a new information system that is modular and integrated, the process of documentation
of all information systems must be performed properly.
2. It is deemed necessary to increase the human resource managers of ICT both on PUDI and the Directorate of
Information Systems and Multimedia with quality personnel as needed, particularly to handle all the proposed
applications.
3. To produce a blueprint for the strategic planning of IS/IT in University of XYZ based on IT Strategic Plan iWard
and Peppard, it would require further analysis, especially in deliverables patterns of governance IS/IT.
4. The concept of cloud computing technology in the design of infrastructure in total IS/IT business processes is
needed so that they could run more effectively, efficiently, and agile so it can follow the pattern of the desired
change management in the future.
5. Master Plan Information Technology Architecture in University of XYZ could be used as a reference in the
drafting of budget related to the development and implementation of information technology within the IT
environment at the University of XYZ.
REFERENCES
1. S. D. K. Kuswardani., (2006). Arsitektur Sistem Informasi Untuk Institusi Perguruan Tinggi Di Indonesia.
2. Roni Yunis, K. S. 2010. Pengembangan model arsitektur enterprise untuk Perguruan Tinggi.
3. K. R. Roni., K. S. 2009. Perancangan model enterprise architecture dengan TOGAF Architecture Development
Method.
4. R. Harrison., 2009. Study Guide TOGAF 9 Foundation. The Open Group.
5. E. B. Setiawan., 2009. Pemilihan EA Framework.
6. Open Group. 2009. The Open Group Architecture Framework: Architecture Development Method,
http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/chap05.html, 02.05.2015.
7. Open Group. 2009. The Open Group Architecture Framework: Introduction,
http://pubs.opengroup.org/architecture/togaf9-doc/arch/chap01.html, 27.04.2015
8. Open Group. 2009. Togaf Standard Courseware V9.1 Edition: Module 3 Introduction to the Architecture
Development Method.
060004-9
Effect of openings collectors and solar irradiance on the thermal efficiency of flat plate-
finned collector for indirect-type passive solar dryer
Fatimah Batubara, Sari Farah Dina, Klaudia Kathryn Y. M., M. Turmuzi, Fitri Siregar, and Nora Panjaitan

Effect of Openings Collectors and Solar Irradiance on the
Thermal Efficiency of Flat Plate-Finned Collector for
Indirect-Type Passive Solar Dryer
Fatimah Batubara1,a), Sari Farah Dina2,b), Klaudia Kathryn Y M1,c), M
Turmuzi1,d), Fitri Siregar1,e), Nora Panjaitan1,f)
1
Department of Chemical Engineering, Engineering Faculty, University of Sumatera Utara, Medan, Indonesia
2
Institute for Research and Standardization of Industry, Medan, Indonesia, Jl. Sisingamangaraja No. 24 Medan
– Indonesia
a)
Corresponding Author: fatimahagussalim@yahoo.com
b)
sfdina1@yahoo.com, c) klaudiakym@yahoo.com, d)turmuzi@yahoo.com, e)fitri72gar@yahoo.com,
f)
norapanjaitan2011@yahoo.com
Abstract. Research on the effect of openings solar collector and solar irradiance to thermal efficiency has been done.
Solar collector by flat plate-finned type consists of 3 ply insulator namely wood, Styrofoam and Rockwool with
thickness respectively are 10 mm, 25 mm and 50 mm. Absorber plate made of aluminum sheet with thickness of
0.30 mm, painted by black-doff. Installation of 19 units fins (length x height x thickness: 1000x20x10 mm) on the
collector will increase surface area of absorber so it can receive much more solar energy. The solar collector cover is
made of glass (thickness of 5 mm). During the research, the solar irradiance and temperature of collector are
measured and recorded every five minutes. Temperature measurement performed on the surface of the absorber
plate, inside of collector, surface cover and the outer side insulator (plywood). This data is used to calculate the heat
loss due to conduction, convection and radiation on the collector. Openings of collectors vary as follows: 100%,
75%, 15% and 0% (total enclosed). The data collecting was conducted from 09.00 am to 17.00 pm and triplicates.
The collector thermal efficiency calculated based on the ratio of the amount of heat received to the solar irradiance
absorbed. The results show that each of openings solar collector has different solar irradiance (because it was done
on a different day) which is in units of W/m2: 390 (100% open), 376 (75% open), 429 (15% open), and 359 (totally
enclosed). The highest thermal efficiency is in openings variation of 15% opened. These results indicate that the
efficiency of the collector is influenced by the solar irradiance received by the collector and the temperature on the
collector plate. The highest thermal efficiency is in variation of openings 15%. These indicate that the efficiency of
the collector was influenced by solar irradiance received by the collector and openings of the collector plate.
INTRODUCTION
Indonesia lies on the equator, lie at 6° N -11° S and 95° E - 141° E. Having regard to the circle of the sun in
a year that is in the region of 23.5° N and 23.5° S cause the temperature in Indonesia is quite high (between 26
ºC - 35 ºC), and when sunny, the sun will be exposed for 7-8 hours a day. Average national solar energy
potential is 16 MJ/day [1].
Solar energy is referred to as renewable and/or sustainable energy because it will be available as long as the
Sun continues to shine. Estimates for the life of the main stage of the Sun are another 4 to 5 billion years. Solar
irradiance in the form of solar thermal energy, is an alternative source of energy for drying especially to dry
fruits, vegetables, agricultural grains and other kinds of material, such as wood. It is estimated that in developing
countries there exist significant post harvest losses of agricultural products, due to lack of other preservation
means. Drying by solar energy is a rather economical procedure for agricultural products, especially for medium
to small amounts of products. The objective of a dryer is to supply the product with more heat than is available
under ambient conditions, increasing sufficiently the vapor pressure of the moisture held within the crop, thus
enhancing moisture migration from within the crop and decreasing significantly the relative humidity of the
drying air, hence increasing its moisture-carrying capability and ensuring a sufficiently low equilibrium
moisture content [2].
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 070001-1–070001-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985528
070001-1
In general, more than 80% of agricultural products produced by small farmers in developing countries such
as Indonesia is dried by the open sun, because this energy is seen as a clean energy, environmentally friendly,
simple, inexpensive, and requires no mechanical equipment which is expensive as it is used in artificial drying.
However, this conventional method has some limitations, among them labor intensive, the area is quite large,
heavily dependent on the stability of the weather conditions, and can reduce the quality and yield of the final
dried product [1, 3].
To increase the feasibility of solar energy can be done by utilizing the technology of artificial solar energy
(solar dryer) either directly (direct) or indirectly (indirect). This artificial drying can improve the quality of
agricultural products when compared to direct sun-drying. Selection of the type of artificial drying is adjusted to
agricultural products to be dried [1].
The artificial solar dryers raise the temperature of hot air of the sun from 35 °C up to 45-60 °C during the
day /sunshine [4]. Therefore, the artificial solar energy technologies need to be observed continuously to achieve
the maximum heat increase in air temperature.
The performance of indirect solar dryer consist of flat plate collector was evaluated by drying fresh samples
of mango. The thermal efficiency of collector was approximately 17% [5]. Drying cocoa beans continuously
using solar dryers type of flat plate collectors and thermochemical have been done [1]. The results showed that
the thermal efficiency of flat plate solar collector ranges between 27- 58% and the drying time of 30 hours.
Improving thermal efficiency can be done by improving the insulation system or increase the surface area of the
absorber plate. One way of increasing the absorber area without changing the size of the collector is by fin
addition.
Fin is additional equipment that is used to improve the performance of heat exchanger equipment. Basically,
the use of fins aims to increase the area of heat transfer field with materials that have good conductivity so that it
can store more thermal energy. In addition to the installation of fin, the magnitude of the openings collector can
also influence the effectiveness of heat transfer from the air to the absorber plate which is going towards the
drying chamber.
The purpose of this research was to look at the performance of the solar collectors flat-plate type fins on
various collector slit openings by determining the thermal efficiency in a variety of weather conditions (solar
irradiance).
MATERIAL AND METHODS

This research was conducted in the Laboratory of Renewable Energy of Institute for Research and
Standardization of Industry, Medan. The equipment used is a solar dryer (Fig. 1), which consists of a drying
chamber and the finned flat plate collectors, pyranometer, temperature data logger, data processor, and thermo-
laser. The data measurement starting at 9.00 am until 5.00 pm. The research was conducted by varying openings
of collector namely 100%, 75%, 15%, and 0% (total enclosed)
FIGURE 1. Indirect Solar Dryer
Dimensions of the drying chamber (L x W x H) is, 2 × 1 × 1 m and the solar collector (L x W) is 2 x 2m.
Solar collectors are used as in Fig. 2, consists of three ply of insulator, namely wood, Styrofoam and Rockwool
with the thickness respectively is 10 mm, 25 mm and 50 mm. The absorber plate inside the collector made of
aluminum sheet with thickness of 0.30 mm, painted by black-doff. Installation of 19 units fins (length x height x
070001-2
thickness: 1000x20x10 mm) on the collector will increase surface area of absorber so can receive solar energy
more. The solar collector cover is made of glass (thickness of 5 mm).
(a) (b)
FIGURE 2. Solar Collector Profile: (a) Side view (b) Top view
Test Procedure
During the test, the intensity of solar irradiance and ambient temperature recorded every 5 minutes using
pyranometer. Temperature data logger is placed in the collector and drying chamber for recording the
temperature every five minutes. Temperatures of surface of the absorber plate, surface cover and the outer side
insulator (plywood) is measured using thermos-laser manually every 5 minutes. All of these data were used for
the calculating of the thermal efficiency of solar collectors.
Thermal Efficiency of Solar Collector Calculation

As for some of the parameters measured as shown in FIGURE 2.(a) are as follows: ply-wood temperature
(the outermost/ bottommost layer of the absorber plate-1) (T1), temperature inside the collector (T2), glass cover
temperature (T3), environment temperature (T4), absorber plate surface temperature (T5). The above parameters
are used to calculate the value of heat losses in the solar collector and the value of the solar collector’s
efficiency.
Overall heat loss is calculated based on the total amount of convection heat loss through the air in
environment to the surface of wood, convection heat loss through the air inside the collector to the plate surface,
heat loss on the pedestal (wood) and the upper side and also irradiance heat loss.
The received energy in the sunshine hours ( Qr ) was calculated as energy irradiance absorbed in the solar
collector minus heat loss from the collector is calculated by refer to equation (1).
Qr F c IA
AWD Ql (1)
Where F c is factor efficiency of the collector which is assumed to be 0.9, while I , A , W , D are solar
irradiance [Watt/m2], solar collector area [m2], transmittance, and absorption coefficient, respectively. The total
heat loss from the collector ( Ql ) is calculated by refer to equation (2).
Ql Qw Qb Qt (2)
Where Qw [Watt], Qb [Watt], and Qt [Watt] are the heat losses from the wall, bottom, and the top of the solar
collector, respectively. The heat loss from the wall and the bottom of the collector are calculated by refer to
equations (3) and (4).
Qw U w Aw Tp Tf (3)
Qb U b Ab Tp Tf (4)
2 2
Here U w [Watt/m K] and U b [Watt/m K] are overall heat transfer coefficient of wall and bottom of the
solar collector, respectively. While, the heat loss from the top of the collector is determined by refer to equation
(5).
Qt U t At Tp Tf (5)
Where the U t [Watt/m2 K] is overall heat transfer coefficient from the top of the glass cover.
Collector’s thermal efficiency is calculated by refer to equation (6)

Qu
K x100% (6)
Qin _ hobo
070001-3
Effect of Solar Irradiance on Air Temperature Inside of Solar Collector

In this experiment the type of solar dryer used is indirect-type with natural convection. The heat for drying is
transmitted through the glass cover and is absorbed on the blackened interior which is known as absorber. The
absorber as a part of collector which is used for heating of the entering air into the drying chamber [1]. Various
methods have been applied in order to optimize the absorption of solar irradiance such as increasing the surface
area of the absorber through the addition of fins as was done in this study.
From this research it is showed that solar irradiance provides a positive correlation to changes in temperature
in the solar collector. The temperature inside the collector is strongly influenced by solar irradiance as shown in
Fig 3. Solar irradiance is in the range of 89-778 W/m2 and air temperature between 38-52 °C. Average solar
irradiance and air temperature inside the collector (openings 100%) during the trial is respectively 390 W/m2
and 46 °C.
900 70
900 70
850
Solar Radiation 65 850
800 Solar Radiation
Collector Temperature 800 65
750 60
750 Plate Temperature
Collector Temperature (
Solar Radiation (W/m )

700
700 60
2
)
55
2
650
Solar Radiation (W/m
650
Temperature ( C)
600 50 600 55
550
45 550
500
500 50
450 40 450
400
35
400 45
o
350
350
300
30 300 40
0
250 C)
25
250
200
200 35
150
20 150
100
100 30
50 15
9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00
Time Time
(a) (b)
900 70
900 80
850
Solar Radiation 65 850
800
800 Solar Radiation 75
750 Collector Temperature 60
750 Plate Temperature 70
Collector Temperature (
700
700
2
)
55
2
650
650 65
Temperature ( C)
600 50
550
600 60
500 45 550
450 500 55
40
400 450
35 400 50
350
o
300 350 45
30
300
0
250
C)
200 25 250 40
150 200 35
20
100 150
50 15 100 30
9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00
Time
Time
(c)
(d)
FIGURE 3. Effect of Solar Irradiance on Inside Temperature of Solar Collector (a) openings 100%, (b) openings 15%,
(c) openings 75% (d) 100% enclosed
In Fig. 3.(b) (openings of 15%) shows that the temperature inside the collectors tend to stabilize and then to
be decline at 16:15 pm. Solar irradiance is in the range of 82-856 W/m2 and air temperature between 39-55 °C.
Average solar irradiance and air temperature inside the collector (openings of 15%) during the trial is
respectively 429 W/m2 and 48 °C.
At openings of 75% as shown in FIGURE 3.c, air temperature inside collector is likely to increase up to
12:00 am and then to be stable until at 17:05 pm. Solar irradiance is in the range of 113-883 W/m2 and air
temperature between 37-51 °C. Average solar irradiance and air temperature inside the collector during the trial
is respectively 376 W/m2 and 46 °C.
In FIGURE 3.d (100% enclosed), air temperature inside collector tends to decrease starting from 14:30 to
17:05 pm. Solar irradiance is in the range of 109-788 W/m2 and air temperature between 38-55 °C. Average
solar irradiance and air temperature inside the collector during the trial is respectively 359 W/m2 and 47 °C.
For all of openings of collector varied as presented in Fig. 3, the optimum condition is achieved at openings
of 15% which is give the highest air temperature inside collector. It is also due to solar irradiance on that day is
the highest compared to other days for other variations openings. Thus, the solar dryer finned type of flat plate
collector, it will increase the drying air temperature 15-17qC above the ambient temperature (31qC). This shows
that absorber as a part of collector is being a strong function to increase air drying temperature so shorten drying
time.
070001-4
Although variations of 100% can be able to raise the air temperature, while solar irradiance is the lowest
compared to other variations, but in terms of its use will be the disadvantage due to their effect on the poor
drying rate. There is no adequate air circulation to carry moisture out from drying chamber.
Effect Openings Collector on Surface Temperature Absorber
Solar energy collectors are special kinds of heat exchangers that transform solar irradiance energy to internal
energy of the transport medium. The major component of any solar system is the solar collector. This is a device
that absorbs the incoming solar irradiance, converts it into heat, and transfers the heat to a fluid (usually air)
owing through the collector [2]. Energy collection can be maximized by improving the design of openings
collector and fin application.
Basically, the use of fins is to increase the area of heat transfer by using material with good thermal
conductivity. It will be useless adding fins on the surface of the absorber if it is not capable of delivering heat
conduction well, as its conductivity is too small [6]. Therefore, the type of material such as aluminum was
chosen because it can receive heat well.
Beside the type of material, the openings collectors can also affect residence time of air inside of the
collector. This is in turn will affect the effectiveness of heat transfer by convection between the hot absorber
plate surface and air flow on its surface. In the indirect-type passive solar dryer, air drying flow moves due to
buoyancy force.
Effect of openings collector on surface temperature absorber is presented in Fig. 4 and showed the variation
of the openings 100% (Fig. 4.a), the surface absorber temperature tends to increase along with rising solar
irradiance up to 11:20 am and after that it was decreased until to 17:05 pm. The absorber plate temperature was
in range of 42-58 qC. At the opening of 15% (Fig. 4.b), absorber plate temperature tends to be stable, although
solar irradiance fluctuates during daytime. The temperature of absorber plate is in the range 45-63°C and it is
greater than openings 100%. The smaller the openings of collector were more effective of air layer receives
convection heat transfer from the surface absorber plate.
800 70 900 70
750 Solar Radiation 850 Solar Radiation
700 800 65
Plate Temperature 65 750 Plate Temperature
650
700 60
2
600
650
Temperature ( C)
Temperature ( C)
550 60
600 55
500 550
450 55 500 50
400 450
350 400 45
50
o
o
300 350
250 300 40
200 45 250
150 200 35
100 150
40 100 30
9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00
Time Time
(a) (b)
900 80 900 80
850 850
800 Solar Radiation 75 800 Solar Radiation 75
750 Plate Temperature 70 750 Plate Temperature 70
700 700
2
650 65 650 65
Temperature ( C)
Temperature ( C)
600 60 600 60
550 550
500 55 500 55
450 450
400 50 400 50
o
350 45 350 45
300 300
250 40 250 40
200 35 200 35
150 150
100 30 100 30
9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00
Time Time
(c) (d)
FIGURE 4. Effect of Openings Collector on Temperature Rise in Collector (a) openings 100%, (b) openings 15%,
At the openings of 75% (Fig. 4.c), the absorber plate temperature is in the range of 47-58 °C. There are no
different significantly of the temperature of the absorber plate between the openings 75% and 100% during
subjected to sunlight. Overall from the variation of openings that have been conducted, the greater openings area
of the collector, the more air flow (air flow rate greater) but the chance of heat transfers between the absorber
plate and the air is shorter.
070001-5
The highest absorber plate temperature is achieved by the variation of 100% enclosed (Fig. 4.d), it is in the
range 41-71°C. The total-enclosed condition of collector provides effective contact for heat transfer between the
hot surface plate absorber with air will be heated. But in the natural drying or passive drying, 100% enclosed
collector condition is poor to be applied. This is because of drying process consist heat and mass transfer
processes that take place simultaneously and continuously so that the air flow needed to bring the water vapor
out from drying chamber. Overall from the variation of openings was illustrate how does the greater the
openings collector, it will be get more air flow but less time to get effective heat transfer between the absorber
plate and the air. Nevertheless, it will have disadvantage if the collector is closed completely (100% enclosed).
Solar Collector Efficiency Analysis

The main purpose of solar collector is to convert the solar irradiance into heat to satisfy for some energy
needs like heating air for drying. The heat produced by solar collectors can supply energy demand directly or be
stored. Flat plate-finned collector has been built in a wide variety of design and from many different materials.
All this is done except to improve the performance of solar dryers. One of the performance test that can be done
is to calculate the thermal efficiency of the collector modified.
To match demand and production of energy, the thermal performance of the collector must be evaluated. The
instantaneous useful energy collected (Qu) is the result of an energy balance on the solar collector. To evaluate
the amount of energy produced in a solar collector properly, it is necessary to consider the physical properties of
the materials. Solar irradiance, mostly short wavelength, passes through a translucent cover and strikes the
energy receiver. Low-iron glass is commonly used as a glazing cover due to its high transmissivity; the cover
also greatly reduces heat losses. The optical characteristics of the energy receiver must be as similar as possible
to those of a blackbody, especially high absorptivity.
Overall heat loss on the collector calculated is based on the total loss of heat convection through the ambient
air to the surface of the wood, the loss of heat convection through the air in the collector to the plate surface,
heat loss on the lower side and the upper side and the loss of heat radiation is calculated using equation (1)
through equation (5). The efficiency of the collector calculated using equation (6) for each period of 1 hour.
Based on calculations presented in accordance with Fig. 5.(a), Thermal efficiency of openings 100%
collector is in the range 32–68% of the solar irradiance in the range 160-614 W/m2. It is clearly showed how the
solar irradiance directly affects the solar collector efficiency and have a positive correlation.
900 80 900 80
850 75 850 75
800 Solar Radiation 800 Solar Radiation
70 70
750 Efficiency 750 Efficiency
65 65
700 700
Solar Radiation (W/m²)
)
2
60 60
650 650
Efficiency (%)
55
Efficiency (%)
600 600 55
550 50 550 50
500 45 500
45
450 40 450
400 40
400 35
350 350 35
30
300 300 30
25 250
250 25
200 20 200
20
150 15 150
100 15
100 10
9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00
Time Time
(a) (b)
800 800
80 75
750 750
Solar Radiation 75 Solar Radiation 70
700 700
Efficiency 70 Efficiency 65
650
65 650
)
Solar Radiation (W/m²)
60
2
600
60 600
550 55
Efficiency (%)
Efficiency (%)
55 550
500 50
50 500
450 45
45 450
400
40 40
350 400
35 35
300 350
30 30
250 300
25 25
200 250
20 20
150 200
15
100 15
150
9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00
9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00
Time
(c) Time
(d)
FIGURE 5. Effect of Solar Irradiance on Thermal Efficiency of Collector (a) openings 100%, (b) openings 15%,
In Fig. 5.(b). (openings 15%) shows that thermal efficiency of collector is in the range 37–69% with the
solar irradiance in the range 148-606 W/m2. At the openings of 75% (Fig. 5.c), thermal efficiency of collector is
070001-6
in the range 44–67% with the solar irradiance in the range 168-614 W/m2. For variation of collectors is 100%
enclosed (Fig. 5.d), thermal efficiency of collector is in the range 47–57% with the solar irradiance in the range
202-475 W/m2.
For all of openings of collector varied as presented in Fig. 5, the optimum condition is achieved at openings
of 15% which is give the highest efficiency collector, although the solar irradiance is relatively similar to other
variations.
Based on the equation used to calculate the efficiency of the collector (Equations (1) to (6), there are several
factors that affect the efficiency of the collector, including: solar irradiation, collector area, collector overall heat
loss coefficient, transmission coefficient of glass cover, absorption coefficient of plat, air mass flow rate [7].
The higher the intensity of the irradiance received, then the efficiency of the collector will also be higher [8,
9]. The slight deviation in the image (for variations collector covered 100%), which occurred at 9:05 a.m., 11:05
a.m., and 12:05 p.m. is due to the weather factor (cloudy).
Overall, the average efficiency of each of the various openings solar collector that is open 100% open 15%
open 75% and closed 100% respectively 56%, 59%, 56, 57%. From this range illustrates that the openings
collectors little influence on changes collector efficiency.
CONCLUSION
The conclusions that can be drawn from the research that has been done is:
1. Research of the performance of the solar dryer indirect method (indirect solar dryer) finned flat plate
collectors with openings varying the collector takes place on different days so that the intensity of solar
irradiance during the research also different.
2. The average intensity of solar irradiance during the research, consecutively to variations which is open
100% open 15% open 75%, and closed 100% is 390 W/m2, 429 W/m2, 376 W/m2 and 359 W/m2
3. Temperatures of finned plate on the collector ranges between 41-71 °C and the highest temperature is
reached on closed 100% variation. The openings of solar collector effect on the temperature rise in the
collector absorber plate. The smaller openings of collector, then the plate temperature will be higher.
4. Average collector efficiency reached in the research is in the range of 55-60% and the highest efficiency
achieved from the open variation of open 15%.
5. Collector efficiency is affected by the intensity of solar irradiance received by the collector and the
temperature of the collector plate.
REFERENCES
1. S. F. Dina, A. Himsar, F. H. Farel, and H. Kawai, “Study on Effectiveness of Continuous Solar Dryer
Integrated with Desiccant Thermal Storage for Drying Cocoa Beans,” Case Study in Thermal Engineering
5, 32-40 (2015).
2. A. K. Soteris. Solar Energy Engineering – Processes and Systems, (Elsevier, 2009).
3. M. V. Murthy. “A review of new technologies, models and experimental investigations of solar driers,
Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews,” 13: 835–844. (2009).
4. M. L. Bal, S. Satya, and S. N. Naik, “Solar dryer with thermal energy storage systems for drying
agricultural food products: A review,” Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews. (2010).
5. A. A. El-Sebaii, and S. M. Shalaby, “Solar Drying of Agricultural Product”, A Review, Renewable and
Sustainable Energy Reviews, Vol. 16: 37-43, (2012).
6. A. Fudholi, M. Y. Othman, M. H. Ruslan, M. Yahya, A. Zaharim, and K. Sopian, “Design and Testing of
Solar Dryer for Drying Kinetics of Seaweed in Malaysia,” Recent Researches in Geography, Geology,
Energy, Environment and Biomedicine. (2011).
7. J. A. Duffie, and A. B. William. Solar Engineering of Thermal Processes, 2nd ed. (John Wiley & Sons,
Inc. 1980).
8. C. L. Hii, S.V. Jangam, S.P. Ong, and A.S. Mujumdar, “Solar Drying: Fundamentals, Applications and
Innovations,” ISBN: 978-981-07-3336-0. (2012).
9. Y. Rosa, Maimuzar dan Safril, “Drying Gambier by Utilizing Solar Energy,” Journal of Mechanical
Engineering, vol.3 No. 1, (2015).
070001-7
Solar energy dryer kinetics using flat-plate finned collector and forced convection for
potato drying
Fatimah Batubara, Erni Misran, Sari Farah Dina, and Heppy

6RODU(QHUJ\'U\HU.LQHWLFV8VLQJ)ODW3ODWH)LQQHG
&ROOHFWRUDQG)RUFHG&RQYHFWLRQIRU3RWDWR'U\LQJ
)DWLPDK%DWXEDUDD(UQL0LVUDQE6DUL)DUDK'LQDFDQd+HSS\G

Department of Chemical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering,University of Sumatera Utara, Medan, Indonesia

Institute for Research and Standardization of Industry, Medan, IndonesiaJl. Sisingamangaraja No. 24 Medan –
Indonesia
D
&RUUHVSRQGLQJ$XWKRUIDWLPDKDJXVVDOLP#\DKRRFRP
E
HUQLBPLVUDQ#\DKRRFRPFVIGLQD#\DKRRFRPGKDSS\NDEDQ#JPDLOFRP
$EVWUDFW5HVHDUFKRQSRWDWRGU\LQJXVLQJWKHLQGLUHFWVRODUGU\HUZLWKIODWSODWHILQQHGFROOHFWRUDQGIRUFHGFRQYHFWLRQ
KDVEHHQGRQH7KHUHVHDUFKZDVFRQGXFWHGDWWKHRXWGRRUILHOGRI/DERUDWRU\RI,QVWLWXWHIRU5HVHDUFKDQG6WDQGDUGL]DWLRQ
RI,QGXVWU\RQ-XQHWKUGIURPDPWRSP7KLVUHVHDUFKDLPVWRREWDLQWKHGU\LQJNLQHWLFVPRGHORI
SRWDWR6RODQXPWXEHURVXP/XVLQJDQLQGLUHFWVRODUGU\HU¶V,6'ZLWKIODWSODWHILQQHGFROOHFWRUDQGIRUFHGFRQYHFWLRQ
7KHUHVXOWZLOOEHFRPSDUHGWRWKHRSHQVXQGU\LQJ26'PHWKRG:HDWKHUFRQGLWLRQVGXULQJWKHGU\LQJ SURFHVVWRRN
SODFHDVIROORZVVXUURXQGLQJDLUWHPSHUDWXUHZDVLQWKHUDQJHWR&UHODWLYHKXPLGLW\5+WRDQGWKH
LQWHQVLW\RIVRODUUDGLDWLRQWR:DWWP7KHGULHGSRWDWRWKLFNQHVVHVZHUHFPFPDQGFPZLWKWKH
DYHUDJHLQLWLDOZDWHUFRQWHQWRI7KHDYHUDJHWHPSHUDWXUHLQWKHFROOHFWRUFKDPEHUUDQJHGIURPWR&DQG
WKHGU\LQJFKDPEHUZDVDW&7KHEHVWGU\LQJUHVXOWZDVREWDLQHGIURPDVDPSOHVL]HRIFPWKLFNQHVVXVLQJWKH,'6
PHWKRGZLWKDQDYHUDJHGU\LQJUDWHRINJ+2SHUNJGU\ZHLJKWKRXUDQGWKHZDWHUFRQWHQWZDVFRQVWDQWDW
LQKRXUVRIGU\LQJWLPH7KHPRVWVXLWDEOHNLQHWLFVPRGHOLV3DJHPRGHOHTXDWLRQ05 H[SWIRUFP
WKLFNQHVVH[SWIRUFPWKLFNQHVVDQGH[SWIRUFPWKLFNQHVV7KHTXDOLW\RISRWDWRGU\LQJ
XVLQJ,6'PHWKRGLVEHWWHUWKDQXVLQJ26'ZKLFKFDQEHVHHQIURPWKHFRORUSURGXFHG
,1752'8&7,21
7KHGU\LQJSURFHVVLVYHU\LPSRUWDQWIRUWKHSURFHVVLQJRIDJULFXOWXUDOSURGXFHDIWHUKDUYHVW0RVWRIWKHIDUPHUV
LQ,QGRQHVLDDUHVWLOOXVLQJFRQYHQWLRQDOPHWKRGVLHGLUHFWVXQGU\LQJ'U\LQJLQWKLVZD\LVQRWYHU\HIIHFWLYHDQG
KDVPDQ\VKRUWFRPLQJVHJFDUDPHOL]DWLRQHIIHFWVZKLFKRFFXURQWKHVXUIDFHRIGULHGVXEVWDQFHXQK\JLHQLFDQGWKH
GU\LQJWLPHZKLFKUHTXLUHVXSWRIRXUILYHGD\V>@7KHHIIHFWRIFDUDPHOL]DWLRQFDXVHGE\KLJKWHPSHUDWXUHDQG
LQFRQVWDQWGU\LQJUDWHPDNHVWKHVXUIDFHRIWKHGULHGVXEVWDQFHKDUGHQUHVXOWLQJLQZDWHUGLIIXVLRQIURPLQVLGHWKH
VXEVWDQFHWRWKHVXUIDFHLQKLELWHG>@7KHGU\LQJUDWHGHSHQGVRQWKUHHIDFWRUVKHDWWUDQVIHULQWRWKHPDWHULDOWKH
PRYHPHQWRI ZDWHUYDSRUIURPWKHVXUURXQGLQJDLU LQWRWKHVXEVWDQFHDQGWKHVXUIDFHDUHDRIWKHGULHG VXEVWDQFH
'U\LQJWDNHVSODFHZLWKKRWDLUZKLFKIORZVDFURVVWKHVXUIDFHRIVXEVWDQFHVRWKDWWKHSUHVVXUHRIVXEVWDQFHZDWHU
YDSRULVJUHDWHUWKDQWKHSUHVVXUHRI ZDWHU YDSRULQWKHVXUURXQGLQJDLU 7KLVOHDGVWR ZDWHU YDSRUIORZVIURPWKH
VXEVWDQFH LQWR VXUURXQGLQJ DLU DQG VLPXOWDQHRXVO\ UHGXFLQJ WKH VXEVWDQFH ZDWHU YDSRU SUHVVXUH 7KLV SURFHVV
FRQWLQXHV XQWLO HTXLOLEULXP LV UHDFKHG EHWZHHQ WKH VXEVWDQFH ZDWHU YDSRU SUHVVXUH DQG VXUURXQGLQJ DLU SUHVVXUH
'U\LQJXVLQJDQLQGLUHFWVRODUGU\HUFDQRYHUFRPHWKHSUREOHPVIRXQGLQWKHGLUHFWVXQGU\LQJ>@$QLQGLUHFWVRODU
GU\HUXVLQJIODWSODWHILQQHGFROOHFWRUV\VWHPFDQUDLVHWKHDLUWHPSHUDWXUHWRIORZRXWRIFROOHFWRUR&>@7KH
WHPSHUDWXUHLQ,QGRQHVLDLVDWR&>@WKDWPHDQVWKHPD[LPXPDLUWHPSHUDWXUHIORZRXWRIILQQHGIODWSODWH
ILQQHGFROOHFWRUV\VWHPLV&
7KLVUHVHDUFKXVHGLQGLUHFWVRODUGU\HUXVLQJIODWSODWHILQQHGFROOHFWRUV\VWHPHTXLSSHGZLWKDIDQRQWKHWRSRI
GU\LQJFKDPEHUIRUGU\LQJWKHSRWDWR)DQVHUYHVDVDIRUFHGFRQYHFWLRQWRROWRRSWLPL]HWKHGLVWULEXWLRQRIDLUGU\HU
LQVLGHGU\LQJFKDPEHU,QSUHYLRXVUHVHDUFKRIGU\LQJSRWDWRXVLQJWKHVDPH,6'PHWKRGWKHZDWHUFRQWHQWLVUHGXFHG
WRXSWRFROOHFWRUWHPSHUDWXUHDQGGU\LQJFKDPEHUWHPSHUDWXUHUHDFKHG&DQG&UHVSHFWLYHO\>@7KLV
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 070002-1–070002-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985529
070002-1
UHVHDUFKDLPVWRJHWDSURILOHRIVRODUUDGLDWLRQLQWHQVLW\DQGGU\LQJNLQHWLFVPRGHORISRWDWRSolanumtuberosum L.
XVLQJLQGLUHFWVRODUGU\HUZLWKDIODWSODWHILQQHGFROOHFWRUV\VWHPDQGIRUFHGFRQYHFWLRQ5HVHDUFKLVFRQGXFWHGDWWKH
RXWGRRUILHOGRI,QVWLWXWHIRU5HVHDUFKDQG6WDQGDUGL]DWLRQRI,QGXVWU\0HGDQ,QGRQHVLDRQ-XQHWKUGIURP
DPWRSP
0(7+2'6
0DWHULDODQG(TXLSPHQW
Material
7KHGULHGVXEVWDQFHLQWKLVVWXG\LVSRWDWRZKLFKZDVREWDLQHGIURPWKH'DLUL5HJHQF\LQ1RUWK6XPDWUD3URYLQFH
7KHSRWDWRZDVSHHOHGFXWLQWRSLHFHVZLWKDWKLFNQHVVYDULDWLRQRIFPFPDQGFPZDVKHGGUDLQHGXQWLO
WKHUHZHUHQRPRUHZDWHUGURSOHWVIURPWKHVDPSOHDQGHDFKVDPSOHZHLJKHGJU
Equipment
7KH HTXLSPHQW XVHG WKH ZHUH DQ LQGLUHFW VRODU GU\HU ZLWK D IODW SODWH ILQQHGFROOHFWRU V\VWHP ZLWK IRUFHG
FRQYHFWLRQDQGPHDVXULQJGHYLFHVORDGFHOOFRPSXWHUZHLJKWGDWD ORJJHUWKHUPRODVHU7DQG5+VPDUWVHQVRU
S\UDQRPHWHU ZLQG YHORFLW\ VHQVRU DQG DPELHQW PHDVXUHPHQW DSSDUDWXV )ODW SODWH ILQQHGFROOHFWRU V\VWHP ZLWK
IRUFHG FRQYHFWLRQ ZDV GLYLGHG LQWR WZR SDUWV QDPHO\ WKH GU\LQJ FKDPEHU GU\HU ER[ DQG D FROOHFWRU PDGH RI
DOXPLQXPSDLQWHGPDWWHEODFN7KH'U\HU%R[GLPHQVLRQZDVFP[FP[FPPDGHRIDOXPLQXPSODWH7KH
WRSVLGHRIWKHGU\HUER[ZDVHTXLSSHGZLWKDLUFKLPQH\VLQFOXGLQJDIDQWRIDFLOLWDWHFLUFXODWLRQRIGU\HUDLU&ROOHFWRU
GLPHQVLRQZDVP[P[P$EVRUEHUXVHGLQVLGHWKHFROOHFWRUZDVDUUDQJHGLQRUGHURIZRRGRQWKH
ERWWRPVXUPRXQWHGE\WKH6W\URIRDPDQG5RFNZRRO&ROOHFWRUVXUIDFHDUHDZDVFRYHUHGZLWKWKLFNJUHHQEOXHJODVV
PP:DWHUFRQWHQWGHFUHDVHZDVPHDVXUHGE\ZHLJKLQJWKHSRWDWRZLWKDORDGFHOOHYHU\PLQXWHV
+2%20LFUR6WDWLRQ'DWD/RJJHUZDVXVHGWRPHDVXUHDLUWHPSHUDWXUH$PELHQW0HDVXUHPHQW$SSDUDWXVZLQG
YHORFLW\:LQG9HORFLW\6HQVRUUDGLDWLRQLQWHQVLW\3\UDQRPHWHUDQGKXPLGLW\7DQG5+VHQVRU$JLOHQW
ZDVXVHGWRUHDGDQGUHFRUGWKHWHPSHUDWXUHDQG5+DQGDWKHUPRPHWHUWRPHDVXUHWKHKXPLGLW\DQGWHPSHUDWXUHRI
GU\HUER[
Experiment procedure
)LUVWO\WKHSRWDWRZDVFXWLQWRSLHFHVZLWKDWKLFNQHVVYDULDWLRQDQGFPDQGJUDPVHDFK3RWDWR

SLHFHVZHUHSODFHGRQWUD\VDQGWKHQSXWLQDER[GU\HU7KHVHWRIGU\HUWRROVPDGHLVVKRZQLQ),*85('U\LQJ
VWDUWHG DW DP WR SP DQG UHVXPHG WKH QH[W GD\ XQWLO HTXLOLEULXP FRQGLWLRQV ZHUH DFKLHYHG ZKLFK ZDV
FKDUDFWHUL]HGE\QRFKDQJHLQWKHZHLJKWRIWKHSRWDWR)RUFRPSDULVRQGU\LQJZDVDOVRSHUIRUPHGXVLQJWKHGLUHFW
VXQOLJKWPHWKRG2YHQ6XQ'U\LQJ26'$WWKHVDPHWLPHWKHLQWHQVLW\RIVRODUUDGLDWLRQ,ZDVDOVRPHDVXUHG
ZLWK D S\UDQRPHWHU VXUURXQGLQJ DLU WHPSHUDWXUH XVLQJ DPELHQW PHDVXUHPHQW DSSDUDWXV ZLQG VSHHG XVLQJ ZLQG
YHORFLW\VHQVRUDQGKXPLGLW\XVLQJ5+VPDUWVHQVRU
070002-2

),*85(,QGLUHFWVRODUGU\HU¶VXVLQJIODWSODWHILQQHGFROOHFWRUDQGIDQ
5(68/76$1'',6&866,21
7HPSHUDWXUHDQG5HODWLYH+XPLGLW\5+
7HPSHUDWXUHDQG5+DIIHFWHGWKHGU\LQJSURFHVV'XULQJWKHGU\LQJSURFHVVWKHKLJKHUWKHWHPSHUDWXUHDQGWKH
ORZHUWKH5+ZRXOGPDNHWKHGU\LQJWLPHVKRUWHU7KHUHODWLRQVKLSEHWZHHQWHPSHUDWXUHDQG5+GXULQJWKHGU\LQJ
SURFHVVFDQEHVHHQLQ),*85(
5+
Z,

6XKX
dĞŵƉĞƌĂƚƵƌĞ

dĞŵƉĞƌĂƚƵƌĞ Σ

6XKX &
5+

dŝŵĞ
:DNWX
),*85(7HPSHUDWXUHFKDQJHVDQG5+DYHUDJHFKDQJHVGXULQJWKHGU\LQJSURFHVV

)URPWKHPHDVXUHPHQWUHVXOWVWKHDYHUDJHWHPSHUDWXUHRIDLULQWKHER[GU\HUGXULQJWKHGU\LQJSURFHVV ZDVLQ
WKHUDQJH&DQG5+DYHUDJHWR7KHDYHUDJHWHPSHUDWXUHRIWKHHQYLURQPHQWDWWKHWLPHRI
UHVHDUFKZDVDW&
070002-3
5HODWLRQVKLSRI0RLVWXUH5DWLRDQG7LPHLQ 9DULRXV7KLFNQHVV9DULDWLRQ
7KHUDWHRISRWDWRGU\LQJLVGHVFULEHGLQWKHIRUPRIPRLVWXUHUDWLR05SURILOHGHFUHDVHDVDIXQFWLRQRIWLPH
0RLVWXUHFRQWHQW05LVXVHGDQGGHILQHGDV
‫ ܯ‬െ ‫ܯ‬௘
‫ ܴܯ‬ൌ
‫ܯ‬௜ െ ‫ܯ‬௘
:KHUHM, MeDQGMiDUHPRLVWXUHFRQWHQWDWtWLPHPRLVWXUHFRQWHQWDWHTXLOLEULXPDQGPRLVWXUHFRQWHQWDWLQLWLDO
FRQGLWLRQUHVSHFWLYHO\
),*85(),*85(DQG),*85(VKRZWKHUHODWLRQVKLSEHWZHHQPRLVWXUHUDWLRDQGGU\LQJWLPHXVLQJ2'6
DQG,'6PHWKRGV RQWKLFNQHVVYDULDWLRQVRIDQGFP 7KHJUDSKVKRZVWKDWWKHMR IURPWKH VXEVWDQFH
FRQWLQXHV WRGHFOLQHRYHUWLPH7KHGU\LQJWLPHRI DQGFPWKLFNQHVVUHVSHFWLYHO\KRXUVKRXUVDQG
KRXUVIRUWKH,6'PHWKRGVDQGKRXUVKRXUVDQGKRXUVIRUWKH26'$FFRUGLQJWR>@WKH KXPLGLW\
UDWLRGHFUHDVHGGXULQJWKHGU\LQJSURFHVV05 FKDQJHZDV LQIOXHQFHGE\PRLVWXUHFRQWHQWZHWEDVLV05ZDV WKHQ
XVHGWRGHWHUPLQHWKHEHVWGU\LQJ PRGHO IRUSRWDWR GU\LQJ
dŝŵĞ;ŚŽƵƌͿ
),*85(0RLVWXUHUDWLRDJDLQVWWLPHKRXUIRUFPWKLFNQHVV
dŝŵĞ;ŚŽƵƌͿ
),*85(0RLVWXUHUDWLRDJDLQVWWLPHKRXUIRUFPWKLFNQHVV
070002-4
dŝŵĞ;ŚŽƵƌͿ
),*85(0RLVWXUHUDWLRDJDLQVWWLPHKRXU IRU FPWKLFNQHVV
'U\LQJ.LQHWLFV0RGHO
'U\LQJNLQHWLFVZDV REWDLQHGE\SORWWLQJWKHFKDQJHRIPRLVWXUHUDWLRDJDLQVWWKHGU\LQJWLPHLQJUDSKLFDOIRUP
0RLVWXUHUDWLRLVWKHUDWLRRIWKHZDWHUOHYHOVGLIIHUHQFHLQHYHU\GU\LQJWLPH3URILOHFKDQJHVLQWKHZDWHUFRQWHQWDUH
H[SUHVVHGDVWKHUDWLRRIZDWHUFRQWHQWWR GU\LQJWLPH7KHPDWKHPDWLFDOPRGHOVZHUH XVHGWRGHWHUPLQHWKHSURSHU
GU\LQJSURILOHFXUYHDVRQHVWHSLQWKHSURFHVVFRQWURODQGWRLPSURYHWKHRYHUDOOLPSURYHPHQWRIWKHILQDOSURGXFW
TXDOLW\,QWKHSURFHVVRIGU\LQJWKHSRWDWRWKHPDWKHPDWLFDOPRGHOXVHGLVVKRZQLQ7DEOH
7DEOH'U\LQJ.LQHWLFV0RGHO
0RGHO1DPH 0RGHO(TXDWLRQ 5HIHUHQFHV
/RJDULWKPLF 0RGHO 05 DH[SNWF >@
3DJHV¶V 0RGHO 05 HNWQ >@
1HZWRQ 05 H[SNW >@
+HQGHUVRQ 3DELV 05 DH[SNW >@
7KH SDUDPHWHUV a c k DQG n ZHUH FDOFXODWHG E\ QRQOLQHDU UHJUHVVLRQ DQDO\VLV XVLQJ ([FHO 6ROYHU SURJUDP
0LFURVRIW 2IILFH ([FHO 3URIHVVLRQDO (GLWLRQ &RUUHVSRQGHQFH EHWZHHQ SUHGLFWLRQ DQG H[SHULPHQWV GDWD ZHUH
HYDOXDWHGEDVHGRQVWDWLVWLFDODQDO\VLV7KHJRRGQHVVRIILWEHWZHHQGU\LQJPRGHODQGREVHUYDWLRQUHVXOWLVLQGLFDWHG
E\WKHYDOXHRIR2 ʖ2 DQG URRWPHDQVTXDUH HUURU 560(,I WKH R2 YDOXHLVFORVHWR WKHYDOXHRIȤ2 DQG506(LV
DSSURDFKLQJ]HUR ,QWKLVVWXG\WKHHPSLULFDOHTXDWLRQPRGHOVDUHXVHGWRGHVFULEHWKHGU\LQJNLQHWLFV7KHDVVXPSWLRQ
XVHG LQ WKH FRPSOHWLRQ RI WKH PRGHO LV WKH WHPSHUDWXUH DQG WKH FRQFHQWUDWLRQ RI ZDWHU LQ WKH SURGXFW LV HYHQO\
GLVWULEXWHGDQGRQO\DIXQFWLRQRIWLPH7KHUHIRUHWKHUDWHRIZDWHUUHGXFWLRQLQ VXEVWDQFH H[SUHVVHGLQ GLPHQVLRQOHVV
QXPEHUV
7RZDUGWKHUHVXOWVRIMRREVHUYDWLRQYDOXHFDOFXODWLRQIRXUPRGHOVW\SHVDUHXVHGWRLOOXVWUDWHWKHLPSDLUPHQWRI
MR 0RGHO/RJDULWKP3DJH1HZWRQDQG+HQGHUVRQDQG 3DELV%HIRUHFRUUHODWLQJWKH PRGHODQGWKHFDOFXODWHG
REVHUYDWLRQMRDQGGHWHUPLQLQJ WKHEHVWRIWKHIRXUPRGHOVILUVWO\DQDO\WLFDOPRGHORIWKHGU\LQJZDV GRQHLQDGYDQFH
DQGOLQHDUL]HG WKH HTXDWLRQVOLVWHGLQ 7DEOH )XUWKHUPRUHWKHOLQHDUIRUPRIWKHHTXDWLRQV ZDV VROYHGXVLQJ 0V
([FHOE\HQWHULQJDQ MR REVHUYDWLRQYDOXHLQWR HDFKOLQHDUIRUPRIWKHIRXUPDWKHPDWLFDOPRGHOV PHQWLRQHGEHIRUH
1HZWRQDQG+HQGHUVRQ
V PRGHOXVHGln MR YVt WRSORWDQGln -ln MR YVln t IRU3DJHPRGHO
%DVHGRQWKHUHVXOWVRIWUHQGOLQHWHVWLQJRQHDFKGU\LQJPRGHOVJUDSKVWKHYDOXHRIFRQVWDQWVDQG R2IRUHDFK
PRGHODUHREWDLQHGDVFDQEHVHHQLQ7$%/(
)URP7$%/(WKH3DJH0RGHHTXDWLRQIRUWKUHHGLIIHUHQWVL]HVVKRZVWKHKLJKHVWR2YDOXHZKLFKLVIRU
FPWKLFNQHVVIRUFPWKLFNQHVV DQGIRUFPWKLFNQHVV0RGHO3DJHKDVJRRGQHVV RIILW YDOXH
FORVHUWRWKHFKDUDFWHULVWLFVRISRWDWRGU\LQJNLQHWLFVPRGHOMR = exp 0.049 t1,336 IRUWKLFNQHVVRIFPMR = exp
-0.066 t1,222 IRUWKLFNQHVVRIFPDQGMR = exp -0.049 t1,221 IRUWKLFNQHVVRIFP7KHJRRGQHVVRIILWYDOXH
EHWZHHQGU\LQJPRGHODQGREVHUYDWLRQLVLQGLFDWHGZLWKR2 FORVHWRDQGWKHYDOXHRIʖ2 DQG560(QHDU]HUR >@
070002-5
7DEOH &RQVWDQWVDQGR2YDOXHIRUHDFKGU\LQJPRGHO
.LQHWLFV0RGHO
7KLFNQHVV &RQVWDQW +HQGHUVRQ±
/RJDULWKP 3DJH 1HZWRQ
3DELV
R2
K
FP
A
N
R2
K
FP
A
N
R2
K
FP
A
N
4XDOLW\&RPSDULVRQEHWZHHQ,6'0HWKRGDQG26'0HWKRG
26'PHWKRGLVVWLOOWKHILUVWFKRLFHIRUGU\LQJDJULFXOWXUDOSURGXFHFRPSDUHGWR,6' ZKHUHDVGU\LQJXVLQJ26'
PHWKRGKDVPDQ\VKRUWFRPLQJV6RPHRIWKHSDUDPHWHUVXVHGWRFRPSDUHWKHUHVXOWVRISRWDWRGU\LQJXVLQJ,6'DQG
26'PHWKRGLQWKLVUHVHDUFKDUHDVIROORZV
Water Content
7KH UHVHDUFKUHVXOWVLQGLFDWH WKDWWKHPHWKRGRIGU\LQJ SRWDWR ZLWK,6' PHWKRGLVVOLJKWO\IDVWHUWKDQWKH

26' PHWKRG7KHZDWHUFRQWHQWRIVXEVWDQFH XVLQJ,6' PHWKRG LVQRWPXFKGLIIHUHQWIURP WKH26' PHWKRG,WLV
VKRZQIURPWKH ZDWHUFRQWHQW WHVWUHVXOW WKDWKDVEHHQGRQHWRWKH GULHG SRWDWRVOLFHV7KHZDWHUFRQWHQWRIWKH,6'
PHWKRGIRUWKLFNQHVVFPFPDQG FPUHVSHFWLYHO\ DUH DQGZKLOHWKHPRLVWXUHFRQWHQW
RIWKH 26'PHWKRGV IRUWKHVDPHVL]HUHVSHFWLYHO\DUH DQG 'U\LQJXVLQJ,'6PHWKRGFDQUHGXFH
WKHZDWHUFRQWHQWIURP WRZKLFKLVHTXDOWR'U\LQJXVLQJWKHVDPHPHWKRGEXWZLWKRXWIRUFHG
FRQYHFWLRQIURPSUHYLRXVUHVHDUFKFDQRQO\UHGXFHWKHZDWHUFRQWHQWDVPXFKDV>@'U\LQJWLPHLVVOLJKWO\
VKRUWHUDQGZDWHUFRQWHQW LVORZHU XVLQJ,6'PHWKRGZLWK D IODWSODWHILQQHGFROOHFWRUV\VWHP DQGIDQ WKDQXVLQJ26'
PHWKRG 7KLVLVEHFDXVHWKHDYHUDJHWHPSHUDWXUHRIWKHKRWDLUIORZV IURPWKHFROOHFWRULVUHODWLYHO\ORZLH&
'U\LQJWHPSHUDWXUH LVKLJKHUZKHQWKHUDWHRIHYDSRUDWLRQLVKLJKHUVRWKDWWKHGU\LQJWLPHVKRUWHU>@
Texture and Color
%DVHGRQWKHUHVHDUFKWKDWKDVEHHQFRQGXFWHGWKHUHVXOWRISRWDWRGU\LQJXVLQJ26'PHWKRGKDVDKDUGHUWH[WXUH
WKDQWKH,6'PHWKRG7KLVLVEHFDXVHRIWKHFDVHKDUGHQLQJ&DVHKDUGHQLQJLVDFRQGLWLRQZKHUHWKHRXWHUPDWHULDOLV
DOUHDG\GU\EXWLQVLGHWKHPDWHULDOLVVWLOOZHW8VLQJWKH26'PHWKRGVRODUUDGLDWLRQLVGLUHFWO\H[SRVHGWRWKHVXUIDFH
RIWKHVXEVWDQFHVRWKDWWKHVXUIDFHRIWKHPDWHULDOLVGULHGWKHQPDNHWKHVXEVWDQFHSRUHFORVHG7KLVFDXVHVWKHZDWHU
FRQWDLQHGLQWKHPDWHULDOKDUGWRGLIIXVHWRWKHVXUIDFH
,QDGGLWLRQWKHGU\LQJSRWDWRGULHGXVLQJ,6'PHWKRGKDV DEHWWHUFRORU WKDQWKH26'PHWKRG7KHGULHGSRWDWR
FRORU XVLQJ,6'PHWKRGLVOLJKWEURZQZKLOH26'PHWKRGUHVXOWHGLQGDUNEURZQFRORU DQGKDV EODFNFRORU RQVRPH
VLGHV,WLVFDOOHGWKHEURZQLQJHIIHFW7KLVHIIHFWLVFDXVHGE\WKHHQ]\PDWLFR[LGDWLRQUHDFWLRQDQGQRQHQ]\PDWLF
UHDFWLRQV 7KH HQ]\PDWLF R[LGDWLRQ UHDFWLRQ RFFXUV ZKHQ WKH GU\LQJ WHPSHUDWXUH LV LQVXIILFLHQW >@ WKDW LW FDQQRW
DFWLYDWH WKH R[LGDWLRQ HQ]\PHV VXFK DV SRO\SKHQRO 'U\LQJ WHPSHUDWXUH LV QRW VXIILFLHQW GXH WR WKH FRROLQJ HIIHFW
FDXVHGE\HYDSRUDWLRQRIZDWHULQWKHVXEVWDQFHV3RWDWRGU\LQJUHVXOWVFDQEHVHHQLQ),*85(DQG),*85(
070002-6
),*85( 3RWDWRGU\LQJUHVXOWXVLQJ,QGLUHFW6RODU'U\LQJ,6'PHWKRG
),*85(3RWDWRGU\LQJUHVXOWXVLQJ2SHQ6XQ'U\LQJ26'PHWKRG
&21&/86,216
7KH FRQFOXVLRQV RI WKLV UHVHDUFK DUH WKH ZHDWKHU FRQGLWLRQV DW WKH WLPH WKH GU\LQJ WRRN SODFH DUH DV IROORZ
VXUURXQGLQJDLUWHPSHUDWXUHZDV LQWKHUDQJHWR&UHODWLYHKXPLGLW\5+WRDQGWKHLQWHQVLW\
RIVRODUUDGLDWLRQWR:DWWP 7KLFNQHVVHVRIWKHGULHGSRWDWRZHUH FPFPDQGFPZLWKDQ
DYHUDJHLQLWLDOPRLVWXUHFRQWHQWRI7KHDYHUDJHWHPSHUDWXUHLQWKHFROOHFWRUFKDPEHUUDQJHG IURPWR
& DQG WKH GU\LQJ FKDPEHU ZDV DW & 7KH EHVW GU\LQJ UHVXOW REWDLQHG IURP WKH VDPSOH VL]H RI FP
WKLFNQHVVXVLQJWKH,'6PHWKRGZLWKDYHUDJHGU\LQJUDWHZDV NJ+2NJGU\ZHLJKW +RXU DQGWKHZDWHUFRQWHQW
ZDVFRQVWDQWDWZLWKGU\LQJWLPHKRXUV7KHPRVWVXLWDEOHNLQHWLFVPRGHOLV3DJHPRGHOZLWKHTXDWLRQMR
= exp -0.049 t1,336 IRUFPWKLFNQHVVMR = exp -0.066 t1,222 IRUFPWKLFNQHVVDQG MR = exp -0.049 t1,221
IRUFPWKLFNQHVV3RWDWRGU\LQJZLWK,6'PHWKRGLVEHWWHUWKDQ26'PHWKRGZKHQREVHUYHGIURPWKH SURGXFHG
FRORU
5()(5(1&(6
$ 2 )DJXQZD 2 $ .R\D DQG 0 2 )DERURGH ³'HYHORSPHQW RI DQ ,QWHUPLWWHQW 6RODU 'U\HU IRU &RFRD
%HDQV´ $JULFXOWXUDO (QJLQHHULQJ ,QWHUQDWLRQDO WKH &,*5 (MRXUQDO 0DQXVFULSW QXPEHU 9RO ;,-XO\

$6KDUPD &5 &KHQDQG 19/DQ³6RODUHQHUJ\GU\LQJV\VWHPVDUHYLHZ5HQHZDEOHDQG6XVWDLQDEOH
(QHUJ\5HYLHZV´9ROQRSS±
'/DVLV &RPSDUDWLYH5HVHDUFKRI(IIHFWVRI'U\LQJ0HWKRGVRQ4XDOLW\RI&RFRD%HDQV ,QWHUQDWLRQDO-RXUQDO
RI(QJLQHHULQJ5HVHDUFKDQG7HFKQRORJ\,-(5,661YROVWHGLWLRQ
$'&KDXGKDULDQG636DOYH³$5HYLHZRI6RODU'U\HU7HFKQRORJLHV´,QW-RI5HVHDUFKLQ$GYHQW7HFK

87RVKQLZDODQG65.DUDOH ³$UHYLHZSDSHURQ6RODU'U\HU´,QWHUQDWLRQDO-RXUQDORI(QJLQHHULQJ5HVHDUFK
DQG$SSOLFDWLRQV,-(5$9RO,VVXH
7 $NOLOX DQG $ $VVHID ³([SHULPHQWDO $QDO\VLV RI 3RWDWR 6OLFHV 'U\LQJ &KDUDFWHULVWLFV XVLQJ 6RODU
'U\HU´-RXUQDORI$SSOLHG6FLHQFHV
6)'LQD)+1DSLWXSXOX+$PEDULWD ³6WXG\RQHIIHFWLYHQHVVRIFRQWLQXRXVVRODUGU\HULQWHJUDWHGZLWK
GHVLFFDQWWKHUPDOVWRUDJHIRUGU\LQJFRFRDEHDQV´&DVH6WXGLHVLQ7KHUPDO(QJLQHHULQJ±
070002-7
0(*+0DKPRXG³'HVLJQ,PSOHPHQWDWLRQDQG7HVWLQJRIDQ,QGLUHFWVRODUSRWDWRGU\HU5HFHQW$GYDQFHV
RQ(QHUJ\DQG(QYLURQPHQW´3URFHHGLQJVRIWKHWK,QWHUQDWLRQDO&RQIHUHQFHRQ(QHUJ\ (QYLURQPHQW((

$7*DUDYDQG56KDKLQDQG$.H\KDQL³0DWKHPDWLFDOPRGHOLQJRIWKLQOD\HUGU\LQJNLQHWLFVRIWRPDWR
LQIOXHQFHRIDLUGU\HUFRQGLWLRQV´-$SSO6FL7HFKQRO±
2<DOGL]&(UWHNLQ+%8]XQ³0DWKHPDWLFDOPRGHOOLQJRIWKLQOD\HUVRODUGU\LQJRIVXOWDQDJUDSHV´(QHUJ\
±
97.DUDWKDQRV9*%HOHVVLRWLV³$SSOLFDWLRQRIDWKLQOD\HUHTXDWLRQWRGU\LQJGDWDRIIUHVKDQGVHPLGULHG
IUXLWV´-RXUQDORI$JULFXOWXUDO(QJLQHHULQJ5HVHDUFK±
$$\HQVX³'HK\GUDWLRQRIIRRGFURSVXVLQJDVRODUGU\HUZLWKFRQYHFWLYHKHDWIORZ´6RODU(QHUJ\±

(.$NSLQDU³'HWHUPLQDWLRQRIVXLWDEOHWKLQOD\HUGU\LQJFXUYHPRGHOIRUVRPHYHJHWDEOHVDQGIUXLWV´-RXUQDO
RI)RRG(QJLQHHULQJ±
$)XGKROL0<2WKPDQ0+5XVODQ0<DK\D$=DKDULPDQG.6RSLDQ³7KH(IIHFWVRI'U\LQJ$LU
7HPSHUDWXUHDQG+XPLGLW\RQ'U\LQJ.LQHWLFVRI6HDZHHG´5HFHQW5HVHDUFKLQ*HRJUDSK\*HRORJ\(QHUJ\
(QYLURQPHQWDQG%LRPHGLFLQH:RUOG6FLHQWLILFDQG(QJLQHHULQJ$FDGHP\DQG6RFLHW\:6($6&RUIX

$%RXUGRX['/L$5DMNRYLF'HYOLHJKHUH)DQG8\WWHQGDHOH0³3HUIRUPDQFHRI'U\LQJ7HFKQRORJLHV
WR(QVXUH0LFURELDO6DIHW\RI'ULHG)UXLWVDQG9HJHWDEOHV´&RPSUHKHQVLYH5HYLHZVLQ)RRG6FLHQFHDQG)RRG
6DIHW\9ROXPH,VVXH
070002-8
Real time simulation application to monitor the stability limit of power system
Hartono and Ming-Tse Kuo


!

! " ! " # $ "
" " # ! # $ ! "
$ ! !
# " $ %
& ' ( ))*+ & , ' - ))*+ &" ./
&# * ))*+ &# - ))* 0 " " #
" 1 ))2 1 .# ))3 ) 4 ))1 ) &# ))1
" ! # "
" # ! #
# ! " !! 5 " 5
/$ $ ! ! 67 # ! " #
87% / $ # ! # 9: "$ # "
67 $ " 87% 9:
# # " ! # " "/
" # $ # $ ! "
# # $ ! ;;; *< = 6" &
# $ ! ;;; *< " # 87% "
> 87% / ! $ # # !
# # # !" ! !
! # " 5 # ?
9 *: # ! "/ " !
# ! # " ?&@. " #
# ! ? # "/ !
# # A7% ?&@. ! "
! ! " ! # $ #
$ ! ! ;;; *< "
!
! " ! "
# ! " #
! # $ " #/
$ " " # ! $ #
$ B % & ' ( ))*+ & , ' - ))*+
&" ./ &# * ))*+ &# - ))* 0
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 070003-1–070003-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985530
070003-1
$ 1 ))2 .# 1 ))3 4 ) ))1 &# ) ))1 6$
" ! # !
" # " ! #
"#""" $
%

> # ! " # ! "
# ! "/ " "! !
!! $ # ! " #
C
&$ "' " "/ #
& " ! # " C " @ DA) 6)

# "/ DA) 6) ! #
# $ !
# ! @ ! ! "/
" / A !! $ " $ " 6 # "
" ! + "$ # ! @
# #
&$ "( . ! ;;; *< #

"/ " ! ! ;;; *< #
# # $ ! ! # !
070003-2
;;; *< # " 9*: ;;; *< # " 8 # <
$ 3 DC

)"% &!!
**

# ! " !! 5 "
5 /$ $ ! ! 67 # ! "
# 87% / $ # ! # 9:
"$ # " 67 "
87% 9:
! # $ ! ;;; *< # # 87% "
> 87% $ $ # #
! # # # # ! !
! # " 5 # ? 9 *:
# ! ! " "/ !
# ! # "

*
C " ! " # !
? / ! " # # "
C *
&$ "+ ! #
% 8 # # ! ! # ! "
" $ " " !"

⎛
α ⎞
" =
− ⎜ ( # + $ ) − ∑ # + ÷ +
% ⎝ = % ⎠

⎛

α ⎞ ⎛ α
α⎞ D
+∑
− ⎜ # + ÷ −⎜ + & +∑ ÷

= % ⎝ % ⎠ ⎝ % = % ⎠
070003-3
! $ # ! "/
# ! " # 87% "
$ !"
> $ ! # " # ! $ "
# # !"

Δ" = " − " = " + ∑ " − − "
= D
= " # "
Δ" " " "
= ( ) = + ∑ − − = )
= D*
$ $ 5 D

! 9*: = #
# $ # ! 8 !" D

( ) = ( ) + ∑ ( ) − = )
= D(
? $ 6 $ ! 5 D*

! $ 8 ! $ %
% 6 8 D
A 6 DA 6
! # !

)"$)
= $ !" " # !
" # " " ! #
" # "
" .E% ! .E' .=' > "
D "
"
! +
• / # ! # ! ! $ F B G H B I BJ B !
$ " $ $ $ "
! $ " # ? $ $
! F B G H B I BJ B ! " = $ # H
$ ! H B J B ! .&. !
! .&..+
• % .&.. ! # # " #

• C $ 6 G ) D G
$ ! A DA 6

# ! # ! $ +
• $ ! 6 " K6 B $ A 5 .
$ ! A ! L)+
• DA M 6
D G N
" DA 6
# $
! "/ "
070003-4
&,"&"""+-"," . " %.
@ # ! $ ?&@. # !
;;; *< " " $ "
! ! " C (
&$ "/ 6 ! !
!" $ ! !"

"/ # ! !
" " "
D
" "/ " = !
"/ ! $ # " # ! "
$ " C 2
&$ "0 '" !
!" " O " O " "/
$ " # B $ # !
C 5 " *- D*) I B*<)
0' "/ O " C 3
070003-5
&$ "1 # D" # *-

! 5 ! $ " ()) 0'H *- " $
" C 1 $ #
&$ "2 # D" # *-

! $ *-
!!
?&@. " # # ! 5 ? "/
# ! # # .A7% ?&@. !
" ! ! ! " ! #
$ # $ ! ! ;;; *< "

! $ ?&@. $ $ 8
" "/ #
$ " "
! # B ?&@. 5 " ! !
"/ " ! $ ! " ! $ #
! $
! #B # # 0 # !
0 # 8 C
# ! # "/ " " &'.'
! ! " # ! "
#
070003-6
"&""!"
E & D))1
& $ # $ ! " & 0 )2
% $ ! . E
'! P PO @/ P " ;
# ! ! (! )! (
! ' ! *+,-*+. ./0* 1 /

! ) ( ! 2,. ./0'3!
* , $ '# D))1
& 6" & & 6#
070003-7
One step transesterification process of sludge palm oil (SPO) by using deep eutectic
solvent (DES) in biodiesel production
Renita Manurung, Debbie Aditia Ramadhani, and Siti Maisarah


! "

#
$%&
'

('

)

) )
)$**)%&
+
,'+

)
$
+$-

)

)
%&. / -'
0
)

)1

)2
)!
)

-'

(
+3

)
'
)

)4
'
)5
0
)6' -+'
) "6
'
) !

3 ' '
+

**)%&
'
'4"15 6/ -
+

)
)')7

$)

)'

)

)
)
3

)
384" ' '2956'55""6)

))
5
)-)!6 )6

)
4
)!

!"# !
:' )
+) )

)

+

; -
)

+

+ )

)
))
+ <=3

+

'

3
) ; '3
+

+ )'
))'

,'+
'

)

)
'

)
7,

)
'
;:+

)

7)
0+
'
+) ','+

> $%&

+)
')

<1= )

)%&-)) $%&-
3 ))0

)
+
)
' ' >
> %&'
)

+
3**
%&+
0

<9=3
**)%&
'99;496)**

<!=%&
7

'

1" /)
) %&

)
'

)

6))7
<9= 3
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 070004-1–070004-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985531
070004-1

)%&
'
)
'
%&
16)
// %&+
)

1441 9'%& ""! <"=3
)
%&'

+ )7)

#
) '+

)))
))
> # +

'

;0) /

'

$ ;
1!
<8=*

0' )
0 +'
)

7& & 1 &0
<4=
#
+
)7 +)

+

3
'

) ; ')
'
;
.
7
.
.+
)
>
)

,

);
'

7)

'

+))' ;)
)
> <1=

)

)
'
;

7

)

)
)
(<2=/

)
+
)
'

<=
)7
$*-

;
<5=3+

0

0

3
'7)

)

)
)')
)+)

"6$'?''
+16$+?+ '
)'
%

'

+)
0+ '
+

)
''

@
)
)7
)
)
)
)

)

) )
<4=3)
'

)> )
> )

> ) )) '

)
3

)> )

>
)>
A
)

+ )
+

+ )
))7 )

) 3

)

> )

7
+
) )
'+

)
0 )

) )

+
+

)

'

+)
)< =
$" %!$&
$

$
$52 6 '
>
)
;
'
0

0 $586 '
>
)

7 $%&'
)
%3%:/@
070004-2
$'

'

1'
00
'
2 )
!
)

> '

%&'' )
%3%:/@ ')
'
'+

'

) 1 BC9 B )
1 $'
> ) ** '

)
&$&";!
0"
)%&'''
) + D)+)> +
)586
'

(
)

'

0 $ ;9
E )'
'
'
'
0$ ;9
)1C9
)3')
%&
'
3**%&'

)

+
>
+&";!
⎛ !
$9 × !
× 1" 8 ⎞
6 " = ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ $ ⎠ $
#

3

)
'
"D)7'
!

) 0 > 1"'

)4
11" 1"
0 -'
)

0
'

)

3
'( F)

)

'
''''3)
'(
+ )

)3
"%! # !
#

/
'

' $%&3**)%&
'

F3'**)%&
%()**%&
!) " # #*+*,

9" D
$1 5
1 1425
$! 29
9 "19 %$8 9!"
! "!"2 %$8 !
" 4"8
$2 "55
8 448" &$2 !25
4 224 D$21 "2!
2 24"1 D$29 1
5 528
$1 !
1 ! -$1
070004-3

**)%&
')**%&'141242
?

')

'2"!8"5
?*

)
))
%&'!216
)'"226
3

)
)
)
'

)
$G
)
$D*

)3)
)
'

)

'
+

) 0$&
$: + $/@)

$*%%<=3
)'

'

)+
0:+

+ )'

'

'

) #'

)'+
)
('

)/ '

)'+'
+

0'

:&0<1=
-

..#
3'
)%& '

)&1;1"
**)%&'

)&";! 31''

**)%&
%/)H
**)%&
#
,
H
1
** 4"15
H

)
)7 H
.

' +
)))

)

)'

+))** H
'
"6
'

)
)
<9 ! "=3

)'

)

**<8=*
'
)7
+'
**
+
#'
**'
96)

)
'
**

( ))

)
))+)
'
<" 4=
/ %&
'

''
$I "6 **
, ' +
**
)

)

#
%&

)7'
+**

( '

)

) -
)

'
**'
)
'
**'#
' '
)
%&
)

)

-*
'
0
)

)
'
)

-'
0
)

)
'
)

-
*

)

0
)

)
'
)' -' )&

*

0
)
' )

) -)
')

'
*
-
)

))
)

)
$*-
'
'

<2=

)

)
))
)

#
070004-4
'

) )

'

)

7'> 7)
'

3

+

))
<5=
$ $ $

. 0"()$3

)%
' -
)F
#-3

)%

' -
) 'F
#-$3

)%
' -
)
F
#-@ $3

)%
' -
) 'F
#-
@
3)
-+

)')

)
'
)

)') )

)
)

)>
> 3

)

.
<1 =3 )-

)
)'

)

'
)
-)
'
+)
'C- -C/
)

'
)

,'+
' )-
+)
'C+
'7
)
'

'

)

#'#10

#
2

-

')

7')
'
/
)
- +
)+

)*1')))

-

. 0"/)-)))F
-
#J%

*1 '')

'

)
-
3 '2956'55""6)

)!6
-
070004-5
3)-

)

) *-
- 0

'*-:&,)
*-

);
))+(

)
)<1= '
))+
'

+ ++')7
'
'** )
)
-
#
' )7
'

)' ) '
)
, ()')7
'
'

+
)

')3
)**
)

)
<4=/
')

)0)
'

> '
'
>

)'
3+

- /
'0
)+
)

)
'
)
'

0
)-)

)

)<11=
#'#10

)

'
)

'
+
0 F

' ' ' H '
'
'

'
H''

)
+<11=*
9')
)
'

)
-
$ $
. 0"3) $3*
#H%
$3*
#H%

*9 '
')
-

)

)
))
3'
'
+> 7 '
'!$)
)'3+
+
)'
'
/' '
'
) '
'7

+ )
3
'
' '
'

+

>

)'
3)'

+ )
)
))
)
'
'**+ ))

))

'

3+)''+
') -

)

-

'
(

)

)
)
)
<1=3
)

'
')-
>

070004-6
#'

*'
3

) > )

>
)
A
)

+ )

+

+ )))7 )

) 3

)

> )
7

+
) )
'+

) 0 )

))

+

+

)

'

+)
)< =39'

)

'-
%3**%&

4
$567(

-
6$? 55""94 ;
! 7?9 28!825 ;
K+! ?1 "55 5C8
*% 8 L9
*
F
6$? I 1
3F
6$? I 1!

6$? !!! I 2

6$? I 1
3

6$? I 1
/
'-
)3/
)-+

'+
'7)

-
)

)

#!#% !
3 )-+

))%&
'+3

+)-)
) 3

)
'

)

'

)
>
')

'
)'
3'2956'
)55""63

)-+

))%&

'
')7
'

#8!-%0$!
3
' 77'K--:/3-K/K3/)
)
)

.
"."!#
F' 3 %
) # *
H 7 & *
)) /
*
+' /
M
)' -
3$" 51;5"$1 !
1 N :
M G /+ ) + *
3
%
)# *
%&$%&-(3

)#+

-

$#-/
/G+
$//G$1 9
9 :H) ,DD:J @ 5;%
)
% &M
)
(/$ 55;1 1$1 1
! 3G D
H + -
))**
%&H$
&G /M
-
$539!4!;!42$1 5
070004-7
" F '3 %%#
/
' #%7.
37%
J7
$1 !
8 :
N M -+ )+)
3-()
-;##)
%&$%&#

3 2"4;5$1 9
4 F # 3 K%
*# 0 +/&)#@-(
:+
' -
+' :(9 !!4C!8!
$1 "E / K
(( :: $%(5 9!"8;9!4 $1 1
2 K( *. , /:) - +)
3+) %
&;##
%
)3;(918C111$1
5 K( #
*. , /:) %
)F
+)

# G % # - +
G
) / 3>
/ D

((;9 59C55
$1 1
/ #
O / 3
Q # A
%

3 G+
) .;
: $1
D* J (( MMK #7
N /) )*
:;-&)
#%

3-+
%

#
$1 "
1 ,
*
%
)A %

)
#%
& J
+%
'F
-
3
@36 $1 !
9 )
MH % H @+
F
*7
#

'-
F
/$1 5
! K33 K3D -)))*
* H
;+&#
%

) -

G+
$1
" :
K(( #N %
#)%&

)D-

$
G+
37$1 8
8 %@ MD@
:

+'*-

* ;<9;5$1
4
) %D
-&;N %
)#+-)
H7&G/D-
M
RRR$1 1 F D H
, 7 3 .3 R'N $ /7< 8!4;8"1$1 "
2 F J N7
K
3

) ) @ & '
-

()K* %

)--
-
/9981;948$1 5
5 ,M# K
)/
)*
H$1
1 / K
(( :: )3)
3%
))

#-
;;9!195;!1"$1
1 ##*
S ,F@
3-+ G
*D%% %->
-
-#%
G+
*
M

11 F' :@( A
-

7

)
/) )#

3(=/ 892";895$1
070004-8
Profitability and sustainability of small - medium scale palm biodiesel plant
Maharani Dewi Solikhah, Agus Kismanto, Agus Raksodewanto, and Yoga Peryoga


!
"#$"

!
"#!!
$ %# &'()# *+'(# & ,'(-!.&
% # !$# /& # *0 (((((1 %2# %
# & & &2
&&!$&# & & % 3 &
# !4
2 & # . & ,2
&
# # . &%% !$%&
# & % 3 & # &
!$ &
%# % 3 & # && &&%5(16
22 !$
&& # % && #
& %#

% 7 % &! % # %&
&&
%% &%& & !$ &&
%# %% & #
& & & %

& /% & % 3
& # # & # !.
&& 3 & #

# %# # % & & 2 &2 &
'((% # !$ % % && & .%8!-8)5-!5')!

+ # & %2# % & % % !.& % & & 6 '
%&#!.9 % & # &
# %& :;!
+ &# / %& &% & #
< !$
%# &. & *6
22 ! ! % + & = 6 *+6 & +
& 7& *7!$ & # & %6 22
& 7!!
$ %# &'()# *+'(# & ,'(-.
% % > & ?! '1'(5 :';!
&. & @' '(A& -!A %
# %# !$# /& # *0(((((1
%2# %# & & &2
&&!
$ & % # # # & % % >
& ?!@'@B1'(5:@; 6& CD'5 &C&!$&# &
& % 3 & # & %%& & 2 !4
2 & #
. & ,2 # # .
&%% !$%&# & % 3 &
# &
!
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 070005-1–070005-8; doi: 10.1063/1.4985532
070005-1
!"#$$& + & %66
$& %# % 3 & # && &&%5(
16 22 #&
# % !
#%
&
$ &&
% %

• .2
%/%&
%& !
• 7&
&& %# % / %( !
• & )!
• 9 '5)!
• D & & !@!5((!
• >& 5) !
• ?# % @(( !
'

$ && %#
2 7 % &

% & && % & !$ & %6 7% & &&
& 7!'!$%
#& & & # %
6 +:@;%,'(A '(-!
&&7!' 2& % 7
6& !$# &
6& B5)&& !$ % %6&
%% & #

&
& % & ## & %
!
$ & %6 22 %7!'
2 2 67!@!$ 6
&
& !8!A81*
9!>&&
&& %2 &
$# & & %
& &!
&&
#
%# &% 76& '@
&2 !$&%

@((1%'(( 2 !7& A

%6# %6 & # &
& #
&!& 5
& # 7& # '(5 7!'!
070005-2
!"#($ & %6 7&& & !
)#$ & &*+,
& & -

& $ ( . / *

7 6 6 7
& 2 6 BB!55) B'!) ((!(() ((!(() -(!(()
& %
'(( '(( '(( E( '((
!"#.!+ 6 6 7F& 2 6& !
070005-3
&
&%5( # &
# %$!GH. &

& &%& '35
# %HG !
& '
# & & # %7#& @35
#
&# % &! & ( %

& ! &&%& # &2
&
&# $# '!
)#( & &*+,
& &

- & $ ( . / *

7 6 6 7
& @5(( 5BI5 5B-I( 5B-I( 5B-I(
$7 A-'5 A-'5 A-'5 A-'5 A-'5
J# 'I(( 'I(( 'I(( 'I(( 'I((
2 KCD I('5 I('5 I('5 I('5 I('5
0
& % * %&& &!
# & !$
&% %# $# @!
)#. 1&2 1 3&,21 4

1
$ ( . / *

7 6 6 7
5-A!( 5I@!A 5('!B 5('!B 5I@!A
& !5 B!A B!- B!- B!A
& 8I!' (-!- 5B!B 5B!B (-!-
6 & & / @@! 5B!8 5B!8 @@!
$6$J I5'!I B(A!( 8A'!' 8A'!' B(A!(
)
. L - # &% *& 2*@&
*@&& *@ *@ #L & *
**!$ &
& & !

&&
&
! (-1 ! 8(@1K ! !B'51 @ ! I!(((1@
&2 ! &&
#% # % & !
070005-4
&
+ &
%% & # &! $ % # . %
&& % #& *$ F M&N &&
& %%> & ?!@'@B1'(5 7A!&&
%
&#6& &% & -1 1!$ &
% & # & &!+ &
2
&2 # %
&!
!"#/!$ $%+ . %& 7 # * *1

.
&% &
5)% & &!

$

&% ! !# & !+ &
& & &&
6& CD'5 &:@;6& %8!A81!P & &
'!A((1
%
%& % !$
& #
&2
# ## &!
#

>&&
&& # % && # % *.
& #
& ! 2
% & #&
& % %B8) (A)! % # %&
&&
%% &%& & !7 # % # < &&&
.
& !4

2 . 2
# %# !
070005-5
#)
$ % && %& $# @!$#
&
*.B!@()# %& & '@!4
2
7 @ & %
# &
% #2 6! 2
& % & (A)
%6& && .% 8!-)* 7!5!& '
%7 &&
2 !4
2 & & #&Q .# &
-!A-)!$
# & % # # %2 !>9 %& '&#
&& # % 3 #
!6
2 # ## && %& !$ % &
&
9 && & @!
!"#*! 2 %+ !5(1

& @& %6 % &# !$ & %6& @
& & %@((1&
# % & %% #
!4
2 %6& & 2
.%'!55)!$# &
& %)& % # !$ % & A

6&

&!$& &2 .8!-8)!$&&& 2
6
&%# !$ & # &
& & %
& &!
$2 # 2 % % & 7
&

& 5 .5-!5')$ % #= %
& %
# && 2 && %& !

$ &
&%# !$# 5
% &
# % '(( # &2 % &&
2
.%'A!(I)!4
2 % # & '((# #
&
& % # %% & &%@((1

!>&&
.%8!-8)& % # !
7 #2 && & && 2 !$
%&
& &%% & && %& !
070005-6
)#/#
&*+,
& $ ( . / *
' ! !
!5 - &
& @5(( 5BI5 5B-I( 5B-I( 5B-I(
$7 A-'5 A-'5 A-'5 A-'5 A-'5
J# 'I(( 'I(( 'I(( 'I(( 'I((
2 KCD I('5 I('5 I('5 I('5 I('5
< & R 85( 85( 85( 85( 85(
$9 5(@( -II IA8I IA8I IA8I
&.& I- '@5 '-' '-' '-'
K *@ @(@( @IA8 88- 88- 88-
*6-*.7 88-687 6/-*+* 6/-*+* 6/-*+*
&)

)& 6 BB!-I) B'!) (() (() -(!(()
) ((!(() ((!(() B8!5) B8!5) ((!(()

C$1 II5 I((I IA@5 II( A-55
& 1 -55 I8I I-@ I-@ I8I
D 1 8( '5 BA BA '5
J#R1 IB IB IB IB IB
J% & & 1 '( I' B5 B5 I'
6-7/9 6-$79 6-*7* 6-.++ *-6$8

+ *J1 -5(( -5(( -5(( -5(( -5((
P & *$1 '@'' / ''-A ''-A /
+ & *1J B5A- B5A- B5A- B5A- B5A-
P & & *1 'A(( 'A(( 'A(( 'A(( 'A((
##:
?S ''5BB B'-8 58B @(-@@ ''I(55
+ !@B( !'AB !(-8 !@I5 @!-A5
#& * A!A- A!B' 5!-B A!5( !8@
.* B!@() -!A-) '!55) 8!-8) 5-!5')
)#* 1

1 -&,
>L 6C'5DC& B@5@ 'A!(I)
>L 6C'5D B(B' 8!-8)
070005-7
)
$ %# # % 3 & # &&
&&%5(16 22 #&
# & %
# && !$ %# %% & #
& &
& %
& /% & % 3 & # # &
# !.
&& 3 & #
# %# #
% & & 2 &2 & '(( %
# !$ % % && & .%8!-8)5-!5')!
#!## #
! SP ,!$ +&% > 7 !: !;P! ,!SP ,!
!$ + 4#!. 6 '((A!'5/@@!
'! %%> & ?!'1'(5
%
&

&
%
' $()(* +

. # > #
?@'$'((8$ %$?++?#
*+% #++J!
@! & %%> & ?!@'@B1'(5
,*

. 4. ++?#
*+% & , ++$ , ++
!
070005-8
The influence of chicken eggshell powder as a buffer on biohydrogen production from
rotten orange (Citrus nobilis var. microcarpa) with immobilized mixed culture
Astrilia Damayanti, Sarto, Siti Syamsiah, and Wahyudi B. Sediawan


! " #$ %

cd

! " #

"$ % & "!
'
(
! ))* #

!

c d

!"

!" !
&"
#!$%!%!!&!%
!%

% '
+ $
!!!
() * +,-

$ $ %
% . % /0 / 12
!
#!
'345.% ()6/12 #
7
8
!%9':$!$!% (!!&
%%
' ; +
%
! !!& %% ! //" $ % !!&
+!(6!%<*#
%!

!!&<)(/
1
.2
!(<

1
.2 #!%!!& ,)
1. 2 $
%4%%!!&$!%
* )(
1.2 #!%$'.
!!& <9

!%!!&! 9#=!
'.-!
%
!!&!!!!!4%!!&
!!!!!!!!#%!!&
%%%%!$!!%
%
'()'
+!$!!' <(>? 2
%!

!@ A+!!%
%%&@A
3'
+$
!!%
!%B
6

! * < @(A +$
% % ! !
$

!!
%'
+$
!!,6
9%
!609%! <(9%% ,6(9%! 0<(9%! 69
%<$%!% !!
%

!%
;!

!%!%

8!
!
!
8!!! @/A
!!!%%
@)A#%
8!
!
%
!%%%

!
!!
4$!%!&
$%%@,A
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 070006-1–070006-7; doi: 10.1063/1.4985533
070006-1
#
!!%
8!%

!!

! 0*9%C(9 @6A3
$!
%%!!
748!
!
!!

!
$%!'.-#%
%!!
.-
&
$
!!!!%!!%
!
8!() *+<−,

+%//@0A#

+
%
! %
%% ! # !! % %%
!
%%
!4$!%%!!
%
!
!!'D+3 (!
!@ *A@ AD!!%
!3( !@ A
7@ (A!%

8%%@ <AD!!
%
!!&!!0()9%3 ( @ /A#!
!
!!%
&@ )A
%!!&
B!!
* <@(A#%!!&%%
!%(:/*
!!+)2,<(@ <A
B $ ! @ ,A ! % $ % '
+ $
!! !
!

8 !
7
2!$!%%%#!
%
%!%%%%%
!!&+
%!$
'.!
.-!%
%'
+
$
!! # ! !$ $ %
%
8 !

72!$!
$&&*&'($+(,
" #

'!!66669%!<, 9%!!$
!'4!&7E#
%!
$
$
%,(6/<
2 *)()/!
(2 ,<
!$#7
?+
$%6),9%
(,(9%
!
"
4%E!%
!!%. /
%

.$%' /0 /1 2 .
!
'345()6/12 .'# @ ,A
&* #
4
' 5'
0 ,/
*)*0 ((
00 ()
60/( <
345 < 6 *
# !
% !

%
%

$8
@ ,A
070006-2

!& * *%D8

(/
-
%
(%!!&
$ %

48!%
!!%%F&
B
!!!$8
@ ,A E!
8!
!%!
@ ,A
1%!!&%
!

8#
8!%<

%

5
!

$8
@ ,AD8
1%
8!
!

%%<
" #

/*
1%
8!!!%<***
% *
#$
!*0,9':$D!$!'4!&
8
9':$
%!$!% #
8
G!* 4 %
%%(*
%
&

-
!%
8$8
@ ,A **
1
%/*
1!!%)*9(*9 *9
8!#+%
,#%
%D %(
()%!!#
%+%%!%%%.-
%7%E$8
%
!
&'&*-&*$+(,
#!%
!!#
+7
!

7>6=
!!$!
%!
42/
3
%!
!G!)* ,*,*!$D
!% **&55
,)*
+* .-

'!!!!!!!7!
'+5/60*?

%!
!G!)* )* /* !$%

7!(
%!
!&--5+
!+

+
'E%!B
!%.
!!

@ 6A
,)*,&'((,),,'

& + .
% + $ %
!
%! ! ! +
%! !$%
!

@ 0A # %! % !!&
+%
!-
070006-3
./)0+%
%
%!!&' !!&
'345
- %

%!!&%%!!
+ // % $ ! % '
4345%%!%+(6$+<
#%%
%1!@*A!$$3('E= @ A
3(H+H⇔HH+3(C '
!!1!%!!!

!!
$
%
!!!
B!%
!+ H
!
$%%
!!
!=!%!
!"!

& +/.
#%
%
%' '345!!&
$-(!
%%
%
#
./)1#%
%
%' '
345
-%
%
%%!!&
%%<)(/
1
.2
%
(<
070006-4

1
.2 %!!!%3 %
!%
!
@ *A
&*1#!
%%
%
+!!
#'
1
.2
5!'9 '
1
.2
<)(/ /6( 0,
<*0* 6/, )0
(,/* (60/ <)
<<,* 0 < <*,6
345 (<* <<06 * )(
#!%'

1
. 2 %!!&'
,)$'345!!&$* )(+
%
%!!&

!!&
-
%'%

!!$!8
!!4$8!%
I
&%

@ A

& 2 ,

#$!%!!

8!!!&
<9!!&$ 9'#(
&*3.;!B
748+-

%;3

'

12 %'

12 .!'9

/0 / <(*) ,*
/0 / <<<< <6,
/0 / <(00 /)(
/0 / <,/ 0)6
345 ()6/ ( 66
#($!%.%% !!&

<9%!'345%!!&$
9#$!
%
%%
' !'345(
<
!$.!
!%

<*9@,A%
#

!%.&!#
%!!

!%%@<A

& 2.&

# .- ! %
! - ( - (

! %
%
% !! ! 5! ! %
%
%%!!&!!!!!%

!!& (,
0

%!!&
B%
!!!!!<
#5'E=!%
!!(
#5'E=(%!!!!!
!!!@A
070006-5
./)3!%.-'
12 %!!&'
!!&'345+!!!!"+!!"+5!!
)+ 3)H+3J+(33+H3H<+H<#5 '

)+ 3)J(+,33+H3H+H(#5 '(
+
!
!!%!!!'E=!!
'E=(B!!!!!

!'E=<@(A
)+ 3)H+J+(+33+H+3 '<
'*),'
+%!!&! /%

+%(#%

!!& *

!!&4$!
%
!!&6

!!& %!!

8!!%!!&!
!!&
#!%
%
'!!!!
!!&
!!&!%
'!!!!!
&4'5*(/$'
& 8 ! > % + E! 4 %
;!#!+E!%;!%B%%!%&
B5'5K5# K>4 * ) #!! ! % D!
- 4 5 - G #

=D$!
.',
4L B?+E33/6M)('**6
.4414.;>4&5D
B?+E 36
) <0M) /)'**0
( -3 ,- . (+
! /01 2

,3 ,-
,' -4

5
'* (
< 5G4D;4;E78 (/M < '* /
/ DLD

6

7

,
';5#N-!>1* <
) FFOFO#!091(6*/M(6*0'*
070006-6
, F
& 4D
' 6
' ,68 ,, '# # * <
51EM(<
6 E47&#&#33 ) M )6' 00*
0 +-+1#!816,M0('**
* F1-1P15+#!03:</M/('* (
>LEB2!&?
#!!6;,0M60' 060
?RO4;33 *((M<*'* /
( 4LIB?5!090*6M0 '*
< % 5! %
48 -
5
4
#
%
!E-!EK$>G4* /
/ ?D7#7+25
+-!4 M *'* /
) 5+??&F?LLB4>1EE4&?E$! 0 <()M << '**,
,

'B55*(** <BB
%!%
!4E'B4E )00
B* /
6 5+4%E8
%*E'
!5!+
! 006
0 ?F2+FL>;#?1?4!! 6 (*M (/'**6
* 5&1?
!5!#S%B'<E+-
DF&
**6(,,
L
% 5! 51E E '# # * <
51EM(<(
4 ?5&;?4!B* M0'*
( L L
8

9

' B 57 * /
,*
070006-7
Analysis of wind energy potential for agriculture pump in mountain area Aceh Besar
Ahmad Syuhada, Muhammad Ilham Maulana, and Zahrul Fuadi

Analysis of Wind Energy Potential for Agriculture Pump in
Mountain Area Aceh Besar
Ahmad Syuhada1,a), Muhammad Ilham Maulana1 and Zahrul Fuadi1
1
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, Syiah Kuala University
Jl. Tgk. Syech Abdul Rauf No. 7, Darussalam Banda Aceh 23111, INDONESIA
a)
Corresponding author: syuhada_mech@yahoo.com
b)
ilhammaulana@unsyiah.ac.id
Abstract. In this study, the potential of wind power for agricultural pump driver in Saree mountainous area of Aceh
Besar is analyzed. It is found that the average usable wind speed is 6.41 m/s, which is potential to produce 893.96 Watt of
electricity with the wind turbine rotor diameter of 3 m. This energy can be used to drive up to 614 Watt of water pump
with static head of 20 m to irrigate 19 hectare of land, 7 hours a day. HOMER analysis indicated the lowest simulated
NPC value of USD 10.028 with CoE of USD 0.717 kWh. It is also indicated that the wind has potential to produce 3452
kWh/year with lifetime of 15 years.
INTRODUCTION
Nowadays, rapid growth of population in Indonesia causes a constant decrease of agricultural lands because
there are switched to residential or industrial use. As a result, new agriculture lots were opened in rural area
especially in mountainous area where elevation is high. Here, the main problem faced is the method to irrigate the
land. Farmers rely on small rivers or wells built around the hillside area and, either manually or mechanically,
supply the water to the field. The cost of fuel to power the diesel engine for the pump is high, mainly because of the
transportation cost. On the other hand, electricity has not been available in the area. This lowers the efficiency and
increases the production cost, leading to low productivity.
In order to solve the problem, it is necessary to explore new energy resources in the area that have potential to
become an alternative energy source to drive the pump. One of them is wind energy.
In literature, there are many researches conducted for wind power plant. Here, it is necessary to conduct an
analysis in order to obtain a suitable wind power system applicable to certain particular area. Wind turbine systems
are preferable because of its simple in maintenance [1,2]. Hamdani et al., [3] has proposed a design of wind power
system, manufactured, and evaluated its performance as a driver for a water pump. The turbine has blade diameter of
4 m, tower elevation of 7 m and operates at an average wind speed of 4.5 m/s. The system has ability to produce 0.8
cubic water per hour. In other work, Hamdani et al., [4] has also installed and evaluated a wind turbine system with
output power of 10 kW. From the measurement conducted within 6 months operation, the highest power recorded
was 5.5 kW, which was achieved at the wind speed of 5.5 – 6 m/s. In the design, the diameter of rotor was 8 m and
the turbine was installed at an elevation of 15 m.
In this study, the potential of wind energy power system to drive the water pump for water supply of agriculture
land in Saree mountainous area was conducted. The infestation cost analysis was conducted using HOMER software
[5,6].
The research was conducted in the following steps:
AIP Conf. Proc. 1855, 070007-1–070007-6; doi: 10.1063/1.4985534
070007-1
1. The primary data collected is the wind speed measured at the particular area of interest, which is located in
Saree region, Aceh Besar. The data was collected from the measurement conducted by BMKG SMKP Saree in
the period of January to December 2013. The position of the turbine is 25.5 m from the main road at an
elevation of 20 m from the ground. The schematic diagram of the system is given in Fig. 1.
2. The calculation of the turbine power to obtain the wind energy,
3. The calculation of water power dan pump drive power, and
4. The selection of wind potential to produce approximately 1 kW of electricity power.
FIGURE 1. The schematic design of the wind power plant.
Calculation of the Wind Potential
From the calculation, the wind speed distribution is shown in Fig. 2. It is shown that the minimum wind speed
was recorded in July with the speed of 4.8 m/s while the maximum wind speed was recorded in October which is 8.2
m/s. Therefore, it can be concluded that the wind energy has the potential to produce electricity of 1 kW. The
distribution of wind speed and electricity power is given in Fig. 3.
FIGURE 2. Calculated wind speed distribution in Saree region
070007-2
FIGURE 3. Distribution of average wind speed and average electricity power
Wind Power
Assuming the aerodynamic efficiency of 40%, the average wind power is obtained as 976.93 Watt/m2.
The shaft power can be calculated as the product of shaft efficiency of 80% (0.8) and the wind power, which is
781.54 Watt. This value is an average turbine shaft power for one year. Furthermore, the required electricity power
can be achieved as the product of average shaft power and the electric efficiency of 0.8, i.e. 625.24 Watt. The power
generated by wind turbine is highly affected by the wind density and the wind speed. From the measurement, it is
found that the average wind speed is 6.41 m/s. Thus, the wind power achieved is 893.96 Watt. This power can
produce a 614 Watt input power for the water pump, which is much larger than the designed pump requirement; is
430 Watt.
TABLE 1. Result of power analysis for pump

Electricity Power
Water Power Shaft Power Pump Drive Power
(Output power)
146.7 195.6 260.80 372.57
220.05 293.4 391.20 558.86
242.06 322.7 430.32 614.74
Design and Calculation of Pump
Assuming the shaft efficiency of 0.75, the waterpower and the pump drive power are summarized in Table 1.
From the calculation, it is obtained that the wind power of 893.96 Watt can be used to drive a water pump of 450
to 625 Watt. With the wind speed of 6.41 m/s, the turbine is assumed to operate about 7 hours a day. The actual
capacity is 50 ltrs/min so that the design capacity is achieved as the actual capacity divided by the volumetric
efficiency (Qactual/ηVolumetrik). The capacity of 50 liter/min chosen is 50% of the water source capacity. During dry
season, the capacity of water in the source is about 1.8 liters/s or 108 liters/min. Therefore, for average of 7 hours a
day, the water that can be supplied to the field is about 21 m3.
The land is planned to be use for tomatoes, corn, onion, and chili field. These kinds of plants required about 0.8
m3 per day of water to grow and produce properly. In this case, it can be assumed that 21 m 3 of water can be used to
supply about 19 hectare of field. This calculation is based on the assumption of 25% losses in the distribution and
1.1 m3/hectare/day requirement.
However, this calculation is for one-year continuous supply. If the production time period of the plants is less
than 6 months, the area that can be supplied can be increased to 30 hectares.
070007-3
Simulation of the wind turbine system using HOMER
For the measurement it was found that the height from the water source to the reservoir is 25 m with the debit of
1.8 ltrs/s. The input load is the total required electric power for one year, which includes the main and additional
required power, as shown in Fig. 4. Based of the simulation, the monthly average electric production is given in Fig.
5. The comparison of daily load requirement of the pump and the daily electric production as the result of HOMER
simulation is given in Fig. 6.
FIGURE 4. Electrical load requirements for one year
FIGURE 5. Simulated monthly average electric productions
FIGURE 6. Comparison of daily electric requirement and the production
From Fig. 6, it can be seen that from 1 am to 6 am, the wind turbine is not yet in optimum operation condition
but the power it produces is adequate to fulfill the load requirement at the time period. During 7 am to 6 pm, the
generated electric power can increase. However, during 6 pm to midnight, the produced electric power is not
optimum but still can be stored in the battery.
The simulated wind power generator system is illustrated in Fig. 7(a). The simulated design data is input into
HOMER software to achieve an illustration for the energy availability, required electric load, cost, and the size of
power generator system (turbine arrangement, converter, and battery).
070007-4
In the simulation, the average wind speed is 6.41 m/s. The initial investation cost is estimated to be USD 3.025
and the replacement cost is USD 3.205. The operational cost and the maintenance cost is estimated to be USD 250
per year. The turbine and an anemometer can be installed at an elevation of 25.5 m. In this simulation, the
operational time of the system is estimated to be 15 years. Other data of simulation design is given in Table 2.
(a) (b)
FIGURE 7. HOMER simulations. (a) Simulated wind power generator system, (b) Production cost
TABLE 2. Simulation design
Assumed parameter Wind
Total Rated Capacity (kW) 1
Percentage (%) 100%
Capacity Factor (%) 39,4 %
Mean Output (kW) 0,39 kW
Annual Energy (kWh/y) 3,452
Annual Hour of operation 6.478 hr/yr
Based on the result of simulation and the model, a combined energy resource is achieved, consisting of the
component size, system configuration cost, and total NPC. The result is given in Fig. 8.
The optimum configuration system indicated a combination of wind turbine, batteries, and converter. Based on
the simulation, it is obtained that the highest initial investment cost is USD 5.315 with annual operational cost of
USD 369. The total NPC (Net Present Cost) is USD 10.028, the CoE (Cost of Energy) is USD 0.717, and the wind
turbine power production is 3.452 kWh/year.
FIGURE 8. Simulated cost
070007-5
CONCLUSION
An analysis of wind energy potential in Saree region Aceh Besar has been conducted. Based on the simulation
results for 3 m blades wind turbine simulated at an elevation of 25.5 m, the following are concluded:
1. The wind energy in Saree region, Aceh Besar for the simulated turbine design has a potential to produce
annually 3.452 kWh electric powers at average of 6.41 m/s wind speed.
2. The maximum speed of the win occurs during September to October with the speed of 8.17 m/s while the
minimum occurs in July with the speed of 4.81 m/s.
3. The turbine has a potential to produce output power of 893.96 watt, giving an effective power of 614 watts.
This effective power can be used to drive a 430-Watt of water pump 7 hours a day to supply 21-m3 water to the
agriculture field.
4. From HOMER simulation, the lowest Net Present Cost (NPC) obtained is USD 10.028 and the Cost of Energy
(CoE) is USD 0.717 per kWh
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
The authors acknowledge the contribution of all the students at the Graduate School of Mechanical Engineering,
Syiah Kuala University in this research, especially to Ms. Meliagrina and Mr. Fazri.
REFERENCES
1. Hau, 2000, Wind -Turbines, Fundamentals, Technologies, Application, Economics, Springer, Verlag Berlin
Heidelberg
2. Heier, 1998, Grid Integration of Wind Energy Conversion Systems, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, West Sussex.
3. Hamdani, Irwansyah, 2010, Wind Power Generator for Small Scale Ice Factory for Economy Development at
Rural Area in Aceh, Indonesia, Journal of Energy & Environment, No 1 V, 6-8, ISSN: 1985-7462.
4. Hamdani, Irwansyah, 2012, Wind Power Generator for Small Scale Fish Processing Unit at Coastal Area in
Aceh, Indonesia, The Proceedings of 2nd Annual International Conference Syiah Kuala University.
5. Anhui Hummer Dynamo, Co, LTD. 2010. Manual 10 kW Hummer wind turbine. Anhui Province, China.
6. Homer Energy. Available at HOMER ENERGY. info@homerenergy.com. 2334 Broadway, Suite B, Boulder,
CO 80304, USA.
070007-6

The 3rd ICETIA (2016)

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

The 3rd ICETIA (2016)

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Preface: The 3rd International Conference on Engineering, Technology and Industrial

Citation: AIP Conference Proceedings 1855, 010001 (2017); doi: 10.1063/1.4985445

Articles you may be interested in

Analysis of loss of time value during road maintenance project

Effective production control in an automotive industry: MRP vs. demand-driven MRP

Replacement model of city bus: A dynamic programming approach

Citation: AIP Conference Proceedings 1855, 010001 (2017); doi: 10.1063/1.4985445

Articles you may be interested in

Analysis of loss of time value during road maintenance project

Effective production control in an automotive industry: MRP vs. demand-driven MRP

Replacement model of city bus: A dynamic programming approach

Citation: AIP Conference Proceedings 1855, 020001 (2017); doi: 10.1063/1.4985446

Articles you may be interested in

Analysis of loss of time value during road maintenance project

Effective production control in an automotive industry: MRP vs. demand-driven MRP

MATERIALS AND METHOD OF RESEARCH

Explanation of (a) and (b)

FIGURE 1. Physical cross-section of CB with a lot of oil (bulk oil)

Criteria of the Period of Time for an Overhaul against the CB

TABLE 2. Comparison between the standard "ANSI" and "PLN"

Parameters of Dielectric Strength for the Oil of CB¶V

FIGURE 3. Flowchart to measure the value of dielectric strength of oil

FIGURE 5. Schematic diagram WRREWDLQWKHSDUDPHWHUVRIYHORFLW\DQGVLPXOWDQHLW\IRURSHQLQJFORVLQJRIWKH&%¶V

Parameters of Resistance of Insulation, Contacts, and Grounding

Defining Value Defining Value Defining Value

Measuring Value Measuring Value Measuring Value

Comparing Value Comparing Value Comparing Value

Measuring Value > QR Measuring Value < QR Measuring Value < QR

\HV \HV \HV

Good Condition Good Condition Good Condition

end end end

Resistance of the Insulation Resistance of the Contacts Resistance of the Grounding

(i) Measurement againts the value of resistance of insulation

(ii) Measurement againts the value of resistance of contacts

(iii) Measurement againts the value of resistance of grounding

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

Parameters of Dielectric Strength for the Oil of CB

Parameter of Velocity and Simultaneity for Opening/Closing of the Contacts

Citation: AIP Conference Proceedings 1855, 020002 (2017); doi: 10.1063/1.4985447

Articles you may be interested in

Analysis of loss of time value during road maintenance project

Effective production control in an automotive industry: MRP vs. demand-driven MRP

Corresponding authors: a)rusdinur@poliupg.ac.id

Calculation of Power Consumption

FIGURE 2. The layout of the experimental scheme.

Materials and Cutting Tool

TABLE 2. Composition of Materials

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

Cutting force = +13.098 ± 0.079*Cutting Speed + 522.768 *Feed Rate (3)

Citation: AIP Conference Proceedings 1855, 020003 (2017); doi: 10.1063/1.4985448

Articles you may be interested in

Effective production control in an automotive industry: MRP vs. demand-driven MRP

MATERIALS AND METHODS

No. Cases Name of Link road Length (km)

Pre-Construction During Construction

Loss of Time Value of Road

Relationship of Traffic volume and Loss of Time

FIGURE 1. Analysis Framework.

RESULTS AND DISCUSSION

Case/Study area Qp (pcu/day) Vp (km/h)

FIGURE 2. Traffic Volume Qp and Qm in Case S1.

TABLE 3. Factors Occupational Passengers (FOP) for each Vehicle.

Type of vehicles (i) Vehicle Occupancy (FOP)

FIGURE 4. Percentage of LTV Value of Each Type of Vehicles.

FIGURE 5. Schematic diagram WRREWDLQWKHSDUDPHWHUVRIYHORFLW\DQGVLPXOWDQHLW\IRURSHQLQJFORVLQJRIWKH&%¶V

Cutting force = +13.098 ± 0.079Cutting Speed + 522.768 Feed Rate (3)

°r t ct f i1 t 1, if KEEP (1)

Temperature of refrigerant R 134 a í&LQWKHSUHVVXUHRI03DRUEDU